MP Hardware Guide - NCCR Affective Sciences

MP System Hardware Guide
Check BIOPAC.COM > Support > Manuals for updates
Visit BIOPAC’s new Tutorial section at: www.biopac.com/Videos for instructional overviews
The MP Hardware Guide describes how to connect and set up various signal conditioning and
amplifier modules for use with an MP150, MP100, MP36 or MP45 System, and details applications
and uses for the MP System.
To use this guide, navigate to specific pages using the page thumbnail images and bookmark links (left)
or type an entry of interest into the ‘Find’ box.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.
BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
42 Aero Camino, Goleta, CA 93117
Tel (805) 685-0066 | Fax (805) 685-0067
www.biopac.com
09.14.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MP SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
Features
With proper hardware selection and setup, the MP System with AcqKnowledge software can be used for a wide
array of application features. See the AcqKnowledge Software Guide or BIOPAC.COM for descriptions of the
following features. For additional support, or for help with an unlisted application, please contact the BIOPAC
Technical Support Division — an Applications Specialist will be glad to help.
Active Electrodes
Allergies
Amplitude Histogram
Anaerobic Threshold
Animal studies
Auditory Evoked Response
(AER)
Automate Acquisition
Protocols
Automated Data Analysis
Automatic Data Reduction
Autonomic Nervous System
Studies
Biomechanics Measurements
Blood Flow / Blood Pressure
/Blood Volume
Body Composition Analysis
Breath-By-Breath Respiratory
Gas Analysis
Cardiac Output
Cardiology Research
Cell Transport
Cerebral Blood Flow
Chaos Plots
Common Interface
Connections
Connect to MP Systems
Control Pumps and Valves
Cross- and Auto-correlation
Current Clamping
Defibrillation & Electrocautery
Dividing EEG into Specific
Epochs
ECG Analysis
ECG Recordings, 12-Lead
ECG Recordings, 6-Lead
EEG Spectral Analysis
Einthoven’s Triangle
EMG and Force
EMG Power Spectrum
Analysis
End-tidal CO2
Episode Counting
Ergonomics Evaluation
Event-related Potentials
Evoked Response
Exercise Physiology
External equipment,
controlling
Extra-cellular Spike
Migrating Myoelectric
Recording
Complex
Facial EMG
Motor Unit Action Potential
FFT & Histograms
Movement Analysis
FFT for Frequency Analysis
MRI Applications
Field Potential Measurements
Multi-Channel Sleep
Fine Wire EMG
Recording
Forced Expiratory Flow &
Nerve Conduction Studies
Volume
Neurology Research
Gait Analysis
Noninvasive Cardiac Output
Gastric Myoelectric Activity
Noninvasive Electrode
Gastric Slow Wave
Measurements
Propagation
Nystagmus Investigation
Gastrointestinal Motility
Oculomotor Research
Analysis
Off-line ECG Averaging
Hardware Flexibility
On-line Analysis
Heart Rate Variability
On-line ECG Analysis
Heart Sounds
Orthostatic Testing
Histogram Analysis
Peripheral Blood Flow
Imaging Equipment,
Peristaltic (Slow Wave)
Interfacing
Propagation
Indirect Blood Pressure
Planted Tissue
Pressure Volume Loops
Recordings
Psychophysiology
Integrated (RMS) EMG
Pulsatile Tissue Studies
Interface with Existing
Pulse Rate Measurement
Equipment
Pulse Transit Time
Interface with Third-party
Range of Motion
transducer
Real-time EEG Filtering
Invasive Electrode
Real-time EEG Filtering
Measurements
Recurrent Patterns
Ion-selective Micro-electrode
Regional Blood Flow
Interfacing
Relative BP Measurement
Iontophoresis
Remote Monitoring
Irritants & Inflammation
Respiration Monitoring
Isolated Inputs & Outputs
Respiratory Exchange Ratio
Isolated Lung Studies
Rheumatology
Isometric Contraction
Saccadic Eye Movements
Isotonic Contraction
Sexual Arousal Studies
Jewett Sequence
Signal Averaging
Langendorff Heart
Simultaneous Monitoring
Preparations
Single Channel Analysis
Laser Doppler Flowmetry
Single-fiber EMG
Left Cardiac Work
Software-controlled
Long-term Monitoring
Stimulator
Lung Volume Measurement
Somatosensory Evoked
LVP
Response
Median & Mean Frequency
Spectral Analysis
Analysis
Spike Counting
Micro-electrode signal
SpO2 Analysis
amplification
MP Research System | MP System Applications | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 7.25.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
Stand Alone Amplifiers
Standard Operating
Procedures
Startle Eye Blink Tests
Startle Response
Stimulator, softwarecontrolled
Systemic Vascular
Resistance
Template Analysis
Tissue Bath Monitoring
Tissue Conductance
Measurement
Tissue Magnitude & Phase
Modeling
Tissue Resistance &
Reactance
Ussing Chamber
Measurements
Ventricular Late Potentials
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Vestibular Function
Video Capture, Synchronous
Visual Attention
Visual Evoked Response
VO2 Consumption
Volume/Flow Loop
Relationships
Working Heart Preparations
MP Research System | MP System Applications | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 7.25.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
APPLICATION NOTES
BIOPAC has prepared a wide variety of application notes as a useful source of information concerning
certain operations and procedures. The notes are static pages that provide detailed technical information
about either a product or application. A partial list of Application Notes follows.
View or print application notes directly from the “Support” section of the BIOPAC web site
www.biopac.com.
Recording Hardware
004 - MP150 Firmware Compatibility
218 - Hardware API
223 - Physiological Measurement in MRI Systems
230 - Connections for Physiological Signals in an MRI
234 - Virtual Reality / Immersive Environment
235 - Zygomaticus Measures with Pressure Pad vs.
EMG in MRI or fMRI
239 - Send to AcqKnowledge from Vizard via parallel
port
240 - Measurement Computing card setup
241 - Recording EMG data in an fMRI
242 - Recording ECG Data in an fMRI
243 - Gated Analysis for Data Recorded in an MRI
Amplifiers
102 - Biopotential Amplifier Testing With CBLCAL
103 - Remote Monitoring System - TEL100
109 - 3-, 6-, and 12-Lead ECG
110 - Amplifier Baseline Offset Adjustment
126 - Wireless Remote Monitoring - TEL100C-RF
136 - Battery Pack Instructions - BAT100
149 - O2100C Module Setup for the MP System
151 - CO2100C Module Setup for the MP System
154 - High Level Transducer Connections - HLT100C
160 - Gas Analysis Module Response Time
162 - Stimulation Features of MP150/100 Systems
170 - Laser Doppler Flow Module - LDF100C
175 - Stimulus Isolator Guidelines - STMISOC
184 - Interfacing Millar Mikro-Tip Catheters with
MP150/100
185 - iMac and G3 Compatibility Issues
187 - Electrodermal Response Guidelines - GSR100C
190 - Micro-Electrode Amplifier Guidelines - MCE100C
195 - MP System Data Sampling Reference
196 - Cardiac Output Measurement - EBI100C
206 - Continuous 12-Lead ECG
207, 208, 209 - UDP Install
215 - Noninvasive Cardiac Ouput - NICO100C and
LEAD130
224 - Noninvasive Blood Pressure NIBP100A Calibration
231 - Noninvasive Blood Pressure NIBP100B-R
Calibration Transducers
101 - Transducer Calibration and Signal Re-Scaling
114/b - Pneumotach Transducer - TSD107A /TSD107B*
127 - Precision Force Transducers
130 - Noninvasive Blood Pressure Measurement TSD120
132 - Variable Force Transducer- TSD105A
135 - Pneumotach Transducer - TSD117
140 - Goniometers: Angular Measurements - TSD130
series
141 - Tri-axial Accelerometer Calib - TSD109
series/SS26/27
144 - Hand Dynamometer Calibration - TSD121C
145 - Respiratory Effort Transducer - TSD101B
153 - Physiological Sounds Microphone - TSD108
159 - Hand Switch and Foot Switch - TSD116 Series
186 - Variable Assessment Transducer - TSD115
Software
105 - Auditory Brainstem Response (ABR) Testing
105b - ABR Testing for Jewett Sequence
108 - Data Reduction of Large Files
111 - Nerve Conduction Velocity
113 - Troubleshooting AcqKnowledge for Windows
115 - Hemodynamic Measurements
117 - Pulse Transit Time and Velocity Calculation
118 - EMG Frequency Signal Analysis
120 - X/Y Loop Area Analysis
121 - Waveform Data Reduction
122 - Power Spectrum Analysis
129 - Heart Rate Variability
131 - Averaging Mode in the MP System
148 - Automated ECG Analysis
150 - O2100C Module for Oxygen Consumption
152 - CO2100C Module for End-Tidal CO2
155 - AcqKnowledge File Formats for Mac OS
156 - AcqKnowledge File Formats for Windows OS
158 - Analyzing Inspired & Expired Lung Volume
161 - Automated Tissue Bath Analysis
168 - Analyzing Intraventricular Pressure Wave Data
(LVP Analysis)
169 - Speech Motor Control
177 - ECG Analysis Using the Offline Averaging Mode
182 - Analysis of Blood Flow Data
183 - VO2 and RER Measurement
191 - Digital I/O Channels
198 - Prepulse Inhibition of Startle
199 - Impedance Cardiography and Pre-ejection Period
200 - Creating Arbitrary Waveforms for Stimulators
201 - SuperLab with AcqKnowledge
211 - EEG Analysis with AcqKnowledge
214 - EMG Startle Scoring for Prepulse Inhibition
216 - Electrodermal Activity (GSR) Scoring Methods
221 - Simplified VO2 Measurement (without CO2 Values)
222 - Pseudorandom Stimuli after Stim Presentation
226 - BIOPAC Software on Mac-Intel Core Duo Cmpt.
232 - EMG: Normalize to Max Voluntary Contraction
233 - Heart Rate Variability - Preparing Data
238 - Controlling the SDS100 Scent Delivery System
MP Research System | Application Notes | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.25.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ACQKNOWLEDGE QUICK STARTS
“Quick Start” template files were installed to the Sample folder of the BIOPAC Program folder. Use a Quick
Start template to establish the hardware and software settings required for a particular application or as a good
starting point for customized applications.
Q## Application(s)
Feature
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
12
13
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
31
32
33
34
35
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
EEG
Sleep Studies
EEG
EEG
Evoked Response
Evoked Response
Evoked Response
Evoked Response
Evoked Response
Evoked Response
Pyschophysiology
Pyschophysiology
EBI
Cardiovasc. Hemodynamics
Exercise Physiology
EOG
EOG
Plethsymography
Sleep Studies
Sleep Studies
ECG
ECG Analysis
Sleep Studies
ECG
ECG
ECG
Cardiovasc. Hemodynamics
Cardiovasc. Hemodynamics
Cardiovasc. Hemodynamics
Cardiovasc. Hemodynamics
NIBP
In vitro Pharmacology
In vitro Pharmacology
In vitro Pharmacology
In vitro Pharmacology
Isolated Lung Studies
Pulmonary Function
Exercise Physiology
EMG
EMG
Biomechanics
Remote Monitoring
Biomechanics
Vibromyography
Real-time EEG Filtering
Real-time EEG Filtering
Evoked Responses
Event-related Potentials
Event-related Potentials
Nerve Conduction Studies
Auditory Evoked response & Jewett Sequence
Visual Evoked Response
Somatosensory Evoked Response
Extra-cellular Spike Recording
Autonomic Nervous System Studies
Sexual Arousal Studies
Cardiac Output
Noninvasive Cardiac Output Measurement
Noninvasive Cardiac Output
Nystagmus Investigation
Saccadic Eye Movements
Indirect Blood Pressure Recordings
Multiple-channel Sleep Recording
Cardiovasc. Hemodynamics
On-line ECG Analysis
On-line ECG Analysis
SpO2 Analysis
Einthoven’s Triangle & 6-lead ECG
12-lead ECG Recordings
Heart Sounds
On-line Analysis
Blood Pressure
Blood Flow
LVP
Pyschophysiology
Tissue Bath Monitoring
Pulsatile Tissue Studies
Langendorff & Working Heart Preparations
Pulmonary Function
Animal Studies
Lung Volume Measurement
Respiratory Exchange Ratio
Integrated (RMS) EMG
EMG and Force
Gait Analysis
Biomechanics Measurements
Range of Motion
Muscle Activity
BIOPAC Hardware | Quick Starts | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.22.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUTS—MP150/100/36R
MP system external trigger inputs are TTL compatible—this means that one needs to send the external trigger
input 0 volts for a TTL low and 5 volts for a TTL high.
The external trigger inputs are equipped with internal pull-up resistors—this means that they automatically sit at
TTL high, if left unattached.
 This is a common and helpful implementation, because all one requires to implement an external trigger
is to pull the external trigger input low.
 This implementation is typically performed with an external switch placed between the external trigger
input and ground.
o When the switch is closed the external trigger input is pulled to TTL low.
o When the switch is opened the external trigger input is pulled back (by the internal pull-up
resistor) to TTL high.
To sync several MP systems together, so that one external trigger can start all the MP systems simultaneously:
1. Connect all the MP systems grounds together.
2. Connect all the MP systems external trigger inputs together.
3. Place a switch between any MP system external trigger input and ground.
When the switch is pressed, all the MP systems that are connected together will be triggered simultaneously.
MP Research System | External Trigger Inputs | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.25.2012
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
MP150 SYSTEMS
AVAILABLE MP150 STARTER SYSTEMS
MP150 Licensed Systems – See corresponding license page for more information:
System
Windows Part #
Mac Part #
MP150
MP150WSW
MP150WS
MP150 plus Scripting
MP150-WSW-BAS MP150-WS-BAS
MP150 plus Network Data Transfer
MP150WSW-NDT
MP150WS-NDT
MP150 plus Pressure Volume Loop Analysis MP150WSW-PVL
MP150WS-PVL
MP150 GLP
MP150WSW-G
MP150WS-G
MP150 plus Developer Bundle
MP150WSW-ENT
MP150 plus 2-channel Vibromyography
VMG102WSW
VMG102WS
MP150 plus 4-channel Vibromyography
VMG104WSW
VMG104WS
MP150 System plus Baroreflex
MP150WSW-BRS
MP150WS-BRS
MP150 System plus Actigraphy
MP150WSW-ACT
MP150WS-ACT
System Upgrade – MP100 to MP150
MP150U-W
MP150OU-M
N/A
The MP150 high-speed data acquisition system utilizes the very latest in Ethernet technology. The MP150 is
compliant with any Ethernet (UDP) ready PC running Windows or Macintosh. This next generation product takes
full advantage of cutting edge technology. Access multiple MP150 devices located on a local area network and
record data to any computer connected to the same LAN. Record multiple channels with variable sample rates to
maximize storage efficiency. Record at speeds up to 400 kHz (aggregate).
MP150 System includes:
Data acquisition unit: MP150A-CE
Universal interface module: UIM100C
AcqKnowledge® software CD
License key (iLok USB) for AcqKnowledge
4.3+
Software Guide (PDF)
Ethernet Connection
ETHUSB Ethernet adapter
and Crossover Cable: CBLETH2
See also: MP150 Specifications
Power Supply: AC150A
Recommended MP150 configuration
For the best possible performance connect the MP System directly to the ETHUSB Ethernet USB adapter, via the
CBLETH2 Ethernet crossover cable supplied with the system. This allows users to continue using an existing
Ethernet card for accessing the Internet and local area network while using the MP System.
If a computer does not require simultaneous connection to the network, standard crossover Ethernet cable can be
used to connect the MP System to a computer.
BIOPAC Hardware | MP150 Systems | Page 1 - 9
Updated: 2.25.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MP150 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Analog Inputs
Number of Channels:
Absolute Maximum Input:
Operational Input Voltage:
A/D Resolution:
Accuracy (% of FSR):
16
±15 V
±10 V
16 Bits
±0.003
Input impedance:
1.0 M
Application Programming Interfaces options:
 Hardware Interface BHAPI

Software Interface ACKAPI
Analog Outputs
Number of Channels:
Max output with acquisition:
Output Voltage Range:
D/A Resolution:
Accuracy (% of FSR):
Output Drive Current:
2
2 channels
±10 V
16 bits
±0.003
±5 mA (max)
Output Impedance:
100 
Digital I/O
Number of Channels:
Voltage Levels:
Digital I/O Logic Type:
Input Voltage Range:
Input Clamp Current:
Output Drive Current:
External Trigger Input:
Logic Level Thresholds:
Input Low Voltage:
Input High Voltage:
16
TTL, CMOS
CMOS
-0.5 V to 5.5 V (max)
±20 mA (max)
±20 mA (max)
TTL, CMOS compatible - See also: External Trigger Inputs
1.50 V (max)
3.45 V (min)
Time Base
Min Sample Rate:
Trigger Options:
2 samples/hour
Internal, External or Signal Level
Power
Amplifier Module Isolation:
CE Marking:
Leakage current:
Fuse:
Provided by the MP unit, isolated clean power
EC Low Voltage and EMC Directives
<8 µA (Normal), <400 µA (Single Fault)
2 A (fast blow)
Device specs
MP150
Max Sample Rate
MP Internal Memory:
200 K samples/sec (400 K aggregate)
PC Memory/Disk:
200 K samples/sec (400 K aggregate)
Internal Buffer:
6 M samples
BIOPAC Hardware | MP150 Systems | Page 2 - 9
Updated: 2.25.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
Device specs
MP150
Waveform Output Buffer:
500 K samples
Serial Interface Type/Rate:
Ethernet: UDP (10M bits/sec)
Transmission Type:
Ethernet
Maximum cable length:
100 meters (Ethernet cable)
Power Requirements:
12 VDC @ 2 amp (uses AC150A)
Dimensions:
10 cm x 11 cm x 19 cm
Weight:
1.0 kg
Operating Temperature Range:
0-70 C
Operating Humidity Range:
0-95%
OS Compatibility
Ethernet Interface
Windows
Mac
USB Interface
Windows
Mac
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8
OS X
Not supported
Not supported
ISOLATION
Designed to satisfy the following Medical Safety Test Standards affiliated with IEC601-1:
Creepage and Air Clearance
Dielectric Strength
Patient Leakage Current
Contact BIOPAC for additional details.
SIGNAL CONDITIONING MODULE COMPATIBILITY
CO2100C EGG100C
HLT100C
PPG100C
DA100C EMG100C
LDF100C
RSP100C
EBI100C EOG100C
MCE100C
SKT100C
ECG100C ERS100C
O2100C STM100C
EEG100C GSR100C
OXY100C/E
TEL100C
CLEANING PROCEDURES
Be sure to unplug the power supply from the MP150 before cleaning. To clean the MP150, use a damp, soft cloth.
Abrasive cleaners are not recommended as they might damage the housing. Do not immerse the MP150 or any of
its components, as this can damage the system. Let the unit air-dry until it is safe to reconnect the power supply.
AC150/100A POWER SUPPLIES
The 12-volt in-line switching transformer connects the MP unit to the AC mains wall outlet. One transformer is
included with each MP System; replacements can be ordered separately. These transformers are specified to
satisfy IEC60601-1 requirements and will accommodate 120-240 VAC (50/60 Hz) mains input.
BIOPAC Hardware | MP150 Systems | Page 3 - 9
Updated: 2.25.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MP150 SYMBOLOGY
Front panel
See “Light Status” section for functionality details.
Indicates MP150 Power status.
POWER
Green light
ACTIVITY
Amber light Indicates
data traffic to or from MP150— similar to
Hard Disk activity light on any personal computer.
BUSY
Green light
Indicates MP150 data acquisition.
Back panel
ON
Push in to power up the MP150
OFF
Pop out to cut the flow of power to the MP150
IMPORTANT! The MP150 does not have a “Hardware Reset”
switch like a personal computer does. To reset the MP150 for any
reason, turn the MP150 off, wait a few seconds, and then turn it back
on.
Fuse 2A
2 Amp fast-blow fuse holder; the maximum capacity of the fuse is 2 Amps.
 To remove the fuse, use a screwdriver to remove the fuse cover,
which is located below the word Fuse.
DC Input Use
the DC Input to connect a battery, AC/DC converter or other power
supply to the MP150.
 The MP150 requires 12 VDC @ 1 Amp (minimum), 2 Amp (nominal)
 The receptacle can accept a “+” (positive) input in the center of the
connector and a “” (negative) input on the connector housing.
Ethernet
The MP150 connects to the computer via the Ethernet port, located just to
the right of the word Ethernet.
 Uses a standard RJ-Ethernet connector (10 base T).
Power
Side panel
Module
connections
The two connector inputs are designed to connect directly to the UIM100C.
 Analog signals are transmitted through the 37-pin connector (upper right side)
 Digital signals are transmitted through the 25-pin connector (lower-right side)
Bottom
Firmware
Rollback
Switch
IMPORTANT! This is NOT A RESET SWITCH
The Firmware Rollback Switch is located on the bottom of the MP150 unit and is
recessed to prevent accidental activation—it is NOT A RESET for the MP150 unit.
Warning! Activation of the Firmware Rollback Switch will cause the MP150 unit to
operate under the previous version of firmware loaded into the unit. Refer to Appendix F
of the AcqKnowledge Software Guide for procedural details.
BIOPAC Hardware | MP150 Systems | Page 4 - 9
Updated: 2.25.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
ACTIVITY
BUSY
A Bright
B Bright
MODE
LIGHT STATUS DESCRIPTION
Self-Test
ACTIVITY and BUSY be bright for the duration of the self-test and setup process.
This may take 3 – 10 seconds, depending on MP150 internal memory.
Work
Error
A Bright
B Blink
A Blink
B Bright
A Blink
B off
Error
Error
Idle-1
Idle-2
A off
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Self-Test
B off
During data acquisition, ACTIVITY reflects command/data traffic (for acquisition
speeds of 1000 Hz or more, ACTIVITY will be permanently bright or blink at a high
frequency) and BUSY will be bright. It is normal for both lights to be on—this does
not indicate a problem unless an Error Message is generated on the computer screen.
ERROR: In rare cases, a serious problem may prevent a self-test and the lights may be
erratic: both on, both off, or any other static combination.
The MP150 enters the Error Mode if a fatal error occurs during the Self-test Mode. In
the Error Mode, ACTIVITY is bright and BUSY is blinking at a frequency of 5 Hz.
If the self-test fails or setup fails, the Error mode is initiated and ACTIVITY will blink
at about 5 Hz rate and BUSY will remain bright.
ACTIVITY blinks twice with approximately 1.5-2 second interval and BUSY is OFF.
Double blink means:
- MP150 may be disconnected from LAN or,
- MP150 is connected to LAN but did not receive IP address from network’s
DHCP server and default 169.254.xxx.xxx address is self-assigned to MP150.
This is the standard state for MP150 connected to NIC through crossover
network cable.
It means the MP150 is in working condition and ready for acquisition. AcqKnowledge
may communicate with the MP150 through a serial cable or through a network by
using 169.254.xxx.xxx address and/or crossover cable.
ACTIVITY blinks once with approximately 1.5-2 second interval and BUSY is OFF.
Single blink means:
- MP150 is connected to LAN and received IP address from network’s DHCP
server.
It means the MP150 is in working condition and ready for acquisition.
ACTIVITY and BUSY will go dark for less than 1 second at the end of the self-test
before proceeding to the Idle mode.
Wait
Under some conditions, such as when a dialog box is open, AcqKnowledge cannot
send commands to the MP150. When command flow from the workstation stops, the
MP150 acts as if there is an open dialog and enters the Wait Mode to wait for a
command from the workstation it is “locked” to—commands from any other work
station will be ignored. When it receives a command, the MP150 return to the Work
mode. After five minutes with no command communication, the MP150 will revert to
the Idle mode.
Error
ERROR: In rare cases, a serious problem may prevent a self-test and the lights may be
erratic: both on, both off, or a static combination.
BIOPAC Hardware | MP150 Systems | Page 5 - 9
Updated: 2.25.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
MP150 STATUS LIGHT PATHS
Startup (Power ON) > Self-test
When the MP150 is turned ON, ACTIVITY and
BUSY will shine for the duration of the self-test
and setup process. This may take 3 – 10 seconds,
depending on MP150 internal memory.
Idle
MP150 is waiting for any
command/request from
AcqKnoweldge or any workstation
or any interface. [See Note 1]
Error
The MP150 enters the Error Mode
if a fatal error occurs during the
Self-test Mode.
Work
MP150 receives/sends
commands/data to/from
AcqKnowledge. [See Note 2]
Wait
MP150 cannot receive command
due to software condition (i.e.,
dialog box open). [See Note 3]
NOTES
1.
IDLE—Both light patterns are normal and indicate that the MP150 is waiting for a command—
neither indicates a problem with the MP150. The MP150 can switch between Idle-1 and Idle-2. Idle-1
or Idle-2 pattern indicates which IP address the MP150 is using:
 Idle-1: self-assigned address in 169.254.xxx.xxx network
 Idle-2: address from DHCP server).
2.
WORK — When the MP150 receives any command from any workstation, it locks on to that
workstation and communicates with it exclusively. The MP150 “remembers” the active workstation
and will ignore commands from any other workstation. The MP150 usually remains in the Working
Mode until the AcqKnowledge software program is closed.
3.
WAIT — Under some conditions, such as when a dialog box is open, AcqKnowledge cannot send
commands to the MP150. When command flow from the workstation stops, the MP150 acts as if there
is an open dialog and enters the Wait Mode to wait for a command from the workstation it is “locked”
to—commands from any other work station will be ignored. When it receives a command, the MP150
enters the Work mode; if the MP150 does not receive a command within five minutes, it reverts to
Idle.
BIOPAC Hardware | MP150 Systems | Page 6 - 9
Updated: 2.25.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MP150A-CE DATA ACQUISITION UNIT BLOCK DIAGRAM
The MP150 has an internal microprocessor to control the data acquisition and communication with the computer.
There are 16 analog input channels, two analog output channels, 16 digital channels that can be used for either
input or output, and an external trigger input. The digital lines can be programmed as either inputs or outputs and
function in 8 channel blocks. Block 1 (I/O lines 0 through 7) can be programmed as either all inputs or all outputs,
independently of block 2 (I/O lines 8 through 15).
MP150A-CE block diagram
See also: MP150 Specifications
BIOPAC Hardware | MP150 Systems | Page 7 - 9
Updated: 2.25.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
MP SYSTEM PIN-OUTS — FOR MP150
Digital DSUB 25 (male) Pin-outs
1
2
3
4
5 6
7
14 15 16 17 18 19
8
9 10 11 12 13
20 21 22
23 24 25
DIGITAL
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Description
I/O 0
I/O 1
I/O 2
I/O 3
GND D
GND D
EXT T
+5 VD
+5 VD
I/O 8
I/O 9
I/O 10
I/O 11
Pin
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Description
I/O 4
I/O 5
I/O 6
I/O 7
GND A
Out 1
Out 0
GND A
I/O 12
I/O 13
I/O 14
I/O 15
Analog DSUB 37 (male) Pin-outs
1
2
3
4
5 6
20 21 22 23 24 25
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
ANALOG
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Description
GND A
GND A
GND A
GND A
GND A
GND A
GND A
GND A
+12 V
GND A
-12 V
GND A
GND A
GND A
GND A
GND A
GND A
GND A
GND A
Pin
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Description
CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
CH 4
CH 5
CH 6
CH 7
CH 8
+12 V
- 12 V
CH 9
CH 10
CH 11
CH 12
CH 13
CH 14
CH 15
CH 16
BIOPAC Hardware | MP150 Systems | Page 8 - 9
Updated: 2.25.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ETHERNET CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS (FOR MODEL MP150 ONLY)
Pin
Description
1
TXD+
2
TXD-
3
RXD+
4
No Connection
5
No Connection
6
RXD-
7
No Connection
8
No Connection
BIOPAC Hardware | MP150 Systems | Page 9 - 9
Updated: 2.25.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ETHUSB USB 2.0 ETHERNET ADAPTER
ETHUSB is included in MP150 Systems, upgrades to MP150,
and VR Systems.
Use to connect to a 10/100 Mbps network through a USB port—no need
to open up your computer case to add an internal Ethernet card. The
adapter's compliance with USB 2.0 (480 Mbps) ensures true 10/100
Mbps network speed without any compromise. Adapter is compact and
USB bus-powered; no external power adapter required.
Key Features
 Instantly connect to a 10/100 Mbps network through a USB port—no need to open up your computer case
to add an internal Ethernet card
 Compliant with USB 2.0 and USB 1.1 specifications
 Compliant with IEEE 802.3 (10Base-T) and 802.3u (100Base-TX) standards
 Powered by USB port—no external power adapter required
 Supports both full-duplex and half-duplex operations
 Supports suspend mode and remote wakeup via link-up and magic packet
 Equipped with diagnostic LEDs

System Requirements
 IBM compatible Pentium-233 MHz or faster PC or Mac
 64 MB RAM or more
 One available USB port
 Windows 8, 7, Vista, XO, and 2000; Mac OS X 10.x
Package Includes
 USB 2.0 to 10/100 Ethernet Adapter
 CD (Driver & User Manual)
 Quick Install Guide
Specifications
Cable Type:
Dimensions:
Weight:
USB
6.60 cm x 2.27 cm x 1.52 cm
0.03 kg
Connector A:
USB A (male)
Connector B:
Certifications:
RJ45 (female)
802.3; 802.3u; USB 1.1; USB 2.0
[ 2.60" x 0.90" x 0.60" ]
[ 0.06 lbs. ]
BIOPAC Hardware | ETHUSB | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 12.12.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ETHERNET ACCESSORIES
CBLETH1/2 – Ethernet Cables
CBLETH1 is a 2-meter Ethernet patch cable.

Use one CBLETH1 to connect the MP150 to an Ethernet
Switch and one CBLETH1 to connect the Switch to a local area
network (LAN).
CBLETH2 is a 2-meter Ethernet crossover cable.

MP150 Systems include one CBLETH2.

Use the CBLETH2 to connect the MP150 to an Ethernet interface
(such as the ETHUSB interface shipped with your MP System).
BIOPAC Hardware | Ethernet Accessories | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 12.12.2013
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
MP36R SYSTEMS
MP36R Licensed Systems – See corresponding license page for more information:
System
Windows Part #
Mac Part #
MP36R
MP36RWSW
MP36RWS
MP36R with Basic Scripting
MP36RWSW-BAS
MP36RWS-BAS
MP36R plus Network Data Transfer
MP36RWSW-NDT MP36RWS-NDT
MP36R Enterprise System
MP36RWSW-ENT
N/A
MP36R with 2-channel Vibromyography VMG36R2WSW
VMG36R2WS
MP36R with 4-channel Vibromyography VMG36R4WSW
VMG36R4WS
The MP36R data acquisition unit has an internal microprocessor to control data acquisition and communication
with the computer. The MP36R unit takes incoming signals and converts them into digital signals that can be
processed with the computer. There are four analog input channels, one of which can be used as a trigger input.
To record signals, connect the MP36R unit to the computer and connect electrodes, transducers, and I/O devices
to the MP36R unit.
MP36R Symbology
Symbol
Description
Explanation
Type BF Equipment
Classification
Attention
Consult accompanying documents
On (partial)
Turns MP36/35 on assuming AC300A power
adapter is powered by the mains
Off (partial)
Turns MP36/35 off if but AC300A power
adapter remains powered by the mains
Direct current
Direct current output
USB
USB port
COMPLIANCE
SAFETY
The MP36R satisfies the Medical Safety Test Standards affiliated with IEC60601-1 and is designated as Class I
Type BF medical equipment
EMC
The MP36R satisfies the Medical Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Test Standards affiliated with IEC606011-2.
Types of Input Devices
There are three types of devices that connect to the MP36R: electrodes, transducers, and I/O devices.
•
Electrodes are relatively simple instruments that attach to the surface of the skin and pick up electrical
signals in the body.
•
Transducers, on the other hand, convert a physical signal into a proportional electrical signal.
•
Input/Output devices (I/O for short) are specialized devices like pushbutton switches and headphones.
BIOPAC Hardware | MP36R Systems | Page 1 - 5
Updated: 4.7.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Simple Sensor Connectors
Regardless of the type of device connected, every sensor or I/O device connects to the MP36R using a “Simple
Sensor” connector. Simple Sensor connectors are designed to plug only one way into the MP36R—it’s not
possible to plug items in upside down or into the wrong socket.
•
Electrodes, transducers, and the pushbutton switch all connect to the channel input ports on the front
panel of the MP36R.
•
Headphones and the stimulator connect to the “Analog out” port on the back panel of the MP36R. (There
is also a 3.5 mm headphone jack for headphones with a mini-connector.)
•
Digital devices connect to the “I/O Port” on the back panel.
•
Trigger devices connect to the “Trigger” port on the back panel.
MP36R Front Panel
The front panel of the MP36R has an electrode check port, four analog input ports, and two status indicators.
Electrode Check
•
The Electrode Check port is a diagnostic tool used with AcqKnowledge 4.1 software to determine if
the electrodes are properly attached to the subject.
Input Ports: CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4
•
The four 9-pin female analog input ports on the MP36R acquisition unit are referred to as Channels.
Status Indicators
•
Busy—indicator is activated when the MP36R is acquiring data and also during the first few seconds
after the MP3X is powered on to indicate that a self-test is in progress. (When the MP3X passes the
power-on test, the Busy light will turn off.)
•
Power—status indicator is illuminated when the MP36R is turned on.
MP36R Back Panel
The back panel of the MP36R has an analog output port, a USB port, an I/O Port, a Trigger Port, a DC input, a
fuse holder, and a power switch, and the unit’s serial number.
Analog Out Port – Low Voltage Stimulator
There is one 9-pin male “D” analog output port on the back of the MP36R that allows signals to be amplified and
sent out to devices such as headphones. On the MP36, Analog Out is built-in low voltage stimulator.
BIOPAC Hardware | MP36R Systems | Page 2 - 5
Updated: 4.7.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
USB Connection
The MP36R connects to the computer via a USB Port, located just below the word USB.
• Uses a standard USB connector.
• Should only be used to connect the MP36R to a PC or Macintosh.
Headphone Output
• Accepts a standard (1/8” or 3.5 mm) stereo headphone jack.
I/O Port
• Accepts a DB 25 Female connector.
• Input/Output port used to connect digital devices to the MP36R.
Trigger Input
• Accepts a male BNC connector.
• Input port used to send trigger signals from another device to the MP36R.
• See External Trigger Inputs.
DC Input
Use the DC Input to connect a battery, AC/DC converter or other power supply to the MP36R.
•
The power supply requirements for the MP36R are 12 VDC @ 1 Amp. Only use the AC300A
power adapter with the MP36R. The AC300A is a 12 VDC @ 1.25 Amp power supply adapter that can
connect to any mains rated as 100-250 VAC @ 50/60Hz, 40VA.
• The receptacle is configured to accept a “+” (positive) input in the center of the connector and a “-”
(negative) input on the connector housing.
Fuse Holder
The fuse holder contains a fast-blow fuse that helps protect the MP3X from shorts on its power, analog, and
digital I/O lines. The MP36R uses a 1.0 amp fast-blow fuse.
• To remove the fuse, use a screwdriver to remove the fuse cover located below the word Fuse.
Power Switch
ON position — powers up the MP Unit
OFF position — cuts the flow of power
Fixed Hardware Low Pass Filters
To provide for anti-aliasing for the digital IIR filters and to reduce high frequency noise, the MP36R employs a
low pass filter. These filtering options are incorporated into each MP unit channel: The low pass filter is set at
approximately 20 KHz.
Fixed Hardware High Pass Filters
To accommodate the DC offsets associated with a range of biopotential and transducer signals, the MP36R
employs a switchable bank of single pole high pass filters. These filtering options are incorporated into each MP
unit channel: The high pass filter options are DC (HP filter off), 0.05 Hz, 0.5 Hz and 5 Hz.
MP36R Cleaning Procedures
Before cleaning, be sure to unplug the power supply from the MP36R. To clean the MP36R, use a damp, soft
cloth. Abrasive cleaners are not recommended as they might damage the housing. Do not immerse the
MP36R or any of its components in water (or any other fluid) or expose to extreme temperatures as this can
damage the unit.
BIOPAC Hardware | MP36R Systems | Page 3 - 5
Updated: 4.7.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MP36R Specifications
Electrode Check Resistance Range:
0-1 MΩ (Vin+ and Vin- to GND)
Analog inputs:
4 isolated channels (front panel CH 1–CH 4)
Sample rate:
Max
Min
4 CH @ 100K s/second
1 sample/second
Trigger Input:
Analog CH1-CH4 or Digital D1-D8
Threshold:
Adjustable threshold level with Positive or Negative Trigger
A/D resolution:
24-bit (before digital filtering)
Signal to noise ratio:
> 89 dB min Tested at lowest Gain at 1,000 s/s with grounded front end
Voltage resolution:
Gain dependent: 2.38 microvolts /bit (Gain 5) to 0.024 nanovolts /bit (Gain 50,000)
Storage buffer:
512 K
Input voltage range:
Gain dependent: 400 microvolts to 4.0 Volts p-p
Input noise voltage:
9 nV rms /sqrt(Hz) and 0.1 uV rms noise (0.1 Hz to 35 Hz) - nominal
Input noise current:
100 fA rms /sqrt(Hz) and 10 pA p-p noise (0.1 Hz to 10 Hz) - nominal
Input protection:
± 1 mA/V current limited
Maximum input voltage:
4 V p-p (between Vin+ and Vin-)
Differential input impedance:
2 MΩ (between Vin+ and Vin-)
Software Filters:
Three programmable digital (IIR) filters; automatic or user-adjustable
Hardware Filters:
Fixed hardware low pass – 20 KHz
Fixed hardware high pass – switchable DC, 0.05 Hz, 0.5 Hz, 5 Hz
Common mode input impedance:
DC
AC (50/60 Hz)
(between Vin+/Vin- and GND)
11 MΩ
1,000 MΩ
CMRR:
110 dB minimum at 50/60 Hz
Gain ranges:
5 – 50,000 (automatic preset or user adjustable)
Gain
Baseline adjustment:
(automatic or user adjustable)
5, 10, 20, 50: ±100 mV
100, 200, 500: ±10 mV
1,000 to 50,000: ±4 mV
Gain
Electrode offset potential tolerance:
Analog Output
Number of channels:
D/A resolution:
Accuracy:
Headphones
Output impedance:
Output voltage:
Output drive current:
5, 10, 20, 50: ±2 V
100, 200, 500: ±200 mV
1,000 to 50,000: ±80 mV
1
16 bits
±0.01% of FSR
50 Ω
-10 V to +10 V
5 mA max
Serial interface:
USB, Type 2.0 high speed
Headphone:
Drives 16-32 Ω standard stereo headphones
I/O port:
8 TTL compatible inputs and 8 TTL compatible outputs
Trigger:
TTL compatible input and synchronization port – see External Trigger Inputs.
DC input:
Power input; requires 12 VDC @ 1 Amp. Use the AC300A 12 VDC @ 1.25 Amp power
supply adapter to connect to any mains rated as 100-250 VAC @ 50/60Hz, 40VA.
Fuse:
1.0 amp fast-blow fuse
Dimensions & Weight:
7 cm x 29 cm x 25 cm, 1.4 Kg
BIOPAC Hardware | MP36R Systems | Page 4 - 5
Updated: 4.7.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Mains Power Disconnection
To completely disconnect the MP36R unit and the AC300A power adapter from all poles of the
supply mains, extract the power cord plug from the mains outlet.
Please note that the power switch on the back of the MP36R unit turns power ON
and OFF to the MP36R unit only.
Extract the plug by grasping the plastic shell of the plug and pull firmly away from the mains outlet
in a direction perpendicular to the face of the mains outlet. Take
care not to touch the metal blades associated with the plug. This procedure will fully power down
(de-energize) the MP36R unit and AC300A power adapter.
MP36R Unit Pin-outs
9-PIN FEMALE DSUB
Electrode Check
9 PIN FEMALE DSUB
CH Input
(1 of 4)
9 PIN MALE DSUB
Analog Output
USB
Connector
I/O Port
1
2
3
2
3
4
Vin+
GND
Vin-
1
2
3
4
5
Shield drive
Vin+
GND
Vin−
Shield drive
Electrode connection
Electrode connection
1 Buffered analog or pulse output
A.C. coupled (1,000 uF)
Analog range: +/- 2.048 V
Pulse range: 0 to 2.048 V
2 Low voltage stimulator
Buffered, D.C. coupled
Z out = 50 Ω
Range: -10 V to +10 V
3 GND
1
+5
2
-Data
3
Data +
4
GND
6
7
8
9
+5 V (100 mA max aggregate)
ID resistor lead 1; I2C SCL
ID resistor lead 2; I2C SDA
−5 V (100 mA max aggregate)
4
5
6
7
8
9
+5 V (100mA max.)
Buffered pulse output
Z out = 1 kΩ
Range: 0 to 5 V
+12 V (100 mA max)
I2C SCL – Do not connect
I2C SDA
Monitor – Do not connect
5
6
7
8
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
15
16
17
18
Digital Output 6
Digital Output 7
Digital Output 8
Analog Input, Right
1 VRMS, centered at 0 V
Analog Input, Left
1 VRMS, centered at 0 V
RS-232-TX 0-5 V
I2C-SCL 3.3 V
Digital Input 5
Digital Input 6
Digital Input 7
Digital Input 8
DSUB 25 (male)
4
5 6
14 15 16 17 18 19
7
8
9 10 11 12 13
20 21 22
23 24 25
† Digital Input are 0-5 V with 100 K ohm pullups
to 5 V on board
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Digital Output 1 0-5 V 8 ma
Digital Output 2 0-5 V 8 ma
Digital Output 3 0-5 V 8 ma
Digital Output 4 0-5 V 8 ma
GND Unisolated
GND Unisolated
RS-232-RX
+5 V Unisolated/fused
I2C-SDA 3.3. V
Digital Input 1† 0-5 V
Digital Input 2† 0-5 V
Digital Input 3† 0-5 V
Digital Input 4† 0-5 V
Digital Output 5
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
BIOPAC Hardware | MP36R Systems | Page 5 - 5
Updated: 4.7.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MP36R TRANSDUCERS
Transducers listed below are for use with the MP36R four-channel data acquisition unit.
SS1LA Shielded Electrode Adapter
SS2L Electrode Lead Set
SS3LA EDA (Electrodermal Activity)
SS4LA Pulse Plethysmograph
SS5LB Respiratory Effort
SS6L Fast Response Temperature
SS7L Waterproof Probe Temperature
SS8L Liquid Immersion Probe Temperature
SS18L Digit Surface Temperature
SS9LA Unisolated BNC Input Adapter
SS70L Isolated BNC Input Adapter
SS10L Pushbutton Hand Switch
SS11LA Airflow
SS12LA Variable Range Force
SS13L Pressure
SS14L Displacement
SS17L Physiological Sounds Microphone
SS19L or SS19LA/LB Blood Pressure Cuff
SS20L-21L Twin Axis Goniometer
SS22L-23L Single Axis Torsiometer
SS24L Single Axis Finger Goniometer
SS25LA Hand Dynamometer
SS25LB Hand Dynamometer
SS26LB Tri Axial Accelerometer (±5 g)
SS27L Tri Axial Accelerometer (±50 g)
SS28LA Heel-toe Strike
SS29L Multi-lead ECG Cable
SS30L Electronic Stethoscope
SS31L Non-invasive Cardiac Output Sensor
SS36L Reflex Hammer
SS39L Breadboard
SS40L-42L Differential Pressure
SS43L Variable Assessment (Psych)
SS46L-52L Airflow Pneumotach Series
SS53L-55L Digital Switch Series
SS56L Hand Clench Force Bulb
SS57L EDA Lead for Disposable Setups
SS60L Signal Cable for SS39L Breadboard
SS61L Finger Twitch
SS62L Speech Frequency Microphone
SS63L-66L Force Series
SS67L Pressure Pad/Respiration
SS68L PH Probe
SS69L Dissolved Oxygen Probe
BIOPAC Hardware | MP36R Transducers | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 4.14.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS1LA SHIELDED ELECTRODE ADAPTER
The fully-shielded electrode interface cable permits high resolution
recording of biopotential signals. The 3-meter adapter cable accepts
standard Touchproof connectors. Use this lead adapter with:

LEAD120 for EL120 contact post electrodes or

EL250 series reusable Ag-AgCl electrodes or

EL450 series needle electrodes or

LEAD110 series shielded and unshielded leads
SS1LA SPECIFICATIONS
Cable length
Termination
3-meter
standard Touchproof connectors
Note: The SS1L is a 3-meter electrode adapter for older style 2 mm pin connections. To convert 2 mm pin
connections to Touchproof 1.5 mm connections, use CBL201.
BSL Education | SS1LA | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 12.13.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS2L ELECTRODE LEAD SET
 “SS2L” is used to reference SS2L, SS2LA, or SS2LB lead sets;

SS2LB is recognized by current release BSL Lessons.
This fully shielded cable assembly permits high-resolution
recording of biopotentials. Each lead set has three pinch leads
designed to snap directly onto standard disposable electrodes
(such as the EL500 series electrodes). Each pinch lead is 1
meter long and terminates in a yoke connected to a 2-meter
cable.
This is the general-purpose electrode cable used for almost all applications requiring the use of electrodes. These
cables are used to connect the disposable electrodes that are placed on the surface of the skin to the MP3X/4X
unit. Depending on where electrodes are placed, they can measure muscle contraction, heartbeats, or even
brainwaves.
One end of the SS2L cable has a Smart Sensor connector on it that connects to the MP3X/4X and the other end
splits into three smaller cables. Each end of the smaller cables is fitted with a pinch connector that clamps onto
electrodes.
SS2L and SS2LA are discontinued products. SS2LB is the current product offering.
SS2L SPECIFICATIONS
Cable Length:
Connector Type:
2 meters
9 Pin DIN
Biopac Hardware | SS2L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 12.19.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS3LA ELECTRODERMAL ACTIVITY (EDA) TRANSDUCER WITH REUSABLE
ELECTRODES
The SS3LA transducer connects to a single MP3X/45 input channel to record electrodermal
activity (changes in skin conductance) or, with modified setup, skin resistance*. The SS3LA
operates by applying a fixed voltage (0.5 Volts DC) across the two electrodes and then detects
the minute current flowing between the electrodes. Because the voltage (V) is fixed, from
Ohms Law, the conductance (G) will be proportional to the current (I): G = I/V = I/0.5 V. Circuitry in the SS3LA
then converts the detected current to a voltage so it can be measured by the MP device. The software performs the
necessary scaling and units conversion. Two reusable Ag-AgCl electrodes are mounted in individual,
ergonomically designed, polyurethane housings for improved contact, attachable to the fingers by a Velcro strap.
The electrodes have a 6 mm contact area with a 1.6 mm cavity to accommodate isotonic electrode gel (GEL101 or
equivalent). The non-polarizable electrodes are shielded to minimize noise interference and improve recordings.

See the SS57L EDA Lead for a disposable electrode option
USAGE RECOMMENDATIONS
Presets - BSL PRO (and AcqKnowledge software for MP36R) includes the following EDA presets:
 Electrodermal Activity (EDA), 0-35 Hz; requires calibration—see details below
 Electrodermal Activity (EDA) Change; no calibration required (BSL PRO 4.0.3 and earlier only)
To navigate to the presets in the software, choose MP > Set Up Data Acquisition (BSL 4.1) or Set Up Channels
(BSL 4.0.3 or earlier) > Channels > and select the desired EDA preset from the Preset pop-up menu.
Single-point Calibration for (EDA) 0-35 Hz Preset
The following single-point calibration will yield very good results and is easy to perform:
1. Disconnect the electrodes.
2. Click “Setup” > “Scaling” button in the software’s EDA preset dialog.
3. Click the Cal 2 button.
4. Add the new Cal 2 value to the default Cal 1 value (example below left, 1000 + 31.3725 = 1031.3725). If
the new Cal 2 value is negative, then subtract that value from Cal 1.
Note that Cal 1 and Cal 2 values are
reversed in software versions BSL 3.7.x and
earlier.
BSL 4.x and AcqKnowledge 4.x EDA Scaling Dialog
BSL 3.7.x EDA Scaling Dialog
Two-point Calibration for (EDA) 0-35 Hz Preset
Two-point calibration offers the advantage of greater accuracy, but is a more complex procedure. To perform:
1. Prepare two 1% calibration resistors: 100 kiloohm (10 microsiemens) and 1 megaohm (1
microsiemen). Insulate the resistor using clear tape such that when held, the fingers will not directly
contact the resistor leads.
2. Place the 1 megaohm resistor such that one resistor lead contacts one electrode pad and the other
resistor lead contacts the opposite electrode pad.
3. Click “Setup” > “Scaling” button in the software’s EDA preset setup dialog.
BIOPAC Hardware | SS3LA | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 3.23.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
4. In the Scaling dialog box, set the Cal 1 Scale value to “1” and click Cal 1.
5. Repeat Step 2 using the 100 kiloohm resistor.
6. In the Scaling dialog box, set the Cal 2 Scale value to “10” and click Cal 2.
If the file is now saved as a template (*.gtl), the calibration values will be maintained as long as the transducer is
matched to the software each time it is used.
Verify - check the accuracy of the SS3LA:
1. Click Start to begin a recording.
2. Place an insulated 100 kiloohm resistor (10 microsiemens) across the electrode pads (resistor must be
insulated from fingers).
3. Click Stop.
4. Check the EDA value when the resistor was placed across the electrodes using measurements.

The software should produce a reading of 10 microsiemens (siemens).
Setup - There must be good electrical connections between the skin and the electrodes for EDA to work properly.
Gel - When using GEL101 isotonic gel it is important that the gel has a chance to be absorbed and make good
contact before recording begins. Accordingly:
1. Apply GEL101 to the skin at the point of electrode contact and rub it in.
2. Fill the SS3LA electrode cavity with GEL101.
3. Attach the SS3LA electrode to the subject.
4. Wait 5 minutes (minimum) before starting to record data.
*Measuring skin resistance - Use an Expression calculation channel to take reciprocal of conductance, and
then apply proper scaling.
Tip
To detect a good signal, subjects should have a little sweat on their hands (not a lot, but
enough so that their hands are not completely smooth or cold). If subjects wash their
hands just prior to the recording or if they have been sitting in a cold room, then they
must do something to activate the sweat glands before beginning calibration or
recording. If subjects begin with colder hands, the scale will be diminished and the signal
will be easily saturated once they “warm up” during the lesson.
CLEANING THE SS3LA TRANSDUCER
 The GEL should be immediately cleaned off the electrodes after each use. Dried gel will act as insulator preventing
electrical contact with the skin, and the Ag-AgCl electrode disk could degrade quickly with time because of the
porous electrode surface.

To clean the electrodes, wet a cotton swab or toothbrush with water and remove the electrode gel. Always dry the
electrodes after cleaning.

If needed, use Hydrogen Peroxide solution (2-3%) to brighten electrode surface (optional) or to sterilize the
electrode. Do not place the electrode in solution, but rather use a cotton swab or toothbrush. Dry the electrodes
after cleaning.

If a dark residue remains after the above cleaning methods are used, then a cleaner with pumice (such as Ajax)
can be used on the wetted cotton swab or toothbrush.
SS3LA SPECIFICATIONS
Electrode Type:
Excitation:
Range: 0.1-10
Surface Area:
Gel Cavity Area
Dimensions:
Ag/AgCl, shielded
0.5 V DC
0 siemens (normal human range is 1-20 siemens)
6 mm contact area
1.66 mm
16 mm (long)  17 mm (wide)  8 mm (high)
Weight:
4.5 grams
Cable Length: 2 meters
Connector Type: 9 Pin DIN
Sterilizable:
Yes (contact BIOPAC)
BIOPAC Hardware | SS3LA | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 3.23.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS5LB RESPIRATORY EFFORT TRANSDUCER
The SS5LB transducer is used to record respiration via chest or abdomen expansion and contraction. This
transducer is useful for determining how deeply someone is breathing and for calculating the person’s breathing
rate or respiration rate. The transducer is a strain assembly that measures the change in thoracic or abdominal
circumference. The strap presents minimal resistance to movement and is extremely unobtrusive.
Due to its novel construction, the SS5LB can measure extremely slow respiration patterns with no loss in signal
amplitude while maintaining excellent linearity and minimal hysteresis. The respiratory effort transducer has a 2meter flexible lightweight cable. The center plastic housing protects the delicate sensor within.
The transducer is attached by a fully adjustable nylon strap, which allows the transducer to fit almost any
circumference.
To attach the nylon belt to the transducer, thread the strap through the corresponding slots on the sensor assembly.
Place the transducer around the body at the level of maximum respiratory expansion (generally about 5cm below
the armpits). At maximum expiration, adjust the strap so there is slight tension to hold the strap around the chest.
SS5LB SPECIFICATIONS
Response:
Circumference Range:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Sterilizable:
Variable Resistance Output:
Cable Length:
Connector Type:
True DC
9 cm – 130 cm (Can be increased with a longer nylon strap)
95 mm (long) × 47mm (wide) × 15mm (thick)
9 grams
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
50-150 K
2 meters (flexible, lightweight)
9 Pin DIN
BIOPAC Hardware | SS5LB | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.22.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCERS
SS6L: Fast Response
SS7L: Waterproof Probe
SS8L: Liquid Immersion Probe
SS18L Digit Surface
SS6L TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCER
The SS6L is a small fast-response thermistor used to measure small variations
in temperature, either on the skin surface or in exhaled airflow. The recorded
temperature changes during breathing can be used to indicate respiration rate.
Attach the SS6L to the skin surface with Surgical Tape (TAPE1).
RX202A Sensor (white) shown at right with transducer connector (black);
ships as sensor only.
This is a replacement sensor for
• TSD202A for MP research systems
• SS6L for BSL education systems
• SS6 for telemetry/wireless systems
The sensor snaps onto the "SS" transducer connector for connection to a BIOPAC data acquisition system.
SS6L SPECIFICATIONS
Response time:
Nominal resistance:
Maximum operating temperature:
Accuracy and Interchangeability:
Connector Type:
Compatibility:
Cable Length:
Sterilizable:
Dimensions:
0.6 sec
2252 Ω @ 25° C
100° C
±0.1° C
9 Pin DIN
YSI® series 400 temperature probes
2 meters (flexible, lightweight)
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
5 m x 1.7 m
SS7L WATERPROOF PROBE
Use this vinyl probe for core (oral/rectal) temperature recordings.
SS7L SPECIFICATIONS
Response time:
Max operating temp:
Accuracy & Interchangeability:
Compatibility:
Dimensions:
Cable:
1.1 sec
60° C
±0.2° C
YSI(r) series 400
9.8 mm x 3.3 mm
3 meters
BIOPAC Hardware | SS6L – SS18L | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 8.26.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS8L LIQUID IMMERSION PROBE
Use this stainless steel probe for dry or wet bath temperature
measurements.
SS8L SPECIFICATIONS
Response time:
Max operating temp:
Accuracy & Interchangeability:
Compatibility:
Dimensions:
Cable:
3.6 sec
60° C
±0.2° C
YSI(r) series 400
4 mm x 115 mm
3 meters
SS18LA DIGIT SURFACE TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCER
The SS18LA is designed to record skin temperature of the fingers or
toes. The probe contains a surface temperature sensing element encased
in a polyurethane housing that conforms to curved skin surfaces and
includes a Velcro strap for easy attachment.
SS18L SPECIFICATIONS
Response time:
Size
with housing:
sensor only:
Interface:
Nominal Resistance:
Maximum operating temperature:
Accuracy and Interchangeability:
Cable Length:
Compatibility:
Sterilizable:
1.1 sec
16 mm (long) x 17 mm (wide) x 8 mm (high)
10 mm sensing diameter, 1.4 mm sensor thickness
MP3X
2252 ohms at 25° C (sensor only)
60° C (when used with MP3X)
0.2° C (after calibration)
3 meters
YSI series 400 temperature probes (sensor only)
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
BIOPAC Hardware | SS6L – SS18L | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 8.26.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
INPUT ADAPTERS
SS9LA Unisolated BNC Input Adapter
SS70L Isolated BNC Input Adapter
SS71L Isolated BNC Input Adapter – MP30
See also: OUT2 BNC Output Adapter
SS9LA Unisolated BNC Input Adapter
This unisolated input adapter is for MP36, MP36R, MP35, and MP45
Systems only. Use to send signals from other devices (other chart
recorders, amplifiers and signal generators) to be recorded by a Biopac
Student Lab System or a Research System with AcqKnowledge.
SS9LA has a built-in divide by 10 attenuation which provides a ±20 V
input range on MP36, MP36R and MP45, a ±10 V input range on MP35.
The 2-meter cable terminates in a male BNC for easy connections.
SS9LA Specifications
Cable length:
Connector type:
Signal range:
2 meter
BNC
±20 V (MP36/MP36R/MP45)
±10 V (MP35)
WARNING! Never connect the SS9LA BNC Input Adapter to an MP3X unit if electrodes from other channels are
connected to human subjects – this may void the electrical isolation (one un-isolated channel input voids the
isolation of all channel inputs).
This cable replaces the SS9L, effective January 2014.
SS70L Isolated BNC Input Adapter for MP36/MP35
This BNC adapter is required when connecting un-isolated third party devices (i.e.
amplifiers, chart recorders or signal generators), while electrodes, attached to human
Subjects are connected to other input channels.
Connector Type: BNC
Signal range:
±20 V (MP36/MP36R/MP45)
±10 V (MP35)
SS71L Isolated BNC Input Adapter for MP30
This BNC adapter is required when connecting un-isolated third party devices (i.e.
amplifiers, chart recorders or signal generators), while electrodes, attached to human
Subjects are connected to other input channels.
Connector Type: BNC
Signal range:
±10 V
WARNING! Since all MP inputs share a common isolated ground, connecting an un-isolated device to any
channel voids the isolation for all channels and exposes the Subject to possible shock hazards.
BIOPAC Hardware | BNC INPUT ADAPTERS | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 2.18.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS10L PUSHBUTTON HAND SWITCH
The SS10L pushbutton hand switch is used for remote event marking or for
psychophysiological response tests. This easy to hold pushbutton switch is very rugged and
reliable, and makes it simple to mark events during recording. When data from the button
is displayed on the screen, it normally reads 0 Volts, and when the button is pressed it
reads +5 mV.
SS10L SPECIFICATIONS
Cable Length:
Connector Type:
2 meters
9 Pin DIN to MP36/35 front panel input
BIOPAC Hardware | SS10L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.1.2013
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
See also: Force Transducer Tension Adjuster (HDW100A)
SS12LA VARIABLE RANGE FORCE TRANSDUCER
SS12LA Variable Range Force Transducer
SS12LA Sample Setup
Force transducers are devices capable of transforming a force into a proportional electrical signal. The SS12LA
variable range force transducer element is a cantilever beam load cell incorporating a thin-film strain gauge.
Because the strain elements have been photolithographically etched directly on the strain beam, these transducers
are rugged while maintaining low non-linearity and hysteresis. Drift with time and temperature is also minimized,
because the strain elements track extremely well, due to the deposition method and the elements’ close physical
proximity. The SS12LA also incorporates impact and drop shock protection to insure against rough laboratory
handling.
Forces are transmitted back to the beam via a lever arm to insure accurate force measurements. Changing the
attachment point changes the full scale range of the force transducer from 50 g to 1000 g. The beam and lever arm
are mounted in a sealed aluminum enclosure that includes a 3/8" diameter mounting rod for holding the transducer
in a large variety of orientations. The SS12LA comes equipped with a 2-meter cable and plugs directly into the
MP3X module.
The SS12LA mounting rod can be screwed into the transducer body in three different locations, two on the top
and one on the end surfaces of the transducer. The mounting rod can be placed in any angle relative to the
transducer orientation. The SS12LA can be used in any axis and can be easily mounted in any standard
measurement fixture, including pharmacological setups, muscle tissue baths and organ chambers.
The SS12LA has 5 different attachment points that determine the effective range of the force transducer. These
ranges are 50 g, 100 g, 200 g, 500 g and 1,000 g. The point closest to the end is the 50 g attachment point, while
the point closest to the middle is the 1,000 g attachment point.
Two S-hooks are provided with the SS12LA; one has a .032" diameter
wire and the other has a .051" diameter wire. The smaller hook is to be
used for the 50 g, 100 g and 200 g ranges. The larger hook is intended
for the 500 g and 1000 g ranges. The larger hook is intentionally a tight
fit to generate a downward pull vector. To further increase proper
readings, keep the unit level and align anything that hangs off the hook
straight beneath it rather than at a sideways angle.
BIOPAC Hardware | SS12LA | Page 1 - 3
SS12LA S-hooks
Updated: 8.22.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
SS12LA SPECIFICATIONS*
Lever Arm Position
(hook ring)
50 grams
100 grams
200 grams
500 grams
1000 grams
Sensitivity
Temperature Range
Thermal Zero Shift*
Thermal Range Shift*
Excitation Voltage
Nonlinearity*
Hysteresis*
Non-repeatability*
30-Minute Creep*
Dimensions
Weight (with mounting rod)
Cable length
Materials
*
Full Scale Range
(FSR)
10Hz Noise
1Hz Noise
50 grams
2.5 mg
1 mg
100 grams
5 mg
2 mg
200 grams
10 mg
4 mg
500 grams
25 mg
10 mg
1000 grams
50 mg
20 mg
1 mV/V (for 5 V excitation, output is 5 mV at full scale)
-10° C to 70° C
<±0.03% FSR/° C
<0.03% Reading/° C
5 VDC
<±0.025% FSR*
<±0.05% FSR*
<±0.05% FSR*
<±0.05% FSR*
19 mm (wide) × 25 mm (thick) × 190 mm (long)
300 g
3 meters
Aluminum: hook rings
Anodized aluminum: housing
Stainless Steel: attachment arm
These parameters assume the transducer is set for a 50 g range. For all other range
settings, force measurements from 10% to 90% full scale are linear to ±1.0%.
CALIBRATION
The SS12LA is easily calibrated using weights of known mass. Ideally, calibration should be performed with
weights that encompass the range of the forces expected during measurement and should cover at least 20% of the
full scale range of the transducer. When calibrating for maximum range on the force transducer, use weights that
correspond to 10% and 90% of the full scale range for best overall performance.
FORCE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION
Calibrating a force transducer is a two step process. The first step involves finding the optimal Gain setting for the
transducer and the second step is the actual calibration.
1) To find the optimal Gain setting:
a) Start with the software Preset for the force range desired.
• To set the Presets: MP3X menu > Setup Channels > Analog Presets > “Force (range)”
b) Load the transducer with the maximum expected weight.
c) Collect data for a few seconds at these settings.
d) Inspect the sample data; look for data that is “railed” or “clipped.” This occurs when the input signal
(times the gain setting) is too large relative to the maximum input range. An example of clipped data
follows.
BIOPAC Hardware | SS12LA | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 8.22.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Gain set too high — Clipped Force data
e) If the signal is clipped, decrease the Gain setting by one step (e.g., from x5000 to x2500) and collect new
data at the lower gain setting.
To access the Gain setting: MP3X menu > Setup Channels > Force preset channel > View/Change
Parameters icon > Gain pull-down menu
f) Repeat this procedure until the signal no longer appears “clipped.”
Once an optimal gain setting for the transducer has been established, this same gain setting can be used for
other similar transducers and similar measurements.
•
2) The next step is to actually calibrate the transducer, which means mapping the input signal to more
meaningful units (such as grams). To do this:
a) Access the Channel scaling dialog box (MP3X menu > Setup Channels > Force preset channel >
View/Change Parameters icon > Scaling button).
Note:
In this sample dialog, a weight of 5 grams
was placed on the transducer and the Cal
1 button was pressed.
The transducer weight was then removed
and Cal 2 was pressed.
b) Place the maximum expected weight or force on the transducer.
c) Click on the Cal 1 button in the Channel scaling window.
• A voltage value will be automatically entered in the corresponding Input value box.
d) Remove all weight or force from the transducer.
e) Click on the Cal 2 button in the same scaling window.
• A voltage value will be automatically entered in the corresponding Input value box.
The transducer will be calibrated to the set values the next time an acquisition is started.
BIOPAC Hardware | SS12LA | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 8.22.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
SS13L PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
The SS13L pressure transducer is used to measure direct arterial or venous
blood pressure in animals or to record pressure changes within a closed
system such as an organ or tissue bath system. Connect to the tubing via the
standard rotating Luer-lok fittings. This assembly consists of a disposable
transducer with a 30 cm cable that attaches to a reusable 3-meter cable that is
designed to interface with the MP3X. The transducer is supplied non-sterile
but can be cold sterilized.
Note: The SS13L Pressure transducer is not intended for use with humans.
Typical software settings for the blood pressure transducer are described in the table below:
Filter 1
Low pass
66.5 Hz
Q = 0.5
Filter 2
Low pass
38.5 Hz
Q = 1.0
Filter 3
Band Stop
60 Hz
Q = 1.0
Hardware filter
1 KHz
Gain
1000
(preset)
Coupling
DC
These settings are automatically applied when the Pressure preset is selected, but settings can be adjusted if
necessary.
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION
Calibrating a blood pressure transducer is a two step process. The first step involves finding the optimal gain
setting for the transducer and the second step is the actual calibration.
1) To find the optimal gain setting:
a) Start with the software Presets (in this case, a gain of 1000)
 To set the Presets: MP3X menu > Set Up Data Acquisition > Channels > Analog Presets > select
“Blood Pressure (Arterial)”
b) Bring the transducer to the approximate maximum and minimum expected pressures.
c) Collect data for a few seconds at these settings.
d) Inspect the sample data; look for data that is
“railed” or “clipped.” This occurs when the input
signal (times the gain setting) is too large relative to
the maximum input range. An example of clipped
data is shown at right.
e) If the signal is clipped, decrease the gain setting by
one step (e.g., from x5000 to x2000) and collect
new data at the lower gain setting.
 To access the Gain setting: MP3X menu >
SetUp Data Acquisition > Channels > Blood
Gain set too high — Clipped BP data
Pressure (Arterial) preset channel > Setup
button > Gain pull-down menu
f) Repeat this procedure until the signal no longer appears “clipped.”
Once an optimal gain setting for the transducer has been established, this same gain setting can be used for
other similar transducers and similar measurements.
2) The next step is to actually calibrate the transducer, which means mapping the input signal to more
meaningful units (such as mmHg). To do this:
a) Access the Channel scaling dialog box (MP3X menu > Set Up Data Acquisition > Channels > Blood
Pressure (Arterial) Preset channel > Setup button > Scaling button).
BIOPAC Hardware | SS13L – RX104A | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 7.16.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Note:
In this sample dialog, the transducer was
brought to a pressure of 50 mmHg and the Cal
1 button was pressed.
The transducer was then brought to a pressure
of 180 mmHg, and Cal 2 was pressed.
b) Bring the transducer to the lowest expected pressure.
c) Click on the Cal 1 button in the Channel scaling window.
 A voltage value will be automatically entered in the corresponding Input value box.
d) Bring the transducer to the highest expected pressure.
e) Click on the Cal 2 button in the same scaling window.
 A voltage value will be automatically entered in the corresponding Input value box.
The software will now interpolate between these two calibration points to give accurate measurements in mmHg.
SS13L PRESSURE TRANSDUCER SPECIFICATIONS
Operational pressure:
Overpressure:
Sensitivity:
Accuracy:
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Volume displacement:
Leakage current:
Dynamic response:
Unbalance:
Connection Ports:
Eight-hour drift:
Isolation:
Defibrillation:
Combined effects of
sensitivity, linearity and
hysteresis:
Transducer cable:
Interface cable:
Transducer dimensions:
Weight:
-50 mmHg to +300 mmHg
-500 mmHg to + 4000 mmHg
25 uV/mmHg (at 5 VDC excitation)
± 1.5% of reading or ± 1.0 mmHg (whichever is greater)
10° C to 40° C
-30° C to +60° C
0.04 mm per 100 mmHg
10 uA RMS @ 115 VAC 50 Hz
100 Hz
50 mmHg max
male Luer and female Luer
(sensors shipped prior to summer 2010 were male Luer on both sides)
1 mmHg after 5-minute warm-up
<= 5 uA leakage at 120 VAC/60 Hz
Withstands 5 charges of 400 joules in 5 minutes across a load
1 mmHg (nominal)
30 cm
3 meters
67 mm long X 25 mm wide
11.5 grams
BIOPAC Hardware | SS13L – RX104A | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 7.16.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
RX104A REPLACEMENT ELEMENT
The RX104A is a replacement element for the SS13L Pressure Transducer. It does not include the Smart Sensor
connector and cable.
BIOPAC Hardware | SS13L – RX104A | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 7.16.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
See also: Tension Adjuster (HDW100A)
SS14L DISPLACEMENT TRANSDUCER
For use in recording very slight movements in a range of physiological
preparations, the SS14L incorporates a semi-isotonic strain gauge and a stainless
steel lever that can be mounted in any position.
SS14L SPECIFICATIONS
Sensitivity Range:
Strain Gauge:
Lever Length:
Support Rod Length:
Cable Length:
Interface:
1 mm to 100 mm
500 ohm silicon
27 cm
15 cm
3 meters
MP3X
BIOPAC Hardware | SS14L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.26.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS25LA HAND DYNAMOMETER
Use the hand dynamometer to measure grip force—use in isolation
or combine with EMG recordings for in-depth studies of muscular
activity. The lightweight, ergonomically designed transducer
provides direct readings in kilograms or pounds. The simple calibration procedure makes this
device easy to use for precise force measurements, and the isometric design improves experiment
repeatability and accuracy. The SS25LA is a basic unit, designed for student lessons; it can also
be used in the MRI, with proper module setup, since it employs plastics in the spring constant.
The highest performance dynamometer is TSD121C, which employs a four terminal, lasertrimmed, Wheatstone bridge built onto metal elements.
Hardware Setup
Connect the SS25LA Simple Sensor to a CH input on the front panel of an MP3X/45 unit.
Proper grip: Place the palm across the shorter bar and wrap fingers to center the force.
Scaling — Software Setup
1) Select Set Up Channels under the MP menu and enable
one analog channel.
2) Select the desired Clench Force Preset (kg or lbs, the example to
the right is shown in units of kg.)
3) Click the Setup button.
4) Click the Scaling button to activate a dialog box similar to the one
shown at right.
5) In the Map value column, note the default scaling of “0” for Cal2
and “100” for Cal1. These represent 0 and 100 kilograms,
respectively.
6) Place the SS25LA on a flat surface.
7) Click the Cal2 button to obtain an initial calibration reading. A value similar to the above example “0.7556”
will appear.
8) To obtain the Cal1 input value, add the Cal2 input value to the default Cal1 3.5 mV per 100 kg value.
(In this example, this value would be 0.7556 mV + 3.5 mV = 4.2556 mV.)
Note: The above instructions are for BSL 4 and higher. In BSL 3.7.7 and earlier, placement of the CAL1 and
CAL2 scale values are reversed.
Optional Calibration Confirmation
a) Click “Start” to begin data acquisition.
b) Place the SS25LA on a flat surface and then place a known
weight on the uppermost portion of the grip.
c) Review the data to confirm that the known weight is reflected
accurately in the data (sample at right).
d) Adjust the Scaling parameters and repeat steps a-c as
necessary.
SS25LA Specifications
Clench Force Range: 0-90 kgf
Nominal Output: 13.2 µV/kgf
Linearity:
8%
Sensitivity:
0.75 kg
Weight:
323 grams
Cable Length:
3 meters
Dimensions:
17.78 cm (long) x 5.59 cm (wide) x 2.59 cm (thick)
BIOPAC Hardware | SS25LA | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 3.6.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS25LB HAND DYNAMOMETER
Use the hand dynamometer to measure grip force—use in isolation
or combine with EMG recordings for in-depth studies of muscular
activity. The lightweight, ergonomically designed transducer
provides direct readings in kilograms or pounds. The simple calibration procedure makes this
device easy to use for precise force measurements, and the isometric design improves experiment
repeatability and accuracy. The SS25LB is a basic unit, designed for student lessons; it can also be
used in the MRI, with proper module setup, since it employs plastics in the spring constant.
The highest performance dynamometer is TSD121C, which employs a four terminal, lasertrimmed, wheatstone bridge built onto metal elements.
Hardware Setup
Connect the SS25LB Simple Sensor to a CH input on the front panel of
an MP36/36R/35/45 unit.
Proper grip: Place the palm across the shorter bar and wrap fingers to
center the force.
Scaling—Software Setup for the MP36/MP36R/MP35/MP45
Note: When using with Biopac Student Lab, the SS25LB is compatible
with versions 4.1 and higher only.
1) Select Set Up Data Acquisition > Channels under the MP menu
and enable one analog channel.
2) Select the desired Clench Force (SS25LB) Preset in units of kg, lbs, or N. (Example above is units of kg.)
3) Click the Setup button.
4) Click the Scaling button to activate a dialog box similar to the one shown at right.
5) In the Map value column, note the default scaling of “0” for Cal 2 and “1.58757” for Cal 1. These
represent 0 and 1.58757 kilograms, respectively. The MAP values must not be altered.
6) Place the SS25LB on a flat surface.
7) Click the Cal 2 button to obtain an initial calibration reading. A value similar to the above example will
appear.
8) To obtain the Cal 1 input value, add the Cal 2 input value to the default Cal 1 10 mV per 1.58757 kg value.
(In the above example, this value would be 0.567636 mV + 10 mV = 10.567636 mV.)
Optional Calibration Confirmation
a) Make sure the SS25LB is connected to the same channel as enabled in
Step 1 above.
b) Click “Start” to begin data acquisition.
c) Place the SS25LB on a flat surface and then place a known weight on
the uppermost portion of the grip.
d) Review the data to confirm that the known weight is reflected accurately in the data (sample above).
e) Adjust the Scaling parameters and repeat steps a-c as necessary.
SS25LB Specifications
Clench Force Range: 0-50 kgf
Nominal Output:
6.299 mV/kgf
Linearity: 6%
Sensitivity: 20
gf
Weight: 323
grams
Cable Length: 3 meters
Dimensions: 17.78 cm (long) x 5.59 cm (wide) x 2.59 cm (thick)
BIOPAC Hardware | SS25LB | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 4.13.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS29L MULTI-LEAD ECG CABLE
The SS29L Multi-Lead ECG Cable permits highresolution ECG recordings. This multi-lead set can
simultaneously record Leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL,
aVF, plus one precordial chest lead V(1-6). A 12Lead ECG recording can be obtained by alternating
the chest lead electrode from position V1 through
V6. The cable terminates in three Smart Sensors that
connect to the MP3X.
SS29L SPECIFICATIONS
Input Cable Length:
Electrode Lead Length:
Internal connection:
2 meters
1 meter
Built-in Wilson terminal
Electrode interface:
Connects to standard snap-connector disposable electrodes (EL503)
BSL Education | SS29L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.16.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS30L ELECTRONIC STETHOSCOPE TRANSDUCER
The SS30L stethoscope was developed to teach the standard procedure for listening to heart sounds and Korotkoff
sounds with a “normal” stethoscope, and record simultaneous sound data. A microphone in the SS30L records
sound as it is heard and the BSL software displays the sound wave during and after recording (a variety of
acoustical signals can be recorded). If ECG is also recorded, the timing of the heart sounds with the ECG can be
correlated. The SS30L can be used with the SS19L Blood Pressure Cuff to record Korotkoff sounds for easy
determination of systolic and diastolic blood pressure. With this combination, it is easy to obtain very accurate
and repeatable results — usually within 10% of those determined by direct measurement.
 No calibration required, just select a Stethoscope Preset
(Heart or Korotkoff Sounds)
See also: Biopac Student Lab Lesson 16 Blood Pressure and Lesson 17 Heart Sounds.
SS30L SPECIFICATIONS
Microphone Bandwidth:
Stethoscope Length:
From Y to acoustic sensor point:
From Y to ears:
Microphone Cable length:
20-100 Hz (does not impact acoustical bandwidth, used for data viewing)
57 cm
21 cm
3 meters
BSL Education | SS30L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.16.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS31L NONINVASIVE CARDIAC OUTPUT SENSOR
The SS31L records the thoracic impedance parameters associated
with Cardiac Output measurements. The SS31L incorporates a
precision high-frequency current source, which injects a very small
(400µA rms) current through the measurement tissue volume defined
by the placement of a set of current source electrodes. A separate set
of monitoring electrodes then measures the voltage developed across
the tissue volume. Because the current is constant, the voltage
measured is proportional to the characteristics of the biological
impedance of the tissue volume. The SS31L outputs impedance (Z)
and derivative of impedance (dZ) in real time. Best used with
BIOPAC’s EL506 Bioimpedance strip electrode.
• Use the SS31L to measure changes in Cardiac Output under a variety of conditions: laying down, sitting
up, standing up, and post-exercise.
• Use on stationary subjects; the SS31L is sensitive to motion artifact.
• See BSL PRO Lesson H21 Impedance Cardiography for sample SS31L setup and data.
Specifications
Outputs:
Impedance (Z)
(50 mV = 100 Ω)
Derivative Impedance (dZ)
(5 mV = 2 Ω/sec)
Operational Frequency:
100 KHz sine wave
Current Level:
400 µA (rms)
Bandwidth: (can limit in BSL PRO software)
Z:
DC – 100 Hz
dZ:
DC – 100 Hz
Dimensions:
14 cm (long) x 9.1 cm (wide) x 2.9 cm (high)
Weight:
400 grams
Electrode clip connects to standard snap electrode (EL506 recommended)
BIOPAC Hardware | SS31L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 6.13.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS36L REFLEX HAMMER
This is a classic reflex hammer with a transducer attached to perform reflex measurements. It uses a Taylor
Hammer—the most common type of reflex hammer used by doctors and nurses—and incorporates electronics to
record the time and the relative strength of the impact. Being able to measure the strength of impact allows
students to take threshold measurements; that is, they can measure how much of an impact is needed to elicit a
response. The hammer only sends a response when contact is made with the subject. See Lessons L20, H16, H28.
BSL Education | SS36L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.17.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS39L BREADBOARD
The Bioengineering Breadboard Lab consists of circuitry hardware and
eight projects (with schematics and design notes) that demonstrate a very
important subset of circuit design for recording and processing physiological
signals. Students will use the MP36/35 and BSL PRO software to evaluate
their designs. See Lessons H25, H26.
Circuitry Hardware





Breadboard
Signal/Power Cable
o 3 x Power Plugs: Green -5 V, Black GND, Red +5 V
o 2 x Signal Wires: White – Signal, Black – GND
o Built-in automatically resettable fuse
Signal Cable (SS60L)
o 2 x Signal Wires: Red – Signal, Black – GND
Electrode Lead Interface
o BSL-TC122: SS2L to SS39L
Accessory Kit (BSL-BMEACC)
o Capacitors, diodes, resistors, jumper wires, and other circuit-building components
Project Book includes schematics for:








Lab 1: Square Wave Oscillator
Lab 2: Instrumentation Amplifier
Lab 3: High Pass Active Filter
Lab 4: Active Gain Block and Low Pass Filter
Lab 5: Notch Filter for 50/60 Hz Rejection
Lab 6: QRS Detection: Band Pass Filter
Lab 7: QRS Detection: Absolute Value Circuit
Lab 8: QRS Detection: Low Pass Filter and Overall System Test
BIOPAC Hardware | SS39L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 2.27.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS40L – 42L DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
SS40L
±2.5 cm H2O
SS41L
±12.5 cm H2O
SS42L
±25 cm H2O
The SS40L-SS42L series differential pressure transducers are designed for low
range pressure monitoring. The transducers plug directly into the MP3X generalpurpose differential amplifier. The differential pressure ports are located on the front
of the transducers and are easily connected to breathing circuits, pneumotachs or plethysmograph boxes. These
transducers are very useful for interfacing a variety of small animal pneumotachs or plethysmographs to the MP
System. The transducers are extremely sensitive and come in three ranges to suit a number of different
applications. RX137 flow heads connect to the SS41L differential pressure transducer via standard 4 mm ID
tubing. Included with each SS46L-SS52L.
SS40L – 42L Specifications
Voltage output (normalized to 1 volt excitation)
SS40L:
330 µV/cm H2O
SS41L:
130 µV/cm H2O
SS42L:
65 µV/cm H2O
Warm-up Drift:
±50 µV
Stability:
±100 µV
Dynamic Response:
100 Hz
Connection Ports/ID tubing Accepted:
3 mm to 4.5 mm
Dimensions: (high) x (wide) x (deep):
8.3 cm x 3.8 cm x 3.2 cm
Weight:
76 grams
Operating Temperature (compensated):
0 to +50 °C
BIOPAC Hardware | SS40L – SS42L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 6.10.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS43L VARIABLE ASSESSMENT (PSYCH) TRANSDUCER
Use this handheld, slide control transducer to record subjective responses to
a variety of different stimuli. Use multiple transducers to allow several
people to simultaneously answer the same question or otherwise respond to
stimuli. Easily customize the response scale by inserting the parameters into
the scale sleeve on the front of the unit.
SS43L Specifications
Scale Output Range:
Scale Resolution:
Slide Control Length:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Cable Length:
0-5 V
Infinitely adjustable
10 cm
4 cm (high) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (wide)
230 grams
7.6 meters
BIOPAC Hardware | SS43L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.26.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
SS53L – SS55L
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
DIGITAL SWITCH SERIES
Use for remote even marking or to externally trigger
data acquisition for psychophysiological response tests
Monitor switch data as a digital input channel.
Connects to the digital input on the MP36/35 only.
SS53L Hand switch
See Lessons H11, H16, H24, H27, H30.
SS54L Foot switch
See Lessons H11, H16, H24, H27, H30.
Switch Type: Pushbutton: ON - OFF
Dimensions: 69 mm (wide), 90 mm (long), 26 mm (high)
Cable Length: 1.8 meters
Connector Type: DSUB 25f
SS55L Eight-channel Marker Box
See Lessons H11, H16, H24, H27, H30.
Independently mark events, or provide responses, on
up to eight channels simultaneously. Assign separate
digital channels as event markers for individual
analog input channels. Easily customize the response
scale by inserting the parameters into the scale
sleeve on the front of the unit.
Switch Type: Pushbutton: ON - OFF
Dimensions: 19 cm (wide), 11 cm (deep), 4 cm (high)
Cable Length: 3 meters
Connector Type: DSUB 25f
BIOPAC Hardware | SS53L – SS55L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.26.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS56L HAND CLENCH FORCE BULB
SS56L measures proportionality of bulb pressure to clench
force in “kgf/m^2” units (a pressure unit). This measure is
accurate for the relative measures recorded in BSL Lesson 2
Electromyography (EMG) II. SS56L is recognized by current
release BSL Lessons.
Specifications
Pressure Range:
BSL: 0 to 10,546 Kgf/m^2
AcqKnowledge: 0 to 1.0546 Kg-f/cm^2
Accuracy:
±3%
Output:
BSL: 0.58 mV/100 Kgf/m^2
AcqKnowledge: 0.58 mV/0.01 Kg-f/cm^2
Bulb Diameter:
5.8 cm
Bulb Length:
11.1 cm
Tubing Length:
3 meters
Weight:
108 g
0 to 15 psi
4.1 mV/psi
Optional BSL PRO Presets:
• Clench Force - kpa (SS56L) - input value 20.48 mV scales to 34.47 kpa
• Clench Force - psi (SS56L) - input value 61.44 mV scales to 15 psi
BIOPAC Hardware | SS56L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.26.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS57L ELECTRODERMAL ACTIVITY (EDA) TRANSDUCER FOR USE WITH DISPOSABLE
ELECTRODES
The SS57L transducer connects to a single MP3X/45 input channel to record
electrodermal activity (changes in skin conductance) or, with modified setup,
skin resistance*. The SS57L operates by applying a fixed 0.5 Volts DC
across the two electrodes and then measures the current flowing between the
two electrodes. Because the voltage (V) is fixed, from Ohms Law, the
conductance (G) will be proportional to the current (I): G = I/V = I/0.5 V.
Circuitry in the SS57L then converts the detected current to a voltage so it
can be measured by the MP device. The software performs the necessary scaling and units conversion. The SS57L
leads connect to two disposable Ag-AgCl electrodes (EL507 or equivalent) that are attached to the Subject. The
electrode leads are shielded to minimize noise interference and improve recordings.
 See the SS3LA for a reusable electrode option.
 For BSL 4.1 and AcqKnowledge 4.4.1 and higher, the SS57LA EDA Lead is the recommended option.
USAGE RECOMMENDATIONS
Presets - BSL PRO (and AcqKnowledge software for MP36R) includes the following EDA presets:
 Electrodermal Activity (EDA), 0-35 Hz; requires calibration—see details below
 Electrodermal Activity (EDA) Change; no calibration required (BSL PRO 4.0.3 and earlier only)
To navigate to the presets in the software, choose MP > Set Up Data Acquisition (BSL 4.1) or Set Up Channels
(BSL 4.0.3 or earlier) > Channels > and select the desired EDA preset from the Preset pop-up menu.
Single-point Calibration for (EDA) 0-35 Hz Preset
1. Disconnect the electrodes.
2. Click “Setup” > “Scaling” button in the software’s EDA preset dialog.
3. Click the Cal 2 button.
4. Add the new Cal 2 value to the default Cal 1 value (example below left, 1000 + 31.3725 = 1031.3725) If
the new Cal 2 value is negative, then subtract that value from Cal 1.
Note that Cal 1 and Cal 2 values are
reversed in software versions BSL 3.7.x
and earlier.
BSL 4.x and AcqKnowledge 4.x EDA Scaling Dialog
BSL 3.7.x EDA Scaling Dialog
Setup - There must be good electrical connections between the skin and the electrodes for EDA to work properly.
Gel – It is recommended that an isotonic gel (GEL101 or equivalent) be added to the disposable electrodes to
assure optimal skin contact.
1. Apply a small dot of GEL to each electrode being careful not to get any on the adhesive portion.
2. Attach the electrodes to the subject.
3. Wait 5 minutes (minimum) before starting to record data to allow the gel to penetrate the skin.
BIOPAC Hardware | SS57L | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 7.28.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
*Measuring skin resistance - Use an Expression calculation channel to take reciprocal of conductance, and
then apply proper scaling.
Tip
To detect a good signal, subjects should have a little sweat on their hands (not a lot, but
enough so that their hands are not completely smooth or cold). If subjects wash their
hands just prior to the recording or if they have been sitting in a cold room, then they
must do something to activate the sweat glands before beginning calibration or
recording. If subjects begin with colder hands, the scale will be diminished and the signal
will be easily saturated once they “warm up” during the lesson.
SS57L SPECIFICATIONS
Electrode Type:
Excitation:
Requires two Ag/AgCl disposable electrodes (EL507)
0.5 V DC
Range:
Connector Type:
0.1-100 siemens (normal human range is 1-20 siemens)
9 Pin DIN
Pinch Leads:
Red (+), Black (GND)
Weight:
Cable Length:
4.5 grams
2 meters
BIOPAC Hardware | SS57L | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 7.28.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS57LA EDA LEAD FOR DISPOSABLE SETUPS
Two pinch leads snap to two EL507 disposable EDA (isotonic gel) electrodes and
terminate in a two-conductor shielded cable with DSub9 connector.
 Delivers 5% accuracy out of the box and needs no additional calibration.
This disposable setup is an alternative to the reusable SS3LA EDA (GSR)
Transducer.
Interface:
BSL Systems:
MP36, MP35, or MP45 running BSL 4.1 or above
Not compatible with MP30
Research Systems: MP36R direct CH input
MP150 via DA100C (Gain: 1000; Bandwidth: DC to 10 Hz) + TCI114
Range:
0.1-100 µMho (normal human range is 1-20 µMho)
Excitation:
0.5 V DC
Pinch Leads:
Red (+), Black (GND)
Accuracy:
Within 5% without calibration
BIOPAC Hardware | SS57LA | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.28.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS60L SIGNAL CABLE FOR SS39L BREADBOARD
Use this signal cable to add signal inputs to the SS39L Signal Processing Breadboard, which ships with one
combination power/signal cable.
BSL Education | SS60L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.17.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS61L FINGER TWITCH TRANSDUCER
Palmar attachment recommended: “UP” label facing out
“UP” label toward skin for posterior (dorsal) attachment
Use this transducer to record finger twitch responses from human subjects receiving electrical stimulation (using
the HSTM01). The transducer conforms to the shape of the finger and attaches via a Velcro® strap and tape.
SPECIFICATIONS
Transducer Dimensions:
14.6 cm (long), 0.50 cm (wide)
Weight:
6 grams
Maximum Bend:
180 (can be fully curled)
BIOPAC Hardware | SS61L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 2.12.2013
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
SS62L SPEECH FREQUENCY MICROPHONE
Use this precision microphone for speech
frequency analysis and other acoustic
studies. For use with the MP36/35 only,
requires continuous high-speed sample
rate.
BSL Education | SS62L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.17.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS63L – SS66L FORCE TRANSDUCER SERIES
SS63L Force Transducer - 50 g
SS64L Force Transducer - 100 g
SS65L Force Transducer – 200 g
SS66L Force Transducer - 500 g
SS63L – SS66L Specifications
Noise: with 10 Hz LP filter:
with 1 Hz LP Filter:
Temperature:
Mounting rod:
Weight:
Dimensions (L x W x Thick):
2.5 mg
1.0 mg
-10° C to 70° C
9.5 mm (diameter), variable orientation
250 g
100 mm x 19 mm x 25 mm
BIOPAC Hardware | SS63L – SS66L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.26.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS67L PRESSURE PAD/RESPIRATION TRANSDUCER
The SS67L consists of an SS41L differential pressure transducer, RX110 pressure pad, and tubing.
The multipurpose pressure pad/respiration transducer can be used to:
1. Noninvasively measure respiration—from a small mouse to a human.
2. Measure small pressing forces (like pinching fingers together) for Parkinson's evaluations.
3. Measure human smiling (with the sensor on the cheekbone).
4. Measure pulse when placed close to the heart.
5. Measure spacing and pressure between teeth coming together.
See RX110 for sensor specifications.
See also: MRI Compatibility Notes
RX110 PRESSURE PAD
The RX110 is a self-inflating pressure pad connected to tubing terminating in a Luer male connector. The RX110
pressure pad is included with the SS67L Pressure Pad/Respiration Transducer. The RX110 sensor can be used
many times, but may eventually need to be replaced because it is a sensitive pressure pad and may become
damaged with rough use. Use TAPE1 or other single-sided adhesive to affix to the subject.
RX110 SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor Pad Diameter:
Sensor Pad Thickness:
Sensor Tubing Diameter:
Sensor Tubing Length:
Sensor Tubing ID:
Tubing Termination:
20 mm
3.18 mm
2.2 mm
1 m  use BIOPAC tubing M106 for extra length
1.6 mm
Luer male
BIOPAC Hardware | SS67L – RX110 | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 1.31.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SS68L PH PROBE TRANSDUCER
The SS68L probe transducer can measure pH within the range of 0-14.
The electrode provides approximately a single digit pH value change for every 5 mV
change in the electrode reading, either positive or negative depending on whether the
pH is above 7 or below it.
•
A neutral buffer solution of pH 7 will read about 0 mV.
•
A solution with a pH of 10 will read about –15 mV.
•
A solution with a pH of 3 will read about 20 mV.
The SS68L pH Transducer includes a double-junction pH Probe and an interface to the Biopac Student Lab MP
unit.
• Order probe only as RXPROBE01
• To use the BSL with an existing (BNC terminated) pH probe, order the interface only as BSL-TCI21.
SS68L SPECIFICATIONS
Type:
Refillable:
Body:
Length:
Weight:
Diameter:
Double junction
Yes
Glass
3.25 m
3.5 ounces
1.2 cm
BIOPAC Hardware | SS68L | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.26.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
SS69L DISSOLVED OXYGEN PROBE TRANSDUCER
Order probe only as RXPROBE02
Order interface only as BSL-TCI16
SS69L Components
The SS69L transducer measures dissolved oxygen. The SS69L includes a dissolved oxygen probe and an
interface to the MP36/MP35 Data Acquisition Unit.
The dissolved oxygen probe can be used to measure the concentration of dissolved oxygen in water samples
tested in the field or in the laboratory. Use this sensor to perform a wide variety of tests or experiments to
determine changes in dissolved oxygen levels, one of the primary indicators of the quality of an aquatic
environment:

Monitor dissolved oxygen in an aquarium containing different combinations of plant and animal
species.

Measure changes in dissolved oxygen concentration resulting from photosynthesis and respiration in
aquatic plants.

Use this sensor for an accurate on-site test of dissolved oxygen concentration in a stream or lake
survey, in order to evaluate the capability of the water to support different types of plant and animal
life.

Measure Biological Oxygen Demand (B.O.D.) in water samples containing organic matter that
consumes oxygen as it decays.

Determine the relationship between dissolved oxygen concentration and temperature of a water
sample.
See also: BSL PRO Lesson #A07 Fish Respiration and Q10.
Components Dissolved O2 probe
Sodium Sulfate calibration standard (2.0 M Na2SO3)
Replacement membrane cap Dissolved O2 electrode filling solution
Calibration bottle & pipette
Polishing strips
Interface
Use with BIOPAC BSL-TCI16 Transducer Connector to record with a BIOPAC MP36/35 Data
Acquisition Unit.
Usage
There are four steps to using the Dissolved O2 probe:
1. Setup
2. Warm-up
3. Calibration — optional
4. Recording
BIOPAC Hardware | SS69L | Page 1 - 6
Updated: 7.30.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
1. Setup
a. Remove and discard the blue protective cap
from the tip of the probe.
b. Unscrew the membrane cap from the tip of
the probe.
c. Use a pipette to fill the membrane cap with 1
mL of the Electrode Filling Solution.
d. Carefully thread the membrane cap back onto
the electrode.
e. Place the probe into a beaker filled with about
100 mL of distilled water.
2. Warm-up
a. Insert the BT connector on the RXPROBEO2 into the BSL-TCI16 transducer connector.
b. Connect the BSL-TCI16 transducer connector to the MP data acquisition unit.
c. Turn the MP unit ON and wait 10 minutes for the probe to warm up.
 The probe must stay connected to the interface at all times to keep it warmed up. If the probe
is disconnected for more than a few minutes, the warm-up routine will need to be repeated.
Calibration — optional

Calibration is optional. To measure relative change, probe calibration is not essential. To
improve accuracy for discrete measurements, probe calibration is recommended.
Calibration in BSL 4.x or AcqKnowledge 4.x software for MP36R:
a. First Calibration Point (Zero-Oxygen)
i) Launch the BIOPAC software and open the
scaling dialog for the probe channel.
(MP36/35 menu > Set Up Data Acquisition >
Channels > Setup > Scaling Button.)
ii) Remove the probe from the water and place the
tip of the probe into the Sodium Sulfite
calibration solution as shown.
IMPORTANT: No air bubbles can be trapped below the tip of the probe or the calibration will be distorted.
If the voltage does not rapidly decrease, tap the side of the bottle with the probe to dislodge any bubbles.
iii) Wait until the voltage stabilizes (~2 minutes), and press the CAL 2 button. The Map value
result should be in the 0.2 - 0.5 mV range.
b.
Second Calibration Point (Saturated Dissolved O2)
i) Rinse the probe with distilled water and gently blot dry.
ii) Unscrew the lid of the calibration bottle and slide the grommet approximately 12 mm
(1/2”) onto the probe body.
BIOPAC Hardware | SS69L | Page 2 - 6
Updated: 7.30.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
iii) Add water to the bottle to the
depth of about 6 mm (1/4”) and
screw the bottle into the cap as
shown. IMPORTANT: Do not
touch the membrane or get it
wet during this step.
iv) Keep the probe in the position
for about one minute and then
press the CAL 1 button. The
Map value result should be
above 2 mV.
v) Enter a Saturated Dissolved O2 value (in mg/L) from Table 1, based on the current
barometric pressure and air pressure values. If necessary, use Table 2 to estimate the air
pressure at the current altitude. The example scaling on the previous page (9.94) is based
upon an ambient temperature of 16 C and a barometric pressure of 760 mm. (To calibrate
and monitor using Percent Saturation, use the conversion formula on the following page.)
Calibration in BSL 3.7.x software:
(CAL 1 and CAL 2 values are reversed from BSL 4, uses “Scale value” instead of “Map value”)
a. First Calibration Point (Zero-Oxygen)
i)
Launch the BIOPAC software and generate
the scaling dialog for the probe channel.
(MP menu > Set Up Channels > View/Change
Parameters > Scaling Button.)
ii) Enter 0 for CAL 1 Scale value.
iii) Remove the probe from the water and place
the tip of the probe into the Sodium Sulfite
calibration solution.
IMPORTANT: No air bubbles can be trapped
below the tip of the probe or the calibration will be
distorted. If the voltage does not rapidly decrease, tap the side of the bottle with the probe to
dislodge any bubbles.
iv) Wait until the voltage stabilizes (~2 minutes), press the CAL 1 button. The Input value
result should be in the 0.2 - 0.5 mV range.
b. Second Calibration Point (Saturated Dissolved O2)
i) Rinse the probe with distilled water and gently blot dry.
ii) Unscrew the lid of the calibration bottle and slide the grommet approx. 12 mm (1/2”) onto
the probe body.
iii) Add water to the bottle to the depth of about 6 mm (1/4”) and screw the bottle into the cap.
IMPORTANT: Do not touch the membrane or get it wet during this step.
iv) Keep the probe in the position for about one minute and then press the CAL 2 button. The
Input value result should be above 2 mV.
v) Enter a Saturated Dissolved O2 value (in units of mg/L) from Table 1 as the CAL 2 scale
value, based on the current barometric pressure and air pressure values. If necessary, use
Table 2 to estimate the air pressure at the current altitude. The example scaling above right
(9.94) is based upon an ambient temperature of 16 C and a barometric pressure of 760
mm. (To calibrate and monitor using Percent Saturation, use the conversion formula on the
following page.)
BIOPAC Hardware | SS69L | Page 3 - 6
Updated: 7.30.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Calibration and Monitoring Using Units of Percent Saturation
Instead of calibrating using units of mg/L (equal to parts per million or ppm), you may also choose to calibrate
dissolved oxygen using units of % saturation. When doing a calibration for units of % saturation, the calibration
point done in the sodium sulfite solution (zero oxygen) is assigned a value of 0%, and that for water-saturated air
(or air-saturated water) is given a value of 100%. It must be noted, however, that 100% represents an oxygensaturated solution only at that particular temperature, pressure, and salinity level. If you intend to compare your
measured dissolved oxygen values with data collected under a different set of conditions, a preferable method
would be to use units of mg/L.
To convert the %O2 to mg/L, use the following formulae:
% Saturation = (actual DO2 result / Saturated DO2 value from Table 1) x 100
For example, if the probe result is 6.1 mg/L at a temperature of 20º C and a pressure of 740 mmHg, the
corresponding Table 1 value is 8.93 mg/L, so % Saturation = (6.1 / 8.93) x 100 = 68%
BSL 4.x: Set CAL 2 Map value to 0% and CAL 1 Map value to 100% and then press the CAL 1 button to map
the probe voltage, proportional to dissolved O2 to 100%.
BSL 3.7.x: Set CAL 1 Scale value to 0% and CAL 2 Scale value to 100% and then press the CAL 2
button to map the probe voltage, proportional to dissolved O2 to 100%. (Set units label to mg/L)
Table 1
Dissolved O2 (mg/L) in air-saturated distilled water (at various temp. & pressure)
0C
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
8C
9C
10C
11C
12C
13C
14C
15C
16C
17C
18C
19C
20C
21C
22C
23C
24C
25C
26C
27C
28C
29C
30C
31C
32C
33C
34C
35C
770
mm
14.76
14.38
14.01
13.65
13.31
12.97
12.66
12.35
12.05
11.77
11.50
11.24
10.98
10.74
10.51
10.29
10.07
9.86
9.67
9.47
9.29
9.11
8.94
8.78
8.62
8.47
8.32
8.17
8.04
7.90
7.77
7.64
7.51
7.39
7.27
7.15
760
mm
14.59
14.19
13.82
13.47
13.13
12.81
12.49
12.19
11.90
11.62
11.35
11.09
10.84
10.60
10.37
10.15
9.94
9.74
9.54
9.35
9.17
9.00
8.83
8.66
8.51
8.36
8.21
8.07
7.93
7.80
7.67
7.54
7.42
7.29
7.17
7.05
750
mm
14.38
14.00
13.64
13.29
12.96
12.64
12.33
12.03
11.74
11.46
11.20
10.94
10.70
10.46
10.24
10.02
9.81
9.61
9.41
9.23
9.05
8.88
8.71
8.55
8.40
8.25
8.10
7.96
7.83
7.69
7.57
7.44
7.32
7.20
7.08
6.96
740
mm
14.19
13.82
13.46
13.12
12.79
12.47
12.16
11.87
11.58
11.31
11.05
10.80
10.56
10.32
10.10
9.88
9.68
9.48
9.29
9.11
8.93
8.76
8.59
8.44
8.28
8.14
7.99
7.86
7.72
7.59
7.47
7.34
7.22
7.10
6.98
6.87
730
mm
13.00
13.63
13.28
12.94
12.61
12.30
12.00
11.71
11.43
11.16
10.90
10.65
10.41
10.18
9.96
9.75
9.55
9.35
9.16
8.98
8.81
8.64
8.48
8.32
8.17
8.03
7.78
7.75
7.62
7.49
7.36
7.24
7.12
7.01
6.89
6.78
720
mm
13.80
13.44
13.10
12.76
12.44
12.13
11.83
11.55
11.27
11.01
10.75
10.51
10.27
10.04
9.83
9.62
9.42
9.22
9.04
8.86
8.69
8.52
8.36
8.21
8.06
7.92
7.78
7.64
7.51
7.39
7.26
7.14
7.03
6.91
6.80
6.68
710
mm
13.61
13.26
12.92
12.59
12.27
11.96
11.67
11.39
11.11
10.85
10.60
10.36
10.13
9.90
9.69
9.48
9.29
9.10
8.91
8.74
8.57
8.40
8.25
8.09
7.95
7.81
7.67
7.54
7.41
7.28
7.16
7.04
6.93
6.81
6.70
6.59
700
mm
13.42
13.07
12.73
12.41
12.10
11.80
11.51
11.23
10.96
10.70
10.45
10.21
9.99
9.77
9.55
9.35
9.15
8.97
8.79
8.61
8.45
8.28
8.13
7.98
7.84
7.70
7.56
7.43
7.30
7.18
7.06
6.94
6.83
6.72
6.61
6.50
690
mm
13.23
12.88
12.55
12.23
11.92
11.63
11.34
11.07
10.80
10.55
10.30
10.07
9.84
9.63
9.42
9.22
9.02
8.84
8.66
8.49
8.33
8.17
8.01
7.87
7.72
7.59
7.45
7.33
7.20
7.08
6.96
6.85
6.73
6.62
6.51
6.40
680
mm
13.04
12.70
12.37
12.05
11.75
11.46
11.18
10.91
10.65
10.39
10.15
9.92
9.70
9.49
9.28
9.08
8.89
8.71
8.54
8.37
8.20
8.05
7.90
7.75
7.61
7.48
7.35
7.22
7.10
6.98
6.86
6.75
6.63
6.53
6.42
6.31
BIOPAC Hardware | SS69L | Page 4 - 6
670
mm
12.84
12.51
12.19
11.88
11.58
11.29
11.01
10.75
10.49
10.24
10.00
9.78
9.56
9.35
9.14
8.95
8.76
8.58
8.41
8.24
8.08
7.93
7.78
7.64
7.50
7.37
7.24
7.11
6.99
6.87
6.76
6.65
6.54
6.43
6.32
6.22
660
mm
12.65
12.32
12.01
11.70
11.40
11.12
10.85
10.59
10.33
10.09
9.86
9.63
9.41
9.21
9.01
8.82
8.63
8.45
8.28
8.12
7.96
7.81
7.67
7.52
7.39
7.26
7.13
7.01
6.89
6.77
6.66
6.55
6.44
6.33
6.23
6.13
650
mm
12.46
12.14
11.82
11.52
11.23
10.95
10.68
10.42
10.18
9.94
9.71
9.48
9.27
9.07
8.87
8.68
8.50
8.33
8.16
8.00
7.84
7.69
7.55
7.41
7.28
7.15
7.02
6.90
6.78
6.67
6.56
6.45
6.34
6.24
6.13
6.03
Updated: 7.30.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
TABLE 2
Elevation barometric pressure (based on barometric air pressure of 760 mmHg at sea level)
Elev.
(feet)
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
Pressure
(mmHg)
760
753
746
739
733
727
Elev.
(feet)
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
2750
Pressure
(mmHg)
720
714
708
702
695
689
Elev.
(feet)
3000
3250
3500
3750
4000
4250
Pressure
(mmHg)
683
677
671
665
659
653
Elev.
(feet)
4500
4750
5000
5250
5500
5750
Pressure
(mmHg)
647
641
635
629
624
618
Recording
a. Place the tip of the probe into the sample to be measured. Submerge the tip about 4-6 cm (2”).
b. Gently stir the probe in the sample. IMPORTANT: Keep stirring the probe in the sample—water
must always be flowing past the probe tip for accurate measurements. As the probe measures the
concentration of dissolved oxygen, it removes oxygen from the water at the junction of the probe
membrane. If the probe is left still in calm water, reported dissolved O2 measurements will appear to
be dropping.
c. For this O2 measurement to be valid, the sample must be at the same pressure and temperature as
calibration solution.
How the Dissolved Oxygen Probe Works
The Dissolved Oxygen Probe is a Clark-type polarographic electrode that senses the oxygen concentration in
water and aqueous solutions. A platinum cathode and a silver/silver chloride reference anode in KCl electrolyte
are separated from the sample by a gas-permeable plastic membrane.
A fixed voltage is applied to the platinum electrode. As oxygen diffuses through the membrane to the cathode, it
is reduced:
1/2 O2 + H2O + 2e- 2 → OH‾
The oxidation taking place at the reference electrode (anode) is:
Ag + Cl- → AgCl + e‾
Accordingly, a current will flow that is proportional to the rate of diffusion of oxygen, and in turn to the
concentration of dissolved oxygen in the sample. This current is converted to a proportional voltage, which is
amplified and read by the MP hardware and BIOPAC software.
Storage
< 24 hours: Store the probe with the membrane end submerged in about 3 cm (1”) cm of distilled water
> 24 hours: Remove the membrane cap, rinse the inside and outside of the cap with distilled water, and
then shake the membrane cap dry. Rinse the exposed anode and cathode inner elements, and then blot dry
with a lab wipe. Reinstall the membrane cap loosely onto the electrode body for storage—do not tighten.
Polishing
The anode or cathode inner elements become discolored or appear corroded, use the polishing strips
provided (once a year is generally sufficient). Contact BIOPAC for polishing details if necessary.
BIOPAC Hardware | SS69L | Page 5 - 6
Updated: 7.30.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Maintaining and Replenishing the Sodium Sulfite Calibration Solution
The 2.0 M sodium sulfite (Na2SO3) solution can be prepared from solid sodium sulfite crystals: Add 25.0 g of
solid anhydrous sodium sulfite crystals (Na2SO3) to enough distilled water to yield a final volume of 100 mL of
solution. The sodium sulfite crystals do not need to be reagent grade; laboratory grade will work fine. Many high
school chemistry teachers will have this compound in stock. Prepare the solution 24 hours in advance of doing the
calibration to ensure that all oxygen has been depleted. If solid sodium sulfite is not available, substitute either 2.0
M sodium hydrogen sulfite solution, (sodium bisulfite, 20.8 g of NaHSO3 per 100 mL of solution) or 2.0 M
potassium nitrite (17.0 g of KNO2 per 100 mL of solution).
BIOPAC Hardware | SS69L | Page 6 - 6
Updated: 7.30.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
BSL STIMULATORS
Modular Stimulators (0-100 V):
BSLSTMB for MP36/36R/35
BSLSTMA for MP30
Low Voltage Stimulator/Adapter:
OUT3 Output Adapter for built-in Stimulator (MP36 only)
SS58L Low Voltage Stimulator (MP35 only)
See also: HSTM01, ELSTM1, ELSTM2, EL300S and EL400 electrodes.
BSLSTMB
BSLSTMA
Lab set up note
Placing the BSLSTMA/B unit too close to
MP3X hardware can result in data distortion
of the BSLSTMA/B pulse width signal; the
distortion is more apparent at higher sampling
rates.
 NEVER set the BSLSTMA/B atop an
MP3X
 Position the BSLSTMA/B away from the
MP3X to reduce the signal distortion
Note
The older “BSLSTM” uses dial reading and a flip range switch. The same guidelines and
cautions described here apply, except when noted.
The BSLSTM Stimulator works in conjunction with the Biopac Student Lab System to allow precise stimulus
pulse outputting. Use the BSLSTM and the BSL PRO to perform a wide array of measurements, such as:



Twitch sub-threshold & threshold
Maximum twitch responses
Single twitch, summation



Muscle tension/length vs. force
Tetanic contraction


Fatigue
Velocity
Nerve conduction
STIMULATOR PULSE DEFINITIONS
Pulse width
The time that the pulse is in the non-zero or active state.
Delay before first pulse
The initial delay from the start of acquisition to the start of the first pulse.
Repetition period
The time between pulses, as measured from the start of one pulse to the start
of the next pulse. This is the inverse of the Pulse rate.
Pulse rate
The number of pulses that occur in a one-second interval, expressed in Hz.
The Pulse rate relates to the Pulse period as follows:
BIOPAC Hardware | STIMULATORS MP3X | Page 1 - 9
Updated: 5.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Pulse rate (Hz) = 1000 / Repetition period (milliseconds)
Also called —
Pulse frequency
Repetition rate
Events per second
Pulse Repetition
Use when referring to either Pulse rate or Pulse period.
Pulse level
The amplitude of the pulse, expressed in Volts.
The output of the BSLSTM is 0 Volts when the pulse is not active.
Number of pulses
The number of successive pulses that will be sent out at the selected Pulse
Width, Pulse Rate, or Pulse Period, and Pulse Level.
FRONT PANEL TERMINOLOGY
BSLSTMA/B — Digital Display & Keyed Switch
BSLSTM — Dial Reading & Flip Switch
Range control
Establishes the stimulus pulse output level range in Volts (0-10 Volts or 0-100 Volts).
BSLSTMA/B key control: Turn right to select a range of 0-10 Volts.
Turn left to select a range of 0-100 Volts.
Remove the key for added safety and control.
BSLSTM switch control: Flip down to select a range of 0-10 Volts.
Flip up to select a range of 0-100 Volts.
 If the Range is changed before recording begins, the Preset must also be
changed (under the “Setup channels” option of the MP3X menu) in order to
maintain direct Level recordings.
 If the Range is changed during recording, the user should manually enter a
software marker to note the change (by holding down F9 on a PC or Esc key on
a Mac). The pulse Level could then be determined by (mentally) moving the
decimal place to the right or left, depending on how the Range was changed.
Reference
BSLSTMA/B only: Refers to the pulse width of the signal on the Reference Output (on
the back panel).
 Actual reflects the actual output width.
 Fixed (15 ms) establishes a pulse width of 15 ms, regardless of the actual
pulse width.
The Reference control only affects the pulse width; in either case, the pulse level reflects
the actual output level.
Level is used in conjunction with Range to set the stimulus pulse output level.
BSLSTMA/B digital display: Turn the Level control (right to increase, left to decrease)
to establish the desired Level, as indicated on the digital display.
BSLSTM knob dial: The Level knob has a “Major scale” and a “Minor scale” which
indicate the voltage level as shown below:
Range switch
Major scale
Minor scale
0-10 V
Volts
Volt / 10
0-100 V
Volts x 10
Volts
Level
Turning the Level knob clockwise increases the voltage level, and turning it
counterclockwise decreases the voltage. In the following close-up of the Level knob, the
BIOPAC Hardware | STIMULATORS MP3X | Page 2 - 9
Updated: 5.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
level reads 5.1 Volts (Range 0-10 V) or 51 Volts (Range 0-100 V).
As shown in the following diagram, the indicator mark is between the two dials.
Stimulus output
Pulse indicator
Power indicator
Close-up of “Level” adjustment knob
Stimulus pulse output for connection to external electrodes or other devices. This is a
standard BNC style connector.
LED flashes when the stimulus pulse is active: BSLSTMA/B = red. BSLSTM = green.
Activated when the DC adapter is plugged in and the power switch on the back panel is
turned ON.
BSLSTMA/B: The LCD display is activated.
BSLSTM: LED indicator lights green
BACK PANEL TERMINOLOGY
Power switch
Rocker switch for turning the BSLSTM power ON and OFF.
Fuse holder
If the fuse blows and must be replaced, use a screwdriver to open (counterclockwise) and
close (clockwise) the fuse cap.
Socket for BIOPAC DC adapter.
DC Input
Trigger cable
Connects to the Analog Out connector on the back of the MP3X acquisition unit. The
MP3X sends the Pulse width and Pulse rate information via this cable.
Manual Test
button
Used to diagnose problems with the BSLSTM stimulator unit.
When the Trigger and Reference Output cables are disconnected from
the MP3X , the Manual Test button can be used to initiate a stimulus with
a fixed pulse width of 2.5 milliseconds.
Reference Output
Cable
The stimulus marker output is labeled Reference Output on the back panel of the
BSLSTM. This output cable connects to any of the four channel inputs (CH1, CH 2, CH
3, or CH 4) on the front of the MP3X acquisition unit. The output cable carries the
stimulator marker pulse to the MP3X. The marker pulse has a fixed pulse width 15 ms
and is generated each time the stimulator generates a pulse.
 BSLSTMA/B: Use the front panel Reference switch to select Actual or Fixed.
 BSLSTM has a fixed pulse width of 15 ms, selected so that the MP30 can capture
the pulse with a sample rate as low as 100 samples per second.
If the BSL PRO software has been setup correctly, the amplitude of this marker will
reflect the Level knob setting on the BSLSTM. See the Range switch section for
information on how this reading can be affected.
BIOPAC Hardware | STIMULATORS MP3X | Page 3 - 9
Updated: 5.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Calibration
The “Reference Output” signal from the BSLSTM must be calibrated to ensure accurate
results.
Preset (via MP3X menu > Set Up Data Acquisition >
1. Choose the correct
Channels).

For example, if using the BSLSTMA/B, (this Preset found in older BSL
3.7.x software only) don’t choose a “BSLSTM...” Preset.

Also, make sure the Preset matches the Voltage Range that will be used (010 V, or 0-100 V).
2. With stimulator connected and ON, turn the Level control counter-clockwise
until the display reads 0 (or as close to 0 as possible).
3. Get into the Scaling window for the Reference Output channel (via MP3X menu
>
).
> Set Up Data Acquisition > Channels >
4. Press the Cal 2 button to obtain the signal representing 0 V out of the stimulator.
5. Add the Input value found in Cal 2 to the Input Value displayed for Cal 1.

For example, if “Cal 2” is pressed and provides an Input Value of .255 V,
add the number .255 V to the existing 50 V and manually enter the total
value of 50.255 V for Cal 1 Input Value.

Note: Even if the Cal 2 Input Value is negative, it must still be “added” to the
number for Cal 1 (which essentially subtracts it) to arrive at the proper value.
6. Click OK to close out of the Scaling window and then close out of the Setup
Channel window. The system is now ready to record.
7. Optional: Save the setup as a Graph Template to save these new scale settings.
As long as neither the MP3X nor stimulator changes, the calibration should not
need to be repeated.
NOTE: In earlier versions of BSL software (3.7.x) the Cal 1 and Cal 2 fields
are reversed in the Scaling dialog. To calibrate using this older
software, reverse the above instructions for Cal 1 and Cal 2.
BIOPAC Hardware | STIMULATORS MP3X | Page 4 - 9
Updated: 5.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
CONNECTING THE BSLSTM TO THE MP3X
1) Turn the MP3X unit OFF.
2) Confirm that Power switch on the back of the BSLSTM is in the OFF position.
3) Set the Range on the front of the BSLSTM to 0-10 V.
4) Set the Level to 1 Volt.
 BSLSTM: 1 Volt is set when the Major Scale (top number) is 1 and the Minor Scale (lower number)
is 0.
5) Plug the Trigger cable (female DB9 connector) from the back of the BSLSTM into the Analog Out port
(DB9 Male connector) on the back of the MP3X.
6) Plug the Reference Output cable (Male DB9 connector) from the back of the BSLSTM into an open
channel input port (DB9 female connectors: CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, or CH 4) on the front of the MP3X.
7) Plug the 12 Volt DC adapter into the wall.
8) Mate the DC output connector on the end of the adapter cable to the DC Input socket on the back of the
BSLSTM.
 Make sure the connector is pressed in completely.
9) Plug the stimulator electrode assembly into the BNC connector on the front of the stimulator, labeled
Output on the BSLSTMA/B and Stimulus Output on the BSLSTM.
10) Place the BSLSTMA/B unit away from the MP3X. Placing the BSLSTMA/B too close to MP3X
hardware can result in data distortion of the BSLSTMA/B pulse width signal; the distortion is more
apparent at higher sampling rates.
 NEVER set the BSLSTMA/B atop an MP3X.
 Position the BSLSTMA/B away from the MP3X to reduce the signal distortion.
BIOPAC Hardware | STIMULATORS MP3X | Page 5 - 9
Updated: 5.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
BSLSTMA/B SPECIFICATIONS
Pulse width
Controlled by:
Range:
Resolution:
Accuracy:
Correction factor
Pulse Repetition
Controlled by:
Pattern:
Ranges—No Load:
Ranges—Load:
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
(This new unit has digital display and a keyed range switch)
Computer, with lockable width limit
0.49 – 100 milliseconds
2 microseconds
5% (Can be improved to better than 2% using the “Correction factor” in the
“Stimulator Preferences’ window.)
Range: 0 - 150 microseconds
Average value: 60 microseconds
Limits:
Resolution:
Accuracy:
Computer-based software (BSL or AcqKnowledge)
Selectable (1-254 pulses) or continuous
5 seconds - .499 milliseconds Period (.2 - 3,333 Hz Rate)
2 K Ohm load
0 - 10 Volt Range: 5 seconds to the following minimum repetition period:
100 ms P.W.
300 ms
10 ms P.W.
30 ms
1 ms P.W.
3 ms
0 - 100 Volt Range: 5 seconds to the following minimum repetition period:
100 ms P.W.
100 Volts:
1 second
50 Volts:
300 ms
10 ms P.W.
100 Volts:
400 ms
50 Volts:
30 ms
1 ms P.W.
100 Volts:
4 ms
50 Volts:
3 ms
User adjustable lower and upper rate limits
2 microseconds
Better than 2%
Time range:
Resolution:
Off or .5 - 100 milliseconds (software controlled)
2 microseconds
Initial Pulse Delay
Pulse level
Control:
Range (selectable with Key
Switch):
Current Output:
Accuracy:
Reference Output
Pulse width:
Amplitude:
Manual Test Pulse
Pulse Width:
Stimulator isolation
Volts:
Capacitance coupling:
Power requirements
Fuse
Fuse Dimensions:
Module Weight
Module Dimensions
Manual (10 turn potentiometer)
Range 1: .025 - 10 Volts
Range 2: .12 - 100 Volts
Infinite (potentiometer adjustable) range
1 ms pulse:
500 ma
100 µs pulse: 1000 ma
5% accuracy to digital readout
Correlates to actual pulse output (Requires Calibration)
Fixed (15 millisecond) or Direct (follows actual pulse output)
0 - 50 mV correlates to 0 – 10 V actual output or 0 – 100 V actual output.
(Button on back panel)
Note: Will only function when “Trigger” cable is not connected to the MP3X.
1 millisecond
2,000 Volts DC (HI POT test)
60 pF
12 Volts DC adapter (included), 1 Amp
250 V, 2 A, fast blow
1.25” length  .25” diameter
610 grams
16 cm x 16 cm x 5 cm
BIOPAC Hardware | STIMULATORS MP3X | Page 6 - 9
Updated: 5.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
BSLSTM SPECIFICATIONS
Pulse width
Controlled by:
Range:
Resolution:
Accuracy:
Correction factor
Pulse Repetition
Controlled by:
Pattern:
Range—No Load:
Range—Load:
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
(This older unit uses dial reading and a flip range switch)
Computer, with lockable width limit
.2 – 100 milliseconds
2 microseconds
5% (Can be improved to better than 2% using the “Correction factor” in the
“Stimulator Preferences’ window.)
Range: 0 - 150 microseconds
Average value: 110 microseconds
Limits:
Resolution:
Accuracy:
Computer-based software
Selectable (1-254 pulses) or continuous
5 seconds - .3 milliseconds Period (.2 - 3,333 Hz Rate)
2 K Ohm load
0 - 10 Volt Range: 5 seconds to the following minimum repetition period:
100 ms P.W.
150 ms
10 ms P.W.
10.1 ms
1 ms P.W.
1.1 ms
0 - 100 Volt Range: 5 seconds to the following minimum repetition period:
100 ms P.W.
100 Volts:
beyond functional limits
50 Volts:
250 ms
10 ms P.W.
100 Volts:
200 ms
50 Volts:
150 ms
1 ms P.W.
100 Volts:
20 ms
50 Volts:
2.5 ms
User adjustable lower and upper rate limits
2 microseconds
Better than 2%
Time range:
Resolution:
None or .5 - 100 milliseconds
2 microseconds
Controlled by:
Range (switchable):
Manually (10 turn potentiometer)
Range 1: .025 - 10 Volts
Range 2: .15 - 100 Volts
Infinite (potentiometer adjustable) range
5% accuracy to dial indicator
Correlates to actual pulse output (Requires Calibration)
15 millisecond fixed pulse width
0 - 10 mV correlates to 0 – 10 V actual output or 0 – 100 V actual output
(Button on back panel)
Note: Will only function when “Trigger” cable is not connected to the MP3X.
2.5 - 3 milliseconds
Initial Pulse Delay
Pulse level
Accuracy:
Reference Output
Pulse width:
Amplitude:
Manual Test Pulse
Pulse Width:
Stimulator isolation
Volts:
Capacitance
coupling:
Power requirements
Fuse
Dimensions:
Module Weight
Module Dimensions
2,000 Volts DC (HI POT test)
60 pF
12 Volts DC adapter (included), 1 Amp
250 V, 2 A, fast blow
1.25” length  .25” diameter
610 grams
16 cm x 16 cm x 5 cm
BIOPAC Hardware | STIMULATORS MP3X | Page 7 - 9
Updated: 5.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
LOW VOLTAGE STIMULATOR
OUT3
The MP36 includes a built-in low voltage stimulator—just use the Analog Out
port.

For connection to BIOPAC electrodes, add the OUT3 BNC Adapter.
SS58L
The MP35 uses the SS58L Low Voltage Stimulator to the Analog Out port.
Connect any electrode or lead with a BNC connector (such as needle electrodes or clip leads) for direct
stimulation of animal or tissue preps. Control the stimulus with the Output Control option of the BSL PRO
software. Output can be monitored directly on the computer without any external cable.
Interface options: Nerve chambers — use BSLCBL3A or BSLCBL4B
Stimulation electrodes — use ELSTM2
Clip leads — use BSLCBL7, BSLCBL11, or BSLCBL12
Pulse level:
-10 V to + 10 V, software adjustable in 5 mV increments
Pulse width:
0.05-100 milliseconds
Pulse repetition: 5 seconds-0.1 millisecond (0.2-10,000 Hz)
Power:
No additional power required
BIOPAC Hardware | STIMULATORS MP3X | Page 8 - 9
Updated: 5.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STIMULATOR ELECTRODE GUIDELINES
— PLEASE READ —
It is very important to follow the electrode placement guidelines when connecting stimulator electrodes from the
BSLSTM to a subject.
The BSLSTM can output lethal levels of energy!
 Always set the Level to “0” Volts prior to connecting the stimulator electrodes to the subject.
 Increase the Level adjustment slowly until a response is noted.
 Never increase the Level more than necessary to obtain the desired response.
 The BSLSTM should only be used under direct supervision of an Instructor.
 Never place any stimulator leads in the mouth or any other body orifice.
 To prevent a “Ground loop,” the Ground of the stimulator electrode and the Ground of the measuring
electrode(s) must always be connected to the same location.
 Use the HSTM01 Human Stimulation Electrode for human stimulation.
 To prevent a current path that goes across or through the heart, the stimulator electrodes and the measuring
electrodes should always be in close proximity.
For example, if making measurements on an arm, the stimulator electrodes and measuring electrodes —
including the ground electrodes — must be on the same arm. Any other electrodes or transducers that
make electrical contact with the body should not be connected while the stimulator is connected.
BIOPAC Hardware | STIMULATORS MP3X | Page 9 - 9
Updated: 5.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STMHUM HUMAN-SAFE STIMULATOR – DB9
Human stimulation with a superior degree of safety and comfort
The STMHUM is a direct, human-safe stimulator that provides pulse output in the range of 0-100 V. The
maximum width pulse that can be generated is limited to 1 msec by hardware, ensuring the STMHUM meets all
stimulator safety standards.
The ergonomic design allows the user to focus on the electrode placement instead of worrying about holding the
electrode.

Subjects depress the red safety switch to allow the software-controlled stimulus presentation through

To stop the stimulus, Subjects simply remove their thumb from the switch and the electrode shuts off.
Cable terminates in a DB9 connector to interface the “Analog out” port on MP36 and MP36R units; not compatible
with MP35 or MP30 units.
The STMHUM eliminates the need for an external stimulator—use as a cost-effective alternative for the
HSTM01+BSLSTMB/A hardware combination.
BIOPAC software provides an output control panel that allows for the voltage to be specified directly along with
pulse frequencies. Set parameters using MP Menu > Output Control > Human Stimulator – STMHUM:
IMPORTANT! Refer to the Stimulation Safety Notes beginning on the next page.
STMHUM SPECIFICATIONS
Stimulus Type:
Voltage
Stimulus Pulse Width:
50 µsec to 1 msec
Step Up Voltage Ratio:
1:10
Maximum output voltage: 100 V
Safety Switch:
Yes (pushbutton)
Isolation Capacitance:
100 pF
Isolation Voltage:
1500 V
Power output:
Watt (instantaneous max.) = (100 V x 100 V)/500 Ohms = 20 Watts
Joules (Watts x Seconds) = 20 Watts x 0.001 seconds = 0.020 Joules = 20 mJ
Stimulating Electrodes:
Material: Stainless steel; Diameter: 8 mm; Spacing: 2.54 cm
Dimensions:
Height (electrode bottom to button top): 7.7 cm; Diameter: 4.5 cm; Weight: 170 G
Cable:
Length: 3 m (10’); Connector: DB9 male
Interface:
MP36 or MP36R Analog Out port (DB9 female)
BIOPAC Hardware | STMHUM | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 8.28.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES!
When using the STMHUM, it is possible to generate voltages
as high as 100 V p-p. These voltages are potentially
dangerous, especially if the stimulator’s high voltage outputs
are connected across the subject’s heart. Across the heart
means that the heart is potentially in the electrical path from
lead to lead. This situation occurs when the stimulation
electrodes are placed on opposite sides of the subject’s body.
Example of correct stimulation
electrode placement:
NEVER PLACE STIMULATION ELECTRODES ON
OPPPOSITE SIDES OF THE SUBJECT’S BODY!
Always use the stimulator with the leads placed in relatively
close proximity to each other and relatively far from the
heart, and with the leads placed only on the SAME side of
the body. The figure to the right illustrates correct connection
techniques when using the STMHUM.
STIMULATION SAFETY
The harmonized, international regulatory standard relating to the safety of nerve and muscle stimulators
is IEC 601-2-10. Certain stimulation equipment is excluded from this standard, such as stimulators
intended for cardiac defibrillation; however, for the purposes of defining relevant safety metrics for the
STMHUM stimulation unit, this standard is quite relevant.
STMHUM stimulation units are designed in such a manner that the power available to stimulate the
subject is limited. This limitation of power is achieved through the use of stimulus isolation transformers
which have physical constraints (due to their size and construction) which absolutely —in accordance to
known physical laws — constrain the maximum transferable power to be no more than a specific level.
Section 51.104 of the IEC 601-2-10 standard clearly specifies the limitation of output power for a
variety of wave types.
*
*
For stimulus pulse outputs, the maximum energy per pulse shall not exceed 300mJ,
when applied to a load resistance of 500 ohms,
For stimulus pulse outputs, the maximum output voltage shall not exceed a peak
value of 500 V, when measured under open circuit conditions.
STMHUM units employ stimulus isolation transformers that limit the output pulse width to 1 ms
maximum, under 500 ohm load conditions. In addition, the highest available output voltage is 100 V pkpk under open circuit conditions.
For the pulse energy calculation for STMHUM:
Joules = Watts x Seconds
Watt (instantaneous max.) = (100V x 100V)/500 Ohms = 20 Watts
Joules (Watts x Seconds) = 20 Watts x 0.001 seconds = 0.020 Joules = 20 mJ
Accordingly, the highest possible energy output using the STMHUM is 20 mJ, considerably less than
the 300 mJ maximum as specified by IEC 601-2-10.
CAUTIONS FOR USE!
Even the safest stimulation units, if used incorrectly, can cause serious harm. The following points
illustrate fundamental rules for using stimulus isolation units to stimulate subjects.
BIOPAC Hardware | STMHUM | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 8.28.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
1) NEVER APPLY THE STIMULUS SIGNAL IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO CAUSE
CURRENT TO FLOW THROUGH THE HEART.
Primarily considered, this rule implies that stimulation leads should never be split apart so as
to be able to touch opposing sides of the body surrounding the heart.
For example: NEVER CONNECT THE STIMULUS ISOLATION UNIT SO THAT ONE
LEAD TOUCHES THE LEFT ARM AND THE OTHER LEAD TOUCHES
THE RIGHT ARM.
Both stimulus leads [(+) and (-)], should be applied to the SAME side (left or right) of the
subject's body. Furthermore, always stimulate AWAY from the heart. Stimulation probes
(such as BIOPAC's EL350 or the EL351), which constrain the distance from the positive
stimulation output to the negative stimulation output, should always be used for skin surface
stimulation of nerve or muscle.
The EL350 or the EL351 stimulation probes fix the distance between stimulation outputs to
35mm. It is not recommended that this distance be increased for skin surface stimulation of
nerve or muscle. An increase in this distance simply allows stimulation currents to circulate
over a larger area, which is usually not necessary for nerve or muscle stimulation scenarios.
2) Always start the stimulation process with the stimulator control set the LOWEST possible
level. The “Pulses” output control panel in the BIOPAC software is used to control the
STMHUM. Set to the 0% level, prior to the onset of the stimulation protocol. During the
protocol, increase the stimulus intensity by increasing the Level in small increments Stop
increasing the intensity at the first sign of subject discomfort.
IMPORTANT NOTES!
A) It takes as little as 15 micro-amps directed across the heart to instigate ventricular fibrillation.
This situation can be readily achieved by using sub-surface stimulation needle electrodes that
insert directly into the heart. It is considerably more difficult to achieve ventricular fibrillation
on the same heart using surface electrodes, but it is possible to do so, evidenced by the
performance of cardiac defibrillation units used in hospitals or by paramedics.
B) Qualified experienced professionals should supervise any protocols where electrical
stimulation is applied to human subjects. Electrical stimulation protocols are not simple.
Please contact BIOPAC Systems for any questions regarding the use of BIOPAC’s stimulation
units or accessories.
BIOPAC Hardware | STMHUM | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 8.28.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
CLEANING & DISINFECTING BIOPAC COMPONENTS
The following disinfectants are recommended for LIQUID “COLD” sterilization of BIOPAC transducers:
 Cidex® OPA Disinfectant Solution, Johnson & Johnson
Always follow the
 Perform® Powder Disinfectant Concentrate, Schülke & Mayr
manufacturer’s directions.
 Terralin®, Liquid Disinfectant Concentrate, Schülke & Mayr
AFT25 FACEMASK

See detailed guide shipped with the product; also available at www.biopac.com.
EL250 SERIES ELECTRODES







Store electrodes in clean, dry area.
After use, clean electrode with cold to tepid water
DO NOT use hot water.
Cotton swabs are suggested.
Let the electrode dry completely before storing it.
DO NOT allow the electrodes to come in contact with each other during storage.
Electrodes may form a brown coating if they have not been used regularly. To remove the coating, gently
polish the surface of the electrode element with non-metallic material or wipe it with mild ammonium
hydroxide. Rinse with water and store the electrode in a clean, dry container.
PROBES


Immersion temperature probes can be cleaned using standard liquid disinfectant methods, with direct
immersion for the recommended period.
Non-immersion probes can be wiped down with liquid disinfectant or alcohol.
RX137 SERIES AIRFLOW HEADS

Thorough cleaning retains precise measurements. Disinfecting is only useful on a previously cleaned
apparatus. Using a gas for disinfecting does not provide cleaning. An appropriate disinfectant solution can
clean and disinfect simultaneously.
1. Immerse the apparatus in the liquid. It can be completely immersed since the electrical part is
waterproof; a 30- to 60-minute bath is usually sufficient to detach or dissolve the dirt.
2. Rinse under a strong tap.
3. Rinse with distilled or demineralized water.
4. Use air or another compressed gas to dry the apparatus. Blow through the screen and in each
pressure tube; a pressure of 5 to 6 bars is acceptable.
5. Finish drying with atmospheric air or with a warm blow dryer (hair dryer).
WARNING!
Do not use organic solvents
Dilute the disinfectant (as for hand washing)
Do not heat the apparatus above 50º C
Never touch the screen with a tool
 Examples of liquids that may be used: Cidex, Glutaral, Glutaraldéhyde
 Example of gas that may be used: Ethylene oxide
TSD130 SERIES GONIOMOTERS & TORSIOMETERS



Important: Disconnect sensors from instrumentation before cleaning or disinfecting.
Cleaning: Wipe the sensors with a damp cloth, or a cloth moistened with soapy water. Do not use
solvents, strong alkaline or acidic materials to clean the sensors.
Disinfection: Wipe the sensors with a cloth moistened with disinfectant.
See detailed cleaning procedures for LDF and TSD140 series in LDF section.
BIOPAC Hardware | Cleaning & Disinfecting | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.6.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
INTERFACE MODULES
HLT100C
UIM100C
When connecting the analog output sourcing from external devices to the MP100 or MP150, channel contention
must be considered. To connect external device outputs to the MP100 or MP150:
 Non-human subjects or only collecting data from external devices—If the MP System is only
collecting signals from non-human subjects (via MP system amplifier modules) or if the MP System is
only collecting data from external devices:
o Connect external device output signal to an unused UIM100C input channel (1-16)
 Human subjects—If the MP System is collecting signals from human subjects (via MP system amplifier
modules), it's important to isolate the external device output signal from the MP System input.
o Connect external device output signal to an unused HLT100C input channel (1-16) via INISO.
Channel contention issues
1. If an analog channel is used on the UIM100C or HLT100C, make certain that two external devices do not
use the same analog channel.
2. If amplifier modules are connected to the MP System then those amplifier modules must be set to a
channel which is not used by external devices plugged into the UIM100C or HLT100C.
For example:
Two external device outputs are connected to the MP150 system. Device one is a Noninvasive Blood
Pressure (NIBP) monitor and device two is an Electronic Scale. In addition, an ECG100C module is
attached to the MP150 System and is being used to measure the electrocardiogram. All devices are
connected to a human subject.
In this case, to fully isolate the human subject:
 Both the NIBP monitor and the Electronic scale outputs should be connected to the MP150 inputs
via the HLT100C, using one INISO for each input channel.
 The ECG100C should be snapped directly to the MP150 System and connected directly to the
subject with the appropriate leads and electrodes.
 Assuming the NIBP is connected via INISO to HLT100C channel 1 and the Electronic Scale is
connected via INISO to HLT100C channel 2, then the ECG100C amplifier must be set to a
channel between 3-16.
o The ECG100C can’t use Channels 1 and 2 because both of these channels are being used
by other devices.
If additional instruction or a special cable is required to connect the MP System to the device, please contact a
BIOPAC Systems, Inc. applications engineer at support@biopac.com.
BIOPAC Hardware | UIM100C | Page 1 - 5
Updated:8.27.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
UIM100C UNIVERSAL INTERFACE MODULE
The UIM100C Universal Interface Module is the interface between the MP150/100 and external devices.
Typically, the UIM100C is used to input pre-amplified signals (usually greater than +/ 0.1 volt peak-peak)
and/or digital signals to the MP150/100 acquisition unit. Other signals (e.g., those from electrodes or transducers)
connect to various signal-conditioning modules.
The Universal Interface Module (UIM100C) is designed to serve as a general-purpose interface to most types of
laboratory equipment. The UIM100C consists of sixteen 3.5 mm mini-phone jack connectors for analog inputs,
two 3.5 mm mini-phone jack connectors for analog outputs, and screw terminals for the 16 digital lines, external
trigger, and supply voltages.
The UIM100C is typically used alone to connect polygraph and chart recorder analog outputs to the MP System.
BIOPAC Systems, Inc. offers a series of cables that permit the UIM100C to connect directly to a number of
standard analog signal connectors. Most chart recorders or polygraphs have analog signal outputs, which can be
connected directly to the UIM100C.
The UIM100C allows access to 16 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs on one side, and 16 digital input/output
lines, an external trigger, and supply voltages on the other side. The UIM100C is designed to be compatible with
a variety of different input devices, including the BIOPAC series of signal conditioning amplifiers (such as the
ECG100C).
Connecting the UIM100C to the MP System


MP150: Snap the UIM100C onto the right side of the MP150.
MP100: Connect the UIM100C to the MP100 acquisition unit via two included 0.6-meter cables:
o 37-pin connector for analog signals
o 25-pin connector for digital signals
When using the Universal Interface Module (UIM100C) with other 100-Series modules, the UIM100C is usually
the first module cascaded in the chain. If using the STM100C, OXY100C or HLT100C, the module must be
plugged in on the left of the UIM100C. Up to seventeen modules (including the UIM100C) can be snapped
together, as illustrated in the following diagrams:
POWER
BUSY
ZERO
ADJ
1
BIOPAC
Systems
9
2
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
16
GAIN
500
1000
2000
5000
ON
FILTER
OFF
SHIELD
VIN+
GND
VINSHIELD
0
1
MP100 to UIM100C and amplifier moduleSTM10right 0C and UIM100C and amplifier modules
BIOPAC Hardware | UIM100C | Page 2 - 5
Updated:8.27.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
Analog connection cable
(CBL100, 101, or 102)
Chart recorder
with phone jack,
RCA jack, or BNC
connector for analog
output
1
BIOPAC
Systems
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
9
2
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
16
0
1
Typical UIM100C to polygraph interface
When using the UIM100C, be careful not to short the “analog output” terminals together, and
not to short across any of the connectors on the “Digital” (back) side of the module.
IMPORTANT USAGE NOTE
Mains powered external laboratory equipment should be connected to an MP System through
signal isolators when the system also connects to electrodes attached to humans.
To couple external equipment to an MP System, use:
 For analog signals — INISO or OUTISO isolator (with HLT100C)
 For digital signals — STP100C (with UIM100C)
Contact BIOPAC for details.
ANALOG CONNECTIONS
See also: Setup notes for external devices and channel contention issues.
As noted, the UIM100C requires cables equipped with standard 3.5mm mini-phone plugs to connect
to analog signal sources. This type of connector is commonly available with many different mating
ends. BIOPAC Systems, Inc. carries several different types, including BNC and phone plugs. Since
the MP150/100 analog inputs are single-ended, the tip of the mini-phone plug is the input and the
base (shield) of the mini-phone plug is the ground (or common).
NOTE: Make sure the cable that is routed into the UIM100C is a mono 3.5 mm phone plug.
To connect to existing equipment (such as polygraphs or chart recorders), run a cable from the analog output
terminal of the external device to the UIM100C. Since there are so many different devices that can connect to
the MP150/100 it’s impossible to cover them all.
BIOPAC Hardware | UIM100C | Page 3 - 5
Updated:8.27.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Analog connection cable
(CBL100, 101, or 102)
Transducer or
pre-amplified
electrode
1
BIOPAC
Systems
9
2
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
16
0
1
UIM100C connected to external analog signal source
DIGITAL CONNECTIONS
BIOPAC
Systems
BIOPAC
Systems
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Pushbutton
switch
+5 V
TRIG
GND D
+5 V
TRIG
GND D
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
+12 V
GND A
-12 V
Trigger connected to UIM100C
+
-
TTL
digital
source
+12 V
GND A
-12 V
MP unit to digital source connection
A digital signal has only two voltage levels: 0 Volts = binary 0 and +5 volts = binary 1.
A positive edge is a 0 to 1 transition and a negative edge is a 1 to 0 transition.
The MP150/100 digital I/O lines have internal pull-up resistors so that unconnected inputs read
“1.” This means that external passive switches can be used to introduce digital (ON/OFF) data into
the UIM100C by connecting the switch terminal between the digital I/O (0-15) and Ground
(GND). In this configuration, the input will be read as “0.0” when the switch is closed and as “+5
V” when the switch is open.
The 16 digital input/output lines on the UIM100C have
screw terminals that can accept pin plugs or bare wires,
as shown above. Be careful not to short the +5, +12 V
and 12 V terminals together or to the GND A or GND
D output terminal, or the MP150/100 may become
damaged.
The 16 digital lines are divided into two blocks, I/O 0
through 7 and I/O 8 through 15. Each block can be
programmed as either inputs or outputs. Do not connect
a digital input source to a block that is programmed as
an output.
BIOPAC Hardware | UIM100C | Page 4 - 5
Updated:8.27.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Output devices (such as leads or an LED) can be connected to the digital side of the UIM100C. Outputs can be
connected so that they are “ON” either when a signal output from the UIM100C reads 0 Volts or when a +5 V
signal is being output.

When connecting to an LED, be sure to use a current-limiting resistor (typically 330 ) in series with the
LED.
To connect an LED so that it defaults to “OFF” (i.e., the digital I/O reads 0), attach one lead of the output device
to the GND D terminal on the UIM100C and connect the other lead to one of the digital I/O lines (I/O 7, for
example). When configured this way, the device will be “OFF” when I/O 7 reads 0, and “ON” when I/O 7 reads a
digital “1” (+5 Volts).
Alternatively, connect one of the device leads to the +5 V terminal on the UIM100C and leave the other lead
connected to the digital line (e.g., I/O 7). With this setup, the device will be “ON” when the I/O line (in this case
digital I/O 7) reads 0, and “OFF” when the I/O reads a digital “1” (+5 Volts).
UIM100C SPECIFICATIONS
Analog I/O:
16 channels (front panel) – 3.5 mm phone jacks
D/A Outputs:
2 channels (front panel) – 3.5 mm phone jacks
Digital I/O:
16 channels (back panel) – screw terminals
External Trigger: 1 channel (back panel) – screw terminal
Isolated Power: ±12 V, +5 V @ 100 ma (back panel) – screw terminals
Weight:
520 g
Dimensions:
7 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
BIOPAC Hardware | UIM100C | Page 5 - 5
Updated:8.27.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HLT100C HIGH LEVEL TRANSDUCER INTERFACE MODULE
The HLT100C module is used to interface all high level output transducers to the MP System. The HLT100C
module provides 16 input and 2 output channels. The HLT100C is similar in function to the UIM100C Universal
Interface Module, but it also provides power to the transducer when making a connection.
High level output transducers and adapters connect to the HLT100C via standard 6 pin RJ11 type connectors.
Transducers and adapters that presently require the HLT100C module are:
TSD109 C/F: Tri-axial Accelerometers
TSD111A Heel/Toe Strike Transducer
TSD115 Variable Assessment Transducer
TSD116 A/B/C: Switches and Markers
TSD150 A/B: Active Electrodes
INISO
Input Signal Isolator
OUTISO Output Signal Isolator
DTU100 Digital Trigger Unit (MRI Synchronization)
NIBP-MRI Noninvasive Blood Pressure for MR
Alternatively, the HLT100C module can be used to connect mains powered external equipment to the MP System
when the system also connects to electrodes attached to humans.
IMPORTANT USAGE NOTE
To pr ovide the maximum in subject safety and isolation, use electrically isolated signal adapters to
connect mains powered external equipment (i.e., chart recorders, oscilloscopes, etc.) to the MP System.
Use the INISO adapter to connect to MP analog system inputs and the OUTISO adapter to connect to
analog system outputs.
HARDWARE SETUP
• See also: setup notes for external devices and channel contention issues.
Connect the Digital and Analog cables from the MP150 directly to the HLT100C, then connect the UIM100C to
the HLT100C. The HLT100C module must be connected on the left side of the UIM100C module. This allows
the use of other amplifier modules with the UIM100C while the HLT100C is connected.
High level output transducers (e.g., TSD109 Tri-Axial Accelerometer) or active electrodes (e.g., TSD150A Active
Electrode) connect via the 16 analog RJ11 jacks on the front of the HLT100C. Up to 16 analog channels can be
used at the same time, as long as there are no other analog channels in use by the UIM100C module or by other
BIOPAC modules.
NOTE: If active electrodes are used, it may be necessary to attach a single ground lead to the UIM100C via the
GND A terminal on the back of the module.
IMPORTANT!
If contention exists, the channel data will be corrupted. For example, if four channels [Ch.1-4] were in use by the
UIM100C, then only 12 channels [Ch. 5-16] could be used by the HLT100C.
BIOPAC Hardware | HLT100C | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 6.27.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
HLT100C SPECIFICATIONS
Transducer Inputs:
System D/A Outputs:
Isolated Power Access:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Pin-outs:
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
16 channels (front panel) – RJ11 jacks
2 channels (front panel) – RJ11 jacks
±12 V, +5 V @ 100 ma (via all RJ11 jacks)
540 grams
7 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
BIOPAC Hardware | HLT100C | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 6.27.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SIGNAL ISOLATORS
INISO and OUTISO shown with HLT100C
These analog signal isolators are used to connect mains powered external laboratory equipment to the MP System
when it also connects to electrodes attached to humans. Each signal isolator comes with an RJ11 cable for
connection to the HLT100C module.
 For digital (TTL compatible) isolation to the MP digital I/O ports, use the STP100C optical interface.
 If the MP System does not electrically connect to human subjects, signal connections to external
equipment can be made through the UIM100C module and the respective analog or digital connection
cable.
INISO INPUT SIGNAL ISOLATED ADAPTER
Use the INISO to connect external equipment outputs to MP analog input channels. The INISO plugs directly into
any of the 16 input channels on the HLT100C module and incorporates a 3.5mm phone jack for signal input
connections. Select the appropriate analog connection cable to connect to the external equipment’s output.
See also: Setup notes for external devices and channel contention issues.
OUTISO OUTPUT SIGNAL ISOLATED ADAPTER
Use the OUTISO to connect MP analog signal outputs (amplifier and D/A) to external equipment inputs. The
OUTISO plugs directly into any of the 16 signal output channels, plus the two D/A outputs, on the HLT100C
module and incorporates a 3.5 mm phone jack for signal output connections. The OUTISO is very useful when
the biopotential amplifier output signal requires routing to external equipment while being sampled by the MP
System. Select the appropriate analog connection cable to connect to the external equipment’s input.
INISO AND OUTISO SPECIFICATIONS
Isolator Type:
Analog
Bandwidth:
DC to 50 kHz
Input/Output Range: ±10 V
Input Resistance: 200K Ω
Output Resistance: 120 Ω
Output Current:
±5 mA
Offset Voltage:
±20 mV (nominal)
Temperature Drift: 200 µV/°C (nominal)
Noise:
2.5 mV (rms)
Isolation Voltage:
1500 VDC
Isolation Capacitance: 30 pF
Connector:
3.5 mm mono phone jack
Weight:
50 g
Dimensions:
2.6 cm (high) x 2.6 cm (wide) x 7.6 cm
(long)
Included Cable:
2.1 m (straight through, M/M, 6 pin,
RJ11)
Interface:
HLT100C
MP Research System | Signal Isolators | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.12.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MOBITA-W MOBILE BIOPOTENTIAL SYSTEM
MOBITA-EEG-W 32-Channel Mobile EEG System
MB-CAP Series: MB32-EEG-CAP-A, MB 12+20-CAP, MB-20EEG-CAP-B
Mobita Overview
 The flexible Mobita® system is fully integrated
with AcqKnowledge, records up to 32 channels of EEG data
at up to 2K s/s, is battery operated, and fits in the palm of
your hand.

Stream data live into AcqKnowledge or log data for
later upload.
Mobita® is a new wearable physiological signal amplifier system that
can record up to 32 channels of high-fidelity wireless biopotential data, including: ECG, EEG, EGG, EMG and
EOG data. The system includes the Mobita hardware and electrode leads and is fully integrated with
AcqKnowledge software. The system can either telemeter data back to a computer running AcqKnowledge for
real-time display and analysis of the signals, or record it locally for later download. Easily switch between live or
logging modes to suit your research protocol.
Mobita® is uniquely suited to record biopotentials for a variety of applications, such as exercise physiology) gait
and movement analysis), brain-computer interfacing, psychology, neuromarketing, sports, ambulatory testing, and
many more.
Mobita® can record many different signal types. Quickly change the electrode configuration or signal type by
swapping out the ConfiCapTM. ConfiCapTM allows you to quickly change the configurations of the inputs for
specific applications (i.e. 32-ch EEG, EMG, or combinations of ECG/EMG/EEG, etc.), customize your own
design or create research protocol driven configurations. Simply disconnect one header and snap on a new
configuration for a completely different application. Each channel is unipolar (single-ended) and AcqKnowledge
is easily configured to create unique montages and combinations of signals. Record a 12-lead ECG while
recording EEG and EMG data all with the same device. With AcqKnowledge and Mobita®, the system is quickly
configured to do the work of multiple systems without the added cost of multiple amplifiers.
Mobita® is battery operated, rechargeable and its compact size, integrated WiFi connectivity and impressive
flexibility combine to create the ultimate solution in a mobile physiologic measurement device.
Rugged construction makes the Mobita® system well suited for tough and demanding measurement situations like
sports, movement analysis, brain-computer interfacing, home-based ambulatory testing and more!
System Options
MOBITA-W Mobile Biopotential System
Complete system includes the Mobita hardware unit and one ConfiCap configuration of user’s choosing (MB32EEG-CAP-A, MB-12+20-CAP, or MB-20EEG-CAP-B), along with AcqKnowledge software and accessories.
MOBITA-EEG-W 32-Channel Mobile Biopotential System
The system includes the Mobita hardware unit and one ConfiCap with medium 32-channel EEG cap and water
electrodes – no gel required (MB-20EEG-CAP-A) along with AcqKnowledge software and accessories – other
cap sizes available.
The device includes a trigger channel that can be used to synchronize the system with other devices or data
streams. When the onboard accelerometer is used with AcqKnowledge’s Actigraphy feature, it is possible to
evaluate a subject’s activity levels.
BIOPAC Hardware | MOBITA-W | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 9.3.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ConfiCap™ Options
Mobita ConfiCap Connection
EEG 32 Channel ConfiCap – MB-32EEG-CAP-A
The MB-32EEG-CAP-A is a complete assembly for the Mobita wearable biopotential system that interfaces with
a 32-channel electrode cap. This particular EEG cap uses water electrodes, which eliminates the need for gel. The
assembly also includes a trigger connector for synchronization with other devices. The Mobita supports TTL
trigger inputs from third-party hardware. The electrodes terminate in a Mobita conf-cap connector. Snap the
assembly to the Mobita unit and attach the cap to a subject to record 32 channels of data for either in laboratory
telemetry or remote data logging applications.
Headcaps for Mobita Water Electrodes – H2O-CAP (Small, Medium or Large)
These headcaps include 32 grommets for Mobita water-based electrodes. One headcap is included with
each MB-32EEG-CAP-A assembly (user specified size); individual headcaps can be used to add to or
replace the included cap.
H2O-CAP-SMALL (50-54 cm,) H2O-CAP-MEDIUM (54-58 cm,) H2O-CAP-LARGE (58-62 cm)
12 Surface Electrodes + 20 TP Adapters – MB-12+20-CAP
The MB-12+20-CAP is a complete assembly for the Mobita wearable biopotential system that interfaces with 12
snap fit electrode leads and 20 touch proof sockets. Record 32 channels of biopotential data using a variety of
electrode configurations including both disposable and reusable options. Connect to the Mobita and the subject
and record 32 channels of data for either in laboratory telemetry or remote data logging applications. Snap the
assembly to the Mobita unit and attach the cap to a subject to record 32 channels of data for either in laboratory
telemetry or remote data logging applications.
EEG 10/20 + 13 TP Adapters – MB-20EEG-CAP-B
The MB-20EEG-CAP-B is a complete assembly for the Mobita wearable biopotential
system that interfaces with a 10/20 electrode cap and Touchproof sockets for adding
additional signals.
This combination interface allows for a full 10/20 EEG, plus optional biopotential
signals for EOG, EMG, and ECG. Snap the assembly to the Mobita unit and attach the
cap to a subject to record 32 channels of data for either in laboratory telemetry or
remote data logging applications.
The EEG cap connects via a dSub connector for the quick connection of different size
caps. Ships with medium cap; other sizes available. Additional electrodes are
interfaced via the standard Touchproof sockets.
Breakout boxes are available. Contact BIOPAC for more information.
BIOPAC Hardware | MOBITA-W | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 9.3.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Analyze with AcqKnowledge
 Powerful automated analysis routines for ECG, HRV, EEG, EMG, EGG, and many more!
 Intuitive user interface with fully customizable display
 Video Tutorials on key features and analysis routines
 Guided channel and acquisition setup with presets and quickstarts
Featured Applications
32 channels of biopotential data with 3D accelerometer and trigger channel for:





Psychophysiology
Neuroscience
Exercise Physiology
Gait Analysis


Key Features
 Up to 32 channels of wireless biopotential
data
 Fully-integrated in AcqKnowledge®
software
 No cable movement artifacts
 True DC recording
 24 bit data resolution
 Flash disk recording (up to 16 GB) for data
back-up and holter applications





Brain Computer Interface
Sleep Studies
Ambulatory Monitoring
Built-in WiFi telemetry (range typical > 10 m
indoors)
Rechargeable Li-Po battery
Rugged construction: sturdy, dustproof enclosure
Built-in 3D accelerometer for position information
No filtering (including Notch filter) for true
unadulterated signal quality
Computer Requirements
Computer should be running Windows 7 64-bit or Windows 8 64-bit with a Core i5 or a Core i7 processor. No
support provided for operating systems older than Windows 7.
NOTE: Slower computers may be able to use WiFi mode with the Mobita, but it may not be possible to transfer
or import the logged data.
Specifications
Sampling
Resolution:
Sampling rate:
Channel bandwidth:
24.414 nV/bit, referred to input
2000, 1000, 500, 250 Hz
DC up to 0.2 x sample
frequency
Input:
Input signal difference: 409.6 mV pp
Input common mode range: -2.0 V – +2.0 V
Gain factor:
10
Noise:
< 0.4 µV RMS @ 0.1 – 10 Hz
Input Impedance:
>10 GΩ
CMRR:
> 100 dB typical
# of channels:
Up to 32 analog
Power supply:
Battery Li-Polymer with
protection circuit
Battery life: 8-10 hours typical
Filtering
Filter:
No filtering within channel bandwidth
Connectors: Individually shielded inputs
Type:
Unipolar, bipolar (user configurable from
unipolar inputs)
Trigger:
Either trigger (TTL) or generic (e.g. RS232
compatible) digital inputs possible through
custom designed ConfiCap
Accelerometer
Range
± 16 g
Resolution: 13 bit
Sensitivity:
3.9 mg/bit
Dimensions: 150 x 70 x 25 mm (with ConfiCap attached)
BIOPAC Hardware | MOBITA-W | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 9.3.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
GPSTRACK GPS LOCATION SYNCHRONIZATION
Use this GPS tracking device with AcqKnowledge to import and synchronize a subject’s physical location with
experiment data.
• Record GPS data for a moving subject in a wide area
• Operating time ~20 hours ... rechargeable batteries & USB included
• GPS Location for correlating physical location with physiological data
• Use AcqKnowledge to import and synchronize a subject’s physical location with physiological data from
the Mobita and BioHarness loggers
• Compatible with the Location Palette in AcqKnowledge 4.4
Specifications
GPS
Chipset:
SiRF Star III high performance low power GPS receiver
IC Frequency:
L1 1,575.42 MHz
Channels:
20 parallel tracking channels
GPS Tracking Sensitivity: - 158 dBm
Protocol:
NMEA 0183 GGA, GSA, GSV, RMC WAAS/EGNOS Support
Operating Time
~20 hours continuous operation (3 AAA 900 mAh rechargeable battery @ 25oC)
LED Indicators
Power On/Off:
Amber
GPS Fix:
Green
Memory Full:
Red
Data Log
Maximum log points:
1,040,000 (RMC), approximate 2,800 logging hours
Logging mode:
6 logging mode, can be set in device setting mode
General
Storage Capacity:
128 Mbytes (1 Gbit NAND flash memory)
Interface:
USB 2.0 full speed
Battery:
3 AAA standard size rechargeable batteries
Operating Temperature:
- 20 ~ 50º C
Storage Temperature:
- 30 ~ 80º C
Humidity:
95 % non-condensing
Dimension:
90 mm x 45 mm x 23 mm
Weight:
~ 50 g (not including battery)
BIOPAC Hardware | GPSTRACK | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 5.20.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
GPSTRACK-A
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
GPS TRACKER FOR ACQKNOWLEDGE
Use this portable GPS tracking device with AcqKnowledge to import and synchronize a subject’s physical
location with experiment data. Includes a USB micro SD card reader for easy interface with AcqKnowledge.
 Record GPS data for a moving subject in a wide area
 GPS Location for correlating physical location with physiological data
 Operating time ~24 hours ... built-in high-capacity Li-polymer battery
 Includes USB microSD reader, car charger, USB cable, carrying strap, protective case, documentation
 Use AcqKnowledge to import and synchronize a subject’s physical location with physiological data from
the BioNomadix Logger, Mobita, or BioHarness
 Compatible with the Location Palette in AcqKnowledge 4.4
Specifications
BIOPAC Hardware | GPSTRACK-A | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 7/10/2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
BIOPAC Hardware | GPSTRACK-A | Page 2 - 2
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Updated: 7/10/2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
BIONOMADIX SERIES
The BioNomadix system is a wireless, multi-channel physiological recording
platform. Its untethered design allows for nearly unlimited freedom of movement
and unsurpassed comfort, enabling subjects to easily relax into their protocol.
There are twelve different BioNomadix modules sets, each consisting of a
matched transmitter and receiver specifically optimized for desired physiological
signals. Multiple BioNomadix module sets (typically eight maximum) can be used
to create a customized BioNomadix system.
Each BioNomadix module set is capable of recording of two independent channels, with the exception of the
Accelerometer module, which records three channels.
BIONOMADIX TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER SETS
BN-ACCL3
BN-ECG2
BN-EEG2
BN- EGG2
BN- EMG2
BN- PPGED
BN-GONIO
BioNomadix Accelerometer
BioNomadix 2-Channel ECG
BioNomadix 2-Channel EEG
BioNomadix 2-Channel EGG
BioNomadix 2-Channel EMG
BioNomadix PPG and EDA
BioNomadix 2-Channel Goniometry
BN-DYNEMG BioNomadix Dynamometry and EMG
BN- EOG2 BioNomadix 2-Channel EOG
BN-NICO BioNomadix Cardiac Output
BN-RSP2 BioNomadix 2-Channel Respiration
BN-RSPEC BioNomadix RSP and ECG
BN-SKT2 BioNomadix 2-Channel Skin Temp
BN-STRIKE BioNomadix 2-Channel Heel/Toe Strike
BioNomadix BN-GYRO-75 and BN-GYRO-300 Angular Rate Sensors are discontinued items.
BIONOMADIX TRANSMITTER ONLY
BN-ACCL3-T
BN-ECG2-T
BN-EEG2-T
BN- EGG2-T
BN- EMG2-T
BN- PPGED-T
BN-GONIO-T
Accelerometer
2-Channel ECG
2-Channel EEG
2-Channel EGG
2-Channel EMG
PPG and EDA
Goniometry
BN-DYNEMG-T
BN- EOG2-T
BN-NICO-T
BN-RSP2-T
BN-RSPEC-T
BN-SKT2-T
BN-STRIKE-T
Dynamometry and EMG
2-Channel EOG
Cardiac Output
2-Channel Respiration
RSP and ECG
2-Channel Skin Temp
2-Channel Heel/Toe Strike
BIONOMADIX LOGGER (BN-LOGGER) Get the real-world data your application demands!
BioNomadix Loggers wirelessly record physiological data as subjects freely and naturally live their lives—record
from up to three dual-channel wearable BioNomadix Transmitters* plus a built-in accelerometer. Sync the
BioNomadix Logger with GPS for a correlation between physiological and location data.
Use as a stand-alone system with AcqKnowledge or combine with BioNomadix Receivers and a computer
running AcqKnowledge:
 Sync Transmitters to the Logger mode for remote data logging
 Combine Transmitters with BioNomadix wireless Receivers to operate
in the lab for real-time telemetry.
The compact Logger device provides a color display for visual feedback,
speaker for auditory feedback, vibration for haptic feedback, voice journal
for participant comments, event markers, and alarms. Includes micro-USB
to USB cable for charging/data transfer, AC Charger and belt case.
* Existing BioNomadix devices require a firmware upgrade to be
compatible with Loggers—see BN-TX-UPG online for details.
BioNomadix Logger Specifications
Weight: 121.2 grams
Transmitter: Ultra-low power 2.4 GHz bi-directional digital RF transmitter
Dimensions: 9.42 cm x 5.76 cm x 2.3 cm
Rate: 2 kHz, maximum
Screen: Color, 6 cm diagonal
Operational range: 1 meter (line of sight, approx.)
Memory: 8 GB
Charger: Integrated USB charger with AC wall adapter BN-LOG-CHRG
Battery: 1800 mAh Lithium-ion
Operating time: 24 hours (recording)
Compliance: FC, CE, IC, VCCI -FCC Part 15 B FCC ID: ZWIBNXT1, IC: 9901ABNXT1
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 1 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
BIONOMADIX ELECTRODE LEAD SET
BN-EL15-LEAD2
BN-EL15-LEAD3
BN-EL30-LEAD2
BN-EL30-LEAD3
BN-EL45-LEAD2
BN-EL45-LEAD3
BN-EL50-LEAD2
BN-EL50-LEAD4
BN-EDA-LEAD2
BN-ADAPT-2
BN-ADAPT-3
Electrode Lead 2 x 15 cm to BioNomadix
Electrode Lead 3 x 15 cm to BioNomadix
Electrode Lead 2 x 30 cm to BioNomadix
Electrode Lead 3 x 30 cm to BioNomadix
Electrode Lead 2 x 45 cm to BioNomadix
Electrode Lead 3 x 45 cm to BioNomadix
Electrode Lead 2 x 50 cm to BioNomadix BN-NICO
Electrode Lead 4 x 50 cm to BioNomadix BN-NICO
EDA Electrode Lead to BioNomadix BN-PPGED
Adapter 2 x 10 cm for connecting Touchproof leads to BN Transmitter
Adapter 3 x 10 cm for connecting Touchproof leads to BN Transmitter
BIONOMADIX TRANSDUCERS
BN-PULSE-XDCR Pulse Transducer for BioNomadix BN-PPGED
BN-PULSEEAR-XDR Pulse Earclip Transducer for BioNomadix BN-PPGED
BN-RESP-XDCR Respiration Transducer for BioNomadix BN-RSP2 or BN-RSPEC
BN-TEMP-A-XDCR Skin Temp Skin Transducer for BioNomadix BN-SKT2
BN-TEMP-B-XDCR Fast-Response Temp Transducer for BioNomadix BN-SKT2
BN-STRIKE-XDCR Heel-Toe Strike Transducer for BioNomadix BN-STRIKE
BN-GON-110-XDCR Twin-axis Goniometer Transducer for BioNomadix BN-GONIO
BN-GON-150-XDCR Twin-axis Goniometer Transducer for BioNomadix BN-GONIO
BN-TOR-110-XDCR Single-axis Torsiometer Transducer for BioNomadix BN-GONIO
BN-TOR-150-XDCR Single-axis Torsiometer Transducer for BioNomadix BN-GONIO
BN-GON-F-XDCR Single-axis Goniometer Transducer for BioNomadix BN-GONIO
BIONOMADIX ACCESSORIES
Shirts
BN-SHIRT-XS
BN-SHIRT-S
BN-SHIRT-M
BioNomadix Shirt - XS
BioNomadix Shirt - Small
BioNomadix Shirt - Medium
BN-SHIRT-L
BN-SHIRT-XL
BioNomadix Shirt - Large
BioNomadix Shirt - XL
Straps
RXSTRAPBN-20
RXSTRAPBN-33
RXSTRAPBN-76
RXSTRAPBN-137
BioNomadix Strap 20 cm x 25.4 mm
BioNomadix Strap 33 cm x 25.4 mm
BioNomadix Strap 76 cm x 25.4 mm
BioNomadix Strap 137 cm x 25.4 mm
EEG Caps (for BN-EEG2)
BN-EEGCAP-SYS
BN-CAP-SMALL
BN-CAP-MEDIUM
BN-CAP-LARGE
BioNomadix 10/20 EEG Cap System
BioNomadix EEG Cap – Small (50-54 cm)
BioNomadix EEG Cap – Medium (54-58 cm)
BioNomadix EEG Cap – Large (58-62 cm)
Charger
BN-BAT-CHRG
BioNomadix Battery Charger – full charge lasts approx. 72 hours, Transmitter batteries
will last 500 charge/discharge cycles—or approximately 35,000 hours!
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 2 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SETUP OVERVIEW
1. Setup the BioNomadix transmitter with subject.
2. Setup the BioNomadix receiver.
3. Setup the software.
HARDWARE SETUP
Transmitter and Receiver units are shipped as a matched pair and must always be used as a pair (see serial number
and ID sync options). Up to 16 channels per BioNomadix system can be monitored simultaneously, returning data
quality equal to standard BIOPAC MP modules. Normal operating range between transmitter and receiver is 10
meters line of sight in standard laboratory environments. For additional guidelines, see BioNomadix Operational
Range and Characteristics on page 10.
BIONOMADIX TRANSMITTER
Setup
1. Connect the electrode lead set or transducer to the BioNomadix
Transmitter module inputs. Squeeze lock connector and push until it
clicks into place. CH A and CH B require an appropriate lead set or
transducer based on signal type.
2. Attach electrodes and electrode leads or transducer to the Subject
Position.
3. Secure the Transmitter module on Subject, (i.e. with a strap, or inside a BioNomadix shirt pocket).
 For optimum results, the BioNomadix Custom Sport Shirt is recommended. This speciallydesigned shirt is made of a lightweight material with numerous “pockets” for housing multiple
transmitters. The BioNomadix shirt incorporates zippered openings for positioning electrode
leads properly.
4. Set the power switch on the BioNomadix Transmitter to ON. The Status light will flash sequences based
upon connectivity and battery life.
5. Double blinks occurring every two seconds indicate successful pairing and normal operation between
transmitter and receiver.
CONTROLS
ID: Press to illuminate Status light of matching Receiver unit.
On/Off: Power switch for the transmitter. The transmitter power must be turned OFF for charging.
Status: Solid amber when battery power is low. Approximately one hour of operation remains after light
turns amber, full-charge with BN-BAT-CGR battery charger typically requires one hour.
Channels: Connect the electrode leads to the matched BioNomadix Transmitter module inputs. (Squeeze lock
connector and push until it clicks into place).
BIONOMADIX RECEIVER
BEFORE BEGINNING:
 Decide whether one or both available channels will be used. (If using only one channel, set “A” to
ON and “B” to OFF.)
 Decide which channel bank will be used and select “X” or “Y.”
 Set channel slider to correct position.
 Attach Receiver unit to the right side of the MP150 unit, or the left side of the IPS100C. The Status
light will turn green when communicating with transmitter. As with standard BIOPAC hardware,
additional modules can be attached to the receiver.
 Set desired channel options on the Receiver module.
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 3 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
The RSPEC Receiver unit is depicted, but controls operate similarly for all units.
Wireless antenna input
Receiver LED: Steady green when paired with transmitter. Blinks amber once per
second when communication is interrupted.
Input Signals: A =
B=
“A” Assigns the input signals for channels 1-8.
“B” Assigns the input signals for channels 9-16.
On/Off
Enables or disables module channels: “A” channels 1-8 “B” channels 9-16.
X/Y channel banks
Selects between “X” channel bank or “Y” channel bank.
“A” X bank is 1-4, Y bank is 5-8.
“B” X bank is 9-12, Y bank 13-16.
NOTE: “A” or “B” banks that are turned off will free up those associated Analog
channels for use by other signal types.
Cal: Recessed Calibration button. NOTE: Calibration is not required, most users
can use factory presets. Calibration is an advanced procedure.
TRANSMITTER BATTERY LIFE
Transmitter battery life is described below as a change of color in the sequence of LED flashes.
LED Color Pattern
green
yellow
yellow
yellow
yellow
green
green
yellow
yellow
yellow
green
green
green
yellow
yellow
green
green
green
green
yellow
Charge %
75% - 100%
50% - 75%
25% - 50%
5% - 25%
< 5%
IMPORTANT: If the transmitter is to be stored for prolonged periods, it is strongly recommended that the
battery be fully charged and the transmitter turned off prior to storage. Failure to do so may
result in permanent damage to the battery.
SOFTWARE SETUP
Recording data with AcqKnowledge software
After completing setup, click Start in the AcqKnowledge software to begin recording data.
If the paired signal is interrupted due to electrical interference or a subject wandering out of range, the most
recently-acquired data point will be retained, with normal acquisition continuing once communication is
reestablished. See also: BioNomadix Operational Range and Transmission Characteristics.
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 4 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
FULL BIONOMADIX MODULE SPECS
Table 1: BioNomadix Dual Biopotential Pairs – See Table 2 for Transducer or Combo, and Table 3 for Accelerometer
BioNomadix Pair
BN-ECG2
BN-EEG2
BN-EGG2
BN-EMG2
BN-EOG2
Signal type:
Dual Channel ECG
Dual Channel EEG
Dual Channel EGG
Dual Channel EMG
Dual Channel EOG
Bandlimits
Max:
Factory preset:
Filter options:
0.05 Hz to 150 Hz
1 Hz to 35 Hz
0.05 or 1 Hz HP, 35 or
150 Hz LP
Heart Rate Mode
0.1 Hz to 100 Hz
0.5 Hz to 35 Hz
0.1 or 0.5 Hz HP, 35 or 100
Hz LP
Delta, Theta, Alpha, Beta
0.005 Hz to 1.0 Hz
0.005 Hz to 1.0 Hz
0.005 Hz HP, 1 Hz LP
5 Hz to 500 Hz
10 Hz to 500 Hz
5 or 10 Hz HP, 250 or 500
Hz LP
Envelope Detection Mode
0.005 Hz to 100 Hz
0.005 Hz to 35 Hz
0.005 or 1 Hz HP, 35 or
100 Hz LP
Derivative Mode
Alternative signal:
Notch filter:
50/60 Hz user-controlled switch; typically not required—factory preset OFF. See Appendix for more hardware-specific output options.
Noise Voltage
(shorted inputs):
0.9 µV rms (bandwidth
of 0.05 Hz to 150 Hz)
0.2 µV rms (bandwidth of
0.10 Hz to 100 Hz)
0.5 µV rms (bandwidth of
0.005 Hz to 1 Hz)
1.5 µV rms (bandwidth of 1.0
Hz to 500 Hz)
0.9 µV rms (bandwidth
of 0.005 Hz to 100 Hz)
Input Voltage Range:
up to 10 mV P-P
up to 2 mV P-P
up to 10 mV P-P
up to 10 mV P-P
up to 10 mV P-P
Output Voltage Range:
±10 V (receiver output)
CMRR
110 dB typical at 50/60Hz; 90dB minimum for ECG, EEG, EMG, and EOG, 100 db minimum for EGG
CMII
1000 MΩ (50/60 Hz)
Fixed Gain:
2,000
Operating Time:
72-90 hours
Included strap:
137 cm - BN-STRAP137
10,000
2,000
2,000
2,000
76 cm - BN-STRAP76
137 cm - BN-STRAP137
33 cm - BN-STRAP33
76 cm – BN-STRAP76
Size & Weight:
Transmitter (approx.): 6 cm x 4 cm x 2 cm; 54 grams; Receiver (approx).: 4 cm x 11 cm x 19 cm; 380 grams
Input:
See BioNomadix electrode lead cable options (BN-ELxx-LEADx). Each biopotential transmitter requires at least one GND. To eliminate
redundant biopotential GND, use a 3-lead electrode lead cable for one input (CH A or B) and a 2-lead electrode lead cable for the other input
(CH A or B) on each BioNomadix transmitter.
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 5 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Table 2: BioNomadix Dual Transducer – See Table 1 for Biopotentials, and Table 3 for Accelerometer
BioNomadix
BN-SKT2
BN-RSP2
BN-GONIO
Dual Channel SKT temp
Dual Channel RSP resp
Dual Channel Goniometry
Signal type:
DC to 10 Hz
DC to 10 Hz
DC to 100 Hz
BandlimitsMax:
DC to 1 Hz
DC to 1 Hz
DC to 10 Hz
Factory preset:
DC, 0.5 Hz HP, 1 or 10 Hz LP
DC, 0.5 Hz HP, 1 or 10 Hz LP DC, 3 Hz or 100 Hz LP
Filter Options:
50/60 Hz user-controlled switch; typically not required—factory preset OFF. See Appendix for
Notch filter:
additional hardware-specific output options.
0.01° C (rms)
FSR/4096; (4.88 mV)
Resolution:
0.1 rotation (rms)
BN-STRIKE
Dual Channel Strike Data
DC to 100 Hz
DC to 10 Hz
DC, 3 Hz or 100 Hz LP
50/60 Hz user-controlled
switch – factory preset OFF
N/A
Signal range:
13 to 51° C
± 10 V (at output)
± 180
± 10 V (at output)
Output Voltage range:
Operating time:
Included strap:
± 10 V (receiver output)
72-90 hours
137 cm - BN-STRAP-137
137 cm - BN-STRAP-137
33 cm - BN-STRAP-33
Input:
BN-TEMP-A/B-XDCR
BN-RESP-XDCR
76 cm - BN-STRAP-76 &
BN-STRAP-33
BN-GON-110-XDCR
BN-GON-150-XDCR
BN-GON-F-XDCR
BN-TOR-100-XDCR
BN-TOR-150-XDCR
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 6 - 24
BN-STRIKE-XDCR
Updated: 4.17.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Table 3: BioNomadix Combo Pairs – See Table 1 for Biopotentials, Table 2 for Dual Transducer and Table 4 for Accelerometer
BioNomadix
Signal type:
BandlimitsMax:
Factory preset:
Filter Options:
Notch filter:
Resolution:
Signal range:
Output Voltage range:
Operating time:
Included strap:
Input:
BN-RSPEC
RSP plus ECG
Respiration (CH A):
see BN-RSP2 spec
ECG (CH B) :
see BN-ECG2 spec
BN-PPGED
PPG plus EDA
Both: DC to 10 Hz:
PPG: 0.5 Hz to 3 Hz
EDA: DC to 3 Hz
Both: DC, 0.5 Hz HP, 3 or 10 Hz LP
EDA: 1 Hz LP
BN-NICO
Z and dZ/dt
Both: DC to 10 Hz
Both: DC to 10 Hz
DC, 1, 3, 5, 10 Hz LP
BN-DYNEMG
Dynamometry plus EMG
Dyn: DC 100 Hz
Dyn: DC to 10 Hz
Dyn: DC, 3 Hz, 10 Hz, or
100 Hz LP
EMG: see BN-EMG2
specs
50/60 Hz user-controlled switch; typically not required—factory preset OFF. See Appendix for additional hardware-specific
output options.
PPG: FSR/4096; (4.88 mV)
Z: nominally ~0.05 Ω
Dyn: 35 micro kg-f/cm2
(rms)
at
10
Hz
BW
(0.0005 psi) (rms)
see BN-RSP2 and BN-ECG2
EDA: 0.012 µS (min step)
dZ/dt: ~0.01 Ω/sec (rms)
specs
EMG: see BN-EMG specs
at 10 Hz BW
PPG: ±10 V (at output)
Z: 5 to 100 Ω (mag)
Dyn: 0 – 1.055 kg-f/cm2
see BN-RSP2 and BN-ECG2
specs
EDA: 0 to 50 µS; excitation: 0.5 V
dZ/dt: ±10 Ω/sec
EMG: up to 10 mV P-P
constant V
± 10 V (receiver output)
72-90 hours
24 hours
24 hours
75 hours
137 cm - BN-STRAP137
33 cm - BN-STRAP33
137 cm - BN-STRAP137
33 cm - BN-STRAP-33
CH A: BN-RESP-XDCR
CH A: BN-PULSE-XDCR
2 x BN-EL50-LEAD4
CH A: BN-CLENCH-XDCR
(or 2 x BN-EL50-LEAD2)
CH B: BN-ELxx-LEAD3
CH B: BN-EDA-LEAD2
CH B: BN-ELxx-LEAD3
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 7 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Table 4: BioNomadix Accelerometer– See Table 1-2 for Biopotentials and Table 3 for Transducer or Combo
BioNomadix
BN-ACCL3
G (X, Y, Z)
Signal type:
±2, ±4, ±8 or ±16 G
Bandlimits
Max:
± 16 G at 400 Hz LP
Factory preset:
DC to 3.13 Hz LP up to 400 Hz LP (in power of 2 steps)
Filter Options:
Tap Event Mark Mode (replaces G)
Alternative signal:
Resolution:
X: 5 mg rms, Y: 6 mg rms, Z: 9 mg (rms) (±2 G scale at 400 Hz LP)
Signal range:
Output Voltage range:
Selectable: ±2, ±4, ±8 or ±16 G
±10 V (receiver output)
Operating time:
72-90 hours
Included strap:
33 cm - BN-STRAP33
Input:
Attach BioNomadix transmitter to subject – no additional hardware input required; sensor is internal to transmitter.
Table 5: Common Specs
Operational Range:
10 meters (line-of-sight) typical in standard laboratory setups. See also: Operational Range and Characteristics.
Delay:
Large fixed component (12.5 ms) and small variable component (±0.5 ms)
Operating Temp & Humidity:
Temperature: 5-45 C
Size & Weight:
Transmitter: (approx.): 6 cm x 4 cm x 2 cm: 54 grams
Receiver: (approx.): 4 cm x 11 cm x 19 cm: 380 grams
Transmitter:
Type: Ultra-low power, 2.4 GHz bi-directional digital RF transmitter
Rate: 2,000 Hz (between transmitter and receiver)
Receiver Power:
Use with an MP Research System or with isolated power supply IPS100C for 3rd-party data acquisition system.
Battery & Charger:
BioNomadix transmitters use an L-ion battery: full charge takes approx. 1 hour to provide maximum operating time.
A battery charger is included with each module pair. See BN-CHARGER for charge time and recharge cycle details.
Compliance:
FCC,
, IC,
Humidity: 95% non-condensing
- FCC Part 15 B - FCC ID: receiver: ZWIBNXR1, transmitter ZWIBNXT1
IC: receiver: 9901A-BNXR1, transmitter: 9901A-BNXT1
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 8 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BIONOMADIX ELECTRODE LEADS
All BioNomadix electrode leads use lightweight, insulated tinsel wire 1.25 mm OD with female mini-pinch clips
and squeeze lock connectors
2-LEAD BIONOMADIX ELECTRODES LEADS
Lead wires:
2 (red and white)
Electrode clips: 2
Length:
BN-EL15-LEAD2: 15 cm, BN-EL30-LEAD2; 30 cm, BN-EL45-LEAD2; 45 cm
Interface:
Secondary channel lead for the following BioNomadix Transmitters: BN-ECG2, BNEEG2, BN-EGG2, BN-EMG2, BN-EOG2, (first channel lead should be a BN-ELxxLEAD3 three lead set to establish ground). Do not use for EDA or NICO!
2-LEAD FOR NICO – BN-EL50-LEAD2
Lead wires:
2 (insulated leads black)
Electrode clips: 2 (alligator clips with teeth)
Length:
50 cm
Interface:
NICO CH A or CH B
To eliminate redundant ground leads for biopotentials, use 3-lead for primary
input and 2-lead for secondary input for each BioNomadix unit.
3-LEAD BIONOMADIX ELECTRODES LEADS
Lead wires:
3 (red, white and black)
Electrode clips: 3
Length:
BN-EL15-LEAD3; 15 cm, BN-EL30-LEAD3; 30 cm, BN-EL45-LEAD3; 45 cm
Interface:
Primary and secondary channel lead for the following BioNomadix Transmitters: BN-ECG2,
BN-EEG2, BN-EGG2, BN-EMG2, BN-EOG2.
Do not use for EDA or NICO!
4-LEAD BIONOMADIX ELECTRODE LEADS
Leads:
4 (red x 2 and white x 2)
Electrode clips: 4
Length:
BN-EL50-LEAD4; 50 cm
Interface:
designed for BN-NICO: CH A or CH B (can be
used with other BioNomadix biopotential transmitters)
Sample connection for BN-EL50-LEAD4 leads and EL500 paired
spot electrodes (right).
EDA BIONOMADIX ELECTRODE LEADS
Leads:
Electrode clips:
Length:
Interface:
2 (red and black)
2
BN-EDA-LEAD2; 30 cm
Only use in CH B EDA on wireless BioNomadix Transmitter BN-PPGED
BIONOMADIX TO TOUCHPROOF ADAPTERS
Leads:
Electrode clips:
Length:
Interface:
2 (red and white, BN-ADAPT-2) or 3 (red, white and black, BN-ADAPT-3)
2 (BN-ADAPT-2) or 3 (BN-ADAPT-3)
10 cm
Us these adapters to connect Touchproof electrodes to a BioNomadix transmitter.
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 9 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BIONOMADIX OPERATIONAL RANGE AND TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS
The BioNomadix system is a very low power transmission system designed for physiological measurements in a
laboratory setting. In this explanation, a BioNomadix transmitter is referred to as series BN-Tx and a BioNomadix
receiver as series BN-Rx.
Primary design objectives for the BioNomadix system:
5) Quick recharge time, under one hour
1) BN-Tx and BN-Rx units to emulate operation, as if
6) Bn-Tx units to be as lightweight, rugged
“attached by cable”
and small as possible
2) Transmission effects not to disturb physiological source
3) Classification subject to class B digital device pursuant to 7) Minimal user setup required, simply
power up and start collecting data
FCC part 15
4) Long BN-Tx operational time, after recharge
BioNomadix Operational Range and Characteristics
A primary objective of the BioNomadix System is that it can not behave in a fashion that would permit any arbitrary
time delay between transmitter and receiver. This objective is critical for the BioNomadix System because it insures
robust time synchronization between any BN-Tx units and external hardware. Because of the requirement to “behave
as though a cable connects BN-Tx and BN-Rx”, the BioNomadix System required a special and optimized protocol to
insure the best possible attempts to send data, within a limited (10 sample) time frame. If data could not be sent within
this time frame, then data would be replaced with the last data value sent for a short time period (for up to about one
second) thereafter until finally, assuming a reconnect was not possible, the transmitted data (not received) will be
identified as null (zero) values.
The BioNomadix System operational transmission range is 10 meters line-of-sight, typical, in standard laboratory
environments. Operational range can vary depending on factors such as presence of electromagnetic interference,
multi-path, or radio frequency signal blocking. In the event of a communications failure, BioNomadix Tx and Rx
modules will attempt to re-establish communications until such communications can be re-established.
BioNomadix Tx are purposely kept at very low power so as not to disrupt the sensitive biophysical parameter
measured, to enhance battery life, and to satisfy the relevant FCC regulations. If a BN-Tx and BN-Rx pair is used
outside of the laboratory (without the benefit of multi-path) and if the BN-Tx is line-of-sight blocked from the BNRx, then communication dropouts are increasingly likely. A functional solution is to keep the BN-Tx and BN-Rx in
constant line-of-site view.
BioNomadix signal performance is best with “line-of-sight” connection from transmitter unit to receiver unit. Signal
dropouts happen when a conductive surface (metal or human body) is placed between the transmitter and receiver
unit. If this happens, and there are no other radio frequency reflective surfaces in the room, then the radio waves can’t
get from transmitter unit to receiver. This phenomenon is referred to as “body-blocking.” The solution is to place the
transmitter and receiver units closer together and to eliminate potential for body-blocking.
Case studies
Case 1: Multiple people wearing BioNomadix Tx units are walking around in a room and the BN-Rx units are placed
in a nearby room. Periodically, when body blocking occurs, short signal dropouts are noted.
Solution 1: Place the BN-Rx units, with MP150, directly above the subjects in the room. This will greatly
minimize the potential for body-blocking, from Tx unit to Rx unit, as subjects move around.
Case 2: Multiple people wearing BioNomadix Tx units are sitting in a room with a central table. The BioNomadix Rx
units are placed in a nearby room. Periodically, when body blocking occurs, short signal dropouts are noted.
Solution 2: Mount the receiver (BN-Rx) units, with MP150, underneath the center of the table, around which
the subjects are sitting. Mount a platform to the underside of the table and rest the receiver with MP150 on it.
This situation places the receivers just one or two meters away from the transmitters attached to the subjects.
Case 3: Body-blocking can't be prevented.
Solution 3: Consider using BIOPAC's TEL100C Telemetry System instead of the BioNomadix wireless
system. The TEL100C comes standard with a 10-meter (extendable to 60 meters), thin, lightweight signal
transmission cable and will not exhibit any body-blocking issues because the data is transmitted via shielded
coaxial cable and is immune to any RF signal interference.
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 10 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BioNomadix Transducers
Pulse BioNomadix Transducer
BN-PULSE-XDCR
Emitter/Detector Wavelength:
Optical LP Filter Cutoff:
Nominal Output:
Power:
Sterilizable:
Dimensions (L x W x H):
Transducer Weight:
Interface:
860 nm ± 60 nm
800 nm
The operational range of the emitter and detector falls within the wavelength
range of 800 nm to 920 nm. The filter is placed over the receiver; the filter of
800 nm is an optical lowpass, so wavelengths longer than 800 nm will pass
thru.
20 mV (peak-peak)
10 mA drive current
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
16 mm x 17 mm x 8 mm
4.5 grams Cable: 45 cm
only use in CH A PPG on the BioNomadix BN-PPGED
Pulse Earclip Transducer
BN-PULSEEAR-XDR
Emitter/Detector Wavelength:
Optical Low Pass Filter Cutoff
Wavelength:
Nominal Output:
Power:
Sterilizable:
Dimensions (L x W x H):
Transducer Weight:
Interface:
890 nm (nominal maximum)
ambient visible light filter
The transducer operates with the BioNomadix Pulse Transmitter (BNPPGED) and consists of a matched infrared emitter and photo-diode, which
transmits changes in infrared reflectance resulting from varying blood flow.
800-1,000 nm (70% spectral response)
20 mV (peak-peak)
10 mA drive current
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
16 mm x 17 mm x 8 mm
4.5 grams Cable length: 80 cm
only use in CH A PPG on the BioNomadix BN-PPGED
Respiration Transducer
BN-RESP-XDCR
Response:
Circumference Range:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Sterilizable:
Variable Resistance Output:
Cable:
Interface:
True DC
15 cm x 150 cm (increase with a longer strap)
66 mm (long) x 40 mm (wide) x 15mm (thick)
18 grams
YES: use standard gas sterilization techniques [i.e., Ethylene Oxide (EtO)]
5 - 125 KOhm
30 cm
BN-RSP2 CH A RSP or CHB RSP, or BN-RSPEC CHA RSP
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 11 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Clench Force Transducer
BN-CLENCH-XDCR
Pressure Range:
Error Band:
Accuracy:
Output:
Bulb Diameter:
Bulb Length:
Weight:
Cable Length:
Interface:
0 to 1.0546 Kg-f/cm^2 (0 to 15 psi)
± 2% full scale
±25% full scale – best fit straight line
25 mV/0.01 Kgf/cm^2 (0.176 V/psi)
5.8 cm
11.1 cm
108 grams
45 cm
Use with the BN-DYNEMG Dynamometer and EMG module
Heel-Toe Strike Transducer
BN-STRIKE-XDCR
Nominal Output Range:
Nominal Contact Force:
Attachment:
FSR Dimensions:
FSR Active Area:
Interface:
-1 to +1 Volt
200 g to indicate heel-toe strike
TAPE 1, TAPE 2, vinyl electrical or duct tape
18.3 mm (dia) x 0.36 mm (thick) and 30 cm pigtail lead
12.7 mm diameter
BN-STRIKE transmitter (STRK A, STRK B)
Skin Temperature Transducer
BN-TEMP-A-XDCR
Nominal Resistance:
Maximum operating temperature:
Accuracy and Interchangeability:
Response Time:
Compatibility:
Sterilizable:
Cable:
Dimensions:
Interface:
2252 ohm at 25° C
60° C
0.2° C
1.1 sec (attached to skin)
YSI series 400 temperature probes
YES (contact BIOPAC for details)
30 cm
9.8 mm (diameter) x 3.3 mm (high)
BN-SKT2 only: CH A SKT and/or CH B SKT
Skin Temperature Transducer
BN-TEMP-B-XDCR (Fast Response)
Nominal resistance:
Maximum operating temperature:
Accuracy and Interchangeability:
Response Time:
Compatibility:
Sterilizable:
Cable:
Dimensions:
Interface:
2252 ohm @ 25° C
60° C (when used with BN-SKT2)
0.2° C
0.6 sec (in air)
YSI series 400 temperature probes
YES (contact BIOPAC for details)
30 cm
1.7 mm (diameter) x 5 mm (long)
BN-SKT2 only: CH A SKT and/or CH B SKT
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 12 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Goniometer & Torsiometer Transducers BN-GON-XDCR, BN-TOR-XDCR, BN-GON-F-XDCR
Use with BN-GONIO Goniometry Module.
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 13 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BIONOMADIX ACCESSORIES
BioNomadix Shirt
Attachment Features:
Materials:
22 pockets: 2 neck front, 2 neck back, 4 chest center, 4 back center, 2 hip front, 2
hip back, 3 left arm, 3 right arm
4 zippers: right front from arm to hip, left back from shoulder to hip, right and left
under arm from neck front to neck back
4 strap bands: 4 rows of strap bands (2 loops front, 2 loops back) for RSP
transducer strap
Black 6 oz. eyelet mesh 88% Polyester / 12% Spandex; metal zippers
Sizes:
BN-SHIRT-XS extra small
BN-SHIRT-S small
BN-SHIRT-M medium
Care instructions:
Machine Wash, Warm / Line Dry
BN-SHIRT-L large
BN-SHIRT-XL extra large
BioNomadix Strap
Dimensions:
Material:
Use with:
Length:
Length 20 cm, 33 cm, 76, cm, 137 cm (all widths 2.5 cm)
stretch Velcro® - hook/loop type
BioNomadix Transmitters
RXSTRAP-BN-20; 20 cm
RX-STRAP-BN-33; 33 cm
RXSTRAP-BN-76; 76 cm
RXSTRAP-BN-137; 137 cm
BioNomadix 10/20 EEG Cap System
Attachment:
Material:
Use with:
Lead adapters:
Sizes:
Components:
WHITE TIP
Fp1
F3
C3
P3
01
F7
T3
T5
Gnd
Fz
Ribbon cable (25 cm) from cap to 19 Touchproof sockets
Lycra
BN-EEG2
BN-ADAPT-TP2 or BN-ADAPT-TP3 depending on sites to be recorded
BN-CAP-SMALL (50-54 cm,) BN-CAP-MEDIUM (54-58 cm,)
BN-CAP-LARGE (58-62 cm)
1 x medium cap with 19-pin ribbon cable
1 x mating cable with Touchproof connectors
2 x earclip reference electrodes
1 x blunt-tipped syringe
1 x EEG recording gel
1 x chest harness (holds cap in place)
1 x liquid soap (to wash cap after use)
WIRE COLOR
Brown
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
Violet
Gray
White
Black
RED TIP
Fp2
F4
C4
P4
02
F8
T4
T6
Cz
Pz
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 14 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BioNomadix Battery Charger: BN-BAT-CHRG
To charge, the BioNomadix Transmitter must be in the OFF position and
have no electrode leads or transducers attached.
Connector:
Number of cells:
Charger current
Current tolerance:
Voltage limit:
Voltage limit tolerance:
Operating temperature:
Input voltage:
Frequency
Wall plug:
Output cable length:
Connector
Weight:
Dimensions:
Lithium Ion Chemistry
Termination algorithm:
Termination indicated
Top-off charge:
Restart threshold:
Maintenance charge:
Charge voltage limit:
Override timer:
DC polarized squeeze-clip plug to mate with all BioNomadix Transmitters
1 L-ion
1000 mA (660 mA for IB-16800
+10%
Preset
+0.2%
0° C to 40° C
90 VAC to 240 VAC
50 Hz to 60 Hz
ships with US blades; adapters available for Euro, China or Australia
1.7 meter (~6 feet)
DC polarized squeeze-clip plug to mate with all BioNomadix Transmitters
142 grams (5 oz.)
75 mm x 51 mm x 40 mm
CCCV
Current falls to limit value/5
1 hour or current falls to limit value/10
7/8 of termination voltage or every 2 hours
N/A
Preset to 4.20 V (one L-ion cell)
None
IMPORTANT: If the transmitter is to be stored for prolonged periods, it is strongly recommended that the
battery be fully charged and the transmitter turned off prior to storage. Failure to do so may
result in permanent damage to the battery.
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 15 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BIONOMADIX COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
INDUSTRY CANADA INFORMATION
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and
maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio
interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically
radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
This radio transmitter (IC: 9901A-BNXR1) has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna
types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type
indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that
type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
WLAN antenna, maximum gain 1.5 dBi, 50 ohm
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Conformément à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut
fonctionner avec une antenne d'un type et d'un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour
l'émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique
à l'intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d'antenne et son gain de sorte que la
puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l'intensité nécessaire à
l'établissement d'une communication satisfaisante.
Le présent émetteur radio (IC: 9901A-BNXR1) de modèle s'il fait partie du matériel de catégorieI) a été approuvé
par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible
maximal et l'impédance requise pour chaque type d'antenne. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou
dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal indiqué, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'émetteur.
réseau local sans fil antenne, le gain max 1.5 dBi, 50 ohm
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne
doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
CLASS A ITE
この装置は、クラスA情報技術装置です。この装置を家庭環境で使用すると
電波妨害を引き起こすことがあります。この場合には使用者が適切な対策を
講ずるよう要求されることがあります。VCCI-A
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 16 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
BIONOMADIX—OPTIONAL CALIBRATION
Isolated Power Supply
To use BioNomadix with the Isolated Power Supply (IPS100C), use CBL102S cable to connect the IPS100C
to the Receiver output channel. This is accessible via the front panel of the IPS100C.
Signal Validation
BioNomadix units are factory calibrated, but if user-calibration is desired for measurement verification, the
following steps may be used. Please see the appropriate section for BioNomadix calibration guidelines.




BN-ECG, BN-EEG, BN-EGG, BNEMG, BN-EOG
BN-EDA
BN-NICO
BN-PPG and BN-RSP





BN-SKT
BN-GON and BN-TOR
BN-STRIKE
BN-DYNEMG
BN-ACCL
BN-ECG, BN-EEG, BN-EGG, BN-EMG, BN-EOG BIOPOTENTIAL CALIBRATION
Three alligator clips will be required to calibrate a Biopotential
Transmitter/Receiver set.
1) Attach alligator clip to LEAD side of electrode pinch clip
(see figure on right).
2) Connect black and white pinch clips together (this
combination is attached to signal generator ground).
3) Connect red pinch clip to signal generator output for the Transmitter/Receiver set.

ECG, EGG, EMG, EOG
The signal generator should be set to 1 mV peak to peak sine wave in the appropriate signal
frequency range for the Transmitter/Receiver set. The total gain of the Transmitter/Receiver
set is 2,000. The measured output voltage from the Receiver should be 1 mV p-p * 2000 or 2
V p-p. The maximum input signal is 10 mV p-p.

EEG
The signal generator should be set to 1 mV peak to peak in the appropriate signal frequency
range for the Transmitter/Receiver set. The total gain of the Transmitter/Receiver set is
10,000. The measured output voltage from the Receiver should be 1 mV p-p * 10,000 or 10 V
p-p. The maximum input signal is 2 mV p-p.
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 17 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BN-EDA ELECTRODERMAL CALIBRATION
Transmitter/Receiver set can be calibrated by applying a known resistance (conductance) to the EDA
electrode pinch connectors via alligator clips. Suggested values of conductance would be 0 µSiemens (infinite
ohms – no connection) and 10 µSiemens (100 K ohms). The EDA Transmitter/Receiver set outputs +10 V for
a 50 µS measured conductance. The EDA Transmitter/Receiver set will output approximately +2 V for a 10
µS measured conductance.
BN-NICO CALIBRATION
Mapping for Z:
0.8 V to 10 ohms
9 V to 100 ohms
The calibration values for Z are approximate. For a more
exact calibration for Z, introduce a 10 ohm resistor
between the paired leads (Iout, Vin+) and (Vin-, Iin) to
simulate a 10 ohm impedance magnitude. Use a 100 ohm
resistor to simulate a 100 ohm impedance magnitude. See
figure at right for details:
For the most accurate calibrations, use known impedances
(resistances) that bracket the expected high and low values
being recorded. For conventional noninvasive cardiac
output measurements, optimal low impedance is 15 ohms
and optimal high impedance is 40 ohms.
Mapping for dZ/dt:
0 V to 0 ohms/sec
10 V to 10 ohms/sec
The calibration values for dZ/dt can be accomplished by introducing a known and varying resistance that can
be precisely set to a specific rate of change. For calibration related to cardiac output measurements, a varying
resistance of ±1 ohms/seconds to ±5 ohms/second is ideal. A photonically-isolated voltage controlled
resistance can be used for this calibration. A cadmium sulfide cell in parallel with a resistance of 25 ohms can
be employed in conjunction with a signal generator driven LED to provide a varying light intensity to
modulate the resistance of the cadmium sulfide cell.
BN-PPG AND BN-RSP PULSE AND RESPIRATION CALIBRATION
User-calibration not recommended, as the measurements performed are essentially dimensionless.
However, it’s possible to calibrate the PPG Transmitter/Receiver set by introducing a variable gray-scale
density pattern to the PPG probe in a dark environment. The RSP Transmitter/Receiver set can be calibrated
by applying differing amounts of force to the RSP transducer/belt combination to stretch the belt over
different distances.
BN-SKT SKIN TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION
Insert probe into temperature well set to the appropriate temperature. As an alternative, replace the thermistor
with known temperature(s) that reflects the specific temperature(s) simulated. The temperature probe
specifications are equivalent to YSI@ 400 series probes. The temperature range for the SKT
Transmitter/Receiver set is 13 to 51 degrees C. Using the specified temperature probe: 13 degrees provides a 10 V output and 51 degrees provides a +10 V output.
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 18 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BN-GON, BN-TOR GONIOMETER CALIBRATION
This is general calibration information for all BIOPAC Goniometers and Torsiometers:
When using all goniometers and torsiometers, the minimum value of bend radius must be observed at all
times, particularly when attaching and removing the sensors from the subject. Failure to do this will result in
reduced unit life or failure.
The sensors have been designed to be as light as possible and the operating force to be a minimum. This
permits free movement of the joint without influence by the sensors. The sensors measure the angle subtended
between the endblocks. Use the software calibration features (under Setup Channels) to calibrate any of the
BIOPAC series goniometers.
Each goniometer requires a DA100C amplifier, BN-GONIO, or MP3X/45 analog input per rotational axis.
Accordingly, the twin axis goniometers will need two DA100C amplifiers, one BN-GONIO or two MP3X/45
analog channels to simultaneously measure both rotational axes.
Excitation voltages are factory preset for the various data acquisition platforms, however excitation voltages
are user-adjustable on the DA100C. Recommended excitation is +5VDC.
1. Place goniometer with care to verify that limb/joint/torso attachment will not result in over stretch at
the limits of limb/joint/torso movement
2. Put body in the first position, which brackets one end of range of movement. Press CAL 1.
3. Put body in the second position, which brackets The other end of range of movement. Press CAL 2.
BN-STRIKE HEEL-TOE STRIKE CALIBRATION
BN-Strike requires no calibration.
BN-DYNEMG CALIBRATION
The BN-DYNEMG needs consideration for calibration on pressure bulb.
The pressure bulb transducer measures applied hand grip strength, via pressure changes manifesting in the
bulb, during squeezing. The units of pressure are force per unit area. The pressure bulb transducer
configuration determines the factory preset scaling, typically in units of kg/m*m or kg/cm*cm. If another or
different calibration required, the following method can be used.
To calibrate:
1. Place bulb on flat, stable, drawing surface
2. Press CAL 1 - enter 0 kg/unit area
3. Place known weight on bulb (X- kg)
4. Use pencil to outline flattened portion of bulb on table, then slide bulb weight to the IDE to measure
flattened area outline, record this value as area "A"
5. Press CAL 2 - enter X/A kg/unit area
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 19 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BN-ACCL ACCELEROMETER CALIBRATION
Orient Transmitter unit in the X, Y, and Z directions with respect to Earth’s gravity. This action will introduce 1
G in positive axis direction and -1 G in the negative axis direction. The accelerometer Transmitter/Receiver set
has user-selectable ranges: ±2, ±4, ±8 or ±16 G. The maximum value of each range selection provides a +10 V
output and the minimum value of each range selection provides a -10 V output. When using the ±2 G range, a + 1
G input will provide a +5 V output and a -1 G input will provide a -5 V output, when properly scaled.
The BN-ACCL has a factory default of ±16 G. Use the DIP switches on the side of the BN-ACCL Receiver
Module to set the Transmitter to the desired range. If the range needs to be set to something other than ±16 G,
perform the following steps prior to calibration using Earth’s gravity, as described in the previous paragraph.
1. In AcqKnowledge, select “Set Up Data Acquisition > Channels.”
2. Select “View by Modules...” and add new module “ACCL3-R,”
assuming not yet added.
3. Select the desired X, Y and Z channels and click OK (see right).
4. Then select “View by Channels...”. Click the “Setup” button.
5. Click “Yes” to the channel scaling modification prompt.
6. Set desired Scaling as shown in the following table and click OK:
±16 G Range
±8 G Range
±4 G Range
±2 G Range
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 20 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
FILTER OPTION SWITCH GUIDE
Switches are on the back of the BioNomadix receiver. Adjust switch
position with a small tipped screwdriver.
Mains Notch Filter

All modules except ACCL3 and
NICO
Notch Filter
SW1
SW2
60 Hz
UP
DOWN
50 Hz
UP
UP
OFF
DOWN* DOWN or UP
*indicates Factory Preset
Switch positions: “UP” = ON, DOWN” = OFF
NOTE: If the switch settings are modified, preset MP150 module
setup cannot be used and and channels must be configured manually.
BioNomadix Receiver Switches

SW3 is ignored if Alternative Signal is enabled (UP)
*
ECG2-R BioNomadix Receiver
EMG2-R BioNomadix Receiver
indicates
Filter Option
Switch Number
Filter Option
Switch Number
Factory
High Pass
High Pass
SW3
SW3
Preset
0.05 Hz HP
DOWN
5 Hz HP
DOWN
1 Hz HP
UP*
10 Hz HP
UP*
Low Pass
Low Pass
SW4
SW4
35 Hz LP
UP*
250 Hz LP
UP
500 Hz LP
150 Hz LP
DOWN
DOWN*
EEG2-R BioNomadix Receiver
Filter Option
Switch Number
High Pass
SW3
0.1 Hz HP
DOWN
0.5 Hz HP
UP*
Low Pass
SW4
35 Hz LP
UP*
100 Hz LP
DOWN
EOG2-R BioNomadix Receiver
Filter Option
Switch Number
High Pass
SW3
0.005 HP
DOWN*
1 Hz HP
UP
Low Pass
SW4
35 Hz LP
UP*
100 Hz LP
DOWN
EGG2-R BioNomadix Receiver
Filter Option
Switch Number
Low Pass
SW3
1 Hz HP
UP*
Disabled
DOWN
SKT2-R BioNomadix Receiver
Filter Option
CH A
CH B
Low Pass
SW3
SW5
10 Hz LP
DOWN
DOWN
1 Hz LP
UP**
UP*
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 21 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
RSP2-R BioNomadix Receiver
Filter Option
CH A
CH B
Low Pass
SW3
SW5
10 Hz LP
DOWN
DOWN
1 Hz LP
UP*
UP*
High Pass
SW4
SW6
0.5 Hz HP
UP
UP
DC
DOWN*
DOWN*
* indicates
Factory
Preset
PPGED-R BioNomadix Receiver
Filter Option
PPG CH A
EDA CH B
Low Pass
SW3
SW5
3 Hz LP
UP*
UP*
10 Hz LP
DOWN
DOWN
High Pass
SW4
SW6
0.5 Hz HP
UP*
UP
DC
DOWN
DOWN*
RSPEC-R BioNomadix Receiver
RESP CH A
SW6
1 Hz LP
UP*
10 Hz LP
DOWN
SW7
0.5 Hz HP
UP
DC
DOWN*
Filter Option
Low Pass
High Pass
ECG CH B
SW4
35 Hz LP
150 Hz LP
SW3
1 Hz HP
0.05 Hz HP
UP*
DOWN
UP*
DOWN
NICO-R BioNomadix Receiver
Filter Option
Low Pass
5 Hz LP
Low Pass
3 Hz LP
Low Pass
1 Hz LP
DC to 10 Hz
Switch Number
SW1 (Z CH)
UP
SW3 (Z CH)
SW2 (dZ CH)
UP
SW4 (dZ CH)
UP
UP
SW5 (ZCH)
SW6 (dZ CH)
UP
UP
DOWN for all switches*
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 22 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
G-Mode
Filter Option
Nyquist
Rate
ACCL3-R BioNomadix Receiver
Switch Number
SW1
SW2
SW3
3.13 Hz
6.25 Hz
UP
UP
UP
6.25 Hz
12.5 Hz
DOWN
UP
UP
12.5 Hz
25 Hz
UP
DOWN
UP
25 Hz
50 Hz
DOWN
DOWN
UP
50 Hz
100 Hz
UP
UP
DOWN
100 Hz
200 Hz
DOWN
UP
DOWN
200 Hz
400 Hz
UP
DOWN
DOWN
400 Hz
800 Hz
DOWN*
DOWN*
DOWN*
Range
2G
4G
8G
16 G
SW4
UP
DOWN
UP
DOWN*
SW5
UP
UP
DOWN
DOWN*
ALTERNATIVE SIGNAL SWITCH GUIDE
Warning: Alternative signal replaces the raw signal. To display raw and processed signal alternative(s), use
AcqKnowledge calculation channels.
ECG2-R and RSPEC-R BioNomadix Receivers
EOG2-R BioNomadix Receiver
Signal Output
SW5
ECG – Factory Preset
DOWN
Heart Rate – Alternative Signal
Signal Output
EEG – Factory Preset
Delta – Alternative Signal
Theta – Alternative Signal
Alpha – Alternative Signal
Beta – Alternative Signal
UP
Signal Output
SW5
EOG – Factory Preset
DOWN
Derivative – Alternative Signal
EEG2-R BioNomadix Receiver
SW5
SW6
DOWN
DOWN
UP
DOWN
-UP
-----
SW7
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
UP
--
UP
SW8
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
UP
EMG2-R BioNomadix Receiver
Signal Output
SW5
EMG – Factory Preset
DOWN
Integrated RMS Alternative Signal
UP
(Envelope Detection Mode)
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 23 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
ACCL3-R BioNomadix
Receiver
Filter Option
Rate (GMode) or
Duration
(Tap Mode)
5000 μS
DOWN
UP
SW1
Switch Number
SW2
SW3
UP
UP
UP
4375 μS
DOWN
UP
UP
SW6
3750 μS
UP
DOWN
UP
DOWN
UP
3125 μS
DOWN
DOWN
UP
2500 μS
UP
UP
DOWN
1875 μS
DOWN
UP
DOWN
1875 μS
UP
DOWN
DOWN
625 μS
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
Tap-Mode
G–
Factory
Preset
Tap (Event
Mark) –
Alternative
Signal
Signal
Output
G-Mode
Tap Mode
ACCL3-R switch settings for Alternative Signal TAP
Range (GMode) or
Threshold
(Tap Mode)
2G
4G
6G
8G
SW4
SW5
UP
DOWN
UP
DOWN
UP
UP
DOWN
DOWN
BIOPAC Hardware | BioNomadix Series | Page 24 - 24
Updated: 4.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TRI-AXIAL ACCELEROMETERS
SS26LB, TSD109C2 and TSD109C2-MRI (±5 g)
SS34L and TSD109J (±200 g)
BN-ACCL3
Tri-Axial Accelerometers connect directly to BIOPAC hardware and
require no additional amplification. They provide three outputs, each
simultaneously measuring acceleration in the X, Y, and Z directions.
They are the same size and can be used on any part of the body or on
external equipment.
Tri-axial accelerometer
 ±5 g accelerometers are optimal for measuring accelerations
uses 3 channel inputs
when performing slow movements, such as walking.
 ±200 g accelerometers are optimal for measuring quick movements, such as swinging a tennis racket or
high impact events commonly encountered in exercise physiology experiments.
The transducers can be used on any part of the body or attached to external equipment. The pliable and
unobtrusive design conforms readily to body contours and includes a Velcro® strap for easy attachment.
For the TSD109C2-MRI: Strap the accelerometer on finger, wrist, toe, or foot. To minimize artifact associated
with cable tugging, during movement activities, tape the sensor securely in place using TAPE1. The sensor
cabling can be secured to the subject via a thermally insulating sleeve, such as nylon wire loom. The loom will
permit the cable to travel freely during subject motion.
The frequency response extends from DC to 500 Hz. The accelerometers are extremely accurate and can easily be
calibrated by simply changing their orientation in three-dimensional space, so that gravity (G=1) acts only upon
the desired axis. Trace metallic parts do not make contact to the subject; must be used with MECMRI-7 cables
provided.
MRI Use (TSD109C2-MRI): MR Conditional to 3T
Note:
Use with provided MECMRI-7 cable and MRIRFIF filter. Conductive parts of transducer are
electrically and thermally isolated from subject.
Equipment
 The SS26LB/SS34L accelerometers connect to the MP36/35 Data Acquisition Unit.
 The TSD109 series accelerometers connect to the HLT100C High Level Transducer module.
 The TSD109C2-MRI is intended for MRI use and ships with a longer (10 m) cable, plus an MECMRIHLT (2 m) interface cable and filter set (MRIFIF).
BIOPAC Hardware | Accelerometers | Page 1 - 4
Updated: 8.6.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Accelerometer Specifications (SSL/TSD)
SS26LB / TSD109C2 / TSD109C2-MRI
SS34L / TSD109J
±5 G
±200 G
0.5 mG/SQRT[Hz] (rms)
4.3 mG/SQRT[Hz] (rms)
Bandwidth:
DC-500 Hz (-3 dB)
DC-1000 Hz (-3 dB)
Nonlinearity:
0.2% of Full Scale
±0.5%
Transverse axis sensitivity:
±2%
±1.4%
Alignment error:
±1°
N/A
+5 V @ 25 mA
+5 V @ 10 mA
Range (Output):
Noise:
Power:
Interface:
MP36/35 Data Acquisition Unit (SS26LB, SS34L)
MP150/HLT100C Module (TSD109J, TSD109C2, TSD109C2-MRI)
Package:
Compliant silicone housing
Dimensions:
33 mm (long) x 28 mm (wide, at base) x 19 mm (high)
Weight:
17 grams
Sterilizable:
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
Cable length:
3 meters (10 meters for TSD109C2-MRI)
Operational Temp:
0-50 C
Operational Humidity:
0-95% non-condensing
NOTE: The SS26LA (±5 G) was discontinued in September of 2013 and the SS27L and TSD109F (±50 G) were discontinued
in May of 2015.
Gain Constant and Offset Specifications (SSL/TSD)
Type
Gain Constant
Offset @ 0 G (Typical)
SS26LB
125 mV/g
1V
SS34L
1.6 mV/g
340 mV
TSD109C2 / TSD109C2-MRI
200 mV/g
1.5 V
TSD109J
7 mV/g
1.45 V
Hardware Setup
The accelerometers have three output connectors, one each for the X, Y, and Z axes. Each output connector must
be connected to an MP3X input channel (SS26LB/SS34L,) or to the appropriate HLT100C input channel
(TSD109 series). For example, connect the X-axis to Channel 1, Y-axis to Channel 2, and Z-axis to Channel 3.
IMPORTANT
Make sure the selected channel is not already assigned to any other BIOPAC module; up to 5
Accelerometers can be used with a single MP System. If contention exists, the channel data will
be corrupted.
See also: Setup notes for external devices and channel contention issues.
Software Setup
SS26LB/SS34L:
a) Select MP3X > Set Up Data Acquisition > Channels > Setup and enable
three analog channels, one for each axis.
b) For each channel, select the appropriate Accelerometer Preset (5 g or 200
g) from the Preset list.
c) Click on Setup and then click on Scaling:
BIOPAC Hardware | Accelerometers | Page 2 - 4
Updated: 8.6.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
d) In the Map value fields, enter the scaling factors required, -1 for Cal 1 and 1 for Cal 2.
e) Enter “g” for the Units label, as shown. (This unit should appear by default in Accelerometer presets.)
f) Take the accelerometer and rest it in the upright position on the tabletop.
g) Calibrate the device by rotating it through 180° and taking a calibration reading at each point.
h) To calibrate the Y-axis, start with the transducer sitting on the table, face up, and click Cal 1. Rotate the
transducer 180°, so that it is now sitting upside down, and click the Cal 2 button. This procedure must be
followed for each axis. A label on the front of the transducer displays the X- and Y-axes. The Z-axis rotates
from the end with the label and the end with the cable.
TSD109 Series:
a) Select MP150 > Set Up Data Acquisition > Channels > Add New Module.
b) Choose HLT100C-A1 from the module type list and click “Add.”
c) Choose TSD109C (5 g) or TSD109J (200 g) from the transducer list and click “OK.”
d) Follow the onscreen calibration dialogs.
e) Repeat steps a-d for channels A2 (Y-Axis) and A3 (Z-axis).
Testing Calibration
To see if the calibration is correct:
a) Start acquiring data (for the test procedure, a sample rate of 50
samples per second should be used).
b) Rotate the accelerometer 180° through each axis.
c) Set the vertical scale to 1 and the midpoint to 0 for all channels.
d) Repeat the calibration procedure (by rotating the transducer 180°)
through each axis.
e) Visually confirm the correct calibration.
The screen shot above shows a tri-axial accelerometer being rotated through each axis. Channel 1 (X-axis) shows
the signal moving from 1 g to -1 g as the transducer is rotated. Likewise, Channel 2 (Y-axis) shows the same
phenomenon as previously described. Finally, Channel 3 (Z-axis) has also been tested and the
calibration confirmed.
BIOPAC Hardware | Accelerometers | Page 3 - 4
Updated: 8.6.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BIONOMADIX WIRELESS ACCELEROMETER
The BioNomadix wireless Tri-axial Accelerometer (BN-ACCL3) is a
broad spectrum acceleration measurement system. The transmitter can
be attached to any part of the subject's body to measure three-axis
acceleration associated with movement in that particular location.
The system comes factory preset to support an operational range of
±16 G, with a maximum system bandwidth of 400 Hz. Ranges can be
set to as low as ±2 G with bandwidths as low as 3 Hz.
The system can also be configured to act as a "tap detector," detect
either single or double taps. In this mode, the system can act as an
event recorder for self-report. When "double-tapped," for example, the
system will output a pulse to precisely mark the time location of the
observed event.
In Acceleration measurement mode, the BN-ACCL3 will output X, Y
and Z acceleration values on three associated channels. The system is
very well suited for mobile applications. The system can measure the acceleration of gravity (static) for tiltsensing and can also measure very fast-changing, dynamic acceleration resulting from rapid movement or impact.
BN-ACCL3 Specifications
BioNomadix
Signal type:
Bandlimits
Max:
Factory preset:
Filter Options:
Alternative signal:
Resolution:
Signal range:
Output Voltage range:
Transmitter type & rate
BN-ACCL3
G (X, Y, Z)
±2, ±4, ±8 or ±16 G
± 16 G at 400 Hz LP
DC to 3.13 Hz LP up to 400 Hz LP (in power of 2 steps)
Tap Event Mark Mode (replaces G)
X: 5 mg (rms), Y: 6 mg (rms), Z: 9 mg (rms) (±2 G scale at 400 Hz LP)
Selectable: ±2, ±4, ±8 or ±16 G
±10 V (receiver output)
Delay:
Large fixed component (12.5 ms) and small variable component (±0.5 ms)
Operational range:
10 meters (line-of-sight) typical in standard laboratory setups. See also: Operational Range and
Characteristics.
Operational temp:
5-45 C
Operational humidity:
0-95% non-condensing
Transmitter Battery:
Charger:
BioNomadix transmitters use an L-ion battery: full charge takes approx. 1 hour to provide maximum
operating time.
A battery charger is included with each module pair. See BN-CHARGER for charge time and
recharge cycle details.
Operating time:
72-90 hours
Receiver Power:
Use with an MP Research System or with isolated power supply IPS100C for 3rd-party data
acquisition system.
Included strap:
33 cm - BN-STRAP33
Size & Weight:
Transmitter (approx.): 6 cm x 4 cm x 2 cm; 54 grams; Receiver (approx.): 4 cm x 11 cm x 19 cm;
380 grams
Input:
Attach BioNomadix transmitter to subject – no additional hardware input required; sensor is internal
to transmitter.
Type: Ultra-low power, 2.4 GHz bi-directional digital RF transmitter
Rate: 2,000 Hz (between transmitter and receiver)
See also: Tri-Axial Accelerometer Application Notes 141, 266 and 273 here.
BIOPAC Hardware | Accelerometers | Page 4 - 4
Updated: 8.6.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD108 AND SS17L PHYSIOLOGICAL SOUNDS TRANSDUCER (CONTACT MICROPHONE)
The physiological sounds transducer connects to the DA100C amplifier (TSD108) or the MP3x/4x hardware
(SS17L). The transducer can be used with the Noninvasive Blood Pressure Cuff or as a stand-alone device. If
used with the cuff, Korotkoff sounds can be recorded for easy determination of systolic and diastolic blood
pressure. When used on its own, it can record a variety of acoustical signals, including heart sounds and sounds
associated with rubbing or grinding (e.g., Bruxism). The acoustical transducer element is a Piezo-electric ceramic
disk that is bonded to the interior of a circular metallic housing.
Grounding Note
When using this transducer with the EBI100C module, do not connect the GROUND pin of
the TSD108 to the DA100C module. Doing so will cause inaccurate impedance measures,
because the TSD108 contact surface is tied to the isolated ground. An alternative is to
insulate the TSD108 from the skin surface by using a latex balloon or some other nonconductive barrier. If the latter procedure is followed, the GROUND pin may be attached to
the DA100 module.

TSD108: Korotkoff signal is recorded by a DA100C
amplifier set to AC, 5000 Hz LP and a gain of 50 to 200.

SS17L: To record the Korotkoff signal, select SS17L
preset from MP3x/MP4x > Set Up Channels menu.
The signal for the physiological sounds transducer is usually
further conditioned by the software. In a calculation channel, the
signal can be bandpass filtered from 50 to 200 Hz. The sampling
rate for the entire recording needs to be about 500 Hz, assuming
the physiological sounds transducer is used.
TSD108/SS17L SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Response:
Housing: Stainless
Sterilizable: Yes
Noise:
Output:
Weight: 9
Dimensions:
Cable Length:
Interface:
Calibration: N
TEL100C Compatibility:
35 Hz to 3500 Hz
Steel
(contact BIOPAC for details)
5 µV rms – (500 Hz - 3500 Hz)
2 V (p-p) maximum
g
29 mm diameter, 6 mm thick
3m
DA100C (TSD108), MP3x (SS17L)
one required
SS17
BIOPAC Hardware | Contact Microphones | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.28.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HEEL-TOE STRIKE TRANSDUCERS
SS28LA
TSD111A
SS28A
BN-STRIKE-XDCR
Use this transducer to record heel and toe strike activity as the subject
walks. The heel/toe strike data is recorded on two analog channels; One
channel records heel strike and the other, toe strike. Strikes are indicated
by positive deflections on the graph. Two force sensitive resistors (FSR)
attach to the sole of a shoe; use two transducers to record from both feet.
HEEL-TOE STRIKE SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal Output Range: (after amplification)
Nominal Contact Force:
Attachment:
FSR Dimensions:
FSR Active Area:
Cable Length:
Cable Length – BN-STRIKE-XDCR:
Interface: SS28LA
TSD111A
SS28A
BN-STRIKE-XDCR
0 to +10 V
200 g to indicate heel/toe strike
TAPE1, TAPE2, Vinyl Electrical or Duct Tape
18.3 mm (dia) x 0.36 mm (thick) and 30 cm pigtail lead
12.7 mm (dia)
7.6 meters
30 cm
MP36/35 System
HLT100C/MP150/100 System
TEL100C/MP150/100 System
BN-STRIKE/MP150/100 System
HEEL-TOE STRIKE CALIBRATION
BN-STRIKE, TSD111A, SS28LA or SS28A do not require calibration.
Registered impulses on each channel simply reflect the timing marks associated with heel/toe strike
contact during gait. The amplitude of each impulse is indicative of force measured at the time of strike.
Although this amplitude value does not have an exact linear relationship to force, it is monotonically
related. As force increases, amplitude increases. If precise force measurements are required, then
weights could be sequentially applied to each sensor to perform a rough calibration within a narrow
operational range. Furthermore, an expression channel could be used in AcqKnowledge (TSD111A) or
BSL PRO (SS28LA) software to linearize a heel/toe strike sensor over a wide operational range.
RX111 REPLACEMENT HEEL-TOE STRIKE SENSOR
Replacement strike sensor for Heel/Toe Strike transducers.
Note: Heel/Toe Strike Transducers without the "A" suffix in the part number (SS28L/TSD111) do not
have a replaceable sensor. Check the part number or check the cable for a removable sensor
connector before ordering this replacement.
BIOPAC Hardware | Heel-Toe Strike Transducer | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 10.21.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD115 VARIABLE ASSESSMENT TRANSDUCER
The TSD115 incorporates a slide control with graduated
scale that allows the user to gauge their subjective
response to a variety of different stimuli. Multiple TSD115
transducers can be used simultaneously allowing several
people to answer the same question or otherwise respond
to stimuli. The transducer is lightweight and fits easily into
the subject’s hand or lap. The TSD115 comes equipped
with a 7.6-meter cable and is designed for direct
connection to the HLT100C module.
This graph shows a measurement that identifies the
responses (on a scale from 0 to 9) of the four clients to a
particular question. In this case, at 23.08 seconds into the
recording, the responses to question four were:
Client 1: 3.225
Client 2: 8.036
Client 3: 7.590
Client 4: 8.989
TSD115-MRI VARIABLE ASSESSMENT TRANSDUCER FOR MRI
The TSD115-MRI comes equipped with an 8-meter cable and is designed for connection to the HLT100C via the
MECMRI-HLT cable-filter set. Trace conductive parts (metallic parts) of transducer do not make contact to the
subject.
MRI Use: MR Conditional to 3T
Note:
Conductive parts of transducer are electrically and thermally isolated from subject.
TSD115-MRI Components:
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Plastic
Acrylonitrate Butadiene Styrene (ABS) Thermo-molded, Plastic
Polymer thick film device (rigid substrate, printed semi-conductor)
Copper clad fiberglass lamination (PCB material)
Stainless steel screws/nuts
Tinned copper wire
Silicone elastomer
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD115 | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 1.13.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD115 Calibration
1. Generate the Scaling dialog for the first selected channel.
2. Slide the horizontal indicator all the way to the right side of the
TSD115. (This reports the highest output for the TSD115, a value
close to +5.0 volts.)
3. Click on the Cal1 button to assign this value to “9.” (This directs the
system to collect the exact value output by the TSD115 when it’s set
to any specific indicator position.)
4. Slide the horizontal indicator all the way to the left on the TSD115.
(This reports the lowest output for the TSD115, a value close to 0.0 volts.)
5. Click on the Cal2 button to assign this value to “0.”
6. Select the next channel and repeat this procedure for the remaining channels.
TSD115 Specifications
Cable Length:
Interface:
Scale Output Range:
Scale Resolution:
Slide Control Length:
Dimensions:
Weight:
TSD115
TSD115-MRI
7.6 m
8m
HLT100C
MECMRI-HLT to HLT100C
0-5 V DC
Infinitely adjustable
10 cm
4 cm (high) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (wide)
230 g
See also: Application Note #AH186 – Psychological Assessment (TSD115)
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD115 | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 1.13.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD116 SERIES SWITCHES AND MARKERS
The TSD116 series is used for externally triggering data acquisition, remote event marking, or
psychophysiological response tests. The switches connect to the UIM100C digital I/O ports and can be monitored
as input channels. The TSD116 series incorporate momentary ON operation (switch is ON only when pressed).
TSD116A — single channel hand switch
TSD116B — single channel foot switch
TSD116C — compact 8-channel digital marker
The TSD116C allows the user to independently mark events, or provide responses, on up to eight channels
simultaneously. Because digital channels can be interleaved with analog channels, when using AcqKnowledge,
it’s easy to assign separate digital channels as event markers for individual analog input channels.
TSD116 SERIES SPECIFICATIONS
Switch Type:
Pushbutton: (ON) – OFF
Dimensions
TSD116A:
19 mm (dia) x 63 mm (long)
TSD116B:
69 mm (wide) x 90 mm (long) x 26 mm (high)
TSD116C:
19 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 4 cm (high)
Cable Length
TSD116A:
1.8 meters
TSD116B:
1.8 meters
TSD116C:
3 meters
Connector Type
TSD116A:
2 mm pin plugs
TSD116B:
2 mm pin plugs
TSD116C:
Stripped and tinned wires
Interface:
UIM100C
TEL100C Compatibility:
SS10 Hand switch
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD116 Series | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.28.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD150 SERIES ACTIVE ELECTRODE
TSD150A — 35 mm spacing TSD150B — 20 mm spacing
TSD150 Active Electrodes are available in three configurations; the difference is the spacing between the
stainless steel pads of the surface electrode. The surface electrode pads of the TSD150A and TSD150B
have a diameter of 11.4 mm.
Note: GROUND MUST BE USED — Unlike most active electrodes, TSD150 series active electrodes
have only two stainless steel disks attached to an electrode case. The third disk, commonly
centered between the two, is not necessary. In place of this third disk, a separate ground electrode
is used. The LEAD110A is typically used as the ground electrode, and is inserted into the GND A
terminal at the rear of the UIM100C. If one or more active electrodes are used on a single subject,
only one Ground lead (LEAD110A) is required to act as Ground reference for all the active
electrodes.
TSD150A/B ACTIVE ELECTRODES –35 MM, 20 MM
TSD150A and TSD150B may be used as a surface electrode or as a fine wire electrode. Conversion of the
surface to fine wire electrode is easily accomplished by replacing the stainless steel pads with screwsprings that connect to the internal amplifier.
CONVERSION FROM SURFACE ELECTRODE TO FINE WIRE ELECTRODE SYSTEM
To convert the active electrode from a surface electrode to a fine wire electrode system, the stainless steel
pads of the surface electrode must be unscrewed from the active electrode case. To accomplish this task:
1) Grasp the stainless steel pads and rotate them counterclockwise until they are disconnected from the
case.
2) Screw the screw-spring combinations (fine wire electrode attachment) into the holes left by the
removal of the stainless steel pads.
3) Attach the active electrode case (using tape or an elastic strap) to the limb of the subject, near the
insertion site of the fine wire electrodes.
4) Gently bend the springs and place one fine wire electrode in the gap formed by bending the spring.
Allow the spring to return to its upright position.
5) Repeat this procedure for the other fine wire electrode.
Note: If the wire-spring contact does not provide a good EMG signal, it may be necessary to rub the fine
wire electrode with an emery cloth to remove the insulation prior to placing the wire in the spring.
To convert the system back to a surface electrode system, simply unscrew the screw-spring
combinations, place them in a secure place and re-screw the stainless steel electrode pads into the
electrode case.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD150 | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 8.28.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD150 OPERATION
1) Attach the active electrode to the subject, with pads to the skin surface; use surgical tape (TAPE1) or an
elastic strap. The active electrode requires good skin surface contact, so to obtain the best readings; select
an area where skin surface is free of hair and/or lesions and abrade the skin slightly with the ELPAD.
2) Plug the active electrode into the desired channel (1-16) of the HLT100C module.
IMPORTANT! Make sure that the chosen channel is not already assigned to any other BIOPAC
module; up to 16 active electrodes can be used with a single MP System. If contention
exists, the channel data will be corrupted.
3) After inserting the active electrode into the HLT100C module and attaching the active electrode to the
subject, a Ground electrode will still need to be attached to the subject if no other ground is provided via
another biopotential amplifer. The Ground electrode will act as reference for 1 to 16 active electrodes.
The LEAD110A, 3-meter, unshielded electrode lead is recommended for this purpose. The LEAD110A
will connect directly to any standard snap surface electrode (like the EL503). The surface electrode can be
placed at any point on the subject, and performance is optimal when the electrode makes good contact
with the skin surface.
4) The free end of the LEAD110A is inserted directly to the GND A terminal on the back of the UIM100C.
To insert the LEAD110A into the GND A terminal, use a small screwdriver to back out the terminal
locking screw, insert the LEAD110A 2 mm pin plug into the terminal opening and then tighten down the
locking screw.
5) At this point, the active electrode is ready for data collection. Set up the active electrode Scaling in
AcqKnowledge, by setting the MAP values to a factor of the default value divided by 330. See the
AcqKnowledge Software Guide for more information on channel scaling. The recommended sampling
rate for the MP System is 2000 Hz on each active electrode channel.
TSD150A/B CALIBRATION
The TSD150 series does not require calibration.
TSD150A/B ACTIVE ELECTRODE SPECIFICATIONS
Recommended Sample Rate:
Gain: 330
Input Impedance:
CMRR:
3 dB Bandwidth:
Noise Voltage:
Cable:
Electrode Spacing
TSD150A:
TSD150B:
Stainless steel disk diameter:
Fine Wire Attachment:
Ground Lead:
Dimensions:
Weight: 9.5
Interface: HLT1
Best: 2000 Hz, Minimum: 1000 Hz
(nominal)
100 M
95 dB (Nominal)
12 Hz – 500 Hz
2 µv rms (bandwidth of 12-500 Hz)
3 meters, lightweight, shielded
Wide — 35 mm
Narrow — 20 mm
11.4 mm
Screw springs
Requires LEAD110A for proper operation (one per subject)
17.4 mm wide x 51 mm long x 6.4 mm thick
grams
00C—
See also: LEAD110A, TAPE1 / TAPE2
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD150 | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 8.28.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
IPS100C ISOLATED POWER SUPPLY MODULE
The IPS100C is used to operate 100-series amplifier modules independent of an MP data acquisition unit. The
IPS100C module couples the 100-series amplifier outputs directly to any other data acquisition system,
oscilloscope or chart recorder. Amplifier modules snap onto the side of the IPS100C to receive the necessary
isolated power and to direct the modules’ output to the front panel of the IPS100C. The IPS100C allows users to
operate up to 16 amplifiers on a stand-alone basis. The analog channel outputs are provided via 3.5 mm phone
jacks on the front panel. The IPS100C is generally used with animal or tissue preparations. When collecting data
from electrodes attached to humans, use the HLT100C module with INISO and OUTISO adapters to couple
signals to external equipment.
Includes In-line Transformer (AC300A) and USA or EURO power cord.
IMPORTANT USAGE NOTE
Do not use the IPS100C with an MP based system. For a fully isolated recording system using the IPS100C,
couple signal inputs and outputs through the HLT100C module and INISO and OUTISO adapters, respectively.
Contact BIOPAC for details.
IPS100C SPECIFICATIONS
Amplifier Output Access:
Isolated Power Access:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Power Source:
16 channels (front panel) – 3.5 mm phone jacks
±12 V, +5 V @ 100 ma (back panel) – screw terminals
610 grams
7 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
12 VDC @ 1 amp (uses AC300A transformer)
BIOPAC Hardware | IPS100C | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.1.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
DA100C – DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER MODULE
ZERO
ADJ
GAIN
500
1000
2000
5000
ON
FILTER
OFF
AC
DC
V+
SHIELD
VIN+
BRIDGE
GND
VINSHIELD
V-
DA100
VREF1
VREF2
REF
ADJ
The differential amplifier module (DA100C) is a general purpose, single channel, differential amplifier. The
DA100C is designed for use in the following measurement applications:
Blood pressure (hemodynamics)
Displacement (linear or angular)
Muscle strain or force (pharmacology)
Physiological sounds
Temperature
Humidity
The DA100C has one differential input linear amplifier with adjustable offset and gain. The DA100C is used
to amplify low-level signals from a variety of sources. The DA100C has built-in excitation capability, so it
can work directly with many different types of transducers, such as:
Pressure transducers
Strain gauges
Accelerometers
Microphones
Electrogoniometers
Piezo sensors
Wheatstone bridges
Photocells
Thermistors
Compatible BIOPAC Transducers are:
TRANSDUCER
TSD104A
TSD105A
TSD107B
TSD108
TSD117
TSD120
TYPE
TRANSDUCER
Precision Pressure
Variable Range Force
High Flow Pneumotach
Physiological Microphone
Medium Flow Pneumotach
Noninvasive BP cuff
TSD121C
TSD125 Series
TSD127
TSD130 Series
TSD137 Series
TSD160 Series
TYPE
Hand Dynamometer
Fixed Range Force
Low Flow Pneumotach
Goniometers & Torsiometers
Very Low Flow Pneumotach
Differential Pressure
If the input signal is applied differentially between the VIN+ and VIN- inputs, the Input Signal Range can be
centered on any voltage from -10 V to +10 V with respect to GND. If the signal is applied to a single input (with
the other input grounded), then that signal can range over the selected Input Signal (pk- pk) with respect to GND.
The DA100C can be used to directly connect existing transducers. The DA100C can be outfitted with connector
assemblies for easy interfacing to a variety of “off the shelf” pressure transducers, force gauges, and strain
gauges.
BIOPAC Hardware | DA100C | Page 1 - 5
Updated: 2.23.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TRANSDUCER CONNECTOR INTERFACES
These transducer connector interfaces (TCIs) have pin plugs on one
side and the transducer mating connector on the other. The following
TCIs are available. Or the TCI Kit can be used to make a custom
adapter.
TCI100
Grass/Astromed transducers – 6 pin
TCI101
Beckman transducers – 5 pin
TCI102
World Precision Instrument transducers – 8 pin
TCI103
Lafayette Instrument transducers – 9 pin
TCI104
Honeywell transducers – 6 pin
TCI105
Modular phone jack connector – 4 pin
TCI106
Beckman transducers – 12 pin
TCI107
Nihon Koden transducers – 5 pin
TCI108
Narco transducers – 7 pin
TCI109
Fukuda transducers – 8 pin
TCI110
Gould transducers – 12 pin: Discontinued  use Fogg Cable and an available
BIOPAC TCI
TCI111A
Liquid metal transducers – 1.5 mm Touchproof male plugs (two)
TCI112
Hokanson transducers – 4 pin
TCI113
Hugo Sachs/Harvard Apparatus — 6 pin
TCI114
“SS” Series Transducers
Important Notes when using TCI114

Set REF ADJ pot. On the DA100C: VREF1 to +5V, VREF2 to –5V
 The following SS Series Transducers require multiple channel inputs and therefore
require a corresponding number of TCI114 with a DA100C each:
o SS20L and SS21L Twin-axis Goniometers (2 channels)
o SS26L and SS27L Tri-Axial Accelerometers (3 channels)
o SS31L Noninvasive Cardiac Output Sensor (2 channels)
 The TCI114 interface is designed for SS Series Transducers only
o SS1L, SS1LA, SS2L, or SS29L Electrode Leads and Adapters – not
recommended: signal may be obtained but quality may be impaired.
o SS53L, SS54L, and SS55L Digital Switches – not supported: digital
interface required; use TSD116 Series Switches & Markers.
o SS58L Low-Voltage Stimulator – not supported.
o OUT1 Headphones – not supported.
TCI115
Interface XLR Microphone
The TCI115 will operate with a balanced (differential output) or unbalanced (single-ended output) XLR
microphone. Interface all standard XLR microphones to the BIOPAC DA100C for use with a Research
System. Accommodates a six meter XLR microphone cable. Input signal level maximum is 400 mv (p-p).
Microphones must be dynamic or have battery-powered condenser (the MP system does not provide 48 V
phantom powering).
TCIPPG1
Geer to PPG100C only — 7 pin
BIOPAC Hardware | DA100C | Page 2 - 5
Updated: 2.23.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
DA100C VOLTAGE REFERENCES
The DA100C has two adjustable voltage sources (VREF1 and VREF2) for activating passive sensors like pressure
transducers, strain gauges, thermistors and photocells. The references can be set anywhere from -5.0 to +5.0 V.
GND is at 0 V. VREF1 and VREF2 track each other with opposite polarity, thus a maximum differential of 10 V
is obtainable for driving external transducers. For example, if VREF1 is set to +1.0 V (with respect to GND), then
VREF2 will automatically be set to –1.0 V.
The references can be adjusted using the REF ADJ potentiometer near the bottom of the module. The voltage
references can handle up to 20 mA sourcing or sinking to each other or GND. Pay close attention to the sensor
drive requirements so as to minimize overall current consumption.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
Use the 10 Hz LP lowpass filter for connecting the DA100C to most pressure, force, and strain transducers (i.e.,
TSD104A, TSD105A, TSD120, TSD121C, TSD125 Series, and TSD130 Series).
Use the 300 Hz LP lowpass filter for connecting the DA100C to devices with higher frequency output signals
(i.e., TSD107B, TSD108, TSD117).
Use the 5,000 Hz LP lowpass filter for connecting the DA100C to devices with the highest frequency signals,
such as microphones and clamp signals (patch, voltage or current).
See also: the sample frequency response plots. 10 Hz LP, 300 Hz LP, 5000 Hz LP
DA100C CALIBRATION
A. Reference calibration
B. Amplifier gain calibration
C. Transducer calibration if applying physical variable
D. Transducer calibration if not applying physical variable
A. Reference Calibration
The REFCAL is used to check the reference voltage of the DA100C. The ref voltage is used to provide
excitation to passive transducers.
B. Amplifier Gain Calibration
Use the CBLCAL.
C. Transducer Calibration if applying physical variable
1. Plug transducer it into the DA100C.
2. Set the gain switch on the DA100C to the desired level.
3. Apply the physical variable to the transducer on the low end of the expected range.
4. Press on Cal 1 in the scaling window in AcqKnowledge.
5. Apply the physical variable to the transducer on the high end of the expected range.
6. Press on Cal 2 in the scaling window in AcqKnowledge.
7. Review the Input Voltage differential (provided in the scaling window as a consequence of pressing
CAL1 and CAL2) and adjust if necessary.
 If the Input Voltage differential signal is less than +/- 50 mV it may be appropriate to increase the
gain setting on the DA100C.
 If either Input Voltage differential signal is higher than 9.9 V or less than –9.9 V, then reduce the
gain setting on the DA100C.
NOTE: If the Gain switch setting on the DA100C is adjusted, steps 3-7 will need to be repeated.
BIOPAC Hardware | DA100C | Page 3 - 5
Updated: 2.23.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
The physical variable for calibration varies based on the transducer type. See the appropriate transducer
specification for details:
TRANSDUCER TYPE
TRANSDUCER
TYPE
TSD104A
TSD105A
TSD107B
TSD108
TSD117
TSD120
TSD121C
TSD125 Series
TSD127
TSD130 Series
TSD137 Series
TSD160 Series
Hand Dynamometer
Fixed Range Force
Low Flow Pneumotach
Goniometers & Torsiometers
Very Low Flow Pneumotach
Differential Pressure
Precision Pressure
Variable Range Force
High Flow Pneumotach
Physiological Microphone
Medium Flow Pneumotach
Noninvasive BP cuff
D. Transducer Calibration if not applying physical variable
Use this procedure to calibrate the transducer if the required physical variable changes can’t easily be
generated.
1. Calculate the de-normalized voltage calibration factor, VY.
a) Note the factory calibration constant “K” (generally listed as “Output” in the transducer
specifications), expressed in the form of voltage/physical variable per volt excitation
((V/P)/V),
b) Multiply K ((V/P)/V) by the reference voltage (RV) of the DA100C (2 V factory preset).
c) Multiply the result [K((V/P)/V)* RV] = VY by the Gain switch setting value on the DA100C.
2. Plug the transducer into the DA100C.
3. Place the transducer in the ambient or zero state.
4. Press CAL1 …this will generate a value Vzero in the Input Voltage box
5. Enter the ambient or zero physical value in the Cal 1 Map/Scale window
6. Enter CAL2 Input Voltage as Vzero +VY
7. Enter the ambient + delta physical value in the Cal 2 Map/Scale window
BIOPAC Hardware | DA100C | Page 4 - 5
Updated: 2.23.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
DA100C SPECIFICATIONS
Gain:
Output Range:
Frequency Response
Low Pass Filter:
High Pass Filter:
Input Voltage (max):
Noise Voltage:
Temperature Drift:
Z (Differential input):
CMRR:
CMIV—referenced to
Amplifier ground:
Mains ground:
Voltage Reference:
Signal Source:
Input Voltage Range
Weight:
Dimensions:
Input Connectors:
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
50, 200, 1000, 5000
±10 V (analog)
Maximum bandwidth (DC-5,000 Hz)
10 Hz, 300 Hz, 5000 Hz
DC, 0.05 Hz
±200 mV (protected)
0.11 µV rms – (0.05-10 Hz)
0.3 µV/°C
2 MΩ
90 dB min
±10 V
±1500 VDC
variable: up to ±5 V excitation (10 V delta) maximum @ 20 MA (max)
(preset to 2 volts excitation)
Variety of transducers
Gain
Vin (mV)
50
±200
200
±50
1000
±10
5000
±2
350 grams
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
Seven 2 mm female sockets: (Vin+, Ground, Vin-, 2 of shield, 2 of
signal excitation)
BIOPAC Hardware | DA100C | Page 5 - 5
Updated: 2.23.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD110 PRESSURE PAD/RESPIRATION TRANSDUCER
TSD110-MRI PRESSURE PAD/RESPIRATION TRANSDUCER
The multipurpose Pressure Pad/Respiration (pneumogram) transducer
can be used to:
•
Noninvasively measure respiration—from a small mouse to a
human.*
•
Measure small pressing forces (like pinching fingers together)
for Parkinson’s evaluations.
•
Measure human smiling (with the sensor on the cheekbone).
•
Measure pulse when placed close to the heart.
•
Measure spacing and pressure between teeth coming together.
*TSD110-MRI is intended for animal respiration studies only. Not recommended for human respiration.
TSD110
consists of a TSD160B differential pressure transducer, RX110 pressure pad, and tubing.
TSD110-MRI consists of a TSD160A differential pressure transducer, RX110 pressure pad, and two (2) AFT30XL tubing.
To control for ambient pressure changes that may occur between the MRI Control Room and the
MRI Chamber Room (such as if the control room door is opened), run the second AFT30-XL
from the TSD160A through the wave guide into the MRI chamber room. The AFT30-XL tubing
will add less than 50 msec to the sensing of the waveform peak.
MRI Use: MR Safe
TSD110 Transducer Components – MRI Chamber room only: Tubing: Polyethylene
(polymerized urethane), RX110 Sensor: Plastic with Polyethylene foam
Specifications
Sensor:
Transducer:
Tubing:
Interface:
Type: Self-inflating pressure pad
Pad: Diameter 20 mm, Thickness 3.18 mm
Tubing: 1.6 mm ID, 2.2 mm Diameter, Length 1 m, Luer male Termination
TSD110-MRI
TSD110
TSD160B TSD160A
1.6 m
11 m
DA100C
MECMRI-DA to DA100C
RX110 PRESSURE PAD
The RX110 pressure pad can be used many times, but may eventually need to be replaced because it is a
sensitive sensor and may become damaged with rough use. This item is sensor pad only, without tubing or
transducer.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD110 | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 5.8.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
CABLE CALIBRATORS FOR BIOPOTENTIAL AMPLIFIERS
CBLCALC Calibration Cable for 100C-series Biopotential Amplifiers.
CBLCAL
Calibration Cable for 100B-series Biopotential Amplifiers. Use the CBLCAL to verify the signal
calibration of the DA100C.
REFCAL
Used to check the reference voltage of the DA100C.
Use CBLCAL/C to verify the calibration of the any of the Biopotential amplifiers. The cable (1.8m) connects
between the amplifier input and the UIM100C D/A output 0 or 1. To verify the amplifier’s frequency response
and gain settings, create a stimulus signal using AcqKnowledge and monitor the output of the amplifier connected
to the Calibration Cable. The Calibration Cable incorporates a precision 1/1000 signal attenuator.
Amplifier specification tests are performed at the factory before shipping, but a Calibration Cable can ensure
users peace of mind by permitting precise frequency response and gain calibrations for exact measurements.
CBLCAL/C CALIBRATION
Hardware Setup
1. Connect the MP150/100, UIM100C and biopotential amplifiers as normal.
2. Connect the CBLCAL/C between the selected amplifier and the UIM100C, inserting the single 3.5mm
plug into the Analog Output “0” port on the UIM100C.
3. Connect the end containing several 2mm pins into the corresponding holes on the face of the biopotential
amplifier.
4. Select a Gain setting of 1,000 for DA, ECG, EGG, EMG, and EOG, or 5,000 for EEG and ERS.
5. Turn all filters to the desired position.
6. Select an appropriate channel on the top of the amplifier being tested (usually channel one, as this is the
default setup in the software).
Software Setup
1. Under Channel Setup, insure that the default is set to analog channel one (A1).
2. Under Acquisition Setup
a) Choose a sampling rate of 2000 Hz (or higher).
b) Choose an acquisition period of at least 5 seconds.
c) Choose Record Last mode.
3. Under Stimulator Setup (see figure below)
BIOPAC Hardware | Cable Calibrators | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 7.8.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
a) Select the sine wave for the shape of the output signal.
b) Set the “Seg. #1 Width’ to zero. This means that the signal will be transmitted continuously
starting at time-point zero.
c) Set “Seg. #2 Width” to 1,000 msec (one second). This is the length of the output signal.
d) Select “Analog Output: 0.”
e) Select “Output continuously.”
f) The most important settings are the signal magnitude and frequency. Set the magnitude to 5 Volts
(i.e., 10 V p-p) if the module gain setting is 1,000. If the lowest module gain setting available is
5,000, choose 1 Volt.
g) Set the frequency to 10 Hz to check the gain calibration (on a sinusoidal signal, this setting is
appropriate for all biopotential amplifiers).
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
AcqKnowledge is now set-up to check for the proper calibration of biopotential amplifiers.
1. Start the acquisition. Theoretically, since record last mode is enabled signal output is continuous,
AcqKnowledge could acquire data forever.
2. Stop the acquisition when the waveform has stabilized.
3. Use the “I-beam” cursor to select the latter part of
the record.
4. Perform all the calibration measurements on the
latter part of the collected record.
a) Scale the waveform into some semblance of
the one in the following figure.
b) Select the Pk-Pk (peak to peak)
measurement to determine amplitude. The
measured voltage depends on the voltage
input and the gain setting on the amplifier.
Use the following formula to determine this
number.
Measured Voltage =
(Stimulator Input Voltage) * (1/1,000) * (Biopotential Amplifier Gain Setting)
BIOPAC Hardware | Cable Calibrators | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 7.8.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
If the amplifier gain setting is 1,000, it will cancel the CBLCAL/C attenuation (1/1,000).
Therefore, the measured voltage will equal the stimulator input voltage. In this example,
assuming a gain setting of 1,000 and a stimulator input of 10 V (pk-pk), the expected signal will
be very close to 10 V (p-p).
It is important to measure the amplitude of the acquired waveform correctly. Highlight several
peaks with the “I-beam” cursor.
Click the “peak detection” icon at the top of the graph window twice. This will precisely
highlight one of the many peak-to-peak amplitudes.
Open one of the pop-up measurement, windows and select “p-p” to measure the amplitude of the
waveform. This result indicates the vertical distance of the waveform between the two selected
peaks (see figure above).
To verify the consistency of the difference in peak-to peak values, click the “peak detection” icon
again. This will move the cursor to the next available peak below.
Repeat this several times to verify the subsequent peak heights. If the measured peak-to-peak
height is 10.04 Volts, the acquired signal can be ascertained as ±5.02 Volts. If the stimulator
outputs a 5 Volt magnitude signal, then measuring 5.02 Volts (0-pk) is considered accurate for
any biopotential amplifier (the analog output stimulator is accurate to within ± .5%). To best
determine the accuracy of the amplifier, consider an average of measurements.
REFCAL REFERENCE CALIBRATOR FOR THE DA100C
The REFCAL is used to check the reference voltage of the DA100C. It connects to the DA100C and displays
the reference voltage as an analog input signal. This makes it very easy to adjust the reference voltage of the
DA100C to suit the transducer.
The REFCAL connects the VREF1 and VREF2 voltage reference outputs directly to the DA100C inputs via a
precision attenuator of value (1/50). When using the REFCAL to set the DA100C references, the DA100C
should be set to DC with a gain of 50.
The voltage output on the selected channel of the DA100C will be the voltage difference between VREF1 and
VRREF2:
VOUT = VREF1 – VREF2
BIOPAC Hardware | Cable Calibrators | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 7.8.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD104A BLOOD PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
TSD104A-MRI GENERAL ARTERIAL PRESSURE FOR MRI
RX104A REPLACEMENT ELEMENT
The TSD104A is used to measure direct arterial or venous blood
pressure in animals for research or teaching. It is designed to
interface with the DA100C via an 8-meter cable (supplied). The
RX104A is a replacement element for the TSD104A blood pressure
transducer; it does not include the TCI connector and cable.
MRI Usage:
Notes:
MR Conditional to 7T
Conductive parts of transducer are electrically and thermally isolated from the subject.
(See specifications for components.) Animal use only when using for direct to catheter
blood pressure measurement.
TSD104A Specifications
Operational pressure:
Overpressure:
Dynamic Response:
Unbalance:
Connection Ports:
Eight-hour Drift:
Isolation:
Defibrillation:
Operating temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Temperature Coefficient:
Combined effects of sensitivity,
linearity, and hysteresis:
Output:
Weight:
Transducer Dimensions:
Cable length:
Interface:
-50 mmHg to +300 mmHg
-400 mmHg to +4,000 mmHg
100 Hz
50 mmHg max
Male Luer and female Luer
(sensors shipped prior to summer 2010 were male Luer on both sides)
1 mmHg after 5 minute warm-up
< 5 µA leakage at 120 VAC/60 Hz
Withstands 5 discharges of 400 joules in 5 minutes across a load
+15° C to +40° C
-30° C to +60° C
± 0.4 mmHg / deg C
1 mmHg (nominal)
5 µV/mmHg (normalized to 1 V excitation)
11.5 grams
67 mm long x 25 mm wide
TSD104A
3 meters
TSD104A-MRI
8 meters
RX104A
No cable
TSD104A
DA100C
TSD104A-MRI
MECMRI-DA to DA100C
The TSD104A-MRI terminates in a DSUB9 connector and requires the MECMRI-DA cable/filter interface.
TSD104A Calibration
See DA100C Calibration options.
BIOPAC Hardware | Arterial Pressure Transducer | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 1.13.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD105A ADJUSTABLE FORCE TRANSDUCER
TSD105A shown with HDW100A
Force transducers are devices capable of transforming a force into a proportional electrical signal. The
TSD105A force transducer element is a cantilever beam load cell incorporating a thin-film strain gauge.
Because the strain elements have been photolithographically etched directly on the strain beam, these
transducers are rugged while maintaining low non-linearity and hysteresis. Drift with time and temperature is
also minimized, because the strain elements track extremely well, due to the deposition method and the
elements’ close physical proximity. The TSD105A also incorporates impact and drop shock protection to
insure against rough laboratory handling.
Forces are transmitted back to the beam via a lever arm to insure accurate force measurements. Changing the
attachment point changes the full scale range of the force transducer from 50 g to 1000 g. The beam and lever
arm are mounted in a sealed aluminum enclosure that includes a 3/8” diameter mounting rod for holding the
transducer in a large variety of orientations. The TSD105A comes equipped with a 2-meter cable and plugs
directly into the DA100C amplifier.
The TSD105A mounting rod can be screwed into the transducer body in three different locations, two on the
top and one on the end surfaces of the transducer. The mounting rod can be placed in any angle relative to the
transducer orientation. The TSD105A can be used in any axis and can be easily mounted in any standard
measurement fixture, including pharmacological setups, muscle tissue baths and organ chambers.
The TSD105A has 5 different attachment points that determine the effective range of the force transducer.
These ranges are 50 g, 100 g, 200 g, 500 g and 1,000 g. The point closest to the end is the 50 g attachment
point, while the point closest to the middle is the 1,000 g attachment point.
Two hooks are provided with the TSD105A. One with a .051” diameter wire
and the other with a .032” diameter wire. The larger hook is intended for the 500
g and 1000 g ranges and the smaller hook is to be used for the 50 g, 100 g and
200 g ranges.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD105A | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 8.28.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD105A CALIBRATION
The TSD105A is easily calibrated using weights of known mass. Ideally, calibration should be performed with
weights that encompass the range of the forces expected during measurement and should cover at least 20% of the
full scale range of the transducer. When calibrating for maximum range on the force transducer, use weights that
correspond to 10% and 90% of the full scale range for best overall performance.
See also: DA100C Calibration options.
TSD105A SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Output:
Ranges:
Noise (rms):
Nonlinearity: <±0.025%
Hysteresis: <±0.05%
Nonrepeatability: <±0.05%
30 minute creep:
Temperature Range:
Thermal Zero Shift:
Thermal Range Shift:
Maximum Excitation:
Mounting Rod:
Weight:
Length:
Cable Length:
Interface: DA100C
1 mV/V (normalized to 1 V excitation)
50, 100, 200, 500, 1000 grams
(Range/50) mg @ 10 volts excitation, 1 Hz bandwidth
FSR
FSR
FSR
<±0.05% FSR
-10° C to 70° C
<±0.03% FSR/° C
<0.03% Reading/° C
10 VDC
9.5 mm (dia) – variable orientation
300 g (with mounting rod)
19 mm (wide), 25 mm (thick), 190 mm (long)
3 meters
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD105A | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 8.28.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD107B HIGH-FLOW PNEUMOTACH TRANSDUCER
The TSD107B is a highly linear, wide range, airflow transducer. Using the TSD107B and a DA100C amplifier
with the MP System, a variety of tests relating to airflow and lung volume can be performed. With the equipment
listed below and the proper software parameters, precise lung volume measurements can be obtained.
EQUIPMENT
• MP System for data acquisition
• DA100C general purpose amplifier
• TSD107B pneumotach transducer
HARDWARE SETUP
1. Select DA100C module for Channel 1.
2. Set Gain at 1000.
3. Set the high frequency response to 10 Hz (300 Hz in some cases).
4. Set the low frequency response to DC.
5. Set VREF1 to +1.0 Volts (default) with a Volt/ohm meter or with BIOPAC REFCAL (VREF2 will track
VREF1 with opposite polarity).
6. Plug the TCI connector into DA100C.
7. Insert the airflow tube between the bacterial filter and the airflow transducer.
8. Place the mouthpiece on the free end of the bacterial filter.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD107B | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SOFTWARE SETUP
1. Under Setup Channels select channel 1 and click on the scaling button.
2. Complete the scaling dialog box as shown here:
3. Under Setup Acquisition set
a) Storage: Disk
b) Sample rate: 50 samples per second
c) Acquisition length: 30 seconds.
RECORDING PROCEDURE
1. Start breathing normally through the mouthpiece.
2. After several normal breaths, inspire as deeply as
possible (just once) and then return to normal breathing
for several seconds
3. Expire as completely as possible.
4. Return to normal breathing for the remainder of the
recording.
The recorded wave should look something like the top wave
in the following graph. Normal Tidal Volume can vary quite
a bit, even over a 30-second period. Note that in Wave 4 –
adj volume, the starting tidal volume is almost a liter, then, as
the test progresses, the tidal volume drops to about 0.5 liters.
This level of variation is somewhat expected, since
respiratory effort has a strong voluntary component.
ANALYSIS — ACQKNOWLEDGE
1. Duplicate the recorded data.
2. Subtract the mean value of the entire record from the duplicated data to create the Mean Adjusted Flow
(madj). This procedure will simply remove any DC bias from the airflow signal.
3. Duplicate madj.
4. Integrate the duplicated madj channel. This process results in the third wave, which is the volume (in
liters), which correlates to the airflow.
5. To correct for the proper residual volume in the lungs (estimated at about 1 liter), add a constant to the
third wave to create a new adjusted volume (adj volume). The minimum point on this curve should be the
estimated residual lung volume (1 liter).
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD107B | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD107B CALIBRATION
The TSD107B is factory calibrated to nominally satisfy the scaling factor:
1 mVolt output = 11.1 liters/sec flow rate
When connected to the DA100C with Gain =1,000, the calibration factor is:
1 Volt = 11.1 liters/sec
This graph illustrates how a calibration check is performed.
1. Insert a three-liter calibration syringe into the free end of the airflow tube.
2. Push three liters of air through the airflow transducer, first one direction, then the other.
3. Subtract the mean value of the first wave from the second wave, to correct for DC bias.
4. Integrate the second wave; the result will be placed in the third channel (volume).
As air is forced back and forth through the transducer, the expected volume would be from 0 to 3 liters. As air
goes one way the volume climbs to 3 liters, and as that same air is then pulled the other direction through the
transducer, the volume signal should head back to 0. As shown in the sample graph, the volume measurement is
independent of the rate of flow, as would be expected for a linear airflow measurement transducer.
See also: DA100C Calibration options.
TSD107B SPECIFICATIONS
Pneumotach type:
Voltage excitation:
Nominal Output:
Calibration factor:
Calibrated flow range:
Dead space volume:
Back pressure:
Flow bore (Ports):
Weight:
Dimensions:
Cable:
Interface:
Hans Rudolf® #4813 with integral differential pressure transducer
+/- 5 volts (10 volts pk-pk) maximum
45 µV/[liters/sec] (normalized to 1 V excitation)
90 micro-volts/(liters/second) – normalized to 2 VDC excitation
±800 Liters/min
87.8 ml
2.8 cm H2O/400 liters/min
35 mm OD
690 grams
4 cm (deep) x 11 cm (high) x 19 cm (wide)
3 meters
DA100C
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD107B | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MEDIUM-FLOW PNEUMOTACH TRANSDUCER
• SS11LA for MP3X and MP45 System
• TSD117 & TSD117-MRI for MP150/MP100 System
• RX117 Replacement Airflow Head
• See also: AFT series of accessories for airflow and gas analysis
These medium-flow airflow transducers are designed to measure human subject
respiratory, bi-directional airflow (liters/sec) and can be used to measure respiratory
flow in a wide range of tests and conditions relating to airflow and lung volume.
Volume measurements are obtained by integrating the airflow signal. The airflow
transducer is lightweight, easily held in one hand, and has a removable head for
sterilization and replacement. For reasons of hygiene, it is important that only one
person use each disposable mouthpiece and disposable filter.
SS11LA needs 5-10 minutes to
warm up; during this time, the
baseline offset changes slightly.
The SS11LA/TSD117 airflow transducers include an optically clear detachable flow
head (RX117) for easy cleaning and inspection. As the detachable flow head is snapped into the transducer
handle, the flow head plugs directly into an integral, precision low-differential pressure transducer. Accordingly,
the transducers will output an electrical signal proportional to respiratory flow. Use with the AFT22 NonRebreathing “T” valve for low dead space requirements.
The transducers connect to industry standard bacteriological filter AFT1 with disposable mouthpiece AFT2 or
AFT13 filter and mouthpiece with AFT11H coupler. The RX117 detachable flow head can be cold sterilized,
autoclaved (220° F max), or placed in a dishwasher.
For airflow and lung volume measurements, use the airflow transducer with the AFT2 mouthpiece and
the AFT1 bacterial filter.
• For measurements of expired gases, use the airflow transducer with the AFT22 non-rebreathing T valve
with AFT10 facemask and the AFT15A or AFT15B mixing chambers.
All connections can be performed with AFT12 (22 mm ID) tubing and AFT11 series couplers.
•
Please note the following:
a) The bacterial filter and mouthpiece are disposable and are “one per person” items. Please use a new
disposable filter and mouthpiece each time a different person is to be breathing through the airflow
transducer.
b) For more effective calibration, use a bacterial filter between the calibration syringe and the airflow
transducer.
Normal Measurement Connections
• SSLA plugs directly into the MP3X or MP45 unit
• TSD117 plugs directly into the DA100C amplifier module
• TSD117-MRI plugs into MECMRI-DA cable to DA100C amplifier module
Vertical
Orientation
Mouthpiece and
Bacterial Filter
Air Flow Transducer
For the most accurate lung volume recording, be sure to use a noseclip to prevent airflow through the nose. Also,
be sure not to remove the airflow transducer assembly from the mouth during the recording. All air leaving or
entering the lungs must pass through the airflow transducer during the lung volume measurement.
BIOPAC Hardware | SS11LA & TSD117 | Page 1 - 7
Updated: 12.8.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Use the following measurement procedure for determining lung volume:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Breathe normally for 3 cycles (start on inspire)
Inspire as deeply as possible
Return to normal breathing for 3 cycles
Expire as deeply as possible
Return to normal breathing (end on expire)
Data Processing
When integrating the collected data to determine lung volume, it’s important to integrate from the starting point of
the first inspire, to the end point of the last expire. Before integration, the mean of the selected (airflow) data must
be determined and then subtracted from the record. This process insures that the integral will have the same
starting and ending point.
Calibration For Medium-Flow Pneumotachs
1. Syringe Calibration
Calibration Syringe
Vertic al
Orientation
Bacterial Filter
Air Flow Transducer
After the calibration process, please remove the calibration syringe and attach a new bacterial filter and
mouthpiece to the airflow transducer.
It’s very important that each individual use his/her own mouthpiece and bacterial filter.
Place the narrow end of the bacterial filter and mouthpiece assembly into either side of the airflow transducer.
Airflow data can now be recorded. For best results, hold the airflow transducer vertically.
2. Mathematical Calibration
The transducer can be roughly calibrated without using the calibration syringe. Using the transducer’s nominal
output of 60 µV per liter/sec (normalized to 1 volt excitation), the following calibration factors can be entered in
the software Scaling window.
Scaling Factors for Rough Calibration of the airflow transducer
The following equation illustrates why 0.12 volts maps to 1.00 liter/sec:
Calibration Constant • Amp Gain • Amp Excitation = Scale Factor
Thus
60 µV/[liter/sec] • 1000 • 2 Volts = 0.12 V / [liter/sec]
Data can now be collected directly. Prior to analyzing the data, remember that there will always be some offset
recorded in the case of zero flow.
Note: With the TSD117 and MP150/100 system, it’s possible to largely trim this offset out, using the ZERO
potentiometer on the DA100 amplifier, but some residual will always remain.
BIOPAC Hardware | SS11LA & TSD117 | Page 2 - 7
Updated: 12.8.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
To remove residual offset after the flow data
has been collected, select a portion of the
baseline (zero flow reading) and calculate
the mean value using the popup
measurements. Subtract this mean value
from the raw data to obtain a mean
corrected flow signal.
Now, the integral of the mean can be
calculated as shown in this graph 
In this case, a 600 ml-calibration syringe
was used to check the rough calibration of
the airflow transducer. The rough
calibration indicates a syringe volume of
about 550 ml, so this method may only be
expected to be accurate within ±10% of the
real reading.
Flow Measurement and Volume Calculation
To achieve a more exact calibration, start with the above scaling factors and then boost or drop them slightly as
indicated by the rough calibration. In this case, if the map value correlating to 0.12 volts were boosted about 10%
to 1.10 (from 1.0 liters/sec), the resulting calibration would be fairly accurate.
See also: DA100C Calibration options.
>>> All Instructions also apply to the older airflow transducer — model SS11L with non-removable head <<<
SS11LA To MP3X Connection
1. Make sure the BIOPAC MP3X unit is
Note: SS11LA to MP connection instructions also apply to 2turned OFF.
channel MP45 hardware.
Note: Turn the MP3X power off even
if the software is running.
2. The airflow transducer (SS11LA) can
be plugged into any input channel on
the MP3X.
3. After the transducer is plugged in
securely, turn the MP3X power ON.
SS11LA to MP3X connection
Rough Calibration (MP3X)
1. Pull down the MP3X menu.
2. Click Setup channels.
3. Select the Analog channel that the
SS11LA transducer is plugged into and
activate it by clicking in the Acquire,
Plot and Values boxes.
The SS11LA can be roughly calibrated without using the AFT6
calibration syringe. The SS11LA has a nominal output of 60 µV per
liter/sec, which is then scaled to account for the amplifier excitation.
For the MP3X, this is factory set to 5 Volts. Therefore:
60 µV/[liter/sec] · 5 = 300 µV / [liter/sec].
BIOPAC Hardware | SS11LA & TSD117 | Page 3 - 7
Updated: 12.8.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
4. Pull down the Presets pop-up menu and
select Airflow.
5. Click on the View/Change Parameters
button.
6. Click on the Scaling button.
7. Click on Cal1: Leave the Input value
reading and enter 0 for the Scale value.
8. For Cal2 Input Value, add 300 µV (or
.3 mV) to the Cal1 Input Value. For
Cal2 Scale value, enter 1.
9. Click OK for each window to exit
Channel Setup.
Using the Calibration Syringe
1. Place a filter onto the end of the
calibration syringe.
2. Insert the Calibration Syringe/Filter
Assembly into the airflow transducer.
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Note: Add 300µV to the Cal1 Input Value for Cal2.
The filter is necessary for calibration because it forces the air
to move smoothly through the transducer. This assembly can
be left connected for future use. The filter only needs to be
replaced if the paper inside the filter tears.
IMPORTANT!
Always insert on the
side labeled “Inlet.”
Calibration Syringe into airflow transducer
Insert syringe assembly so that the transducer cable exits on
the left, as shown above.
• If using an older SS11L transducer with non-removable
head, insert syringe assembly into the larger diameter port.
IMPORTANT: If the lab sterilizes the airflow heads after
each use, make sure a clean head is installed now.
Never hold onto the airflow
transducer handle when using the
Calibration Syringe or the syringe
tip may break.
The Airflow Transducer is sensitive to gravity so it needs to be
held upright throughout the calibration and recording.
BIOPAC Hardware | SS11LA & TSD117 | Page 4 - 7
Updated: 12.8.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Proper handling of the Calibration Syringe Assembly
3. Pump the plunger several times
before the recording. Always pull
and push the plunger all the way
until it stops when using the
syringe. This assures that the full
volume of air (0.6 liter) flows in and
out of the airflow transducer.
Recording with the Airflow Transducer
1) Attach the appropriate filter and
mouthpiece on the side labeled Inlet.
WARNING
The bacterial filter and mouthpiece are
disposable and are “one per person”
items. Please use a new disposable
filter and mouthpiece each time a
different person is to be breathing
through the airflow transducer.
If using SS11LA transducer and not sterilizing the head
after each use, insert a filter and mouthpiece into the
airflow transducer on the side labeled “Inlet.”
SS11LA with unsterilized head
If using SS11LA transducer and sterilizing the head after
each use, insert a disposable mouthpiece (BIOPAC AFT2)
or a sterilizable mouthpiece (BIOPAC AFT8) into the
airflow transducer on the side labeled “Inlet.”
SS11LA with sterilized head
BIOPAC Hardware | SS11LA & TSD117 | Page 5 - 7
Updated: 12.8.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
2) Breathe through the airflow
transducer, following the proper
procedure defined to the right.
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Hints for obtaining optimal data:
a) Keep the Airflow Transducer upright at all times.
b) Always insert on and breathe through the side of the
SS11LA airflow transducer labeled “Inlet.”
c) Always use a nose clip when breathing through the
airflow transducer and secure a tight seal with the mouth
so that air can only escape through the airflow
transducer.
d) Always begin breathing normally through the airflow
transducer prior to the beginning of the recording and
continue past the end of the recording.
e) If starting the recording on an inhale, try to end on an
exhale, and vice-versa. This is not absolutely critical,
but will increase the accuracy of Airflow to Volume
calculations.
f) The Subject must try to expand the thoracic cavity to its
largest volume during maximal inspiratory efforts. (The
Subject should wear loose clothing so clothing does not
inhibit chest expansion.)
g) During recording of FEV, the Subject should attempt to
exhale as quickly as possible into the mouthpiece.
h) During recording of MVV, the Subject should attempt
to exhale and inhale as quickly and deeply as possible.
Breathing rates should be faster than 60 breaths/minute
or greater than 1 breath/second for the best results. The
breathing needs to be maintained for 12-15 seconds.
BIOPAC Hardware | SS11LA & TSD117 | Page 6 - 7
Updated: 12.8.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
RX117 Replacement Airflow Head
The RX117 is a sterilizable airflow head for the TSD117 and SS11LA pneumotach
transducers. The material used in the flow head is polycarbonate and the screen is Stainless
Steel. To reduce the cost of disposable items, use the RX117 with the AFT8 sterilizable
mouthpiece. (22 mm ID/30 mm OD). Multiple RX117 heads help eliminate equipment
downtime during cleaning procedures.
Recommended sterilization: cold sterilization (i.e., Cidex®) or autoclave. If autoclaved,
RX117 Airflow Heads should be cleaned at the lowest autoclave temperature setting. The life
cycle will be about 10-20 cycles, depending upon temperature used.
MRI Usage Declarations for TSD117-MRI Medium Flow Pneumotach Transducer
MRI Use:
MR Conditional to 3T
Note: Conductive parts of transducer are electrically and thermally isolated from subject. The TSD117MRI is used outside the bore in the MRI Chamber Room and AFT7-L tubing is connected to
reach the subject using AFT35-MRI non-rebreathing T-valve.
Components: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic, Polycarbonate Clear Plastic, Acrylonitrile Butadiene
Styrene (ABS) Thermo-molded, Plastic, Polymer thick film device (rigid substrate, printed semiconductor), Copper clad fiberglass lamination (PCB material), Stainless steel screen (type 316L),
Stainless steel machine screws/nuts, tinned copper wire, Silicone elastomer, PVDF (Kynar) heat
shrink tubing
SS11LA & TSD117 Technical Specifications
TRANSDUCER:
Interface:
Cable Length:
Flow Rate:
Nominal Output:
¼” 25 TPI mounting nut:
RX117 SPECS:
Flow Head Construction:
Flow Bore (Ports):
Flow Head Dimensions:
Flow Head Weight:
Handle Weight:
Handle Dimensions:
Handle Construction:
Dead Space:
TSD117
DA100C
3m
shielded
TSD117-MRI
MECMRI-DA to DA100C
8 m, shielded
SS11LA
MP36/35/30/45
3 m, shielded
±10 liters/min (highest linearity (±5 liters/sec)
60 µV/[liters/sec] (normalized to 1 V excitation)
Standard camera mount
Clear Acrylic
22 mm (ID), 29 mm (OD)
82.5 mm (diameter) x 101.5 mm (length)
80 g
85 g
127 mm (length) x 23 mm (thick) x 35 mm (wide)
Black ABS
93 ml
BIOPAC Hardware | SS11LA & TSD117 | Page 7 - 7
Updated: 12.8.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
TSD127 PNEUMOTACH AIRFLOW TRANSDUCER
RX127
TSD160
TSD127
The TSD127 can perform a variety of pulmonary measurements relating to airflow, lung volume and expired gas
analysis. The TSD127 is intended for animal and human use and consists of a pneumotach airflow head (RX127)
coupled to a precision, highly sensitive, differential pressure transducer (TSD160A). The TSD127 will connect
directly to a breathing circuit or plethysmogram chamber. The detachable flow head (RX127) makes cleaning and
sterilization easy.
 For airflow and lung volume measurements, connect a short airflow cannula to the TSD127.
 For measurements of expired gases, use the TSD127 with the AFT22 non-rebreathing valve.
 All connections can be performed with AFT11 series couplers.
TSD127 CALIBRATION
Follow the procedure for TSD117 but move the calibration syringe plunger at a reduced velocity due to the higher
sensitivity to flow of the TSD127.
See also: DA100C Calibration options.
TSD127 SPECIFICATIONS
Range:
Nominal Output:
Dead Space:
Weight:
± 90 liters/min (±1.5 liters/sec)
500 µV/[liters/sec] (normalized
to 1 V excitation)
11 cc
11 grams – airflow head
Dimensions:
Ports:
Tubing Length:
Interface: DA100
5.7 cm (long) – airflow head
15 mm OD / 11 mm ID
1.8 meters (to DA100C)
RX127 REPLACEMENT AIRFLOW HEAD
The RX127 is a low airflow head for the TSD127 pneumotach transducer. Multiple RX127 heads help eliminate
equipment downtime during cleaning procedures. (11 mm ID/15 mm OD)
BIOPAC Hardware | Pneumotach Low Flow | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 3.19.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
PNEUMOTACH AIRFLOW TRANSDUCERS
 TSD137 SERIES FOR MP150/MP100 SYSTEM
 SS46L-SS52L SERIES FOR MP3X AND MP45 SYSTEM
 RX137 SERIES REPLACEMENT FLOW HEADS
The TSD137/SS46L-SS52L series pneumotachs
can be used to perform a variety of small animal
and human pulmonary measurements relating to
RX137A
SS40L
airflow, lung volume and expired gas analysis.
These pneumotach transducers consist of a low
flow, pneumotach airflow head (RX137B through
RX137H and SS46L through SS52L) coupled to a
precision, highly sensitive, differential pressure
transducer (TSD160A or SS40L) via RX137
RX137 Series
tubing. The pneumotachs will connect directly to a
breathing circuit or plethysmogram chamber. For airflow and lung volume measurements, connect a short airflow
cannula to the RX137 series flow head. All pneumotachs are equipped with an internal heating element and
AC137A 6-volt power supply.
MRI Use (TSD137): MR Conditional
Condition:
Tested to 3T: Contains ferrous material – must be clamped down in the safe MRI
operating area.
Components:
Brass, stainless steel, copper
See also: DA100C Calibration options.
To DSUB9 connector for MP3X
TSD160 Series
RX137 Series Replacement Airflow Heads (SHOWN ABOVE)
For TSD137 & SS46L-SS52L Series Pneumotachs
The RX137 series are airflow heads for the TSD137 and SS46L-52L series pneumotach transducers. The RX137
heads can be mixed and matched with any of the TSD137 and SS46L-SS52L series pneumotachs. Switching one
head for another when using a single pneumotach can accommodate a wide range in flows. RX137 heads connect
to the TSD160A or SS40L differential pressure transducer via standard 3 mm or 4 mm ID tubing. Multiple
RX137 heads help eliminate equipment downtime during cleaning procedures.
Pneumotach Airflow Transducer Calibration
Connect tubing between the calibration syringe and the transducer, then follow the procedure for
TSD117/SS11LA but move the calibration syringe plunger at a reduced velocity due to the very high sensitivity to
flow of the TSD137/SS46L-SS52L series. Each of the TSD137/SS46L-SS52L series is factory calibrated to a
known flow level, as indicated on the transducer.
Flow Head Cleaning & Disinfection
IMPORTANT:



RX137 series airflow heads are manufactured with a very thin layer of synthetic resin, so they should
never be cleaned with an organic solvent. We recommend cleaners such as Hydro-Merfen at the
concentration used for medical material, or Gluterex.
Before using the airflow head, be sure it is dry.
Never heat the airflow head higher than 50 C.
1. Submerge the airflow head in a disinfectant solution for approximately one hour.
2. Rinse the airflow head with distilled or de-mineralized water.
3. Use compressed air or another compressed gas [pressure up to 5 kg / cm2 (5 bar)] to drive any
remaining water out of the airflow head.
4. Allow the airflow head to dry completely in ambient air (or continue using compressed air if time
requires it).
BIOPAC Hardware | Pneumotach 100 Series | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 3.24.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
TSD/RX137 & SS46L-SS52L Series Specifications
Part# DA100C
TSD16
0/SS40L
MP36/35/30/
45
TSD137B
RX137B1
SS46L
TSD137C
RX137C1
SS47L
TSD137D
RX137D1
SS48L
TSD137E
RX137E1
SS49L
TSD137F
RX137F1
SS50L
TSD137G
RX137G1
SS51L
TSD137H
RX137H1
SS52L
Range (ml/sec):
±50
±83
±166
±583
±1565
±2666
±13333
Dead Space (cc):
0.8
0.9
2.0
4.0
18.15
13.87
80.0
Nominal Output
(µV [ml/sec]):
15.40
5.78
2.10
0.924
1.155
0.4815
0.1925
Flow Ports ID/OD (mm):
6.0 - 7.0
6.0 - 7.0
9.0 - 10.0
10.0 - 11.0
17.0 - 22.0
14.0 - 24.6
43.0 - 45.0
RX Head Length (mm):
75
75
75
60
60
60
60
RX Head Weight
(grams):
90
90
100
60
100
150
250
Mouse
Rat/Guinea Pig
Cat/Rabbit
Small Dog
Medium Dog
Large Dog
Adult Human
50 g
350 g
750 g
5.5 kg
15 kg
25 kg
--
Approx. Size:
Approx. Weight:
Nominal Output:
TSD137B, C, H = normalized to 1 V excitation
TSD137D, E, F, G & SS46L-52L = normalized to 5 V excitation
Tubing Length:
1.8 m (to TSD160A/SS40L)
BIOPAC Hardware | Pneumotach 100 Series | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 3.24.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
PNEUMOTACH 200 SERIES AIRFLOW TRANSDUCERS
These flow transducers are designed for humans and animals ranging in
size from mice to medium-sized dogs. They include a detachable flow
head (RX237B through H) and a differential pressure transducer
(TSD160A or SS40L).
Available Flow Rates
17 ml/sec
167 ml/sec
1.67 L/sec
16.7 L/sec



Mouse/Rat
Cat/Rabbit
Medium Dog
Human
Lightweight and robust
Linear and direction sensitive
Twin, non kink silicone tubing


Economical, sensitive and robust
Easily cleaned, disinfected or sterilized
For cleaning instructions, see the Cleaning Guidelines.
MR Conditional
Animal use only. Contains ferrous material – must be clamped down in the safe MRI
operating area.
Components: Brass, stainless steel, copper
MRI Usage:
Condition:
RX237 SERIES REPLACEMENT AIRFLOW HEADS
For TSD237 and SSLA Series Pneumotachs
Detachable flow heads in are machined from acetal to give good stability with low weight and have found
application in pediatrics and in the respiration measurement of animals such as dogs, cats, rats and mice.
TSD/SSLA/RX237 Series Specifications
BIOPAC Part #
Dead
Space
(ml)
Linear
Range
L/min
Approx.
Flow for
10 mm
H2O
Tube
(OD
mm)
Length
(mm)
Weight
(gm)
Transducer
Flowhead
Flowhead
Type
TSD237B/SS46LA
RX237B
F1L
0.6
±1
1.2 L/min
5
40
14
TSD237D/SS48LA
RX237D
F10L
2
± 10
12 L/min
8
54
22
TSD237F/SS50LA
RX237F
F100L
9
± 100
90 L/min
16
54
38
TSD237H
RX237H
F1000L
320
± 1000
550 L/min
29.5
198
230
Note: One of the problems historically encountered with pneumotachographs is condensation from expired air.
This can be prevented by fitting a non-return valve and measuring only inspiration or alternatively by
heating the flowhead, but viscosity errors may arise (from which in the first few breaths especially)
preheat the inspired air most uncomfortably. In this range of flow heads, the problem is approached
from a fresh angle. By mounting fine stainless steel gauze in plastic rings, thermal inertia is greatly
reduced. The gauze therefore rapidly equilibrates in temperature with passing air and condensation
is minimal.
BIOPAC Hardware | Pneumotach 200 Series | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 2.5.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BLOOD PRESSURE CUFF AND TRANSDUCER
 TSD120 for MP150/MP100 System
 RX120 Series Cuff for TSD120
 SS19L/LA/LB for MP3x & MP45 System
TSD120
RX120A and RX120F cuff options
BLOOD PRESSURE MEASUREMENT
The most common form of indirect blood pressure measurement employs a pressure cuff, pump and pressure
transducer. This complete assembly is commonly referred to as a sphygmomanometer.
Typically, the cuff is wrapped around the upper arm and is inflated to a pressure exceeding that of the brachial
artery. This amount of pressure collapses the artery and stops the flow of blood to the arm. The pressure of the
cuff is slowly reduced as the pressure transducer monitors the pressure in the cuff. As the pressure drops, it will
eventually match the systolic (peak) arterial pressure. At this point, the blood is able to “squirt” through the
brachial artery. This squirting results in turbulence that creates the Korotkoff sounds. The cuff pressure continues
to drop, and the pressure eventually matches the diastolic pressure of the artery. At that point, the Korotkoff
sounds stop completely, because the blood is now flowing unrestricted through the artery.
SETUP
The graph at right illustrates a typical recording using the TSD120/SS19L.
 TSD120: Pressure signal is recorded via a DA100C amplifier set to DC, 10Hz LP and a gain of 200.

SS19L/LA/LB: To record the pressure signal, Select SS19L/LA/LB preset from the MP3x/MP4x > Set
Up Channels menu.
RECORDING
As the cuff is wrapped around the upper arm of the subject, be sure to
place the physiological sounds transducer underneath the blood
pressure cuff, directly over the brachial artery. Transducer
placement is very important to get the best possible recordings of
Korotkoff sounds. Finish wrapping the cuff around the upper arm and
secure it with the Velcro® seal. Now, start inflating the cuff with the
pump bulb.
The pressure trace shows the hand pump driving the cuff pressure up
to about 150 mmHg. Then the cuff pressure is slowly released by
adjusting the pump bulb deflation orifice. Notice that the Korotkoff
sounds begin appearing when the cuff pressure drops to about 125
mmHg (bottom trace). As the pressure continues to drop, the
Korotkoff sounds eventually disappear, at about 85 mmHg. The
systolic pressure would be identified at 125 mmHg and the diastolic pressure would be 85 mmHg.
BIOPAC Hardware | Blood Pressure Cuff | Page 1 - 4
Updated: 12.22.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
CALIBRATION
A) TSD120
The TSD120’s built-in pressure transducer will require an initial calibration prior to use. To calibrate the
transducer, wrap the cuff into a roll and begin to inflate the cuff slowly with the pump bulb. The pressure change
will be noticeable on the mechanical indicator. Set the cuff pressure to one lower pressure (typically 20 mmHg)
and then one higher pressure (typically 100 mmHg). In this manner the pressure transducer can be calibrated
using the standard procedure in the SCALING dialog (in AcqKnowledge). To use the cuff at a future date, simply
save the calibration settings in a stored file.
See also: DA100C Calibration options.
B) SS19L
The built-in pressure transducer of the SS19L/LA/LB requires an initial calibration prior to use. To calibrate the
transducer, wrap the cuff into a roll and begin to inflate the cuff slowly with the pump bulb. Notice the pressure
change on the mechanical indicator. Set the cuff pressure to one lower pressure (typically 20 mmHg) and then one
higher pressure (typically 100 mmHg). In this manner the pressure transducer can be calibrated using the standard
procedure in the Scaling dialog box of the BSL PRO software. To use the cuff at a future date, simply save the
calibration settings as a New Channel Preset or in a graph template or data file.
C) SS19LA/LB
SS19LA/LB uses an on-screen gauge display only and does not include a
gauge. Gauge color can be set under Lesson Preferences.
BSL 3.7.7
1. With cuff deflated, connect the SS19LA to the desired MP unit input
channel.
2. Set the input channel preset to Blood Pressure Cuff SS19LA/LB (MP >
Set Up Channels > SS19LA/LB preset)
3. Click on “View/Change Parameters” > “Scaling”.
4. Click the CAL 1 button
5. Add the CAL 1 input value to the CAL 2 input value.
6. Click OK and close dialogs.
BSL 4
1. Repeat steps 1 and 2 from above.
2. Click “Setup” > “Scaling”.
3. Click the CAL 2 button
4. Add the CAL 2 input value to the CAL 1 input value and click OK.
NOTE: The SS19LA/LB is not
compatible with MP45 Systems
(USB chip conflict). Use SS19L
with MP45 Systems.
BIOPAC Hardware | Blood Pressure Cuff | Page 2 - 4
Updated: 12.22.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
Example in BSL 4 – initial scaling dialog (SS19LA):
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Clicking CAL 2 results in an Input value of 0.071 mV.
Adding 0.071 to the initial value of 61.44 results in an
adjusted CAL 1 value of 61.51 mV. (Your result may
vary slightly from the example).
NOTE: For the SS19LB, the default initial scaling values are: CAL1 = 40.96, Map value = 258.57
IMPORTANT: CAL 1 and CAL 2 values are reversed between BSL 3.7.7 and BSL 4.
BLOOD PRESSURE CUFF SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure range:
Manometer accuracy:
Output:
Cuff circumference range:
Cuff Dimensions:
Weight: 350
Cable Length:
Interface:
TSD12
0
SS19L/LA/LB
20 mmHg to 300 mmHg
±3 mmHg
5 µV/mmHg (normalized to 1 V excitation)
25.4 cm to 40.6 cm (as shipped with RX120 d; cuff is switchable)
14.5 cm (wide) x 54 cm (long)
grams
3 meters, shielded
DA100C
MP3x/4x
BIOPAC Hardware | Blood Pressure Cuff | Page 3 - 4
Updated: 12.22.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
RX120 SERIES BLOOD PRESSURE CUFFS
The RX120 series are optional blood pressure cuffs, of varying sizes, which can be quickly and easily swapped in
and out of the noninvasive blood pressure cuff transducer. Use a single transducer and substitute one cuff for
another to accommodate a wide range in limb circumferences.
RX120 SPECIFICATIONS
Cuff
Circumference
Range (cm)
RX120A 9.5-13.5
RX120B 13.0-1
9.0
RX120C 18.4-2
6.7
RX120D 25.4-4
0.6
RX120E 34.3-5
0.8
RX120F 40.6-6
6.0
Width
(cm)
5.2
7.5
10.5
14.5
17.6
21.0
Length
(cm)
18.5
26.1
34.2
54.0
63.3
82.5
BIOPAC Hardware | Blood Pressure Cuff | Page 4 - 4
Updated: 12.22.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD121C HAND DYNAMOMETER
The TSD121C is an isometric dynamometer that measures gripping (compression) or pulling (tension) forces
associated with a wide variety of muscle groups. The isometric design improves experiment repeatability and
accuracy. Forces are easily recorded in pounds, grams, kilograms force or in Newtons.
The TSD121C can be used for both compression (gripping) and tension (pulling) muscle strength studies under
isometric constraint.
• For compression measurements, simply squeeze the handle of the transducer. This simple operation
makes for very simple and quick hand strength measurements.
• For tension measurements, the attached sturdy metal eye loops can be threaded using rope or chain. In
this configuration, arm curling, leg lifting and digit activation forces can be measured. For these
measurements, one loop is clamped securely and the other loop is attached, via cabling, to the appropriate
body location under test.
The TSD121C has a 3-meter cable terminated in a connector that interfaces with the DA100C general-purpose
transducer amplifier. The ergonomic soft handle design and simple calibration procedure make this device very
easy to use.
For in-depth studies of muscular activity, combine TSD121C force recordings with EMG recordings; see the
EMG100C amplifier for more information.
TSD121C CALIBRATION
With the proper equipment and correct scaling techniques described below, precise force measurements can be
obtained.
EQUIPMENT
TSD121C Hand Dynamometer
MP System and DA100C General Purpose Transducer Amplifier
SS25 Simple Sensor Hand Dynamometer
MP System and TEL100C Remote Monitoring Module Set
HARDWARE SETUP
Connect the TSD121C to the DA100C, or the SS25 to the TEL100C. When using this type of transducer, proper
hand placement is at the uppermost portion of the foam grip, directly below the dynagrip connections.
SOFTWARE SETUP
1. Select MP150 > Set Up Data Acquisition > Channels and enable
one analog channel; make sure this channel matches the Analog
Output Channel physically selected on the DA100C amplifier.)
2. Select Setup > Scaling. A dialog similar to the example shown at
right will be generated.
3. In the Map value fields, enter the values 0 and 1 respectively.
These represent 0 and 1 kilograms.
4. Enter “kg” for the Units label, as shown.
5. Place the TSD121C on a flat surface and click the Cal 1 button.
6. Note the value appearing in the Cal 1 Input field.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD121C | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 8.24.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
7. Add 13.15 µV per volt of excitation (Vex) to this value and enter the result in the CAL 2 Input field.
The DA100C amplifier is factory set to a default 2 V (±1 V) of excitation. If the amplifier has been set to a
different level of excitation, use the following equation wherein: V = volts of excitation per 1 kg and G = gain
setting on the DA100C or TEL100C module:
(13.15 µV*G * Vex) + Cal 1 = Cal 2
To more precisely tune the Cal 2 value for tension measurements, proceed to alternate Steps 6a and 7a:
6a. Hang a known weight from the eyelets of the TSD121C and enter that weight value in the CAL 2 MAP
value field.
7a. Click the CAL 2 button.
If using the TSD121C dynamometer to record hand clench compression measurements, modify the CAL 2 value
to reflect ~80% of the CAL 2 value resulting from the eyelet (tension) method of calibration. This 80% derating
suggestion accounts for the shifting of the collective applied force vector - resulting from hand clench - closer to
the pivot axis of the TSD121C (near bottom).
In AcqKnowledge 4.1 and higher, simply use Set Up Data Acquisition > Channels > Add New Module.
Choose DA100C as the module type. Choose the correct physical channel switch position and select the
TSD121C from the transducer list. Then follow the calibration prompts.
TESTING CALIBRATION
To see if the calibration is correct
for the MP System:
1. Start acquiring data.
2. Place the hand
dynamometer on a flat
surface.
3. Place a known weight on
the uppermost portion of
the grip.
4. Check the data — the
weight should be reflected
accurately in the data
acquired.
Sample Data
See also: DA100C Calibration options.
TSD121C SPECIFICATIONS
Isometric Range:
Nominal Output:
Linearity:
Nonrepeatability:
Creep after 30 minutes:
Hysteresis:
Sensitivity:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Cable Length:
Interface:
TEL100C compatibility:
0-100 Kg
13.2 µV/kg (normalized to 1 V excitation)
< ±0.03% of rated output
< ±0.02% of rated output
< 0.05% of rated output
< ±0.02% of rated output (compression only or tension only)
2.2 grams rms (5 V excitation, DC-10 Hz)
315 g
185 mm (long) x 42 mm (wide) x 30 mm (thick)
3m
DA100C
SS25
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD121C | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 8.24.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD121C COMPRESSIVE FORCE RESPONSE
The following chart depicts the compressive force curve of the TSD121C; (how the dynamometer behaves at
different forces). Force was applied to the handle at a position 3.8 cm (1.5”) from the eyelets, using the TSD121C
Handle Preset.
TSD121C Compressive Force Profile
Force Applied
TSD121C Compression
0
0.049
4.545
4.734
15.909
15.764
27.272
26.821
38.636
38.105
50
49.314
Tabular Data for TSD121C Compressive Force Profile
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD121C | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 8.24.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD125 SERIES PRECISION FORCE TRANSDUCERS
TSD125B (20 g)
TSD125C (50 g)
TSD125D (100 g)
TSD125E (200 g)
TSD125F (500 g)
TSD125 shown with HDW100A
Force transducers are devices capable of transforming a force into a proportional electrical signal. The TSD125
series force transducer elements are cantilever beam load cells incorporating thin-film strain gauges. Because the
strain elements have been photolithographically etched directly on the strain beam, these transducers are rugged
while maintaining low non-linearity and hysteresis. Drift with time and temperature is also minimized, because
the strain elements track extremely well, due to the deposition method and the elements close physical proximity.
Forces are transmitted back to the beam via a self-centering pull-pin to insure accurate force measurements. The
cantilever beam is mounted in a sealed aluminum enclosure that includes a 3/8” diameter mounting rod for
holding the transducer in a large variety of orientations.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD125 Series | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 8.28.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD125 SERIES CALIBRATION
The following graphs illustrate actual data taken with the TSD125C (50 gram force transducer) and TSD125F
(500 gram force transducer). The force transducers were connected directly to a DA100C amplifier with the
excitation set to ±5 Volts. The DA100C gain was set to 1,000. The RMS noise output was determined by
calculating the standard deviation of the amplified and calibrated signal over a period of time.
The RMS noise of each force transducer was determined in three different settings.
1) Channel 1
RMS Noise at DA100C output
2) Channel 41
RMS Noise after 10 Hz Low Pass IIR real time filtering
3) Channel 40
RMS Noise after 1Hz Low Pass IIR real time filtering
RMS NOISE PERFORMANCE
OF TSD125F FOR DIFFERENT
BANDWIDTHS
RMS NOISE PERFORMANCE
OF TSD125C FOR DIFFERENT
BANDWIDTHS
See also: DA100C Calibration options.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD125 Series | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 8.28.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
TSD125 SERIES SPECIFICATIONS
Device
Full Scale Range RMS Noise [10 volts Excitation]
10
(FSR)
Hz
1
Hz
TSD125B:
20 gram
1.0 mg RMS
.04 mg RMS
TSD125C:
50 gram
2.5 mg RMS
1 mg RMS
TSD125D:
100 gram
5 mg RMS
2 mg RMS
TSD125E:
200 gram
10 mg RMS
4 mg RMS
TSD125F:
500 gram
25 mg RMS
10 mg RMS
Nonlinearity: <±0.025%
FSR
Hysteresis: <±0.05%
FSR
Nonrepeatability: <±0.05%
FSR
30-Minute Creep:
<±0.05% FSR
Temperature Range:
-10°C to 70°C
Thermal Zero Shift:
<±0.03% FSR/°C
Thermal Range Shift:
<0.03% Reading/°C
Maximum Excitation:
10 VDC
Full Scale Output:
1 mV/V (normalized to 1 V excitation)
Weight: 250
grams
Dimensions:
100 mm (long) x 19 mm (wide) x 25 mm (high)
Mounting Rod:
9.5 mm (dia) – variable orientation
Cable Length:
3 meters
Interface: DA100C
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD125 Series | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 8.28.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TENSION ADJUSTERS
HDW100A TENSION ADJUSTER
HDW200A 3RD-PARTY TENSION ADJUSTER ADAPTER
HDW100A and TSD125/SS12LA
The HDW100A tension adjuster operates with the TSD105A, TSD125, SS12LA force transducers and SS14L
displacement transducer. The rugged design and stability of the mounting allow for fine position control. The
position adjuster is located on the top for easy access and smooth operation. Vertical scales are provided for both
metric and standard units. The HDW100A slides directly onto vertical rod laboratory stands and force transducers
are clamped into the unit horizontally.
HDW100A SPECIFICATIONS
Travel Range:
Resolution:
Stand Clamp:
Transducer Clamp
Weight:
Dimensions:
25 mm
0.0025 mm per degree rotation
13.25 mm ID
11 mm ID
140 grams
93 mm (high) x 19 mm (thick) x 74 mm (deep)
HDW200 ADAPTER FOR 3RD-PARTY TENSION ADJUSTERS
This adapter allows 3rd-party tension adjusters to interface with BIOPAC Force Transducers.

Fits any tension adjuster with an arm diameter of 6.35 mm (1/4") or less, such as “riser” style tension
adjusters from Lafayette and Wards.
BIOPAC Hardware | TENSION ADJUSTERS | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.28.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
Goniometers & Torsiometers
• TSD130 Series
• SS20L-SS24L
• SS20-SS24
•
•
•
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BN-GON-XDCR Series
BN-TOR-XDCR Series
BN-GON-F-XDCR
In the example above, the TSD130A was connected directly to a DA100C amplifier,
the DA100C gain was set to 1,000, and AcqKnowledge was used to calibrate the
signal to provide angular measurements from approximately +90° to -90°.
Transducer
MP1XX (DA100C) MP3X/MP45 TEL100C
BN-GONIO
Twin-axis Goniometer 110
TSD130A
SS20L
SS20
BN-GON-110-XDCR
Twin-axis Goniometer 150
TSD130B
SS21L
SS21
BN-GON-150-XDCR
Torsiometer 110
TSD130C
SS22L
SS22
BN-TOR-110-XDCR
Torsiometer 150
TSD130D
SS23L
SS23
BN-TOR-150-XDCR
Single-axis Goniometer 35
TSD130E
SS24L
SS24
BN-GON-F-XDCR
BIOPAC Goniometers and Torsiometers are designed for the measurement of limb angular movement. Goniometers
transform angular position into a proportional electrical signal. Goniometers incorporate gauge elements that measure
bending strain along or around a particular axis.
BIOPAC goniometers are unobtrusive and lightweight, and can be attached to the body surface using double-sided
surgical tape (and can be further secured with single sided tape). The goniometers have a telescopic endblock that
compensates for changes in distance between the two mounting points as the limb moves. The gauge mechanism allows
for accurate measurement of polycentric joints. All sensors connect directly to the BIOPAC Acquisition Unit as part of an
MP or BSL System. Activity data can be displayed and recorded, leaving the subject to move freely in the normal
environment.
The bending strain is proportional to the sum total angular shift along the axis. Because the bending force is extremely
small, the output signal is uniquely a proportional function of the angular shift.
Twin-axis Goniometers Dual output devices that can measure angular rotation about two orthogonal planes
simultaneously. Goniometers provide outputs to simultaneously measure around two
orthogonally rotational axes (e.g. wrist flexion/extension and radial/ulnar deviations).
—wrist or ankle
use TSD130A/SS20L/SS20/BN-GON-110-XDCR
—elbow, knee or shoulder
use TSD130B/SS21L/SS21/BN-GON-150-XDCR
Torsiometers
Measure angular twisting (as on the torso, spine or neck) as opposed to bending. Torsiometers
measure rotation about a single axis (e.g. forearm pronation/supination).
—neck
use TSD130C/SS22L/SS22/BN-TOR-110-XDCR
—along the torso or spine
use TSD130D/SS23L/SS23/BN-TOR-150-XDCR
Single-axis Goniometer Measures the angle in one plane only; designed to measure digit joint movement.
—fingers, thumb or toes
use TSD130E/SS24L/SS24/BN-GON-F-XDCR
BIOPAC Hardware | Gonio-Torsio | Page 1 - 9
Updated: 10.21.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ATTACHMENT TO THE SUBJECT
Various combinations of display and recording instrumentation have been carefully developed fulfilling the requirements
of specific research applications. Due to the wide range of applications, one method of attachment cannot be
recommended. Experience has proven that standard medical adhesive tape is an excellent adhesion method in the majority
of cases. Single-sided and double-sided medical tape (such as BIOPAC TAPE1 or TAPE2) should be used for the best
results.
1. Attach pieces of double-sided tape to the underside of the goniometer endblocks.
2. Stick the tape to the subject and allow for the telescoping of the goniometer. The goniometer should be fully
extended when the joint is fully flexed.
3. Press the two endblocks firmly onto the subject and ensure that the goniometer is lying over the top of the
joint. When the joint is extended, the goniometer may present an “oxbow.”
4. For additional security, pass a single wrap of single-sided medical tape around each endblock.
5. Secure the cable and connector leaving the goniometer with tape to ensure that they do not pull and detach the
goniometer.
For accurate results from long recordings
Employ double-sided adhesive between the endblocks and skin, and place single-sided adhesive tape over the top of the
endblocks. No tape should come into contact with the spring. The connection lead should also be taped down near the
goniometer.
For applications where quick or rapid movements are involved
Fit a “sock” bandage over the whole sensor and interconnect lead. This does not apply to the finger goniometer
(TSD130E/SS24L/SS24/BN-GON-F-XDCR), which has a different working mechanism.
When the goniometer is mounted across the joint, the center of rotation of the sensor measuring element may not coincide
with the center of rotation of the joint (for example, when measuring flexion /extension of the wrist). As the joint moves
through a determined angle, the relative linear distance between the two mounting positions will change.
To compensate for this, all sensors are fitted with a telescopic endblock that permits changes in linear displacement
between the two endblocks along axis ZZ without the measuring element becoming over-stretched or buckled.
In the free or unstretched position, the distance between the two endblocks is L1.
If a light force is applied, pushing the endblocks away from each other, this length will increase to a maximum of L2.
When the light force is removed, the distance between the two endblocks will automatically return to L1.
This creates several advantages: accuracy is improved; sensors can be worn comfortably and undetected under normal
clothing; the tendency for the position of the sensors to move relative to the underlying skeletal structure is reduced.
BIOPAC Hardware | Gonio-Torsio | Page 2 - 9
Updated: 10.21.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
If a light force is now applied, pushing the two endblocks linearly towards each other, the only way the distance L1 can
decrease in length is if the measuring element buckles.
• Buckling is detrimental to the accuracy of the goniometer and torsiometer sensors, so attachment instructions are
provided for the most commonly measured joints (on page 8), to ensure that it does not occur in practice.
There is no universal rule governing which size of sensor is most suitable for a particular joint; this depends on the size of
the subject.
In general, the sensor must be capable of reaching across the joint so that the two endblocks can be mounted where the
least movement occurs between the skin and the underlying skeletal structure. In certain circumstances, more than one
size of sensor will be appropriate.
WARNINGS
1. Take care to handle the goniometer and torsiometer sensors as instructed. Mishandling may result in inaccurate
data, reduced equipment life, or even failure.
2. Observe the minimum bend radius value for each goniometer and torsiometer at all times, particularly when
attaching and removing the sensors from the subject. Failure to do this will result in reduced equipment life or
failure.
3. Never remove the goniometer from the subject by pulling on the measurement element and/or protective spring.
Remove the endblocks individually and carefully, making sure not to exceed the minimum permissible bend
radius, particularly where the measuring element enters the endblocks.
4. Take care when mounting goniometers to ensure that the measurement element always forms a “simple” bend
shape. Accuracy will be reduced if an “oxbow” shape occurs in the element.
5. Do not bend the finger goniometer more than ±20° in the Y-Y Plane or reduced equipment life and/or failure may
result.
6. Do not exceed rotations of ± 90° about ZZ. Exceeding the torsiometer range may result in a reduction of the life
of the unit or failure.
7. Disconnect the transducers from the BIOPAC Acquisition Unit before cleaning or disinfecting goniometers and
torsiometers.
MAINTENANCE & SERVICE
No periodic maintenance is required to ensure the correct functioning of the sensors.
The sensors contain no user serviceable components.
If the sensor fails, it should be returned to BIOPAC Systems, Inc.
• Please request a Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) number before returning the sensor and include a
description of what has been observed and what instrumentation was in use at the time of sensor failure in the
return package.
Calibration
When using all goniometers and torsiometers, the minimum value of bend radius must be observed at all times,
particularly when attaching and removing the sensors from the subject. Failure to do this will result in reduced unit life
or failure.
The sensors have been designed to be as light as possible and the operating force to be a minimum. This permits free
movement of the joint without influence by the sensors. The sensors measure the angle subtended between the
endblocks. Use the software calibration features (under Setup Channels) to calibrate any of the BIOPAC series
goniometers.
Each goniometer requires a DA100C amplifier, BN-GONIO or MP3X/45 analog input per rotational axis. Accordingly, the
twin axis goniometers will need two DA100C amplifiers, one BN-GONIO or two MP3X/45 analog channels to
simultaneously measure both rotational axes. The recommended excitation voltage is +5 VDC.
1. Place goniometer with care to verify that limb/joint/torso attachment will not result in over stretch at the limits
of limb/joint/torso movement.
2. Put body in the first position, which brackets one end of range of movement. Press CAL 1.
3. Put body in the second position, which brackets the other end of range of movement. Press CAL 2.
BIOPAC Hardware | Gonio-Torsio | Page 3 - 9
Updated: 10.21.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Specifications
Part #
MP1XX via DA100C
Telemetry TEL100C
MP36/36R/35/30/45
BioNomadix via BN-GONIO
Number of channels
Measuring range (degrees)
Dimensions mm
A. Maximum
A. Minimum
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Bend radius (mm) – min.
Weight (g)
1
Crosstalk
Nominal Output
Temperature Zero Drift
Cable length
TSD130A
SS20
SS20L
BN-GON-110XDCR
2
±150
TSD130B
SS21
SS21L
BN-GON-150XDCR
2
±150
TSD130C
SS22
SS22L
BN-TOR-110XDCR
1
±150
TSD130D
SS23
SS23L
BN-TOR-150XDCR
1
±150
TSD130E
SS24
SS24L
BN-GON-FXDCR
1
±150
110
150
110
170
35
70
100
70
115
30
60
70
60
70
18
18
18
18
18
8
54
54
54
54
15
20
20
20
20
8
9
9
9
9
5
18
18
18
18
3
23
25
22
23
8
±5%
±5%
N/A
N/A
N/A
5 µV/degree normalized to 1 V excitation
0.15 degrees angle / °C
6 meters for TSD130 Series/SS20L-24L, 1.8 meters for SS20-24, 10 cm for BNGON/BN-TOR
Cable end 9.4 mm, distal end 8.2 mm
Strain gauge
600,000 cycles minimum
±2° measured over 90° from neutral position
Better than ±1°
Infinite
+0° to +40° C
-20° C to +50° C
30% to 75%
Endblock height
Transducer type
2
Life
Accuracy
Repeatability
Analog resolution
Operating temp range
Storage temp range
Operating/Storage
humidity range
Atmospheric pressure range
Operation
700 hPa to 1060 hPa
Storage
500 hPa to 1060 hPa
1
Specification of crosstalk for all Biometrics twin-axis SG series of goniometers is measured over ±60°. i.e., if a joint is
moved through 60° from the neutral position in one plane without movement in the orthogonal plane, then the sensor
output in the orthogonal plane may change by a maximum ±3°.
2
Life test results have been collected by cycling the sensors through movements that would happen during everyday use.
For example, placing a sensor on an adult elbow and moving from the neutral position to maximum flexion and back to the
neutral position, the unit will function for a minimum of 600,000 cycles.
BIOPAC Hardware | Gonio-Torsio | Page 4 - 9
Updated: 10.21.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
OVERVIEW OF THE BIOPAC GONIOMETER SERIES
As with all measuring equipment, to correctly interpret the data, understanding the working principles (i.e., what the
sensor measures) before use is helpful. BIOPAC Systems, Inc. manufactures three types of sensors:
1.
The single axis finger goniometer
permits the measurement of angles in
one plane.
Angles are measured when rotating one
endblock relative to the other about axis
X-X.
The goniometer is not designed to
measure rotations about Y-Y. Any
attempt to bend the unit in this way
more than ± 20 from the neutral position
will result in a reduction of the life of
the unit or failure.
The goniometer does not measure rotations about axis Z-Z,
though this movement is permitted without reduced life or
damage occurring. This goniometer is designed primarily for
the measurement of finger and toe flexion/extension.
2.
The twin axis goniometers permit the
simultaneous measurement of angles in
two planes, e.g. wrist flexion / extension
and radial / ulnar deviation. Rotation of
one endblock relative to the other about
axis X-X is measured using the gray
plug. Similarly, rotation of one
endblock relative to the other about axis
Y-Y is measured using the blue marked
plug.
Assuming the goniometer is mounted correctly (as outlined here), the outputs of the two channels are
independent of linear displacements along axis Z-Z.
It should be noted that rotation of one endblock relative to the other around axis Z-Z cannot be measured.
These goniometers function in the same way, and differ only in size.
BIOPAC Hardware | Gonio-Torsio | Page 5 - 9
Updated: 10.21.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
3.
The single axis torsiometers permit the
measurement of rotation in one plane,
e.g. forearm pronation/supination.
Axial rotation of one endblock relative
to the other along axis Z-Z is measured
from the gray plug.
If the torsiometer is bent in planes X-X
or Y-Y, the output remains constant.
All torsiometers function in the same
way, and difference only in size.
WARNING!
Torsiometers measure rotations about ZZ in the range ± 90°.
Exceeding the range may result in a reduction of the life of the
unit or failure.
The working mechanism is the same for
all three types of sensors. There is a
composite wire between the two
endblocks that has a series of strain
inside the protective spring gauges
mounted around the circumference. As
the angle between the two ends changes,
the change in strain along the length of
the wire is measured and this is equated
to an angle. The design is such that only
angular displacements are measured.
If the two ends move linearly relative to
each other, within the limits of telescopic
endblock, without changing the relative
angles between them, then the outputs
remain constant.
The amount of strain induced in the
gauges is inversely proportional to the
bend radius that the beam is bent around.
If the stated minimum permissible bend
radius is exceeded then unit life will be
reduced or, in severe cases, failure may
result.
BIOPAC Hardware | Gonio-Torsio | Page 6 - 9
Updated: 10.21.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SIGN CONVENTIONS
The sign convention for certain joints will differ, depending which side of the body the sensor is attached to. The
following figures show sign conventions for the most common joints.
BIOPAC Hardware | Gonio-Torsio | Page 7 - 9
Updated: 10.21.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
WRIST – Goniometer TSD130A/SS20L/SS20/BN-GON-110-XDCR
Attach the telescopic endblock to the back of the hand, with the center axis of
the hand and endblock coincident (top of figure — viewed in the frontal plane).
While fully flexing the wrist (middle and bottom of figure), extend the
goniometer to Position 2 (as shown on page 2) and attach the fixed endblock to
the forearm so that when viewed from the dorsal plane, the axes of the forearm
and endblock are coincident. The wrist may now be flexed or extended,
abducted or adducted, with the goniometer freely sliding between Positions 1
and 2. Measurement of flexion/extension is obtained from the gray plug, and
abduction/adduction is obtained from the blue plug.
ARTICULAR COMPLEX OF THE FOOT – Goniometer TSD130A/SS20L/SS20/BN-GON-110-XDCR
Attach the telescopic endblock to the back of the heel.
Extend the ankle to the maximum extension anticipated during measurement,
and attach the fixed endblock to the posterior of the leg, with the goniometer in
Position 1 (maximum length, as shown on page 2) so that the axes of the leg
endblock are coincident.
Flexion/extension of the ankle may now be monitored using the gray plug and
pronation/supination using the blue marked plug.
ELBOW – Goniometer TSD130B/SS21L/SS21/BN-GON-150-XDCR
Attach the telescopic endblock to the forearm with the center axis of the
endblock coincident with the center axis of the forearm. With the elbow fully
extended, move the goniometer to Position 2 (maximum length, as shown on
page 2) and attach the fixed endblocks to the upper arm, with the center of the
endblock and the center axis of the upper arm coincident.
Now the elbow may be fully extended with the telescopic endblock freely
sliding between Positions 1 and 2. Measurement of flexion/extension is
obtained from the blue marked plug, and the gray plug is redundant. Note that
the telescopic endblock is mounted on the half of the forearm nearest to the
elbow joint. Movements of pronation and supination may be made and will
affect the measurement of flexion/extension by a small amount.
HIP – Goniometer TSD130B/SS21L/SS21//BN-GON-150-XDCR
Attach the fixed endblock to the side of the trunk in the pelvic region. With the
limb in the position of reference, extend the goniometer to Position 2
(maximum length, as shown on page 2) and attach the telescopic endblock to
the thigh, so that axes of the thigh and endblock coincide (when viewed in the
sagittal plane, as shown).
The thigh may now be flexed or extended, abducted or adducted, with the
goniometer sliding freely between Positions 1 and 2. Measurements of
flexion/extension are obtained from the blue marked, and abduction/adduction
from the gray plug.
BIOPAC Hardware | Gonio-Torsio | Page 8 - 9
Updated: 10.21.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
KNEE – Goniometer TSD130B/SS21L/SS21/BN-GON-150-XDCR
Mount the telescopic endblock laterally on the leg so the axes of the leg and
endblock coincide, when viewed in the sagittal plane. With the leg fully
extended in the position of reference, extend the goniometer to Position 2
(maximum length, as shown on page 2) and attach the fixed endblock to the
thigh so the axes of the thigh and endblock coincide.
The knee may now be flexed or extended with the goniometer freely sliding
between Positions 1 and 2. Measurements of flexion/extension may be
monitored using the blue marked plug and varus/valgus may be monitored
using the gray plug.
FOREARM PRONATION /SUPINATION – Torsiometer TSD130C/SS22L/SS22/BN-TOR-110-XDCR or
TSD130D/SS23L/SS23/BN-TOR-150-XDCR
Attach the two endblocks of the torsiometer to the forearm, with the slider
mechanism approximately midway between the two extremes.
Measurements of pronation/supination may now be made from the gray plug.
Movements of wrist flexion/extension or radial/ulnar deviation will not affect
the output.
FINGERS AND TOES –Goniometer TSD130E/SS24L/SS24/BNGON-F-XDCR
The single axis goniometer is intended for use on fingers and toes. Angles
are measured by rotating one endblock relative to the other about axis XX (as shown on page 2).
The goniometer is not designed to measure rotations about Y-Y. Any attempt to bend the unit in this way more than
+/-20° from the neutral position will result in reduced unit life or failure. The goniometer does not measure rotations
about the axis Z-Z.
The unit is designed to fit over the joint to be measured and has extremely high flexibility to ensure the instrument does
not interfere with normal joint movement. One endblock is attached either side of the joint.
Unlike other BIOPAC Goniometers and Torisometers, and “Z” series sensors, an “oxbow” shape is permitted in the
measuring element. This is not detrimental to the results and does not reduce life of sensor. Care should be taken,
however, that the minimum bend radius is not exceeded.
BIOPAC Hardware | Gonio-Torsio | Page 9 - 9
Updated: 10.21.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
TSD160 SERIES – HIGH SENSITIVITY DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
The TSD160 series differential pressure transducers are designed for low range pressure monitoring. The
transducers plug directly into the DA100C general-purpose differential amplifier. The differential pressure ports
are located on the front of the transducers and are easily connected to breathing circuits, pneumotachs or
plethysmograph boxes. These transducers are very useful for interfacing a variety of small animal pneumotachs or
plethysmographs to the MP System. The transducers are extremely sensitive and come in three ranges to suit a
number of different applications. RX137 heads connect to the TSD160A differential pressure transducer via
standard 3 mm or 4 mm ID tubing.
TSD160 SERIES SPECIFICATIONS
Part
Operational Pressure:
Overpressure
(max):
Voltage Output
(normalized to 1 v
excitation
TSD160A
±2.5 cm
H2O
±250 cm
H2O
327.5
µV/cm H2O
Warm-up Drift:
Stability: ±100µV
Operating Temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Combined Linearity
and Hysteresis Error:
Dynamic Response:
Connection Ports:
Dimensions:
Weight: 76
Interface: DA100C
TSD160B
±12.5 cm
H2O
±380 cm
H2O
131 µV/cm
H2O
TSD160C
±25 cm
H2O
±380 cm
H2O
65.5 µV/cm
H2O
TSD160D
±75 cm
H2O
±700 cm
H2O
21.9 µV/cm
H2O
TSD160E
±350 cm
H2O
±700 cm
H2O
14.22
µV/cm H2O
TSD160F
±1,000 cm
H2O
±4,200 cm
H2O
7.11 µV/cm
H2O
±50µV
0°C to +50°C (compensated)
-40°C to +125°C
±0.05%
100 Hz
Accepts 3 mm to 4.5 mm ID tubing
8.3 cm (high) x 3.8 cm (wide) x 3.2 cm (deep)
g
TSD160 SERIES CALIBRATION
See also: DA100C Calibration options.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD160 Series | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 6.5.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
VIBROMYOGRAPHY SYSTEMS & TRANSDUCERS
Complete VMG System (WSW Windows, WS Mac)
Everything required to record and analyze VMG Data
VMG System with MP150 System
with MP36R System
2-chan nel
VMG102WSW or WS
VMG36R2WSW or WS
4-chan nel
VMG104WSW or WS
VMG36R4WSW or WS
VMG Transducer only
Stand-alone VMG transducers to extend existing systems
Large muscle TSD25
0
Facial muscle
TSD251
VMG Transducer & License Pack (-W Win, -M Mac)
Add VMG to an existing MP Research System
For MP150
VMG150PACK-W or -M
For MP36R VMG36RPACK-W
or -M
BIOPAC Vibromygraphy (VMG) solutions allow researchers to study muscle performance and strength balance
using precision microelectromechanical (MEMS) accelerometers, about the size of a quarter, and advanced signal
analysis algorithms to monitor muscle vibration. The transducer and software algorithm are optimized for
assessing voluntary muscle effort (Type IIb muscle fiber activity).
Transducers are secured over the muscle belly and record the small vibrations that occur when the muscle is
activated. The transducer includes band-pass filtering to eliminate most motion artifacts including physiologic
tremor. AcqKnowledge software automated VMG Analysis uses wavelet packet analysis to simplify the analysis
process and extract the vibrational components that correlate with the effort generated by the muscle being
studied.
VMG Benefits
 Ability to perform muscle balance assessments
 Improved subject comfort
 Improved reproducibility between muscles and individuals
 No electrodes
 Convenient setup
 No skin preparation
 Reduced setup time
VMG provides extremely reproducible results. The single sensor solution and the lack of skin preparation
improve the reliability and reproducibility of muscle effort recordings between muscles and across subjects. One
major benefit of being able to compare results between muscles and between subjects is the ability to perform
muscle balance assessments.
 See videos, Application Notes, and Publications at www.biopac.com/vibromyography-vmg-muscle-activity.
Vibromyography Transducers
Vibromyography sensors incorporate a sensitive MEMS accelerometer and are intended for use with a BIOPAC
Vibromyography System. Transducers are available as a stand-alone item or to augment an existing VMG system.
 TSD250 is a larger sensor (3.8 cm dia) for measuring absolute muscle
force from substantial muscle groups, such as leg muscles.
 TSD251 is a smaller sensor (1.8 cm dia) sensor that reliably permits
measurement from absolute muscle force from small, superficial
muscles, such as facial muscles.
The VMG transducer integrates a low noise accelerometer with low and high pass filtering and pre-amplification.
The transducer operates in differential mode in order to achieve superior noise reduction, delivering two channels
of vibration data along a three meter cable to a converter unit which both converts the signal to single-ended mode
and adapts the VMG signal appropriately for use with the BIOPAC Research platform.
VMG transducers are compatible with both the MP150 and MP36R systems and include dual output connectors to
connect to the HLT100C for MP150 Systems or directly to an MP36R System. Up to 16 VMG transducers can be
attached per MP150 System and up to four VMG transducers can be connected per MP36R System.
BIOPAC Hardware | VMG Systems | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 10.8.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Optimal results are achieved by holding the transducer against the skin with an elastic or athletic wrap using
moderate pressure. Either surface of the transducer can be placed against the skin surface; the convex surface may
facilitate use on a concave surface. Transducer can be secured with a variety of attachment methods (not
included), such as double-sided adhesive, Ace® bandages and Nylatex® wraps (6 cm - 10 cm width suggested).
Do not use excessive pressure in securing the transducers—snug enough not to move is adequate.
VMG Specifications
Complete System Components
Data Acquisition System
VMG Transducers
VMG License
VMG Transducer Specifications
Sensor
Type:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Inline-amplifier/converter
Dimensions (L x W x H):
Weig
ht
Operational Frequency Range:
Output:
Gain Constant:
Voltage Noise Floor:
Sensitivity:
Temperature Range:
Maximum Shock:
Cables:
Termination (dual connectors):
Interface:
Minimum sampling rate:
Choose MP150 System and HLT100C High Level Transfer Interface
or MP36R System (no transducer interface required, direct connection)
Choose TSD250 or TSD251 - two for 2-channel, four for 4-channel
AcqKnowledge VMG License Key
TSD250
Sonostics VMG BPS-II
38 mm (dia) x 20 mm (high)
15 grams
TSD251
Sonostics VMG BPS-IIm
18 mm octagon (dia) x 8.5 mm (high)
2 grams
88 mm x 41 mm x 20 mm
35 grams
20-200 Hz
MP150: ±10 V
MP36R: ±0.2 V
MP150: 50 V/g
MP36R: 1 V/g
MP150: 16 mV (rms)
MP36R: 0.32 mV (rms)
0.32 mg (rms)
0 - 50° C
2000 g
Sensor to conditioning module: 30 cm, flat
Conditioning module to BIOPAC platform: 3 m, round, shielded
RJ-25 M (6-pin) to HLT100C and DSUB9 M 9-pin to MP36R
MP150: via HLT100C
MP36R: direct connection to CH analog input
Sample acquisition rate must be set to 2000 Hz for proper operation of
the VMG algorithm.
VMG License
Ac
qKnowledge VMG License Key
VMG functionality is available in AcqKnowledge 4.1.1 or above via
License Key Activation. The VMG License must be authorized to
access VMG functionality. The VMG License:
 adds “Vibromyography” Calculation channel Preset with required
scaling and calibration
 adds “Vibromyography Filter” option under the Analysis menu
 includes graph template QuickStart Q45 Vibromyography (.gtl)
Transducer & License Pack Components Adds VMG Measurement & Analysis to existing MP Systems
VMG Transducer (1)
TSD250 or TSD251 as specified
Ac
qKnowledge VMG License Key
VMG License Authorization; requires AcqKnowledge 4.1.1 or above
BIOPAC Hardware | VMG Systems | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 10.8.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TCI SERIES TRANSDUCER CONNECTOR INTERFACES
TCI interface options
TCI to DA100C Connection
The transducer connector interfaces (TCIs) adapt a variety of transducer types to the DA100C module. The front
of the TCI contains the appropriate connector while the rear has seven 2 mm pin jacks which plug directly into the
DA100C. Probes and transducers normally used with Grass, Beckman, World Precision Instruments and
Lafayette Instrument’s equipment can be used directly with the DA100C when used with the appropriate
transducer connector interface.
The TCIs match the DA100C to the transducer brands listed below. If no existing connector matches the required
equipment, BIOPAC will build a special TCI for users, or users can use the TCIKIT to build their own. Please call
or write BIOPAC with specific needs.
TCI100
Grass/Astromed transducers – 6 pin
TCI101
Beckman transducers – 5 pin
TCI102
World Precision Instrument transducers – 8 pin
TCI103
Lafayette Instrument transducers – 9 pin
TCI104
Honeywell transducers – 6 pin
TCI105
Modular phone jack connector – 4 pin (also used to interface NIBP100A and NIBP100D)
TCI106
Beckman transducers – 12 pin
TCI107
Nihon Koden transducers – 5 pin
TCI108
Narco transducers – 7 pin
TCI109
Fukuda transducers – 8 pin
TCI110
Gould transducers – 12 pin: Discontinued  use Fogg Cable and an available BIOPAC TCI
TCI111A
Liquid metal transducers – 1.5 mm Touchproof male plugs (two)
TCI112
Hokanson transducers – 4 pin
TCI113
Hugo-Sachs/Harvard Apparatus – 6 pin
TCI114
BIOPAC SS Series Transducers – 9 pin
TCI115
Interface XLR Microphone
TCIPPG1 PPG100C amplifier to Geer Photo-electric (IR) plethysmogram transducer – 7 pin
TCIKIT/C Build a customized adapter
BIOPAC Hardware | TCI Series | Page 1 - 7
Updated: 6.11.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
TCI100 GRASS TRANSDUCER
INTERFACE
Pin
TCI101 BECKMAN TRANSDUCER
INTERFACE
Pin
TCI102 WPI TRANSDUCER
INTERFACE
Pin
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Signal
1
VREF2 (Set to -1 V)
2 VIN3 VIN+
4
VREF1 (Set to +1 V)
6 GND
Connector ITT
Cannon WK-F-32S
Typical VREF ±1 V
Signal
A VINB VIN+
C
VREF1 (Set to +1 V)
D
VREF2 (Set to -1 V)
E GND
Connector ITT
Cannon CA-3102-E-14S-5S
Typical VREF ±1 V
1
2 VIN+
3 VIN4
Connector
Typical VREF
Signal
VREF1 (Set to +5 V)
VREF2 (Set to -5 V)
CUI Stack SDS-80J
±5 V
BIOPAC Hardware | TCI Series | Page 2 - 7
Updated: 6.11.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
TCI103 LAFAYETTE
TRANSDUCER INTERFACE
Pin
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Signal
C
VREF2 (Set to -5 V)
E GROU
ND
H VIN+
K
VREF1 (Set to +5 V)
Connector Am
phenol 12F-013
Typical VREF ± 5 V
TCI104 HONEYWELL
TRANSDUCER INTERFACE
Pin
Signal
1
VREF2 (Set to -1 V)
2 VIN3 VIN+
4
VREF1 (Set to +1 V)
5 GND
Connector ITT
Cannon WK-F-32S
Typical VREF ±1 V
TCI105 PHONE PLUG (RJ-11)
TRANSDUCER INTERFACE
Pin
Signal
1
VREF1 (Set to +3 V)
2 VIN
+
3 VIN
–
4
VREF2 (Set to -3 V)
Connector RJ-11
Phone plug
Typical VREF ±2 V DC
BIOPAC Hardware | TCI Series | Page 3 - 7
Updated: 6.11.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
TCI106 BECKMAN (12-PIN)
TRANSDUCER INTERFACE
B
C
H
K
L
N
M
K
N
Signal
Pin
Signal
A VIN
+
B VIN
–
C
VREF2 (-1 V)
D
VREF1 (+1 V)
E Ground
Connector Am
phenol 165-12
Typical VREF ±1 V
A
E
F
L
D
J
B
C
H
A
E
F
Pin
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
D
J
M
TCI107 NIHON KOHDEN
TRANSDUCER INTERFACE
2 VIN+
3
VREF1 (+1 V)
4
VREF2 (-1 V)
5 VIN
–
Connector JAE
SRC-02A13-5S
Typical VREF ±1 V
TCI108 NARCO (7-PIN)
TRANSDUCER INTERFACE
Pin
1 VIN+
2 VIN
4
5
6
7
Connector Am
Typical VREF
Signal
–
GND
(connect 1,600-ohm resistor between pins 5 and 7)
VREF1 (+1 V)
VREF2 (-1 V)
phenol 703-91T-3478-009
±1 V
BIOPAC Hardware | TCI Series | Page 4 - 7
Updated: 6.11.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
TCI109 FUKUDA TRANSDUCER
INTERFACE
Pin
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Signal
1 VIN+
3 VIN6
VREF2 (-1 V)
7
VREF1 (+1 V)
Connector Hirsh
mann MAS 8100
Typical VREF ±1 V
TCI110 GOULD TRANSDUCER
INTERFACE
TCI111A LIQUID METAL
TRANSDUCER INTERFACE
Discontinued – see options online
Connector:
Signal
A (top)
XDCR
B (bottom)
XDCR
Connector Type: 1.5 mm Touchproof male plugs (accepts 1.5 mm
Touchproof female socket XDCRs)
The TCI111A comes with an attached 3 meter cable that terminates
in two Touchproof 1.5 mm male plugs for connecting to two 1.5 mm
Touchproof 1.5 mm female sockets for Mercury (old style) or
Indium Gallium liquid metal strain gauges.
TCI112 HOKANSON TRANSDUCER
INTERFACE
Pin
12 3 4
Signal
+
1 Iex
2
VIN +
–
3 VIN
–
4 Iex
Connector RJ-11
Phone plug
Typical Iex: 5 mA
BIOPAC Hardware | TCI Series | Page 5 - 7
Updated: 6.11.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
TCI113 HUGO SACHS/HARVARD
APPARATUS INTERFACE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Six-pin female:
TCI114 BIOPAC SS SERIES INTERFACE
TCI115 INTERFACE XLR MICROPHONE
TCIPPG1 PPG—GEER TRANSDUCER
INTERFACE
Pin
Signal
A
not used
B
not used
C
not used
D
Ground
E
VIN +
F
+5 Vex
G
not used
Connector Am
phenol 7-pin
BIOPAC Hardware | TCI Series | Page 6 - 7
Updated: 6.11.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TCIKIT AND TCIKITC CUSTOM INTERFACE KITS
Build custom transducer connector interfaces for DA100C amplifier modules.


TCIKIT do-it-yourself kit includes housing, PC board with 7 attached PIN plugs (2 mm) and
instructions. The kit comes partially assembled. Mount a connector to the housing and solder wires to the
pins.
TCIKITC is used to connect non-BIOPAC electrodes and transducers directly to BIOPAC biopotential
or transducer amplifier modules.
The TCI case has two connector holes on the front, 0.44” and 0.75” in diameter. These sizes should accommodate
most connectors. The aluminum label is intended to cover up the unused hole. Color-coded wires have been
soldered to each of the seven DA100C input pins. They are connected as shown above.
ADAPTING THE TCI
The following instructions are for adapting the TCI for any particular connection. A “Bulkhead Mount” connector
is the best type of connector to use.
1. Remove four screws from back of TCI so that the TCI PC board and case are separate.
2. Remove four connector-mounting screws from TCI case and set aside.
3. Check to see that the connector fits the TCI case. If not, the smaller (0.44”) hole can be enlarged using a hole
enlarging drill bit.
4. Clip off unused wires from the TCI PC board. Be very careful not to clip the ones that will be used.
5. Note that most connectors must be mounted from the outside of the case. This means that the wires should
first be routed through the appropriate hole, and then soldered to the connector.
6. Solder the appropriate wires to the connector.
CAUTION! When soldering wires or components on the TCI PC board, be very careful not to desolder the
pre-aligned pin plugs—albeit might not be possible to get them straight if they are inadvertently
desoldered.
7. Bolt the connector to the case using the supplied 4-40 screws and nuts.
8. Bolt the TCI PC board to the TCI case.
9. Cover unused hole with supplied label.
BIOPAC Hardware | TCI Series | Page 7 - 7
Updated: 6.11.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BIOPAC AMPLIFIER OVERVIEW
BIOPAC Amplifier Modules
The 100C series biopotential/transducer amplifier modules are single channel, differential input, linear amplifiers
with adjustable offset and gain. These modules are used to amplify smaller voltage signals coming from raw
electrodes and transducers (typically less than ±0.01 volt). In addition to amplifying signals, most of the 100C
series modules include selectable signal conditioning ability so that data may be filtered or transformed as it is
being collected.
• Biopotential modules: ECG100C, EEG100C, EGG100C, EMG100C, EOG100C, ERS100C
• Transducer modules: EDA100C; PPG100C; RSP100C; SKT100C
• MRI Smart modules—advanced signal processing circuitry removes spurious MRI artifact from the
source physiological data: ECG100C-MRI; EDA100C-MRI; EEG100C-MRI; EMG100C-MRI;
PPG100C-MRI.
Modules can be cascaded by snapping the modules together. Up to sixteen 100C series modules can be connected
to the MP System at any one time.
IMPORTANT
When cascading modules, it is important to remember that no two amplifiers may be set to the same channel. If
two connected amplifier modules are left on the same channel, then contention will result and both amplifier
outputs will give erroneous readings.
AMPLIFIER GLOSSARY
Amplifier offset Set by the zero adjust control trim potentiometer near the top of the module.
The offset control can be used to adjust the zero point or “baseline” of a signal.
Gain Switch
The four-position slide Gain switch controls sensitivity. Lower gain settings will amplify the
signal to a lesser extent than higher gain settings. If the signal plotted on the screen appears to
be very small for a given channel, increase the Gain for that particular channel. Conversely, if
the signal seems to be “cropped” at +10 Volts or −10 Volts, decrease the Gain.
Connections
Transducers and electrodes connect to the amplifiers using Touchproof connectors.
BIOPAC Hardware | Amplifier Modules | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 11.19.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
Electrodes
Leads
Transducers
Channel
Zero Adjust
Setup
Filters
Line Freq
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
The biopotential amplifier modules use a three-electrode arrangement (VIN+, GND, VIN−).
Although certain applications may require different arrangements of electrodes and/or
transducers, some generalizations about electrode and transducer connections can be made.
Electrodes measure the electrical activity at the surface of the skin, and since electricity flows
from – to +, measuring the flow of a signal requires that there be (at least) one “-” electrode and
(at least) one “+” electrode. An additional electrode, a “ground” (or earth) electrode is used to
control for the general level of electrical activity in the body.
Typically, electrode leads are used to connect individual electrodes to the xxx100C amplifier.
Most electrode leads are shielded, which means they introduce less noise than an unshielded
lead. A shielded electrode lead has an extra jack on one end that plugs into the SHIELD input
on the amplifier modules. A standard electrode lead configuration consists of two LEAD110S
electrode leads (one connected to the VIN + input and one to the VIN – input on the amplifier)
and a single LEAD110 (connected to the GND input on a biopotential amplifier).
Transducers, on the other hand, are not designed to measure electrical activity directly and
usually involve simpler connections. The transducers discussed in this manual translate
physical changes (in temperature, for instance) into electrical signals. Connections for
individual transducers are discussed in each section.
The active channel is selected using the channel select switch on the top of the module. The
channel select switch can direct the amplifier output to one of sixteen possible MP System
input channels. Remember to make sure that each amplifier module is set to a unique channel.
On input signals, a limited range in baseline level (DC offset) can be “zeroed out” using the
zero adjust potentiometer. Typically, the zero adjust will not have to be used (as it is preset at
the factory). However, some of the 100C series modules can measure DC signals and, in certain
circumstances, signal “zeroing” may be required.
All 100C Series biopotential or transducer amplifiers incorporate specific gain, coupling and
filtering options that are appropriate for the biopotential type or transducer signal that requires
measurement. Generally, when an electrode or transducer is inserted into the corresponding
100C series module, the amplifier will immediately produce a useful output, with no user
adjustments necessary.
Certain functionality is added to each module to optimize its performance with its intended
signal measurement. For example, all 100C series biopotential amplifiers incorporate a
selectable interference filter. When the interference filter is on, 50/60 Hz interfering signals are
suppressed.
All 100C series amplifiers are constructed with filters that have a high degree of phase linearity.
This means the 100C series modules will filter signals with as little distortion as possible. These
modules also incorporate protection circuitry to limit input current in the event of input signal
overload. Notch and bandstop filters have the potential to cause distortion, especially in the
form of "ringing" in the data stream; biopotential hardware notch filters are implemented in
conjunction with LP or HP functions to minimize distortion.
Line Frequency is set using the recessed switch boxes on the back of the amplifier module (50
Hz = all switches down, 60 Hz = all switches up). It is important to select the correct line
frequency for your geographical region. Typically, U.S. line frequency is 60 Hz; Europe and
China 50 Hz. Contact BIOPAC for additional line frequency information. All MP biopotential
amplifier modules which contain a 50/60 Hz notch filter only engage the filter when the pass
filter is also ON:
• ECG100C, EEG100C, EOG100C amplifiers: the 50/60 Hz notch is only engaged when
the 35 Hz LPN low pass notch filter switch is set to ON.
• EMG100C, ERS100C amplifiers: the 50/60 HZ notch is only engaged when the 100 Hz
HPN high pass notch filter switch is set to ON.
See individual module sections for details.
BIOPAC Hardware | Amplifier Modules | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 11.19.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ECG100C – ELECTROCARDIOGRAM AMPLIFIER MODULE
The electrocardiogram amplifier module (ECG100C) is a single channel, high gain, differential input, biopotential
amplifier designed specifically for monitoring the heart’s electrical activity, and for use in the following
applications:
Conventional electrocardiogram (12-lead ECG)
Einthoven’s triangle potential measurement (3-lead ECG)
Transverse-plane ECG measurement (V1 through V6)
Vectorcardiogram measurement
Chaos investigations (heart rate variability)
Heart arrhythmia analysis
Exercise physiology studies
The ECG100C will connect directly to any of BIOPAC Systems, Inc.’s series of Ag-AgCl lead electrodes. The
best choice for electrodes depends on the application, but typically the EL500 series (i.e., EL501, EL502, EL503)
of adhesive/disposable snap electrodes are used in conjunction with the LEAD110/LEAD110S pinch lead. If
reusable electrodes are required, the EL258 is typically used; when using EL258 electrodes, adhesive disks
(ADD208) and electrode gel (GEL100) are also needed. Use two shielded electrodes (EL258S) for the signal
inputs and one unshielded electrode (EL258S) for the ground.
The ECG100C has built in drive capability for use with shielded electrode leads. If high bandwidth (resolution)
ECG measurements are required, then shielded electrode leads are recommended. When the interference filter is
switched on, shielded leads are typically not necessary. The ECG100C is designed to pass the ECG signal (P, Q,
R, S, T waves) with minimal distortion.
R-WAVE DETECTOR FUNCTION
The ECG100C has an additional R-wave detector
function. When enabled, the output signal will
produce a smoothed positive peak every time the
R-wave is detected.
This graph illustrates ECG data recorded with the
ECG100C. The top waveform is a raw ECG wave,
and the bottom waveform is the same signal
processed using the R-wave detector in the
ECG100C module.
This function is extremely useful for rate
calculations when a well-defined peak is desired.
Enabling the R-wave detector is useful for calculating BPM and IBI, as it tends to remove any components of the
waveform that might be mistaken for peaks.
The R-wave detector circuitry consists of:
 17 Hz band pass filter with Q = 5
 Full wave rectifier
 10.0 Hz, three pole, low pass filter with Q = 0.707
These settings are optimized for ECG data sampled at 250 Hz or faster. For data sampled at less than 250 Hz, the
low pass filter might be set to 5 Hz.
RECORDING A 12-LEAD ECG
 For full, simultaneous, 12-lead ECG recording, eight ECG100C amplifiers are required, along with a
WT100C Wilson Terminal. Two of the ECG100C are used to simultaneous record Leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL
and aVF, while the remaining six ECG100C are used to generate the six precordial leads.
 To perform a standard 12-lead ECG recording using only three ECG100C amplifiers, use the TSD155C.
The TSD155C multi-lead ECG cable is 3 meters long and incorporates a built-in Wilson Terminal for
simultaneous recording of Leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF and one (movable) precordial lead [V1, V2, V3,
V4, V5 or V6].
BIOPAC Hardware | ECG100C | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 6.25.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
CONNECTIONS
RIGHT
This figure shows the electrode connections to
the ECG100C for the measurement of Lead I.
Signals from this electrode montage can be used
to calculate BPM (or IBI) and general-purpose
ECG applications.
LEFT
ZERO
ADJ
GAIN
500
1000
2000
5000
EL503
R WAV
NORM
ON
FILTER
OFF
ON
HIPASS
OFF
SHIELD
VIN+
GND
VINSHIELD
ECG100
LEAD100
LEAD100S
This figure shows the electrode connections to
two ECG100C modules for recording a standard
two lead ECG (Lead I and Lead III). Although
only two channels are directly acquired, Lead II
can be computed (either on-line or after the fact)
by summing Lead I and Lead III. For this setup,
the GND input on Lead I is internally connected
to the GND input on Lead III, and the VIN+ on
Lead I is connected to the VIN- on Lead III via a
JUMP100C jumper lead.
RIGHT
ZERO
ADJ
ZERO
ADJ
GAIN
500
1000
2000
5000
GAIN
500
1000
2000
5000
R WAV
R WAV
NORM
NORM
ON
FILTER
OFF
ON
FILTER
OFF
ON
HIPASS
OFF
SHIELD
VIN+
GND
ON
HIPASS
OFF
VIN+
GND
VIN-
SHIELD
SHIELD
JUMP100
EL503
SHIELD
VIN-
ECG100
LEFT
ECG100
LEAD100
LEAD100S
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
The ECG100C includes a high pass filter that is used to stabilize the ECG baseline. When the HP switch is set to
0.5 Hz, P and T wave amplitudes will be reduced somewhat, but the QRS wave will be virtually unchanged. The
HP switch is usually ON when using the ECG100C for rate measurements only or when monitoring the ECG of
an active subject.
The 0.05 Hz and 0.5 Hz lower frequency response high pass filter settings are single pole roll-off filters.
Modules can be set for 50 Hz or 60 Hz notch options to match the wall-power line frequency of the destination
country. The proper setting reduces noise from interfering signals when the notch filter is engaged. Generally,
wall-power line frequency is 60 Hz in the United States and 50 Hz in most of Europe and China; if necessary
contact BIOPAC to determine the correct line frequency. To reset the line frequency setting, adjust the bank of
switches on the back of the amplifier module.
The 50/60 Hz notch is only engaged when the 35 Hz LPN filter switch on the ECG100C amplifer is set to ON.
BIOPAC Hardware | ECG100C | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 6.25.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Line Frequency switch bank is on the back of the amplifier
50 Hz
60 Hz
Both switches
DOWN
Both switches
UP
See also: Sample frequency response plots: 35 Hz LPN option (with 50 Hz notch enabled), 150 Hz LP option, and
35 Hz LPN option (with 60 Hz notch enabled)
ECG100C CALIBRATION
The ECG100C is factory set and does not require calibration. To confirm the accuracy of the device, use the
CBLCALC.
ECG100C SPECIFICATIONS
Gain:
500, 1000, 2000, 5000
Output Selection:
Normal, R-wave indicator
Output Range:
±10 V (analog)
Frequency Response Maximum bandwidth (.05 Hz – 150 Hz)
Low Pass Filter: 35 Hz, 150 Hz
High Pass Filter: 0.05 Hz, 1.0 Hz
Notch Filter:
50 dB rejection @ 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Noise Voltage:
0.1 µV rms – (0.05-35 Hz)
Signal Source:
Electrodes (three electrode leads required)
Z (input)
Differential:
2 MΩ
Common mode: 1000 MΩ
CMRR:
110 dB min (50/60 Hz); see also: Shield Drive Operation
CMIV–referenced to Amplifier ground: ±10 V
Mains ground: ±1500 VDC
Input Voltage Range: Gain
Vin (mV)
500
20
1000
±10
2000
±5
5000
±2
Weight:
350 grams
Dimensions:
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
Input Connectors:
Five 1.5 mm male Touchproof sockets (Vin+, Ground, Vin-, 2 of shield)
See also: JUMP100C and MEC series
BIOPAC Hardware | ECG100C | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 6.25.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD155C MULTI-LEAD ECG CABLE
To record 12-lead ECG with a movable chest lead, use the TSD155C
The TSD155C multi-lead ECG cable is 3 meters long and
incorporates a built-in Wilson Terminal for simultaneous recording
of Leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF and one (movable) precordial lead
[V1, V2, V3, V4, V5 or V6].
The TSD155C is used for performing a standard
12-lead ECG recording using only 3 ECG100C amplifiers.
See also: TEL100 Compatibility: SS29
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD155C | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 4.18.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
WT100C WILSON TERMINAL FOR THE ECG100C
The WT100C is used to create a virtual reference electrode when measuring the transverse plane (i.e., precordial)
ECG components [V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, and V6]. The virtual reference is created by the summation of the Right
Arm (RA), Left Arm (LA) and Left Leg (LL) electrode leads. To measure all six transverse plane components, six
ECG100C amplifiers are required. Use five of the JUMP100C jumper connectors to tie together the reference
(Vin-) inputs of these amplifiers. This common reference connects to the virtual reference created by the
WT100C.
MP Research System | WT100C | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.13.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
EEG100C – ELECTROENCEPHALOGRAM AMPLIFIER MODULE
The electroencephalogram amplifier module (EEG100C) is a single-channel, high-gain, differential input,
biopotential amplifier designed specifically for monitoring the neuronal activity of the brain. The EEG100C is
designed for use in the following applications:
Conventional EEG (16 channel, unipolar or bipolar)
Sleep studies
Epilepsy investigations
Evoked responses
Tumor pathology studies
Cognition studies
The EEG100C will connect directly to any of BIOPAC Systems, Inc.’s series of Ag-AgCl lead electrodes.
Typically, EL503 electrodes are recommended for evoked response measurements. Use two shielded electrodes
(LEAD110S) for the signal inputs and one unshielded electrode (LEAD110) for ground. If hair is present,
disposable electrodes don’t work very well for scalp attachment—add electrode gel (GEL100) and tape the
electrode lightly in place or use a conductive adhesive paste (like Ten20® or Collodion HV®).
The EEG100C has built-in drive capability for use with shielded electrode leads. If high bandwidth (resolution)
EEG measurements are required, then shielded electrode leads are recommended. When the interference filter is
switched on, shielded leads are typically not necessary.
This module is designed to pass the EEG signal ranges (Delta, Theta, Alpha, Beta, and Gamma) with minimal
distortion. In addition, the EEG100C has a built-in Alpha wave detector. When enabled, the output signal will
produce a smoothed wave with peaks that indicate points of maximum Alpha activity. The Alpha wave detector
consists of a highly selective, six pole, 8-13 Hz bandpass filter, followed by a full wave rectifier, followed by a
6Hz, three pole, low pass filter. The EEG100C is capable of measuring Slow Cortical Potentials, down to 0.005
Hz in frequency (32 second time constant).
BIPOLAR EEG ELECTRODE PLACEMENT
ZERO
ADJ
GAIN
5000
10000
20000
50000
ALPHA
NORM
ON
FILTER
OFF
SHIELD
VIN+
GND
VINSHIELD
EEG100
EEG waveform with eyes closed then opened
Bipolar connection to the occipital lobe
The illustration above shows a bipolar connection to the occipital lobe; to make a unipolar connection, relocate
the VIN- electrode to the earlobe (where GND is attached). The graph indicates the change in the occipital EEG
when eyes are closed and opened. The data is shown compressed, but can easily be expanded to show waveform
differences in greater detail.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
The 0.005 Hz high pass and 0.5 Hz high pass lower frequency response settings are single pole, roll-off filters.
Modules can be set for 50 Hz or 60 Hz notch options to match the wall-power line frequency of the destination
country. The proper setting reduces noise from interfering signals when the notch filter is engaged. Generally,
wall-power line frequency is 60 Hz in the United States and 50 Hz in most of Europe and China; if necessary
contact BIOPAC to determine the appropriate line frequency. To reset the line frequency setting, adjust the bank
of switches on the back of the amplifier module (as shown on the next page).
The 50/60 Hz notch is only engaged when the 35 Hz LPN filter switch on the EEG100C amplifier is set to ON.
BIOPAC Hardware | EEG100C | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 8.12.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
FREQUENCY RESPONSE, CONT’D
See also: Frequency response Plots
35 Hz LPN (with 50 Hz notch enabled)
35 Hz LPN (with 60 Hz notch)
100 Hz LP option
Line Frequency switch bank is on the back of the amplifier
50 Hz
Both switches
DOWN
60 Hz
Both switches
UP
EEG100C CALIBRATION
The EEG100C is factory set and does not require calibration. To confirm the accuracy of the device, use the
CBLCALC.
Hardware settings are based on line frequency, which varies by country. To confirm that line frequency is set
correctly for the country, check the switches on the back panel of the amplifier.
EEG100C SPECIFICATIONS
Gain:
Output Selection:
Output Range:
Frequency Response
Low Pass Filter:
High Pass Filter:
Notch Filter:
Noise Voltage:
Signal Source:
Z (input)
CMRR:
CMIV—referenced to
Input Voltage Range:
Weight:
Dimensions:
5000, 10000, 20000, 50000
Normal, Alpha Wave indicator
±10 V (analog)
Maximum bandwidth (0.005 Hz – 100 Hz)
35 Hz, 100 Hz
0.005 Hz, 0.5 Hz
50 dB rejection @ 50 Hz or 60 Hz
0.1 µV rms – (0.005–35 Hz)
Electrodes (three electrode leads required)
Differential: 2 MΩ
Common mode: 1000 MΩ
110 dB min (50/60 Hz); see also: Shield Drive Operation
Amplifier ground: ±10 V Mains ground: ±1500 VDC
Gain
Vin (mV)
Gain
Vin (mV)
5000
±2
20000
±0.5
10000
±1
50000
±0.2
350 grams
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
Input Connectors:
Five 1.5 mm male Touchproof sockets (Vin+, Ground, Vin-, 2 of shield)
See also: JUMP100C and MEC series
BIOPAC Hardware | EEG100C | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 8.12.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
EEG ELECTRODE CAP SYSTEMS AND CAPS
Systems
Cap Only
BN-EEGCAP-SYS BioNomadix Wireless EEG Cap System
CAP-INFANT
CAP100C
Electrode Cap System (Touchproof)
BN-CAP-SMALL
CAP-SMALL
BN-CAP-MEDIUM CAP-MEDIUM
BN-CAP-LARGE
CAP-LARGE
Fp1
F7
A1
T3
F3
Fz
C3
T5
F p2
Pz
P3
F8
C4
Cz
O1
Electrode Cap System
(CAP100C shown)
F4
P4
T4
A2
T6
O2
International 10-20 electrode montage
Cap only
(CAP-MEDIUM shown)
EEG CAP SYSTEMS
EEG Cap Systems include a medium EEG cap with accessories, plus mating cable to interface an EEG amplifier
or MP36R/36R unit. The medium electrode cap fits most subjects over age five; infant, small, and large caps are
also available; Systems ship with one medium cap (no substitutions).
The fabric cap has recessed tin electrodes attached to the Lycra-type fabric. The electrodes are pre-positioned in
the International 10-20 montage (shown above). Since leads are available for all electrodes, unipolar or bipolar
montage recordings can be obtained. The electrode cap comes with two ground electrodes, and can also be used
for evoked potential investigations (such as ABR). When the electrode cap is in place, EEG recording gel is
injected into each electrode (via a central gel access hole) with a blunt-tipped syringe.
Leads from the electrode cap terminate in Touchproof sockets, which connect to inputs on

EEG100C electroencephalogram amplifier
o

BN-EEG2 BioNomadix Wireless EEG transmitter/receiver set
o

To connect to older model EEG100A or EEG100B, add connection cable CBL201.
See BioNomadix Product Sheet for more information on BioNomadix hardware.
MP3X data acquisition unit via shielded electrode interface cable SS1LA
EEG CAP ONLY
Lycra-type fabric cap with recessed tin electrodes pre-positioned in the International 10-20 montage (shown
above). Additional or replacement caps are available in a variety of sizes. Caps include a ribbon cable for
connection to a cap system.
BIOPAC Hardware | EEG CAPS | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 10.8.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
CAP SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Components:
Interface:
BN-EEG2
1 x medium cap with 19-pin ribbon cable (see CAP-SIZE Specs)
1 x mating cable with Touchproof connectors
2 x earclip reference electrodes
1 x blunt-tipped syringe
1 x EEG recording gel
1 x chest harness (holds cap in place)
1 x liquid soap (to wash cap after use)
EEG100C (add CBL201 adapter for older EEG100A or EEG100B)
MP36/36R system via SS1LA adapter
CAP SIZE SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes:
BN-CAP-SMALL
BN-CAP-ME
BN-CAP-LA
Material: Lycra
Cable:
DIUM
RGE
CAP-INFANT
45-50 cm
CAP-SMALL 50-54
cm
CAP-MEDIUM
54-58 cm
CAP-LARGE
58-62 cm
Ribbon cable from cap to 19 Touchproof sockets
Length: BN-CAP-SIZE 25 cm or CAP-SIZE 100 cm
WIRE COLOR
RED TIP
Fp1
Brown
Fp2
F3
Red
F4
C3
Orange
C4
P3
Yellow
P4
01
Green
02
F7
Blue
F8
T3
Violet
T4
T5
Gray
T6
Gnd
White
Cz
Fz
Black
Pz
100 cm
WHITE TIP
Interface: Cap
System BN-EEGCAP-SYS or CAP100C
BIOPAC Hardware | EEG CAPS | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 10.8.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
EGG100C – ELECTROGASTROGRAM AMPLIFIER MODULE
The EGG100C amplifies the electrical signal resulting from stomach and intestinal smooth muscle
activity. The amplifier monitors the DC potential on the skin surrounding, or surface of, the
intestine and stomach, which is indicative of the degree of slow wave contraction. The amplifier
permits DC coupling to electrodes for signal amplification and presentation without discernible
decay. The EGG100C also has built-in drive capability for use with shielded electrode leads.
The gastric slow wave (ECA) originates in the proximal stomach and propagates distally towards
the pylorus. For recording, place multiple surface electrodes on the abdomen along the gastric axis
and connect them to respective EGG100C amplifiers that have a common reference electrode
placed near the xiphoid process. For consistent electrode-to-electrode spacing, use the EL500 dual
electrodes with LEAD110 leads. For extremely tight electrode-to-electrode spacing, use the
EL254 or EL258 reusable Ag-AgCl lead electrodes. The signals amplified at each electrode will
be displayed on consecutive channels in AcqKnowledge.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
Modules can be set for 50 or 60 Hz notch options, depending on the destination country.
Generally, wall-power line frequency is 60 Hz in the United States and 50 Hz in most of Europe
and China; if necessary contact BIOPAC to determine the appropriate line frequency.
The 0.005 Hz high pass lower frequency response setting is a single pole, roll-off filter.
See also: Frequency Response Plots: 05 Hz HP, 0.1 Hz LP, 1 Hz LP.
EGG100C CALIBRATION
The EGG100C is factory set and does not require calibration. To confirm the accuracy of the
device, use the CBLCALC.
EGG100C SPECIFICATIONS
Gain & Input Voltage:
Output Range:
Frequency Response
Low Pass Filter:
High Pass Filter:
Notch Filter:
Noise Voltage:
Signal Source:
Z (input)
Differential:
Common mode:
CMRR:
CMIV—referenced to
Amplifier ground:
Mains ground:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Input Connectors:
Gain
Vin (mV)
500
±20
1000
±10
2000
±5
5000
±2
±10 V (analog)
Maximum bandwidth (DC – 1 Hz)
0.1Hz, 1Hz
DC, 0.005 Hz, 0.05 Hz
50 dB rejection @ 50 Hz or 60 Hz
0.1µV rms – (0.005-1.0 Hz)
Electrodes (three electrode leads required)
2 MΩ
1000 MΩ
110 dB min (50/60 Hz); see also: Shield Drive Operation
±10 V
±1500 VDC
350 grams
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
Five 1.5 mm male Touchproof sockets (Vin+, Ground, Vin-, 2 of shield)
BIOPAC Hardware | EGG100C | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 6.24.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
EMG100C – ELECTROMYOGRAM AMPLIFIER MODULE
The electromyogram amplifier module (EMG100C) is a single-channel, high-gain, differential input, biopotential
amplifier designed specifically for monitoring muscle and nerve response activity.
The EMG100C is designed for use in the following applications:
Conventional bipolar EMG measurement
Muscular reflex studies
Biomechanics
Motor unit potential measurement
Nerve conduction measurement
The EMG100C will connect directly to any of BIOPAC Systems, Inc.’s series of Ag-AgCl lead electrodes. The
best choice for electrodes depends on the application, but typically, the EL503 adhesive/disposable snap
electrodes are used in conjunction with the LEAD110S pinch lead. If reusable electrodes are required, the EL508S
is typically used; when using EL508S electrodes, adhesive disks (ADD208) and electrode gel (GEL100) are also
required. Use two shielded electrodes (LEAD110S/EL503 or EL508S) for the signal inputs and one unshielded
electrode (LEAD110/EL503 or EL508) for ground.
The EMG100C has built-in drive capability for use with shielded electrode leads. Shielded leads are typically
required, as the EMG100C has a frequency response that extends through the 50/60 Hz interference bands. The
EMG100C is designed to pass EMG signals and signals associated with nerve responses.
The EMG100C incorporates a variety of filtering options to optimize the amplifier performance when recording
from either surface or needle electrodes, and when recording from either muscle or nerves. For instance, when
recording EMG (muscle) from surface electrodes, the 10 Hz to 500 Hz bandwidth setting could be used, but when
recording nerve propagation times, the 100 Hz to 5,000 Hz bandwidth setting could be used.
LEAD100S
EL503
ZERO
ADJ
GAIN
500
1000
2000
5000
INTEG
NORM
ON
FILTER
OFF
SHIELD
VIN+
GND
VINSHIELD
LEAD100
EMG100
Electrode connections to the EMG1EMG100C to
measure EMG activity from the arm biceps
This graph shows a typical raw EMG recording. Waveform
peaks indicate points of peak muscle activity.
This graph shows raw EMG and integrated EMG.
To integrate EMG in real-time, set up a
calculation channel in AcqKnowledge using the
Integrate function with Rectify checked ON. In
this case, this waveform would be augmented by
a smoothed curve following the positive envelope
of the EMG signal.
BIOPAC Hardware | EMG100C | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 6.25.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
The 1 Hz high pass and 10 Hz high pass lower frequency response settings are single pole roll-off filters.
Modules can be set for 50 Hz or 60 Hz notch options to match the wall-power line frequency of the destination
country. The proper setting reduces noise from interfering signals when the notch filter is engaged. Generally,
wall-power line frequency is 60 Hz in the United States and 50 Hz in most of Europe and China; if necessary,
contact BIOPAC to determine the appropriate line frequency. To reset the line frequency setting, adjust the bank
of switches on the back of the amplifier module.
The 50/60 Hz notch is only engaged when the 100 Hz HPN filter switch on the EMG100C amplifer is set to ON.
Line Frequency switch bank is on the back of the amplifier
50 Hz
60 Hz
Both switches
DOWN
Both switches
UP
See also: Sample frequency response plots
100 Hz HPN option (with 50 Hz notch enabled)
500 Hz LP option
100 Hz HPN option (with 60 Hz notch enabled)
5000 Hz LP
EMG100C CALIBRATION
The EMG100C is factory set and does not require calibration. To confirm the accuracy of the device, use the
CBLCAL.
EMG100C SPECIFICATIONS
Gain:
Output Range:
Frequency Response
Low Pass Filter:
High Pass Filter:
Notch Filter:
Noise Voltage:
Signal Source:
Z (input)
Differential:
Common mode:
CMRR:
CMIV–referenced to
Amplifier ground:
Mains ground:
Input Voltage Range
500, 1000, 2000, 5000
±10 V (analog)
Maximum bandwidth (1.0 Hz – 5,000 Hz)
500 Hz, 5000 Hz
1.0 Hz, 10 Hz, 100 Hz
50 dB rejection @ 50 Hz or 60 Hz
0.2µV rms – (10-500 Hz)
Electrodes (three electrode leads required)
2 MΩ
1000 MΩ
110 dB min (50/60 Hz)
±10 V
± 1500 VDC
Gain Vin (mV)
500 ±20
1000 ±10
2000 ±5
5000 ±2
350 grams
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
Five 1.5 mm male Touchproof sockets (Vin+, Ground, Vin-, 2 of shield)
Weight:
Dimensions:
Input Connectors:
See also: JUMP100C, MEC series
BIOPAC Hardware | EMG100C | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 6.25.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
EOG100C – ELECTROOCULOGRAM AMPLIFIER MODULE
The electrooculogram amplifier module (EOG100C) is a single-channel, high-gain, differential input, biopotential
amplifier designed for tracking eye movement. The EOG100C is designed for use in the following applications:
Sleep studies
Eye motion and tracking
Nystagmus testing Vertigo
investigations
REM activity analysis
Vestibular function studies
The EOG100C senses the corneal-retinal potential inherent in the eyeball. As the eyes move in the horizontal and
vertical planes, these potentials are superimposed to generate a DC voltage variation in the region immediately
surrounding the eye sockets.
The EOG100C will connect directly to any of BIOPAC’s Ag-AgCl series lead electrodes. For most EOG
applications, EL503 electrodes are used. Use two shielded electrode leads (LEAD110S) for the signal inputs and
one unshielded electrode lead (LEAD110) for ground.
The EOG100C has built-in drive capability for use with shielded electrode leads. If high bandwidth (resolution)
EOG measurements are required, then shielded electrode leads are recommended. When the interference filter is
switched on, shielded leads are typically not necessary. The EOG100C is designed to pass the EOG signal to
accommodate a large velocity range with minimal distortion.
This module includes an HP selection switch, which permits either absolute (DC) or relative (AC: 0.05 Hz HP)
eye motion measurements. When performing absolute eye motion measurement, the eye position signal will still
decay, but the time constant will be significantly longer than when performing relative eye motion measurement.
The EOG100C also has an EOG derivative function. When enabled, the output signal will produce a wave that
will be directly proportional to the velocity of eye movement. Eye velocity measurement is useful for performing
Nystagmus testing. The derivative function is obtained through the use of a specially designed bandpass filter
(center frequency of 30 Hz, Q=0.8).
EL503
EL503
LEAD100S
LEAD100
ZERO
ADJ
ZERO
ADJ
GAIN
500
1000
2000
5000
DERIV
GAIN
500
1000
2000
5000
DERIV
NORM
NORM
ON
FILTER
OFF
ON
FILTER
OFF
AC
NORM
DC
ON
FILTER
OFF
ZERO
ADJ
GAIN
500
1000
2000
5000
DERIV
AC
DC
SHIELD
SHIELD
VIN+
VIN+
AC
GND
GND
DC
VIN-
VIN-
SHIELD
SHIELD
EOG100
SHIELD
EOG100
VIN+
GND
VINSHIELD
EOG100
LEAD100S
Setup to record horizontal eye movement
Setup for two EOG100C modules to record vertical and
horizontal eye movement
To increase accuracy, use electrodes above and
below each eye and parallel them with
JUMP100C Jumper leads when connecting to
the vertical track EOG100C module.
This graph shows a horizontal eye movement
recording. The positive peaks indicate eyes
looking left. The negative peaks indicate eyes
looking right. The derivative of this waveform
would indicate the speed of eye motion during
this time.
Typical EOG signal
BIOPAC Hardware | EOG100C | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 8.28.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
The 0.05 Hz high pass lower frequency response setting is a single pole roll-off filter.
Modules can be set for 50 Hz or 60 Hz notch options to match the wall-power line frequency of the destination
country. The proper setting reduces noise from interfering signals when the notch filter is engaged. Generally,
wall-power line frequency is 60 Hz in the United States and 50 Hz in most of Europe and China; if necessary,
contact BIOPAC to determine the appropriate line frequency. To reset the line frequency setting, adjust the bank
of switches on the back of the amplifier module.
The 50/60 Hz notch is only engaged when the 35 Hz LPN filter switch on the EOG100C amplifer is set to ON.
Line Frequency switch bank is on the back of the amplifier
See also: Sample frequency response plots.
35 Hz LPN (with 50 Hz notch)
35 Hz LPN (with 60 Hz notch)
50 Hz
60 Hz
Both switches
DOWN
Both switches
UP
100 Hz LP
EOG100C CALIBRATION
The EOG100C is factory set and does not require calibration. To confirm the accuracy of the device, use the
CBLCALC.
EOG100C SPECIFICATIONS
Gain:
Output Selection:
Output Range:
Frequency Response
Low Pass Filter:
High Pass Filter:
Notch Filter:
Noise Voltage:
Signal Source:
Z (input)
Differential:
Common mode:
CMRR:
CMIV–referenced to
Amplifier ground:
Mains ground:
Input Voltage Range
Weight:
Dimensions (WxDxH):
Input Connectors:
500, 1000, 2000, 5000
Normal, Derivative output
±10 V (analog)
Maximum bandwidth (DC – 100 Hz)
35 Hz, 100 Hz
DC, 0.05 Hz
50 dB rejection @ 50/60 Hz
0.1µV rms – (0.05-35 Hz)
Electrodes (three electrode leads required)
2 MΩ
1000 MΩ
110 dB min (50/60 Hz); see also: Shield Drive Operation
±10 V
±1500 VDC
Gain Vin (mV)
500
±20
1000
±10
2000
±5
5000
±2
350 grams
4 cm x 11 cm x 19 cm
Five 1.5 mm male Touchproof sockets (Vin+, Ground, Vin-, 2 of shield)
See also: JUMP100C and MEC series
BIOPAC Hardware | EOG100C | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 8.28.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ERS100C – EVOKED RESPONSE AMPLIFIER MODULE
The evoked response amplifier module (ERS100C) is a single channel, high gain, extremely low noise,
differential input, biopotential amplifier designed to accurately amplify the very small potentials (< 200 nV)
associated with evoked response measurement. The ERS100C is designed for use in the following applications:
Auditory brainstem response (ABR) testing
Visual evoked response testing
Nerve conduction velocity and latency recording
Somatosensory response testing
The ERS100C will connect directly to any of BIOPAC Systems, Inc.’s Ag-AgCl series of lead electrodes.
Typically, the EL503 electrodes are recommended for evoked response measurements. Use two shielded
electrodes (LEAD110S) for the signal inputs and one unshielded electrode (LEAD110) for the ground. If hair is
present, disposable electrodes don’t work very well for scalp attachment—use electrode gel (GEL100) and tape
the electrode lightly in place or use a conductive adhesive paste (like Ten20® or Collodion HV®).
The ERS100C has built-in drive capability for use with shielded electrode leads. Shielded leads are typically
required, as the ERS100C has a frequency response that extends through the 50/60 Hz interference bands.
Furthermore, the ERS100C is used to amplify extremely low level signals that can be easily corrupted by
interfering signals.
The ERS100C incorporates selectable gain and bandwidth options to perform a variety of evoked response
testing. The ERS100C is typically used with two shielded electrodes for signal input and one unshielded electrode
for ground. In nearly all cases of stimulus response testing, the ERS100C will be used in conjunction with the
STM100C and the MP System.
The STM100C is a general-purpose stimulator that can be used to present auditory, visual or
mechanical stimulus signals.
For most types of evoked response testing, the MP System will be operating in averaging mode. Typically, the
stimulus output (usually a pulse) will be output through one of the analog channels (Out 0 or Out 1) or I/0 15 just
prior to the data collection pass. Stimuli output on analog channels typically consists of pulses or tones, and
stimulus output waveforms can easily be created and modified using the stimulator setup window, described in
the AcqKnowledge Software Guide.
The ERS100C can record auditory evoked potentials, like the ABR. Use the STM100C to
Auditory
present an auditory pulse or “click” to the auditory stimulator, such as the ER-3A
evoked
Tubephone. Present the acoustical signal to the active ear using a calibrated auditory
potentials
earphone like the OUT101 Tubephone.
•
To record the ABR:
1) Place the active (VIN-) electrode at the
earlobe or mastoid.
2) Place the reference (VIN+) electrode at the
vertex.
3) Place the ground electrode at the forehead.
BIOPAC Hardware | ERS100C | Page 1 - 5
Updated: 11.26.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
The MP System
collected the
data in the
“Averaging”
mode.
2000 trial ABR test performed using the ERS100C with the STM100C and OUT101 (Tubephone)
Somatosensory
response
General nerve
conduction
velocity
Somatosensory tests are used to characterize the perception of touch. Active electrodes are
usually placed on an earlobe, and passive electrodes are placed on the contralateral earlobe.
The ground electrode is placed on the forehead. In somatosensory response tests, the
stimulation source is usually an electrical pulse or mechanical impulse applied at some point
along the leg or arm.
The ERS100C can also be used for general nerve conduction velocity tests, and will perform
exceptionally well since the ultra low noise characteristics of the ERS100C are not required
to obtain the best results and these tests don’t require the extensive averaging required for
auditory or visual evoked response measurements.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
The 1 Hz high pass or 20 Hz high pass lower frequency response settings are single pole roll-off filters.
Modules can be set for 50 Hz or 60 Hz notch options to match the wall-power line frequency of the destination
country. The proper setting reduces noise from interfering signals when the notch filter is engaged. Generally,
wall-power line frequency is 60 Hz in the United States and 50 Hz in most of Europe and China; if necessary,
contact BIOPAC to determine the appropriate line frequency. To reset the line frequency setting, adjust the bank
of switches on the back of the amplifier module.
The 50/60 Hz notch is only engaged when the 100 Hz HPN filter switch on the ERS100C amplifer is set to ON.
Line Frequency switch bank is on the back of the amplifier
See also: Sample frequency response plots
50 Hz
60 Hz
Both switches
DOWN
Both switches
UP
100 Hz HPN (with 50 Hz notch)
100 Hz HPN (with 60 Hz notch)
3,000 Hz LP
10 kHz LP
BIOPAC Hardware | ERS100C | Page 2 - 5
Updated: 11.26.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ERS100C CALIBRATION
The ERS100C is factory set and does not require calibration. To confirm the accuracy of the device, use the
CBLCALC.
ERS100C SPECIFICATIONS
Gain:
Output Range:
Frequency Response
Low Pass Filter:
High Pass Filter:
Notch Filter:
Noise Voltage:
Signal Source:
Z (input)
Differential:
Common mode:
CMRR:
CMIV–referenced to
Amplifier ground:
Mains ground
Input Voltage Range
Weight:
Dimensions:
Input Connectors:
5000, 10000, 20000, 50000
±10 V (analog)
Maximum bandwidth (1.0 Hz – 10 kHz)
3 kHz, 10 kHz
1.0 Hz, 20 Hz, 100 Hz
50 dB rejection @ 50 Hz or 60 Hz
0.5µV rms – (100-3000 Hz)
Electrodes (three electrode leads required)
2 MΩ
1000 MΩ
110 dB min (50/60 Hz); see also: Shield Drive Operation
±10 V
±1500 VDC
Gain
Vin (mV)
5000
±2
10000
±1
20000
±0.5
50000
±0.2
350 grams
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
Five 1.5 mm male Touchproof sockets (Vin+, Ground, Vin-, 2 of shield)
BIOPAC Hardware | ERS100C | Page 3 - 5
Updated: 11.26.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
JUMP100/C – JUMPER CONNECTORS FOR BIOPOTENTIAL AMPLIFIERS
JUMP100 — for all connections between all 100B-series Biopotential amplifiers
JUMP100C — for all connections between all 100C-series Biopotential amplifiers
These jumper connectors (10 cm long) are used to create a common reference between biopotential amplifier
modules. Link one reference electrode to multiple amplifier inputs using one jumper connector per amplifier.
Jumper connectors are required when connecting the same reference electrode lead to two or more amplifiers, as
in multi-lead ECG or unipolar EEG measurements.
JUMP100C-MRI – Y CABLE FOR MRI
This “Y” cable is functionally identical to the JUMP100C, but designed for use in the MRI environment when
referencing two or more amplifier inputs to a single electrode input. Primarily used for recording biopotential
measurements for EEG, ECG or EMG in the MRI. Two Touchproof female inputs to one Touchproof male input,
cable length 10 cm.
MRI Use:
MR Conditional to 9T
Components:
Carbon composition, tin plated and gold plated brass connectors

For two or more electrodes to one biopotential amplifier unit, use CBL204-MRI; two Touchproof male to
one Touchproof female—MRI equivalent of CBL204.
BIOPAC Hardware | JUMP100/C | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 4.27.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TRANSDUCER MODULE EDA100C
NOTE TO GSR100C USERS:
The term “Galvanic Skin Response” (GSR) has been superseded by “Electrodermal
Activity” (EDA).
• GSR units (µmho/V) have been superseded by modern EDA units of µS/V
(microsiemens).
• There is no hardware or operational differences between the older GSR100C and the
newer EDA100C amplifiers referred to in this document.
The EDA100C electrodermal activity amplifier module is a single-channel, high-gain,
differential amplifier designed to measure skin conductance via the constant voltage technique.
The EDA100C is designed for use in the following applications:
General eccrine activity measurement Vestibular function analysis
Vertigo and motion sickness studies
Psychophysiological investigations
The EDA100C includes a selection switch for lower frequency response.
• DC—For absolute measures (e.g. skin conductance level)
• 0.05 Hz—For relative measures (e.g. skin conductance response)
---------------------------------------------------IMPORTANT-------------------------------------------------GROUNDING: When using the EDA100C amplifier with other biopotential amplifiers
attached to the same subject, it’s not necessary to attach the ground lead from the biopotential
amplifier(s) to the subject. The subject is already appropriately referenced (grounded) to the
system via the attachment to the EDA100C. If a biopotential ground is attached to the subject,
then currents sourced from the EDA100C will be split to the biopotential amplifier ground lead,
potentially resulting in measurement errors.
---------------------------------------------------IMPORTANT--------------------------------------------------The EDA100C is typically used with TSD203 Ag-AgCl finger electrodes.
•
Skin conductance measurement using EDA100C and TSD203
The following graph shows the
relationship between respiration rate and
the electrodermal activity response
(galvanic skin response). The left half of
the graph marks the onset and
completion of fast breathing (panting),
and the subject begins to breathe
normally at the time index
corresponding to 12 seconds.
Electrodermal activity response, respiration
and respiration rate waveforms
BIOPAC Hardware | EDA100C | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
The 0.05 Hz high pass lower frequency response setting is a single pole roll-off filter.
Modules can be set for 50 or 60 Hz notch options, depending on the destination country. Generally, wall-power
line frequency is 60 Hz in the United States and 50 Hz in most of Europe and China; if necessary contact
BIOPAC to determine the appropriate line frequency.
See also: Sample frequency response plots.
1 Hz LP
10 Hz LP
EDA100C CALIBRATION
Note that the EDA100C has scale setting in units of “µS per volt.” This is identical to the
respective scale setting of µmho or micromho per volt. Namely, 1 µS = 1 µmho.
SETUP INSTRUCTIONS
Lower frequency response at DC:
In the scaling window, set the input voltages so they map to the DC conductance ranges indicated by the
sensitivity setting. For example, if the EDA100C is set to a Gain of 5µS/V, then 0 V will map to 0 µS or
infinite resistance, and 1 V will map to 5 µS or 200 kohm.
Lower frequency response at 0.05 Hz:
In the scaling window, set the input voltages so they map to the “0.05 Hz” conductance ranges indicated
by the sensitivity setting. For example if the EDA100C is set to a Gain of 5 µS/V, then 0 V will map to X
µSs and 1 V will map to (X+5) µS. Where “X” is the mean conductance being recorded.
To verify the Gain setting of the EDA100C:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Calibrate AcqKnowledge as detailed above for lower frequency response at DC.
Place the lower frequency response to DC.
Set the Gain switch on the EDA100C to 5µS/V.
Perform measurement with electrodes disconnected.
• AcqKnowledge should produce a reading of 0 µS.
5. Insulate a 100 kohm resistor and place it from electrode pad to electrode pad (resistor must be insulated
from fingers).
6. Perform measurement with electrode-resistor setup.
• AcqKnowledge should produce a reading of 10 µS.
BIOPAC Hardware | EDA100C | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
EDA100C SPECIFICATIONS
Unit Note—BIOPAC software calculates SCL/SCR in microsiemens. The traditional unit of conductance, Micromho (µmho)
is interchangeable with the more current microsiemen (µS). To use Ohm, the traditional measure of resistance,
convert as 1 µS equals 1,000,000 ohms.
Gain: 20, 10, 5, 2 micro-siemens/volt (i.e., micro-umhos/volt)
Input conductance range
DC
0.05 Hz
Minimum Resistance
Sensitivity
0 to 200 µS/V
±200 µS/V
5,000 Ω
20 µS/V
0 to 100 µS/V
±100 µS/V
10,000 Ω
10 µS/V
0 to 50 µS/V
±50 µS/V
20,000 Ω
5 µS/V
0 to 20 µS/V
±20 µS/V
50,000 Ω
2 µS/V
Note: Normal human range is 1-50 µS
Output Range:
0-10 V nominal, ±10 V full (analog)
Frequency Response
Low Pass Filter:
1 Hz, 10 Hz
High Pass Filter:
DC, 0.05 Hz, 0.5 Hz
Sensitivity:
0.7 nano-mhos – with MP System
Excitation:
Vex = 0.5 VDC (Constant Voltage)
Signal Source:
TSD203
Weight:
350 grams
Dimensions:
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
Input Connectors:
Three 1.5 mm male Touchproof sockets (VIN+, Ground, VIN-)
BIOPAC Hardware | EDA100C | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
PPG100C – PHOTOPLETHYSMOGRAM AMPLIFIER MODULE
The photoplethysmogram amplifier module (PPG100C) is a single channel amplifier designed for indirect
measurement of blood pressure or density. The PPG100C is designed for use in the following applications:
•
General pulse rate determination
•
Blood pressure analysis
•
Exercise physiology studies
•
Psychophysiological investigations
The PPG100C works with the TSD200 Photoplethysmogram Transducer. The peak measurement recorded by the
PPG100C indicates the point of maximal blood density in the respective location. Indications of blood pressure
can be inferred by comparing the point of R-wave onset in the ECG to the point of maximum blood density
recorded by the PPG100C.
The PPG100C includes lower frequency response selection switches, which permits either absolute (DC) or
relative (via 0.05 or 0.5 Hz high pass filters) blood density measurements.
The PPG100C also has the capability to interface to a wide range of commercially available optical probes.
Specifically, optical transducers for SpO2 can easily be used with the PPG100C, via the TCIPPG3 snap on
interface. The TCIPPG3 interface adapter plugs into the front of the PPG100C and allows it to work with SpO2type probes that terminate in a 9-pin D female connector (such as those from Nonin®). The visible light
transmitter and receiver of the probe is employed to establish a very high quality, high S/N ratio, transmissive,
photo-plethysmogram signal, suitable for evaluating PPG signal characteristics. Note that this configuration does
not provide SpO2 output, but rather a highly-detailed PPG waveform versus time. Probes are available for fingers,
toes, earclip and universal attachment. BIOPAC probes compatible with the TCIPPG3 / PPG100C combination
include the TSD124A, TSD124B and TSD124C. The TCIPPG3 also supports use of the OXY100E-200
extension cable.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
The 0.05 Hz high pass and 0.5 Hz high pass lower frequency response settings are single pole roll-off filters.
Modules can be set for 50 Hz or 60 Hz notch options, depending on the destination country. Generally, wallpower line frequency is 60 Hz in the United States and 50 Hz in most of Europe and China; if necessary contact
BIOPAC to determine the appropriate line frequency.
See also: Sample frequency response plots.
10 Hz LP
PPG100C CALIBRATION
None required.
PPG100C SPECIFICATIONS
Gain:
Output Range:
Low Pass Filter:
High Pass Filter:
Noise Voltage:
Excitation:
Signal Source:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Upper Frequency Response:
Lower Frequency Response:
Noise Voltage:
10, 20, 50, 100
±10 V (analog)
3 Hz, 10 Hz
DC, 0.05 Hz, 0.5 Hz
0.5 µV rms – amplifier contribution
6V
TSD200 Photoplethysmogram Transducer
350 grams
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
10 Hz
DC or 0.05 Hz or 0.5 Hz
0.5 µV (rms) – amplifier contribution
BIOPAC Hardware | PPG100C | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 5.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
Gain Settings:
Input Signal Range (pk-pk):
2000 mV
1000 mV
400 mV
200 mV
Input Connectors:
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Gain:
x 10
x 20
x 50
x 100
Three 1.5 mm male Touchproof sockets (Vsup, Ground, Input)
This illustration shows the proper
connections to use the TSD200 with
the PPG100C. The TSD200 can be
placed on other body locations by
employing ADD208 adhesive disks to
hold the TSD200 in place.
The TSD200 connects to the
PPG100C as follows:
TSD200 Lead
PPG100C
Red lead
Black lead
Purple or Blue lead
+VSUP
GND
INPUT
Finger pulse measurement using the PPG100C and TSD200
This graph illustrates
photoplethysmogram data indicating
blood density with respect to the
acquired ECG. The distance between
peaks on the two channels can provide
indications of blood pressure, vascular
resistance and compliance.
Photoplethysmogram data and ECG waveforms
.
BIOPAC Hardware | PPG100C | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 5.17.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
PULSE PHOTOPLETHYSMOGRAM TRANSDUCERS
•
TSD200 for MP150/MP100 System
•
SS4LA for MP3X and MP45 System
The TSD200/SS4LA consist of a matched infrared emitter and
photo diode, which transmits changes in blood density (caused by
varying blood pressure) in specific body locations. When the
TSD200 is attached to the skin, the infrared light is modulated by
blood pulsing through the tissue below. The modulated, reflected
light results in small changes in the resistance of the photo resistor,
which yields a proportional change in voltage output.
The TSD200/SS4LA includes a shielded 2-meter cable and a stretchable Velcro® strap for easy attachment to the
fingers, or it can be taped to other body parts. The TSD200/SS4LA can also be placed on other body locations by
employing ADD208 adhesive disks to hold the transducer in place. Use the TSD200C ear clip transducer for easy
attachment to the ear.
Place the transducer around the finger and adjust the Velcro® closure to provide only slight tension. Blood
density readings can vary considerably depending on transducer location and tension changes.
The TSD200 connects to the PPG100C as follows (See also: PPG100C for a diagram):
TSD200 Lead
PPG100C
Red lead
+VSUP
Black lead
GND
Purple or Blue lead
INPUT
The SS4LA plugs directly into the MP3x or MP45.
CALIBRATION
The TSD200/SS4LA does not require calibration.
TSD200C PULSE PHOTOPLETHYSMOGRAM WITH EARCLIP
The photodetector operates via incident photons, from an IR transmitter, impacting an IR detector. The incident
photons result in a proportional passage of electrons in the detector. The IR detector operates like a photoncontrolled current source. The transducer incorporates an appropriate clipping range, with linearity insured for
arbitrarily low levels of reflected light. For the expected magnitude of incident infrared light, the photodetector
operates in a linear fashion. Situations have not been encountered where the detector is operating non-linearly
(near saturation).
The TSD200C transducer operates with the PPG100C amplifier to record the pulse pressure waveform. The
TSD200C consists of a matched infrared emitter and photo diode, which transmits changes in infrared reflectance
resulting from varying blood flow. The ergonomic housing design improves contact with the subject and helps
reduce motion artifact. The TSD200C is primarily designed for ear attachment and comes with a shielded 3-meter
cable and ear clip.
BIOPAC Hardware | Pulse Transducers | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD200/200C/SS4LA SPECIFICATIONS
Emitter/Detector Wavelength:
860 nm ± 60 nm
Optical Low Pass Filter Cutoff Wavelength: 800 nm
Note
The operational range of the emitter and detector fall within the wavelength
range of 800 nm to 920 nm. The filter is placed over the receiver; the filter of
800 nm is an optical lowpass, so wavelengths longer than 800 nm will pass
thru.
Nominal Output:
20 mV (peak-peak)
Power:
6 VDC Excitation @ 5 mA
Sterilizable:
Yes (Contact BIOPAC for details)
Weight:
4.5 g
Dimensions (L x W x H):
16 mm x 17 mm x 8 mm
Attachment:
Velcro strap
Cable:
3 m, shielded
Interface:
PPG100C
TEL100C Compatibility:
SS4A
NOTE THE TSD200A EAR CLIP TRANSDUCER WAS DISCONTINUED IN AUGUST OF 2008.
BIOPAC Hardware | Pulse Transducers | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD203 – ELECTRODERMAL RESPONSE TRANSDUCER
The TSD203 is a set of two Ag-AgCl electrodes, which incorporate molded housings designed for finger
attachment. The TSD203 is used when measuring the electrodermal response. Each transducer includes a
stretchable Velcro® strap for easy attachment.
Connectors: Blue shrink tubing = Vin+ & Vin-, unmarked = GND
When the TSD203 is used to measure electrodermal response, the choice of electrolyte is extremely important. A
higher impedance electrolyte using hyposaturated electrolyte concentrations of Cl- (on the order of physiological
levels) is necessary for effective monitoring of local eccrine activity.
Use GEL101 as an isotonic, hyposaturated, conductant with the TSD203 EDR transducer. Trace conductive parts
(metal parts) do not make contact to the subject. TSD203 is not recommended for MRI use.
Storing and Cleaning
1. Store the transducer in a clean, dry area.
2. After use, clean the transducer with cold to tepid water.
a) DO NOT use hot water.
b) Cotton swabs are suggested.
c) Let the transducer dry completely before storing it.
3. DO NOT allow transducers to come in contact with each other during storage (adverse reaction could
occur).
4. Transducers may form a brown coating if they have not been used regularly. To remove the coating,
gently polish the surface of the transducer element with non-metallic material or wipe it with mild
ammonium hydroxide. Rinse with water and store the transducer in a clean, dry container.
TSD203 SPECIFICATIONS
Electrode Type: Ag-AgCl (unpolarizable)
Attachment: integral Velcro strap
Contact area: 6 mm (dia)
Sterilizable: Yes, contact BIOPAC
Cable length: 3 m
Interface: EDA100C
Dimensions (LxWxH each): 16 mm x 17 mm x 8 mm
TEL100C compatibility: SS3A
TSD203 CALIBRATION
See the EDA100C transducer module.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD203 | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 3.25.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
RSP100C – RESPIRATION PNEUMOGRAM AMPLIFIER MODULE
The RSP100C respiration pneumogram amplifier module is a single
channel, differential amplifier designed specifically for recording
respiration effort. The RSP100C is designed for use in the following
applications:
Allergic responses analysis
Exercise physiology studies
Psychophysiological investigations
Respiration rate determination
Sleep studies
The RSP100C works with the TSD201 respiration transducer to
measure abdominal or thoracic expansion and contraction.
The RSP100C includes a lower frequency response selection switch that permits either absolute (DC) or relative
(via a 0.05 high pass filter) respiratory effort measurements.
The following illustration shows the placement and connections for recording thoracic respiration effort using the
RSP100C and the TSD201 respiration transducer.
RSP100C AMPLIFIER MODULE SETTINGS
The RSP100C has three built-in filters and a number of different gain settings for the different uses of the
transducer.
Type of Use
Gain Setting
Low Pass Filter
.5 Hz Filter
.05 Hz
Filter
General
10
10 Hz
DC
DC
Exercise Physiology
10
1 Hz
.5 Hz
.05 Hz
Small Animal
20+
10 Hz
.5 Hz
.05 Hz
General
For most measurements with little or no subject movement. The most common
setting is with all three filters at their bottom settings (10 Hz, DC, and DC) and the
gain set at 10. This allows any signals slower than 10 Hz (cyclic rate) to pass, and is
usually good for most measurements with little or no subject movement.
Exercise physiology
The transducer produces the best signal at the lowest gain and with all three filter
settings at their top position (1 Hz, .5 Hz, and .05 Hz). This setting will allow only a
signal between .5 Hz and 1 Hz to be transmitted, filtering out most of the signal
interference due to extraneous chest and abdominal movement resulting from limb
motion.
Smaller animals
For measurements with very small changes in thoracic circumference, increase the
gain to magnify the signal. Increase the gain until a clear signal is obtained, but not
so much that the signal is clipped.
BIOPAC Hardware | RSP100C | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
PLACEMENT AND CONNECTIONS
This illustration shows the placement and
connections to record thoracic and abdominal
respiration effort using two RSP100C amplifier
modules and two TSD201 respiration transducers.
Connections for Thoracic and Abdominal
Respiratory Effort Measurement
This graph shows the relationship between abdominal
and thoracic expansion and contraction.
Calculate the peak-to-peak values for both abdominal
and thoracic respiration effort were calculated with
AcqKnowledge, and then the two peak-to-peak values
were compared in the lowest channel. When
abdominal breathing effort changes with respect to
thoracic breathing effort, the lowest channel will
quantify the extent of the change.
Thoracic vs. Abdominal respiration effort data
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
The 0.05 Hz high pass lower frequency response setting is a single pole roll-off filter. The 0.5 Hz high pass lower
frequency response setting is a two pole roll-off filter.
Modules can be set for 50 or 60 Hz notch options, depending on the destination country. Generally, wall-power
line frequency is 60 Hz in the United States and 50 Hz in most of Europe and China; if necessary contact
BIOPAC to determine the appropriate line frequency.
See also: Sample frequency response plots:
1 Hz LP
10 Hz LP
RSP100C CALIBRATION
None required.
BIOPAC Hardware | RSP100C | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
RSP100C SPECIFICATIONS
Gain:
Output Range:
Frequency Response
Low Pass Filter:
High Pass Filter:
Excitation Voltage
Noise Voltage:
Signal Source:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Input Connectors:
10, 20, 50, 100
±10 V (analog)
1 Hz, 10 Hz
DC, 0.05 Hz, 0.5 Hz
±0.5 V
0.2 µV rms – amplifier contribution
TSD201
350 g
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
Three 1.5 mm male Touchproof sockets (VIN+, Ground, VIN-)
BIOPAC Hardware | RSP100C | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD200-MRI PHOTOPLETHYSMOGRAM TRANSDUCER
The TSD200-MRI photoplethysmogram (PPG) transducer operates with the PPG100C-MRI to record the blood
volume pulse waveform via optical (photoplethysmogram) methods. The TSD200-MRI consists of a matched
infrared emitter and photo diode detector, which transmits changes in infrared reflectance resulting from varying
blood flow. Blood is highly reflective of near infrared light wavelengths, due to the heme subunit of hemoglobin.
When the PPG transducer is placed on the skin, in proximity to capillaries, the reflectance of the infrared light
from the emitter to the detector will change in accordance to capillary blood volume. The PPG waveform peaks
when capillary blood volume is maximized.
The transducer optics are designed to sense diffuse surfaces, including the skin surfaces of finger or toe. The
transducer is sensitive to Blood Volume Pulse (BVP) via photo-plethysmographic methods.
The Diode and Phototransistor are mounted side by side on parallel axis in a black polyurethane housing. The
Phototransistor is encased in a dark epoxy package which filters out visible ambient light. The transducer has a
shielded 3-meter cable.
The ergonomic housing design improves contact with the subject and helps reduce motion artifact. Trace
conductive (metal) parts of transducer do not make contact to the subject.
The TSD200-MRI only operates with the PPG100C-MRI amplifier.
MRI Use:
Components:
MR Conditional to 3T
Note: Conductive parts of transducer are electrically and thermally isolated from subject.
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Plastic, Polymer thick film device (rigid substrate, printed semiconductor), Copper clad fiberglass lamination (PCB material), Tinned copper wire, Silicone
elastomer
CONNECTIONS
For MRI applications: Use the MECMRI-TRANS Cable/Filter to connect the TSD200-MRI to the PPG100CMRI. See BIOPAC Application Notes regarding the proper installation of MECMRI cables for recording in an
MRI environment.
For non-MRI applications: Connect the TSD200-MRI directly to the PPG100C-MRI.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD200-MRI | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 1.13.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD201 – RESPIRATION TRANSDUCER
Sample Data for Subject at Rest
MRI Usage: MR Conditional to 7T
Tested in a variety of gradient conditions to 7T.
Note: Conductive parts of transducer are electrically and thermally isolated from subject.
Components: Nylon/Velcro® Chest Strap, Mylar, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic, Acrylonitrile
Butadiene Styrene (ABS) Thermo-molded Plastic, Polymer thick-film device (flexible
substrate printed semi-conductor), Copper clad fiberglass lamination (PCB material),
Tinned copper wire, Silicone elastomer
The TSD201 is a strain gauge transducer designed to measure respiratory-induced changes in thoracic or
abdominal circumference, and can therefore be used to record respiratory effort. The TSD201 is essentially a
resistive transducer and responds in a linear fashion to changes in elongation through its length, with resistance
increasing as length increases.
The transducer is ideal for a variety of applications because it presents minimal resistance to movement and is
extremely unobtrusive. Due to its unique construction, the TSD201 can measure extremely slow respiration
patterns with no loss in signal amplitude while maintaining excellent linearity and minimal hysteresis.
The TSD201 plugs directly into the RSP100C amplifier module. It includes a fully adjustable nylon strap to
accommodate a large range of circumferences (9 cm to 130 cm). To attach the nylon belt to the respiration
transducer, thread the nylon strap through the corresponding slots so the strap clamps into place when tightened.
Place the transducer around the body at the level of maximum respiratory expansion. This location will vary from
the erect to supine positions (generally about 5 cm below the armpits).
Correct tension adjustment of the respiration transducer is important. For best sensitivity, the transducer must be
just slightly tight at the point of minimum circumference (maximum expiration). To obtain proper tension, stretch
the belt around the body and have the subject exhale. At maximum expiration, adjust the nylon strap so there is
slight tension to hold the strap around the chest. For proper operation, there must always be at least a small
amount of tension on the transducer.
The transducer has three 1.5 mm Touchproof connectors to connect to the amplifier. Insert the two blue lead
transducer pin plugs into the two RSP100C inputs labeled XDCR. Either blue lead can be connected to either
XDCR input. Insert the single black transducer lead into the GND input of the RSP100C. The respiration
transducer is ready for measurement. Trace conductive parts (metallic parts) do not make contact to the subject.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD201 | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 12.8.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
PLACEMENT AND CONNECTIONS
using one TSD201 respiration transducer
using two TSD201 respiration transducers
Placement and Connections for Thoracic and Abdominal Respiratory Effort Measurement
TSD201 CALIBRATION
The TSD201 does not require calibration.
TSD201 SPECIFICATIONS
True DC Response:
Yes
Variable Resistance Output:
5-125 KΩ (increases as length increases)
Circumference Range:
15 cm x 150 cm (can be increased with a longer strap)
Attachment:
Velcro® strap (adjustable length)
Sterilizable:
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
Sensor Weight:
18 g
Sensor Dimensions:
66 mm (long), 40 mm (wide), 15 mm (thick)
Cable Length:
3 meters
Interface:
RSP100C
TEL100C compatibility:
SS5B
Frequency Response:
DC-500 Hz
Operating Humidity Range:
0-95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature Range: -20° C to +80° C
Sensitivity: Monotonic analog output. Sufficiently sensitive to detect heart motion in thoracic cavity, in
addition to thoracic/abdominal expansion and contraction.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD201 | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 12.8.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD221-MRI – RESPIRATION TRANSDUCER
This MR Safe fully pneumatic respiration transducer
measures subject respiration (thoracic or abdominal)
in the MRI. The extremely unobtrusive design
presents minimal resistance to movement and can
measure arbitrarily slow to very fast respiration
patterns with no loss in signal amplitude, while
maintaining excellent linearity and minimal
hysteresis.
The TSD221-MRI incorporates a bellows-based
design. As the subject breathes, a minimum and
maximum circumference for respiratory measurement is established, and the tension and relaxation of the bellows
changes the associated bellows pressure. The bellows’ behavior will be a tendency to come to physical
equilibrium at the mean (average) circumference. This behavior results in effective high pass filtering of a very
low value (~0.001 Hz).
The TSD221-MRI includes the respiration sensor in a mesh strap with self-adhering adjustable chest band (70
cm), a pressure transducer (±2.5 cm H2O TSD160A), and three cascadable segments of tubing for up to 15.8 m
(AFT30-XL 10 m, AFT30-L 4 m, and AFT30 1.8 m). TSD221-MRI has no ferrous metals or conductive parts.
The TSD221-MRI connects to the DA100C and an MP150 system (and does not require the MECMRI-DA or
MECMRI-TRANS cable sets).
MRI Use:
MR Safe
Components: Respiration sensor in compliant mesh sleeving, adjustable flexible chest band: TSD160A
transducer, tubing for up to 15.8 meters (AFT30XL + AFT30L + AFT30).
Placement and Connections
Place the transducer around the body at the level of maximum
respiratory expansion, generally about 5 cm below the armpits
but location will vary from the erect to supine positions. Correct
tension adjustment of the respiration transducer is important. For
best sensitivity, the transducer must be just slightly tight at the
point of minimum circumference (maximum expiration). To
obtain proper tension, stretch the belt around the body and have
the subject exhale. At maximum expiration, adjust the nylon
strap so there is slight tension to hold the strap around the chest.
To use the TSD221-MRI, place sensing band around subject’s
chest and attach pneumatic tubing to the band. Then route tubing
from the MRI table/bore through an available wave guide to
location of MP System with DA100C and TSD160A pressure
transducer, and attach tubing to the pressure transducer port. Be
careful to check all tubing junctions, as the transducer will fail to
operate optimally if any leaks are present.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD221-MRI | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 10.21.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD221-MRI Specifications
Sensor Construction:
True DC Response:
Pneumatic Design:
Sensitivity:
MR Safe materials
Yes
Attaches to TSD160A/DA100C
Linear Analog Output. Sufficiently sensitive to detect heart motion in thoracic
cavity, in addition to thoracic/abdominal expansion and contraction.
Circumference Range:
50 cm x 120 cm (can be increased with a longer strap)
Attachment:
Velcro® strap (adjustable length)
Sterilizable:
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
Sensor Weight:
67 grams
Sensor Dimensions:
45 cm (long), 3.8 cm (wide), 1.1 cm (thick)
Tubing:
AFT30XL, 10 m, AFT30L, 4 m, AFT30, 1.8 m
TSD160A
Operational Pressure ±2.5 cm H2O
Voltage Output: 327.5 µV/cm H2O (normalized to 1 V excitation)
Click for detailed transducer specs
Interface:
DA100C
Frequency Response:
0.001 – 100 Hz*
Sensor Operating Humidity Range: 0-100% (can be used under water)
Operating Temperature Range:
0° C to 50° C (compensated)
Respiration Measurement Options: TSD201 for MP150 System (MR Conditional for 7T)
SS5LB for MP36 or MP36R System
SS5B for TEL100C Telemetry System
*NOTE: With any pressure based system, minute leaks are possible. Air leaks will contribute to a high pass
filtering of respiration data. As long as leaks are minute, associated high pass filtering action will not
materially affect the quality of the respiration data. To largely circumvent high pass filtering effects of
leaks on respiration data, simply record data with the 0.05 Hz HP filter selected on the
associated module.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD221-MRI | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 10.21.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SKT100C – SKIN TEMPERATURE AMPLIFIER MODULE
The SKT100C skin temperature amplifier module is a single channel, differential amplifier designed especially
for skin and core temperature and respiration flow (rate) monitoring. The SKT100C is designed for use in the
following applications:
General temperature measurement
Psychophysiological investigations
Respiration rate determination
Sleep studies
The SKT100C employs any of the BIOPAC TSD202 series thermistor transducers to measure temperature. The
SKT100C includes a lower frequency response selection switch that permits either absolute (DC) or relative (via a
0.05 Hz or 0.5 Hz high pass filter) temperature measurements.
Connections and placement for measuring
respiration flow using the SKT100C and the
TSD202A fast-response surface temperature
thermistor.
Respiration flow measurement using
SKT100C and TSD202B
Connections and placement for measuring
index fingertip temperature using the
SKT100C and the TSD202D digit surface
temperature probe. The probe is secured to the
finger using the Velcro strap on the
transducer.
Index finger temperature measurement with TSD202D
This graph shows the relationship between
fingertip skin temperature, skin conductance
and heart rate. This configuration of
physiological measurements can be useful for
psychological testing and evaluation.
SKT versus EDA versus Heart Rate Waveforms
BIOPAC Hardware | SKT100C | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 1.8.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
The 0.05 Hz high pass lower frequency response setting is a single pole roll-off filter.
Modules can be set for 50 Hz or 60 Hz notch options, depending on the destination country. Generally, wallpower line frequency is 60 Hz in the United States and 50 Hz in most of Europe and China; if necessary contact
BIOPAC to determine the appropriate line frequency.
See also: Sample frequency response plots: 1 Hz LP and 10 Hz LP
SKT100C CALIBRATION
Temperature Measurements
To measure absolute temperature, set the lower frequency response to DC.
To measure relative temperature changes, set the lower frequency response to 0.05 Hz or 0.5 Hz.
To set up AcqKnowledge to record temperature directly, perform the following:
A. Lower frequency response at DC:
In the scaling window, set the input voltages so they map to the respective temperature ranges indicated
by the sensitivity setting. In this case, 0 V will always map to 90° F.
B. Lower frequency response at 0.05 Hz or 0.5 Hz:
In the scaling window, set the input voltages so they map to the respective temperature ranges indicated
by the sensitivity setting. In this case, 0 V will map to the mean (average) temperature during the
recording. Use this setting when temperature delta measurement is important, as when monitoring airflow
(respiration rate).
Skin Temperature Measurements
To measure absolute skin temperature, place the lower frequency response to DC.
To measure relative skin temperature changes or respiration rate (airflow), place the lower frequency response
to 0.05 Hz or 0.5 Hz.
To set up AcqKnowledge to record temperature directly, perform the following:
A. Lower frequency response to DC:
In the scaling window, set the input voltages so they
map to the “DC on” temperature ranges indicated by
the sensitivity setting. In this case, 0 V will always
map to 90° F.
B. Lower frequency response to 0.05 Hz or 0.5 Hz.:
In the scaling window, set the input voltages so they
map to the respective temperature ranges indicated by
the sensitivity setting. In this case, 0 V will map to the
mean (average) temperature measured during the
recording and 1 V will map to one-half the “delta
range” values, which corresponds to the chosen Gain
setting.
Scaling setup window set to correspond to
5°/V setting on SKT100C
BIOPAC Hardware | SKT100C | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 1.8.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
SKT100C SPECIFICATIONS
Gain:
5, 2, 1, 0.5 °F/V— can also calibrate in °C (see Input Signal Range below)
Output Range:
±10 V (analog)
Low Pass Filter:
1 Hz, 10 Hz
High Pass Filter:
DC, 0.05 Hz, 0.5 Hz
Sensitivity:
180 micro °F (100 micro °C)— with MP System
Signal Source:
TSD202 Series Temperature Probe
Weight:
350 g
Dimensions:
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
Input Connectors:
Three 1.5 mm male Touchproof sockets (VIN+, Ground, VIN-)
Input Signal Range:
Gain
5
2
1
0.5
Range (°F)
40-140
70-110
80-100
85-95
Range (°C)
4.44-60
21.11-43.33
26.67-37.78
29.44-35
Delta Range (°F) Delta Range (°C)
100
55.56
50
27.78
20
11.11
10
5.56
BIOPAC Hardware | SKT100C | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 1.8.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD202 SERIES TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCERS
MRI Usage: MR Conditional (TSD202A and TSD202E only)
Condition: Tested to 3T.
TSD202A and TSD202E Components: Silicon semiconductor, copper wire, polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) plastic
TSD202A
The TSD202A employs a fast response thermistor, and is appropriate for use in locations where
temperature changes rapidly, as with the temperature changes of inspired/expired breath. The
TSD202A is useful for measuring skin temperature (in small areas) or airflow rate resulting from
respiration, and is not designed for liquid immersion. For measuring skin (surface) temperature,
simply tape the TSD202A to the location of interest. For measuring respiration rates, by monitoring
airflow, place the TSD202A next to the mouth or nose so that inspired or exhaled air will intercept
the tip of the TSD202A transducer. Trace conductive parts (metallic parts) do not make contact to
the subject.
RX202A Replacement Fast-response Temperature Sensor
TSD202B
The TSD202B is a “Banjo” style surface probe useful for measuring surface temperature. The
“Banjo” design allows efficient skin temperature measurements on a variety of body locations. The
TSD202B is not designed for liquid immersion. For measuring skin (surface) temperature, simply
tape the TSD202B to the location of interest.
TSD202C
The TSD202C encases the internal thermistor in a stainless steel, waterproof housing, and is
designed for liquid immersion and other temperature measurement applications where ruggedness
is required and fast response is not critical.
TSD202D
The TSD202D is a modified TSD202B, with a housing that conforms to curved skin surfaces and
includes a stretchy Velcro® strap for easy attachment to the fingers or toes. The “Banjo” design
allows efficient skin temperature measurements. The TSD202D is not designed for liquid
immersion. For measuring skin (surface) temperature, simply tape the TSD202D to the location of
interest. Insert the two blue lead transducer pin plugs into the two SKT100C inputs labeled XDCR.
Either blue lead can be connected to either XDCR input.
TSD202E
The TSD202E is a general-purpose waterproof thermistor. Trace conductive parts (metallic parts)
do not make contact to the subject.
TSD202F
The TSD202F is a small, flexible waterproof thermistor.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD202 Series | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 1.10.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
TSD202 SERIES SPECIFICATIONS
Response Time
TSD202A:
TSD202B:
TSD202C:
TSD202D:
TSD202E:
TSD202F:
Size with housing
TSD202A:
TSD202B:
TSD202C:
TSD202D:
(TSD202D – sensor only:
TSD202E:
TSD202F:
Sensor only:
Interface:
Nominal Resistance:
Maximum operating temperature:
Accuracy and Interchangability
Cable length:
Compatibility:
Sterilizable:
TEL100 Compatibility:
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
0.6 sec
1.1 sec
3.6 sec
1.1 sec
0.9 sec
1.1 sec
1.7 mm (diameter) x 5 mm (long)
9.8 mm (diameter) x 3.3 mm (high)
4 mm (diameter) x 115 mm (long)
16 mm (long) x 17 mm (wide) x 8 mm (high)
10 mm sensing diameter, 1.4 mm sensor thickness)
9.8 mm (long) x 3.3 mm (diameter)
9.8 mm (long) x 3.3 mm (diameter)
10 mm sensing diameter, 1.4 mm sensor thickness
SKT100C
2252 Ω at 25° C
60° C (when used with SKT100C)
0.2° C
3 meters
YSI series 400 temperature probes
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
SS6
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD202 Series | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 1.10.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ELECTRODES
In selecting the application site for any style of electrode, care should be taken that:
1) Electrode site is dry and free of excessive hair.
2) Electrode is not placed over scar tissue or on an area of established erythema or with a lesion of any kind.
3) Skin is properly prepared. (Prepare the skin at the electrode site. Use the ELPAD to lightly abrade the skin
surface. Use a brisk dry rub to prepare the application site. Avoid excessive abrasion of the skin surface.)
EL120
The EL120 electrode has contact posts designed to improve
contact through fur or hair. The 12 posts create a 10 mm
contact area. The posts are 2mm deep to push through fur/hair
to provide good contact with the skin surface.
Shipped in packs of 10.
Silver-silver chloride (Ag-AgCl) electrodes provide accurate and clear transmission of surface biopotentials and
are useful for recording all surface biopotentials on animals and human EEG.
Notes:
 It is not necessary to use an EL120 for the ground; a generic electrode can be used for ground.
 Requires one LEAD120 per electrode.
BIOPAC Hardware | EL120 | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 2.28.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ELECTRODES
In selecting the application site for any style of electrode, care should be taken that:
1) Electrode site is dry and free of excessive hair.
2) Electrode is not placed over scar tissue or on an area of established erythema or with a lesion of any kind.
3) Skin is properly prepared. (Prepare the skin at the electrode site. Use the ELPAD to lightly abrade the skin
surface. Use a brisk dry rub to prepare the application site. Avoid excessive abrasion of the skin surface.)
EL160 Gold Cup
Reusable gold cup electrode with 10 mm cup diameter and 1.2 m cable.
One electrode per package.
• EL160 with black cable
• EL160-R with red cable
• EL160-W with white cable
The leadwire terminates in a standard Touchproof connector. Use with MEC Series
Module Extension Cables for MP150 Systems or SS1LA Touchproof Electrode Lead
Adapter for MP3X Systems.
EL160-Ear – Ear Clip Electrodes
This pair of gold-plated ear clip electrodes has 1.2 meter Tefloninsulated leadwires ending in standard Touchproof connectors.
Use with MEC Series Module Extension Cables for MP
Research Systems or SS1LA Touchproof Electrode Lead
Adapter for BSL Systems.
Before use, check the electrode for damage and excessive wear.
If in doubt, replace it.
Also available as individual standard gold cup electrodes: EL160 with green cable, EL160-R with red cable, and
EL160-W with white cable.
Please do not use these electrodes unless you have been trained in the proper use and placement of these devices.
Cleaning Earclips and Surface Electrodes
After each use clean with warm water and a mild detergent. Use a soft cloth or Q-tip. Then disinfect with 70%
alcohol or a water based disinfectant. Do not soak in water for prolonged periods, it causes deterioration of the
electrode.
EL160-Ear Specifications
Electrodes:
two
Material:
Au Cup (gold plated discs)
Style:
Ear Clip Electrodes
Leadwires:
1.2 meter Teflon-insulated leadwires
Connector:
leadwires terminate in standard Touchproof connectors
Non-sterile
Reusable
BIOPAC Hardware | EL160 Series | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 6.10.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ELECTRODES
In selecting the application site for any style of electrode, care should be taken that:
1) Electrode site is dry and free of excessive hair.
2) Electrode is not placed over scar tissue or on an area of established erythema or with a lesion of any kind.
3) Skin is properly prepared. (Prepare the skin at the electrode site. Use the ELPAD to lightly abrade the skin
surface. Use a brisk dry rub to prepare the application site. Avoid excessive abrasion of the skin surface.)
EL250 Series Reusable Ag-AgCI Electrodes
EL250 Series reusable electrodes incorporate a variety of features which improve biopotential recordings.

Non-polarizable

Sintered to increase electrode/electrolyte contact area

Does not require chloriding

Reusable via resurfacing

High stability recordings, to DC, when used with chloride salt gel electrolyte

Electrolyte gel cavity reduces artifact due to electrolyte/electrode motion and minimizes electrolyte
dissipation/drying over long term recordings
Surface biopotentials can be accurately and clearly transmitted with silver-silver chloride electrodes. EL250
Series reusable electrodes are permanently connected to 1-meter leads and terminate in standard 1.5 mm female
Touchproof sockets for direct connection to the SS1L shielded electrode lead adapter. Use shielded electrode
leads for minimal interference. The unshielded electrode leads work best as ground electrodes. Typically, one
biopotential input requires two shielded electrodes for signal inputs and one unshielded electrode for ground.
EL254
EL254S
EL258
EL258S
EL258H
Ag-AgCl Unshielded Electrode, 7.2 mm diameter housing, 4 mm contact area, includes 1 m lead
terminated with a 1.5 mm female Touchproof socket for connection to the SS1L.
Ag-AgCl Shielded Electrode, 7.2 mm diameter housing, 4 mm contact area, includes 1 meter lead
terminated with two 1.5 mm female Touchproof sockets for connection to the SS1L. The gray lead
plug is for the electrode contact; the black lead pin plug is for the lead shield.
Ag-AgCl Unshielded Electrode, 12.5 mm diameter housing, 8 mm contact area, includes 1 meter lead
terminated with a 1.5 mm female Touchproof socket for connection to the SS1L.
Ag-AgCl Shielded Electrode, 12.5 mm diameter housing, 8 mm contact area, includes 1 meter lead
terminated with two 1.5 mm female Touchproof sockets for connection to the SS1L. The gray lead
plug is for the electrode contact; the black lead pin plug is for the lead shield.
Features a 2 mm gel injection hole, useful for EEG monitoring; use as both recording and reference
electrodes. 12.5 mm diameter housing, 8 mm contact area, 1 m lead terminated with 1.5 mm female
Touchproof socket for connection to the SS1L.
EL250 Series Radiotranslucent Ag-AgCI Recording Electrodes (Animals Only)
MRI Use: MR Conditional (tested to 9T)
Condition: For use with animals only, due to possible heating hazards associated with incomplete
filling of gel reservoir with electrode gel.
EL254RT/258RT Components:
Electrode: Ag/AgCl
Lead wire: Carbon
Enclosure: Epoxy
Wire insulation: PVC
BIOPAC Hardware | EL250 SERIES | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 1.12.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
EL254RT Silver-silver chloride (Ag-AgC1) electrodes provide accurate and clear transmission of surface
biopotentials. Reusable electrodes are permanently connected to robust and pliable leadwires. The
leadwires terminate in standard Touchproof connectors for interfacing to 100C series Biopotential
modules or extension cables. 7.2 mm diameter housing, 4 mm contact area, includes 1.5 m lead
terminated with a 1.5 mm female Touchproof socket for connection to the SS1L.
EL258RT As described above for EL254RT but with larger dimensions. 12.5 mm diameter housing, 8 mm
contact area, includes 1.5 m lead terminated with 1.5 mm female Touchproof socket for connection to
the SS1L.
 All EL250 Series electrodes require adhesive disks (ADD200 series) and recording gel
(GEL1 or the preferred recording gel). See the Electrode Accessories section for further
description.
Instructions for EL250 Series Electrodes
1) Store electrodes in clean, dry area.
2) After use, clean electrode with cold to tepid water
a) DO NOT use hot water.
b) Cotton swabs are suggested.
3) The electrodes should be completely dry before returning to storage.
4) DO NOT allow the electrodes to come in contact with each other during storage (adverse reaction could take
place).
 Electrodes may form a brown coating if they have not been used regularly. This should be removed by
gently polishing the surface of the electrode element with non-metallic material. Wiping with mild
ammonium hydroxide will also remove this coating. Rinse with water and store the electrode in a clean,
dry container.
5) Remove an appropriate size electrode washer (ADD204, ADD208, or ADD212) from its waxed paper strip
and carefully apply the washer to the electrode so the center hole of the washer is directly over the electrode
cavity.
6) Fill the cavity with electrode gel (GEL100). No air bubbles should be present in the cavity.
7) Remove the white backing from the washer to expose the second adhesive side.
8) Place electrode on prepared skin area and smooth the washer into place.
9) Apply a few drops of electrode gel to fingertip and rub the exposed side of the adhesive washer (around the
electrode) to rid its surface of adhesive quality.
BIOPAC Hardware | EL250 SERIES | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 1.12.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ELECTRODES
In selecting the application site for any style of electrode, care should be taken that:
1) Electrode site is dry and free of excessive hair.
2) Electrode is not placed over scar tissue or on an area of established erythema or with a lesion of any kind.
3) Skin is properly prepared. (Prepare the skin at the electrode site. Use the ELPAD to lightly abrade the skin
surface. Use a brisk dry rub to prepare the application site. Avoid excessive abrasion of the skin surface.)
EL350 SERIES BAR LEAD ELECTRODES
Bar lead electrodes are recommended when applying a stimulus during nerve conduction, somatosensory or
muscle twitch recordings with human subjects. Two concave tin electrode disks are placed 30mm apart in a
watertight acrylic bar.
EL350
unshielded bar lead electrode for use with the STMISO.
EL350S
shielded bar lead electrode for biopotential recordings.
EL351
convex bar lead electrode for stimulating
EL350 SPECIFICATIONS
Electrode space:
Lead length:
Connector type:
Interface:
30 mm
61 cm
BNC
BSLSTM Stimulator or SS58L Low Voltage Stimulator
BIOPAC Hardware | EL350 SERIES | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ELECTRODES
In selecting the application site for any style of electrode, care should be taken that:
1) Electrode site is dry and free of excessive hair.
2) Electrode is not placed over scar tissue or on an area of established erythema or with a lesion of any kind.
3) Skin is properly prepared. (Prepare the skin at the electrode site. Use the ELPAD to lightly abrade the skin
surface. Use a brisk dry rub to prepare the application site. Avoid excessive abrasion of the skin surface.)
EL450 SERIES NEEDLE ELECTRODES
Use for stimulation or recording in animal subjects and tissue preparations. The 28-gauge stainless steel needles
are Teflon-coated, with flexible cable terminating in 1.5 mm Touchproof connectors. The coating prevents the
needle from making contact with the subject except at the very tip of the needle, which is exposed. For
applications that require better contact between the electrode and the subject to record a good signal, abrade the
needle to remove the Teflon coating.
Needle electrodes are shipped non-sterile, so pre-sterilization is required.
EL450
Unipolar: 2.5 cm (long) x 300 µm (dia); 61 cm lead
A pair of EL450 electrodes is suitable for either recording or stimulation.
EL451
Bipolar: 3.0 cm (long) x 460 µm (dia); 91 cm lead
Use when recording from a single site, as in studies of single muscle fibers.
EL452
Unipolar, uncoated: 1.5 cm (long) x 300 µm (dia); 61 cm lead
BIOPAC Hardware | EL450 SERIES | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
EL500 SERIES – DISPOSABLE ELECTRODES
EL504
EL50
8
EL509
EL510
The EL500 Series disposable, Ag/AgCl snap electrodes provide the same signal transmission as BIOPAC’s
reusable electrodes, with added convenience and hygiene. Each peel-and-stick electrode is pre-gelled and
designed for one time use only.
Use the EL500 series electrodes with a wide range of BIOPAC electrode leads and cables, such as SS1L, SS1LA,
SS2L, SS2LA, SS2LB, LEAD108 series, Lead 110 series, Lead 110S series or any BIOPAC lead or electrode
lead cable assembly indicated for use with snap electrodes.
Electrode Properties – Electrolyte Gel and Chloride Salt Concentration
For electrode gels (electrolytes), the higher the chloride salt content, the more conductive the electrode. Higher
salt content, pre-gelled, surface electrodes are useful for making fast, high quality measurements of biopotentials,
once the electrodes are applied to the skin surface. In addition, wet (liquid) gels further accelerate this process
because the electrolyte migrates into the skin surface layers more easily and rapidly. High conductivity electrodes
generally have reduced artifact, due to the low generated impedance between electrode and skin surface.
As the chloride salt content of the electrolyte drops, the less conductive the electrode. As the chloride content
drops to 10% or less, then the electrode can be increasingly employed for long-term recording (greater than 2
hours), with reduced chance for skin irritation. In addition, hydrogels are gentler on the skin than wet (liquid) gels
of the same salt concentration. Hydrogel based electrolytes will not migrate into the skin surface as easily or
rapidly as with wet gels.
For Electrodermal activity measurements it’s important to use an electrode with similar (isotonic) chloride salt
content as per the skin surface, so as not to hypersaturate or hyposaturate the eccrine glands.
The impedance of the electrode/skin junction is highly dependent on the electrolyte type and the chloride salt
concentration. For example, a hydrogel electrode with 4% chloride concentration will have about 10x higher
impedance than a wet liquid gel electrode with 10% chloride concentration, after first application to the skin.
Electrode Properties – Backing Adhesive
The 500 series disposable electrodes come with a range of adhesive qualities. All electrodes are designed to
adhere well to skin surfaces, but the adhesion characteristics can be grouped depending on the application.
The three adhesive groups are identified as follows:
Group 1: strong adhesive
Group 2: moderate adhesive, high tack
Group 3: moderate adhesive, low tack
BIOPAC Hardware | EL500 SERIES | Page 1 - 6
Updated: 3.30.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Strong adhesive electrodes are best for biopotential measurements when the subject is moving. Moderate adhesive
electrodes are optimal for long-term recordings. Lower tack electrodes can be repositioned and are best suited for
delicate skin surfaces.
Usage Descriptions - 500 Series Disposable Ag/AgCl electrodes:
EL500: Dual high adhesion, high conductivity, low artifact, biopotential electrodes
EL501: High adhesion, high conductivity, low artifact, biopotential electrode
EL502: Long-term recording, high adhesion, low artifact, biopotential electrode
EL503: General purpose, economical, high conductivity, biopotential electrode
EL504: Long-term recording, moderate adhesion, high compliance, low artifact, gentle, biopotential electrode
EL506: Bioimpedance, cardiac output use, strip electrode to establish equipotential lines on skin surface
EL507: Electrodermal activity measurement electrode
EL508: MR Conditional electrode for general-purpose use – use only with LEAD108 series leads
EL509: MR Conditional electrode for electrodermal activity measurement – use only with LEAD108 series leads
EL510: MR Conditional electrode and lead set for general-purpose use
Skin Preparation
For highest electrode to skin conductivity, the skin should be lightly abraded with a gentle abrasive wipe, such as
BIOPAC’s ELPAD. An alcohol wipe is not recommended, to improve conductivity, as this will only serve to dry
out the skin surface. Lightly abrading the top layer of the epidermis will effectively remove dead skin cells and
prepare the skin site to establish a high conductivity path, once the gelled electrode is applied.
After application, the electrode can be verified for robust galvanic connection to the skin via impedance checking.
BIOPAC’s EL-CHECK can be used to measure the impedance between any two applied surface electrodes.
Because each electrode/electrolyte junction forms a half-cell, impedance measurements are more accurately
measured at some frequency resident in the band of biopotentials. EL-CHECK operates by injecting a 3.5 uA rms
constant current of 25 Hz through the electrodes undergoing impedance check. The complete series impedance
loop, including both electrodes/skin junction and coupling body impedance, is reported. Ideally, the reading
should be 10,000 ohms or less (approximately 5000 ohms per electrode). In practice, BIOPAC biopotential
amplifiers are very tolerant of electrode/skin impedances, even higher than 50,000 ohms. However, the highest
quality recordings will always be accompanied by electrode/skin impedance junctions of 10,000 ohms or less.
BIOPAC Hardware | EL500 SERIES | Page 2 - 6
Updated: 3.30.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Electrode Chloride Salt Content and Adhesive Backing
Disposable Electrode Ag/AgCi
Chloride Salt %
Electrode Backing Adhesive
EL500
10% (wet gel)
Strong
EL501
10% (wet gel)
Strong
EL502
4% (hydrogel)
Moderate, high tack
EL503
7% (wet gel)
Moderate, high tack
EL504
4% (hydrogel)
Moderate, low tack
EL506
n/a: dry strip electrode – use any gel
Moderate, low tack
EL507
0.5% (wet gel)
Strong
EL508
10% (wet gel)
Moderate, high tack
EL509
n/a: dry electrode – use any gel
Strong
EL510
4% (hydrogel)
Moderate, low tack
Wet (liquid) electrolyte
The chloride salt content in WET gel electrodes from BIOPAC varies:
 10% is used for short term applications such as resting ECG or stress test
 7% is a more universal gel and can be used short term for most subjects, though some react long term
 4% is a long-term, monitoring gel used for more than 24 hours
 0.5% in electrodermal activity (EDA) electrodes
Hydrogel (solid) electrolyte
The chloride salt content in all hydrogel, solid electrolyte, electrodes from BIOPAC is 4%. This universal gel can
be used short and long term, and is suitable for adult and infants.
Duration
BIOPAC does not recommend for applications running more than 24 hours.
Irritation Factors
Possible skin irritation can result from the gel or the adhesive on the tape backing of the electrode. To reduce the
potential for skin irritation, choose an electrode which has lower electrolyte chloride content, reduced tape
backing skin adhesion and electrolyte is hydrogel-based. Overall, the least impactful skin electrodes are the
EL504, EL506 and EL510.
Note: About 2% of the population will react to any adhesives and gels put on a skin, regardless of
composition or concentration. Internal body fluids are about 0.9% chloride salt. Skin sweat is typically
0.1% to 0.4% chloride salt.
BIOPAC Hardware | EL500 SERIES | Page 3 - 6
Updated: 3.30.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Part
Ag/AgCl Adhesive/Disposable Electrode Type
EL500
Paired, pre-gelled, electrodes: The fixed spacing between the contacts of these dual electrodes are
useful for general-purpose EMG measurements, electrical stimulation, bioimpedance and cardiac
output studies. Hypo-allergenic, wet liquid gel electrolyte (10% chloride salt).
These electrodes incorporate a gel cavity (16 mm diameter, 1.5 mm deep) situated between
electrode and skin surfaces that helps reduce motion artifact.
Dual Ag/AgCl electrode conductors: 11 mm diameter, 95 mm2 conductive contact area, 41 mm
spacing (center to center) mounted on 41 mm x 82 mm, moisture resistant, latex free, 1.5 mm thick
foam tape with strong adhesive.
Dual
Electrodes
EL501
Stress Test
Electrodes
EL502
Long-term
Recording
Electrodes
EL503
Generalpurpose
electrode
EL504
High
Flexibility
Electrodes
Small stress test, pre-gelled, electrodes: Use for short-term recordings where the subject may be in
motion or when electrodes should be closely placed, as for multi-channel ECG, EGG, EMG or
EOG. Hypo-allergenic wet liquid gel electrolyte (10% chloride salt). These electrodes incorporate a
gel cavity (16 mm diameter, 1.5 mm deep) situated between electrode and skin surfaces that helps
reduce motion artifact.
Single Ag/AgCl electrode conductor: 11 mm diameter, 95 mm2 conductive contact area, mounted
on 40 mm diameter, moisture resistant, latex free, 1.5 mm thick foam tape with strong adhesive.
Small, pre-gelled, electrodes. Most appropriate for long-term ( > 2 hours ) biopotential
measurements. Hypo-allergenic, hydrogel, solid, electrolyte (4% chloride salt) that adheres well to
skin, but leaves no residue when removed.
Single Ag/AgCl electrode conductor: 11 mm diameter, 95 mm2 conductive contact area mounted
on 41 mm diameter, moisture resistant, latex free, vinyl backing tape (0.12 mm thick) with
moderately strong adhesive. The hydrogel base also lends these electrodes to electrical stimulation
studies, such as for nerve conduction velocity or tDCS.
Small, pre-gelled, electrodes: These economical electrodes are most suitable for general purpose,
short-term recordings. The small diameter permits relatively closely-spaced biopotential recording.
Hypo-allergenic wet liquid gel electrolyte (7% chloride salt).
Single Ag/AgCl electrode conductor: 11 mm diameter, 95 mm2 conductive contact area mounted
on 35 mm diameter, moisture resistant, latex free, vinyl backing tape (0.12 mm thick) with
moderately strong adhesive.
Small, pre-gelled, electrodes. Most appropriate for long-term (greater than 2 hours) biopotential
measurements. Hypo-allergenic, hydrogel, solid, electrolyte (4% chloride salt) that adheres well to
skin, but leaves no residue when removed.
Single Ag/AgCl electrode conductor: 11 mm diameter, 95 mm2 conductive contact area mounted
on a cloth-based, 2.5 cm x 2.5 cm porous, latex free, backing fabric tape (0.2 mm thick).
Particularly useful for applications on non-conforming surfaces, such as the face for EMG or
fingers for nerve conduction studies.
The electrodes are very comfortable and conform easily to a great variety of skin surfaces. These
are optimal electrodes for facial EMG recording, due to gentle adhesion, high flexibility, cloth base
and low potential for skin irritation. These electrodes are useful for general ECG, EMG and sleep
studies. The hydrogel base also lends these electrodes to electrical stimulation studies, such as for
nerve conduction velocity or tDCS. These latex-free, hypo-allergenic, electrodes adhere well to the
skin, can be repositioned and are suitable for long term use with minimal irritation.
BIOPAC Hardware | EL500 SERIES | Page 4 - 6
Updated: 3.30.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
Part
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Ag/AgCl Adhesive/Disposable Electrode Type
This unique disposable strip electrode is designed for bioimpedance applications. The electrode is
silver laminated on medical grade porous cloth, with industry-standard medical grade adhesive,
Alternative
medium tackiness. The silver/silver chloride (Ag/AgCl) electrode provides accurate and clear
for band
transmission of surface biopotentials and is latex free. The Ag/AgCl center, strip conductor is free
electrodes
of electrode gel and is designed for direct connection to the skin surface. If desired, a thin bead of
electrode gel (GEL 100) can be added to the surface of the center conductor before application to
the skin surface.
Strip length: 250 mm, Conductive element width: 6.5 mm, Adhesive width: 2 x 9 mm (9 mm
strip on either side of conductive strip,) Cloth backing width: 24.5 mm
Advantages of the Strip Electrode:
 Combines the convenience of standard snap (spot) electrodes with the signal to noise,
equipotential and current diffusion performance of band electrodes
 Less obtrusive than band electrodes - easier for subjects to move and breathe
 Ergonomic advantages of snap (spot) electrodes
 Diffuses currents similarly to band electrodes (reduces current density)
 Provides voltage measurements through a well-defined equipotential plane
 Adjustable size - cut the 250 mm strip to the desired size for optimal fit
 Snap lead connection
 Latex free
 Peel-and-stick convenience
 Disposable
EL506
EL507
EDA
Electrodes
EL508
MRI
GeneralPurpose
Electrodes
Designed for electrodermal activity (EDA) measurements and are pre-gelled with isotonic gel.
Isotonic gel is recommended for EDA measurements to establish physiological ionic equivalency
to the skin surface. The electrodes conform and adhere well to a variety of skin surfaces. Typically,
they are applied around fingers to create a firm bond. Also, these electrodes are very suitable for
attachment to the palm of hand, wrist, toes or sole of foot. These electrodes incorporate a gel cavity
(16 mm diameter, 1.5 mm deep) situated between electrode and skin surfaces that helps to stabilize
measurements and reduce motion artifact.
Wet Gel: 0.5% chloride salt (isotonic,) Electrode Contact Diameter: 11 mm, Electrode Contact
Area: 95 mm2, Size: 27 mm x 36 mm, Backing: 1.5 mm thick foam, latex free
These disposable, radio-translucent electrodes are pre-gelled. Use with LEAD108.
MRI Use:
MR Conditional
Condition:
Up to 7T, any scanning sequence. Up to 9T on animals. Use with LEAD108 series
only.
Electrode contact type: Ag/AgCl laminated on carbon composition plastic snap, Wet Gel: 10%
chloride salt, Electrode Contact Diameter: 11 mm, Electrode Contact Area: 95 mm2, Vinyl Tape
Backing: 41 mm diameter, 0.12 mm thick, latex free
EL508 Components: Substrate: Tape with medical grade adhesive, Label: Bi-Oriented
Polypropylene (BOPP) or Vinyl, Stud: 40% Carbon-filled ABS plastic, Eyelet: 20% glass-filled
ABS plastic coated with Ag/AgCl, Reticulated foam: Polyester-polyurethane, Gel: 10% chloride
salt wet liquid gel electrolyte
BIOPAC Hardware | EL500 SERIES | Page 5 - 6
Updated: 3.30.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
EL509
MRI
EDA
Electrodes
EL510
MRI
X-ray
Electrodes
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
These disposable, radio-translucent, dry electrodes have a very long shelf-life and are ideal for
electrodermal activity (EDA) measurements. They are content and dimensionally equivalent to the
EL507 series electrodes, but with carbon composition snap and gel-free. Use with LEAD108 and
isotonic electrode gel - GEL101 recommended for EDA.
Isotonic gel is recommended for EDA measurements to establish physiological ionic equivalency
to the skin surface. The electrodes conform and adhere well to a variety of skin surfaces. Typically,
they are applied around fingers to create a firm bond. Also, these electrodes are very suitable for
attachment to the palm of hand, wrist, toes or sole of foot. These electrodes incorporate a gel cavity
(16 mm diameter, 1.5 mm deep) situated between electrode and skin surfaces that helps to stabilize
measurements and reduce motion artifact.
MRI Use:
MR Conditional
Condition:
Up to 7T, any scanning sequence. Up to 9T on animals. Use with LEAD108 series
only.
Electrode contact type: Ag/AgCl laminated on carbon composition plastic snap, Electrode Contact
Diameter: 11 mm, Electrode Contact Area: 95 mm2, Size: 27 mm x 36 mm, Backing: 1.5 mm thick
foam, latex free
To add gel:
1. Fill back cavity (adhesive side) with gel.
2. Add a drop of gel to the sponge pad.
3. Place the sponge pad into the cavity.
4. Press firmly to clear air pockets.
EL509 Components: Substrate: Tape with medical
grade adhesive, Label: Bi-Oriented Polypropylene (BOPP) or Vinyl, Stud: 40% Carbon-filled ABS
plastic, Eyelet: 20% glass-filled ABS plastic coated with Ag/AgCl, Reticulated foam: Polyesterpolyurethane, Gel: none; add BIOPAC GEL101 at time of application.
EL510 is a disposable, radio-translucent, set of three electrodes with hydrogel (4% chloride salt)
electrolyte centers and hydrocolloid ends that terminate in Touchproof leads. Each box includes 20
sets of 3 electrodes. Electrodes are 25 mm x 10 mm with a 10 mm x 10 mm, gelled, contact area.
The thin, flexible, carbon composition leads are 58 cm long.
MRI Use:
MR Conditional
Condition:
Tested up to 3T, any scanning sequence, radiolucent head
 Pre-wired, carbon composition leads
 Ag/AgCl contact type
 Safely secures to limbs without a strap that
could reduce circulation.
 Gentle hydrogel centers and hydrocolloid
ends adhesives
 Long lasting and easy to use, even under
high humidity
 Radio-translucent materials allow for X-ray passage
 Latex, phthalate/DEHP, BPA free
BIOPAC Hardware | EL500 SERIES | Page 6 - 6
Updated: 3.30.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ELECTRODES
In selecting the application site for any style of electrode, care should be taken that:
1) Electrode site is dry and free of excessive hair.
2) Electrode is not placed over scar tissue or on an area of established erythema or with a lesion of any kind.
3) Skin is properly prepared. (Prepare the skin at the electrode site. Use the ELPAD to lightly abrade the skin
surface. Use a brisk dry rub to prepare the application site. Avoid excessive abrasion of the skin surface.)
EL650 SERIES REUSABLE SNAP ELECTRODES
EL650 Series reusable snap electrodes incorporate a variety of features which improve biopotential recordings.

Non-polarizable

Sintered to increase electrode/electrolyte contact area

Does not require chloriding

Reusable via resurfacing

High stability recordings, to DC, when used with chloride salt gel electrolyte

Electrolyte gel cavity reduces artifact due to electrolyte/electrode motion and minimizes electrolyte
dissipation/drying over long term recordings
EL654
This is a reusable Ag-AgCl snap electrode with a 4 mm diameter.
EL658
This is a reusable Ag-AgCl snap electrode with a 8 mm diameter.
Use with ADD204 adhesive collars and interface with LEAD110S Series snap electrode leads or
BioNomadix electrode lead sets.
EL654/658 SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor diameter: 4 mm Ag-AgCl (EL654,) 8 mm Ag-AgCl (EL658)
Housing diameter: 13 mm
Overall height: 6 mm (EL654,) 8 mm (EL658)
Gel cavity: 2 mm deep
Snap: 1 mm thick Ag-AgCl sintered sensor element mounted in an epoxy housing; all parts are firmly
encapsulated with epoxy, resulting in a tough, durable waterproof assembly
How to Clean Reusable Electrodes
1. Do not leave GEL in the cavity after use. If GEL is left in cavity, the Ag-AgCl electrode disk could degrade
quickly with time because the electrode surface is somewhat porous to promote good conductivity to the
GEL.
2. To clean the reusable electrode, use a cotton swab or toothbrush with tap water.
3. Use any lab cleaner with pumice (such as Ajax) with cotton swab or toothbrush to remove any dark
residue from electrode surface.
4. Use Hydrogen Peroxide solution (2-3%) to brighten electrode surface (optional) or to sterilize electrode.
Do not place the electrode in solution, but simply clean the electrode surface using a cotton swab.
5. Dry electrode off completely before storage.
BIOPAC Hardware | EL650 SERIES | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 1.12.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
EL-CHECK – ELECTRODE IMPEDANCE CHECKER
BIOPAC EL-CHECK video tutorial!
Use EL-CHECK to determine electrode/surface contact impedances. Measurements are selectable to a standard
three-point contact (Vin+ to GND, Vin- to GND and Vin+ to Vin-). Electrode impedance range from < 5 k to
> 50 k is indicated in seven levels. EL-CHECK accepts standard Touchproof and BioNomadix connectors.
EL-CHECK will support over 50,000 10-second measurements with a single 9-volt battery.
The EL-CHECK is suitable for measuring electrode contact impedance for all surface biopotential measurements,
including ECG, EEG, EGG, EMG, EOG, Bioimpedance and Impedance Cardiography. The EL-CHECK permits
simultaneous connection of up to three electrode leads, for quick impedance checking between any two electrodes
in the three connected leads (Active or Vin+) and (Reference or Vin-) and GND.
To test the impedance between any two electrode leads:
1. Insert the leads into the appropriate connectors on the front panel of the EL-CHECK.
2. Switch the selector knob to the corresponding position, and then press and hold the “Test” button.
Green, Yellow, Orange and/or Red LEDs will illuminate to indicate the measured electrode impedance.
The EL-CHECK is only active when the “Test” button is pressed.
For best biopotential measurement results, the impedance between any two electrode leads should be less than
5 k. To obtain electrode lead-to-lead impedances of less than 5 k, it’s advisable to lightly abrade the skin with
an abrasive pad, such as BIOPAC’s ELPAD, and then apply a well-gelled (not dry) surface electrode. Dried-out
surface electrodes can sometimes be rejuvenated by applying a small amount of BIOPAC’s electrode gel to the
contact pad of the electrode.
Specifications
Test Frequency:
Test Current:
25 Hz
3.5 µA rms (10 µA peak-peak: constant current)
Electrode Impedance
Range Indicators:
Lead Compatibility:
< 5 k, 5k-10 k,10 to 20 k, 20k-30 k, 30k-40 k, 40-50 k, > 50 k
Testing Configurations
Switch Selectable:
Power:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standard female touchproof (1.5mm) electrode leads, all BIOPAC
electrodes and leads that terminate in female touchproof sockets, all BNEL and BN-Adapt series.
Active (Vin+) to Reference (Vin-), Active (Vin+) to Ground (GND),
Reference (Vin-) to Ground (GND)
One 9 V Alkaline battery, ~50,000 impedance tests possible per battery
14 cm long x 8 cm wide x 2.2 cm high
132 grams
BIOPAC Hardware | EL-CHECK | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.22.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ELECTRODE ACCESSORIES & GELS
Abrasive Pads
Before applying electrodes, abrade the skin lightly with an ELPAD to remove nonconductive skin cells and sensitize skin for optimal adhesion. Each ELPAD package
contains 10 abrasive pads.
Adhesive
Use adhesive tape for attaching Active Electrodes and other devices. Use the preferred
tape or BIOPAC’s adhesive tape: TAPE1 single-sided; TAPE2 double-sided.
MRI Use:
MR Safe
TAPE1 Components:
3M hypoallergenic surgical tape – Acrylic adhesive
Adhesive Disks
ADD200 series double-sided adhesive collars are used to hold reusable
electrodes (EL254/8RT) firmly on the skin surface.
ADD204
19 mm outside diameter, use with EL254 and EL254S
ADD208
22 mm outside diameter, use with EL258 and EL258S
MRI Use:
MR Safe
ADD204/208 Adhesive Disks Components:
Disks: 3M hypoallergenic medical tape – Acrylic polymer
Electrode Gels
GEL1 &
Non-irritating, hypo-allergenic gel used as a conductant with the EL250 series reusable
GEL100
electrodes. GEL1 = 50 g; GEL100 = 250 g. 5% NaCl (salt) content. 0.85 molar NaCl
MRI Use: MR Conditional
Condition: Max MR field strength 7T
MRI Notes When using with EL250 series electrodes, it’s important to completely fill the
EL250 series gel reservoir. Incomplete filling of reservoir may result in localized
heating of gel at the electrode site.
GEL100 Components:
Water, Sodium Chloride, Propylene Glycol, Mineral Oil, Glyceryl
MonostearatePolyoxyethelene Stearate, Stearyl Alcohol, Calcium Chloride,
Potassium Chloride, Methylparaben, Butylparaben, Propyl Paraben
GEL101
Non-irritating, isotonic gel is primarily used as a conductant for the TSD203 electrodermal
response electrodes. Each tube contains 114 g (~4 ounces).
Consists of 0.5% Saline in a neutral base and is the appropriate GEL to use for GSR, EDA, EDR,
SCR, and SCL. This electrode paste has an approximate molarity of 0.05M NaCl and is 0.5%
Saline; the Saline concentration is adjusted to obtain a final paste molarity of 0.05M NaCl. This
particular molarity is recommended by Fowles (1981). Psychophysiology, 18, 232-239
MRI Use: MR Conditional
Condition: Max MR field strength 7T
GEL101 Components:
Cetyl Alcohol #697313, Glycerol Monostearate, Lanolin, USP Anhydrous, Dimenthicon
Silicone TBF9-1000, Water, purified USP Sodium Chloride, Sodium Lauryl Sulfate,
Sorbitol, 70 USP, Methylparaben, Propylparaben, Quaternium-15
BIOPAC Hardware | Electrode Accessories | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 1.2.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
GEL102
GEL103
GEL104
ELPREP
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Ten20 Conductive Gel 114 g (~4 ounces). Ten20 is a conductive and adhesive paste specifically
formulated for use with reusable (non-disposable) electrodes. Ten20 contains the right balance of
adhesiveness and conductivity, enabling electrodes to remain in place while allowing the
transmittance of electrical signals. Ten20 is a uniquely washable and non-drying formula.
Do not use too much paste—the size of the area of the paste becomes the effective size of the
electrode; this can reduce interelectrode distances and potential differences measured. Wash skin
promptly after use. 12.5% NaCl content, 2.15 molar NaCl
Tensive Adhesive Gel, 33 ml. Conductive adhesive gel. This safe, non-flammable, odorless gel is
recommended for TENs or ECG to adhere non-adhesive electrodes to the skin.
 Eliminates tape and tape irritation
 Conductive immediately, no need to wait
 Non-flammable, no solvent odor
 Best adhesive gel available
 Hypoallergenic, bacteriostatic, non-irritating
 Water soluble, easily removed with water
Electrode Gel - salt free - 250 g (8.5 oz). SPECTRA 360® electrode gel. The only salt-free and
chloride-free electrically conductive gel, recommended for many biopotential measurements.
Salt-free characteristics make it particularly suitable for electrical stimulation and long-term
applications. However, it is not recommended for DC measures, such as EDA, ECG, EOG or
slow potentials. Spectra 360 differs significantly from all other electrically conductive media...it
works by wetting the skin, thereby reducing skin resistance.
 Salt-free, no sodium ion transfer
 Non-irritating, hypoallergenic, bacteriostatic
 Can be used with carbon compositing flexible electrodes
 Can be used for ECG and TENS

Non-gritty STAY-WET® formula allows for prolonged use without re-application
MRI Use:
MR Conditional
Condition:
Max MR field strength 7T
GEL104 Salt-Free Components:
Water, Propylene Glycol, Mineral Oil, Glyceryl Monostearate, Polyoxyethelene Stearate,
Stearyl Alcohol, Methylparaben, Butylparaben, Propyl Paraben
Skin Preparation Gel 114 grams (~4 oz). Designed for EEG, ECG, EMG, EOG, Cardiac Output
and Bioimpedance measurements. This gel is abrasive and should be used with care not to
overabrade the skin. It is not recommended for use with electrodes attached to conventional
electrical stimulation equipment, such as voltage or current stimulators. Not to be used on
subjects with a history of skin allergies to cosmetics and lotions. Topical use only.
Prepare skin and apply small amount to appropriate electrode site by squeezing near tube
opening. Gently rub gel into the skin surface. Apply small amount to disc electrode and press into
the paste that has been applied to the scalp or other skin surface. Clean with warm water.
BIOPAC Hardware | Electrode Accessories | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 1.2.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Coban Wrap
Self-adhesive Coban™ wrap can be used to hold electrodes, VMG transducers and fNIR
sensors on a subject.
 4 inch x 5 yard (fully stretched) (100 mm x 4.5 m)
 Latex free self-adherent wrap
 Nonsterile
 Tan
BSL-ACCPACK
Make students accountable for their own lab equipment and reduce the
burden on department budgets.
The BSL Accessory Pack includes the consumable items to run 16 BSL
Lessons. School bookstores can purchase the BSL Accessory Packs and
sell them to students. Includes:
60 x
10 x
1x
1x
1x
8x
EL503 Disposable Electrodes
EL507 Disposable EDA (GSR) Electrodes (ten electrodes total)
AFT1 Disposable Bacterial Filter
AFT2 Disposable Mouthpiece
AFT3 Noseclip
ELPAD Abrasive Pads
BIOPAC Hardware | Electrode Accessories | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 1.2.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ELECTRODE LEADS
LEAD108 SERIES — MR CONDITIONAL/RADIOTRANSLUCENT LEADS FOR EL508/EL509
Use the LEAD108 Series with EL508 MR Conditional, radiotranslucent electrodes and
EL509 disposable radiotranslucent dry electrodes.
All LEAD108 Series terminate in 1.5 mm female Touchproof sockets.
MRI Lead Guidelines
For MRI use, shorter leads are better...specifically, keeping lead lengths much shorter than the wavelength of the
Larmor frequency (42.6 MHz/T) is critical. For a 3T machine, this is the speed of light divided by (42.6*3*1E6)
or 2.34 meters. As field strengths increase, then lead lengths should continue to shorten. To record ECG, or any
other biopotential signal, in MRI, short leads such as LEAD108B (15 cm) and LEAD108C (30 cm) are
recommended; do not use 2-meter or 1-meter leads for biopotential signals in MRI.

Recommended reading: Thoralf Niendorf, Lukas Winter and Tobias Frauenrath (2012). Electrocardiogram
in an MRI Environment: Clinical Needs, Practical Considerations, Safety Implications, Technical
Solutions and Future Directions , Advances in Electrocardiograms - Methods and Analysis, PhD. Richard
Millis (Ed.), ISBN: 978-953-307-923-3, InTech, DOI: 10.5772/24340.
See BIOPAC MRI Guidelines for additional details.
MRI Usage:
Condition:
MR Conditional to 9T
Up to 9T, any scanning sequence, use with EL508 or EL509 MRI/RT electrodes
only.
Lead108 Components: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic, carbon fiber leadwire, tinned copper connectors
(Touchproof socket), electrode clip (carbon filled ABS plastic)
SPECIFICATIONS
Construction:
Leadwire Diameter:
Leadwire Resistance:
Leadwire Length:
Carbon fiber leadwire and electrode snap
1.5 mm
156 Ohms/meter
LEAD108B 15 cm, LEAD108C 30 cm
LEAD110 SERIES — ELECTRODE LEADS
The LEAD110 Series, for use with disposable and other snap connector
electrodes, are pinch leads for easy connection between the EL500-series snap
electrodes and any BIOPAC biopotential amplifier or the GND terminal on the
back of the UIM100C. Leads are 1.9 mm in diameter and terminate in standard 1.5
mm Touchproof connector and connect to BIOPAC modules or to a Modular
Extension Cable (MEC series).
LEAD
LEAD110
LEAD110A
LEAD110S-R
TYPE
LENGTH USAGE NOTE
Unshielded
1m
Works best as a ground electrode
Unshielded
3m
Works best with ground or reference electrodes
Shielded; red 1 m
Use with recording electrodes for minimal noise interference. White lead
plug is for electrode contact; black lead pin plug is for lead shield.
LEAD110S-W Shielded; white 1 m
Use with recording electrodes for minimal noise interference. White lead
plug is for electrode contact; black lead pin plug is for lead shield.
See also:
TSD155C Multi-lead ECG Cable
WT100C Wilson Terminal (virtual reference)
BIOPAC Hardware | ELECTRODE LEADS | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 3.30.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
LEAD120 LEAD FOR EL120
This 1-meter lead with Touchproof connector works exclusively with the reusable
EL120 electrode. Snap the electrode into place and then plug the lead in with the
Touchproof connector. White—LEAD120-W Red—LEAD120-R
LEAD130 SHIELDED LEAD ASSEMBLY
LEAD130 Shielded Lead Assembly is for use with the EBI100C Electrical
Bioimpedance Module or the NICO100C Noninvasive Cardiac Output Module. The
shielded lead assembly terminates with an adapter that plugs into the front of the
amplifier module and includes four leads:
White = I+ Red = Vin+ Green = Vin- Black = I- (GND)
Important Usage Notes:
 If using multiple biopotential modules, do not connect the ground (GND) for the other modules — establish
one ground per subject.
 If using an EDA100C (or older GSR100C) Electrodermal Response Amplifier with the EBI100C or the
NICO100C, please note that the black I- (GND) connection will shunt current from the EDA/GSR100C
excitation source. Accordingly, EDA/GSR100C measurement values will be shifted somewhat higher in
absolute conductance, and should be used for relative measures only.
See also:
EBI100C Electrical Bioimpedance Module
NICO100C Noninvasive Cardiac Output Module
EL506 Bioimpedance Strip Electrode and EL500 Series Disposable Electrodes
Application Note 215 - Noninvasive Cardiac Ouput - NICO100C and LEAD130.
LEAD140 SERIES CLIP LEADS
LEAD140 Series clip leads have a 1 m black cable and a Touchproof connector, and require the SS1LA interface.
LEAD140 Alligator clip with teeth, 40 mm: Use this fully-insulated, unshielded lead to connect fine wire
electrodes, including irregular surfaces. There is ferrous metal in the clip.
LEAD141 Alligator clip with smooth (flat) clamp, 40 mm: Use this fully-insulated, unshielded lead to connect to
fine wire electrodes without damage, including arbitrarily small electrode wires. There is ferrous
metal in the clip.
LEAD142 Retractable clip lead with copper extension contacts, 3.5 mm: Use this unshielded lead to connect to
fine wire electrodes up to 1 mm diameter. There is non-ferrous copper alloy in the clip.
MRI Usage: MR Conditional
Condition:
Tested 3T-9T (LEAD142 only)
BIOPAC Hardware | ELECTRODE LEADS | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 3.30.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
MICROMANIPULATOR
This manual micromanipulator is a reliable, durable, and economical
solution for high-precision experiments.
• Vernier scales allow readings to 0.1 mm
• X-axis fine control allows readings to 10 µm
• Includes tilting base
• Includes standard 12 mm clamp
• Includes 14 cm electrode holder
• All control knobs project to the rear, so units can be tightly
grouped.
Control
Travel Range
Resolution
X-axis fine
10 mm
0.01 mm
X-axis
35 mm
0.1 mm
Y-axis
25 mm
0.1 mm
Z-axis
25 mm
0.1 mm
Weight:
1.4 kg (3 lbs.)
Specify left- or right-handed unit when ordering.
MANIPULATOR-R
MANIPULATOR-L
Right-handed
Left-handed
BIOPAC Hardware | Micromanipulator | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.29.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
NERVE CHAMBERS: NERVE1 AND NERVE2
These acrylic, desktop Nerve Chambers have 15 stainless steel pins for recording and stimulating a variety of
different nerve preparations. Each stainless steel pin is spaced 5mm apart to provide a variety of recording and
stimulating configurations. The sockets accept 2 mm pin plugs.
NERVE1 and NERVE2 Comparison
Feature
NERVE1
NERVE2
Deep Reservoir (35 mL)—contain Ringers or other solutions
x
x
Drain—facilitate extended viability of the preparation.
x
x
Agent Well — add compounds (ether, dry ice, etc.) 1.4 cm x 2 cm x 2 cm (h x w x l)
x
x
Lid—enclose the preparation. 50 mm thick
x
--
Valve & hose—flush and drain options
x
--
NERVE1 – WITH AGENT WELL AND LID
NERVE1 chamber includes:
• Deep Reservoir (35 mL) for containing Ringers or other solutions
• Drain (with valve & hose) to facilitate extended viability of the preparation
• Agent Well for adding compounds (such as ether or dry ice)
• Lid to enclose the preparation when the protocol requires it.
NERVE2 – STANDARD NERVE CHAMBER
NERVE1 chamber includes:
• Deep Reservoir (35 mL) for containing Ringers or other solutions.
• Drain (with valve & hose) to facilitate extended viability of your
preparation.
NERVE CHAMBER SPECIFICATIONS (NERVE1/NERVE2)
Pins: 15, stainless steel
Spacing: 5 mm
Sockets: accepts 2 mm pin plugs
Reservoir: holds 35 mL (or use drain/valve)
Dimensions: 4.5 cm x 7 cm x 14 cm (H x W x L)
Agent well: (NERVE1 only) 1.4 cm x 2 cm x 2 cm (H x W x L)
Lid: (NERVE1 only) 50 mm thick
NERVE2
Related components:
• STM100C Stimulator Module
• STMISO Series Stimulator Modules
• MCE100C Micro-electrode Amplifier
• ERS100C Evoked Response Amplifier
• EMG100C Electromyogram Amplifier
BIOPAC Hardware | Nerve Chambers | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
NERVE CHAMBER CONNECTIONS
To connect the Nerve Chamber to MP-series Biopotential amplifiers (MCE100C, ERS100C, or EMG100C),
use three JUMP100 connectors and three CBL200 adapter cables. Optionally, for additional lead length, use one
MEC110C extension cable.
1. Plug the three JUMP100s into the desired points of the Nerve Chamber.
2. Connect the free ends of the JUMP100s to the mating ends of the CBL200s.
3. Then connect the free ends of the CBL200s to the Biopotential amplifier inputs. For additional lead
length, plug the MEC110C into the Biopotential amplifier and plug the free ends of the CBL200s into the
free end of the MEC110C.
To connect the Nerve Chamber to the STM100C Stimulator, use one CBL106 and one CBL102.
1. Plug the red and black leads (2 mm pins) of the CBL106 into the desired points of the Nerve Chamber.
2. Connect the free end (Female BNC) of the CBL106 to the mating end (Male BNC) of the CBL102.
3. Then insert the free end of the CBL102 (3.5 mm phone plug) into the 50 Ohm output of the STM100C.
Note: If the STM100C Stimulator is used with a Biopotential amplifier on the same nerve—which is nearly
always the case—make sure that the black lead of the CBL106 (stimulation negative) is connected to the
same pin as the ground lead going to the Biopotential amplifier. This is easy to do because the design of
the JUMP100 allows stacking connections.
BIOPAC Hardware | Nerve Chambers | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MRI, RADIOTRANSLUCENT, AND RADIO-OPAQUE COMPATIBILITY
Biopac Definitions
Radiotranslucent products as products that have no metal at all in the applied part. These are best suited for MRI
applications.
MR Safe - an item that poses no known hazards in all MRI environments. Using the terminology, “MR Safe”
items are non-conducting, non-metallic, and non-magnetic items such as a plastic Petri dish. An item may be
determined to be MR Safe by providing a scientifically based rationale rather than test data.
MR Conditional - an item that has been demonstrated to pose no known hazards in a specified MR environment
with specified conditions of use. “Field” conditions that define the MR environment include static magnetic field
strength, spatial gradient magnetic field, dB/dt (time rate of change of the magnetic field), radio frequency (RF)
fields, and specific absorption rate (SAR). Additional conditions, including specific configurations of the item
(e.g., the routing of leads used for a neurostimulation system), may be required.
X-ray notes: MRI Safe or Conditional does not refer to the capability of an applied part to be used in an x-ray
machine. Radio-opaque implies that the applied part is easily visible in an x-ray machine so it can be
manipulated via the x-ray viewer. Radiotranslucent in this context implies that the applied part is only partially or
not visible in the x-ray viewer.
Caution is required whenever employing electrode leads and electrodes in an MRI environment.
IMPORTANT! See Safety Guidelines for recording biopotential measurements in the MRI environment.
Under certain conditions, single fault and otherwise, low impedance conduction through the subject represents a
potential hazard due to currents that may be induced in loops placed in the time-varying MRI field gradients and
RF fields, and due to body movement in the static MRI field. Low impedance conduction can result in significant
heating at the electrode/skin junction, because this point is often the part of the signal path with the highest
impedance. Sufficient heating at the electrode/skin junction could result in burns.
For more information:

Read the Associated Application Notes listed below.

See the "Magnetic Resonance Imaging" section of a BIOPAC Hardware Guide (available at Support >
Manuals, or under the software Help menu, or on the software CD).

Read Methodological Issues in EEG-correlated Functional MRI Experiments (Lemieux L, Allen PJ,
Krakow K, Symms MR, Fish DR; International Journal of Bioelectromagnetism 1999; 1: 87-95).
Associated Application Notes:
223 - Physiological Measurement in Magnetic Resonance Imaging Systems,
230 - Connections for Physiological Signals in an MRI
BIOPAC Hardware | MRI Definitions | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 11.7.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MRI SMART MODULES
The MRI smart amplifiers incorporate advanced
signal processing circuitry which removes
spurious MRI artifact from the source
physiological data. Signal processors are able to
distinguish between physiological signal and MRI
artifact as manifested by gradient switching during
MRI sequences, such as Shim or EPI.
Because MRI-related transient artifact is removed
at the source, the MRI version amplifier can be
sampled at the same rate as during normal (nonMRI) physiological recording. There is no longer
any requirement to over-sample the amplifier
output to capture every nuance of MRI artifact to train secondary computer-based processing steps to remove
such artifact.
In every aspect, data recording is easier and the final results are cleaner when using the MRI version amplifiers to
record physiological data in the fMRI or MRI.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
Less sensitivity to electrode and transducer lead placement
Improved gain selectability
No missing spectra in physiological signal frequency band
No requirement for acquisition oversampling
No need for computer-based real-time or post-processing signal processing
Clean data available as real-time analog output
Safety Guidelines for Recording Biopotential Measurements in the MRI Environment
1. Place electrodes on the subject according to these guidelines:
A) Prepare the subject's skin surface with ELPAD to create low contact source impedance at the electrode
attachment site. Be careful to wipe away any excess electrode gel form the surface of the subject's skin.
B) Attach the EL508 or EL509 electrodes as close to each other as possible (on the subject's skin) for the
measurement.
C) Place electrodes in as straight of a line as possible which is perpendicular to the magnet's axis.
D) Place electrodes between 3-5 cm apart, if possible; the larger the area between the electrodes, the stronger
the MRI gradient artifact.
2. Connect the electrode lead set to the electrodes according to these guidelines:
A) Make sure that the electrode leads do not loop in a "circle", "S" or "U" shape. Also, do not twist or braid
the electrode leads.
Looped, braided or twisted leads pick up RF energy, resulting
in current induction and increased localized heating.
B) Run the leads out of the chamber bore in the simplest (straightest) manner possible.
C) Do not allow the electrode leads to touch the subject's bare skin. Electrode leads may heat up in the MRI.
- Use a thermal insulator (such as a blanket or towel) between the
electrode lead and the subject's skin.
- It's also possible to use thermally-insulating foam jacket, similar to
those used for insulating copper tubing, for placing the electrode leads
to keep them away from the subject's skin.
BIOPAC Hardware | MRI Smart Modules | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 9.12.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
See also Safety Awareness Notes for Cables and Electrodes During MRI
ECG100C-MRI
Gain:
Output selection:
Frequency Response
Low Pass Filter:
High Pass Filter:
Notch Interference Filter:
Noise Voltage (0.05-35 Hz):
Zin:
CMRR:
Common Mode Input Voltage Range:
Output Range:
Input Voltage Range:
Input Connectors:
500, 1000, 2000, 5000
Normal, R wave indicator
Maximum Bandwidth (.05 Hz - 150 Hz) can be customized at BIOPAC
35 Hz, 150 Hz
0.05 Hz, 1.0 Hz
50 dB rejection @ 50 or 60 Hz
0.1 µV (rms)
2M ohm (Differential), 1000M ohm (Common mode)
110 dB min (50/60 Hz)
±10 V (referenced to amplifier ground)
±1500 VDC (referenced to mains ground)
±10 V (analog)
Gain Vin (mV)
500 ±20
1000 ±10
2000 ±5
5000 ±2
Five 1.5 mm male Touchproof sockets (VIN+, Gnd, VIN-, 2 of shield)
EDA100C-MRI
Gain:
Low Pass Filter:
High Pass Filter:
Sensitivity:
Constant Voltage Excitation:
Output Range:
Input Signal Range:
Input Connectors:
Note: Normal human range is 1-50 µmho.
20, 10, 5, 2 µsiemens/volt (i.e. µmhos/volt)
1 Hz, 10 Hz
DC, 0.05 Hz, 0.5 Hz
0.7 nano-siemens (with MP System)
Vex = 0.5 VDC
±10 V full range (analog); 0-10 V nominal range
Gain Range (µmho)
20
0-200
10
0-100
5
0-50
2
0-20
Three 1.5 male Touchproof sockets (VIN+, Gnd, VIN-)
Unit Note—BIOPAC software calculates SCL/SCR in µmho, the traditional unit of conductance. Micromho
(µmho) is interchangeable with the alternative microsiemen (µS). To use Ohm, the traditional measure of
resistance, convert as 1 µmho equals 1,000,000 ohm.
BIOPAC Hardware | MRI Smart Modules | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 9.12.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
EEG100C-MRI
Gain:
Output selection:
Low Pass Filter:
High Pass Filter:
Notch Interference Filter:
Noise Voltage (0.1-35 Hz):
Zin:
CMRR:
Common Mode Input Voltage Range:
Output Range:
Input Voltage Range:
Input Connectors:
5000, 10000, 20000, 50000
Normal, Alpha wave indicator
35 Hz, 100 Hz
0.1 Hz, 1.0 Hz
50 dB rejection @ 50/60 Hz
0.1 µV (rms)
2 Mohm (Differential)
1000 Mohm (Common mode)
110 dB min (50/60 Hz)
±10 V (referenced to amplifier ground)
±1500 VDC (referenced to mains ground)
±10 V (analog)
Gain
Vin
5000
±2 mV
10000
±1 mV
20000
±0.5 mV
50000
±0.2 mV
Five 1.5 mm male Touchproof sockets (VIN+, Gnd, VIN-, 2 of shield)
EMG100C-MRI
Gain:
Low Pass Filter:
High Pass Filter:
Notch Interference Filter:
Noise Voltage (10-500 Hz):
Zin:
CMRR:
Common Mode Input Voltage Range:
Output Range
Input Voltage Range
Input Connectors:
500, 1000, 2000, 5000
500 Hz, 5000 Hz
1.0 Hz, 10 Hz, 100 Hz
50 dB rejection
@ 50/60 Hz
0.2 µV (rms)
2M ohm (Differential),
1000 Mohm (Common mode)
110 dB min (50/60 Hz)
±10 V (referenced to amplifier ground)
±1500 VDC (referenced to mains ground)
±10 V (analog)
Gain Vin (mV)
500
±20
1000
±10
2000
±5
5000
±2
Five 1.5 mm male Touchproof sockets (VIN+, Gnd, VIN-, 2 of shield)
PPG100C-MRI
Gain:
Low Pass Filter:
High Pass Filter:
Noise Voltage:
Output Range:
Input Signal Source:
Excitation:
Input Connectors:
10, 20, 50, 100
3 Hz, 10Hz
DC, 0.05 Hz, 0.5 Hz
0.5 µV (RMS); amplifier contribution
±10 V (analog)
TSD200
6V
Three 1.5 mm male Touchproof sockets (Vsup, Gnd, Input)
BIOPAC Hardware | MRI Smart Modules | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 9.12.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
NICO100C-MRI
The NICO100C-MRI noninvasive cardiac output amplifier records the parameters associated
with cardiac output measurements while subjects are undergoing fMRI or MRI scanning
procedures. The NICO100C-MRI incorporates a precision high frequency current source, which
injects a small (4 ma rms) measurement current through the thoracic volume defined by the
placement of a set of current source electrodes. A separate set of monitoring electrodes then
measures the voltage developed across the thorax volume. Because the current is constant, the
voltage measured is proportional to the impedance characteristics of the thorax.
The NICO100C-MRI simultaneously measures impedance magnitude (Zo; labeled “Z” on the
module) and derivative (dZ/dt; labeled “DZ” on the module). Zo and dZ/dt are recorded at a
stimulation frequency of 50 kHz.
For operation, the NICO100C-MRI typically connects to the MECMRI-NICO Cable/Filter set.
This set incorporates a shorter (2 meter), control room, cable (MECMRI-2) that connects the
NICO100C-MRI to the patch-panel-attached MRIRFIF-3 Pi filter. The other side of this filter
pokes through the patch panel to the chamber room where a longer (8 meter), chamber room,
cable (MECMRI-1) connects between the patch panel filter and the subject electrode leads (four
CBL204 “Y” electrode lead adapters that connect to eight LEAD108B and/or LEAD108C
carbon composition unshielded electrode leads terminating in Touchproof sockets).
The NICO100C-MRI is typically used with EL508 disposable carbon composition (MRI
conditional to 7T) electrodes, but can function with other electrode types too.
For injecting current and averaging voltage at four paired-electrode sites (often required for
cardiac output measurements), use four CBL204 Touchproof “Y” electrode lead adapters and
eight LEAD108B and/or LEAD108C electrode leads with each NICO100C-MRI. One electrode
lead is attached to each 508 electrode, with electrode lead pairs coupled together using the
CBL204 Touchproof “Y” electrode lead adapter.
IMPORTANT: BIOPAC recommends that the shortest electrode leads possible are used for
fMRI or MRI.
In this situation, due to the anatomical shape of the thorax, the best placement for all eight
electrodes is along the frontal plane (wider dimension). When directed through the thorax, the
measurement current seeks the shortest and most conducting pathway. Consequently, the
measurement current flows through the thoracic aorta and vena cava superior and inferior.
Use the CH SELECT switch bank to assign NICO100C-MRI output (Zo and dZ/dt) channels as follows:
Bank
1
2
3
4
Magnitude (Zo)
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Derivative (dZ/dt)
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
If the particular NICO100C-MRI output is not used, the
respective assigned channel cannot be used for another
module’s output; users should simply not record on the
unwanted, but assigned channel.
MRI Cabling
When using NICO100C-MRI the MECMRI-NICO Cable/Filter Set is recommended. This cable set is
identical to MECMRI-BIOP, but incorporates a different five-line Pi filter set (MRIRFIF-3).
Grounding
When using the NICO100C-MRI amplifier with other biopotential amplifiers attached to the same subject,
it’s not necessary to attach the ground lead from the biopotential amplifier(s) to the subject. The subject is
already appropriately referenced to the subject via the attachment to the NICO100C-MRI. If a biopotential
ground is attached to the subject, then currents sourced from the NICO100C-MRI will be split to the
biopotential amplifier ground lead, potentially resulting in measurement errors.
BIOPAC Hardware | NICO100C-MRI | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 10.7.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Derivative Polarity – NICO100C vs. EBI100C
The NICO100C-MRI module incorporates an internal, hardware-based, derivative function, which outputs
dZ/dt simultaneously with Zo (impedance magnitude).
When used with AcqKnowledge, this internal derivative function outputs the inverted mathematically accurate
dZ/dt signal so that it displays a positive-going peak, coincident with negative slopes indicated in Zo, as per
academic research convention. The dZ/dt polarity can be inverted to record as a negative-going pulse, if
required, by simply inverting the scaling in the associated analog input channel DZ in AcqKnowledge.
The EBI100C does not include an internal, hardware-based, derivative function for the Z (impedance
magnitude) channel. An AcqKnowledge calculation channel can be used to determine dZ/dt, if required.
Channel scaling can be employed to specify the dZ/dt polarity desired.
NICO100C-MRI Specifications
Number of Channels:
2 – Magnitude (Zo) and dZ/dt
Operational Frequencies:
50 kHz
Current Output:
4 mA (rms)—constant sinusoidal current
Outputs:
MAG of Impedance: 0-100 Ω
dZ/dt of Impedance: 2 (Ω/sec)/V
Output Range:
±10 V (analog)
CMIV, referenced to:
Amplifier ground: ±10 V
Mains ground: ±1500 VDC
Signal Source:
Electrodes (requires 8 LEAD108B and/or LEAD108C electrode leads)
Gain Range:
MAG: 10, 5, 2, 1 Ω/V
dZ/dt: 2 (Ω/sec)/v constant (independent of MAG Gain)
LP Filter:
MAG: 10 Hz, 100 Hz
dZ/dt: 100 Hz
HP Filter:
MAG: DC, 0.05 Hz
dZ/dt: DC coupled
Sensitivity:
MAG: 0.0025 (Ω) rms @ 10 Hz bandwidth
dZ/dt: 0.005 (Ω/sec) rms @ 10 Hz bandwidth
Weight:
370 g
Dimensions:
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
BIOPAC Hardware | NICO100C-MRI | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 10.7.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD114-MRI RESPONSE/HAND FORCE TRANSDUCER FOR MRI
The TSD114-MRI consists of a pump bulb (RXPUMPBULB), pressure transducer (TSD104A equivalent,
terminated in DSUB9), and tubing (AFT30-XL). Subjects can squeeze the bulb by hand or apply pressure via
foot, thigh, etc. to indicate a response while in the MRI.
The output of the TSD114-MRI device is ultimately voltage. The device provides a output voltage which moves
in a variably linear fashion with respect to applied pressure in the squeeze bulb. To obtain usable voltage output,
the device requires amplification via BIOPAC's DA100C.
The device has high accuracy for pressure measurements, on the order of ±1%. It's based on pneumatic principles
of operation. It comes equipped with a 10 meter polyethylene tube; additional polyethylene tube extensions are
available from BIOPAC.
To use the TSD114-MRI with a third-party A/D converter, use DA100C and IPS100C.
DA100C amplifies and conditions the mV level signal coming from TSD114-MRI
IPS100C will supply isolated power to DA100C
High level output voltage (anywhere in the range of ±10 V, such as 0-5 V) can be obtained via the front panel of
IPS100C, via 3.5 mm phono plug. This signal can be directed straight to the third-party A/D converter.
MRI Use: MR Safe
TSD114-MRI Components: Bulb: Polyvinyl Chloride, Tubing: Polyethylene (polymerized urethane),
Connection barb: Nylon
TSD114-MRI Specifications
Pump Bulb: Rubber bulb with endcap for connection to the pressure transducer
Transducer: Equivalent to TSD104A
Sensitivity: 5 µV per mmHg (for 1V excitation)
o Used with the DA100C with factory CAL 2 V excitation, sensitivity is 10 µV per mmHg
o Set for DA100C at Av =1000, sensitivity at MP150 is 10 mV per mmHg
o The MP150 can resolve to 300 µV, so the system can resolve (.3 mV)/(10 mV/mmHg)
or 0.03 mmHg
o To increase sensitivity, increase the excitation voltage up to 10 V (contact BIOPAC)
Tubing: See AFT30-XL
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD114-MRI | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 10.3.2013
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
PRODUCT SHEET
TSD121B-MRI HAND DYNAMOMETER FOR MRI
• Terminates in DSUB9 and requires
MECMRI-DA for proper operation.
Use to measure clench force in the MRI. The lightweight, ergonomically designed transducer provides direct
readings in kilograms or pounds. Use in isolation or combine with EMG recordings for in-depth studies of
muscular activity. The isometric design improves experiment repeatability and accuracy. The TSD121B-MRI has
an 8 meter cable terminated for connection to the MECMRI-DA. Trace conductive parts (metallic parts) of
transducer do not make contact to the subject.
MRI Use:
MR Conditional to 3T
Note:
Conductive parts of transducer are electrically and thermally isolated from subject. This
transducer has been employed repeatedly in 3T Siemens fMRI, running standard EPI (gradient
echo) sequences, typically with 18.5 Hz gradient shift rate.
Components: Transducer Body: Delrin®, Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Plastic, Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene
(ABS) Thermo-molded, Plastic, Polymer thick film device (rigid substrate, printed semiconductor), Copper clad fiberglass lamination (PCB material), Stainless steel machine
screws/nuts, Tinned copper wire, Silicone elastomer, PVDF (Kynar®) Heat Shrink Tubing
TSD121B-MRI SPECIFICATIONS
Isometric Range:
Nominal Output:
Latency:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Cable Length:
Interface:
0-50 kg
782 µV/kg (assumes DA100C VREF1 is set to +1 volt, the factory default)
no material latency; any latency encountered will be a function of the DA100C filters
used—the higher the lowpass selected, the smaller the delay
323 g
17.78 cm x 5.59 cm x 2.54 cm
8m
MECMRI-DA to DA100C in control room
TSD121B-MRI CALIBRATION
Sample calibration values shown are for Gain 200 (per switch on the DA100C) and Range 20 kg
1. Multiply Gain by Nominal Output: 200 * 782 µV/kg = 0.1564 V/kg.
2. Multiply the result by the Range: 0.1564 V * 20 kg = 3.128 V per 20 kg range.
3. Plug the TSD121B-MRI into the cabling system/amplifier.
4. For CAL1: remove all weight from the TSD121B-MRI, press CAL1 to get the Input Value, and then enter
0 for Map (Scale) Value.
5. For CAL2: add 3.128 V (the result from step 2) to the CAL1 Input Value and enter it in the CAL2 Input
Value, and then enter 20 kg for the Map (Scale) Value.
6. Click OK.
In AcqKnowledge 4.1 and higher, you may alternatively use Set Up Data Acquisition > Channels > Add New
Module. Choose DA100C as the module type. Choose the correct physical channel switch position and select the
TSD121B-MRI from the transducer list. Then follow the calibration prompts.
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD121B-MRI | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 5.26.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD131-MRI FINGER TWITCH TRANSDUCER FOR MRI
The TSD131-MRI transducers record finger twitch responses from human subjects in the MRI. The transducer
conforms to the shape of the finger and attaches via Velcro straps. Trace conductive parts (metallic parts) do not
make contact to the subject.
Palmar attachment recommended, with “UP” label facing out:
If a protocol requires posterior (dorsal) attachment, “UP” label must be placed toward skin for optimum response.
MRI Use:
Note:
Components:
MR Conditional to 3T
Conductive parts of transducer are electrically and thermally isolated from subject.
Polymer thick film device (flexible insulating substrate, printed conductor), Tinned copper
wire, Silicone elastomer, PVDF (Kynar®) Heat Shrink Tubing
TSD131-MRI SPECIFICATIONS
Weight:
Dimensions (l x w):
Cable Length:
Interface:
7g
14.6 cm x 0.50 cm
8m
MECMRI-HLT to HLT100C
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD131-MRI | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 1.13.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MRI CABLES
MECMRI-1
This is a Biopotential or Transducer cable for use inside the MRI chamber room. It
supports one to five subject or transducer electrical connections and is 8 meters
long. The cable incorporates a plastic housed DSUB9 Male connector to panel
mount with the chamber room exposed DSUB9 female connector of the MRIRFIF.
MRI Use:
MR Conditional to 7T
Note:
To collect physiological data, the MECMRI-1 cable DSUB-9 connector must be connected to the
MRIRFIF filter on the patch panel. Electrode leads/electrodes employed should be carbon
composition BIOPAC LEAD108/EL508 series. Transducers employed should be BIOPAC
certified MR Conditional or MR Safe.
MECMRI-2
This is a Biopotential cable for use inside the MRI control room. It supports one to five subject
electrical connections and is 2 meters long. The cable incorporates a plastic housed DSUB9
Male connector to panel mount with the control room exposed DSUB9 female connector of the
MRIRFIF. This cable connects directly to any of the following biopotential amplifiers:
ECG100C-MRI, EGG100C, EMG100C-MRI, EOG100C, EEG100C-MRI.
MECMRI-3
Transducer cable for use inside the MRI control room. It supports one to three-subject transducer connections and
is 2 meters long. The cable incorporates a plastic housed DSUB9 Male connector to panel mount with the control
room exposed DSUB9 female connector of the MRIRFIF. This cable connects directly to any of the following
transducer amplifiers: PPG100C-MRI, RSP100C, SKT100C, EDA100C-MRI.
MECMRI-4
This cable is used inside the MRI control room. It supports one channel of subject stimulator connection and is 2
meters long. The cable incorporates a plastic housed DSUB9 Male connector to panel mount with the control
room exposed DSUB9 female connector of the MRIRFIF interference filter. This cable connects directly to any of
the following stim isolation adapters: STMISOC, STMISOD, or STMISOE.
Note—One MECMRI-4 comes with the MECMRI-STIMISO setup kit.
MECMRI-5
This 2-meter cable is used inside the MRI control room. It supports one channel of general-purpose transducer
output and connects directly to the DA100C high-level transducer module and the MRIRFIF interference filter.
Cable incorporates a plastic housed DSUB9 male connector to panel mount with the control room exposed
DSUB9 female connector of the MRIRFIF interference filter.
Note—One MECMRI-5 is included with the MECMRI-DA setup kit.
MECMRI-6
This cable is used inside the MRI control room. It supports one channel of high-level transducer output and is 2
meters long. The cable incorporates a plastic housed DSUB9 Male connector to panel mount with the control
room exposed DSUB9 female connector of the MRIRFIF interference filter. This cable connects directly to the
HLT100C high level transducer module.
Note—One MECMRI-6 is included with the MECMRI-HLT setup kit.
OXY-MRI
The OXY-MRI SpO2 amplifier is placed inside the MRI control room, the associated 9 meter fiber-optic sensor
cable is passed through a waveguide (connecting control room to chamber room), and the finger sensor is attached
to the subject in the MRI chamber room. No patch panel MRIRFIF connections are required because of the fiberoptic construction of the sensor cable.
MECMRI-OXY Discontinued product. Available by request for existing OXY100C users.
MRI Cable/Filter set for OXY100C.
BIOPAC Hardware | MRI Cables/Cable Sets | Page 1 - 4
Updated:3.30.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MRIRFIF (COMBINATION FILTER)
MRIRFIF is a five-line Pi filter set, designed for interfacing
between the MECMRI-1 chamber room cable and any of the MRI
control room cables (MECMRI-2 to MECMRI-6).
See also: App Note 223 Physiological Measurements in Magnetic
Resonance Imaging Systems Using BIOPAC Equipment.
1. MRIRFIF: -3 dB point = 100 kHz
2. MRIRFIF-2: -3 dB point = 1 MHz
3. MRIRFIF-3: -3 dB point = 500 kHz
4. MRIRFIF + MRIRFIF-2 = -3 dB point = 70 kHz

attenuation is -60 db from 7 MHz to 1000 MHz

attenuation slope from 70 kHz to 7 Mhz is 30 dB per decade
5. MRIRFIF-3 + MRIRFIF-2 = -3 dB point = 400 kHz


attenuation is -60 db from 7 MHz to 1000 MHz
attenuation slope from 400 kHz to 7 Mhz is 30 dB per decade
This Pi filter set has a dielectric withstand voltage of 1500 VDC and
conforms to IEC 60601-1 requirements. The Pi filter set is designed to
shunt RF energy from the MRI control or chamber room to EARTH
GROUND without sacrificing CMRR performance for the recording of
small valued biopotential or transducer signals.
The MRIRFIF’s symmetrical construction, with dual 9-pin female
connectors, results in a pin swap for pins 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, regarding signal flow as illustrated above right:
Accordingly, if the MRIRFIF and associated cable assemblies (such as MECMRI-#) are used with any existing
patch panel connectors, the existing connector must be a male/female 9-pin straight-through DSUB patch or filter
connector. The male side of the existing connector must be on the Control room side to successfully connect the
MRIRFIF to this connector.
Best performance is obtained by robustly attaching the GROUND of the MRIRFIF (metal enclosure) to EARTH
GROUND at the junction panel. Mounting the MRIRFIF to the junction panel via the included L-bracket
establishes an excellent ground to the panel. EARTH GROUND must be robust and held to the same potential as
MAINS GROUND.
LEAKAGE CURRENTS
1. MRIRFIF: The IEC 60601-1 standard specifies a leakage current of 5 ma assuming double fault
conditions. 265 VAC at 60 Hz will source 5ma into a reactance of 53 K. This reactance is equivalent to an
effective subject capacitance to equipment ground of 0.05uF. The BIOPAC MP unit establishes a subject
to ground capacitance of 0.005 uF. The Pi filter (MRIRFIF) incorporates a 0.002uF subject capacitance to
ground (2 of 0.001 uF caps). Accordingly, even with 16 MECMRI cables (with 16 MRIRFIFs) this results
in a capacitance of .037 uF, which is 74% of the IEC 60601-1 limit, assuming mains is 265 VAC at 60 Hz.
2. MRIRFIF-2: This filter has a dielectric withstand voltage of 1500 VDC and is compatible with
IEC60601-1 requirements. The filter is designed to shunt RF energy from the MRI or control room
chambers to EARTH GROUND without sacrificing CMRR performance for the recording of small valued
signals.
o MRIRFIF-2: -3 dB point = 1 MHz
The MRIRFIF-2 (nine-line
ine-line Pi filter) is normally attached to the MRIRFIF to create a cascaded Pi filter for
superior EMI rejection. The MRIRFIF-2 is also designed for interfacing between MRI chamber room
specialty cable (such as with NICO100C-MRI) and the MRI control room cable.
BIOPAC Hardware | MRI Cables/Cable Sets | Page 2 - 4
Updated:3.30.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
If the specialty cable set is used with an existing patch panel connector, the MRIRFIF-2 should be
plugged into the Control Room side of the patch panel connector, which must be a male/female 9-pin
straight-through DSUB patch or filter connector. The male side of the existing connector must be on the
Control room side to successfully connect to the MRIRFIF-2 and specialty cable.
Best performance is obtained by robustly attaching the GROUND of the MRIRFIF-2 (metal enclosure) to
EARTH GROUND at the junction panel. Mounting the MRIRFIF-2 to the junction panel establishes an
excellent ground to the panel. EARTH GROUND must be robust and held to the same potential as
MAINS GROUND.
The IEC 60601-1 standard specifies a leakage current of 5 ma assuming double fault conditions. 265 VAC
at 60 Hz will source 5 ma into a reactance of 53 K. This reactance is equivalent to an effective subject
capacitance to equipment ground of 0.05 uF. The BIOPAC MP unit establishes a subject to ground
capacitance of 0.005 uF, and the Pi filter (MRIRFIF-2) incorporates a 0.001 uF subject capacitance to
ground. Accordingly, even with 16 MECMRI cables with 16 MRIRFIFs, this results in a capacitance of
0.021 uF, which is 42% of the IEC 60601-1 limit, assuming mains is 265 VAC at 60 Hz.
3. MRIRFIF + MRIRFIF-2 & MRIRFIF-3 + MRIRFIF-2: The IEC 60601-1 standard specifies a leakage
current of 5 ma assuming double fault conditions. 265 VAC at 60 Hz will source 5 ma into a reactance of
53 K. This reactance is equivalent to an effective subject capacitance to equipment ground of 0.05 uF. The
BIOPAC MP unit establishes a subject to ground capacitance of 0.005 uF. The Pi filter set (MRIRFIF +
MRIRFIF-2) incorporates a 0.003 uF subject capacitance to ground. Accordingly, even with 15 MECMRI
cables—with 15 MRIRFIFs—this results in a capacitance of .05 uF, which is 100% of the IEC 60601-1
limit, assuming mains is 265 VAC at 60 Hz.
MRI CABLE SETS
MECMRI-xxxx cable systems for MRI applications. Cables must be attached to the MRI patch panel according
to BIOPAC’s instructions; see web for diagrams. These cable sets include a five line Pi filter set, designed for
interfacing between the MECMRI-1 chamber room cable and any of the MRI Control room cables (MECMRI-2
to MECMRI-6).
MRI Use:
MR Conditional to 7T
Note:
The MRIRFIF + MRIRFIF-2 Pi filter must be on the control room side of the patch
panel. Conductive parts of cable are electrically and thermally isolated from subject.
MECMRI-xxx components—MRI chamber room cable only:
Tinned copper wire (99.99% pure copper), Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic, Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene
(ABS) Thermo-molded, Plastic, Solder (63% tin and 37% lead) – trace amounts, Copper clad fiberglass
lamination (PCB material), Tinned copper connectors
BIOPAC Hardware | MRI Cables/Cable Sets | Page 3 - 4
Updated:3.30.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
MECMRI-DA — For recordings with a transducer in the MRI
chamber room and the DA100C in the MRI control room. Use to
connect directly to the following transducers: Medium Flow
Pneumotach (TSD117-MRI,) Hand clench dynamometer
(TSD121B-MRI,) or arterial pressure TSD104A-MRI.
X
MECMRI-HLT — For recordings in the MRI with the HLT100C.
Use to connect directly to the following transducers: TSD115MRI or TSD131-MRI.
X
MECMRI-OXY — Use to connect to the OXY100C Pulse
Oximeter and TSD123A/B Oximetry transducers for MRI
applications. (Discontinued)
MECMRI-6
MECMRI-5
MECMRI-4
X
X
X
MECMRI-STMISO — Use to connect directly to the following
stim isolation adapters: STMISOC, STMISOD, or STMISOE.
X
X
MECMRI-TRANS — For Transducer recordings in the MRI.
Use to connect directly to the following transducer amplifiers:
PPG100C-MRI, RSP100C*, SKT100C*, or EDA100C-MRI.
Connection Sequence: Subject to transducer to MECMRI-1 to
MRIRFIF to MECMRI-3 to transducer module.
*These amplifiers can be used for MRI measurements.
X
X
MECMRI-BIOP — Component set for Biopotential recordings in
the MRI. Use to connect directly to any of the following
biopotential amplifiers: ECG100C-MRI, EGG100C*, EMG100C-MRI or EOG100C*.
Connection Sequence: Subject to electrodes to leads to
MECMRI-1 to MRIRFIF to MECMRI-2 to Biopotential Module.
*BIOPAC can customize these amplifiers for use in MRI.
X
X
X
X
X
MECMRI-NICO — Component (Cable/Filter) set for
noninvasive cardiac output recordings in the fMRI and MRI. Use
to connect directly to the NICO100C-MRI amplifier.
Connection Sequence: Subject to electrodes to leads to
MECMRI-NICO to NICO100C-MRI.
MECMRI-3
MECMRI-2
MECMRI-1
MRIRFIF-3
MRIRFIF-2
CABLE/FILTER SETS
MRIRFIF
MRI CABLE/FILTER SETS TABLE
The following table illustrates the components of each cable/filter set. See table for full descriptions of each
included cable and filter.
X
X
X
X
PNEUMATIC LINES — No electrical MRI Cable/Filter
required – use DA100C.
TSD110-MRI, TSD114-MRI, TSD137 series, TSD221-MRI,
TSD237 series (for animal.)
BIOPAC Hardware | MRI Cables/Cable Sets | Page 4 - 4
Updated:3.30.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
DTU100 DIGITAL TRIGGER UNIT
Digital Trigger (MRI Trigger)
Use the DTU100 Digital Trigger Unit to trigger an MRI System with the occurrence of the R-wave present in
animal (high frequency) ECG data. The DTU100 provides high-level (3000 V) isolation between the MP System
and external equipment; the DTU100 is always used with the HLT100C module. This isolation is very important
to maintain both subject safety and high quality signal recording. This external hardware module can accept data
from any analog output associated with an MP System and convert that analog signal into a TTL compatible
trigger suitable for synchronizing with external devices.
For the DTU100, “Analog output” means:
1) Analog output associated with any MP module (DA100C, ECG100C, etc) that is sending data to an MP
System on Analog Input channels 1–16.
2) Analog output coming from the MP system via one of its D/A converters on Analog Output channel 0–1.
SYNCHRONIZATION
To synchronize an MRI System with the occurrence of the R-wave, record animal (high frequency) ECG data on
an ECG100C amplifier and direct the output to an analog input channel on the MP100/150 Unit.
a) Connect the DTU100 RJ11 cable to the HLT100C channel that is sourcing the ECG analog signal. For
example, if acquiring ECG waveform on Channel 2, connect DTU100 RJ11 to channel 2 on the HLT100C.
b) Use CBL100 cables to connect the Threshold, Trigger and/or Signal View to unused analog channel inputs on
the UIM100C to monitor signals in AcqKnowledge.
c) Connect the Trigger Out (TTL) line to the MRI system requiring synchronization to the R-wave of the ECG.
d) If the R-Wave is a clearly defined peak, run the DTU100 in Normal mode. If the R-wave is not always
predominant, consider operating the DTU100 in Auto Level mode, or change the location of ECG leads on the
subject to obtain a better-defined R-wave peak.
e) Adjust the Trigger Level potentiometer to obtain a Trigger Signal. Change the Trigger Out polarity to Positive
or Negative as required for the MRI equipment. Verify proper operation by noting the periodic lighting of the
green Trigger LED. This LED should light briefly whenever the R-wave is detected.
BIOPAC Hardware | DTU100 | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
DTU100 CONTROLS
HLT100C
Feedback Views
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
The DTU100 is always used with the HLT100C module. Use the RJ-11 straight
through cable provided by BIOPAC to plug the DTU100 into the HLT100C.
The DTU100 incorporates three feedback outputs that can be monitored on the MP
System to properly set the threshold (trigger) level and required Trigger Out polarity
for any type of analog input. Use a 3.5 mm mono phono cable (CBL100) to connect the
respective line to an unused MP system input channel.
Threshold View Shows the Threshold (Trigger) Level
Trigger View Shows the Trigger Output as sent to the external equipment.
Signal View Shows the analog input signal as sent to the DTU100.
Trigger Out
Connect a TTL line with BNC female connector between the DTU100 and the trigger
device.
Normal/Auto Level The DTU100 incorporates an optional Automatic Level control circuit. The Automatic
Level control circuit will expand or compress the analog input signal to fit inside of a
±5 V range.
•
Normal — use if the analog input signal is clearly defined.
•
Auto Level — use if the analog input signal has a widely varying baseline or
significant change in amplitude from one desired trigger point to the next; or to try
to improve signal definition.
Trigger
The Trigger LED (green) lights up whenever the Trigger Out signal goes high.
Positive/Negative
If analog data is above the threshold setting the DTU100 output can be set to either
high (+5 V) or low (0.0 V). When analog data drops below the threshold value the
output will be the opposite level.
Trigger Level
Select a trigger level (or threshold) that will fire when analog data reaches that
threshold.
See also: DTU200/300 Systems
BIOPAC Hardware | DTU100 | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ECG-GATE-CARDRESP-E/EL: COMPLETE DUAL CHANNEL GATING SYSTEMS
ECG-GATE-CARDRESP-E with DTU200
ECG-GATE-CARDRESP-EL with DTU300
This system provides the cardiac trigger via an electrocardiogram amplifier and includes an MP150 data
acquisition & analysis system, dual channel cardiac respiratory gating system, and appropriate amplifiers,
transducers, cables, electrodes, and leads.
The MRI Smart Electrocardiogram Amplifier (ECG100C-MRI) records electrical activity generated by the
heart and will reliably record ECG from humans or animals. The amplifier output can be switched between
normal ECG output and R-wave detection. The R-wave mode outputs a smoothed pulse with the occurrence of
each R-wave. The exact timing of the R-wave is detected even under conditions of extreme signal artifact.
The Respiration Transducer (TSD110-MRI) requires no electrical connections inside the chamber and works on
a number of body locations. The multipurpose assembly can be used to noninvasively measure pulse,
respiration—from a small mouse to a human, small pressing forces (like pinching fingers together) for
Parkinson’s evaluations, human facial expressions (smiling, frowning, etc.), spacing and pressure between teeth
coming together, or startle blink response.
The dual channel gating system (DTU200 in -E or DTU300 in -EL) works for small animal and human MRI
applications. It sends cardiac trigger pulses to the MRI when a respiration signal is in the quiet phase. Additional
filters and gain controls further refine the quality of the signal and ensure reliable triggering.
AcqKnowledge includes automation tools for artifact frequency removal, artifact projection removal, median
filter artifact removal, and signal blanking.
System includes:
• MP150 Data Acquisition & Analysis System with AcqKnowledge software (for Windows or Mac)
• ECG100C-MRI Electrocardiogram Amplifier
• MECMRI-BIOP MRI Cable/Filter Set to Biopotential Amplifiers
• LEAD108B (x 3) Radiotranslucent Clip Lead—unshielded, 15 cm
• EL508 (100/pk) Disposable Radiotranslucent Electrodes (Human)
or
• EL510 (20/pk) Disposable Radiotranslucent Electrodes (Animal)
• TSD110-MRI Respiration Transducer
• DA100C General-purpose Transducer Amplifier
• Dual Channel Cardiac Respiratory Gating System
- DTU200 with GATE-CARDRESp-E
- DTU300 with GATE-CARDRESP-EL
BIOPAC Hardware | MRI Gating Systems | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 1.10.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
DTU200/300 DUAL CHANNEL GATING SYSTEMS
DTU200 for small animal
DTU300 for human/large animal
DTU200 and DTU300 dual channel gating systems for MRI applications send cardiac trigger pulses to the MRI
when a respiration signal is in the quiet phase. Pre-processing filters and gain controls further refine the quality of
the signal and ensure reliable triggering.
The system requires two analog input signals:
1. Cardiac signal – ECG, BP or Pulse from Electrocardiogram Amplifier (ECG100C/ECG100C-MRI), Micro
Pressure Measurement System MPMS200 + TSD283), or Pulse Oximetry System (OXY300-MRI).
2. Respiration signal – small animal respiration pad (TSD110-MRI + DA100C General Purpose Transducer Amp)
or human respiration transducer (TSD201 + RSP100C + MECMRI-TRANS).
Cardiac phase
• Threshold: The ECG or Blood pressure signal passes through a user selectable threshold that creates a square
wave (0-5 volt) cardiac trigger signal.
o R-wave or BP signal crosses the threshold in both directions to initiate the MRI trigger signal pulse.
• Hold-Off: A delay control allows precise timing of the trigger signal pulse relative to the rising or falling edge of
the ECG R-wave (DTU200: 1-50 msec; DTU300 5-250 msec).
• Blanking: A blanking control, initiated on the falling edge of the first accepted ECG in the quiet period, provides
a time discriminator (DTU200: 50-300 msec; DTU300: 250-1,500 msec) that prevents the DTU system from
falsely triggering on an MRI-corrupted ECG signal.
• Monitoring: cardiac trigger channel is available for monitoring purposes using a BNC to 3.5 mm cable (CBL102,
included). BIOPAC recommends monitoring this signal with the MP150 data acquisition and analysis system.
Respiration
• Threshold: The respiratory system also passes through a similar threshold to create a square wave when the signal
crosses the threshold in both directions. The quiet period is user-selectable to be the interval between rising and
falling edges or falling and rising edges of the RSP signal.
• Monitoring: This signal is available for monitoring purposes using a BNC to 3.5 mm cable (included) CBL102.
BIOPAC recommends monitoring this signal with the MP150 data acquisition and analysis system.
Signal Conditioning
• Cardiac
Gain: 1-10
Low Pass Filter: 10-100 Hz
High Pass Filter: 0.1-1 Hz
• Respiration
Gain: 1-10
Low Pass Filter: 1-10 Hz
High Pass Filter: 0.05-0.5 Hz
BIOPAC Hardware | DTU200-300 | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 1.10.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Output Controls
The MRI trigger channel only outputs a cardiac trigger when the respiration trigger channel goes into the
quiet period, which occurs when the animal is between breaths and still. The system will output a precise
number of cardiac triggers between each respiratory period by adjusting the trigger count control (1-8).
Cardiac cycles are only considered if they occur >100 msec after the respiration trigger goes into the quiet
period. If there isn’t enough time to complete the required number of triggers, the unit will stop and wait for
the next quiet period before starting a new count. For example, if the counter is set to output 5 triggers, but
there is only enough time to send 4, the unit will ignore the fifth trigger and wait for the next quiet period
before starting the count again.
Signal Monitoring
There are outputs for the cardiac and respiration conditioned signals (available at BNC ports: Buffered
ECG/BP and Buffered RSP) and the respective triggers. The conditioned signals are in the ±10 volt level
range and trigger outputs are 0-5 volts. Seven BNC to 3.5 mm monitoring cables (CBL102) are included.
Compatibility
The unit will interface with either a BIOPAC MP100 or MP150 system. It will also work with third-party
amplifiers and data acquisition systems that operate in the ±10 volt range.
DTU200/300 Specifications
Inputs
ECG/BP
RSP
MRI Trigger
Signal Controls ECG/BP
Threshold
Gain Range
RSP
Threshold
Gain Range
Polarity
ECG/BP
RSP
ECG/BP Delays Hold-Off
Blanking
Trigger Count
Status LED
Trigger
MRI Trigger Out
Power
Power
Switch
Supply
ECG /BP Trigger
Buffered ECG/BP
RSP Trigger
Buffered RSP
Pulse width 500 µsec, active low
HP high-pass filter
LP low-pass filter
.10 - 1.0 Hz
-6 - +6 V (infinitely variable)
10 - 100 Hz
1 - 10 (infinitely variable)
HP high-pass filter
LP low-pass filter
05 - 0.5 Hz
1 - 10 Hz
-6 - +6 V (infinitely variable)
1 - 10 V (infinitely variable)
+ (pos, up) or - (neg, down)
+ (pos, up) or - (neg, down)
DTU200: 1 - 50 ms, DTU300: 5-250 ms (infinitely variable)
DTU200: 50 -300 ms, DTU300: 250-1,500 ms (infinitely variable)
1–8
ECG/BP red
RSP red
green
yellow
ON (up), OFF (down)
12 V DC 1 A
Blood Pressure Gating—Complete Systems
• Provide the cardiac trigger via a micro pressure measurement system
GATE-CARDRESP-E for small animal (DTU200) GATE-CARDRESP-EL for human or large animal (DTU300)
Includes:
o Dual Channel Cardiac Respiratory Gating System: DTU200 (-E) DTU300 (-EL)
o MP150 Data Acquisition & Analysis System with AcqKnowledge software (for Windows or Mac)
o TSD110-MRI Respiration Transducer (transducer, sensor, and tubing)
o DA100C General-purpose transducer amplifier
o Electrocardiography Amplifier ECG100C-MRI with leads and electrodes
BIOPAC Hardware | DTU200-300 | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 1.10.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
OXY-MRI – SPO2 MODULE WITH SENSOR FOR HUMAN MRI
MRI Use:
MR Conditional
Condition:
Must use MR finger sensor and max MR field strength 3T; module stays in control room.
OXY-MRI is a stand-alone system for adult human pulse
oximetry (SpO2) in the MRI; it can also be used with a
BIOPAC MP150 Research System.
The system includes a SpO2 amplifier and a fiber-optic
oximetry sensor for the finger, plus a signal isolation adapter
INISO and interface cables to connect to an existing BIOPAC
HLT100C (high level transducer interface module) for MP
Research Systems. Additional finger sensors are available as
OXY-MRI-SENSOR.
The SpO2 amplifier is used in the MRI control room, the 9 m fiber-optic sensor cable is passed through the wave
guide, and the finger sensor is attached to the subject in the MRI chamber room. MRI-rated to 3.0 Tesla.
! OXY-MRI is not intended for animal use.
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
System includes: SpO2 amplifier and pulse oximetry sensor for stand-alone use, plus INISO signal isolator and
dSUB9 cable to connect SpO2 amp analog out to INISO for use with a BIOPAC Research System.
Note: When simultaneously recording biopotential signals from a subject, or for safety in cases when the system
is electrically connected to the subject (for recording or stimulation,) a BIOPAC HLT100C (not included) is
required in order to connect the INISO to the MP150 unit. If more than one OXY-MRI signal is to be
recorded using the HLT100C, an additional INISO can be obtained by contacting BIOPAC. (Only one
INISO is included in the OXY-MRI system.)
If not recording biopotential signals, the OXY-MRI cable can be connected directly to the UIM100C.
BIOPAC Hardware | OXY-MRI | Page 1 - 4
Updated: 12.9.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SPECIFICATIONS
Oxygen Saturation Display Range: 0–100% SpO2
Pulse Rate Range: 18–321 BPM
Saturation Accuracy (Arms): 70–100% ± 2 digits
Note: ± 1 Arms represents approximately 68% of measurements
Pulse Rate Accuracy:
no motion 18–300 BPM ± 3 digits
low perfusion 40–240 BPM ± 3 digits
Displays:
Pulse Strength: LED, Bar graph, tri-color segments
Alarm Indicator: LED, bi-color
Alarm Silenced: LED, amber
Numeric Displays: 3-digit, 7-segment LEDs, green
Low Battery: LED, amber
Analog Outputs:
SpO2 Output Range: 0-1 VDC (0–100% SpO2), 1.27 VDC (out of track)
Pulse Rate Output Range: 0-1 VDC (0–300 BPM), 1.27 VDC (out of track)
Event Marker: 0 V (no event), 1 V (event occurred)
Accuracy: ± 2% (SpO2), ± 5% (Pulse Rate)
Load Current: 2 mA maximum
Memory: 70 hours (assuming continuous operation)
Temperature
Operating: 0° C to +40° C (32° F to 104° F)
Storage/Transportation: -30° C to +50° C (-2° F to 122° F)
Humidity
Operating: 10–90% noncondensing
Storage/Transportation: 10–95% noncondensing
Altitude
Operating: up to 12,000 meters (40,000 feet)
Hyperbaric Pressure: up to 4 atmospheres
Mains Power Requirements: 100–240 VAC 50–60 Hz
Internal Power Requirements
Battery: 7.2 volt NiMH battery pack
Operating Life (fully charged battery): 16 hours minimum
Storage Life: 21 days minimum
Recharge Rate: 4 hours maximum
Dimensions: Approximately 219 mm (8.6”) W x 92 mm (3.6”) H x 142 mm (5.6”) D
Weight: Approximately 900 grams (2 lbs) with battery
Warranty: SpO2 amplifier: 3 years; pulse oximetry sensor: 90 days
Classification per IEC 60601-1/CSA601.1/UL60601-1:
Type of Protection: Internally powered (on battery power)
Degree of Protection: Type BF-Applied Part
Mode of Operation: Continuous
Enclosure Degree of Ingress Protection: IPX2
BIOPAC Hardware | OXY-MRI | Page 2 - 4
Updated: 12.9.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ACQKNOWLEDGE CALIBRATION (HLT100C)
1. Launch AcqKnowledge. The “Add new module” dialog should appear. If it does not, choose “MP150 >
Set Up Data Acquisition > Channels.”
2. Choose “HLT100C-A1” from the module list and choose “Add.”
3. Select “OXY-MRI SPO2 Module Human-SPO2” from the “Transducer” list and click OK.
4. Choose “Add new module” and choose “HLT100C-A2” from the module list and click “Add.”
5. Select "OXY-MRI SPO2 Module Human-Pulse Rate" from the “Transducer” and click OK.
Using the above method of HLT100C module setup, no further calibration or scaling is necessary.
BIOPAC Hardware | OXY-MRI | Page 3 - 4
Updated: 12.9.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ACQKNOWLEDGE CALIBRATION (UIM100C)
1. Launch AcqKnowledge. The “Add new module” dialog should appear. If it does not, choose “MP150 >
Set Up Data Acquisition > Channels.”
2. Choose “UIM100C-A1” from the module list and choose “Add.”
3. Choose “Custom” from the “Transducer” list and click OK to open the Scaling dialog.
4. Enter Cal 1, Cal 2, and Units Label as shown below and click OK.
5. Choose “Add new module” and choose “UIM100C-A2” from the module list, and click “Add.”
6. Choose “Custom” from the “Transducer” list and click OK to open the Scaling dialog.
7. Enter Cal 1, Cal 2, and Units Label as shown below and click OK.
BIOPAC Hardware | OXY-MRI | Page 4 - 4
Updated: 12.9.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
OXY300-MRI – SMALL ANIMAL NON-INVASIVE VITAL SIGNS MONITOR
MRI Usage: MR Conditional
Condition:
Must use MR sensor clip and max MR field strength 3T; modules stay in control room.
OXY300-MRI is a complete system for collecting small animal SpO2 measurements in an MRI environment.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Works on conscious or anesthetized subjects
Patented sensor supports heart rates in the range of 90-900 BPM
Works with neonatal mice up to 500 gram rats
MRI sensor works in closed, small and large bore MRI machines
o regularly used in 9T magnets and has been successfully used in a 12T magnet
o contact BIOPAC to discuss specific magnet strengths up to 19T
Analog outputs interface cables included to interface with BIOPAC MP150 System via the UIM100C
Immediate access to Vital Signs for pre-,intra- and post-operative measurements
Arterial Oxygen Saturation
o comprehensive health indicator
o indicates lung efficiency, not just airflow
Heart Rate
Pulse Distention
o indicates signal quality
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Includes:
Small Animal Vital Signs Monitor - MouseOx® Plus Monitor
MRI sensor
Analog output data unit
Interface Cables (2 x CBL102)
OXY300-MRI REFERENCES
OXY300-MRI User Manual
OXY300-MRI Publications
BIOPAC Hardware | OXY300-MRI | Page 1 - 4
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SPECIFICATIONS
Oxygen Saturation (%)
Measurement Range (pulse rate 90 to 900 bpm)
0 to 100% Arterial Blood Oxygen Saturation
Measurement Resolution (pulse rate 210 to 900 bpm)
Resolution = 1.5%, across entire range
Measurement Response Time
SpO2 is reported to the user after each heartbeat
Heart Rate (bpm)
Measurement Range
90 to 900 bpm
Measurement Resolution (heart rate 210 to 900 bpm)
Rate (bpm) Resolution (bpm) Rate (bpm) Resolution (bpm)
210
2.4
600
19.4
300
4.9
700
26.2
400
8.7
800
34.0
500
13.5
900
42.9
Measurement Response Time
Heart rate is reported to the user after each heartbeat.
Pulse Distention (µm)
Measurement Range (pulse rate 90 to 900 bpm)
0 to 800 µm
Measurement Resolution
= 2.4% of measurement
Measurement Response Time
Pulse distention is reported to the user after each heartbeat
Respiration
Respiration may be available as a derived signal but is not suitable for use with gating systems
Warning: No part of the OXY300-MRI MouseOx® Plus system other than the fiber optic cable and the sensor
should go into an MRI machine.
Analog output interface
2 x CBL102 (included) to UIM100C module for BIOPAC MP150 System
Delay
Fixed (0.7-1.4 seconds)
Small Animal Vital Signs Monitor
®
MouseOx Plus Control Box (Starr Life Sciences)
BNC output range: ±5 V
Screen refreshes every 0.72 seconds to update measurement values
12 VAC Power Supply (you will have one or the other of the following)
•
US and Canada: Standard External Plug-in Power Supply
• International: Power Transformer and Power Cord to fit your wall receptacle
12-foot 2.0 USB Cable
CD with MouseOx® Plus Electronic User Manual
Universal Cable
Computer and Electrical Requirements for MouseOx Plus:
•
Processor- PC with Pentium-class processor (Pentium 1 GHz or higher recommended)
•
Computer Hardware
•
VGA or higher resolution monitor (Super VGA recommended)
•
2.0 USB port
BIOPAC Hardware | OXY300-MRI | Page 2 - 4
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Operating System
Windows® XP, Vista, 7 or newer, compatible with Apple® computers when using a Windows® emulator
Memory: 1 GB RAM; 5 MB Hard-Drive Space for program (does not include data files)
Minimum Screen Resolution: 1024 by 768 pixels
The MouseOx® Plus has the following power requirements:
Operating Wall Voltage: 100-240 VAC @ 50-60 Hz - you must use ONLY the provided power supply!
Device Operating Voltage: 12 VAC
Max Operating Analog Current: 200 mA
Max Operating USB Current: 85 mA - MouseOx® Plus; 180 mA – STARR-Link™
(When using more than one of these devices, you must not operate the computer on batteries.)
BIOPAC Hardware | OXY300-MRI | Page 3 - 4
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
OXY300-MRI SENSOR: SMALL-BORE MRI SENSOR INSTRUCTION SHEET
Small-Bore MRI Sensor Schematic
Usage Instructions:
1. Connect the DB9 Connector (9-pin connector) on the end of the thin black cable to the MouseOx®
Control Box. Be sure that the MouseOx® software is not running when you do this.
2. Connect a disposable sensor clip to the fiber-optic cable. You MUST USE a Mouse Thigh Clip for mice
and a Rat Foot Clip for rats. Place the protrusion on the end of the fiber-optic cable labeled “LED” into
the hole on the clip half marked “LED,” then do the same for the side marked “PD.” Make sure that the
fiber-optic cable is oriented so that it aligns over the handle as shown.
3.
Connect the sensor clip to the animal:
a. Mouse Thigh – Place the clip on the thigh of a mouse as shown. For non-white fur, you MUST
shave both locations of the sensor site. On white fur, shaving is not necessary, but will improve
signal strength.
b. Rat Foot – Place the clip over the toes and locate it so that light shines through the CENTER of
the foot. Support the clip/cable so that the animal’s foot is NOT TWISTED relative to its position
before attaching the clip. The clip half marked “PD” should be on the bottom side of the foot.
4. After locating the clip on the animal, distribute the dual black fiber-optic cable such that it proceeds
straight from the animal and that it DOES NOT twist the animal’s foot. Try to lay the sensor clip so that
both the LED and PD cables are lying on the table.
5. Run the MouseOx® software (Rev 6.0 or higher). To get to the Monitor Subject screen, choose
“Anesthetized Measurements” then “Mouse Thigh” or “Rat Foot” depending on your application.
Other recommended guidelines:
- Keep the body (rectal) temperature of the animal above 36° C.
- Make sure that Pulse Distention exceeds 20 m when operating the system. If Pulse Distention is
less than 20 m, try to relocate the sensor clip to improve it or warm the animal.
- If you are having trouble getting a good signal, try shaving the sensor location if applicable.
- The non-ferrous spring will weaken with multiple uses. An unreasonably low oxygen saturation
measurement (a healthy subject with a sat of 88% or less) is a clear sign of an over-used spring.
To prevent this, and to promote infection control, replace the clip before each MRI session.
CAUTION: Converter box contains trace amounts of ferrous material. Keep it away from the magnet bore.
BIOPAC Hardware | OXY300-MRI | Page 4 - 4
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
O2100C AND CO2100C GAS CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT MODULES
O2100C
and
CO2100C
BIOPAC offers two fast-response analyzers for gas analysis. Each module measures partial pressure (of O2 or
CO2, respectively) and thus module output is proportional to the pressure in the sample cell. Gas sampled must be
free of liquids or any condensable vapors and should be filtered to 5 microns or better.
O2100C
Records quickly varying oxygen concentration levels.
Ideal for monitoring time-averaged O2 levels using mixing chambers or real-time O2 levels for
breath-by-breath measurements.
Employs an analysis technique based on the parametric oxygen measurement principle.
CO2100C
Records quickly varying carbon dioxide concentration levels.
Ideal for monitoring time-averaged CO2 levels using mixing chambers or real-time CO2 levels for
breath-by-breath measurements.
Employs a single beam infrared, single wavelength, measurement technique.
Both modules are equipped with a variable speed pump to adjust the flow over a wide range of sampling
conditions. Sampling line connections for input and output flow are readily accessible on the front panel of either
module.
Each module can interface with the AFT15A and AFT15B mixing chambers (via the AFT20 or AFT35-MRI gas
sampling interface kit), the AFT21 and AFT22 non-rebreathing T valves or the AFT25 mask with integral nonrebreathing T valve.
BIOPAC Hardware | O2100C-CO2100C | Page 1 - 5
Updated: 12.9.2013
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
TECHNICAL USE NOTES
1. Snap the module together with the UIM100C (or other BIOPAC modules).
2. Select an unused channel on the channel selector switch on top of the module.

If two or more BIOPAC modules are set to the same channel, the outputs will conflict, resulting in
erroneous readings.
3. Turn the MP150/MP100 unit on and start the AcqKnowledge software.

Please consult the “AcqKnowledge Software Guide” for information about AcqKnowledge.
4. Plug the adapter into the main power and insert the adapter plug into the back of the module.

The module is supplied with a 12 vdc @ 1 amp wall adapter—do not use other wall adapters with a
gas analysis module.

The green POWER LED should light up. If it doesn’t, check the adapter main power and the
connection to the O2100C module and then, if necessary, check the FUSE on the back of the
O2100C/CO2100C module. [The FUSE ratings are: Instrumentation Type, Fast Blow @ 2 amps.]

The O2100C module has a warm-up time of approximately 1 minute. The CO2100C module has a
warm-up time of approximately 5 minutes. Output readings during this warm-up period may be
erratic.
5. Check for pump operation by turning the PUMP switch ON (after the green POWER LED comes on).

The module should emit a hum, indicating that the pump is working. Generally, the PUMP SPEED
control will not have to be adjusted. However, it may be helpful to control sampling flow in the range
of 50 to 200 ml/min depending upon measurement requirements.

The PUMP will start fast, then slow down and stabilize on a speed after a few seconds. This is a
perfectly normal process, designed to overcome the pump’s initial mechanical hysteresis.

If the pump does not come on or comes on for a brief period and then shuts off, the PUMP SPEED
control is set to a very low value (i.e., close to zero speed). To change the pump speed, keep the
PUMP switch in the ON position and use a small straight blade screwdriver to turn the recessed
potentiometer in the PUMP SPEED control. Turn trim POT clockwise to increase PUMP speed or
counter-clockwise to decrease PUMP speed
6. Adjust the GAIN switch on the front of the module after proper startup.
Module
Gain
1V output = % gas concentration
Voltage output range
O2
100% / V
100%
O2
50% / V
50%
O2
0 to 2 volts
O2
20% / V
20%
O2
0 to 5 volts
O2
10% / V
10%
O2
0 to 10 volts
CO2
10% / V
10%
CO2
0 to 1 volt
CO2
5% / V
5%
CO2
0 to 2 volts
CO2
2% / V
2%
CO2
0 to 5 volts
CO2
1% / V
1%
CO2
0 to 10 volts
O2
BIOPAC Hardware | O2100C-CO2100C | Page 2 - 5
0 to 1 volt
Updated: 12.9.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
O2 example: If
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
the 100% / V setting is used, then 20.93% oxygen (atmospheric level) will be output as
0.2093 volts or 209.3 mV. Generally, GAIN can be left at the setting of 10% oxygen per
volt (bottom position).
CO2 example: If the 10% / V setting is used, then 4% carbon dioxide (approximate concentration in
expired breath) will be output as 0.40 V or 400 mV. Generally, GAIN can be left at
the setting of 1% carbon dioxide per volt (bottom position).
GAS SAMPLING SETUP
1. Stabilize the measurement setup prior to sampling any gases.
Pump speed, filters and sampling lines all affect the oxygen measurement of the module. Everything
should be stable prior to attempting module calibration.
2. Attach a 5 micron filter (or better) on the sample input port prior to sampling any gases.
The sample input port is a male Luer fitting on the front of the module. The module incorporates an
internal particulate filter, however the addition of this external filter will extend the life of the internal
filter and otherwise improve the long-term performance of the module. Always use a 5 micron
hydrophobic sampling filter (or better) at the sampling input of the module. One is included with each
module and each Gas Sampling Interface Kit (AFT20 or AFT35-MRI). The 5-micron hydrophobic filter
will help to protect the module from airborne particulate matter and other contaminants.
3. If required, screw a 10/32 threaded Luer adapter into the sample output port bulkhead fitting and attach
the venting line to the Luer adapter to vent undesirable gases away from the site of the module.
The sample output port is adjacent to the sample input port (on the right, facing the front panel of the
module) and is a bulkhead fitting with a 10/32 internal thread.
Important
Sample dry gases only. All excess water vapor above ambient levels should be removed from the sampling
stream prior to being monitored by the module. To dry the sampling stream, use water vapor permeable
tubing (i.e., NAFION®). The AFT20 or AFT35-MRI Gas Sampling Interface Kit includes all the items
necessary (including NAFION® tubing) to efficiently connect the module to a variety of setups, including
BIOPAC mixing chambers, facemasks and non-rebreathing T-valves..
CALIBRATION
Each gas concentration module comes factory-calibrated to ± 1% concentration accuracy. Depending upon
sampling line configuration and pump speed (flow rate,) the calibration may veer further from ±1% accuracy.
Generally, a gas calibration should be performed prior to all exacting measurements. This may also be
required when running at increased pump speeds and thus increased flow rate. Initial (Factory) oxygen accuracy
calibration is usually inadequate for varying setup protocols. Proper calibration of the module should be
performed after the specific measurement setup is in place.
The CO2100C and O2100C gas sampling modules are designed so that the gas sensors are held at ambient
pressure, due to construction design which directs exhaust sampling direct to the ambient environment. In this
regard, the modules are relatively insensitive to variations in sampling line pressure. However, it remains good
practice to use setup configurations which will minimize any pressure variation in the sampling line.
Choose the calibration gases to bracket the expected measurements. For example:

When performing End Tidal O2 measurements, normal air can be used as the first calibration gas
because the oxygen concentration is known as 20.93%. For the second gas, it might be best to use a
calibration gas of 16% oxygen, 4% carbon dioxide and 80% nitrogen (such as BIOPAC’s GASCAL).
In this case, the measurements will be most accurate for the range of 16.00% to 20.93% oxygen.

When performing End Tidal CO2 measurements, normal air can be used as the first calibration gas
because the carbon dioxide concentration is known as 0.04%. For the second gas, it might be best to
use a calibration gas of 4% carbon dioxide, 16% oxygen and 80% nitrogen. In this case, the
measurements will be most accurate for the range of 0.04% to 4% carbon dioxide.
BIOPAC Hardware | O2100C-CO2100C | Page 3 - 5
Updated: 12.9.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Exact calibration is typically performed in AcqKnowledge, using the Scaling function under Setup Channels,
once the measurement setup is in place.
1. Set up the measurement so that all gas sampling lines are in place between the module and the sampling
chamber.
2. Adjust the PUMP SPEED control (if required) on the module.
3. Run the module and click on the CAL1 button when the first calibration gas is introduced into the
sampling chamber.
4. Introduce a second calibration gas into the chamber and click on CAL2 when the second calibration gas is
introduced into the sampling chamber.
Note
Do not change the pump speed, the sampling filter or the sampling line length/configuration
during or after a calibration. Changing any of these elements may reduce the accuracy of the
calibration.
PUMP SPEED CONTROL
The pump speed is factory preset to result in a sampling flow rate of approximately 100 ml/min, when used with
the AFT20 or AFT35-MRI Gas Sampling Interface Kit. The time delay between change of oxygen concentration
at the sampling end of the Gas Sampling Interface Kit (AFT20 or AFT35-MRI)) to measurement at the module is
approximately 2.4 seconds. This is because the pump will move 100 ml/min and the internal volume of the Gas
Sampling Interface Kit is about 4.0 ml.
Volume in ml = () • (radius in cm)2 • (length in cm)
The Gas Sampling Interface Kit volume is calculated using:
PVC Sample Line:
72" long at 0.060" D
Volume = 3.336 ml
®
NAFION Dryer:
12" long at 0.050" D
Volume = 0.386 ml
Misc. Tubing/Junctions:
6" long at 0.060" D
Volume = 0.278 ml
If the sample rate is 100 ml/min, then the pump will pull 4 ml in 2.4 seconds:
(60 sec/min) • (4 ml) / (100 ml/min) = 2.4 sec
To check the flow rate, expire into the free end of the sampling line (30 cm Naflon tubing + 1.8 meters
polyethylene tubing from AFT20 or AFT35-MRI Gas Sampling Kit) and simultaneously mark the recording
(using the marker function in AcqKnowledge). The measured gas concentration level should show a change at
approximately 2.5 seconds.
BIOPAC Hardware | O2100C-CO2100C | Page 4 - 5
Updated: 12.9.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SPECIFICATIONS
O2100C Module measures the partial pressure of O2.
CO2100C Module measures the partial pressure of CO2.
Thus the module output is proportional to the pressure in the sample cell. Gas sampled must be free of
any liquid or condensable vapors. Gas should be filtered to 5 microns or better.
O2100C
CO2100C
Range:
0-100% O2
0-10% CO2
Repeatability:
±0.1% O2
0.03% CO2
Resolution:
±0.1% O2
0.1% CO2
Linearity:
±0.2% O2
0.1% CO2
Zero Stability:
±0.01% O2/hr
0.1% CO2/24 hours
Response Time:
200 msec (T20-T80) @ 200 ml/min
150 msec (T20-T80) @ 200 ml/min
500 msec (T20-T80) @ 100 ml/min
250 msec (T20-T80) @ 100 ml/min
Fact
ory Preset:
1000 msec (T20-T80) @ 50 ml/min
350 msec (T20-T80) @ 50 ml/min
Delay: (at 4 ml sampling line
Flow (ml/min) = 240/Delay (sec)
volume)
Example: If Delay is 2 sec; Flow = 120 ml/min
Gain:
10, 20, 50, 100 (%O2/Volt)
1, 2, 5, 10 (%CO2/Volt)
Output Range:
0-10 volts
Flow Range:
5-200 ml/min (50/150 ml/min recommended, increasing flow rate increases
response time)
Temp Range:
5-50 C
10-45 C
Zero Drift:
±0.05% O2/C
±0.01% CO2/C
Span Drift:
±0.25% O2/C
±0.02% CO2/C
Warm Up Time:
About 1 minute
About 5 minutes
Humidity Range: (non-condensing) 0-95%
0-90%
Sampling Input Port:
Male Luer
Sampling Output Port:
Bulkhead fitting, 10/32 internal thread
Weight:
990 grams
740 grams
Dimensions:
7 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
Power Source:
12 VDC @ 1 amp (uses AC100A transformer, included)

Gas sampled must be free of liquids or any condensable vapors.

Gas sampled should be filtered to 5 microns or better.
The module measures the partial pressure of O2 and thus the module output is proportional to the partial
pressure of O2 in the sample cell.
For example, the partial pressure of 21% concentration of O2 at sea level (760 torr) is:
760 torr * 0.21 = 159.60 torr
So at 700 torr and 21% O2, the module output will be:
(700 torr / 760 torr) * 159.6 torr = 147 torr
Accordingly, when operating at an ambient pressure of 700 torr, the module scaling needs to be multiplied by a
factor of (700/760) or 0.921 * (original scaling).

See also:
Application
Application
AFT Series Airflow & Gas Analysis Accessories
Note # AH149 — O2100C Module Setup
Note # AH151 — CO2100C Module Setup
BIOPAC Hardware | O2100C-CO2100C | Page 5 - 5
Updated: 12.9.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE *$6&$/&$/,%5$7,21*$6
*$6&$/
Composition:
Cylinder Type:
Valve Connection:
Accuracy:
Stability Guaranteed:
Cylinder Pressure:
Gas Volume:
Cylinder Recycling:
info@biopac.com
VXSSRUW#ELRSDFFRP
www.biopac.com
*$65(*5(*8/$725
4% Carbon Dioxide, 16% Oxygen, balance Nitrogen
ED
CGA-973
±0.03% absolute
3 years
2200 psig
560 liters
Cylinder Recycling Program available. Call 1-800-457-0809 to receive instructions
for returning a cylinder; delivery paid by sender and recycling covered by
manufacturer.
*$65(*
Use the non-corrosive, two stage regulator with flow control with the GASCAL Calibration Gas Cylinder.
This regulator is used to inject calibration gases into the AFT15 chambers to create the VHFRQGDU\
calibration points for a proper gas calibration of O2 and CO2 sensors.

The initial case (for the primary calibration points) is the chamber flooded with ambient air
(20.95% Oxygen, 0.04% Carbon Dioxide and balance Nitrogen).

The secondary case (for the secondary calibration points) is using the GASCAL with GASREG to
inject a calibrated gas mixture into the chamber.

The chamber will be flooded with this mixture from GASCAL. GASCAL is a tank containing 4%
carbon dioxide, 16% oxygen and balance (80%) nitrogen.
Use 3.2 mm ID tubing to run from GASREG output to the chamber and seal the 3.2 mm ID tube to the
input port of the chamber, during calibration.
Wait for the chamber to be flooded, typically about 1-2 minutes.
Put regulator at 10 psi and open up the flow valve.
After flooding, then largely close the flow valve, but keep some small flow during the calibration of
secondary point, to maintain positive pressure in the chamber.
The chamber needs to be flooded prior to attempting to calibrate for secondary points.
After secondary calibration, shut down the tank by closing the main valve.
BIOPAC Hardware | *$6&$/±*$65(*| Page 1 - 1
Updated: 2.17.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
See also: Student Accessory Pack BSL-ACCPACK
AFT SERIES AIRFLOW & GAS ANALYSIS ACCESSORIES
Includes the following airflow accessories:
Bacterial Filters
Mouthpieces
Calibration Syringes
Airflow Tubing
Facemasks & Accessories
Noseclip
AFT1
AFT4
AFT13
AFT2
ATF8
AFT9
AFT6A
AFT26
AFT7
AFT7L
AFT12
AFT10
AFT10S
AFT25
AFT3
Gas Sampling Kits
AFT T-valves
Head Support
Gas Tubing
Mixing Chamber
Couplers
AFT20
AFT31-MRI
AFT35-MRI
AFT21
AFT22
AFT23
AFT24
AFT30
AFT15
AFT11A
AFT11B
AFT11C
AFT11D
AFT11E
AFT11F
AFT11H
AFT11I
DISPOSABLE BACTERIAL FILTERS
AFT1
AFT4
MRI Use: MR Safe
AFT1/4/13 Bacterial Filter Components: Polycarbonate Clear Plastic
Disposable Bacterial Filter
Available in Packs of 10 or 250
Designed to remove airborne bacteria. Pore Size: Virus Filtration Efficiency (VFE): 3.1 micron;
Bacterial Filtration Efficiency (BFE): 2.8 micron. Use between the SS11LA or TSD117 and the AFT2.
22 mm ID/OD.
Disposable Bacterial Filter
Designed to remove airborne bacteria; for use with the TSD107B, AFT4, or other 35 mm breathing
circuits, connects between the AFT7 and the AFT9. (35 mm ID/35 mm OD)
BIOPAC Hardware | AFT Series | Page 1 - 8
Updated: 9.5.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
AFT13
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Disposable Pulmonary Function Filter and Mouthpiece Available in packs of 10 or 250
Eliminate cross-contamination concerns with this bacteriological filter
with disposable plastic-coated paper mouthpiece to protect subjects
and equipment. These exceed all recommended performance standards
with 99.9% bacterial filtration efficiency and 99.9% viral filtration
efficiency. They feature low resistance and minimal dead space (45 ml
when measured without tube fittings). These surpass published ATS
recommendations for flow resistance in pulmonary function
instrumentation, which suggest resistance should be below 1.5 cm
H2O/L/sec at flow rates less than 12 liters/sec. Port: 30 mm OD.
MOUTHPIECES
MRI Use: MR Safe
AFT Mouthpiece Components: Polyethylene EVA Copolymer, Thermoplastic Rubber,
Polycarbonate Plastic
AFT2
Disposable Mouthpiece
Available in Packs of 10 or 250
22 mm OD; connects to the SS11LA or TSD117 via the AFT1.
AFT8
Autoclavable Mouthpiece
Available in Packs of 1 or 10
30 mm ID; interfaces with the SS11LA or TSD117 and reduces the cost of disposable parts.
• RX117 Replacement Sterilizable Airflow Head: 22 mm ID/30 mm OD; autoclavable transducer
head for the TSD117; can be used with the AFT8 to reduce the cost of disposable items.
AFT9
Reusable Mouthpiece
Available in Packs of 1 or 10
35 mm ID; designed to connect to the TSD107B or other 35 mm breathing circuits with the AFT7 via
the AFT4. (Also connects to the AFT21 Non-rebreathing T Valve.)
NOSECLIP
MRI Use: MR Safe
AFT Noseclip Components: Thermoplastic Rubber, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic,
Polyurethane Foam Plastic
AFT3
Disposable Noseclip
Available in Packs of 10 or 250
Gently squeezes the nostrils shut while using the SS11LA or TSD117 Airflow Transducer.
CALIBRATION SYRINGES
AFT6A Calibration Syringe
0.6 liter calibration syringe. See also: AFT26 2.0 liter Calibration Syringe
AFT26 Calibration Syringe (2.0 liter)
The AFT26 is a 2.0 Liter Calibration Syringe for the
SS11LA or TSD117 Airflow Transducer. The AFT26
Calibration Syringe is certified to have a 2-liter volume that
meets or exceeds an accuracy ± 1% of the total
displacement volume. The increased size and accuracy of
this 2.0 liter calibration syringe provide a wider calibration
range than the AFT6A for advanced studies. A coupler is included and can be reordered as AFT11I if it
is inadvertently discarded when an airflow accessory is removed.
TUBING FOR AIRFLOW
MRI Use: MR Safe
AFT7/7L/12 Tubing Components: Polyethylene EVA Copolymer
AFT7
Smooth Bore Tubing
1 m length, 35 mm ID; connects to the TSD107B, AFT4, or other 35 mm breathing circuits. See also:
AFT part guide for additional applications.
BIOPAC Hardware | AFT Series | Page 2 - 8
Updated: 9.5.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
AFT7L
AFT12
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Smooth Bore Tubing
3 m length, 35 mm ID; connects to the TSD107B, AFT4, or other 35 mm breathing circuits. See also:
AFT part guide for additional applications.
Tubing (22 mm)
Smooth bore tubing for use in 22 mm breathing circuits. (1.8 meter length, 22 mm ID)
FACEMASKS, FACEMASK ACCESSORIES
AFT10 Disposable Adult Facemask
These mouthpieces connect to 22 mm breathing circuits. Connects directly to the AFT1, AFT22 nonrebreathing T-valve, or SS11LA/TSD117 airflow transducer (via AFT11B coupler). Includes hook-ring
to secure AFT10S adjustable head strap. (22 mm ID/25 mm OD)
MRI Use: MR Safe
AFT10 Facemask Components: Thermoplastic Elastomer, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic
AFT10S Adjustable Head Strap
This fully adjustable latex head strap holds the AFT10 disposable facemask securely to the subject’s
head. Use one or more straps to securely fasten the mask.
MRI Use: MR Safe
AFT10S Head Strap Components: Latex Rubber
AFT25 Facemask with Valve
This adult facemask with integral non-rebreathing T valve is a high
performance, very low dead space, low airflow resistance mask and
valve; suitable for high airflow applications (e.g. exercise physiology).
The AFT25 incorporates two gas sampling ports (female Luer) for
interfacing with the AFT20 Gas Sampling Kit. All ports are 35 mm OD,
28 mm ID
MRI Use: MR Safe
AFT25 Facemask Components: Mask: Thermoplastic Elastomer, Valve:
Acetal Plastic, Acrylic Plastic,, Aluminum (nickel plated silver,) Elastomer, Nylon, Thermoplastic
Polyester, Polycarbonate Plastic, Silicone Rubber, Stainless Steel, Polysulfone Plastic
Headgear: Fabric with Velcro straps
COUPLERS
MRI Use: MR Safe
AFT11 Series Coupler Components: Thermoplastic Rubber, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic,
Polycarbonate Clear Plastic, Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) Thermo-molded, Plastic
AFT11A Flexible
AFT11D Flexible
AFT11H Flexible
AFT11B Rigid
AFT11E Flexible
AFT11I Flexible (for AFT26)
AFT11C Rigid
AFT11F Rigid
These couplers are very useful for connecting up a variety of airflow port IDs and ODs to transducers, tubing and
calibration syringes. Pick an AFT11 Series coupler that matches the port sizes to be interfaced.
BIOPAC Hardware | AFT Series | Page 3 - 8
Updated: 9.5.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
AFT11 Series Coupler Guide
Item 1
Item 2
Coupler
Item 1
Item 2
Coupler
15 mm OD
22 mm ID
AFT11B
25 mm ID
25 mm ID
AFT11C
20 mm OD
22 mm ID
AFT11B
25-30 mm OD
25-30 mm OD
AFT11A
22 mm ID
15 mm OD
AFT11B
28-35 mm ID
AFT11A
20 mm OD
AFT11B
25-30 mm OD
AFT11A
22 mm ID
AFT11B
35 mm ID
AFT11A
22 mm OD
AFT11I
34-37 mm ID
41-47 mm ID
AFT11F
22 mm ID
AFT11C
35 mm ID
28-35 mm ID
AFT11A
22 mm OD
AFT11C
38 mm ID
AFT11E
25 mm ID
AFT11C
35-38 mm ID
22-25 mm OD
AFT11E
22 mm OD
AFT11E
35-38 mm OD
35-38 mm OD
AFT11D
25 mm ID
AFT11E
35 mm OD
28.6 mm OD
AFT11H
22 mm OD
22-25 mm OD
28-35 mm ID
Coupler
Size
Interface
AFT11A
25 mm OD/35 mm ID
AFT6A to AFT1
AFT11B
15 mm OD/22 mm ID
AFT10 to SS11LA
AFT11E
22 mm OD/35 mm ID
AFT7 to AFT22/25
AFT11F
35 mm OD/45 mm OD
SS52L to GASSYS2
AFT11H
35 mm OD/28.6 mm ID
AFT13 to SS11LA
AFT11I
22 mm OD/22 mm ID
AFT26 replacement coupler
AFT15 MIXING CHAMBERS
AFT15A/B mixing chambers incorporate dual baffles and
flexible connection ports capable of interfacing with 35 mm
or 22 mm breathing circuits.
Two female Luer connection ports are provided between the
baffles for the simultaneous monitoring of O2 and CO2
concentrations.
AFT15A shown with AFT20 (not included)
AFT15A — 5 Liter
Use for demanding expired gas analysis measurements (e.g. VO2 or RER measurements).
Dimensions: 13 cm (dia) x 47 cm (long)
Coupling Ports: 35 mm OD, 25 mm ID
AFT15B — 8 Liter
Use for very high volume and rate expired gas analysis measurements (e.g. VO2 or RER
measurements).
Dimensions: 13 cm (dia) x 73 cm (long)
Coupling Ports: 35 mm OD, 25 mm ID
GAS SAMPLING INTERFACE KITS
AFT20
Use to interface the CO2100C and the O2100C modules with the TSD107B or TSD117 Airflow
Transducer breathing circuits.
Includes: 1.8 meters of 1.5 mm inner diameter semi-flexible polyethylene tubing with M/F Luer
connector; 30cm Nafion® water vapor permeable tubing with M/F Luer connector; 5 micron filter with
M/F Luer connector; M/F Luer to female Luer “Y” connector.
BIOPAC Hardware | AFT Series | Page 4 - 8
Updated: 9.5.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
The AFT20 connects the CO2100C or O2100C directly to the sampling port of a mixing chamber. The
AFT20 also permits sampling connections to the Non-rebreathing “T” Valves (AFT21 or AFT22).
MRI Use: MR Safe
AFT20 Gas Sampling Kit Components: Tubing: 1.8 m of 1.5 mm diameter polyethylene tubing with
M/F Luer; Tubing: 30 cm Nafion water vapor permeable tubing with M/F Luer connector; Yconnector: Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) polycarbonate
AFT31-MRI
This 3.175 mm ID tubing is 10 meters long with male and female Luer lock and
"Y" connector interfaces to the AFT21 T-valve, AFT25 facemask, or AFT15
mixing chamber gas sampling ports to connect them to the CO2100C module
and/or the O2100C module. To use both CO2100C and O2100C modules
simultaneously, a “Y” connector gas sampling interface adapter is included.
MRI Use: MR Safe
AFT31-MRI Gas Sampling Kit Components: Polyethylene, Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic,
Polycarbonate Clear Plastic
ID/OD: 3.175 mm (1/8") / 6.35 mm (1/4")
Type: Crack-Resistant Polyethylene Tubing
Maximum Pressure: 358 psi @ 70º F
Material: Linear Low Density Polyethylene
Operating Temperature Range: -100° to +175° F
Wall Thickness: 1.588 (1/16")
“Y” connector: 1 x male to 2 x female
Bend Radius: 2"
Length: 10 m
Durometer: 95A (Firm)
AFT35-MRI
The AFT35-MRI is a low profile mouthpiece and non-rebreathing T-valve assembly specifically
designed to fit inside an fMRI head coil.
Use the AFT35-MRI to perform the following airflow and lung volume tests:
• End Tidal CO2
• Breath-by-breath Volume
• VO2 max
• Metabolic Studies
• Breath-by-breath Air Flow
The assembly includes a Luer lock port for easy interface to AFT31-MRI gas sampling tubing for CO2
and O2 gas analysis. The assembly interfaces with AFT7/7-L tubing, via the AFT11A coupler, for
operation with the TSD117-MRI ±300 L/min airflow transducer. Extra mouthpiece included.
Low clearance – only 25 mm between subject and coil
Dimensions: 25 mm breathing port height (excluding mouthpiece) x 35 mm outlet port diameter x 83
mm wide x 115 mm long
Deadspace: 88 ml
Sterilization: Cidex recommended
BIOPAC Hardware | AFT Series | Page 5 - 8
Updated: 9.5.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
AFT35-MRI Sample Setups
Perform a variety of tests. Place transducer outside the bore in the MRI Chamber Room and run tubing to
connect to the subject and breathing accessories; place amp in Control Room.
• End Tidal CO2: C02100C amp + AFT31-MRI tubing + AFT35-MRI airflow interface
• Airflow & Lung Volume: DA100C amp + MECMRI-DA cable/filter set + TSD117-MRI
transducer + AFT11A coupler + AFT7-L tubing + AFT35-MRI
• Airflow & Lung Volume with End Tidal CO2: DA100C + MECMRI-DA + TSD117-MRI +
AFT11A + AFT7-L + AFT35-MRI + AFT31-MRI + CO2100C
• Metabolic: DA100C + MECMRI-DA + TSD117-MRI + 2 x AFT11A + 2 x AFT7-L + AFT35MRI + AFT31-MRI + AFT15A/B + C02100C and/or O2100C
MRI Use: MR Safe
AFT35-MRI Components: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) plastic, Polyethylene EVA Copolymer,
Thermoplastic Rubber, Polycarbonate Plastic, Acrylic Plastic, Elasotomer, Paper, Latex Rubber,
Polyurethane Foam Plastic, Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) Thermo-molded
AFT T-VALVES
AFT21 Non-Rebreathing “T” Valve: Female, 35 mm
High performance, very low dead space, low airflow
resistance valve, suitable for high airflow applications (e.g.
exercise physiology). The non-rebreathing “T” valve
incorporates a Female Luer connector gas sampling port
for interfacing with the AFT20. All ports are 35 mm OD,
30 mm ID.
Includes: 35 mm OD coupler
Requires: AFT4, AFT7, and AFT9 for proper operation.
AFT22
AFT23
AFT22 (top left), AFT21 (top right)
AFT20 (bottom)
Non-Rebreathing “T” Valve: Male, 22 mm
Very low dead space valve, suitable for low to medium airflow applications. The non-rebreathing “T”
valve incorporates a Male Luer connector gas sampling port for interfacing with the AFT20. Coupler
ports are 22 mm OD fittings. Common port incorporates a 15 mm ID connection. Dead space 20 cc.
Resistance: 0.29 cmH2O at 5 liter per minute flow, 0.65 cmH2O at 10 liter per minute. Single subject
disposable item – do not autoclave. Includes: 22 mm OD coupler
Requires: AFT1 and AFT2 for proper operation.
Includes: 22 mm OD coupler Requires: AFT1 and AFT2 for proper operation.
MRI Use: MR Safe
AFT21/22 T-Valve Components: Acrylic Plastic, Elasotomer, Polycarbonate Clear Plastic
Non-Rebreathing T-Valve, 35 mm
The AFT23 is a disposable paper mouthpiece featuring a one-way valve
for pulmonary function measurements (expiratory only). It provides low
air resistance, adds cross-contamination protection, and is strong and
durable. It ships with eight extra valves. Mouthpiece OD: 35 mm. Fits
AFT13 pulmonary function filter & mouthpiece set.
MRI Use: MR Safe
AFT23 T-Valve Components: Acrylic Plastic, Elasotomer, Paper
BIOPAC Hardware | AFT Series | Page 6 - 8
Updated: 9.5.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
AFT24 Head Support
The AFT24 head support is used when breathing directly into the AFT21
non-rebreathing T valve for exercise physiology measurements. The AFT21
is secured directly in front of the subject and minimizes the strain associated
with the weight of valves and tubing.
TUBING FOR GAS SAMPLING
AFT30 Series Tubing and M/F Luer Locks
Use this semi-flexible 1.5 mm tubing with male and female Luer locks to
interface with the RX110 self-inflating pressure pad, TSD114 response/hand
force pump bulb, or gas sampling ports on AFT15 mixing chambers, CO2100C
module, or O2100C module. See AFT31-MRI for gas sampling in the MRI.
AFT30: 1.8 m
AFT30-L: 4 m
AFT30-XL: 10 m
The length of tubing will add a delay of less than 50 msec to the sensing of the waveform peak.
MRI Use: MR Safe
AFT30 Series Gas Sampling Kit Components: 1.5 mm diameter polyethylene tubing with M/F Luer
Part Summary for Typical Airflow / Gas Analysis Applications
Pulmonary Function
Part #
High Flow
Med. Flow
Low Flow
Very Low Flow
Exercising
human
Resting human
Child, Pig, Dog
Small Animals
AFT2 Mouthpiece
X
AFT3 Noseclip
AFT6A Calibration Syringe
AFT7/7L Tubing
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X (2)
AFT9 Mouthpiece
X
AFT21 T Valve
X
AFT24 Head Support
X (optional)
AC137 In-line Transformer
DA100C Amplifier
X (2)
TSD107B Pneumotach (High)
X (2)
TSD117 Pneumotach (Med.)
X
X
X
TSD127 Pneumotach (Low)
X
TSD137 A-E Pneumotachs (Very Low)
X (by size)
Part Options: AFT25 = AFT21 + AFT9 + AFT3 + optional AFT24
AFT2 + AFT3 = AFT0 + AFT11B
BIOPAC Hardware | AFT Series | Page 7 - 8
Updated: 9.5.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Exercise Physiology
Mixed Expiratory Gases
Part #
AFT6A Calibration Syringe
AFT7 Tubing
Breath-by-Breath
High Flow
Med. Flow
High Flow
Med. Flow
Low Flow
Exercising
human
Resting
human
Exercising
human
Resting human
Dog
X
X
X
X
X
X (2)
X
AFT10 Facemask
X
X
AFT10S Head Strap
X
X
AFT11 Series Couplers
X (3)*
X
AFT12 Tubing
X (2)
X
AFT15A Mixing Chamber
AFT20 Interface Kit
X
X
X (2)
X (2)
AFT22 T Valve
X (2)
X
X (2)**
X
X (2)
X
X
AFT25 Facemask w/Valve
X
DA100C Amplifier
X
X
X
X
X
CO2100C CO2 Module
X
X
X
X
X
O2100C O2 Module
X
X
X
X
X
TSD107B Pneumotach (High)
X
TSD117 Pneumotach (Med.)
X
X
X
X
TSD127 Pneumotach (Low)
X
Part Options: AFT25 = AFT21 + AFT9 + AFT3 + optional AFT24
AFT10 + AFT10S = AFT2 + AFT3 + AFT11C
* use 2 AFT11B and 1 AFT11C
** use 1 AFT11B and 1 AFT11C
See also: AFT coupler guide for additional applications.
BIOPAC Hardware | AFT Series | Page 8 - 8
Updated: 9.5.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
PULSE OXIMETRY
OXY100E Module (18-321 BPM)
OXY200 Module (for veterinary use only, 18-450 BPM)
TSD124 Series SPO2 Transducers for OXY100E
TSD270 Series SPO2 Transducers for OXY200
These modules measure beat-by-beat, blood oxygen saturation (SpO2) level in a noninvasive fashion. The
OXY100E outputs four signals simultaneously:
A: SpO2 value (Ch 1, 2, 3, or 4)
B: Pulse Plethysmogram (Ch 5, 6, 7, or 8)
C: Heart pulse rate (Ch 9, 10, 11, or 12)
D: Module Status (Ch 13, 14, 15, or 16)
These signals are directed to switchable blocks of
different MP input channels. Up to four OXY
modules can be used with a single MP System.
The modules have built-in calibration for a
simplified setup procedure. Each OXY module
requires one of the TSD124 series SpO2
transducers.
The modules operate in accordance to principles
outlined by the Lambert-Beer law; this is an
empirical relationship that relates the absorption
of light to the properties of the material through
which the light is traveling.
The OXY modules are noninvasive instruments
that measure blood-oxygen percentage levels. The
module probe incorporates light-emitting diodes
(LEDs) which face photodiodes through a
translucent part of the subject's body, usually a
fingertip or an earlobe. One LED is red, with
wavelength of 660 nm, and the other is infrared
(approximately 910 nm). Light absorption at these
wavelengths is different between oxyhemoglobin
and its deoxygenated form. The
oxyhemoglobin/deoxyhemoglobin ratio can be
calculated via the ratio of the absorption of the
red and infrared light. In particular, the OXY modules output (as a proportional voltage) the percentage of arterial
hemoglobin in the oxyhemoglobin state.
BIOPAC Hardware | PULSE OXIMETRY | Page 1 - 5
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
OXY100E/200 Series Specifications
Outputs:
Pulse Rate Range:
SpO2 Range:
SpO2 Accuracy:
Measurement Wavelengths
and Output Power:
Operating Temperature Range:
Operating Humidity Range:
Pulse Rate Output Options*:
Compatible Sensors:
Principle of Operation:
SpO2, Pulse Rate, Pulse Waveform & Module Status
OXY100E: 18-321 BPM, OXY200: 18-450 BPM
0-100%
70-100% ±2%
Red: 660 nanometers @ 0.8 mW maximum average
Infared: 910 nanometers @ 12 mW maximum average
0-50 degrees C
10-90% (non-condensing)
Beat to Beat (un-averaged, non-slew limited, beat-to-beat value)
Fast (non-slew limited, 4 beat average)
Standard (4 beat average, slew limited)
Extended (8 beat average, slew limited)
Standard (4 beat average, slew limited)
Extended (8 beat average, slew limited).
BIOPAC TSD124 series
Lambert-Beer law employing dual wavelengths
*for un-averaged, Beat-to-Beat Pulse Rate: use AcqKnowledge Rate detector on Pulse Waveform Output
TSD124 Series SpO2 Transducers For OXY100E
TSD124 Series
TSD124A Finger
TSD124C Flex Wrap
The TSD124 series human oximetry transducers are reliable and simple to use on a wide range of subjects for
both short-term and continuous noninvasive monitoring. The transducers incorporate Nonin’s PureLight® sensors
and are backed by a six-month warranty. Use with the OXY100E oximetry amplifier.
Available Types:
TSD124A Finger Clip Transducer
Subject Range: > 30 kg (66 lbs)
Preferred application: Index, middle or ring fingers
Length: 1 m
TSD124B Ear Clip SpO2 Transducer
Subject Range: > 40 kg (88 lbs)
Length: 1 m
TSD124C Flex Wrap SpO2 Transducer (Ships with 25 RX124C adhesive wrap guides)
Length: 1 m
BIOPAC Hardware | PULSE OXIMETRY | Page 2 - 5
Updated: 8.29.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
RX124C Disposable FlexiWrap® adhesive guides for use with the reusable
TSD124C Flex Sensor.
Sized for adults (> 20 Kg or 44 lbs)
Apply to index, middle or ring finger.
Qty 25 per pack
Also available: OXY100E-200 EXT Pulse Oximeter extension cable – 3m
TSD270 Series SpO2 Transducers For OXY200
The TSD270 series veterinary oximetry transducers are reliable and simple to use on a wide range of animals for
both short-term and continuous noninvasive monitoring. The transducers incorporate Nonin’s PureLight® sensors
and are backed by a six-month warranty. Use with the OXY200 Veterinary oximetry amplifier.
TSD270A Transflectance Transducer
The Transflectance Sensor, the smallest probe, is ideally suited for
continuous monitoring from the paw, tail, or other vascularized
part of the animal. It can be conveniently placed on the underside,
base of the tail or other well-perfused surfaces. It is an excellent
option during dental procedures.
TSD270A
TSD270B Small Animal Wrap Transducer
The flexible wrap sensor can be placed on a small, well-perfused
appendage. This sensor is easily secured making it ideal for continuous
monitoring during long surgical or other procedures. It is most often used
on rodents or other very small animals.
TSD270B
BIOPAC Hardware | PULSE OXIMETRY | Page 3 - 5
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Pulse Oximeter Calibration OXY100E/OXY200
Modules will operate with default values unless an exact calibration is performed using the recessed “Cal” button
on the OXY module and AcqKnowledge scaling.
To access the “Scaling analog channel” dialog, click MP menu > Set Up Channels and then click “View by
Channels,” click “Setup…” and click “Yes” when prompted.
On the OXY module, use a paperclip or pen tip to press and hold the recessed “Cal” button. “Press and hold” the
“Cal” button for ~1.5 seconds to switch between modes, as indicated by the Status LED states.
“Normal” Status LEDS = GREEN OFF and YELLOW OFF (YELLOW may occasionally flicker due to background processing)
“Calibration Low” Status LEDs = CONSTANT GREEN ON and YELLOW OFF
“Calibration High” Status LEDs = GREEN OFF and CONSTANT YELLOW ON
Release the “Cal” button as soon as the mode switches—continuously holding the button in the depressed state
will not lead to another mode change. Modes cycle from normal to low, then to high, then back to normal.

“Press and hold” the “Cal” button for ~1.5 seconds to switch to “Calibration Low” mode and then click
the “Cal2” button in the software for any of the OXY module analog channels that are enabled.

“Press and hold” the “Cal” button again for ~1.5 seconds to switch to “Calibration High” mode and then
click the “Cal1” button in the software for any of the OXY module analog channels that are enabled.

“Press and hold” the “Cal” button again for ~1.5 seconds to return to “Normal” mode.
It’s best to calibrate the OXY module once, then Save As > Graph Template to save the respective scale values.
BIOPAC Hardware | PULSE OXIMETRY | Page 4 - 5
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
OXY100E and OXY200 Status Output Values
Event
Weight
Out of Track/No
sensor
0/16*10 V (~ 0 V)
Artifact
1/16*10 V (~ 0.625 V)
Sensor Alarm
2 /16*10 V (~ 1.25 V)
Green Perfusion
16/16*10 V (~10 V)
Yellow Perfusion
14 /16*10 V (~8.75 V)
Red Perfusion
13 /16*10 V (~8.125 V)
OXY100E and OXY200 Switches
The switch bank on the back panel can be used to control output for the SpO2 and HR channels.
Use ‘Calibration’ for exact output levels. Output is ~10 V if the sensor is ‘out of track.’
Switch
1
Channel
2
3
Output details
Range is 0 V (0%) to ~7.9 V (100%)
SpO2
OFF
OFF OFF
0-127 BPM
4-beat average values in standard1 mode Factory setting
OFF
ON
ON
0-127 BPM
4-beat average values in standard1 mode
ON
ON
ON
0-127 BPM
4-beat average values in standard1 mode
ON
OFF OFF
0-127 BPM
4-beat average displayed values in display2 mode
OFF
OFF
ON
0-127 BPM
8-beat average values in standard1 mode
ON
OFF
ON
0-127 BPM
8-beat average displayed values in display2 mode
OFF
ON
OFF
0-127 BPM
Non-slew limited saturation with 4-beat averaging in standard1 mode
ON
ON
OFF
0-127 BPM
Non-slew limited, not averaged, beat to beat value in standard1 mode
Range is 0 V (0 BPM) to ~6.27 V (321 BPM) for human OXY100E
0 V (0 BPM) to ~8.86 V (450 BPM) for veterinary OXY200
4
5
HR
OFF
OFF
0-max3 BPM 4-beat average values in standard1 mode Factory setting
ON
OFF
0-max BPM
4- beat average displayed values in display2 mode
OFF
ON
0-max BPM
8-beat average values in standard1 mode
ON
ON
0-max BPM
8-beat average displayed values in display2 mode
1
Standard
SpO2 and Pulse rate updated on every pulse beat. SpO2 and Heart Rate values are
set to missing data values and out of track indicated.
2
Display
SpO2 and Pulse rate updated every 1.5 seconds. Last in track values transmitted
for ten seconds and out of track indicated; after ten seconds, values are set to
missing data values.
3
511 BPM
Output of 511 BPM (+10 V) indicates that sensor is not connected or signal is bad
(out of track or sensor is not secured on the finger). The module never outputs
BPM between range max (321 or 450) and 511.
BIOPAC Hardware | PULSE OXIMETRY | Page 5 - 5
Updated: 8.29.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
OXY100C PULSE OXIMETER MODULE
Note: Effective August 2010, the OXY100E replaced the OXY100C
The OXY100C Pulse Oximeter Module is primarily used to measure beat-by-beat blood
oxygen saturation (SpO2) in a noninvasive fashion. The OXY100C probe incorporates lightemitting diodes (LEDs) which face photodiodes through a translucent part of the patient's body,
usually a fingertip or an earlobe. One LED is red, with wavelength of 660 nm, and the other is
infrared (approximately 910 nm). Light absorption at these wavelengths is different between
oxyhemoglobin and its deoxygenated form. The oxyhemoglobin/deoxyhemoglobin ratio can be
calculated via the ratio of the absorption of the red and infrared light. In particular, the
OXY100C outputs (as a proportional voltage) the percentage of arterial hemoglobin in the
oxyhemoglobin state. This ratio is expressed as the O2 Saturation Level and will vary between
0% and 100%.
The OXY100C operates in accordance to the principles outlined by the Lambert-Beer law. This
is an empirical relationship that relates the absorption of light to the properties of the
material through which the light is traveling.
The Pulse Oximeter Module connects directly to the MP150 via the UIM100C. Up to four
OXY100C modules can be used with a single MP System. The Pulse Oximeter Transducer
(TSD123) connects to the OXY100C via a 3-meter extension cable (included with the
OXY100C).
The OXY100C outputs four signals simultaneously. Output signals can be optionally directed
to a number of different MP System input channels as determined with the BANK SELECT:
CH SIGNAL Bank 1
A
B
C
D
O2 Saturation
Pulse Waveform
Pulse Rate
Module Status
Bank 2
Bank 3
Bank 4
Channel 1
Channel 5
Channel 9
Channel 13
Channel 2
Channel 6
Channel 10
Channel 14
Channel 3
Channel 7
Channel 11
Channel 15
Channel 4
Channel 8
Channel 12
Channel 16
There is an ON/OFF switch for each signal output channel on the OXY100C. Set the switch for each signal
output channel to sample all, some or none of the signals. When any Signal Channel Enable switch is OFF
(bottom position), the corresponding MP150 channel can be used by another input device.
The OXY100C includes Calibration
features that permit easy scaling of all
these signals when using the OXY100C
with the MP System.
The graph on the following page shows
sample output.
O2 Saturation
(beat-by-beat, CH 1)
Pulse Waveform
(beat-by-beat, CH 5)
Pulse Rate
(continuous, CH 9)
Module Status
(dynamic, CH13)
BIOPAC Hardware | OXY100C | Page 1 - 4
Updated: 4.3.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
OXY100C CALIBRATION
Initial setup— OXY100C with an MP System:
1. Snap the OXY100C into the side of the UIM100C.
2. Connect the Analog cables directly from the MP150 to the OXY100C Analog mating connectors.
3. Connect the Digital cables directly from the MP150 to the OXY100C Digital mating connectors.
4. When the cable connections are secure, power up the MP150.
5. On the OXY100C module, place the four-position Bank Select switch to the first bank (top position).
In this position, the OXY100C output signals will be directed as follows:
O2 Saturation
Channel 1
Pulse Rate
Channel 9
Pulse Waveform
Channel 5
Module Status Channel 13
If using multiple OXY100C modules with a single MP System, be sure to place additional OXY100C
modules on unique banks. Furthermore, please check that any OXY100C output does not reside on the
same channel used by any other amplifier module.
6. On the OXY100C module, slide the four-position Calibration switch to the OFF position (bottom).
7. On the OXY100C module, set all the Signal Channel Enables to ON (top position).
8. Using the Input Channels Setup in AcqKnowledge, label the OXY100C signal outputs as follows:
Channel
Label
A5
Pulse
A9
Rate (BPM)
A13
Status (status reports a voltage, after calibration the stat
9. It’s best to calibrate the OXY100C once, then Save As > Graph Template to save the respective scale
values.
SCALE SETTING
1. Determine the highest frequency component of all the waveforms sampled. To properly sample the
signals from the OXY100C, the sample rate of the MP150 (set from AcqKnowledge) will need to be
double the rate of the highest frequency component resident in the input data.
If just the OXY100C is being used, the maximum sampling rate will normally be 50 Hz or less.
If the Pulse Waveform signal is not being sampled, the maximum sampling rate drops to double what the
expected pulse rate maximum would be.
The fastest pulse rate detectable by the OXY100C is 250 BPM, so the safe sampling rate minimum would
be: 2 x [250 BPM] / [60 sec/min] or 8.33Hz
2. Establish the Calibration Scaling for each channel
O2 Saturation (Channel 1) scaling
BIOPAC Hardware | OXY100C | Page 2 - 4
Updated: 4.3.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
a) Slide the OXY100C Calibration switch to the CAL LO position.
b) Click on the Cal2 button in the Channel A1 scaling dialog box.
c) Slide the OXY100C Calibration switch to the CAL HI position.
d) Click on the Cal1 button in the Channel A1 scaling dialog box.
e) Enter the Map values: Cal1 = 100.00, Cal2 = 0.00
f) Enter the Units label: %O2 SAT
Ideally, the nominal Cal1/Input volts value should be exactly 3.200. The nominal Cal2/Input volts value
should be exactly 0.00. In practice, there will be very slight deviations from these expected values. The
minimum O2 Saturation level detectable by the OXY100C is 0.00%. The maximum O2 Saturation level
detectable is 100%. In the range from 80% to 100% the O2 Saturation level is ±2% accurate. From 0% to
79%, the O2 Saturation level is unspecified.
Pulse Waveform (Channel 5) scaling
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Slide the OXY100C Calibration switch on the OXY100C module to the OFF position.
Slide the OXY100C Calibration switch to the CAL LO position.
Click on the Cal2 button in the Channel A5 scaling dialog box.
Slide the OXY100C Calibration switch to the CAL HI position.
Click on the Cal1 button in the Channel A5 scaling dialog box.
Enter the Map values: Cal1 = 10.00, Cal2 = -10.00.
Enter the Units label: Pulse
Ideally, the nominal Cal1/Input volts value should be exactly 4.064. The nominal Cal2/Input volts value
should be exactly 0.00. In practice, there will be very slight deviations from these expected values. The
Pulse Waveform output from the OXY100C is functionally equivalent to a standard plethysmographic
waveform, such as obtained with the PPG100C and TSD200.
Pulse Rate (Channel 9) scaling
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Slide the OXY100C Calibration switch on the OXY100C module to the OFF position.
Slide the OXY100C Calibration switch to the CAL LO position.
Click on the Cal2 button in the Channel A9 scaling dialog box.
Slide the OXY100C Calibration switch to the CAL HI position.
Click on the Cal1 button in the Channel A9 scaling dialog box.
BIOPAC Hardware | OXY100C | Page 3 - 4
Updated: 4.3.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
f) Enter the Map values: Cal1 = 250.00, Cal2 = 0.00.
g) Enter the Units label: BPM.
Ideally, the nominal Cal1/Input volts value should be exactly 4.00. The nominal Cal2/Input volts value should
be exactly 0.00. In practice, there will be very slight deviations from these expected values.
The minimum BPM detectable by the OXY100C is 30. The maximum BPM detectable is 250. The BPM
accuracy in the range of 30-250 BPM is ±1%. The BPM settles to ±1% of the final reading less than 15 seconds
after the sensor is properly applied.
Module Status (Channel 13) scaling
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Slide the OXY100C Calibration switch on the OXY100C module to the OFF position.
Slide the OXY100C Calibration switch to the CAL LO position.
Click on the Cal2 button in the Channel A13 scaling dialog box.
Slide the OXY100C Calibration switch to the CAL HI position.
Click on the Cal1 button in the Channel A13 scaling dialog box.
Enter the Map values: Cal1 = 16.00, Cal2 = 0.00.
Enter the Units label: Status.
Ideally, the nominal Cal1/Input volts value should be exactly 2.048. The nominal Cal2/Input volts value
should be exactly 0.00. In practice, there will be very slight deviations from these expected values.
MODULE STATUS LEVELS:
0 – no status errors, all is well
9 – probe error 2, sensor’s IR led has failed
1 – probe fell off subject, outputs at full scale
10 – connect probe, probe not connected to OXY100C
2 – unused
11 – incorrect probe, incompatible probe connected
3 – insufficient light, mean path is to low for valid readings
12 – front end initializing
4 – light interference, ambient noise detected on front end
13 – unused
5 – pulse out of range, pulse rate exceeds 250 BPM
14 – unused
6 – low signal strength, AC signal too low
15 – unidentified probe, can’t determine if probe is correct
7 – monitor error 1, front end fatal error
16 – probe failure, general
8 – probe error 1, sensor’s red led has failed
BIOPAC Hardware | OXY100C | Page 4 - 4
Updated: 4.3.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
TSD123 SERIES SPO2 TRANSDUCERS FOR OXY100C
TSD123A
TSD123B
Note: TSD123 series is for existing OXY100C users only! New users should see SpO2 Pulse
Oximeter Amplifier - OXY100E and TSD124 series transducers.
TSD123A SPO2 FINGER TRANSDUCER
The TSD123A Blood Oxygen Saturation Finger transducer connects to the OXY100C Pulse Oximeter
module and is ideal for short term SpO2 monitoring.
The transducer, with the OXY100C, provides continuous readings for SpO2, pulse rate, Pulse Waveform,
and Module Status. The transducer comes with a 1-meter cable, which plugs into the (3 m) extension cable
included with the OXY100C.
TSD123B UNIVERSAL ADHESIVE SPO2 TRANSDUCER
The Universal Adhesive TSD123B Blood Oxygen Saturation Transducer connects to the OXY100C Pulse
Oximeter module, and comes with a 1-meter cable, which plugs into the (3 m) extension cable included
with the OXY100C. Adhesive patches can be used to connect to the TSD123B to fingers, ears, and toes.
The transducer fits into a special window cut into the adhesive patch, which allows the transducer to be
located on almost any part of the body and is ideal for long-term monitoring.
The TSD123B, with the OXY100C, provides continuous readings for SpO2, Pulse rate, Pulse Waveform,
and Module Status.
TSD123A/B CALIBRATION
See also: the OXY100 transducer.
TSD123 SERIES SPECIFICATIONS
Optical Transmission:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Sterilizable:
Cable Length:
Interface:
Red (660 nm) and IR (940 nm)
TSD123A: 23 grams, TSD123B: 6 grams
TSD123A: 62 mm (long) x 23 mm (wide) x 26 mm (high)
TSD123B: 12 mm (long) x 12 mm (wide) x 12 mm (high)
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
1 meter
OXY100C
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD123 Series | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
EBI100C ELECTRICAL BIOMPEDANCE AMPLIFIER
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
See also
The EBI100C records the parameters associated with
Application Note #AH-196
Cardiac Output
cardiac output measurements, thoracic impedance
Measurement
changes as a function of respiration or any kind of
www.biopac.com
biological impedance monitoring.
and
The EBI100C incorporates a precision high frequency
Applications (Appendix)
current source, which injects a very small (400 µA)
in the “AcqKnowledge
current through the measurement tissue volume defined
Software Guide”
by the placement of a set of current source electrodes.
A separate set of monitoring electrodes then measures
the voltage developed across the tissue volume. Because the current is constant, the voltage
measured is proportional to the characteristics of the biological impedance of the tissue volume.
The EBI100C simultaneously measures impedance magnitude and phase. Impedance can be
recorded at four different measurement frequencies, from 12.5 kHz to 100 kHz; cardiac output
measurements are usually performed at a measurement frequency of 50 kHz.
For operation, the EBI100C connects to four unshielded electrode leads terminating in
Touchproof sockets. The EBI100C is typically used with EL500 paired disposable electrodes,
but can function with spot or ring electrodes, reusable electrodes, or needle electrodes.
The CH SELECT switch has four bank settings, which assign EBI100C output (i.e., Magnitude
or Phase) channels as follows:
Bank
Magnitude (MAG) Phase (PHS)
1
Channel 1
Channel 9
2
Channel 2
Channel 10
3
Channel 3
Channel 11
4
Channel 4
Channel 12
If the particular EBI100C output is not used, the respective assigned channel cannot be used for
another module’s output; users should simply not record on the unwanted, but assigned channel.
Typical Configuration for Cardiac Output
Measurements
For injecting current and averaging voltage at four
paired-electrode sites (required for cardiac output
measurements), use four CBL204 Touchproof “Y”
electrode lead adapters and eight LEAD110
electrode leads with each EBI100C.
Grounding
When using the EBI100C amplifier with other biopotential amplifiers attached to the same subject, it’s not
necessary to attach the ground lead from the biopotential amplifier(s) to the subject. The subject is already
appropriately referenced to the subject via the attachment to the EBI100C. If a biopotential ground is attached
to the subject, then currents sourced from the EBI100C will be split to the biopotential amplifier ground lead,
potentially resulting in measurement errors.
BIOPAC Hardware | EBI100C | Page 1 - 4
Updated: 2.10.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Derivative Polarity – EBI100C vs. NICO100C
The EBI100C does not include an internal, hardware-based, derivative function for the Z (impedance
magnitude) channel. An AcqKnowledge calculation channel can be used to determine dZ/dt, if required.
Channel scaling can be employed to specify the dZ/dt polarity desired.
The NICO100C module incorporates an internal, hardware-based, derivative function, which outputs dZ/dt
simultaneously with Z (impedance magnitude). This internal derivative function also inverts the polarity of
the dZ/dt signal so that it displays a positive-going peak, coincident with negative slopes indicated in Z, as per
academic research convention.
Sample Data
Note that dZ/dt maximum is determined
on a cycle-by-cycle basis from the raw
dZ/dt waveform.
Similarly, the heart rate in BPM is
derived from the raw ECG waveform in
Channel 1.
This graph illustrates the procedure for
measuring Left Ventricular Ejection
Time (T).
The AcqKnowledge cursor was swept to
bridge from peak to peak in the filtered
(40-60 Hz) Heart Sounds channel.
The Delta T (0.379 seconds) indicates the
time from aortic valve opening to
closing.
BIOPAC Hardware | EBI100C | Page 2 - 4
Updated: 2.10.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Applications
Cardiac Output
Cardiac Output can be determined noninvasively by employing electrical bioimpedance measurement techniques.
Electrical bioimpedance is simply the characteristic impedance of a volume of tissue and fluid. In the case of
Cardiac Output measures, the relevant tissue includes the heart and the immediate surrounding volume of the
thorax, and the relevant fluid is blood. The electrical impedance of the thorax can be thought of as composed of
two impedance types:
1. Zo (the base impedance) corresponds to non-time varying tissues, such as muscle, bone and fat.
2. dZ/dt is the magnitude of the largest impedance change during systole ( Ω /sec).
BIOPAC Application Note #AH-196 Cardiac Output Measurements, implements the following equation, but
other equations/modifications can be incorporated:
SV = r · (L²/Zo²) · T · dZ/dt
Where: SV = Stroke volume (ml)
r = Resistivity of blood (Ω · cm)
L = Length between inner band electrodes (cm)
Water Content Measurement and Adiposity
Please see the NIH reference site for a discussion of BIA Technology in the Estimation of Total Body Water,
Fat-Free Mass, and Adiposity: http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/bv.fcgi?rid=hstat4.section.26000
This is an area of active research and so specific methods of performing total body water (TBW) measurements
using BIA may change. The following formula is sometimes used:
TBW = A * (H**2/R) + C
Where: A = a proportionality constant specific for a given subject population
H = subject's height
R = resistance obtained by single-frequency BIA (usually 50 kHz)
C = a constant
It may also be possible to obtain additional specificity in TBW measurements by performing BIA at
multiple frequencies.
Frequency Response Plots
The 0.05 Hz lower frequency response setting is a single pole roll-off filter.
See also: Sample frequency response plots, 10 Hz LP, 100 Hz LP
EBI100C Calibration
The EBI100C can be calibrated using external loads. BIOPAC factory calibration is performed with 20, 200 and
900 Ohm loads. The EBI100C can measure from zero phase to 90 degree phase at the limits. Measurements of
zero phase (using resistors) may not mean the output voltage of the phase signal is exactly zero. The user will
need to scale the output voltage to 0 degrees phase when calibrating. Typically, a couple of tenths of volts are
possible to obtain (at zero phase), depending on frequency of excitation.
For Cardiac Output Measurements
1. Set the EBI100C to a Frequency of 50 kHz and a Magnitude Gain range of 5 ohms/volt.
2. Introduce a 20 ohm resistor between the I Out / Vin+ combination terminal to the I In / Vin- combination
terminal.
3. Press the Cal1 button…
4. Introduce a 40 ohm resistor between the I Out / Vin+ combination terminal to the I In / Vin- combination
terminal.
5. Press the Cal2 button…
BIOPAC Hardware | EBI100C | Page 3 - 4
Updated: 2.10.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
EBI100C SPECIFICATIONS
Number of Channels:
Operational Frequencies:
Current Output:
2 – Magnitude (MAG) and Phase (PHS)
12.5, 25, 50, 100 kHz
400µA (rms)—constant sinusoidal current
Outputs:
MAG of Impedance (0-1000 )*
PHS of Impedance (0-90°)*
±10 V (analog)
The resistance range is 10 Ohms to 1,000 ohms; the minimum operational
resistance is around 10 Ohms. A delta of 0.1 ohms is quite simple to measure
with the correct EBI100C settings (assuming the data acquisition system used
provides sufficient resolution.)
100, 20, 5, 1 Ω/volt
10 Hz, 100 Hz
DC, 0.05 Hz
0.0015 Ω rms @ 10 Hz bandwidth
90°/10 volts
100 Hz
DC coupled
0.0025 degrees @ 10 Hz bandwidth
Output Range:
Operational Resistance:
MAG Gain Range:
MAG LP Filter:
MAG HP Filter:
MAG Sensitivity:
PHS Gain:
PHS LP Filter:
PHS HP Filter:
PHS Sensitivity:
CMIV – referenced to
Amplifier ground:
Mains ground:
Signal Source:
Weight:
Dimensions:
±10 V
±1500 VDC
Electrodes (four electrode leads required)
370 grams
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
*The EBI100C and NICO100C amplifiers are specifically designed to measure complex impedances that have a
magnitude between 10 Ω and 1000 Ω and phases between 0° and 90° degrees; they are not designed to measure
any arbitrary impedance.
*Since these amplifiers require at least some small leakage path of DC current from I+ to I-, 89.9° degrees is the
maximum measurement; they can't measure exactly to 90°.
Note—If a series capacitor is placed in the measurement circuit, then a large valued parallel resistor (10 K-100 K)
should be placed across the capacitor to permit a small DC current to flow.
BIOPAC Hardware | EBI100C | Page 4 - 4
Updated: 2.10.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
NICO100C
The NICO100C noninvasive cardiac output amplifier records the parameters associated
with cardiac output measurements. It incorporates a precision high frequency current
source, which injects a very small (400 µA) measurement current through the thoracic
volume defined by the placement of a set of current source electrodes. A separate set of
monitoring electrodes then measures the voltage developed across the thorax volume.
Because the current is constant, the voltage measured is proportional to the impedance
characteristics of the thorax.
The NICO100C simultaneously measures impedance magnitude (Zo; labeled “Z” on the
module) and derivative (dZ/dt; labeled “DZ” on the module). Zo and dZ/dt can be
recorded at four different measurement frequencies, from 12.5 kHz to 100 kHz; cardiac
output measurements are usually performed at a measurement frequency of 50 kHz.
For operation, the NICO100C connects to four unshielded electrode leads terminating in
Touchproof sockets.
The NICO100C is typically used with EL500 paired disposable electrodes, but can
function with spot or ring (tape) electrodes, reusable electrodes, or needle electrodes.
For injecting current and averaging voltage at four paired-electrode sites (often required
for cardiac output measurements), use four CBL204 Touchproof “Y” electrode lead
adapters and eight LEAD110 electrode leads with each NICO100C. In this situation, due
to the anatomical shape of the thorax, the best placement for all eight electrodes is along
the frontal plane (wider dimension). When directed through the thorax, the measurement
current seeks the shortest and most conducting pathway. Consequently, the measurement
current flows through the thoracic aorta and vena cava superior and inferior.
Use the CH SELECT switch bank to assign NICO100C output (Zo and dZ/dt) channels as follows:
Bank
1
2
3
4
Magnitude (Zo)
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Derivative (dZ/dt)
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
If the particular NICO100C output is not used, the
respective assigned channel cannot be used for another
module’s output; users should simply not record on the
unwanted, but assigned channel.
GROUNDING
When using the NICO100C amplifier with other biopotential amplifiers attached to the same subject, it’s not
necessary to attach the ground lead from the biopotential amplifier(s) to the subject. The subject is already
appropriately referenced to the subject via the attachment to the NICO100C. If a biopotential ground is
attached to the subject, then currents sourced from the NICO100C will be split to the biopotential amplifier
ground lead, potentially resulting in measurement errors.
Derivative Polarity – NICO100C vs. EBI100C
The NICO100C module incorporates an internal, hardware-based, derivative function, which outputs dZ/dt
simultaneously with Z (impedance magnitude). When used with AcqKnowledge, this internal derivative
function also inverts the polarity of the dZ/dt signal so that it displays a positive-going peak, coincident with
negative slopes indicated in Z, as per academic research convention.
The EBI100C does not include an internal, hardware-based, derivative function for the Z (impedance
magnitude) channel. An AcqKnowledge calculation channel can be used to determine dZ/dt, if required.
Channel scaling can be employed to specify the dZ/dt polarity desired.
BIOPAC Hardware | NICO100C | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 10.7.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
NICO100C SPECIFICATIONS
Number of Channels:
2 – Magnitude (Zo) and dZ/dt
Operational
Frequencies:
12.5, 25, 50, 100 kHz
Current Output:
400µA (rms)—constant sinusoidal
current
Outputs:
MAG of Impedance: 0-100 Ω
Output Range:
±10 V (analog)
CMIV, referenced to…
Amplifier ground: ±10 V
Signal Source:
Electrodes (requires 4 electrode
leads)
Gain Range:
MAG: 10, 5, 2, 1 Ω/V
dZ/dt: 2 (Ω/sec)/v constant (independent of
MAG Gain)
LP Filter:
MAG: 10 Hz, 100 Hz
dZ/dt: 100 Hz
HP Filter:
MAG: DC, 0.05 Hz
dZ/dt: DC coupled
Sensitivity:
MAG: 0.0015 Ω rms @ 10 Hz
bandwidth
dZ/dt: 0.002 (Ω/sec) rms @ 10 Hz bandwidth
Weight:
370 g
Dimensions:
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm
(high)
dZ/dt of Impedance: 2 (Ω/sec)/v
Mains ground: ±1500 VDC
BIOPAC Hardware | NICO100C | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 10.7.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MCE100C MICRO-ELECTRODE AMPLIFIER
The MCE100C is an extremely high input impedance,
low noise, differential amplifier that accurately
See also
amplifies signals derived from mini and microApplication Note #AH-190
electrodes. Mini and micro electrodes are characterized
Using the MCE100C
by small surface contact areas that result in high
Micro-electrode Amplifier
www.biopac.com
electrode to tissue contact impedance. A number of
and
selectable options make the amplifier module useful for
Applications
(Appendix)
general-purpose recording of cortical, muscle and nerve
in
the
“AcqKnowledge
action/resting potentials.
Software Guide”
The MCE100C is useful for measuring biopotentials
(voltage signals) from the
following types of electrodes:
Catheter-based
Fluid-filled glass
Ion selective
Needle (all types)
Nerve chamber (NERVE1)
When performing voltage measurements using Ion Selective Microelectrodes, the
adjacent shield output, associated with either the Vin+ or Vin- input, is the buffered
output of the input signal (1x gain) at the Vin+ or Vin- port. These shield outputs can
be used to measure reference electrode voltages (against a remote non-polarizable
Ag/AgCl -indifferent- electrode) and the output of the MCE100C can be used to
measure the differential voltages between a pair of ISM electrodes, one of them being
the reference.
Generally considered, best performance is obtained when the mini or
micro-electrode recording is performed in a shielded environment. The smaller the
contact area of electrode, the higher the requirement for shielding. The MCE100C
provides options for driven (voltage following) or grounded shields. Voltage
following shields are useful for minimizing electrode lead input capacitance, to extend
frequency response, when shielded cables are used. Grounded shields are useful for
minimizing feedback noise and employed when distant shielding is utilized (Faraday
cage or spiral shielding).
For special recording cases, as included options, the MCE100C provides manual controls for input capacity
compensation (0-100 pF) and clamp (I-bias) current zeroing (±100 nA). In addition, the MCE100C incorporates an
external voltage control to vary the clamp current proportionally to the control voltage (100 mV/nA), if required.
For very accurate (less than ±10 mV error) reference or differential voltage measurements, it's important to first
calibrate out amplifier offset voltages by shorting the various inputs together to obtain a true 0 volt input for each
measurement type.
An MP150A D/A output channel can drive this external voltage control to change clamp currents automatically
during recording. The MCE100C also includes a clamp current monitor output so the clamp current can easily be
recorded by another MP150 input channel.
For general-purpose recording, without input capacity compensation or a current clamp, use standard shielded or
unshielded electrode leads terminating in Touchproof sockets.
Add simple input capacity compensation and current clamp control by connecting the respective signal ports to
the [Vin+] input of the MCE100C using the JUMP100C jumper connectors.
For the best performance and shielding, use the MCEKITC to interface a micro-electrode lead cable to the
MCE100C.
BIOPAC Hardware | MCE100C | Page 1 - 3
Updated:6.29.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Current Clamping can be enabled/disabled, by connecting/disconnecting the "I CLMP" port to either differential
input of the MCE100C. Negative Capacity Compensation can be enabled/disabled, by connecting/disconnecting
the "NEG C" port to either differential input of the MCE100C.
• See Application Note 190 for details: http://www.biopac.com/Manuals/app_pdf/app190.pdf
IMPORTANT USAGE NOTE
Although the MCE100C will function with the MP100 System, the MP150 system is
recommended due to the module’s wide operational bandwidth. Contact BIOPAC for details.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE PLOTS
The 0.5 Hz high pass lower frequency response setting is a single pole roll-off filter.
Modules can be set for 50 Hz or 60 Hz notch options to match the wall-power line frequency of the destination
country. The proper setting reduces noise from interfering signals when the notch filter is engaged. Generally,
wall-power line frequency is 60 Hz in the United States and 50 Hz in most of Europe; if necessary, contact
BIOPAC to determine the correct line frequency, adjust the bank of switches on the back of the amplifier module.
•
The 50/60 Hz notch on the MCE100C is only engaged when the 100 Hz HPN high pass notch filter
switch is set to ON—see Amplifer Filtering for details.
Line Frequency switch bank is on the back of the amplifier
See also: Sample frequency response plots
50 Hz
60 Hz
Both switches
DOWN
Both switches
UP
100 Hz HPN (with 50 Hz notch)
100 Hz HPN (with 60 Hz notch)
3 kHz LP
30 kHz LP
MCE100C CALIBRATION
No calibration required. Use the CBLCALC to verify accuracy.
BIOPAC Hardware | MCE100C | Page 2 - 3
Updated:6.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MCE100C SPECIFICATIONS
Gain Vin (mV)
10
±1000
50
±200
200
±50
1000 ±10
Output Range:
±10 V (analog)
Offset Voltage (DI):
Differential Input:
±5 mV maximum (Vin+ to Vin-)
Offset Voltage (SE):
Driven Shield to Input:±15 mV typical (Vin+ or Vin- to Adjacent Shield)
Low Pass Filter:
3 kHz, 30 kHz
High Pass Filter:
DC, 0.5 Hz, 100 Hz
CMRR:
92 dB typical; see Shield Drive Operation
CMIV – referenced to:
Isolated ground:
±10 V
Mains ground:
±1500 VDC
Notch Filter:
50 dB rejection (50/60 Hz)
Noise Voltage:
2.1 µV rms – (DC-3000 Hz)
Noise Current:
0.1 fA/√Hz
Input Bias Current:
±3 fA (typical), ±100 fA (maximum)
Note: Current Clamping and Negative Capacity Compensation Disabled
Z (input)
Differential:
10 E15 Ω
Common mode:
10 E15 Ω
Capacit. Comp (Neg):
Input capacitance compensation (0-100 pF) – manual control
I Clamp (I CLMP port): Adjustable (±100 nA) - voltage control
I Clamp Control:
Input 3.5 mm phone jack (100 mV/nA)
I Clamp Monitor:
Output 3.5 mm phone jack (100 mV/nA)
Signal Source:
Micro-electrodes
Weight:
350 grams
Dimensions:
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
Input Connectors
(front panel):
Seven 1.5 mm Touchproof sockets (Vin+, Gnd, Vin-, 2 of shield, I-clmp, neg C)
Gain & Input Voltage:
BIOPAC Hardware | MCE100C | Page 3 - 3
Updated:6.29.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MCEKITC CONNECTOR KIT FOR MCE100C MICRO-ELECTRODE AMPLIFIER
Build a customized adapter to a micro-electrode shielded cable. Cable shields can be tied to voltage follower drive
or simply grounded. Input capacity compensation and clamp current options can be independently added to or
removed from a cable configuration. The MCEKITC comes with seven attached Touchproof sockets (1.5 mm)
and instructions.
The MCEKITC is a junction box assembly that plugs directly into the front panel of the MCE100C amplifier. The
MCEKITC comes equipped with an assortment of wire and coaxial cable to customize the MCE100C for a
variety of micro-electrode lead connectors. The MCEKITC construction allows the appropriate interface
connector to be mounted to the housing and the respective socket pin wires to be soldered.
The MCEKITC is required when either of the last two MCE100C operational modes (5, 6) are used with microelectrodes. The following table illustrates the configuration desired. The amplifier configuration is determined via
the MCEKITC. The MCEKITC connects to the MCE100C and modifies the MCE100C appropriately. See the
respective figure to determine the correct MCEKITC configuration for the application.
INPUT
TYPE
Differential
Differential
Single-ended
Single-ended
Single-ended
Single-ended
SHIELD
Grounded
Driven
Grounded
Grounded
Grounded
Driven
CURRENT
CLAMP
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
NEGATIVE
CAPACITY
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
BIOPAC Hardware | MCEKITC | Page 1 - 3
MCEKITC
FIGURE
A
B
C
D
E
F
Updated: 4.4.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MCEKITC KIT LEGEND
MCEKITC CONFIGURATIONS
FIGURE A
FIGURE B
BIOPAC Hardware | MCEKITC | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 4.4.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
FIGURE C
FIGURE D
FIGURE E
FIGURE F
BIOPAC Hardware | MCEKITC | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 4.4.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
LASER DOPPLER FLOWMETRY (LDF) - click page number to jump to section
LDF100C Laser Doppler Flowmetry Module: Controls & Specifications - page 2
TSD140 Series Laser Doppler Probes, Options, Handling, Applying, Quick Setup, Intro - page 4
LDFCAL Calibration Kit - page 6
LDF Calibration Procedure - page 7
LDF Setup (module & probes) - page 9
LDF Safety & Warnings, Storage, Maintenance & Cleaning - page 12
Troubleshooting - page 14
LDF – Basic Principles - page 17
Sample blood perfusion data acquired with the LDF100C
Laser Doppler Flowmetry (or simply “LDF”) is an established and reliable method for the measurement of blood
perfusion in microvascular research. Most LDF applications are concerned with monitoring the competence of
regional (microvascular) blood supply following trauma, degenerative and pathological disease, surgical
intervention and drug therapy.
LDF measurements are performed with the Laser Doppler Flowmetry module (LDF100C) and a wide range of
fiber-optic based probes (TSD140 series) in order to access the tissue. Probes include small and lightweight
probes for (non-invasive) skin and tissue surface measurements and needle type probes for direct (invasive)
measurements within tissue, such as muscle and organ. Double-sided adhesive rings (ADD200 series) can be used
to attach surface type probes to tissue; one size of ring fits both standard and miniature surface probes
LDF Calibration requires a calibration kit (LDFCAL), which includes a motility standard and positioning device
to hold a probe in the solution during calibration. The motility standard comprises a carefully controlled solution
of microspheres undergoing Brownian motion, which provides a standard calibration value of 1000 BPU ±5% at
21° C.
Unpacking LDF Components
IMPORTANT: It is essential that the Warnings and Cautions are fully understood before the LDF100C is used.
1. Inspect the packaging for damage before unpacking the component(s).
• If the outer packaging or carton is wet or damaged in any way, immediately notify the shipping agent and
file a claim. It is the receiver’s duty to notify the specific carrier’s local office. In the event of any
damage, please save the shipping carton as evidence.
2. Unpack the component(s) and check the part(s) against the enclosed packing slip.
3. Remove the packaging and check for signs of obvious damage or defect either to the main body of the
LDF100C module or the TSD140 series laser Doppler probes.
• Contact BIOPAC Systems, Inc. for replacement of any damaged component.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 1 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
LDF100C Laser Doppler Flowmetry Module
The LDF100C is a laser Doppler microvascular perfusion module that is capable of monitoring red blood cell
(erythrocyte) perfusion in the microcirculation of a tissue. This module uses a Laser Doppler Flowmetry
technique.
•
Microvascular blood perfusion is indicated on the AcqKnowledge software display in relative units called
Blood Perfusion Units (BPU).
•
In common with all LDF devices, quantitative measurements of tissue blood perfusion in absolute units
(e.g. ml/min/g of tissue) are not possible with the LDF100C.
The LDF100C laser Doppler microvascular perfusion module works by illuminating tissue with low power laser
light using a probe (TSD140 series) containing optical fiber light guides. Laser light from one fiber is scattered
within the tissue and some is scattered back to the probe. Another optical fiber collects the backscattered light
from the tissue and returns it to the module. Most of the light is scattered by tissue that is not moving but a small
percentage of the returned light is scattered by moving red blood cells. The light returned to the module undergoes
signal processing to extract the signal related to the moving red blood cells.
The LDF100C is not a medical device. It is not designed for the diagnosis, mitigation or treatment of
disease in humans.
Flow/flux/perfusion has the SAME meaning—this manual and the module uses the term “flow.”
Controls, Indicators and Symbols
Interface:
Connect the LDF100 directly to the UIM100C as part of an MP system
for data acquisition.
Channel
Select
Switch:
Choose a channel setting that will not conflict with other modules to
display Flow and Backscatter as follows:
Flow
Backscatter
CH 1
CH 5
CH 2
CH 6
CH 3
CH 7
CH 4
CH 8
If the particular output (i.e., Flow or Backscatter) is not used, the
respective assigned channel cannot be used for another module’s output.
Do not record on the unwanted, but assigned channel.
Cal Button:
For calibrating new or existing probes (intentionally recessed).
Status LED:
Analog
Indicators:
Probe
Connector:
Power plug:
laser is powered; i.e., probe is connected
software is running correctly and no probe or defective
probe is connected; or calibration status
Amber software is running correctly and a recognized or
unrecognized probe is connected
Red
Green
Warning
Backscatter (BS) Perfusion (LDF)
Calibrate probe
0V
0V
No probe
0V
0V
BS low
0V
0V
LDF over range
Data
5V
Combined fiber optic and electrical connector.
Use only TSD140 series probes.
Mini-Din socket on the back panel; use to connect the AC101 DC power
adapter that is included with each LDF100C module.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 2 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
LDF100C Specifications
PERFORMANCE
Measurements
Primary Measure:
Units:
Microvascular blood flow (Relative RBC flow
0 – 5,000 BPU (blood perfusion units);
0 – 100% BS (backscatter)
Range (linearity)
Up to 0.35% moving scatterers by volume
Stability of reading
5%
Probe identification
TSD140 Series Laser Doppler Probes use Smart Probe Technology. Calibration
coefficients are automatically selected for previously calibrated probes
Probe calibration
Flow: User set via LDFCAL motility standard of 1000 BPU ±5% @ 21° C
Factory set using a motility standard (i.e., known concentration solution of
latex spheres undergoing Brownian motion) Factory or user calibration using
LDF CAL calibration solution.
Zeroing
Automatic, controlled (unplug probe to check the zero level of the backscatter
output)
LASER
Type
Temperature stabilized semi-conductor laser diode
Mode of operation
Continuous
Wavelength
830±10 nm
Class
Class 1 (EN 60825-1 and 21 CFR 1040.10)
Power at probe
< 0.5 mW from the probe
ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating temp
10° C – 35° C
Storage temp
5° C – 50° C
Operating humidity
0 – 70% (non-condensing)
ELECTRICAL
Power supply unit (PSU)
Ships with ±12, +5 VDC @ 2 amp (AC101A DC power adapter)
PSU spec affects warm-up time and operating range. The LDF100C heats and
cools the laser. At 3 A at +5 V, the laser is at the correct temperature after about
30 seconds.
DATA OUTPUTS
Analog
2 analog outputs
Type
Time
Constant
(filtering)
Range
Resolution
Blood
perfusion
(BPU) LDF
0-5000
BPU
0 -5 V
< 2.5 BPU
200 ms
0 to +5 V
Scaling:
1 BPU
corresponds
to 1 mV
Backscatter
(BS) tissue
remittance
0-100%
0 -5 V
≤ 0.05%
200 ms
0 to +5 V
Scaling:
1%
corresponds
to 50 mV
Signals
General
Output
voltage
Units
Technology: Oxford Optronix, Ltd. technology for LDF signal processing
Weight:
790 g
Dimensions: 19 cm x 7 cm x 11 cm (H × W × D)
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 3 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD140 Series Probes
The TSD140 series offers a wide range of laser Doppler probes that interface with the LDF100C module. Probes
are designed to allow the local monitoring of blood perfusion from almost any tissue type. All probes contain
optical fibers, which are used to direct low power laser light to and from the tissue. Three types of probes
(surface, needle, and disposable) and a driver are stocked for the LDF100C; other probes styles are available.
Standard cable length for all probes is 3 m. Single fiber probes have an overall length of 30-100 cm and require
the use of TSD148; they can be cut to any length with a sharp scalpel.
Probe cable lengths between 1 m and 8 m and needle and needle probes with shaft lengths of between 10 mm to
70 mm may be custom ordered. Contact BIOPAC Systems, Inc. for more information.
Probe Options
SURFACE
Designed for skin and exposed tissue blood flow monitoring. Ideal for noninvasive measurements
from skin or organ surfaces. The signal delivery fiber intersects the probe body at a right angle,
making the probes easy to secure to the skin or tissue surface. Made from Tempalux.
TSD140
Cutaneous blood flow anywhere on the skin surface.
TSD142
Micro-vascular skin blood flow in the digits.
TSD143
Small animal work, including post-operative monitoring, i.e., reconstructive surgery (suturable).
TSD146
Small animal work and general tissue surface monitoring (this is a non-suturable version of the
TSD143).
NEEDLE
Designed for invasive and endoscopic blood flow monitoring of tissue. Needle probes can be used
both for noninvasive monitoring from the surface of tissues (by positioning the tip in contact/close
proximity to the tissue) or for invasive placement and monitoring from regions within tissues. The
signal delivery fiber terminates flush with the top of the needle, making the probes easy to insert
into tissue. Made from medical grade stainless steel.
TSD144
Microvascular blood flow measurements. Typically positioned using a micromanipulator clamp
over soft tissues such as brain and muscle.
TSD145
Micro-vessel or micro-vascular blood flow within skin, muscle, tumor and organ tissues. Fine probe
diameters facilitate blood flow measurements from only a small number of capillaries.
DISPOSABLE Designed for safe, continuous, invasive microvascular blood flow monitoring. Composed of a
polymethyl methacrylate core and a tough fluorinated polymer cladding. Incorporate a coupling
bead to interface with the TSD148 single fiber driver for connection to the LDF100C module.
TSD147A/AL Blood flow measurements under the skin (use a standard 22G ID cannula to insert directly into
tissue). TSD147A is 30 cm long, TSD147AL is 100 cm long.
MRI Use:
MR Safe
TSD147A/AL Components – MRI chamber room; cable only:
Fiber Optic Cable: Polymethyl methacrylate core & tough fluorinated polymer cladding
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 4 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
DRIVER
TSD148
This is a precision-machined coupling system for interfacing the TSD147 series single fiber probes
to the LDF100C. The TSD148 consists of a compact laser driver housed in a non-metallic
Tempalux housing, terminated with a 2-meter cable for connection to the LDF100C module.
Handling TSD140 Series Probes
TSD140 series probes must be handled with care. Failure to do this may result in breakage of the
internal optical fibers, scratching the polished probe ends or separation of the cable from the probe
ends or connectors.
Do not use a worn or damaged probe.
The optical fibers used in the TSD140 series probes are glass and have a diameter of 125 μm. The fibers are
flexible and can be bent; however, it is recommended that they are not subjected to bends with a radius less than
30 mm.
The connectors on TSD140 series probes must be kept clean and free from dust. Connectors should be inspected
before each use. Dust can be removed from the connectors using a good quality ‘air-duster.’
Check the integrity of TSD140 series probes by holding the probe end to a source of bright diffuse light (e.g. a
lamp) and inspecting the connector end. Two bright spots of light of equal intensity should be visible from the
pins within the connector.
Applying Probes to Tissue
Surface
Surface probes may be attached to tissue using double-sided adhesive rings (such as ADD204 or
ADD208). Alternatively, the miniature suturable probe can be sutured directly into position.
Needle
Needle probes can be secured in a micromanipulator assembly or stand and placed above the tissue.
Depending on the tissue, fine needle probes may be introduced directly into tissue after first
ensuring an appropriate superficial incision has been made. Alternatively, a suitable introducer or
catheter should be used. All needle style probes can optionally be secured in a micromanipulator
assembly or stand.
• Bear in mind that all needle probes have a blunt end and may cause some degree of tissue
trauma when inserted directly into tissue without using a suitable introducer.
Single fiber The insertable probe can be inserted into tissue using a standard 2G ID cannula. These probes can
be cut to the desired length with a sharp scalpel. The single fiber probes require the TSD148 driver.
It is important to control the relative movements of the tissue (induced by breathing, etc.) with respect to the
probe to reduce artifact in the perfusion signal. Allowing the supported probe to lightly come into contact with the
surface of the tissue can reduce these artifacts. Under some conditions it may be best to hold the probe in position
by hand.
It is essential to ensure that the pressure on the tissue is minimal, otherwise local occlusion of the
microvasculature may result.
Avoid direct illumination of the measurement site from external lighting sources and direct sunlight. Excessive
ambient lighting at the probe site can disturb the blood perfusion reading. If erroneous readings due to excessive
ambient lighting levels are suspected, cover the attached probe and measurement area with a light piece of opaque
material.
●
Place the LDF100C module on a flat surface close to the point of measurement; note that the standard probe
cable length is 3 m.
●
The probe can be placed in or on tissue at any stage, either prior to or following connection to the LDF100C.
Allow the module to warm up with a probe attached before taking any measurements.
●
The probe can be exchanged for another at any stage without the need to first switch off the LDF100C.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 5 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
●
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
The probe does not need to be disconnected from the LDF100C prior to turning off the LDF100C.
Quick Set up and Use Guide
Place the LDF100C module on a flat surface close to the point of measurement.
Connect the AC100A to the LDF100C and plug the AC101 into a properly grounded AC Mains socket.
● When the module is powered (immediately after the double beep) the analog outputs both go to 0 V (half
scale) for 3 sec and then to 0 V for a further 3 sec before outputting data.
Allow the instrument to warm up for 5 minutes before making any measurements.
Select a probe to make measurements with and connect it respecting the correct orientation. If no probe is
connected to the LDF100C module, the Flow analog output will be held at 0 V and the Backscatter output at
0 volts. The status LED will be green when no probe is connected.
Introduction to Probe Calibration
The LDF100C system incorporates proprietary Smart Sensor technology that enables the module to recognize a
previously calibrated probe and to automatically apply the necessary probe calibration coefficients. This alleviates
the need to re-calibrate a probe every time a different probe is plugged in to the module. The module ‘recognizes’
a specific probe every time the probe is plugged in.
When probes are ordered at the same time as the LDF100C, BIOPAC will calibrate the LDF100C to the ordered
probes with a “motility standard” before shipping the items. If a probe has previously been calibrated then there
is generally no need to re-calibrate that probe. However, when probes are purchased separately they will require
calibrating before use using an LAF CAL calibration kit. When the calibration procedure ends, the calibration
data is automatically stored in the module. The calibration data is automatically retrieved every time that
particular probe is connected to the module.
LDFCAL Calibration Kit
Contents:
Motility standard and positioning device
• The m otility s tandard i s a colloidal s olution of s uspended latex spheres. The s ize a nd
concentration of sphe res are ca refully cont rolled so that ca libration values are always
reproducible. The LDFCAL provides a standard calibration value of 1000 B PU 5% @
21° C.
• The size and relative density of the latex spheres is such that the artifact due to settling
and aggregation is negligible during the calibration process.
Intended use:
Use the calibration standard with the LDF100C blood flow monitor and probes when required.
Probes require calibration if they are purchased separately from a monitor and for routine
calibration purposes.
IMPORTANT! Please read the information contained in this section before using the calibration standard. Pay
particular attention to the warnings and cautions.
Manufacturer:
Oxford Optronix Ltd.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 6 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Probe Calibration Procedure—TSD140-TSD47
● To calibrate the single fiber driver adapter (TSD148), refer to the next section.
To perform a new probe calibration, a Calibration Kit (LDFCAL) is required, which contains a motility standard
and a positioning device. The parameters are automatically stored and recalled when that particular probe is
subsequently connected.
Every probe is supplied with a probe identification number (Probe ID) on the probe box label.
The number is between 5 and 36 and must be unique for the probes used; using two probes with
the same ID will result in invalid calibration data being used.
Calibration errors may occur if probes with the same probe identification number are used.
Contact BIOPAC for advice if multiple probes have the same ID number.
The motility standard has a 3-month shelf life, so it’s best to order only when required. The
expiration date is indicated on the label. The solution must not be used beyond this date, as it will
produce misleading values due to the aggregation of the latex spheres.
Do not use the motility standard in ambient temperatures below 15° C or above 25° C.
Store the motility standard within the temperature range 3 – 25° C. Do not freeze the solution.
Never attempt to re-fill the bottle with spilt solution. Errors may arise as a result of
contamination.
Do not dilute the motility standard.
It is essential that the calibration procedure be performed on a stable and vibration-free surface.
This is very important, any movement or vibration during the calibration procedure, however
slight, is likely to result in erroneous calibration data.
1. Connect the probe to the front panel of the blood flow monitor.
2. Gently swirl the bottle to disperse the contents.
3. Open the bottle and allow the contents to settle for one minute before proceeding.
4. Carefully position the probe in the solution. This is best achieved by holding the probe
cable within the jaws of t he clamp and carefully lowering the active area of the probe
into the center of the solution.
IMPORTANT! Keep the active surface of the probe as far as possible from the edge of
the bottle. The probe should be supported in such a way that it does not swing or move
while it is in the solution.
Read through all the instructions first before proceeding.
5. Press the CAL button on the front panel of the LDF100C once and then press the CAL button again within 10
seconds to confirm calibration. To end calibration at this point, wait 10 s econds and the calibration process
will time out and stop. If proceeding, there will be one long beep.
IMPORTANT! Any vibration or movement during this period will invalidate the calibration procedure.
6. An audible double beep indicates a successful calibration.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 7 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
•
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
A s eries o f a udible beeps (long be ep f ollowed by a pause and then a num ber of r apid be eps)
indicates a failed c alibration. T he num ber of r apid be eps equates to the error code—refer t o
Troubleshooting for more information on the error codes.
Driver Calibration Procedure— TSD148
● To calibrate a probe (TSD140-TSD147), refer to the preceding section.
1. IMPORTANT! Read the following information before attempting to calibrate the single fiber probe
connecting adapter. Refer to calibration standard instructions for precautions to be taken.
2. Unscrew Part A.
3. Pull off Part B. (Note: This is a tight fit and may need to be twisted while it is pulled.)
4. Connect the single fiber adapter into the front panel of the blood flow monitor.
5. Gently swirl the bottle to disperse the contents before use. Open the bottle and allow the contents to settle for
one minute before proceeding.
6. Carefully position Part C of the adapter in the solution. This is best achieved by holding the adapter cable
within the jaws of the clamp and carefully lowering Part C into the center of the solution.
IMPORTANT! Keep the active surface of the probe as far as possible from the edge of the bottle. The adapter
cable s hould b e supported in s uch a w ay t hat it do es not s wing or move w hile i n t he solution. Follow the
calibration procedure detailed in the preceding section.
7. Clean Part C to remove residual calibration solution by washing and wiping using water or 70% IMS or IPA.
Allow Part C to dry before reassembling the adapter by pushing Part B onto Part C and then attaching Part A.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 8 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Software Scaling
AcqKnowledge must be set to scale the input values to the correct units for LDF measurements. Access the
Change Scaling Parameters dialog under MP menu>Setup Channels>Scaling, and then set the parameters for BPU
(Channel A1) and Backscatter (Channel A5) as follows:
BPU (A1)
Input
Cal1
0
Cal2
5
Scale
0
5000
Backscatter (A5)
Input
Scale
Cal1
0
0
Cal2
5
100
Units
BPU
Units
%
Connecting Probes to the LDF100C
Very carefully remove the probe from its protective case and check that the Probe Connector is clean and free
from dust. The TSD140 series probes plug into the front of the LDF100C module, which contains the laser
source, sensitive photo-detection and signal processing circuitry. All probes are standardized using a reference
motility standard (LDFCAL) consisting of latex microspheres undergoing Brownian motion.
Connect the LDF100C module to a power source and then switch ON.
• The LED status indicator will be illuminated in Amber. (When the
probe is not inserted, the indicator will illuminate Green only.)
•
The start-up beeps are the same whether a probe is connected or not
and whether a probe is calibrated.
•
Analog indicators
●
no probe: BS = 0 V, LDF = 0 V
●
uncalibrated probe: BS = 0 V, LDF = 0 V
Select a TSD140 series probe.
Plug the TSD140 probe into the “PROBE” connector located on the front panel of the LDF100C, taking care to
orient the connector plug with respect to the socket. Align the probe and push the connector firmly home into
the socket until a click is heard.
4. After a short delay, the module will enter Trend Mode, and the AcqKnowledge software display should show
blood perfusion values as XXXX BPU (where XXXX is a number in the range 0-5000 units) and backscatter
as % (a percentage).
Since the LDF100C is a light-based measurement system, random values may appear on the software
display while probes are not attached to tissue. When the probe is in the air, the module will set the
analog outputs to BS = 0 V, LDF = 0 V instead of outputting random values.
No warm up period is required after connecting a probe if the module was already ON. If the module was not ON,
allow 30 seconds minimum for warm up.
Disconnect
To disconnect the probe plug from the front panel socket, gently pull the connector by the ribbed part of the
connector.
Attempting to remove the connector by any other part of the probe (for example, by pulling the cable
sleeving) will cause irreparable damage to the probe.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 9 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD140 Series Probes Storage & Cleaning
When not in use, TSD140 series probes for the LDF100C should be stored in the probe box with the optical fiber
coiled neatly. Following sterilization, probes should be stored unopened in the packaging in which they were
sterilized.
Cleaning
Probes are cleaned prior to packing and shipment. It is recommended that the probe end on all new probes be
wiped with a soft cloth, preferably one that does not shed fibers, dampened with a solution of 70% alcohol in
water.
Probes should be cleaned immediately after use as it is easier to remove soiling and particulate matter before it
dries onto surfaces.
Visually inspect the probe end, cable and connector.
• If there is no visible soiling, wipe the probe end and cable with a soft cloth dampened with a
solution of 70% alcohol in water. Allow the alcohol to dry completely before using the probe.
• If there is visible soiling, clean the probe with warm water containing a mild detergent. To ensure
that all soiling and particulate matter is removed, keep the probe beneath the surface of the
cleaning solution and rub it carefully with a soft cloth or brush. Avoid immersing the probe
connector in the cleaning solution. Rinse the probe end and cable in clean water. Wipe the probe
end and cable with an absorbent cloth and leave the probe to dry completely.
Disinfection
To disinfect TSD140 series probes, immerse the probe end and cable (for the disinfectant manufacturer’s
recommended immersion times) in:
• 2% glutaraldehyde (Cidex)
• 70% alcohol in water
Sterilization
Some of the TSD140 series dedicated perfusion probes may be sterilized by moist heat (steam). They are capable
of withstanding an autoclave cycle of 134° C for 3 minutes. With care a TSD140 series probe can be expected to
survive between 10 – 20 sterilization cycles.
TSD140 series probes must be cleaned prior to sterilization.
It is the responsibility of the user to validate the sterility of TSD140 series probes after
sterilization.
The TSD140 series probe should be packaged to maintain sterility after processing. The packaging material used
should be appropriate for sterilization by steam, e.g. a tray within a pouch. The dimensions of the base of the tray
should not be smaller than 15 cm x10 cm for a standard length probe.
1. Place the probe in the tray in a neat coil.
• Starting at the connector end, tape the connector to the base of the tray using autoclave tape. Coil
the probe onto the tray and lay the probe end in the center of the coil. Autoclave tape may be used
to secure the cable to the tray. Do not use tape on the probe end. Do not rest the connector on the
cable as it is heavy and may distort the cable.
2. Seal the tray into a pouch designed to withstand sterilization by steam.
3. Use only a validated autoclave to sterilize the TSD140
series probes.
• Probes can be immersed in a non-corrosive sterilizing
solution, such as 2% Glutaraldehyde (Cidex) or in a lowtemperature, ethylene-oxide gas sterilization chamber.
The maximum temperature to which older style probes
can be exposed is 60° C.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 10 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Probe Identification
The LDF100C system incorporates proprietary Smart Sensor technology that enables the module to recognize a
previously calibrated probe and to automatically apply the necessary probe calibration coefficients. This alleviates
the need to re-calibrate a probe every time a different probe is plugged in to the module. The module ‘recognizes’
a specific probe every time the probe is plugged in.
New Probe
If a new (previously uncalibrated) probe is connected to the LDF100C module, then the module’s Flow and
Backscatter outputs will be at 0 V. To take measurements, the probe must be calibrated (see following section on
calibrating probes) or removed and replaced by a recognized probe. The status LED will be amber when a probe,
recognized or unrecognized, is connected to the LDF100C.
Temperature Out of Range (Single beep every 16 seconds)
This warning will sound if the laser temperature is below the minimum or above the maximum for stable
operation. It may occur during the warm-up period if the ambient temperature is low—this is normal and not a
cause for concern. If this occurs during operation, the instrument should be moved to a cooler or warmer
environment depending on the ambient temperature. With the temperature out of range, output signals will
continue to be generated but may no longer be within the calibrated tolerance of the system and should be
interpreted with caution. If the environmental temperature is below 25° C and this message occurs repeatedly
soon after power-on, then a fault may have occurred; please contact BIOPAC Systems, Inc. for further advice.
TSD140 Series Probe Specifications
Part #
Style
Suturable
Body
Dimensions
TSD140
Standard surface.
Reusable, may be
autoclaved.
Digit surface.
Reusable, may be
autoclaved.
Suturable Miniature
surface. Reusable,
may be autoclaved.
Needle. Reusable,
may be autoclaved.
Fine needle. Reusable,
may be autoclaved.
Miniature surface.
Reusable, may be
autoclaved.
Disposable, insertable
single fiber. Single-use
recommended.
Disposable, insertable
single fiber. Single-use
recommended.
no
8 mm (high) x
17 mm (dia)
Angle of Laser
Delivery &
Collection
Right angle to
probe body
no
10 mm (high) x
17 mm (dia)
Right angle to
probe body
yes
yes
5 mm (high) x
12 mm (dia)
Right angle to
probe body
yes
no
25 mm (long) x
1 mm (dia)
25 mm (long) x
0.5 mm (dia)
5 mm (high) x
12 mm (dia)
Straight
Invasive and
endoscopic
Invasive and
endoscopic
yes
TSD142
TSD143
TSD144
TSD145
TSD146
TSD147A*
TSD147AL
*
no
no
Straight
Right angle to
probe body
Skin & Tissue
Monitoring
yes
no
30 cm (long) x
0.5 mm (dia)
Straight
no
100 cm (long) x
0.5 mm (dia)
Straight
Body
Dimensions
28 mm (long) x
8 mm (dia)
Connection Type
Cable Length
In-line single fiber
connector
3 meters
Part #
Style
Used with
TSD148
Single fiber Driver
TSD147A
TSD147AL
Insert via
22G ID
cannula
Insert via
22G ID
cannula
*Requires the TSD148 Single Fiber Driver for operation with the LDF100C.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 11 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
LDF Safety
This section contains important safety information related to the general use of the LDF100C laser Doppler
perfusion module. Important safety information also appears throughout the LDF100C and TSD140 series
sections as Warnings and Cautions.
! Warning
A warning indicates the possibility of injury to the operator.
A caution indicates a condition that may lead to equipment damage and/or malfunction.
LDF100C incorporates semiconductor laser diode devices operating in continuous mode and emitting invisible
laser radiation at a nominal operating wavelength of 830 nm. The maximum output power at the probe tip is less
than 0.5 mW. Laser light emitted from the optical fiber is highly divergent. Although the characteristics of the
laser radiation place the LDF100C device within the “Class 1” classification users should avoid directing the laser
radiation onto the eye. Applying the probe to any tissue OTHER THAN THE EYE is harmless, even over
prolonged time periods.
Warnings
! Warning
Never apply an LDF100C probe directly to the eye. The laser beam may cause permanent
damage to the retina.
! Warning
Do not attempt to use the LDF100C if it is damaged or does not operate as described in this
manual. There is a risk of electrical shock or other injury. The module must be returned to
BIOPAC for repair.
Cautions for the Module
Do not attempt to operate the LDF100C in the vicinity of imaging or therapeutic equipment that
emits ionizing radiation or produces a strong magnetic field as the performance of the module
may be affected. Extra long probes are available that allow the LDF100C module to be operated
at a safe distance from such equipment.
Do not attempt to autoclave, pressure sterilize, or expose to radiation, any part of the module.
Do not attempt repairs to the LDF100C module or TSD140 series probes. Only BIOPAC trained
personnel should undertake repairs.
Do not use the LDF100C in the presence of strong or changing ambient lighting levels as this
may result in erroneous measurements and artifacts.
Do not use probes, cables and other accessories unless supplied by BIOPAC, otherwise serious
damage may result.
Do not mishandle the module; use extreme care at all times.
Do not use the module in the presence of flammable anesthetics, which represent an explosive
hazard.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 12 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Cautions for the Probes
Do not drop, pull, stretch or apply mechanical shock to a TSD140 series probe. Permanent
damage to the probe may result.
Do not apply tension to the probe cable. Permanent damage to the probe may result.
Do not soak or immerse the probe in any corrosive liquid solution. Permanent damage to the
probe may result.
Do not mishandle. Handle the probes with great care to avoid breaking the optical fibers,
scratching the polished ends or separating the probe ends or connectors from the fibers.
Maintenance
User
Responsibility
Never use a defective product. Replace parts that are missing, broken, worn or
damaged in any way immediately. This product (or its components) should be
repaired only by BIOPAC Systems, Inc. trained engineers. Any exceptions to
this recommendation must be made using written instructions supplied by
BIOPAC Systems, Inc. If service is not provided by BIOPAC Systems, Inc. (or
its appointed agents) then the user of this product will have the sole
responsibility for any losses incurred as a result of unauthorized maintenance,
improper repair, alterations or damage.
LDF100C
! Warning
Only BIOPAC technical staff should remove the cover of the LDF100C module. There are no
user-serviceable parts inside.
Inspect the module regularly for signs of wear and tear.
Checking TSD140 Series Probes
Inspect TSD140 series probes regularly to check the integrity of the internal optical fibers.
•
A simple check is to hold the probe end to a source of bright diffuse light (e.g. a lamp) while visually
inspecting the connector end. Two bright spots of light of equal intensity should be visible from the
two large pins within the connector.
LDF100C Storage & Cleaning
When not in use, the LDF100C module should ideally be stored at room temperature, although it may be
stored between 5° C to 50° C. When returning from extremes of temperature, it is important to allow the
module to stabilize at room temperature before use.
To clean the surface of the module: wipe lightly with a dry, lint-free cloth. Or wipe lightly with a soft cloth
dampened with a commercial, nonabrasive cleaner, or use a low-pressure air line to blow dust free, or
carefully clean with a suitable vacuum cleaner.
To disinfect the module, wipe the surface with a soft cloth dampened with a solution of 70% alcohol in water.
! Warning
Do not spray, pour or spill any liquid on the LDF100C module, its accessories, connectors,
switches or openings.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 13 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Troubleshooting
! Warning Only BIOPAC technical staff should remove the cover of the LDF100C module. There are no
user-serviceable parts inside.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Contact support@biopac.com for problems using the LDF100C.
Beep & Led Guide
Beep
LED
Indication
Two beeps
Off
Initializing with no probe.
Two beeps
Red
Initializing with a probe connected.
—
Green
Instrument ready for use; no probe connected.
—
Amber
Instrument operating correctly with probe connected.
Single beep every 16
seconds
Amber or green
Laser temperature out of range (too hot or too cold).
Double beeps
Alternating
amber/red,
synchronized with
beeps
Calibration button was pressed, awaiting confirmation.
Note If the calibration button was pressed in error, wait
10 seconds for normal operation to resume. To
confirm calibration, press the calibration button
again during that 10-second period.
Long beep
Alternating
amber/red
Calibration in progress.
Double beep
Amber
Calibration successful.
Long beep followed by a
number of short beeps
indicating the error.
Alternating
red/amber,
synchronized with
error code beeps
Calibration failed.
Error: 1, 2, 3, 4, 7 Incorrect probe position or
malfunctioning probe.
Reposition probe in motility standard and repeat
calibration procedure.
Error: 5, 6 Vibration or movement of probe or cable.
Ensure LDFCAL motility standard is on a vibrationfree surface and eliminate probe and cable
movement; repeat calibration procedure.
Single beep
Amber
Calibration aborted (probe removed or calibration
button pressed).
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 14 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Reducing Signal Artifact
Certain environmental conditions and probe application and positioning errors can affect laser
Doppler blood perfusion readings.
Irrespective of the probe used, it is important to reduce the possibility of signal artifact, noise and signal dropout
in the blood perfusion reading. The presence of motion artifact noise in the blood perfusion signal is often due to
relative movements of the tissue (e.g. induced by breathing) with respect to the probe and/or probe cable
movements. To minimize artifact, allow the probe to come into contact with the tissue such that the probe and
tissue ‘move together’ and ensure that the cables do not move. It may be helpful to secure the probe cable to the
table with adhesive tape at intervals.
It is also essential to ensure that undue probe pressure is not applied to the tissue, otherwise local occlusion of the
microvasculature may result in a corresponding reduced blood perfusion reading.
Excessive ambient lighting at the probe measurement site can also disturb the blood perfusion reading. Avoid
direct illumination of the measurement site from external lighting sources and direct sunlight. If erroneous
readings due to excessive ambient lighting levels are suspected, cover the attached probe and measurement area
with a light piece of opaque material.
In summary, avoid the following situations:
•
Probe movement relative to the tissue.
•
Movement of the probe cables.
•
Strong ambient lighting sources such as surgical lights, fluorescent lights and direct sunlight.
•
Changing ambient lighting.
Loss of signal due to excessive tissue occlusion could occur for the following reasons:
•
Excessive probe pressure on the tissue.
•
The formation of a hematoma (blood clot) within the tissue.
Electro-Magnetic Interference
With the proliferation of radio-frequency transmitting equipment and other sources of electrical
noise in research environments (e.g. mobile phones, electrical appliances), high levels of such
interference due to close proximity or strength of a source may result in disruption of performance of
this device.
Erratic readings, cessation of operation or other incorrect functioning may indicate electro-magnetic interference
to the module. If this occurs, survey the location of use to determine the source of the disruption and take actions
to eliminate it:
•
Turn equipment off in the vicinity of the module to isolate the equipment generating the electromagnetic
interference.
•
Relocate the other device(s).
•
Increase the separation between the interfering equipment and the LDF100C module.
For further information and assistance contact BIOPAC.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 15 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Possible Errors & Suggestions
A. There is no response to the Power On button and the Power On LED indicator fails to light green.
The power adapter may not be properly connected to the LDF100C or to the Mains outlet, or it may not be
functioning. Check all connections. If possible, try another adapter with the same specification; the adapter
must have the same specification to maintain electrical safety.
B.
There is no double beep upon power on and/or the initial beep does not occur.
If the power on indicator is not lit, the power supply may not be working. Notify institution service
personnel to check and if necessary, replace with the same type and rating of adapter. If the power on
indicator is lit, the module has failed the power on self-test. Do not use the module. Contact BIOPAC.
C.
There is a continuous sound upon power on.
The module has failed the power-on self-test. Do not use the module. Contact BIOPAC.
D.
The Temp. Out of Range beep sequence is emitted (an audible beep every 16 seconds).
This is normal during the warm-up period and not indicative of a fault.
Warning sounds if the laser temperature is above or below the range for stable operation. If this occurs, the
instrument should be moved to warmer or cooler environment for proper operation. Output signals (analog
voltage outputs and serial data) will be generated but should be interpreted with caution.
If the environmental ambient temperature is below 25° C and this error occurs repeatedly soon after poweron, then a fault may have occurred—contact BIOPAC for further advice.
E.
The status LED remains green even though there is a probe connected.
This is likely a problem with the probe. If a spare probe is available, replace the probe connected to the
module with the spare probe. It may be possible to determine which probe is faulty.
If the problem can’t be resolved, contact BIOPAC.
F.
The analog outputs are both 0 V.
This might occur a) when the probe is connected to the LDF100C; b) due to a low backscatter signal; and c)
because probe calibration is required. Follow the instructions for probe calibration given in section 4.12.
G.
Pressing the CAL button for probe calibration does not emit a double beep to indicate a probe
calibration is under way.
The calibration process has failed to start. Try pressing the CAL button again. If there is still no response,
contact BIOPAC.
H.
The Error beep sequence (varying number of beeps) is emitted.
Probe calibration has f ailed. There are 7 series of er ror b eeps us ed to i ndicate the reason for calibration
failure. Beep sequences are explained below:
Error: 1, 2, 3, 4, 7 Incorrect probe position or malfunctioning probe.
Reposition probe in motility standard and repeat calibration procedure.
Error: 5, 6
Vibration or movement of probe or cable.
Ensure LDFCAL motility standard is on a vibration-free surface and eliminate probe
and cable movement; repeat calibration procedure.
I.
The BPU values are erratic.
The probe may have become detached, check and replace if required. Tissue movement may be excessive.
The probe cable may be moving; re-route the cable and/or secure that cable at intervals using adhesive tape.
There may be local electro-magnetic interference —see previous page.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 16 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
J.
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
The analog output signal is zero.
There may be a cable problem. Check that the cable attached to the analog output connector(s) is correctly
configured. Notify institution service personnel and request that they check that i) the cable is correct and ii)
the output signal(s) are available on the pins of the connector(s).
If the problem cannot be resolved, contact BIOPAC.
Obtaining Technical Assistance
For technical information and assistance or to order additional probes and accessories, please contact BIOPAC.
When calling BIOPAC for technical support, it is helpful to have the serial number of the LDF100C module
and/or TSD140 series probes and the version of AcqKnowledge software.
•
The serial number of the LDF100C module can be found on the back panel.
•
Probe serial numbers can be found on the cable label and Probe ID numbers are on the probe box.
•
The AcqKnowledge software version appears under the About menu in the software.
Returning LDF Components
Contact BIOPAC for shipping instructions including a Returned Materials Authorization (RMA) number and a
RMA Declaration (including decontamination of equipment) form.
Pack the module in its original shipping carton. If the original carton is not available, wrap the module securely
using bubble wrap and pack it in a strong box surrounded by polystyrene chips and/or suitable foam inserts.
A probe should be returned in the probe storage box. If returning a probe on its own, wrap the probe storage box
in bubble wrap and pack it in a strong box.
Use a recognized courier company for the return of the module and probes.
Warranty
BIOPAC warrants that this device is free from defects in both materials and workmanship.
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
The user shall determine suitability for use of this device for any procedure. BIOPAC shall not
be liable for incidental or consequential loss or damages of any kind.
Principles of Laser Doppler Flowmetry
What does the LDF100C measure?
The LDF100C is a laser Doppler blood flow (perfusion) module whose primary purpose is to measure realtime microvascular red blood cell (or erythrocyte) flow (perfusion) in tissue. Perfusion is sometimes also
referred to as red blood cell flux. Laser Doppler signals from the tissue are recorded in BPU (Blood Perfusion
Units) which is a relative units scale defined using a carefully controlled motility standard comprising a
suspension of latex spheres undergoing Brownian motion.
The LDF100C laser Doppler flow module employs a technique called laser Doppler Flowmetry (LDF) and
works by illuminating the tissue under observation with low power laser light from a probe containing optical
fiber light guides. Laser light from one fiber is scattered within the tissue and some is scattered back to the
probe. Another optical fiber collects the backscattered light from the tissue and returns it to the monitor. Most
of the light is scattered by tissue that is not moving but a small percentage of the returned light is scattered by
moving red blood cells. The light returned to the monitor undergoes signal processing to extract the signal
related to the moving red blood cells. Microvascular blood flow (perfusion) is indicated in the AcqKnowledge
software display in relative units called Blood Perfusion Units (BPU).
The LDF technique offers substantial advantages over other methods in the measurement of microvascular
blood perfusion.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 17 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
•
Studies have shown that it is both highly sensitive and responsive to local blood perfusion and is also
versatile and easy to use for continuous monitoring.
•
The LDF100C is potentially noninvasive (since the TSD140 series probe is not actually required to
touch the surface of the tissue) and in no way harms or disturbs the normal physiological state of the
microcirculation.
•
The small probe dimensions enable it to be employed in experimental environments not readily
accessible using other techniques.
Measurements obtained by LDF are intrinsically of a relative nature. Although such measurements are
proportional to flow, the factor of proportionality will be different for different tissues.
Blood Perfusion Signal and the BPU.
The primary function of the LDF100C is to produce a blood perfusion output signal that is proportional to the
red blood cell flow (perfusion). This represents the transport of blood cells through microvasculature and is
defined as:
Microvascular Flow
(Red Blood Cell Flux)
=
Number of blood cells moving in
the tissue sampling volume
x
Mean velocity of these
cells
Microvascular blood perfusion therefore, is the product of mean blood cell velocity and mean blood cell
number concentration present in the small measuring volume of tissue under illumination from the probe. For
the LDF100C, microvascular blood perfusion is indicated in the AcqKnowledge software display in relative
units called Blood Perfusion Units (BPU). All LDF100C devices have been calibrated with a constant,
known motility standard so that, for a given perfusion situation, all LDF100C probes will read the same value
of blood perfusion expressed in blood perfusion units (BPU).
The standard Blood Perfusion output on the LDF100C has been optimally filtered with a time constant of 200
ms to give a clean and smooth looking signal while being able to respond to dynamic changes and pulsatile
blood flow. This output is available as a continuous analog voltage for recording purposes via the MP system.
Backscatter Signal (BS)
The LDF100C also produces a signal, which is proportional to the total light remitted or backscattered from
the tissue. This is called the Backscatter Signal (BS) and is available as an analog voltage output for recording
purposes via the MP system. The backscatter is expressed as a percentage fraction of the laser light remitted
from the tissue from the percentage of the maximum analog output possible for the backscatter signal. For
example, in highly perfused tissues, the BS will be low due to increased photon absorption. Situations where
the BS signal is close to zero may indicate that the probe has come into contact with whole blood. This could
cause the BPU reading to saturate since the system is no longer monitoring microvascular perfusion.
What is the Meaning of Zero and Negative BPU?
The zero (0.00 V) reading of the LDF100C has been obtained by calibrating the system against a special static
scattering material where no movements occur. In such cases the back-scattered light processed by the
LDF100C contains no Doppler shifted frequency components and a true zero is obtained. In a true physical
sense, ‘noise’ around zero can be both positive and negative, thus it is possible that a small negative reading
(of up to –10 BPU) can be observed in conditions of zero perfusion.
A zero reading indicates zero motion both in the measuring volume under examination and artifactual motion
arising from relative movements between the probe and the measuring volume. During in vivo measurements,
rarely is an absolute zero obtained. Even during total occlusion of tissue blood perfusion, there is often some
small, residual motion of blood cells trapped in the vessels, as well as some small muscle and tissue
movement in the measuring volume. Even after surgical removal of tissue, localized cell movement and
Brownian motion may still occur in the severed blood vessels.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 18 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
What volume of tissue does the LDF100C measure?
LDF defines a flow (perfusion) parameter from information contained in the optical spectrum of light remitted
from the tissue. The actual measurement sampling volume or depth can only be determined by identifying
precisely which blood vessels and erythrocytes have interacted with the remitted light, which in turn, is
principally dependant on two parameters; namely the optical scattering and optical absorption coefficients of
the tissue under observation. Since both of these coefficients are entirely dependent on the site of observation
and perfusion of the microvasculature at the time of measurement, it is impossible to determine the actual
sampling volume/depth at any tissue site. Generally speaking, for well-perfused tissue such as muscle, the
mean sampling depth has been estimated to be in the region 0.5-1.0 mm with a concomitant sampling volume
in the region 0.3-0.5 mm3. For cutaneous measurements, the sampling depth is likely to be in the range 1.0 –
1.5 mm. These estimates have been obtained heuristically through many years of experience and are based on
both in vitro observations and mathematical modeling of photon diffusion through “imaginary tissues” using
Monte-Carlo techniques.
BIOPAC Hardware | Laser Doppler Flowmetry | Page 19 - 19
Updated: 9.4.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
NIBP100D NONINVASIVE BLOOD PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
The NIBP100D Noninvasive Blood
Pressure Monitoring System is suitable
for small children (~4-5 years) to large
adults

Accurate noninvasive blood pressure values

Comfortable for subjects to wear

Real-time, continuous, noninvasive blood pressure

Easy to use
The NIBP100D noninvasive blood pressure system provides a continuous, beat-to-beat, blood pressure signal
recorded from the fingers of a subject. The system outputs a continuous blood pressure waveform that is similar to
a direct arterial pressure waveform. The monitor displays values for systolic, diastolic, mean blood pressure, and
heart rate.
The noninvasive blood pressure (NIBP) monitoring system uses a double finger cuff that is
comfortable for the subject to wear and easy to place on the hand. The cuffs (included with
system) come in three sizes to accommodate children through large adults.
The NIBP100D interfaces with an MP150 data acquisition system (or third-party data
acquisition system), via a DA100C and TCI105 Interface Connector. The AcqKnowledge
software displays the blood pressure signal, plus systolic, diastolic, mean blood pressure and
heart rate. It will also provide a detailed beat-to-beat analysis of the blood pressure signal.
The NIBP100D is calibrated using a standard blood pressure cuff that is placed around the subject’s upper arm.
The unit automatically takes a blood pressure measurement from the subject and uses the value for calibration
purposes. During the calibration process the system locates the pulse at the finger and performs a partial
occlusion. It will switch from one finger to the next during the course of the recording to relieve the pressure from
the occluded finger. The interval between finger rotations is user-selectable and can be as long as 60 minutes.
During the rotation, the system takes another calibration reading to ensure that values are accurate.
The system is very user friendly and the initial setup and calibration period takes less than three minutes—that
time includes placing the cuff around the upper arm and the sensor on the fingers. Placing the finger sensor is as
simple as sliding the subject’s fingers through the two cuffs.
The system employs a vascular unloading technique to measure blood pressure at the fingers. A refined version of
the Penáz' principle is used to deliver a continuous noninvasive blood pressure signal. The method is based on
concentrically interlocking control loops for accurate long-term readings of finger blood pressure.
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP100D | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 7.22.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HYPERBARIC/HYPOBARIC CHAMBER SETUP
1. Cuff controller and CNAP monitor must be in the same chamber with the same"pressure" environment as
both are equipped with pressure sensor for surrounding pressure.
2. Pressure must be increased / decreased continuously rather than abruptly.
3. Hypobaric: take measures against overheating of the device as conventional cooling is limited (dim
CNAP display low; do not restrict airflow through case).
4. No draught on cuff.
5. Hand on heart level in steady position.
SPECIFICATIONS
For complete specifications, see the NIBP100D User Manual online under the product page “Resource” tab.
Components

Double-Cuff Finger Sensors – one each size
o L 24 - 28 mm dark red, M 18 - 24 mm Dark blue,
S 10 - 18 mm Light blue
o Finger cuff sensors are a consumable item and
typically last ~12 months based on 3-4 hours/week.

Blood Pressure Cuffs — one each size, latex-free
o Child (12 – 19 cm), Small Adult (17 – 25 cm),
Adult (23 – 33 cm), Large Adult (31 – 40 cm)

NIBP100D Monitor
o Dimensions 280 x 270 x 250 mm (11 x 10.6 x 9.8 in.)
o Weight 7.5 Kg (16.6 lbs) including components and accessories necessary for operability of
device
o Battery Sealed lead gel, operating time = 2 hrs (fully charged battery, normal conditions)
Electrical properties

Nominal voltage: 18 VDC ±10%

Nominal current: 3 A

Operability: No time-limit if powered by external mains adapter, at least 2 hrs if on battery-operation (fully
charged battery)
NIBP100D continuous noninvasive arterial pressure

Parameter classification
o Sys, Dia, Mean [mmHg]
o Pulse [bpm]


Inflation pressure
o Typ.: 120 mmHg (16 kPa)
o Min.: 30 mmHg (4 kPa)
o Max.: 300 ±10 mmHg (41.3 kPa ±1.3 kPa)
Measuring range
o Sys: 40 - 250 mmHg (5.3 – 33.3 kPa)
o Dia: 30 - 210 mmHg (4 - 28 kPa)
o Mean: 35 - 230 mmHg (4 – 30.6 kPa)
o Heart rate indication range 20-200 bpm
o Accuracy ±5 mmHg (0.6 kPa)

Excess pressure limit
o 300 ±10 mmHg (40 kPa ±1.3 kPa)
o Response time: < 3 sec.
o Deflation time: < 15 sec
o Protection against electric shock: Type BF

Display resolution 1 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP100D | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 7.22.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Output

Sensor bridge voltage: 2 – 10 V (external
monitor)

Sensitivity: 5 µV/V/mmHg

BP Wave Out: CNAP™ transducer cable 0.3 m;
connector RJ11 6P4C (e.g. Abbott IBP catheter)

Max delay of analog out signal: 50 msec
(means the BP waveform may be delayed with
respect to other waveforms acquired by the MP150
unit, such as ECG, by max 50 msec)
Interface

To DA100C via TCI105 (sold separately)
External mains adapter

Nominal voltage: 100 – 240 VAC

Safety class: Class II with functional earth

Power frequency: ~50/60 Hz

Earth leakage current: < 500 µA

Power output: 18 V, 3.3 A
Standards

EN 60601-1+A1+A2+A12+A13:
1996

EN 60601-2-30:
2000

EN 60601-1-2:
2003

EN 1060-1:
1995

EN 60601-1-4:1996 +A1:
1999

EN 1060-3:1997+A1:
2005

EN 60601-1-6:
2004

ANSI/AAMI SP10:
2002

EN 60601-1-8:2004+A1:
2006
Note:
Electric and magnetic fields may interfere with the functional reliability of the device, so avoid using the
NIBP100D CNAP™ Monitor 500 close to devices emitting powerful electromagnetic fields, e.g. x-ray
equipment, diathermy applications or magnetic resonance tomographs.
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP100D | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 7.22.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
O-RING KIT FOR NIBP100D – RXNIBP100D-KIT
This O-ring repair kit for the NIBP100D Noninvasive Blood Pressure
Monitor (CNAP® Monitor 500) allows the user to replace the O-rings on
the main unit, sensor cable and sensor.
Kit includes 50+ O-rings, a repair tool, and lubricant.
1. O-RING LUBRICATION
O-rings are used for leak-proof distribution of air t hroughout the CNAP®
hardware. The O-ring bushings of the CNAP® finger cuff and th e CNAP®
cable (Figure 1) need
to be
lubricated regularl y (every 1 2
months) in order to assure a free
moving connection and avoid
air leakage.
CNAP™ Error Codes associated with air leakage:
CNAP Fault Initial Pressure.
Technical description: Self-Test Manifold Pump Does Not
Reach Minimum Pressure Threshold
CNAP Fault Pump/Tubing/Valve Leaky.
Technical description: Self-Test Manifold Pump/Tubing/Inlet
Valve Leakage
Figure 1
Lubricate the O-ring bushings (air connectors) of CNAP® Monitor 500 with O-lube.
a. Apply a small amount of O-lube to a Q-tip. (Figures 2-4). Avoid applying too much O-lube on
the Q-tip (as in Figure 2) by distributing excess lube on the back of your hand (Figure 3). Figure 4
depicts the proper amount of lube.
Figure
2
Figure 3
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP100D O-Ring Kit | Page 1 - 3
Figure 4
Updated: 6.24.2013
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
b. Apply O-lube into each of the two bushings (lateral holes used for air supply) of the CNAP®
finger cuff and the CNAP® cable (both ends) as shown in Figures 5 and 6.
IMPORTANT: The electrical connections in the middle of the connector must not come
in contact with the O-lube.
Figure
5
Figure 6
c. Start the NIBP100D CNAP® Monitor and CNAP® hardware (CNAP® controller, CNAP®
finger cuff and CNAP® cable). If the status message “CNAP initializing” is displayed upon
startup, the connection is working properly. Otherwise, repeat Steps b and c.
2. O-RING INSTALLATION
O-rings are used in the CNAP® controller (four O-rings) and CNAP® cable port (two O-rings) to distribute leakproof air throughout the CNAP® hardware.
How to change the O-rings (air connectors) on the NIBP100D CNAP® Monitor 500
a. Remove the four red O-rings from the CNAP® controller. (Two O-rings for each connector, see
Figures 7 and 8.)
Figure 7
Figure 8
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP100D O-Ring Kit | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 6.24.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
b. Slide/roll O-ring onto the provided O-ring mounting tool (O-ring at the end of the conus, as
shown in Figures 9 and 10).
Figure 9
Figure 10
c. Attach the O-ring mounting tool to one of the O-ring carriers (as shown in Figure 11). Then use
the green O-ring plug socket to slide the O-ring onto the O-ring carrier (Figure 12). Make sure
that the O-ring sits in position on the O-ring carrier.
Figure 11
Figure 12
d. Remove the O-ring plug socket and O-ring mounting tool.
e. Repeat Steps a-d for all four O-rings of the CNAP® controller and the two O-rings of the cable
port on the NIBP100D CNAP® Monitor 500.
f.
Lubricate all O-ring bushings as described in Section 1.
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP100D O-Ring Kit | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 6.24.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
NON-INVASIVE SMALL ANIMAL TAIL BLOOD PRESSURE SYSTEMS
NIBP250 Blood Pressure Amplifier
NIBP200A Blood Pressure System
NIBP Amplifiers with built-in pump automatically inflate the tail cuff to occlude the vessel in the tail of a rat or
similar small animal, and then slowly deflate the cuff when the inflation point is reached, providing a linear drop
in pressure. A single control starts both the inflation and deflation cycles, making the system very operatorfriendly. Amplifiers have two analog outputs for pressure and pulse waveforms, plus gain adjustment to amplify
or attenuate the pulse signal. Systolic, diastolic, and mean BP values.
NIBP250 Touchscreen LCD controls and displays data for local analysis and storage. Use as a standalone system or interface to BIOPAC or third-party A/D hardware. USB 1.1 compatible flash memory
port and SD card slot.
• NIBP200A Amplifier for use with Tail Cuff Sensor.
Systems include:
• Amplifier order NIBP250 or NIBP200A
• One tail cuff sensor (request size):
RXTCUFSENSOR9.5 = 9.5 mm, 100-220 g
RXTCUFSENSOR11 = 11 mm, 200-280 g
RXTCUFSENSOR13 = 13 mm, 250-350 g
• One small animal restrainer:
RXRESTRAINER-MICE, 10-25 g (mice)
RXRESTRAINER-S, 70-150 g (small rat)
RXRESTRAINER-M, 150-200 g (medium rat)
RXRESTRAINER-L, 250-350 g (large rat)
• Optional MRI-conditional sensors available – add to an existing NIBP200A system
RXCUFSEN9.5-MRI = 9.5 mm, 100-220 g
RXCUFSEN11-MRI = 11 mm, 200-280 g
RXCUFSEN13-MRI = 13 mm, 250-350 g
MRI Use:
MR Conditional
•
Condition:
Animal use only; tested to MR field strength 3T
RXTCUFSENSOR 9.5/11/13 Components—MRI chamber room components only:
Cable: Dual Fiber Optical Cable
Sensor Housing: Delrin®
Air Line: Tygon® Tubing
SensorType: Infrared
Sensor Tubing: Latex
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP Systems | Page 1 - 10
Updated: 4.28.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
•
•
•
•
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Analog outputs: pressure 0-3 V DC, Pulse 0-4 V DC
Output cables: pressure cable and pulse cable
Interface cables: to BIOPAC or third-party A/D hardware
User’s Manual
Optional Tail Heater: TAILHEATA 110 V or TAILHEATB 220 V
SPECIFICATIONS
Cut-off Pressure Range:
Pressure Accuracy:
Pressure Sensitivity:
Pressure Signal output:
Pulse Gain Levels:
Pulse Signal Output:
Pulse Display:
LCD Display:
User Interface:
Analog outputs:
Triggers:
Power Supply:
100 – 300 mmHg (adjustable by 1mmHg steps)
300 mmHg Full Scale 1%
0.1 mmHg
300 mmHg/3 Volt DC
x1, x2, x4, x5, x8, x16, x32 (adjustable)
0 – 4 Volt DC
Pulse intensity is displayed on A2, derived from plethysmographic measure The
tail sensor detects blood flow and pulse intensity is increased or decreased,
depending on the flow ratio.
7” 800 x 480 TFT (NIBP250)
Resistive Touch Panel (NIBP250)
Two BNC connectors for uncalibrated pressure and pulse signals
Two BNC connectors for TTL Compatible trigger in and out signals
12 Volt 2 Amp – External
NIBP200A/NIBP250 SYSTEM CONNECTIONS
NIBP200A Front Panel
NIBP200A Rear Panel
1. Connect the CBL150-PRE cable (or CBL35-PRE cable for MP36/35 hardware).
a. BNC to the PRESSURE output on the back panel of the unit.
b. Other end to A1 on the front of the UIM100C (or CH 1 of the MP36/35 unit).
2. Connect the CBL150-PLS cable (or CBL35-PLS for MP36/35 hardware).
a. BNC to the PULSE output on the back panel of the unit.
b. Other end to A2 on the front of the UIM100C unit (or CH 2 of the MP36/35 unit).
3. Connect the IRSENSOR.
a. Black cord to the sensor input on the front panel of the NIBP200A (back panel on NIBP250).
b. Tubing in the cuff on the front panel of the NIBP200A (back panel on NIBP250).
4. Connect the power.
a. AC300 adapter to the 12 V DC input on the back panel of the NIBP200A.
b. AC300 to Mains power.
5. Switch the POWER on.
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP Systems | Page 2 - 10
Updated: 4.28.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
ANIMAL PREPARATION
Optional Heating Chamber
Restrainer Animal Holders
Tail Cuff/Sensor
1. Turn the Animal Heating Chamber on.
2. Set the temperature value (press and hold P.Set and then press the up or
down arrow to reach the desired value).
• For accurate noninvasive blood pressure measurement, the animal or
its tail should be warmed to 32° C.
3. Press the Heater button to start heating to the selected temperature value.
4. Place the animal inside the RESTRAINER “Animal Holder” (select the suitable size for the animal
volume).
• Leave the tail outside.
• Adjust the length to obtain a position where the animal has limited movement.
5. Place the RESTRAINER (with the animal) in the heating section of the Animal Heating Chamber.
6. Wait approximately 30 minutes for the animal to reach the selected temperature.
7. Remove the RESTRAINER from the Animal Heating Chamber.
8. Connect the IRSENSOR to the tail of the animal inside the RESTRAINER.
9. Check if the sensor just fits to the tail. The sensor should be between the mid point of tail and tail end
(spinal column). To achieve this, a suitable sensor should be selected.
10. Wait for the animal to relax and become inactive before starting measurements.
TIP
Before starting the experiment, to condition the animal, put the animal inside the holder several
times a day and repeat the heating each time.
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP Systems | Page 3 - 10
Updated: 4.28.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SOFTWARE SETUP (AcqKnowledge 4.1 and higher)
1. Launch AcqKnowledge 4.x.
2. Select the “Create/Record a new experiment” option.
3. Select “MP150 > Set Up Data Acquisition > Channels > “Add New Module...”
a. From the new module list, select UIM100C-A1 (or whichever channel CBL150-PRE pressure
cable is connected to) and click “Add.”
b. From the UIM100C Transducer list, select “NIBP200A – Small Animal Tail BP, Pressure” or
“NIBP250 – Small Animal Tail BP, Pressure” and click OK.
c. Click “Calibrate” in the resulting Calibration dialog.
4. Repeat “Add New Module…” portion of Step 3.
a. From the new module list, select UIM100C-A2 (or whichever channel CBL150-PLS pulse cable
is connected to) and click “Add.”
b. From the UIM100C Transducer list, select “NIBP200A – Small Animal Tail BP, Pulse” or
“NIBP250 – Small Animal Tail, Pulse” and click OK.
SOFTWARE SETUP (AcqKnowledge 4.0 and earlier)
1. Launch the BIOPAC software.
2. Choose “MP menu > Set up Channels.”
or
3. Enable analog inputs A1 and A2 and select the Acquire, Plot and Value options.
• If desired, enter channel Labels: A1 Pressure and A2 Pulse.
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP Systems | Page 4 - 10
Updated: 4.28.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
4. Calibrate for the pressure measurement of IRSENSOR.
a. Select A1 (Pressure) and click Setup and establish these settings:
Input volts
Scale (Map) value
Cal 1
0
0
Cal 2
1
100
Units Label:
mmHg
The scaling must be adjusted as the cut-off
pressure switch settings are changed. If the
pressure switch is set to 300 mmHg, then the
settings should be:
Input volts
Scale (Map) value
Cal 1
0
0
Cal 2
3
300
Units Label:
mmHg
b. Click OK as needed to close out of A1 setup.
5. Calibrate for the pulse measurement of IRSENSOR.
a. Ensure that the tail is not inside the IRSENSOR and it is empty, and the sensor resides freely.
b. Select A2 (Pulse) and click Setup and establish these settings:
Input volts
Scale (Map) value
Cal 1
0
0
Cal 2
1
4
Units Label:
Volts
c. Click OK as needed to close out of A2 setup and the Setup Channels dialog.
6. Choose “MP menu > Set up Acquisition” and establish the following settings:
Mode = Record and Append to Memory
Sample Rate = 200 samples/second
Total Length = 24 seconds
Repeat = every 3 seconds for 10 times
7. Exit Set up Acquisition dialog.
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP Systems | Page 5 - 10
Updated: 4.28.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
8. Choose “MP menu > Setup Trigger” and establish the following settings:
Trigger = CH 1, Pos Edge
Trigger Level = 0.33 Volts
(based on 1 V ≈ 100 mmHg)
Delay = 0 samples
9. Close out of Triggering dialog.
SOFTWARE SETUP for AcqKnowledge 4.x or BSL 4.x with MP3x Hardware
1. Launch the software.
2. Select the “Create/Record a new experiment” option.
3. If necessary, choose “MP3x > Set up Data Acquisition > Channels.”
4. Enable analog inputs CH1 and CH2 and select the Acquire, Plot and Value options.
5. Select CH1 and click “Setup.”.
6. Click “New Channel Preset,” enter “NIBP200A-Pressure” and click OK.
7. Establish the following settings:
• Channel Preset = NIBP200A-Pressure
• Channel Label = CUFF PRESSURE
• Gain = x10
• Input Coupling = DC
• Filter = 1
• Type = Low Pass
• Frequency = 30
• Q = 0.5
8. Calibrate for the pressure measurement of IRSENSOR.
a. Click “Scaling” button and establish the following settings:
Map values
Cal1 = 0
Cal2 = 100
Units label = mmHg
b. Click the Cal 1 button.
c. Add “333” to the Cal 1 Input value, and enter the result in
Cal 2 Input value (Cal 2 = Cal 1 + 333)
d. Click OK as needed to exit the CH1 “Scaling” and Input
“Channel” setup dialogs.
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP Systems | Page 6 - 10
Updated: 4.28.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
9. Select CH2 and click “Setup.”
10. Click “New Channel Preset,” enter “NIBP200A-Tail Pulse” and click OK.
11. Establish the following settings:
• Channel Preset = NIBP200A-Tail Pulse
• Channel Label = TAIL PULSE
• Gain = x10
• Input Coupling = DC
• Filter = 1
• Type = Low Pass
• Frequency = 50
• Q = 0.5
12. Calibrate for the pulse measurement of IRSENSOR.
a. Ensure that the tail is not inside the IRSENSOR, and
that the sensor resides freely.
b. Click “Scaling” button and establish the following
settings:
Map values
Cal 1 = 0
Cal 2 = 1000
Units label = mV
c. Click the Cal 1 button.
d. Add “333” to the Cal 1 Input value and enter the result
in Cal 2 Input value (Cal 2 = Cal 1 + 333)
e. Click OK as needed to exit the CH2 “Scaling” and “Input Channel” setup dialogs.
13. Choose “MP3x > Set Up Data Acquisition > Length/Rate” and establish the following settings:
• Mode = Record and Append using Memory
• Sample Rate = 200 samples/second
• Acquisition Length = 24 seconds
• Repeat = every 3 seconds for 10 times
14. Choose “Trigger” and establish the following settings.
Trigger = CH 1, Pos Edge
Trigger Level = 30 mmHg
15. Exit the Data Acquisition
Settings dialog.
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP Systems | Page 7 - 10
Updated: 4.28.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
RECORDING
1. Confirm that the animal is ready and that the
IRSENSOR is attached to the tail.
2. Click “Start” in the BIOPAC software window.
3. Press START button on the front panel of NIBP200A.
• IRSENSOR will pump up the Cuff automatically.
• When the Cuff Pressure on A1 reaches 30 mmHg,
the cuff pressure and tail pulse signals will be
generated.
• The recording will stop automatically after 24
seconds.
4. Press START to continue with the next measurement
and repeat as necessary.
5. Choose File > Save or Save as when done.
TIP
A generally accepted application is that for each animal, 10 measurements are recorded and
mean values are calculated. In the append mode, 10 consecutive measurements can be made
in the same file.
NIBP200A ANALYSIS
Calculation of Systolic, Diastolic and Mean.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click the Calculation Label.
Select from the list Max, Min, Mean for three different Labels.
Select Channel 1 as channel option.
Select cursor ‘I’ from the cursor option on the bottom right of the screen.
On the graphical display, starting from the point of first pulse, select an area to the maximum.
Review the results for Max (Systolic), Min (Diastolic), and Mean measurements.
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP Systems | Page 8 - 10
Updated: 4.28.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Calculation of BPM Heart
1. Set a measurement for BPM.
2. Use the I-beam cursor to select the maximum points of the peaks of the CH2 pulse waveform.
3. Review the results for BPM (Heart Rate value) for each peak.
NIBP250 QUICK GUIDE
PREPARE
- With unit turned off, attach the sensor and cuff connectors.
- Turn on unit and wait for the Main Screen to appear.
- Prepare the animal and attach sensor-cuff to tail.
ACQUIRE
- When preparation is complete: Press the “Start” button on the Main Screen. The button label changes to “Stop”
and you can halt the acquisition at any time.
- When the acquisition starts, the unit automatically closes the leakage valve and begins inflating the cuff.
- After pressure reaches the maximum level, the pump stops and opens the leakage valve to release the pressure.
- After the pressure is fully released, the acquisition stops.
NIBP250 ANALYSIS
The NIBP250’s automated peak detection system marks the peak of each pulse with a white cross, and is enabled
by selecting the "Peak by peak" option on the Main Screen. This feature makes it easier to identify the individual
pulses. To determine the systolic and diastolic values:
1. Select the "Peak by peak" box on the main screen.
2. Use the right (or left) cursor button to locate the first pulse's white cross and press the "Systolic" button.
(You may also place the cursor using the touch screen.) The system will record and display the systolic
blood pressure value.
3. Use the cursor button (or touch screen) to move to the pulse with the highest peak and then press the
"Diastolic" button. The system will record and display the diastolic blood pressure value..
You may change your cursor peak positions at anytime during the analysis.
After measurement is complete, press the Save button under “Results.” An automatically generated result code
will be displayed at the top of the results section.
For analysis in BIOPAC AcqKnowledge or BSL PRO software, see previous page for NIBP200A.
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP Systems | Page 9 - 10
Updated: 4.28.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SAVE RESULTS
- Previously saved results can be displayed by pressing the “Load” button under “Results.”
- Placing the cursor on a desired measurement and pressing OK will load the recorded pressure, pulse curves and
previously calculated results.
- After loading is complete, you can easily evaluate the results and re-analyze any measurements.
TURN OFF
- Before turning off the unit, be sure that the current measurement was saved.
- Power off the unit by switching the power button on the back
TROUBLESHOOTING
Tail Pulse signals are not regular.
• The animal may be under stress, resulting in excessive tail movement. Remove the animal from the
RESTRAINER holder until it calms down before continuing with the experiment.
• The tail may not be sufficiently warmed or cooled down. Put the animal in the Tail Heater Chamber
and repeat the heating process. Make sure the tail temperature is 32° C.
• Tail Cuff sizing may be incorrect. Check Table 5 on the following page for sizing descriptions.
• Tail Cuff Sensor position may be incorrect. Try re-attaching the sensor in a different location on the
tail. The optimal location is between the mid-point of tail and base of tail (spinal column).
Compressor is working continuously.
• Immediately turn off the NIBP system.
• Remove the Tubing from the Cuff connector on the panel of NIBP system
• Turn the system back on.
• Close the air outlet by pressing the finger on the Cuff output and press the “Start” button. The
compressor will work for a few seconds and stop (please inform BIOPAC if the Compressor does not
stop). The pressure chart should be viewable on the screen.
• If the Compressor stops automatically, it means that the system is working normally.
There is leakage in the tubing connections and Cuff of the IRSENSOR.
• Make sure the tubing is securely attached.
BIOPAC Hardware | NIBP Systems | Page 10 - 10
Updated: 4.28.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
fNIR OPTICAL BRAIN IMAGING SYSTEMS
System Components
Image Control Device
Supported Channels
fNIR100B
1200
16
Supplied Sensor(s)
16 CH
Wireless
fNIRSoft Analysis
Software
COBI Control Device
Software
no
fNIR100A-W
1200W
4
2 CH or
4-CH*
yes
fNIR200B
1200
16
Standard
Standard
yes
yes
Computer(s)
---
---
All-in-one
computer
Isolation Transformer
yes
n/a
yes
fNIR200-W
1200W
2
2 CH or
4-CH*
yes
Standard
pre-loaded
yes
pre-loaded
Surface Pro
3 + Docking
Station +
keyboard
yes
System Carrier
---
---
Caddy
Caddy
Sensor Extension cables
---
---
2
--
16 CH
no
Standard
pre-loaded
yes
pre-loaded
fNIR300B
1200
16
16 CH
no
Standard
pre-loaded
yes
pre-loaded
fNIR400A
1200
16
16 CH +
Phantom**
no
Pro
pre-loaded
yes
pre-loaded
2 computers: 2 computers:
All-in-one +
All-in-one +
laptop
laptop
yes
Pole cart
with shelf
2
yes
Pole cart
with shelf
2
* Wireless systems ship with one sensor, specifically pediatric 2-channel sensor (RX-FNIR-PED) or adult 4-
channel split sensor (RXFNIR-4); 2-CH and 4-CH sensors are compatible with Imager 1100 or greater.
** Phantom sensor is compatible with all Imager 1100 Systems or greater – order as fNIR-PHANTOM.
fNIR Computer Requirements
CPU:
Memory:
Operating System:
For fNIR hardware interface:
For Network interface:
Warranty:
2 GHz or better processor, recommended quad-core.
Minimum system RAM of 1 GB, recommended 2 GB or more.
Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP
USB 2.0 ports, National Instrument NIDAQmx driver
Wireless or LAN Network adapter
Sensors: 3-month limited; Unit: 12-month
fNIR functional near infrared optical imaging systems measure oxygen level changes in the prefrontal cortex of
human subjects. Each fNIR system provides real-time monitoring of tissue oxygenation in the brain as subjects
take tests, perform tasks, or receive stimulation and allows researchers to quantitatively assess brain functions—
such as attention, memory, planning, and problem solving—while individuals perform cognitive tasks. The fNIR
device provides relative change in hemoglobin levels, calculated using
a modified Beer-Lambert law.
Subjects wear an fNIR sensor (IR light sources and detectors mounted
in a flexible band) on the forehead that detects oxygen levels in the
prefrontal cortex and provides real-time values for oxy-hemoglobin
and deoxygenated hemoglobin. It provides a continuous and real-time
display of the oxygen changes as the subject performs different tasks.
The subject can sit in front of a computer and take a test or perform
mobile tasks. It integrates with stimulus presentation systems and
BIOPAC’s virtual reality products.
The powerful fNIR spectroscopy imaging tool measures NIR light absorbance in blood of hemoglobin with and
without oxygen and provides information about ongoing brain activity similar to functional MRI studies. It
eliminates many of the drawbacks of fMRI and provides a safe, affordable, noninvasive solution for cognitive
function assessment. The technology empowers researchers by providing greater flexibility for study design,
including working within complex lab environments and operating in non-traditional lab locations for field
studies.
The fNIR device can produce digital TTL output signal through the BNC output port to synchronize any external
device with data acquisition events.
BIOPAC Hardware | fNIR SYSTEMS | Page 1 - 4
Updated: 7.24.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
fNIR systems are suitable for a wide range of applications.

Human Performance Assessment

Virtual Reality

Depth of Anesthesia Monitoring

Neurorehabilitation

Pain Assessment

Autism

Brain Computer Interface

Credibility Assessment (lie detection)
fNIR Systems
fNIR100B Functional Near Infrared Brain Imaging System
The fNIR100B is a stand-alone functional brain imaging system that includes a control unit and sensor for
continuous fNIR spectroscopy (NIRS). The device provides 16 channels of information through 4 sources and
10 detectors. The fNIR100B System includes software to view the data in real time and save it for post
acquisition analysis.
The fNIR data combines with other physiological variables such as ECG, respiration, cardiac output, blood
pressure, electrodermal activity and stimulus response markers. AcqKnowledge software provides automated
analysis tools for event related potentials and ensemble averaging. Combining the fNIR data with the other
physiological signals provides researchers with a detailed subject assessment
fNIR100A-W Wireless Optical Brain Imaging System
fNIR100A-W is a wireless, stand-alone 2-channel fNIR functional brain imaging systems include a control
unit and choice of sensor* for continuous fNIR spectroscopy (NIRS), COBI control unit software and
fNIRSOFT Standard analysis software to view the data in real time and perform post acquisition analysis.
fNIR200-W Wireless Optical Brain Imaging System
fNIR200-W is a complete data collection solution for continuous NIR spectroscopy (NIRS); fNIR functional
near infrared optical imaging technology measures hemodynamic response and neural activity in the
prefrontal cortex.
The fNIR200-W System includes a wireless control device (Imager 1200W) and choice of sensor*, Microsoft
Surface Pro 3 tablet with Docking Station and keyboard, pre-loaded COBI control device software,
fNIRSOFT (fS) Standard Edition analysis software, and a small fanny pack to carry the Imager.
* Wireless fNIR units accept the 2-CH Pediatric Sensor (RXFNIR-PED) or the 4-CH Adult Sensor
(RXFNIR4) – system includes one sensor, specify preference when ordering.
fNIR200B Data Collection Solution
fNIR200B is a complete data collection solution for functional near infrared (fNIR) studies; fNIR optical
imaging technology measures hemodynamic response and neural activity in the prefrontal cortex.
• The fNIR200B System includes a control device and 16-channel sensor transducer for continuous NIR
spectroscopy (NIRS), all-in-one computer, pre-loaded COBI control device software, fNIRSOFT (fS)
Standard Edition analysis software, and a caddy that supports the system.
fNIR300B Data & Stimulation System
The fNIR300 optical brain imaging data collection and stimulation solution includes an fNIR control device
and 16-channel sensor transducer for continuous NIR spectroscopy (NIRS), two all-in-one computers, preloaded COBI control device software, fNIRSOFT (fS) Standard Edition analysis software, and a presentation
cart that supports all components. Use one computer for running the fNIR100 system and the other computer
as the subject monitor for the stimulus presentation system.
fNIR400A Optical Brain Imaging Station
The fNIR400A data collection and stimulation solution includes the functional brain imaging device, 16channel sensor and Phantom sensor, COBI control device software and fNIRSOFT Professional Edition
analysis software plus a zero footprint all-in-one computer and a laptop computer with a presentation pole cart
that supports both computers, the fNIR Control Device, and the Isolation Transformer. Use one computer for
running the fNIR100 system and the other computer as the subject monitor for a stimulus presentation system.
BIOPAC Hardware | fNIR SYSTEMS | Page 2 - 4
Updated: 7.24.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
fNIR Sensors
fNIR-Phantom Sensor
This is a phantom for the 16-channel fNIR sensor used with the fNIR 1200
imager. The phantom sensor material mimics optical properties of brain
tissue, and it is used to test the system to make sure that the fNIR sensor is
detecting correctly.
• The phantom is included with the fNIR400A System and can be added
to fNIR100B, fNIR200B, or fNIR300B Systems.
See the fNIR COBI Manual for details on how to run a Self-Check to test signal levels at each channel and
generate a report that indicates performance on each channel.
RXfNIRA Sensor Replacement
This 16-channel forehead sensor for functional near infrared optical brain
imaging is designed for the fNIR 1200 Imager.
• 10 photo-detectors: silicon photodiode with integrated trans-impedance
preamp
• 4 photo-emitters: 730 nm/850 nm dual wave-length LED
• inter-optode distance: 25 mm
• comfortable to wear for prolonged periods
• silicone rubber over-molded
• Interface cable required: RX-fNIR-SEN-CABLE (one cable is included with each fNIR system)
RX-fNIR-SEN-CABLE Sensor Cable
This cable connects an RXFNIRA 16-channel
sensor pad to an fNIR Imager unit. The durable
cable minimizes the expense of maintaining
multiple sensors for variety and replacement.
fNIR Systems include one sensor cable. fNIR
cable connection:
RXfNIR-PED Pediatric Sensor Add-On
This pediataric-sized functional near infrared
optical brain imaging sensor can be used with the
fNIR Imager 1200 or fNIR Imager 1200W.
• 2 photo-detectors: silicon photodiode with integrated trans-impedance preamp
• 1 photo-emitters: 730 nm/850 nm dual wave-length LED
• inter-optode distance: 20 mm
• silicone rubber over-molded
• comfortable to wear for prolonged periods
• included in fNIR100W Wireless 2-CH fNIR System
• compatible with all BIOPAC fNIR Systems
RXfNIR-4 Adult 4-Channel Sensor
This adult fNIR optical imaging sensor provides four channels split into two
pieces; each piece contains two channels (2 detectors, 1 emitter, 25 mm interoptode distance). The sensor is compatible with the wireless imager
(fNIR1200W) or the 16-channel imager (fNIR1200) and can be added to any
BIOPAC fNIR system.
BIOPAC Hardware | fNIR SYSTEMS | Page 3 - 4
Updated: 7.24.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
fNIR Sensor Cleaning Instructions
Use an alcohol swab to gently wipe the surface of the fNIR sensor.
fNIR Software
fNIRSOFT-STD – fNIR Software Standard Edition
fNIRSOFT (fS) is a stand-alone software package designed to process, analyze and visualize functional near
infrared (fNIR) spectroscopy signals through a graphical user interface and/or scripting (for automation).
fNIR Software Standard Edition offers the following functionality:
• Temporal visualization of fNIR Data
• Spatial visualization of fNIR Data
• Customizable display graphs by data type
• Through a wizard style tool, select and export
(voxel/channel/wavelength), sensor
time-series data in various formats
geometry, time period and multiple color
• Save/Send data in native binary format
palettes
• Through a wizard style tool, esaily
• User interface for time series data analysis
customizible template, import various types of
text data
• Inspect and manage optodes/channels/time
periods visually
• Load/share data in native binary format
• Automated and user-selectable co• fS Scripting Language (functional and dataregistration of all event marker information
oriented)
• Event related and epoch analysis with
• Editor with syntax highlighting and quick
customizable block definitions through easy
access tools for command list and run toolbar
to use GUI
• History of commands and log operations in
• Customizable hemodynamic response
command pane (can save for future reference)
calculation applying Modified Beer Lambert
• Store procedures in script files (re-apply
Law (MBLL) for oxy-Hb, deoxy-Hb, oxy
procedures to previously saved data blocks)
and total Hb
• Basic Noise reduction, pre-processing
(Finite Impulse Response Filter Design and
application) through GUI
fNIRSOFT-PRO – fNIR Software Professional Edition
fNIRSOFT (fS) Professional Edition analysis software includes all of the Standard Edition analysis tools
plus extended functionality with these features:
• Automated signal quality inspection for
• Spatial visualization of fNIR Data
elimination of saturated and problematic
• Apply Temporal and Spatial Processing
channels through GUI
actions (Averaging/Feature Extraction/Signal
Conditioning) through GUI
• Advanced signal processing algorithms for
feature extraction
• Apply Cell-by-cell Processing actions
(Averaging/Signal Conditioning) through GUI
• Motion artifact removal algorithms
• Left/right/dorsal view with thresholding,
• Apply common statistical comparison and
animation (temporal changes) or
correlation through GUI
group/subject/condition average
• Apply advanced Modified Beer Lambert Law
(MBLL) oxygenation calculation through GUI
• Export visualization (time-based for
animation, or threshold based for
evaluation)
fNIRSOFT Professional Edition is included in fNIR400A Systems and can be added to other fNIR Systems.
To upgrade installed fNIRSOFT Standard Edition software to Professional Edition, see fNIRSOFT-PRO-U.
BIOPAC Hardware | fNIR SYSTEMS | Page 4 - 4
Updated: 7.24.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
B-ALERT WIRELESS EEG HEADSET SYSTEMS
B-Alert Wireless EEG 9-Channel System – B-ALERT110-W
B-Alert Wireless EEG with AcqKnowledge plus Cognitive State Software – B-Alert110-CS-W
B-Alert Cognitive State Software – B-ALERT-SFT-W (add-on software)
B-Alert Accessories, see page 3
B-ALERT WIRELESS EEG 9-CHANNEL SYSTEM
This complete system includes the B-Alert X10 for wireless acquisition of 9 channels of high fidelity EEG plus
ECG, head movement & position, AcqKnowledge software with powerful analysis tools, including automated
scoring and reporting options, and B-Alert Cognitive State software.
• Set up in less than 5 minutes
•
Comfortable and nonintrusive—low profile fits comfortably under headgear
•
Data quality monitoring and feedback simplifies acquisition for non-technical personnel
•
Cognitive state classification for engagement, confusion/distraction, drowsiness, workload and stress
•
Patented real-time artifact decontamination
Standard Signals
9 mono-polar EEG with impedance
2-lead ECG
Heart rate
Head movement
PSD by channel
Optional signals
Differential signals for B-Alert and workload
B-ALERT X10 WIRELESS SYSTEMS
The B-Alert X10 mobile-wireless EEG system delivers real-time measurements for a variety of research and
engineering applications, including closed-loop performance monitoring and simulation training; HCI design
assessment; situational awareness and team dynamics monitoring; tools for productivity and training
enhancement; and fatigue management.
B-ALERT X10 SETUP OVERVIEW
• For step-by-step direction, request B-Alert X10 User Training Videos from support@biopac.com.
BIOPAC Hardware | B-Alert | Page 1 - 4
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
OVERVIEW
1. Prepare the B-Alert System.
2. Fill the foam sensors.
3. Apply X10 System to Participant.
4. Applying Mastoid and ECG Sensors.
5. Start Data Collection.
6. Remove X10 from Participant.
7. Clean X10 System.
PLUS—CLASSIFY COGNITIVE STATES
This system includes the B-Alert Cognitive State software with proprietary metrics for real-time monitoring of
subject fatigue, stress, confusion, engagement and workload (classify data from B-Alert Wireless EEG systems).
The GUI intuitively represents both the raw and processed data for easy understanding by even the untrained user
and up to six systems can run simultaneously on a single PC—Windows 7/XP OS only.
To facilitate both real-time and offline analysis, the B-Alert Athena gauges are fully customizable to fit the
requirements of the user. In the standard format (shown below), the easy-to-read dashboard gauges (Top Left) and
time series (Bottom) windows present B-Alert's highly validated second by second metrics: Engagement,
Workload and Drowsiness (along with Heart Rate). Heat maps (Top Right) display EEG power spectral densities
(PSD) in both spatial and temporal maps for the traditional Hz bands (Beta, Alpha, Theta, Sigma).
B-Alert Wireless EEG bio-metrics are
normalized to an individual subject using
5-minutes of baseline data from three
distinct tasks with the sleep onset class
predicted from the baseline PSD values. A
probability-of-fit is then generated for
each of the four classes for each epoch
with the sum of the probabilities across the
four classes equaling 1.0 (e.g., 0.45 high
engagement, 0.30 low engagement, 0.20
distraction and 0.05 sleep onset).
Cognitive State for a given second
represents the class with the greatest
probability. B-Alert cognitive state metrics
are derived for each one-second epoch
using 1 Hz power spectra densities (PSD)
bins from differential sites FzPO and
CzPO in a four-class quadratic
discriminant function analysis (DFA) that
is fitted to the individual’s unique EEG
patterns. The table briefly describes each
baseline task and the B-Alert classification.
B-ALERT COGNITIVE STATE SOFTWARE (ADD-ON, SOFTWARE ONLY)
Classify Cognitive States with this analysis software add-on for B-Alert Systems (Windows 7/XP OS only)
BIOPAC Hardware | B-Alert | Page 2 - 4
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS:
Channels:
9 EEG with fixed gain referenced to linked mastoids; 1 auxiliary differential channel
with programmable gain
Sampling rate:
256 samples/second
Dynamic range:
Fixed gain ± 1,000 µV
Resolution:
16 bit, CMRR 105 dB
Bandpass characteristics:
0.1 Hz and 65Hz (at 3dB attenuation)
Noise:
~ +1.5 µV @ 10 Hz and 50 kO impedance
Head movement/position:
Angles obtained with 3D 12-bit accelerometer
RF Band:
2.4 to 2.48 GHz (ISM band)
Transmission mode:
Bi-Directional with B-Alert BT – USB dongle
Data transmission range:
~ 10 meters, line of sight with onboard antenna
Transmission power:
~ 1 mW
System power
consumption:
~ 40 mA @ 3.7 V
Battery capacity:
Standard 2 x Li-ION batteries - 500 mAH, 12-hours of continuous use
Optional 4 x Li-ION
batteries:
1000 mAH, 24-hours of continuous use
Battery charging:
Internally charged with custom cable and USB wall charger
On-line impedance
monitoring:
Initiated by host computer using bi-directional link
Head unit dimensions:
Size 13 cm (L) x 6 cm (W) x 2.5 cm (H); Weight 110 g with standard battery
User control:
On/Off
Indicator LEDs:
Green - wireless synced, Red – on but not synced
Software Compatibility:
Windows 7 and XP, PC with 2.0 GHz or higher processor 1 GB of RAM
Sensor Headset & Accessories
Sensor sites Fz, F3, F4, Cz, C3, C4, POz, P3, P4
Sensor strips Streamline – medium; Standard – small, medium and large
Medium = Nasium to Inion ~36 cm
Electrode cream” Highly conductive, electrolytes and preservatives in non-ionic, hypoallergenic base, buffered to
skin pH
Windows 7 or XP OS only.
B-ALERT ACCESSORIES
X10 Sensor Strips
Sensors are sized for placement between Nasium and Inion. Sensor strips are typically good for 40 recordings,
depending on care during use and cleaning. Worn out strips should be replaced to ensure good data quality. Strip
warranty is 180 days.
Strip 9 Sensor & replacement Neoprene
X10-SENSOR-S
X10 SENSOR-M
small
medium
32.0-34.5 cm
> 34.5 cm
(approx. 12.6-13.6")
Note: Small and Medium sensors should cover 99% of subjects, but a large is available by request in
the very rare cases it is needed.
BIOPAC Hardware | B-Alert | Page 3 - 4
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Disposable Study Kits
This disposable study kit for the B-Alert X10 Wireless EEG System contains:
•
one sensor strip
•
one Neoprene sensor strap with Velcro
•
gel and pads for 25 studies
•
disposable electrodes (for mastoid) for 25 studies
RXB-ALERT-KIT-S small
32.0-34.5 cm (approx. 12.6-13.6”)
RXB-ALERT-KIT-M medium
> 34.5 cm
BIOPAC Hardware | B-Alert | Page 4 - 4
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
CBLX10 – B-ALERT X10 TO UIM100C ANALOG OUT
Use the CBLX10 to connect the analog output of the UIM100C for MP150 Systems to the ECG input of an ABM
B-Alert X10 headset. The cable allows for the injection of signals that may be used to align data recordings
between the two independent units. CBLX10 provides both signal attenuation and isolation between the MP150
unit and the B-Alert headset.
This cable is required in order to use the B-Alert X10 with the “Master Sync Device” mode available
in AcqKnowledge 4.3 or above.
Cable length is 2 m from case to UIM100C connection and 2 m from case to B-Alert connection.
To connect the CBLX10:
1. Plug the black connector into an Analog Output on the UIM100C module connected to the MP150.
2. Plug the blue connector into the 2-pin (ECG) input on the top of the B-Alert unit.
3. In AcqKnowledge, choose “MP150 > Set Up Data Acquisition > Set Up Linked Acquisitions” and select
“Use the master synchronization” as the synchronization method to pair and synchronize data obtained
during linked MP150 and B-Alert X10 acquisitions. This is the only configuration where the “Master
Sync Device” radio button is active.
IMPORTANT: About 10-12 seconds after starting a linked MP150/B-Alert X10 acquisition, disconnect the
CBLX10 from the B-Alert headset to avoid introducing extraneous noise into the B-Alert signal being plotted on
the screen.
See the AcqKnowledge 4 Software Guide and the Tutorial video for a detailed explanation of Linked
Acquisitions.
BIOPAC Hardware | CBLX10 | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 2.13.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
EPOCH SYSTEMS
EPOCH-MSE-SYS 2-Channel Wireless EEG System for Mouse
EPOCH-RAT-SYS 2-Channel Wireless EEG System for Rat
These wireless EEG systems for mice and rats collect two channels of long-term wireless EEG/neural signals. To
record, the animal's cage is simply placed on top of the receiver tray with the implanted animal inside of the cage.
EEG data from the sensor is telemetered to the receiving tray and then sent to the data acquisition system.
Complete system includes a receiver tray, two 2-channel implantable EEG sensor transmitters, and interface
cables (2 x CBL102) to collect data from a mouse or rat housed in an industry standard home cage. The Epoch
EEG Transmitter amplifies and transmits two channels of high-fidelity EEG data. Implants are small enough to be
implanted into mice as young as P21. The receiver tray has BNC connections that easily connect to a BIOPAC
MP150 data acquisition system (via the UIM100C) or third-party devices capable of accepting signals within the
±5 V range.
Sensors are shipped with the default transmitter Gain setting; other Gain settings are available if requested before
order is placed. AcqKnowledge software includes the scale settings for each transmitter Gain option.
Neural Implant Options
Typical Use
Gain
Settings
EEG, ECoG, LFP - default
2000x
±1.0 mV range, 1.0 mVpp in = 2 V out
Status-Epilepticus
800x
±2.5 mV range, 2.5 mVpp in = 2 V out
When used with an MP Research System, use the power of AcqKnowledge software’s automation and scoring
tools to identify seizures, predefine and control recording protocols, or set triggers based on external events
(dosing, light changes, etc.). After recording, use automated EEG analysis routines to quickly score multiple
channels of EEG data simultaneously. Derive frequency bands, complete a Frequency analysis, look at Alpha
RMS, etc., all with guided automated routines.
For more options, add SleepSign (SSA100W) for complete sleep data analysis or use Camera Systems
(CAMSYS4 or 8) to monitor and record protocols and animal behavior. Recorded video will be time
synchronized to the physiological signals in AcqKnowledge for easy investigation of key areas of interest.
BIOPAC Hardware | EPOCH Systems | Page 1 - 4
Updated: 6.5.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
Implantable EEG Sensors
Sensors require an EPOCH-MSE-SYS or EPOCH-RAT-SYS to operate. Battery options can each be used for rat
or mouse if footprint and weight dimensions suit the animal; mouse should typically be larger than P21. Teflon
insulated platinum electrode wires are shipped at 10 cm and can be truncated to desired length.
EPOCH-T2
Two-channel transmitter with 2 month battery life
EPOCH-T6
Two-channel transmitter with 6 month battery life
EPOCH-ACTI Epoch Sensor Activation Utility
This is an activation and test utility for Epoch EEG sensors. The sensors are typically shipped from the factory
with the battery running. The utility allows users to start the battery when they are ready to use the sensor.
Specifications
Implant Weight:
2 month: 2.3 g
6 month: 4 g
EEG Sensor Footprint:
2 month: 7 mm x 9 mm
6 month: 7 mm x 12 mm
Volume:
2 month: 0.756 cubic cm
6 month: 1.344 cubic cm
Electrode Wire Length:
Default 10 cm (truncate to desired length; custom longer lengths
available upon request)
Electrode Wire Material:
Teflon insulated platinum material
Implant Material:
Medical Grade Epoxy
System Gain Options:
2000x – (±1.0 mV range, 1.0 mV in = 2 V out)
800x – (±2.5 mV range, 2.5 mV in = 2 V out)
EEG Bandwidth:
0.1 – 100 Hz per channel
Input:
5 MΩ impedance
Operating Temperature:
30 – 45° C
Maximum Tray Dimensions
Mouse: 345 mm x 210 mm x 21 mm (13.6” x 8.25” x 1”)
Rat:
429 mm x 216 mm x 21 mm (16.9” x 8.5” x 1”)
Maximum Animal Size:
1 kg
Maximum Output:
4 V peak-to-peak
BIOPAC Hardware | EPOCH Systems | Page 2 - 4
Updated: 6.5.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Epoch System FAQs
1. Does the 2-channel EEG transmitter have the same battery life as the previous single channel system?
Yes, the 2-channel system has a 2 or 6 month battery life, similar to what was previously available for the 1channel system.
2. How many electrodes does the 2-channel transmitter use?
The 2-channel device has three electrodes - one ground/reference electrode, and the two recording electrodes.
The recording electrodes are measured with respect to the ground/reference electrode.
3. Is it possible to implant one or two electrodes in deep brain structures for recording LFPs? Can you explain
the procedure for that case?
Yes, we have several users that attach the implant to their stereotactic frame and insert the electrode(s) in the
hippocampus, and then glue the implant in place. A surgery manual that demonstrates implanting the Epoch
transmitter in deep brain structures is available by contacting BIOPAC Support.
4. Is one receiver tray required per transmitter/subject?
Yes. It is not possible to use one receiver tray with multiple animals in a single cage. The rat and mouse size
implants and trays are also completely interoperable. For example, if a customer wants to buy a rat size tray for
a large mouse setup, this is not a problem. Each tray provides an analog output between ±4 volts.
5. Is the battery life determined from the time a transmitter is activated?
Yes, the battery life starts when the transmitter is activated. Standard transmitters are activated during
manufacturing. An activator unit is available for researchers who want their transmitters shipped in an off state,
and then activate the transmitter themselves on-site. An activated transmitter cannot be deactivated and
reactivated at a later time. The transmitter must be activated within 6 months of shipment to ensure the full 2month or 6-month active battery-life.
6. Does each transmitter provide a maximum of two EEG, ECoG, or LFP signals?
Yes. It is possible to change the gain of the transmitter on a custom basis without degrading recording time.
This gain setting can be chosen on the order form provided to customers.
7. Are consultants available to provide surgical training to new Epoch customers when needed?
Yes, surgical training can be provided by staff that are well trained in the procedures by contacting BIOPAC.
8. Is it possible to have adjacent cages or should there be a minimum distance between cages, in order to prevent
crosstalk?
The receiver trays can be placed adjacent to each other without picking up any crosstalk.
9. Is it possible to reuse the implants?
The implants are technically reusable, though not recommended. Typically, a user explants the transmitter,
trims the leads, soaks the entire transmitter in acetone, rinses with H20, and lets it air dry.
10. I have a special treatment chamber. Is it compatible with the Epoch system?
Yes, as long as the animal is positioned over a receiver within 1" it will detect the transmitter. However, we
recommend using the Faraday enclosure at all times. Outer dimensions of the mouse Faraday enclosure are
14.25" x 12.5" x 12.5". (L x W x H) and rat Faraday cage are 20.25" x 14.5" x 14.5". For information about
custom Faraday enclosures, contact BIOPAC.
BIOPAC Hardware | EPOCH Systems | Page 3 - 4
Updated: 6.5.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
11. Will my data acquisition system work with the Epoch?
In general, yes. The output of the Epoch receiver is +/-4 V max. Most DAQs can handle this type of input,
though we recommend you check the manufacturer specifications first. BIOPAC can provide guidance as
well. The Epoch receiver uses standard BNC-style connectors and an adapter may be necessary for certain
DAQ systems.
12. What type of amplifier do I need?
The Epoch system does not need an amplifier between the Epoch receiver and your data acquisition system.
13. Is the Epoch system compatible with other wireless systems?
In general, no. However, if you have a wireless system that uses a separate data acquisition unit, it may be
possible to use the Epoch system with that unit.
14. I need to video my animals during the recordings. Is this possible?
Yes. Contact BIOPAC for information about setting up a Faraday enclosure for recording video at the desired
angle.
15. Can the Epoch system record ECG?
ECG recording functionality is currently under development.
16. Can the Epoch system be used with neonatal pups similar to the previous 1-channel system?
Receiver trays and transmitters for use with neonatal rodents as small as P6 pups are available by contacting
BIOPAC.
17. Can the Epoch system be used with other devices, such as a drug infusion cannula?
Yes. The only constraint is that the transmitter must be exposed to work properly.
BIOPAC Hardware | EPOCH Systems | Page 4 - 4
Updated: 6.5.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
FOTS100 FIBER OPTIC TEMPERATURE SYSTEM
FOTS100 Control Unit
TSD180/182/181 Fiber Optic Temperature Probes
This is a stand alone system, but it can also be interfaced to MP150 or MP100 Systems via CBL101. Use with
high-accuracy, MRI-conditional fiber optic temperature probes TSD180, TSD182 or
TSD181.
FOTS100 includes control unit with RS-232 port, ± 5 V analog output, and rubber boot;
power via 9 V battery or wall power.
The analog output parameters comprise the scale factor and the offset. The scale factor
corresponds to the physical unit per Volt (unit/V) outputted by the system, while the offset
corresponds to the physical value at which the user wants the analog output to be at zero volt.
For example, with a scale factor set to 10° C / V and the offset set to 5° C, the temperature as
a function of the analog output voltage is given by:
Temperature = [Voltage output] x 10° C / V + 5° C.
The default value of the scale factor is 50° C / V (or its equivalent in °F) and the default
value of the offset is 0° C (or its equivalent in °F). During a No Signal condition, the analog output and the serial
ports output constant values as follow:
Output
Analog
RS-232
No Signal condition output value
0 Volt
65 536.0
For more details, please see the complete FOTS100 User Manual, available online.
FOTS100 Specifications
Output interface:
Display, ±5 Volts Analog output, and RS-232 standard
BIOPAC interface for MP1X0:
add CBL101 (RCA to 3.5 mm cable)
Channels:
One
Compatibility:
TSD180, TSD182 and TSD181 high accuracy fiber-optic
temperature sensors
Accuracy:
±0.3° C (Total accuracy - includes both signal conditioner and
transducer errors)
Temperature range:
20° C to 60° C (higher range also available)
Resolution:
0.1° C
Sampling rate:
50 Hz (20 ms)
Communication protocol:
SCPI (default)
Input power:
9 to 24 VDC (AC/DC wall-transformer adapter included)
Consumption:
1.8 Watts typical
Battery:
9V
Enclosure:
Plastic casing with a removable rubber boot protection
Dimensions (without rubber boot
protection):
45 mm (H) x 105 mm (W) x 165 mm (L)
Storage temperature:
-40° C to 65° C
Operating temperature:
0° C to 45° C
Humidity:
95% non condensing
Light source life span:
> 150,000 hours (> 17 years) MTBF
BIOPAC Hardware | FOTS100 System | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 9.4.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
TSD180 & TSD182 RECTAL TEMP PROBE: 420 µm OD Polyimide tubing, 8 m (TSD180), 3 m (TSD182)
MRI Use:
Condition:
MR Conditional
Max MR field strength 3T; FOTS100 module stays in the control room.
The Polyimide round tubing protects the sensing element its
flexibility and rigidity provide excellent pushability.
TSD181 SURFACE TEMP PROBE: Sensor 1 mm OD, PFA tubing 0.9
mm OD, 8 m
•
•
Cable sheath rated up to 85° C.
TSD180, TSD182 and TSD181 Specifications
SPECS
TSD180 and TSD182
Temperature range:
0° C to +85° C (other ranges AUR)
Response Time:
250 ms and better
Temperature
operating & calibrated
range:
Accuracy:
TSD181
1.5 sec. typical
20° C to 45° C (other ranges AUR)
±0.2° C (Total accuracy over the
calibrated range including both signal
conditioner and sensor errors)
±0.3° C (Total accuracy over the
calibrated range including both signal
conditioner and sensor errors)
Resolution:
0.05° C
Operating humidity
range:
0-100%
MRI/EMI/RFI
susceptibility:
Calibration:
Optical connector:
Cable sheathing:
Complete immunity
NIST traceable
ST standard
420 µm OD of Polyimide tubing; 900
µm OD tight buffer PVC
3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable
Cable length:
8 m (TSD180/181)
3 m (TSD182)
Signal conditioner
compatibility:
FOTS100 system
Interface:
Optional interface:
FOTS100 is a stand alone Fiber Optic Temperature System
MP150 or MP100 System via FOTS100 and CBL101
BIOPAC Hardware | FOTS100 System | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
FOTS200 STAND-ALONE HIGH FIELD FIBER OPTIC SYSTEM
FOTS200 Control Unit
TSD380/381 Fiber Optic Temperature Probes
The FOTS200 is a signal conditioner specifically designed for measuring physiological temperature. The system
is designed to perform in stringent medical environments by offering
the highest temperature accuracy and resolution in the industry. The
unit interfaces with the TSD380 and TSD381 transducers for high
field strength MRI applications. It should be used instead of the
FOTS100 when customers want to measure temperature inside the
scanner and the MRI field strength is greater than 3T.
FOTS200 includes: Single channel control unit with 20 Hz sampling
rate, RS-232 output interface, ±5 V analog output, AC wall adapter.
This is a stand-alone system, but it can also be interfaced to BIOPAC
MP Systems: MP150 or MP100 System via included Analog output
cables: CBL102 + CBL106. Use with TSD380 or TSD381 high
accuracy MRI-conditional temperature sensors.
MP36/35 System: add SS70L isolated BNC interface and a BNC-to-RCA cable (separate purchase).
The analog output parameters comprise the scale factor and the offset. The scale factor corresponds to the physical
unit per Volt (unit/V) output by the system, while the offset corresponds to the physical value at which the user wants
the analog output to be at zero volt. For example, with a scale factor set to 10° C / V and the offset set to 5° C, the
temperature as a function of the analog output voltage is given by:
Temperature = [Voltage output] x 10° C / V + 5 °C
The default value of the scale factor is 50° C / V (or its equivalent in ° F) and the default value of the offset is 0° C (or
its equivalent in ° F).
During a No Signal condition, constant values are output as follows:
Output
Analog
RS-2
0
32
No Signal condition output value
Volt
65 536.0
For more details, please see the complete FOTS200 User Manual.
FOTS200 Specifications
Number of Channels:
1, 4, 8
Compatibility:
TSD380, TSD381 temperature sensors
Accuracy:
±0.15 C (Total accuracy over the full range from 20 C to 45 C including
both signal conditioner and sensor errors)
Resolution:
0.01 C
Sampling Rate:
20 Hz standard
Channel Rate Scan:
6.67 Hz (channel to channel measurement time = 150 ms)
Output Interface:
±5 V and RS-232 standard
Input Power and Consumption:
9 to 24 VDC – 1.8 W (AC adapter included)
Dimensions:
95 mm (H) x 190 mm (W) x 239 mm (L)
Storage Temperature:
-40 C to 70 C
Operating Temperature:
10 C to 35 C
Humidity:
95% non condensing
Light Source Life Span:
40,000 hours MTBF
BIOPAC Hardware | FOTS200 | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 3.26.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD380/TSD381 HIGH FIELD FIBER OPTIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS
The TSD380 and TSD381 are high accuracy fiber optic temperature probes designed for the
following applications:
TSD380
Rectal temperature
TSD381
Surface temperature
Both sensors are suitable for use in high field MRI environments greater than 3T.
MRI Use:
MR Conditional
Condition:
MR field strength > 3T; FOTS200 module stays in the control room.
TSD380/381 Specifications
Cable Sheath (OD):
TSD380, 0.9 mm, TSD381, 3.0 mm
Cable Length:
8.0 meters
Sensor Tip Material:
GT standard; 1.2 mm OD
Sensor Tip Material Length:
7.0 mm
Connector:
SC connector to FOTS200 System
Temperature Operating Range:
0° C to 85° C
Specific Calibrated Range:
20° C to 40° C
BIOPAC Hardware | FOTS200 | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 3.26.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
VPG HARDWARE
TSD204 – Vaginal Plethysmograph Transducer
The TSD204 VPG vaginal plethysmography transducer measures vaginal pulse amplitude (VPA) and vaginal
blood volume (VBV).
TSD204
TCIPPG2
BSL-TCI24
TCIPPG2 – Interface VPG Transducer to PPG100C for MP150
Plethysmograph interface for VPG transducer (TSD204) to PPG100C for MP150 System.
BSL-TCI24 – Interface VPG Transducer to dSub9 input for MP36R
Plethysmograph interface for VPG transducer (TSD204) to MP36R System analog input (dSub9).
TSDVPG – Vaginal Plethysmograph Transducer + One Interface
This TSDVPG kit includes one VPG Transducer (TSD204) and choice of one interface: TCIPPG2 to PPG100C
for MP150 System or BSL-TCI24 to dSub9 for MP36R analog CH input.
VPG Transducer Specifications
Electronics
Photodiode:
LED:
(Visible red probe)
Resistor:
Sterilization:
Probe:
Connecting cable:
Placement device:
Photodiode with integrated amplifier
340-950 nm response
2
80 mV / mW / cm
Typical output voltage 3 V
3 mm Red/Orange LED
90 med @ 20 mA, peak wavelength 620 mm
View angle 60º
Used at 4.50 mA (approx. 25 med)
680 ohm, 1% metal film (visible RED probe)
Cidex™ OPA Solution (20-45 minutes)
Materials
PLEXIGLAS SG-10, FDA section 21 CFR 177.1010; suited for internal use
Silicone Sheeting Quality 7480/061 – Compliant with the FDA Regulation meeting the
requirements of the 3-A Sanitary Standard, Class III FDA section CFR 177.2600
Silicone Sheeting Quality 7480/061 – Compliant with the FDA Regulation meeting the
requirements of the 3-A Sanitary Standard, Class III FDA section CFR 177.2600
BIOPAC Hardware | VPG HARDWARE | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 6.13.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
PNPG HARDWARE
TSD205 Series – Penile Pulse Plethysmography Transducer (PNPG)
The TSD205-size series penile plethysmography transducer is an easy-to-use liquid metal (Indium Gallium) strain
gauge. The transducer is available in a variety of sizes ranging from 6.0 cm to 12.5 cm. The gauge is designed for
single use or same client only and is sold in 0.5 cm size increments.
TCI111A
TSD205
BSL-TCI18
TSD205 Series Available Sizes
Transducer
Circumference
Transducer
Circumference
TSD205-6.0
6.0 cm
TSD205-9.5
9.5 cm
TSD205-6.5
6.5 cm
TSD205-10
10.0 cm
TSD205-7.0
7.0 cm
TSD205-10.5
10.5 cm
TSD205-7.5
7.5 cm
TSD205-11
11.0 cm
TSD205-8.0
8.0 cm
TSD205-11.5
11.5 cm
TSD205-8.5
8.5 cm
TSD205-12
12 cm
TSD205-9.0
9.0 cm
TSD205-12.5
12.5 cm
TCI111A – Interface PNPG Transducer to DA100C for MP150
Plethysmograph interface for PNPG transducer (TSD205) to DA100C for MP150 System.
BSL-TCI18 – Interface 2 mm HG Strain to 2 x CBL201 for MP36R
Plethysmograph interface for PNPG transducer (TSD205) to MP36R System analog CH input.
TSDPNPG – Penile Plethysmography Transducer + One Interface
This TSDPNPG kit includes one PNPG Transducer (TSD205) and choice of one interface: TCI111A to DA100C
for MP150 System or BSL-TCI18 to 2 x CBL201 for MP36R analog CH input.
BIOPAC Hardware | PNPG HARDWARE | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.10.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MICRO PRESSURE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
MPMS200 Micro Pressure System
TSD280 - MPMS Sensor, 5 cm 2 m
TSD281 - MPMS MRI Sensor, 5 cm 2 m
TSD282 - MPMS Sensor, 15 cm 2 m
TSD283 - MPMS MRI Sensor, 15 cm 2 m
MPMS200 - EXT MPMS MRI Sensor Extension, 8 m
The MPMS200 is a single-channel, hand-held fiber optic micro pressure
measurement system for physiological pressure monitoring: intra vascular
blood pressure; Urodynamic; Intra cranial pressure; Intra uterine pressure; Intra
ocular; Cardiac assist applications; etc.
 Use with TSD280 Series sensors—tip diameter 0.30 mm (1 French)
 Compact and rugged design
 High resolution and precision
 Easily interfaces with BIOPAC or 3rd-party DAQs
 MR-safe sensors available
 Automatic atmospheric pressure correction
The amplifier unit provides an analog output signal in the ±5 V range and has a 250 Hz frequency range. The
system includes a CBL101 cable to interface directly with the UIM100C for Research Systems. The unit includes
a mains power transformer.
MPMS200 Physical Connections
1. Connect the CBL101 cable (included) between the MPMS200 and the UIM100C module.
2. Launch AcqKnowledge and select Set Up Data Acquisition from the Hardware menu.
3. Add a new channel, select UIM100C, and choose the MPMS200 option from the transducer list.
AcqKnowledge will automatically calibrate the signal to mmHg and display the correct units when recording data.
See the Opsens LifeSens Manual for further information about the amplifier and sensor.
Specifications
Number of channels:
One
Compatibility:
TSD280 Series fiber optic pressure sensors (other sensors upon request)
Full scale*:
-50 mmHg to 300 mmHg relative to atm. (wider range also available)
Resolution*:
0.5 mmHg (no averaging)
Precision*:
1% FS or 1 mmHg (whichever is greater)
Sampling rate:
250 Hz standard
Connector compatibility:
SC connector (SCPROM connector compatible)
Internal manometer:
Included for automatic atmospheric pressure correction
Analog Output:
±5 V (1 V/100 mmHg)
Input power and consumption: 9 to 24 VDC - 1.8 W (wall-transformer adapter included)
Dimensions - (without rubber boot protection): 45 mm (H) x 105 mm (W) x 165 mm (L)
Display:
lar
ge LCD
Storage temperature:
-40° C to 70° C
Operating temperature:
0° C to 45° C
Humidity:
95%
non-condensing
Light source life span:
40000 hours MTBF
* Specifications include the effect of both the signal conditioner errors and the sensor errors.
BIOPAC Hardware | Micro Pressure | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 9.3.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
The Micro Pressure Measurement System utilizes Opsens technology and benefits from Opsens’ White Light
Polarization Interferometry (WLPI) technology (Patent# 7,259,862).
TSD280 Series Micro Pressure Sensors for MPMS200 System
The MPMS200 system is used with TSD280 series fiber optic sensors that have an optional extension cable for
MRI applications. The probes are suitable for work on small animals (up to the frequency response 250 Hz limit;
contact BIOPAC for higher frequency response options).
 TSD280 - MPMS Sensor 5 cm 2 m
 TSD281 - MPMS MRI Sensor 5 cm 2 m
 TSD282 - MPMS Sensor 15 cm 2 m
 TSD283 - MPMS MRI Sensor 15 cm 2 cm
The TSD280 and TSD282 are micro pressure sensors that connect directly to the MPMS200 unit.
The TSD281 and TSD283 are MR-safe micro pressure sensors that connect to the MPMS200 unit via the MPMS
EXT extension cable for MRI applications.
TSD280 Series Specifications
Sensor tip diameter:
Sensor tip material:
Sensor tip material
length:
Connector:
Cable length:
Cable sheath:
Operating range:
TSD280
TSD281
TSD282
0.30 mm OD (1.0 French)
PIT 3 tube
150 mm
50 mm
50 mm
SC connector
F2.5 ferrule
connector
SC connector
TSD283
150 mm
F2.5 ferrule
connector
2.0 meter
PTFE
Operating range: P1 (-50 mmHg to +300 mmHg (relative to atmospheric pressure)
MPMS200 EXT - MPMS MRI Sensor Extension 8 M
This MR-safe extension cable can be used to connect the MPMS200 Micro Pressure Measurement unit in the
MRI control room to a TSD281 or TSD283 micro pressure sensor in the MRI chamber room.
 Cable: 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC optical cable
 Fiber core: 62.5 μm core
 Cable length: 8.0 meters
 Sensor end connector: F2.5 to TSD281 or TSD283
 System end connector: SC to MPMS200
BIOPAC Hardware | Micro Pressure | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 9.3.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TISSUE BATH 1, 2, 4, 8 TISSUE BATH STATIONS
The Tissue Bath Station is completely modular, and can
be purchased in multiples of one unit. The System
includes all of the glassware, tubing, reservoir, tissue
hooks and mounting accessories, force transducer and
micrometer tension adjuster.
The ergonomic design of the station allows the tissue bath
to be lowered away from the tissue holder so that
mounting of the tissue preparation is very easy. The taps
for filling and draining the bath are mounted on the tubing
to avoid the risk of accidental bath breakage. The entire
station is mounted on a convenient base stand, which
creates a sturdy platform for the experiment. The unique
design makes it easy to add or remove stations to provide
the optimal solution for the requirements.
When a system is ordered, the size of the tissue bath and
heating coil must be specified.
Each Tissue Bath station includes:
1 Reservoir
1 Reservoir Holder
1 Transducer Holder
1 Warming Coil Holder
1 Warming Coil (specify 5 ml, 10 ml, 20 ml, or 30 ml
size)
1 Tissue Holder (glass; left)
1 Tissue Holder (stainless steel; right)
2 Triangle Tissue Holder (stainless steel)
2 Tissue Clip (stainless steel)
1 Bath Holder
1 Tissue Bath (specify 5 ml, 10 ml, 20 ml size)
1 Oxygen Filter (glass)
1 Micro meter Assembly
1 Mount Accessories Kit
1 Base Station with Support Rods
1 TSD125 Force Transducer (specify TSD125 model
C, D, E or F)
See also: BIOPAC Circulators, or use an existing system.
BIOPAC Hardware | Tissue Bath Stations | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 3.22.2013
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
TISSUE BATH ACCESSORIES / REORDER PARTS
Tissue Holders
Tissue Clips
Warming Coil
Tissue Bath
Reservoir
RXHOLDER-S
RXHOLDER-G
RXHOLDER-TR
RXCLIP
RXCLIP-TRI
Tissue Holder (stainless steel)
Tissue Holder (glass)
Triangle Tissue Holder (stainless)
Tissue Clip (stainless steel)
Triangle Tissue Clip for Rings
(stainless steel)
Replacement Warming Reservoir
400 ml
RXWARMING
Mount Accessories
TISSUE BATH ACCESSORIES
SPECIFICATIONS
1 x Tissue Holder—stainless steel; 15 mm high x 9
mm wide; reorder as RXHOLDER-TR
1 x Tissue Holder—glass; 67.46 mm high x 57.85
mm wide; reorder as RXHOLDER-G;
1 x Tissue Holder —stainless steel; 77.34 mm high x
55.06 mm wide; reorder as RXHOLDER-S
2 x Tissue Clip—stainless steel; 15 mm high x 5 mm
wide: reorder as RXCLIP
2 x Triangle Tissue Clip—stainless steel; 15 mm high
x 12 mm wide; reorder as RXCLIP-TRI
1 x Replacement Warming Reservoir 400 ml: reorder
as RXWARMING
1 x Integrated heater—1,600 ml volume,
programmable temp. 20° - 44° C
1 x Circulator pump—15 W; 500 ml/min
Oxygen Filter
Field Stimulation Electrode
RXCOIL Wa
rming Coil
RXO2FILTER
Oxygen Filter (glass)
RXBATH
Tissue Bath (5 ml, 10 ml, 20 ml)
RXRESERVOIR Re servoir 1000ml
RXMOUNT
Mount Accessories Kit
STIMHOLDER Field Stimulation Electrode for
use
with STM100C
BSLSTIMHLD
Field Stimulation Electrode with
BNC cable termination for use with
BSL
Stimulator
1 x Warming Coil; reorder as RXCOIL
1 x Oxygen Filter; reorder as RX02FILTER
1 x Bath —reorder as RXBATH5 (5 ml,) RXBATH10
(10 ml,) RXBATH20 (20 ml)
1 x Reservoir—1000 ml; reorder as RXRESERVOIR
Mount Accessories Kit; reorder as RXMOUNT
Field Stimulation Electrode; reorder as STIMHOLDER
for STM100C, BSLSTIMHLD for BSL Stimulator
1 x Micrometer-transducer assembly
1 x 3 way Rotary Valve
1 x Power Supply – 110V/60 Hz or 220V/50 Hz
BIOPAC Hardware | Tissue Bath Stations | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 3.22.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
CIRCULATOR A/B HEATING CIRCULATORS
Heating circulators are used
with Tissue Bath Stations and
include a digital temperature
display and the following
controls:
Preset
Temperature
Power
Heater
Circulation
Inlet and Outlet ports are on
the back, along with the
power cord.
Circulator A:
110 V, 60 Hz
Circulator B:
220 V, 50 Hz
CIRCULATOR SETUP AND USAGE GUIDE
BIOPAC Heating Circulators will maintain
water temperature at a preset value in the
range 30 C to 45 C and circulate the water
through tissue baths.
Heating circulators include a digital temperature
display and the following controls:
Preset
Temperature
Power
Heater
Circulation
CALIBRATION
Although the offset value for the temperature sensor
is factory-calibrated, the user can calibrate the
controller’s internal temperature sensor. To calibrate
the sensor:
1. Install a calibrated reference thermometer in
the bath.
2. Adjust the offset value to zero.
3. Adjust the preset value to an appropriate
temperature.
4. Once the bath reaches the preset value and
stabilizes, calculate the offset value by
noting the difference between the reference
thermometer value and the preset value.
5. Enter this value as an offset.
ERROR CODES
Display
Lo
Indication
Water in the bath is not enough or
the bath is empty.
Sen Microprocessor
cannot
communicate with the temperature
sensor.
BIOPAC Hardware | Circulator | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 9.3.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
CIRCULATOR SETUP & USAGE GUIDELINES
1. Connect a hose from the INLET on the back of the circulator to the tissue bath OUTPUT.

For more than one tissue bath, connect the tissue baths serially.
2. Connect a hose from the OUTLET on the back of the circulator to the tissue bath INPUT.
3. Fill the stainless steel water bath with 4.5 liters of water.

A buzzer sound warning will be emitted if there is not enough water in the bath when the Circulator is
powered on. See Error Codes above.
4. Place the glass lid on the bath to close.
5. Plug the power cord from the back of the Circulator to a power source.
6. Press the POWER key to turn on the circulator.
7. To see the preset temperature value, press the P.SET key.

To change the preset temperature value, hold down the P.SET key and, at the same time, repeatedly
press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to increase or decrease the preset value.
8. To see the acceleration value of the Circulator, press the ACC key.

To change the preset acceleration value, hold down the ACC key and, at the same time, repeatedly
press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to increase or decrease the preset value. The higher values for
acceleration indicate more rapid heating.
9. To see the offset temperature value, press the ACC and P.SET keys at the same time.


This is a factory-calibrated value. To calibrate the temperature sensor, see Calibration above.
All preset values are written to non-volatile memory.
10. Press the PUMP ON/OFF key to start the circulation pump.

Check that the blue Pump Status LED is ON. The pump should begin circulating water.
11. Check that the water goes out of the circulator and flows through the waterway of the tissue bath(s).

With initial setup, some air may remain in the circulator pump. See Troubleshooting below.
12. Press the P.SET button and confirm the set value of the desired temperature.
13. Press the HEATER ON/OFF key to turn on the heater.

Check that the red Heater Status LED is ON.

Check that the Heater Display LED is on to confirm that the heater inside the bath is working.

Circulator will maintain the preset temperature of water in the bath; variations of +/-0.2 C are
acceptable.
14. Check the water level periodically and add water to the bath if the level drops below 4 liters.

Caution: Over time, the water level inside the bath may decrease. Do not operate the circulator with
less than 4 liters of water in the bath.
15. To turn the PUMP and HEATER on and off individually, press their respective ON/OFF keys.
16. To stop operation, press ON/OFF keys.

Power down equipment in the following order: PUMP, HEATER, POWER.
BIOPAC Hardware | Circulator | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 9.3.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TROUBLESHOOTING

There is no water circulation or very little.
1. Check the hose connections and be sure they are connected to the correct positions.
2. Check that the hoses are not bent or twisted (which might impede the flow of water).
3. Confirm that there is at least 4 liters of water in the bath.

There is some air in the waterway.
To remove the air:
1. Press the PUMP ON/OFF key to OFF stop the circulator pump.
2. Disconnect the hose from the INPUT of tissue bath. (Leave other end connected to the Circulator
OUTLET.)
3. Put the end of the hose in a bucket to catch the water flow.
4. Press the PUMP ON/OFF to ON to start the circulator pump.
5. Operate the circulator pump for a few 1-2 second cycles.
6. Press the PUMP ON/OFF key to OFF stop the circulator pump.
7. Reconnect the hose to the INPUT of the tissue bath.
8. Press the PUMP ON/OFF to ON to start the circulator pump and continue with normal operation.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range:
30 C to 44 C
Reading Sensitivity:
Display:
Water Bath Volume:
Circulation Flow:
Heater Resistance:
Circulation Pump:
Supply Voltage:
CIRCULATA:
CIRCULATB:
Inlet/Outlet
0.1 C
3 digit (LED Display)
4.5 liters (Stainless Steel)
2 liter/min.
1000 Watt
110 V 100 W Plastic Head
Temperature Offset Range:
Acceleration Levels:
0 C to 1.2 C
0 to 5
110 Volt 60 Hz (1000 Watt)
220 V 50 Hz (1100 Watt)
OD 8.5 mm, ID 6.3 mm Tubing
BIOPAC Hardware | Circulator | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 9.3.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STM100C STIMULATOR MODULE
The STM100C is a single channel stimulation amplifier that was designed for use in the following applications:
Stimulus and Response Testing
Auditory brainstem response testing
Visual evoked response testing
Somatosensory response testing
Nerve conduction velocity and latency recording
Biofeedback Procedures
Auditory, visual or mechanical
feedback from biophysical signals
The STM100C incorporates manual and automatic attenuation and polarity controls. Automatic attenuation can be
effected in 1-dB steps over a 128-dB range. The STM100C has dual stimulus outputs. The 50  Output can be
AC or DC coupled. The Ext Stim output is a very low-impedance, high-power, AC coupled output that can be
used to drive headphones, speakers and other low impedance devices like lights and solenoids.
The STM100C can amplify and condition signals from four possible sources:
Analog (D/A) Output 0
Pulse (Digital I/O 15)
Analog (D/A) Output 1
Analog Input CH 16
IMPORTANT!
A) STM100C is placed on the opposite side of the UIM100C, compared to other 100C-series amplifier modules.
B) Check the “Stim 100” option in the Manual Control dialog box (accessed via the MP menu). See the
AcqKnowledge Software Guide for Manual Control details
C) The STM100C always requires connection of both analog and digital cables to the MP150/100. The MP150
analog and digital cables first plug into the STM100C, then the UIM100C snaps onto the free side of the
STM100C. Other amplifier modules, like the ERS100C, snap onto the UIM100C.
See also: Application Note AH162—Using the Stimulation Features of the MP System
The following diagram illustrates proper connection of the STM100C to the MP150/100 and other modules.
BIOPAC Hardware | STM100C | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 11.19.2013
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
STIMULUS RESPONSE TESTING
In nearly all cases of stimulus response testing, the
STM100C will be used in conjunction with the
ERS100C and the MP System. The ERS100C is a
very low noise biopotential amplifier, with sufficient
bandwidth ranges to accommodate the variety of
evoked potential testing.
For most types of evoked response testing, the
MP150/100 will be operating in averaging mode.
Typically, the stimulus output waveform is generated
in the stimulator setup window and ported through
either analog output 0 or analog output 1, and the
output device (such as the OUT101 Tubephone) is
connected to the external stimulus jack on the
STM100C. This allows for complex pulses, tones,
ramp waves and arbitrary shaped analog waveforms
to be used as stimulus signals.
POWER
BUSY
ZERO
ADJ
SOURCE
OUT0
OUT1
PULSE
CH15
-100%
LEVEL
-0%
POS
NEG
DC
AC
LIMIT
PULSE
ZERO
ADJ
1
BI OPAC
Systems
9
2
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
16
OUTPUT
50 
STM100
EXT STIM
0
GAIN
5000
10000
20000
50000
ON
FILTER
OFF
10Hz
HIPASS
1Hz
SHIELD
VIN+
GND
VINSHIELD
ERS100
1
STM100C connection to MP device,
UIM100C and ERS100C
See the AcqKnowledge Software Guide for details.
Alternatively, a single variable-length digital pulse can be output on I/O 15. The analog output options offer
greater flexibility and are generally easier to use, but I/O 15 allows for greater resolution (1 sec vs. 22 sec for
analog output options). In either case, the stimulus signal is output just prior to each data collection pass in the
averaging sequence.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure that the settings on the STM100C match those in the stimulator setup windows (i.e., the output channel
in the stimulator window matches the output channel selected on the STM100C).
AUDITORY EVOKED POTENTIALS
Auditory evoked potentials, like the ABR can be implemented using the STM100C. The STM100C is used to
present the auditory pulse or “click” to an auditory stimulator, like the Tubephone (OUT101). The OUT101 or
headphones (OUT100) plug directly into the EXT STIM jack on the STM100C. “Clicks” can be either
rarefaction or condensation (positive or negative pulses). “Click” attenuation can be controlled manually or
via the computer in 1-dB steps over a 128-dB range.
SOMATOSENSORY RESPONSE TESTS
These tests are very similar to ABR and VEP tests, except the stimulation source is usually an electrical pulse
or mechanical impulse applied at some point along the leg or arm. Somatosensory tests are used to characterize
the perception of touch. By connecting a solenoid to the EXT STIM output of the STM100C, a mechanical
pulse can be generated for peripheral nervous system stimulation.
GENERAL NERVE CONDUCTION VELOCITY TESTS
General nerve conduction velocity tests are evoked potential tests, but they generally do not require extensive
signal averaging like the ABR or EP tests. The STM100C can perform this type of test, however the STM100C
output is limited to a 20-Volt pk-pk signal. In the case of in vitro or in vivo experimentation, the 20-Volt range
of the STM100C is typically adequate. For surface electrode stimulators, higher voltage is often required.
 For higher voltage outputs, use the STMISOD or STMISOE
(with the STM100C) to boost the voltage stimulus signal to
100 V or 200 V, respectively.
BIOPAC Hardware | STM100C | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 11.19.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BIOFEEDBACK PROCEDURES
The STM100C can be used to condition and amplify the signals coming from any biopotential or transducer
amplifier. The source amplifier must have its output switched to CH 16 (last channel), and the STM100C
SOURCE switch needs to be placed on CH 16 as well. With the headphones or speaker plugged into the EXT
STIM jack, biopotential signals like EMG can be heard directly. The EXT STIM output can also be used to
drive visual indicators directly, so rhythmic or pulsatile signals (like ECG or respiration) can be easily
observed. Mechanical actuators like relays and solenoids can be directly connected to the STM100C.
CALIBRATION: None required
STM100C SPECIFICATIONS
Stimulus Output Voltage:
20 Volts (p-p) maximum.
Voltages of up to 200 V are possible by connecting STMISO Series
to the Ext Stim output on the STM100C.
Current Output Drives:
50  Output:
±200 mA (3.5 mm phone jack)
Ext. Stim. Output:
±1.0 amp (6.35 mm [¼"] phono jack)
Ext. Stim Z (out):
Less than 0.1 
Input Sources:
D/A0, D/A1, PULSE (DIG I/O 15), CH 16 (Analog)
Polarity Control:
Manual or digital control (DIG I/O 7, H-POS, L-NEG)
Attenuation Control:
Manual or digital control
Attenuation Control Range:
128 dB (Digital I/O 0-6, LSB-MSB)
Attenuation Step Resolution:
1 dB
LED Indicators:
Pulse, Current Limit
Uniphasic Pulse Width:
10 µs (min) with 5 µs resolution
Biphasic Pulse Width:
MP150: 20 µs (min)
MP100: 50 µs (min)
Biphasic Pulse Resolution:
MP150: 10 µs
MP100: 25 µs
Arbitrary Wave Resolution:
MP150: 10 µs
MP100: 25 µs
Weight: 380
grams
Dimensions:
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
BIOPAC Hardware | STM100C | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 11.19.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD190 HAPTIC (TACTILE) STIMULATOR
The TSD190 is a haptic (tactile) stimulator. The TSD190 is ergonomically designed to strap onto a variety of
body locations and it incorporates an internal electromagnetically actuated
plunger which can be used to mechanically stimulate a 1.5 mm diameter area of
skin surface. Both plunger force and travel can be infinitely adjusted between
zero and a specified maximum value. Applications include somatosensory and
other types of tactile sensory tests. It’s possible to employ the TSD190 in an
averaging-type sensory nerve test to determine the speed of propagation and
activation threshold of somatosensory nerves.
The TSD190 connects directly to the STM100C stimulation module. Plunger
activation force, width of stimulus pulse, and pulse repetition rate are
established via the AcqKnowledge Set up Stimulator window. To output a stimulus waveform which has a
precisely controlled rate-of-change in both onset and offset, ramp up or down the applied stimulus voltage to the
TSD190. The TSD190 will respond to any kind of applied waveform, such as square, triangle, sinusoidal or
arbitrary.
Visual or audio cues can be replaced or augmented with haptic feedback. For one example, see Kahol K., French, J., et al.
(2006). Evaluating the Role of Visio-Haptic Feedback in Multimodal Interfaces through EEG Analysis. Augmented
Cognition: Past, Present and Future. D. Schmorrow, K. Stanney and L. Reeves. Arlington, VA, Strategic Analysis, Inc.: 289296.
TSD190 SPECIFICATIONS
Stimulus Plunger Diameter:
1.5 mm
Stimulus Pulse Widths:
1 msec (min) to 100 msec (max)
Waveform Stimulus Types:
Digital or Analog Drive
Stroke length:
(0-3 mm) - set screw adjustable
Force:
(0-1.5 Newton) - adjustable via applied stimulus voltage (0-24 V)
Interface:
Connects directly to STM100C Stimulator (External Stim Port)
Input Connector:
6.35 mm male phono plug
Cable length:
2 meters
Velcro Omni® Strap (included):
30 cm long x 25 mm wide
Weight:
39 grams
Length:
62 mm
Diameter:
22 mm
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD190 | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STM200 CONSTANT VOLTAGE STIMULATOR – UNIPOLAR PULSE
The STM200 can be used to stimulate any preparation or subject, including
•
Pain and stress studies that require lower voltages and wider pulse widths
•
Trigger the stimulator from a visual presentation system such as Superlab®, E-prime®, DirectRT®,
MediaLab®, Inquisit®, and other visual presentation programs
•
Tissue baths (range 0-100 V at 0.1-200 ms pulse width)
•
Nerve or muscle stimulation that requires higher energy than a STMISOC/D/E can deliver
Controls & Connections
Front Panel
Range
Establishes the stimulus pulse output level range in Volts (0-10 Volts or 0-100 Volts).
•
Turn right to select a range of 0-10 Volts.
•
Turn left to select a range of 0-100 Volts.
•
Remove the key for added safety and control.
If the Range is changed before recording begins, the scaling must also be changed (MP menu >
Set Up Channels) to maintain direct Level recordings.
If the Range is changed during recording, the user should manually enter a software marker to
note the change (Esc). The pulse Level could then be determined by (mentally) moving the
decimal place to the right or left, depending on how the Range was changed.
Reference
Refers to the pulse width of the signal on the Reference Output (on the back panel).
•
Actual reflects the actual output width.
•
Fixed (15 ms) establishes a pulse width of 15 ms, regardless of the actual pulse width.
The Reference control only affects the pulse width; in either case, the pulse level reflects the
actual output level.
Level
Level is used in conjunction with Range to set the stimulus pulse output level. Turn the Level
control (right to increase, left to decrease) to establish the desired Level, as indicated on the
digital display.
Output
Standard BNC connector to output the stimulus pulse to external electrodes or other devices.
LCD light
The red LCD is activated when the DC adapter is plugged in and the power switch on the back
panel is turned ON, and flashes when the stimulus pulse is active.
BIOPAC Hardware | STM200 | Page 1 - 4
Updated: 8.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Back Panel
Power
Rocker switch for turning the STM200 power ON and OFF.
Fuse
If the fuse blows and must be replaced, use a screwdriver to open (counterclockwise) and close
(clockwise) the fuse cap.
DC Input
Socket for DC adapter (AC300A or equivalent).
Trigger
This cable terminates in a 3.5 mm mono plug for connection to the UIM100C Analog Output 0
or the STM100C 50 ohm output.
Manual Test
Used to diagnose problems with the STM200 stimulator unit. When the Trigger and Reference
Output cables are disconnected, press the Manual Test button to initiate a stimulus with a fixed
pulse width of 2.5 milliseconds.
Reference Out This output cable terminates in an RJ-11 plug for connection to the HLT100C. The cable
reports the stimulator marker pulse to the MP System, via the channel it is connected to. A
marker pulse will be generated each time the stimulator generates a pulse. The front panel
Reference switch determines the marker amplitude:
•
Actual varies between 0-1 V and maps to 0-100 V or 0-10 V
•
Fixed is 15 ms
Stand-Alone Setup
To use the STM200 as a stand-alone stimulator from the MP System, the user must supply
a)
TTL high pulse to the tip of the mono phone plug connector, with respect to the plug shield.
b) Power (+5 V and GND)
c)
Signal conditioning to the output to observe results.
The report signal can be observed via the RJ-11 cable. The Reference Output cable does not need to be used for
STM200 operation, because the front panel LCD panel indicator will show the pulse height output and the pulse
width will simply be the pulse directed to the STM200.
BIOPAC Hardware | STM200 | Page 2 - 4
Updated: 8.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Software Setup
The stimulation waveform must be created using
stimulator setup (MP menu > Set Up Stimulator or
MP Menu > Set Up Data Acquisition >
Stimulator). The output waveform should be
designed so that it has
•
One or more pulses
•
Baseline of 0 V
•
Pulse amplitude of 5 V
•
Pulse length from 0.1 ms to 200 ms
•
Related pulse duty cycle should not
normally exceed 10%; higher duty cycles
are supportable in certain circumstances.
Calibration
The “Reference Output” signal should be calibrated to optimize results.
1. With the STM200 connected and ON, turn the Level control counter-clockwise until the display reads 0
(or as close to 0 as possible).
2. MP > Set Up Data Acquisition > Channels > View by Channels and click the Setup button for the
stimulator channel.
3. Press Cal 1 to get the signal representing 0 V out of the stimulator.
4. Add the Input value found with Cal 1 to the Input Value displayed for Cal 2.
•
For example, if “Cal 1” is pressed and returns an Input Value of .255 V, .255 V should be added to
the existing 50 V and manually entered as the total value of 50.255 V for Cal 2 Input Value.
Note
Even if the Cal 1 Input Value is negative, it must still be “added” to the number for Cal 2 (which
essentially subtracts it) to arrive at the proper value.
5. Click OK to close out of the Scaling window.
Optional:
Click Save as Graph Template to save these new scale settings. As long as neither the MP unit nor
stimulator changes, the calibration should not need to be repeated.
6. Close out of the Setup window.
BIOPAC Hardware | STM200 | Page 3 - 4
Updated: 8.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
STM200 SPECIFICATIONS
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
(This new unit has digital display and a keyed range switch)
Pulse width
Controlled by:
Computer software (AcqKnowledge)
Range:
.05 – 200 milliseconds
Resolution:
2 µsec (minimum) based on waveform output rate
Pulse Repetition
Controlled by:
Computer software (AcqKnowledge)
Pattern:
Fully arbitrary pulse sequence
Resolution:
2 µsec (minimum) based on waveform output peak
Pulse level
Control:
Manual (10 turn potentiometer)
Range (selectable with Key
Switch):
Range 1:
.025 - 10 Volts
Range 2:
.12 - 100 Volts
Infinite (potentiometer adjustable) range
Current Output:
Accuracy:
Reference Output
1 ms pulse:
500 ma
100 µs pulse:
1000 ma
5% accuracy to digital readout
Correlates to actual pulse output (Requires Calibration)
Pulse width:
Fixed (15 millisecond) or Direct (follows actual pulse output)
Amplitude:
0 - 50 mV correlates to 0 – 10 V actual output or 0 – 100 V actual output.
Manual Test Pulse
Pulse Width:
(Button on back panel)
Note: Will only function when “Trigger” cable is not connected to the MP
System.
1 millisecond
Stimulator isolation
Volts:
2,000 Volts DC (HI POT test)
Capacitance coupling:
60 pF
Power requirements
12 Volts DC adapter (included), 1 Amp
Fuse
250 V, 2 A, fast blow
Fuse Dimensions:
1.25” length × .25” diameter
Module Weight
610 grams
Module Dimensions
16 cm x 16 cm x 5 cm
BIOPAC Hardware | STM200 | Page 4 - 4
Updated: 8.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STMISOLA LINEAR ISOLATED STIMULATOR
The Constant Current and Constant Voltage Isolated
Linear Stimulator (STMISOLA) will connect to any
analog output signal drive (±10 V input) and provides
considerable flexibility in stimulation protocols:
 Voltage and current stimulator (unipolar or
bipolar)—
The STMISOLA connects directly to the STM100C
(50 output port) or the UIM100C (Analog Output 0
or 1 port) associated with the MP150 system. The
STMISOLA can also connect directly to an MP36.
 Linear stimulator—the STMISOLA can be used to generate stimulation signals that can have arbitrary
waveshape. Typically, stimulators can only generate simple unipolar or bipolar pulses. The STMISOLA,
however, can output unipolar or bipolar arbitrary waves such as pulse (single or train), square, sine, triangle,
exponentially decaying, modulated envelopes, and fully user-specified types.
The STMISOLA can output either voltage or current waveforms.
 Voltage (V) mode—the STMISOLA multiplies the Control Input Voltage by a factor of 20, to present that
amplified signal at the STMISOLA output.
o In the case of a maximum ±10 V input control signal, the STMISOLA will output a ±200 V
signal, with an output of either 100 ohms or 1 K ohms. These output impedance settings will act
to limit the available output current.
 Current (I) mode—two settings.
The STMISOLA provides two options for output current mode.
1) High current mode (Zout switch set to 100 ohms), provides a gain factor of 10 ma/volt.
2) Low current mode (Zout switch set to 1K ohms), provides a gain factor of 1 ma/volt. Low current mode
permits much improved control for currents less than 10 ma.
The STMISOLA multiplies the Control Voltage by the factor indicated (K in ma/V) to present that associated
output current at the STMISOLA output.
In the case of a maximum ±10 V Control Input Voltage, for:
 Zout = 100 ohms, K=10 ma/V: the STMISOLA will output ±100 ma
 Zout = 1000 ohms, K=1 ma/V: the STMISOLA will output ±10 ma
 In both cases, the voltage compliance is ±200 V.
There are two basic stimulation modes for the STMISOLA:
 Voltage
 Current
In voltage mode, the STMISOLA has two different output impedance (Zout) settings (100 ohms and 1 kohm).
Depending on the setting, the output voltage (Vout) on the electrode impedance load (Ze) will be subject to the
following formula:
 Vout = [Ze/(Ze+Zout)] * Vc * 20
 Where: Vc is the input control voltage
In current mode, electrode load impedance does not impact STMISOLA gain accuracy. The STMISOLA will
simply output the specified current (subject to the applied control voltage), despite the electrode load impedance,
up to the point of maximum voltage compliance (+/- 200 volts).
Isolation characteristics—The STMISOLA isolates the Control Input Voltage from the stimulus output to 1500
VDC HiPot and approximately 1000 pF of coupling capacitance.
This very high degree of input/output isolation helps ensure subject safety and helps to substantially reduce, or
eliminate, stimulus artifact.
BIOPAC Hardware | STMISOLA | Page 1 - 4
Updated:9.14.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Stimulus artifact results when some percentage of electrical current from the stimulation site is directed to the
recording site due to electrical leakage paths intrinsic to the stimulation/recording equipment. In the case of the
STMISOLA, the leakage conductance and capacitance that permit this artifact to occur are reduced to very
small values.
Power ON Safety—when you Power ON the STMISOLA, you must also hold Reset for at least 3 seconds. This
forces the unit into an "operational but no output state" and protects the subject if accidentally connected to
electrodes on power up.
Operating Details
 Review Important Notes and Safety Notes before operating the STMISOLA
Important Notes
A) In Current (I) Mode stimulation, if the output has a load (typically high impedance) that induces railing
for the specific output current, then the STMISOLA will immediately go into “Protect” mode. In the case
of an unloaded output, this state will happen as soon as the STMISOLA is placed into Current (I) Mode
stimulation. This happens because an “unloaded” STMISOLA output simply means that an arbitrarily
high resistance load is attached to the STMISOLA. To correctly operate in Current (I) Mode stimulation,
the proper load must be placed between stimulation electrodes and then “Reset” pushbutton must be
pressed to 3 seconds to activate the unit.
B) In either stimulation mode (V or I), the output level (OL) will directly be a function of the applied Control
Input Voltage (CIV). The conversion ratios are as follows:
Voltage (V) Mode: CIV (volts)*20 (volts/volts) = OL (volts)
Current (I) Modes: Zout = 100 ohms: CIV (volts)*10 (ma/volts) = OL (ma)
Zout = 1K ohms: CIV (volts)*1 (ma/volts) = OL (ma)
C) When an output waveform is present, the output waveform indicator—red LED just above BNC output
connector —will glow. Waveform output level indication can be observed as an increasing intensity of
this red LED. This output waveform indicator is designed to provide a visual indication of output, even if
the wave duration is extremely short, so it may be possible that this indicator shows a waveform output
for some brief period of time after the output wave has already passed.
Safety Notes
1. Never place the stimulation electrodes so that it’s possible for stimulation current to pass through the
subject’s heart. This can happen if electrodes are placed so that the leads “straddle” to the left and right
sides of the subject’s body. Place the stimulation electrodes close together on the SAME (left or right)
side of the subject’s body appendage. Only place stimulation electrodes so they are on the appendage of
interest. For example, for left leg stimulation, only place stimulation electrodes on the left leg and on NO
other location on the body.
2. Do not power ON or OFF the STMISOLA unit while electrodes attached to the subject. Always be sure to
place the STMISOLA in VOLTAGE mode, with zero volts applied to input, before attaching/removing
electrodes to/from the subject. Zero volts is automatically applied to the STMISOLA input if the
STMISOLA input cable is unplugged from any signal source.
3. It is ideal to use the STM100C for stimulation control, because it permits manual control of the
stimulation level. To use the STM100C:
 Plug the Control Input Voltage line for the STMISOLA into the 50 ohm output of the STM100C.
 Before stimulation begins, turn the Output Level Control knob to 0%.
 Initiate stimulation in the AcqKnowledge software (see Application Note AH162).
 After stimulation is initiated, slowly turn the STM100C Output Level Control to the desired level.
 When the stimulation session is ended, turn the STM100C Output Level Control back to 0%.
4. Do not remove electrodes while in current (I) mode; it’s possible for subjects to receive a shock if they
remove electrodes while the STMISOLA is in current (I) mode because the STMISOLA responds to the
impedance increase and causes the current source to swing to a positive or negative rail.
BIOPAC Hardware | STMISOLA | Page 2 - 4
Updated:9.14.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Operating Procedure
 Review Important Notes and Safety Notes before operating the STMISOLA
The included 3.5 mm mono splitter (3.5 mm male mono phone plug to two 3.5 mm female mono sockets) and one
CBL100 (3.5 mm mono male to 3.5 mm mono male cable) permit the analog drive signal to be directed to two
locations. The drive signal – usually from DA0 or DA1 – is typically directed to the splitter cable. One socket
output of the splitter cable is directed to the STMISOLA input. The other socket output of the splitter cable is
looped back to drive an available MP input, via CBL100, through the UIM100C. In this manner, during
acquisition, the stimulus level and timing will be indicated on the recording.
1. Plug AC300 into back of STMISOLA unit.
2. Connect Control Input (3.5 mm male phono plug) to output: UIM100C (Analog Out 0 or 1) or STM100C
(50 ohms) or MP36 headphone output or external signal generator.
3. Before powering ON the STMISOLA (turning from OFF to ON), make sure that stimulation electrodes
are not attached to the subject.
4. Power ON STMISOLA.
 Note that “Protect” red LED on front panel is ON, when STMISOLA is powered ON.
5. Set “Output Mode” switch to V for Voltage stimulation.
6. Press “Reset” pushbutton switch for 3 seconds to enable STMISOLA.
7. Make sure that STMISOLA input voltage is Zero volts.
8. Connect electrodes to subject and then to STMISOLA output.
9. Place STMISOLA in Current (I) mode, if desired.
 Note that if output is unloaded and if STMISOLA is in Current (I) Mode, then the “Protect” light
will stay ON, thus activating shutdown protection (see Important Note A).
10. Send Control Voltage (STMISOLA input) to affect desired wave output (see AcqKnowledge Software
Guide or BIOPAC Application Notes AH162 and AS200).
11. When stimulation session is ended, place STMISOLA in Voltage (V) Mode and make sure that
STMISOLA unit input control voltage is Zero volts.
12. Before powering OFF the STMISOLA (turning from ON to OFF), remove stimulation leads and/or
electrodes from subject.
WARNING: Do not remove electrodes while in current (I) mode; it's possible for subjects to receive a
shock if they remove electrodes while the STMISOLA is in current (I) mode because the
STMISOLA responds to the impedance increase and causes the current source to swing to a
positive or negative rail.
13. Power OFF STMISOLA after making sure that stimulation electrodes are not attached to the subject.
STMISOLA Specifications
THE STMISOLA is a linear, isolated, constant voltage or constant current stimulator. The STMISOLA has one
output voltage mode and two output current modes. The output voltage mode multiplies the input control voltage
(±10 V) by a factor of 20 to the output. When operating in output current mode, there are two options: Low
current mode (Zout=1K ohm) and High current mode (Zout = 100 ohms). In Low current mode there is a 1:1
relationship between the input control voltage (in volts) and output current (in ma). In High current mode there is
a 1:10 relationship between the input control voltage (in volts) and output current (in ma). The Zout selector
switch determines the output impedance of the STMISOLA is voltage mode (100 ohms or 1 K ohms). The Zout
selector switch determines the output current range (±100 ma for Zout = 100 ohms) or (±10 ma for Zout = 1 K
ohms). The Zout switch has different operation, depending on output mode of STMISOLA. In Voltage output
mode, the Zout setting simply specifies the output impedance of the STMISOLA. In Current output mode, the
Zout setting determines the gain factor (K) which sets the desired current range, either +/- 100 ma or +/-10 ma.
The STMISOLA is also well-suited for transcranial direct current stimulation (tDCS). tDCS is a form of neurostimulation which employs the use of low level (typically under 10 ma) constant, unipolar, direct current.
BIOPAC Hardware | STMISOLA | Page 3 - 4
Updated:9.14.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
The STMISOLA will support arbitrarily long, constant, non-varying, direct output currents, so long as the
associated voltage compliance is 100 VDC or less. The tDCS level is adjusted by holding a stable voltage to the
control voltage input of the STMISOLA. This control voltage can be set in AcqKnowledge, to be output to
STMISOLA via analog output, or can be provided by any 3rd party power supply or signal generator.
Control Voltage Input: ±10 V maximum input
Control Voltage Impedance: 1 Mohm
Control Voltage Input Interface: Male 3.5 mm mono phone plug
Isolation: Control Voltage Ground to Isolated Output Ground: 1000 pF at 1500 VDC HiPot
Isolated Output Ground to Mains Ground: 2000 pF at 1500 VDC HiPot
OUTPUT:
Stimulation Voltage (V) Mode: ±200 V with:
Zout = 100 ohms: ±100 ma compliance; Output Impedance = 100 ohms
Zout = 1Kohm: ±10 ma compliance; Output Impedance = 1000 ohms
Current (I) Mode: ±200 V compliance; Output Impedance - 1 Gohm
Zout = 100 ohms: ±100 ma
Zout = 1K ohm: ±10 ma
Input to Output Ratio:
Voltage (V) Mode:
±10 V DC input creates output of ±200 VDC (1:20 ratio - V/V) for Zout either 100 ohms or 1K ohms
Current (I) Mode:
±10 V DC input creates output of:
Zout = 100 ohms ±100 mA (1:10 ratio - V/ma)
Zout = 1K ohms ±10 mA (1:1 ratio - V/ma)
Timing:
Voltage Rise time: 200 V in 9.5 µsec (T10-T90)
Current Rise Time: 100 ma in 9.5 µsec (T10-T90)
Max output pulse width: Less than 100 VDC (voltage output or compliance level) – arbitrarily long
More than 100 VDC (voltage output or compliance level) – 100 ms typical
Max sine frequency: 30 kHz (-3 dB)
Input Control Voltage: ±10 V max
Physical Interface: 3.5 mm male mono phone plug
Compatibility: MP: UIM100C (Analog Out 0 or 1), STM100C (50 ohm output), Generic signal generator w/ ±10 V output range
Voltage or Current output noise (rms) — nominally +/-0.02% of Full Scale Range (FSR)
Accuracy: Voltage or Current output (Zout is 100 ohms or 1K ohms): ± 1%
Linearity: ± 0.1%
Output Pulse Duration: Output or current compliance voltage (Vout < 100 V) - fully arbitrary, no limit to wave (pulse) duration,
subject to user-supplied control voltage signal drive
Output or current compliance voltage (Vout > 100 V) - 100 msec typical and limiting to 20 ms at 100 ma current output
Current Limiting: ±350 ma (short circuit)
Voltage Limiting: ±210 V (nominal)
Reset Push Button: Required with each power ON – push in for 3 seconds to Reset
Manual Test Voltage Output Pulse: 100 V for 2 msec
Current Output Pulse:
Zout = 100 ohms: 50 ma for 2 msec
Zout = 1K ohms: 5 ma for 2 msec
Full Scale Range:
Voltage mode: ±200 V (Zout = 100 ohms or 1K ohms)
Current mode:
±100ma (Zout = 100 ohms)
±10ma (Zout – 1K ohms)
Output Indicator: ON for P-P amplitudes > 1% FSR
Fuse: 2 amp fast blow
Power Adapter: 12 VDC at 1 amp (AC300A)
BIOPAC Hardware | STMISOLA | Page 4 - 4
Updated:9.14.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
CBLEPM
Measurement Computing 4-Channel D/A To STMISOL/A
The CBLEPM connects the STMISOLA/L to a Measurement Computing 4-channel D/A unit. 3.5 mm phone jack
connects to STMISOLA/L phone plug trigger and two tinned wires connect to the D/A unit screw terminals.
SPECIFICATIONS
3.5 mm phone plug (female) to 2 x tinned wires
See also: STMISOLA Stimulator and STMEPM E-Prime System
BIOPAC Hardware | CBLEPM | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 4.5.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
CBLLIMIT2 CURRENT LIMITING CABLE
The CBLLIMIT2 establishes unipolar current limiting (2 ma minimum, 3 ma maximum), for a compliance
voltage range of ±200 volts and is primarily used with STMISOLA for tDCS stimulation as a safety precaution.
The cable is factory tunable for a range of current limits and may have other uses in situations where a maximum
current limit is required.

15 cm long

Male Touchproof on one end, female Touchproof on the other

Connects to the electrode drive of any stimulators made by BIOPAC: STMISOLA, STM200,
STMISOC, STMISOD, STMISOE, BSLSTMB
BIOPAC Hardware | CBLLIMIT2 | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 1.14.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
CBLCFMA
Current Feedback Monitor Cable
This cable will permit current sampling and can be used with any BIOPAC Stimulator for current verification.
To connect the CBLCFMA to a STMISO Stimulator:
1. Connect the female Touchproof lead to the “-” input of the Stimulator.
2. Connect the male Touchproof lead to the electrode lead.
3. Connect the 3.5 mm mono phone plug to the UIM100C*, STMISO or INISO/HLT100C. (Direct
connection to STMISO. Other Stimulator types require adapters.)
*3.5 mm mono phone plug should be connected to an unused Analog Channel of the MP150 system. If no
other electrical connections are made to the subject, then this connection may be made directly to the
UIM100C. If other electrical connections are made (for instance, for ECG, EDA, EMG, etc.) then CBLCFMA
should be connected through INISO to an HLT100C.
SPECIFICATIONS
Feedback constant: 1 V = 10 ma
Leads: Male Touchproof and Female Touchproof
Resistor: 100 ohm 1% MF 1 Watt resistor (in series between TP leads)
Connector: 3.5 mm mono phone plug
Cable: 2 m (6’ 6¾”)
See also: STMISOLA Stimulator and STMEPM-MRI System
BIOPAC Hardware | CBLCFMA | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 8.24.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
STMISO STIMULUS ISOLATION ADAPTERS
See also: Stimulator Setup notes in AcqKnowledge Software Guide
BIOPAC offers three stimulus isolation adapters:
STMISOC constant
current or constant voltage (5X / 10X) stimulation
STMISOD
multiplies STM100C voltage by 5
STMISOE
multiplies STM100C voltage by 10
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES!
When using the STMISOC, STMISOD, or STMISOE, it is
possible to generate voltages as high as 200 v p-p. These
voltages are potentially dangerous, especially if the
stimulator’s high voltage outputs are connected across the
subject’s heart. Across the heart means that the heart is
potentially in the electrical path from lead to lead. This
situation occurs when the stimulation electrodes are placed on
opposite sides of the subject’s body.
NEVER PLACE STIMULATION ELECTRODES ON
OPPPOSITE SIDES OF THE SUBJECT’S BODY!
Always use the stimulator with the leads placed in relatively
close proximity to each other and relatively far from the
heart, and with the leads placed only on the SAME side of
the body. The figure to the right illustrates correct connection
techniques when using the STMISOC/D/E.
Example of correct stimulation
electrode placement:
Left
EL500 s timulating
electrodes
EL500 recording
electrodes
STMISO SAFETY
The harmonized, international regulatory standard relating to the safety of nerve and muscle stimulators
is IEC 601-2-10. Certain stimulation equipment is excluded from this standard, such as stimulators
intended for cardiac defibrillation; however, for the purposes of defining relevant safety metrics for
STMISOC, STMISOD, or STMISOE stimulation units, this standard is quite relevant.
STMISOC, STMISOD, and STMISOE stimulation units are designed in such a manner that the power
available to stimulate the subject is limited. This limitation of power is achieved through the use of
stimulus isolation transformers which have physical constraints (due to their size and construction)
which absolutely —in accordance to known physical laws — constrain the maximum transferable power
to be no more than a specific level.
Section 51.104 of the IEC 601-2-10 standard clearly specifies the limitation of output power for a
variety of wave types.
*
*
For stimulus pulse outputs, the maximum energy per pulse shall not exceed 300mJ,
when applied to a load resistance of 500 ohms,
For stimulus pulse outputs, the maximum output voltage shall not exceed a peak
value of 500 V, when measured under open circuit conditions.
STMISOC, STMISOD, and STMISOE units employ stimulus isolation transformers that limit the output
pulse width to 2 ms maximum, under 500 ohm load conditions. In addition, the highest available output
voltage is 200 V pk-pk (STMISOC or STMISOE) under open circuit conditions.
BIOPAC Hardware | STMISO | Page 1 - 6
Updated: 9.3.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
For the pulse energy calculation for STMISOC and STMISOE:
Joules = Watts x Seconds
Watts (instantaneous maximum) = (200 V x 200 V) / 500 ohms = 80
Joules = 80 W x 0.002 seconds = 0.16 Joules = 160 mJ
Accordingly, the highest possible energy output using the STMISOC or STMISOE is 160 mJ.
The remaining stimulus isolation unit, STMISOD, has a maximum voltage output of 100 V. In this case,
the maximum energy output is:
Watts (instantaneous maximum) = (100 V x 100 V) / 500 ohms = 20
Joules = 20 W x 0.002 seconds = 0.04 Joules = 40 mJ
In all cases the maximum available energy, from the STMISO series stimulus isolation units, is limited
to be considerably less than the 300 mJ maximum as specified by IEC 601-2-10.
CAUTIONS FOR USE!
Even the safest stimulation units, if used incorrectly, can cause serious harm. The following points
illustrate fundamental rules for using stimulus isolation units to stimulate subjects.
1) NEVER APPLY THE STIMULUS SIGNAL IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO CAUSE
CURRENT TO FLOW THROUGH THE HEART.
Primarily considered, this rule implies that stimulation leads should never be split apart so as
to be able to touch opposing sides of the body surrounding the heart.
For example: NEVER CONNECT THE STIMULUS ISOLATION UNIT SO THAT ONE
LEAD TOUCHES THE LEFT ARM AND THE OTHER LEAD TOUCHES
THE RIGHT ARM.
Both stimulus leads [(+) and (-)], should be applied to the SAME side (left or right) of the
subject's body. Furthermore, always stimulate AWAY from the heart. Stimulation probes
(such as BIOPAC's EL350 or the EL351), which constrain the distance from the positive
stimulation output to the negative stimulation output, should always be used for skin surface
stimulation of nerve or muscle.
The EL350 or the EL351 stimulation probes fix the distance between stimulation outputs to
35mm. It is not recommended that this distance be increased for skin surface stimulation of
nerve or muscle. An increase in this distance simply allows stimulation currents to circulate
over a larger area, which is usually not necessary for nerve or muscle stimulation scenarios.
2) Always start the stimulation process with the stimulator control set the LOWEST possible
level. The control for the STMISO series stimulus isolation units is located on the STM100C
stimulation module. Set the control knob to the 0% level, prior to the onset of the stimulation
protocol. During the protocol, increase the stimulus intensity by SLOWLY turning the control
knob towards the 100% level. Stop increasing the intensity at the first sign of subject discomfort.
IMPORTANT NOTES!
A) It takes as little as 15 micro-amps directed across the heart to instigate ventricular fibrillation.
This situation can be readily achieved by using sub-surface stimulation needle electrodes that
insert directly into the heart. It is considerably more difficult to achieve ventricular fibrillation
on the same heart using surface electrodes, but it is possible to do so, evidenced by the
performance of cardiac defibrillation units used in hospitals or by paramedics.
B)
Qualified experienced professionals should supervise any protocols where electrical
stimulation is applied to human subjects. Electrical stimulation protocols are not simple.
Please contact BIOPAC Systems for any questions regarding the use of BIOPAC’s stimulation
units or accessories.
BIOPAC Hardware | STMISO | Page 2 - 6
Updated: 9.3.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STMISOC CONSTANT VOLTAGE OR CONSTANT CURRENT STIMULUS ISOLATION ADAPTER
CONSTANT
CURRENT
CONTROL
VOLTAGE
MONITOR
STMISOC
Voltage
Monitor
0.5
1
2
0.2
5
10 mA
Current
20 Control
0.1
Current (mA)
Voltage(1:10) 200V max
Voltage(1:5) 100V max
Off
MODE
SELECT
SWITCH
0.05
0.02
+
0.01
50
High Voltage
Output
-
VOLTAGE OR
CURRENT
STIMULUS
OUTPUT
To use the STMISOC, an MP System with (minimally)
one STM100C Stimulator module is required.
Plug the STMISOC directly into the EXT STIM jack on
the STM100C module.
Use two LEAD110 electrode leads to connect the
stimulus output to the subject. The LEAD110 electrode
leads are required because they have the proper plug type
for the new safety lead standard used on the STMISOC
module. (1.6 mm pin connectors)
In the Voltage mode, the STMISOC can be used with
bipolar stimulation and with different waveform types
(square, sine, triangle).
See also: Safety Notes
STMISOC Mode
Signal output if LEVEL control is set to 100%
OFF
No signal will be output from the STMISOC.
Voltage (1:5)
100 V Max
Signal output will be 5x the values shown in the Stimulator Setup dialog (acts like
a STMISOD).
Voltage (1:10)
200 V Max
Signal output will be 10x the values shown in the Stimulator Setup dialog (acts
like a STMISOE).
Current
Signal output will be positive constant current output; set signal value with the
Current Control rotary switch.
It’s important to output positive pulses only. Pulses should have a height of at
least 10 V because pulse height output determines the voltage compliance of the
current stimulation signal. The compliance of the current stimulation signal is
determined by multiplying the pulse voltage amplitude by 10. For a 10 V pulse, the
compliance would be 100 V. This means that the STMISOC can output a current
of up to 100 V/R load. If R load = 5 k ohms, in this case the maximum output
current would be 100 V/5 k = 20 ma. The maximum pulse height can be as much
as 20 V, so it’s possible to have a compliance as high as 200 V.
BIOPAC Hardware | STMISO | Page 3 - 6
Updated: 9.3.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STMISOC SPECIFICATIONS
Stimulus Pulse Width:
50 µsec to 2 msec (voltage and current)
Stimulus Sine Wave Range: 100 Hz to 5kHz (voltage only)
Step Up Voltage Ratio:
Selectable: (1:5) or (1:10)
Maximum Output Voltage:
(1:5) mode 100 V (p-p); (1:10) mode 200 V (p-p) into 5 k ± load
Constant Current Range:
0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 10.0, 20.0, 50.0 ma (unipolar
only)
Current Source Compliance: 200 V maximum
Current stimulation mode:
Positive current only
Isolation Capacitance:
150 pf
Isolation Voltage:
1500 VDC (from amplifier ground)
Cable Length:
1.8 meters
Weight: 190
grams
Dimensions:
10 cm (wide) x 5 cm (deep) x 4.5 cm (high)
Interface: STM100C
Off mode:
Turns off Voltage or Current stimulation to subject.
Voltage Monitor output:
Output via
3.5 mm mono phono jack
(1:5) mode
1:10 of stimulation voltage
(1:10) mode
1:20 of stimulation voltage
Current mode
disabled
OFF Reports a signal of approximately 50% of the voltage indicated in the stimulator setup window
BIOPAC Hardware | STMISO | Page 4 - 6
Updated: 9.3.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STMISOD (5X VOLTAGE)
STMISOE (10X VOLTAGE)
See Safety Notes
STMISOD/E setup for EL500 electrodes
The STMISOD/E plugs into the STM100C external stimulus output to provide an isolated voltage stimulus for
response studies requiring a voltage stimulus (nerve conduction, somatosensory, etc.).
STMISOD adapter
boosts the voltage of the STM100C by a multiple of 5x
to provide a stimulus of up to ±50 V (or 100 V pk-pk).
STMISOE adapter
boosts the voltage of the STM100C by a multiple of 10x
to provide a stimulus of up to ±100 V (or 200 V pk-pk).
The front of the STMISOD/E has two 1.6 mm pin plugs that accept any of BIOPAC’s “safe lead” electrode leads,
including bar electrodes, needle electrodes, and reusable electrodes.
The STMISOD/E has 1.6 mm “safe lead” pin plug outputs to accept most needle or stimulating electrodes. For
voltage stimulus applications, the EL500 bar electrode or the EL500 electrodes with two of the LEAD110
electrode leads are recommended.
The STMISOD/E comes with an attached 2-meter cable that has a 1/4” phone plug on the end that connects to the
EXT STIM output on the STM100C.
STMISOD/E CALIBRATION
To use the STMISOD/E, simply set up the stimulator in the software, and hook the STMISOD/E adapter as shown
in the previous figure. Then, hook the stimulating electrodes of the choice to the two 1.6 mm “safe lead” pin plugs.
The STMISOD/E provides an additional barrier of galvanic isolation between the MP150 and the stimulating
electrodes. When using the STMISOD/E to create a pulsed voltage stimulus output, the pulse width must be
between 50 µsec and 2 msec.
If the pulse is narrower than 10 µsec, the STMISOD/E will not reproduce the pulse well, due to rise-time
constraints.
If the pulse is greater than 2 msec, the pulse output will sag due to lower frequency response limits. The pulse
may sag before 2 msec, depending on load and drive levels.
When using the STMISOD/E for voltage stimulus applications, turn the level control to 0% on the STM100C,
then, after stimulation has begun, turn the level control up slowly. This approach will help to determine the
appropriate voltage level for stimulating the subject.
BIOPAC Hardware | STMISO | Page 5 - 6
Updated: 9.3.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
STMISOD/E SPECIFICATIONS
Stimulus Pulse Width:
Stimulus Sine Wave Range:
Step Up Voltage Ratio:
Maximum Output Voltage:
Isolation Capacitance:
Isolation Voltage:
Cable Length:
Weight: 140
Dimensions (WxDxH):
Interface: STM100C
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
50 µsec to 2 msec (voltage only)
100 Hz to 5 kHz (voltage only)
STMISOD (1:5)
STMISOE (1:10)
STMISOD 100 V (p-p) into 5 k ohm load
STMISOE 200 V (p-p) into 5 k ohm load
120 pf
1500 VDC (from amplifier ground)
1.8 meters
grams
6.5 cm x 5 cm x 4.8 cm
BIOPAC Hardware | STMISO | Page 6 - 6
Updated: 9.3.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STMEPM PROGRAMMABLE STIMULATOR FOR E-PRIME
The STMEPM Programmable Stimulation System for E-Prime allows a
user to interface the STMISOLA Stimulator with E-Prime to control the
stimulus frequency and stimulus intensity for real-time stimulus delivery
changes based on a subject's responses.
The system includes

STMISOLA Constant Current and Constant Voltage Linear Isolated
Stimulator

USB 4-ch D/A Unit

Software Utility (STMISOLA<--> E-Prime) with sample E-Prime experiment

Interface cables
The sample E-Prime experiment provides the necessary interface commands to communicate with the D/A unit.
The D/A unit provides the STMISOLA with the appropriate voltage levels to stimulate a subject. The system
supports up to four STMISOLA (and includes one).
SPECIFICATIONS
STMISOLA: see Constant Current and Constant Voltage Linear Isolated Stimulator specs
CBLEPM connection cable x 4: 3.5 mm to 2 x tinned wire (STMISOLA to D/A card)
D/A Unit: High-speed multifunction module with eight 13-bit, 1 MS/s analog inputs and four 12-bit, 1 MS/s analog
outputs
Four 12-bit, ±10 V analog outputs with 1 MS/s update rate
USB-bus powered (type: 2.0 high speed; compatibility: 1.1 or 2.0)
8 single-ended/4 differential analog inputs
13-bit resolution
1 MS/s sample rate
Single-ended ranges: ±10 V, ±5 V, ±2.5 V or 0 to10 V
Differential ranges: ±20 V, ±10 V, or ±5 V
16 digital I/O lines
Two 32-bit counters
One 32-bit PWM timer output
MRI COMPATIBILITY
For electrical stimulation requirements in MRI or fMRI, use STMEPM-MRI.
BIOPAC Hardware | STMEPM | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 10.22.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STMEPM-MRI – ELECTRICAL STIMULATION SYSTEM DESIGNED FOR MRI OR FMRI
The STMEPM-MRI Programmable Stimulation System for E-Prime allows
a user to interface the STM100C Stimulator with E-Prime to control the
stimulus frequency and stimulus intensity for real-time stimulus delivery
changes based on a subject's responses. It is also possible to hardcode the
stimulus intensity levels in the presentation so that predefined stimulus
levels are delivered during the E-Prime presentation. This MRI system is
similar to the standard STMEPM but adds requisite elements to make it
fully functional for stimulation requirements in fMRI and MRI.
The STMEPM-MRI System includes
 STM100C Stimulator Module
 Interface Cables: CBLEPM for E-Prime;
CBL100 3.5 mm
 STMISOC Stimulus Isolation Adapter
 CBLCFMA Current Feedback Cable
 Measurement Computing USB 4-ch D/A Unit
 LEAD108C Electrode Leads (2)
 Software Utility (STM100C<--> E-Prime) with
sample E-Prime experiment
 EL509 Disposable Dry Electrodes
 IPS100C Isolated Power Supply
 GEL104 Salt-free, Chloride-free
Electrically Conductive Gel
 MECMRI-STMISO MRI Filter/Cable Set
The sample E-Prime experiment provides the necessary interface commands to communicate with the D/A unit.
The D/A unit provides the STM100C with the appropriate voltage levels to stimulate a subject. The system
supports up to four STM100C (and includes one).
SPECIFICATIONS
STM100C Stimulator Module: see specs here
LEAD108C Electrode Lead: see specs here
STMISOC Stimulus Isolation Adapter: see specs here
EL509 Disposable Electrode: see specs here
IPS100C Isolated Power Supply: see specs here
GEL104 Conductive Gel: see specs here
MECMRI-STMISO MRI Filter/Cable Set: see specs here
CBLCFMA Current Feedback Cable: see specs here
CBLEPM connection cable x 4: 3.5 mm to 2 x tinned wire (STMISOLA to D/A card)
D/A Unit: High-speed multifunction module with eight 13-bit, 1 MS/s analog inputs and four 12-bit, 1 MS/s analog
outputs
Four 12-bit, ±10 V analog outputs with 1 MS/s update rate
USB-bus powered (type: 2.0 high speed; compatibility: 1.1 or 2.0)
8 single-ended/4 differential analog inputs
13-bit resolution
1 MS/s sample rate
Single-ended ranges: ±10 V, ±5 V, ±2.5 V or 0 to10 V
Differential ranges: ±20 V, ±10 V, or ±5 V
16 digital I/O lines
Two 32-bit counters
One 32-bit PWM timer output
STMEPM-MRI is not subject to the same possible errant stimulation issues as the standard STMEPM might be if
suitable patch panel filtering is not constructed. STMEPM-MRI setup is restricted in terms of pulse width (2 ms
max) and only voltage controlled voltage stimulation is possible; stimulation of differing intensity can be
generated under E-Prime control.
For implementation of subject electrical stimulation in the fMRI and MRI for the purposes of psychophysiological
research, see Application Note 282.
IMPORTANT! Read Safe Use of Electrical Stimulators - Application Note 257 for Comprehensive Safety
Guidelines for Performing Electrical Stimulation on Subjects.
BIOPAC Hardware | STMEPM-MRI | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 4.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STP100C ISOLATED DIGITAL INTERFACE
The STP100C provides 8 lines for digital data
inputs and 8 lines for digital data outputs. All
inputs and outputs associated with the
STP100C safely isolate connections to the MP
System to 1500 VDC isolation.
 MP System Digital Input Lines: I/O 8-15
 MP System Digital Output Lines: I/O 1-7
The STP100C is used to safely isolate digital
input and output lines to and from the MP
System (MP100 and MP150).
The STP100C connects the MP System to computers running SuperLab, E-Prime, Inquisit, DirectRT, and other
psychophysiological stimulation applications. The STP100C also includes output to drive solid state relay and
incorporates a BNC accessible External Trigger input line. The STP100C module can also be used to connect
digital signals (standard logic level) from any mains powered external equipment to the MP System when the
system also connects to electrodes attached to humans.
The STP100C module comes equipped with a 3-meter ribbon cable (37 pin F/F) for easy system interfacing.
 STP100C Digital I/O card 37-pin connector pins (10-3) map to I/O15 - I/O8 on MP unit.
 STP100 (older model) Digital I/O card 37-pin connector pins (10-3) map to I/O8 - I/O15 on MP unit.
SuperLab Interface (uses Digital I/O card with 37 pin DSUB connector)
The STP100C optical interface can be used to interface to the MP System when SuperLab and the Digital
I/O card with the Support Pack are already available. The STP100C interface connects between the
SuperLab Digital I/O card and the UIM100C module.
PORT A - Input to SuperLab: (pins 37-30) connect to MP System Digital I/O lines 0-7
PORT B - Output from SuperLab: (pins 3-10) connect to MP System Digital I/O lines 8-15
Parallel Port Interface (uses standard PC printer port with DSUB 25 connector)
Output from E-Prime: (pins 2-9) connect to MP System Digital I/O lines 8-15
Input to E-Prime: (pins 13-10) connect to MP System Digital I/O lines 4-7
Output Drives (for relays or general purpose logic level outputs)
The STP100C can drive up to four (4) solid state relays directly via the MP System Digital I/O lines 0-3.
MP Digital I/O Line
Corresponding BNC Output
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
MP System Digital I/O line 4 is used as an enable to activate these drive lines.
ON = low (0 V) signal on I/O line 4
OFF = high (5 V) signal on I/O line 4
BIOPAC Hardware | STP100C | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 1.14.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
The output drives (for relays or general purpose logic level outputs) have 0 to 5 V output voltages and are
current limited with 200  resistors. This means that for solid state relay drive requirements, output current
will be limited to approximately 20 mA, assuming an optically isolated solid state relay input diode drop of
1.2 V. Nearly all solid state relays can operate with as little as 5 mA of current drive.
Digital Inputs
The STP100C is designed to work with digital inputs in the range of 0-3.0 V, 0-3.3 V and 0-5.0 V. The
STP100C Digital inputs pull high and require current sinking ability of 4 ma to drive low. Digital high inputs
must be greater than 2.5 V and Digital low input voltage must be less than 0.5 V.
Isolated External Trigger Input
The optically isolated external trigger input is standard logic level compatible. This line is accessible via a
BNC female connector (labeled TRIG on the front of the STP100C) and connects to the MP unit External
Trigger input via optical isolation, compliant to 1500 VDC. The voltage range for this drive can support
digital triggers in the range of 0-3.0 V, 0-3.3 V and 0-5.0 V.
When the STP100C trigger is unused, it is pulled to a high state (+5 V) via an internal 100 kΩ resistor. To
properly drive this line, connect a standard logic level driver to this port. For non-logic level type drivers, the
low voltage applied to a trigger should ideally be between 0 and 1.0 V. The high voltage applied to the trigger
should ideally be between 3.5 and 5 V. The maximum recommended source impedance of the driver should
not exceed 1 kΩ. The trigger will accommodate logic levels anywhere in ±10 V range, but low level should
be less than 1.0 V and high level should be greater than 3.5 V.
The pulse width to the STP100C trigger input should be greater than 40 msec, and can be high going or low
going. The MP system can be set up via AcqKnowledge to trigger on positive or negative edges.
Additionally, to use the STP100C external trigger in a manual mode, the input can be pulled low with an
external switch connected between the trigger input and ground.
To externally trigger MP Unit acquisition, send a logic level signal to the External Trigger of the STP100C
(TRIG). This line connects to the MP Unit External Trigger via optical isolation.
To use an MP System line normally dedicated to an I/O input (lines 8-15) to sample the External Trigger
drive, use a JUMP100 jumper wire to connect that line directly to External Trigger (EXT T) on the back of
the UIM100C. To increase the speed of the trigger response, place a 500 Ω resistor from TRIG to 5 V on the
back of the UIM100C with STP100C connected. This will allow the STP100C to process pulse widths as
narrow as 1 msec.
Note The older model STP100 tied the MP System External Trigger directly to MP System I/O 8.
STP100C Instructions
1. Snap the STP100C module DSUB I/0 connectors on the left side of the UIM100C module.
2. Use the 3-meter ribbon cable to connect the STP100C module (computer I/O 37-pin connector) to the
digital I/O card in the PC.
 Connects Port A (inputs; pins 30-37) on the digital I/O card to digital I/O lines 0-7 on the MP unit.
 Connects Port B (outputs; pins 3-10) on the digital I/O card to digital I/O lines 8-15 on the MP unit.
3. For debugging purposes, ground pins are:
 37-pin digital I/O cable (CBL110A): pins 19 and 21 are GND; pin 20 is +5 V.
 25-pin printer port cable (CBL110C): pins 18 and 25 are GND.
BIOPAC Hardware | STP100C | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 1.14.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Application example — P300 visual evoked response test
To set up the STP100W with an MP System to perform a P300 visual evoked response test:
1. C onnect two SuperLab outputs to the respective MP System digital inputs.

These SuperLab outputs are assigned to respective images that will be presented to the
subject during the recording session. Typically, image presentation occurs within a
statistical framework, i.e., Image 1 is presented 20% of the time and Image 2 is
presented 80%. The SuperLab outputs will be tightly (1 ms) synchronized to the
respective image presentation.
2. Set the MP System up to record EEG and the two SuperLab outputs, which should be directed
to the MP System digital inputs.
3. After the recording session has been completed, use AcqKnowledge to perform specific
averaging on the collected EEG data.
a) Use the digital input corresponding to SuperLab output 1 as a “Control Channel” in the
Find Peak Averaging Setup; all the responses resulting from Image 1 presentation will
be averaged together to create the composite response for Image 1 presentation.
b) Repeat the above procedure with the “Control Channel” assigned to SuperLab Output 2
to create the composite response for Image 2 presentation.
For more information on setting up the Find Cycle (Cycle Detector) Off-line Averaging
for this kind of measurement, see the AcqKnowledge Software Guide.pdf.
BIOPAC Hardware | STP100C | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 1.14.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
OUT SERIES
Headphones
OUT1 High Fidelity Headphones
OUT1A Ultra-Wide Frequency Response Headphones
OUT100 Monaural Headphone
40HP
Monaural Headphones
LED
OUT4 Visual Stimulus: Controllable LED
OUT103 LED Cable
OUT2
BNC Output Adapter
OUT3
see Stimulators
OUT101 Tubephone
OUT01E Foam Ear Inserts:
OUT101R Plastic Tubes
OUT102
Piezo Audio Transducer
OUT1 HIGH-FIDELITY HEADPHONES
These wide response high-fidelity headphones are used
for auditory stimulus (short tones or clicks) or to listen
to physiological signals (like EMG) directly. The
Headphones are comfortable and lightweight (3 ounces)
and include a 2 meter cable so the Subject can be seated
a comfortable distance from the acquisition unit.
Unlike other Smart Sensors that connect to the MP3X,
the OUT1 connects to the “Analog out” port on the
back panel of the MP3X.
OUT1 SPECIFICATIONS
Cable Length:
Connector Type:
2 meters
9 Pin DIN (female)
OUT1A WIDE-FREQUENCY RESPONSE HEADPHONES
These ultra-wide frequency response headphones connect directly to the
headphone port on the MP36 or MP36R data acquisition unit.
Features of these multi-purpose headphones include:







High dynamic range
High-resolution capsule
1/8" connector plus 1/4" adapter included
Single-sided cord
Oval-shaped ear cups
Comfortable headband
High-quality components and exceptionally rugged construction
OUT1A SPECIFICATIONS
Connector:
Interface:
Frequency response:
Max. power handling:
Impedance:
Sensitivity:
Cord length:
Dimensions:
1/8" TRS connector plus 1/4" TRS adapter
MP36 or MP36R (not compatible with other MP units)
20 Hz - 20 kHz
100 mW
32 Ohm
105 dB @ 1 kHz
2 meters
11-3/4" x 9-3/4" x 8-1/4"
BIOPAC Hardware | OUT SERIES | Page 1 - 5
Updated: 2.2.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
OUT100 MONAURAL HEADPHONES
These monaural headphones can be used with the STM100C stimulator module to deliver a tone signal while
recording data for startle response or other stimulus-response studies. The headphones can also be used to listen to
raw signals (such as EMG), piped through the STM100C from an amplifier output. The OUT100 is a wide
response, high efficiency headphone, weighing 85 grams and is equipped with a 1.8 meter cord terminated in a
6.3 mm (1/4") phone plug.
OUT100 SPECIFICATIONS
Weight:
Connector Type:
Cable length:
Speaker:
Impedance:
Power Handling:
Frequency response:
Average SPL:
Adapter (included):
85 grams
6.3 mm (1/4")
1.8 meters
28 mm dia 32 ohm dynamic Mylaar
16 Ohm @ 1.0 kHz
100 mW max
20 Hz - 20 kHz
108 dB ± 4 dB
1/4" mono adapter plug
40HP MONAURAL HEADPHONES
These monaural headphones are used with Biopac Science Lab MP40 and Biopac Student
Lab MP45 for stimulus response experiments and to listen to EMG signals. The 40HP is a
wide-response, high-efficiency headphone.
40HP SPECIFICATIONS
Cable Length:
Connector Type:
5 meters
3.5 mm phone plug
OUT2 BNC (M) OUTPUT ADAPTER
This BNC adapter is designed to output signals from the MP3X unit to
other devices (such as external amplified speakers and scopes). This 2meter adapter cable terminates in a male BNC for easy connections.
See also: SS9LA BNC Input Adapter
OUT2 SPECIFICATIONS
Cable Length:
Connector Type:
2 meters
BNC (male)
OUT4 VISUAL STIMULUS: CONTROLLABLE LED
The OUT4 is a controllable high-brightness LED output device mounted on an angled stand
intended to provide a good viewing angle for subjects. Use OUT4 for visual stimulus presentation
in Biopac Student Lab Lesson 11A Reaction Time - Visual Stimulus, Visual Evoked Potential
experiments, and more. Set LED intensity via Use MP Menu > Output Control > Visual Stim
Controllable LED - OUT4; set flash rate/sequence via MP Menu > Output Control > Pulse
Sequence.
OUT4 SPECIFICATIONS
LED:
Interface:
Cable:
White, Relative Luminous Intensity up to ~5000 mcd, adjustable
MP36 or MP35 “Analog Out” port* (Pulse Out 0-5 V)
2 meters
BIOPAC Hardware | OUT SERIES | Page 2 - 5
Updated: 2.2.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
* OUT4 is not compatible with a) Research System MP36R at this time because AcqKnowledge 4.4 and
below does not include the required output control, b) with MP45, c) with MP30 except if used in place of
SS10L in BSL Lesson 11.
OUT101 TUBEPHONE

OUT101E Replacement Foam Ear Inserts: pkg. of 50

OUT101T Replacement Plastic Tubes: pkg. of 4
OUT101 Components: one Tubephone, plastic tube and 50 foam ear
inserts
Use the OUT101 tubephone to deliver clicks and tones in auditory
evoked response applications (i.e. ABR).
The tubephone design consists of a monaural acoustic transducer
attached to a short, flexible, plastic tube, which fits into the subject’s
ear with the aid of a foam tip.
Use of the tubephone reduces ambient noise and bone conduction problems, which can interfere with auditory
response recordings. Furthermore, because the Tubephone provides a 1 msec acoustic signal delay (due to plastic
tube), it automatically separates true response from electromagnetic artifact resulting from speaker activation.
MP36 and MP36R interface options:
•
BSL System stimulator (model BSLSTM): use BSLCBL6 and Radio Shack P/N 274-047 ¼" to 1/8"
phono adapter
•
BSL MP36 data acquisition unit Analog Out port: use OUT3 plus BSLCBL6 and Radio Shack P/N 274047 ¼" to 1/8" phono adapter
•
MP36 headphone port: use Radio Shack P/N 274-047 ¼" to 1/8" phono adapter; note—volume may not
reach the same levels as the Analog Out port
Calibration for Auditory Brainstem Response Studies
To calibrate the OUT101 Tubephone, use an Etymotic ER-7C Probe Microphone—this microphone provides a
calibrated output voltage which is a function of applied Sound Pressure Level (SPL). The sensitivity is 50
mV/Pascal (-46 dB re: 1 V/uBar): 0 dB SPL = 0 dBuV. Place the Probe Microphone insert tube in the auditory
canal prior to the insertion of the OUT101 foam tip.
The OUT101 Tubephone sound delivery tube and the Probe Microphone sound input tube will then be exposed to
the same auditory chamber. Accordingly, the SPL is recorded, via the Probe Microphone, simultaneously with
applied auditory stimulus from the OUT101 Tubephone.
OUT101 SPECIFICATIONS
Response:
Acoustic signal delay:
Dimensions:
Cable termination:
Cable length:
Cable clip:
Compares to TDH-39, 49 or 50 audiometric headphones
1 msec
3.8 cm (wide) x 5 cm (high) x 1 cm (thick)
6.3 mm (1/4") phone plug
1.8 meters
Yes; clip attaches to fabric or fixtures
BIOPAC Hardware | OUT SERIES | Page 3 - 5
Updated: 2.2.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
OUT102 PIEZO AUDIO TRANSDUCER
The OUT102 Piezo transducer is typically connected directly to the STM100C stimulator module. When the
stimulator module output rises above 1.5 volts, the Piezo indicator will emit a constant audible signal (3.0 kHz @
80 dB). Accordingly, the device is very useful for providing an audible stimulus, or alarm, when a physiological
signal passes a certain threshold. As such, the OUT102 makes an excellent audible BPM indicator for ECG, blood
pressure or respiration signals. The device can also be used to indicate when temperature or other slowly moving
variable (e.g. electrodermal response) passes a certain threshold. The threshold for the OUT102 is determined by
adjusting the amplitude control on the STM100C module. The specific Biopotential or Transducer amplifier
signal monitored can be recorded while simultaneously directed through the STM100C module. The OUT102
also connects directly to the UIM100C digital I/O ports for operation with Control Channel outputs. The OUT102
measures 2.5 cm (dia) x 1 cm (high) and comes equipped with a 1.8 m cable terminated in a 3.5 mm phone plug.
An adapter is included for connecting the OUT102 to the UIM100C digital I/O ports.
The included 3.5 mm mono splitter (3.5 mm male mono phone plug to two 3.5 mm female mono sockets) and one
CBL100 (3.5 mm mono male to 3.5 mm mono male cable) permit the analog drive signal to be directed to two
locations. The drive signal – usually from DA0 or DA1 – is typically directed to the splitter cable. One socket
output of the splitter cable is directed to the OUT102 input. The other socket output of the splitter cable is looped
back to drive an available MP input, via CBL100, through the UIM100C. In this manner, during acquisition, the
stimulus level and timing will be indicated on the recording.
OUT102 SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
Cable Length:
Connector Type:
2.5 cm (dia) x 1 cm (high)
1.8 meters
3.5 mm phone plug + adapter for the UIM100C digital I/O ports
OUT103 LED CABLE
Use this LED cable to synchronize a light flash. The 3 meter cable makes it
easy to use the LED for a variety of protocols. Terminates for connection to
Analog OUT 0/1 and includes adapter for connection to Digital I/O. Media
synchronization - Windows only - AcqKnowledge 4.1 and above.
The included 3.5 mm mono splitter (3.5 mm male mono phone plug to two 3.5
mm female mono sockets) and one CBL100 (3.5 mm mono male to 3.5 mm
mono male cable) permit the analog drive signal to be directed to two
locations. The drive signal – usually from DA0 or DA1 – is typically directed to the splitter cable. One socket
output of the splitter cable is directed to the OUT103 input. The other socket output of the splitter cable is looped
back to drive an available MP input, via CBL100, through the UIM100C. In this manner, during acquisition, the
stimulus level and timing will be indicated on the recording.
Option 1: MP150 and UIM100C setup using an Analog Output
a. Connect the OUT103's 3.5 mm phone plug from the LED to one of the arms of the included Y-cable.
b. Connect the included CBL100 to the other arm of the Y-cable.
c. Connect the stem of the Y-cable to one of the two Analog Output connections near the bottom of the front
face of the UIM100C.
d. Connect the other end of the CBL100 to an otherwise unused Analog Channel also on the front face of the
UIM100C.
e. Use "MP150 > Set Up Channels..." (in AcqKnowledge 4.4, choose "Channels" in the left pane after
choosing "MP150 > Set Up Data Acquisition...") and acquire and plot the analog channel to which the
CBL100 is connected.
f.
Use "MP150 > Set Up Stimulator..." (in AcqKnowledge 4.4, choose "Stimulator" in the left pane after
choosing "MP150 > Set Up Data Acquisition...") to send 5 volt pulses through the Analog Output.
BIOPAC Hardware | OUT SERIES | Page 4 - 5
Updated: 2.2.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Option 2: MP150 and UIM100C setup using a Digital I/O Channel
a. Connect the OUT103 2 mm pin adapter to the 3.5 mm plug on the OUT103 cable.
b. Connect the red OUT103 2 mm pin to a Digital I/O channel on the rear of the UIM100C and the black pin
to GND D on the rear of the UIM100C.
c. Use MP150 > Set Up Channels to acquire and plot the Digital I/O channel the OUT103 is connected to.
d. Set MP150 > Show Manual Control
 Set for ‘Output.’
 Enable the 'Set immediately' option.
 Click the Digital I/O channel the OUT103 was connected to toggle between 0 and 1.
If necessary, click the 'Set' button to update the manual control and output a digital pulse.
MP36R setup - additional items required
a. Connect an OUT3 (BNC adapter) to the 'Analog Out' port on the rear of the MP36R.
b. Connect a BSLCBL6 (interface cable: BNC to 3.5 mm) to the OUT3.
c. Connect the OUT103 3.5 mm plug to the BSLCBL6 3.5 mm socket.
d. Set MP36 > Output Control 'Low Voltage Stim' option
 Set Pulse width to 100 msec.
 Set Pulse level to 5 volts – set Reference Channel to any digital channel.
 Click the D’ON’ button to output a digital pulse.
Calibration
The OUT series does not require calibration.
BIOPAC Hardware | OUT SERIES | Page 5 - 5
Updated: 2.2.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
EPM100W/WP STIMULUS PRESENTATION SYSTEMS WITH E-PRIME 2
These stimulus presentation packages include E-Prime experiment generator and an
isolated digital interface (STP100C) with parallel port cable (CBL100C).
E-Prime provides experiment generation and millisecond precision data collection through data handling and
processing. E-Prime is a powerful suite of applications combining precise millisecond timing, a user-friendly
environment, and the flexibility to create simple to complex experiments for both advanced and novice users.

EPM100W includes E-Prime 2.0

EMP100WP includes E-Prime 2.0 Professional

EPM100 – E-Prime 2.0 software only

EPM100P – E-Prime 2.0 Professional software only
Use the AcqKnowledge Digital inputs to stim events tool to automatically score and label digital event marks
from the E-Prime presentation. The digital channels are interpreted as a binary number. Each stimulus event
placed into the graph has the corresponding number included with its label. This allows further analysis to
distinguish between different types of stimulus events for automated event related analysis.
SPECIFICATIONS
See also: STP100C, STMEPM
E-Prime:
Requires Intel PCs with Windows® XP/Vista/7
Minimum
Recommended
- Pentium Processor 1 GHz
- 512 MB RAM
- PCI DirectXTM video card with 32 MB RAM
- PCI DirectXTM sound card
- CD-ROM
- USB Port
- Serial Port*
- Pentium Processor 2 GHz or higher
- 1024 MB RAM or higher
- 8X AGP Video or PCI Express DirectXTM video card
with 128 MB RAM or higher
- Sound Blaster AudigyTM sound card
- CD-ROM
- USB Port
- Serial Port*
- Internet Connection
E-Prime Device Drivers are not supported for Windows® XP 64 and Windows® Vista 64 at this time.
Windows® 7/Vista requires installing the E-Prime Device Drivers separately.
BIOPAC Systems | E-Prime Options | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 9.3.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STK100 Standalone StimTracker Universal Marker Interface
STK100M/W StimTracker Universal Marker Interface with SuperLab and STP100C Isolated
Digital Interface
STK100
The new StimTracker interfaces with the existing SuperLab software to provide digital trigger marks. Requires a
USB port and works with Windows and Mac. This hardware includes two (2) photocells for precise event
marking (one black and one white).
Deliver markers via USB from the stimulus presentation computer and deliver markers from voice key, audio
channels/speakers (2), TTL input lines (6) or photocells (up to 4).
An STP100C with the parallel port cable option (CBL110C) should be used with this device; STP100C sold
separately.
•
For complete packages—StimTracker, SuperLab (current release,) and cables—
see STK100W (Windows) and STK100M (Mac).
INCLUDES
- Universal marker Interface module
- Photocells x 2 (8 by 14 mm)
- USB
BIOPAC Hardware | STK100 | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 3.28.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STK100M/W STIMTRACKER UNIVERSAL MARKER INTERFACE WITH SUPERLAB
These stimulus presentation packages include SuperLab stimulus presentation software (current release) and the
new StimTracker universal marker interface to provide digital trigger information from SuperLab.
SuperLab offers a host of powerful features, including
• Playing movies
• Stimulus lists
• Support for JPEG, GIF, PNG, and TIFF files
• Built-in support for RSVP and self-paced reading
• Improved support for fMRI and EEG/ERP
• Trial variables
• Conditional branching (if/then/else)
• Multiple input devices in the same experiment
• Unicode application that handles Japanese, Chinese, and other international fonts just as easily as it
handles English fonts.
The package includes two (2) photocells for precise event marking and the STP100C Isolated Digital Interface
with the parallel port cable option (CBL110C); if additional photocells are required, please contact BIOPAC.
See also: Product description and specs for SKT100, STP100C, and CBL110C.
BIOPAC Hardware | STK100 | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 3.28.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STP100W STIMULUS PRESENTATION SYSTEM (SUPERLAB)
The STP100W system includes:
SuperLab Pro Software (Windows)
STP100C Optical Interface (w/3-meter ribbon cable)
 Measures physiological responses to stimuli
 Permits up to eight synchronization signals
(input or output) between the STP100W and
the MP System
Digital I/O Card (PCI slot required)
Support Pack for Digital I/O Card (Windows)
Pushbutton Keycap Color Change Kit
Six Pushbutton Response Box
 Performs accurate (1 ms resolution) reaction
time measurements
The STP100W is a stand-alone system that measures
subject responses to visual or auditory stimuli. It can
present visual stimuli on a computer screen, or auditory
stimuli via headphones or speakers, and simultaneously
(1ms resolution) send trigger signals to an MP System
on a different computer for data synchronization and
collection purposes.
The SuperLab Pro software can change the placement
of visual stimuli on the screen or change the screen’s
background color. It offers a variety of input and timing
options, and will provide feedback based on the
subject’s response or reaction time. Different trigger
channels can be paired to different visual or auditory
stimuli to perform sophisticated evoked response
averaging tests (e.g. P300).
Second PC required— The synchronization signal(s)
coming from the STP100W can be directed to an MP
System running on a Mac or PC, but it’s not possible to
run the STP100W on the same computer as the MP
System. The STP100W requires that the SuperLab
software and a Digital I/O card be placed on a PC.
MP Research System | STP100W | Page 1 - 2
Updated:11.13.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SUPERLAB SET UP
1. Connect the SuperLab output card via the STP100C to the UIM100C and the BIOPAC MP100 or MP150
System.
2. Create the presentation using the appropriate digital outputs from the
SuperLab PC to the MP150.

See the SuperLab Manual for instructions on how to create the
presentation.
3. Setup digital channels 8-15 (as used in the presentation) using the MP150>Setup Channels>Digital
dialog.

The SuperLab stimulus output synchronization signals will be output on digital lines 8 through
15. In order to record the changes and use the stimulus for analysis purposes, the appropriate
channels must have “Acquire” enabled.
 SuperLab employs a digital I/O PCI card that uses Port A for input and Port B for output (Port C is
unused). For input, lines must be “pulled low” (connected to ground by a resistor). The diagram illustrates
how this is done for line A0 (pin 37). The same diagram applies for lines A1 to A7. The resistor’s value
may range from 2.2 kilo-ohm to 5 kilo-ohm.
Cedrus highly recommends that all lines on Port A are pulled low even if all 8 input lines will not be
used. Better yet: connect unused lines directly to ground.
To add other digital inputs and outputs to the system, simply remove the 2 mm pin plugs from the STP100C
Interface Module. The 2 mm pins are screwed in and can be removed and added to mirror the particular
application.
MP Research System | STP100W | Page 2 - 2
Updated:11.13.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
STIMULUS PRESENTATION
STP35W SUPERLAB SYSTEM FOR MP36R/MP36/MP35 See STP30W to use with a BSL MP30
STP35W Components
SuperLab Software
Digital I/O Card
STP35 Interface Cable
Support Pack for Digital I/O Card
Six-button Response Box
Pushbutton Keycap Color Kit
The STP35W is a stand-alone system that measures subject responses to visual or auditory stimuli. It can present
visual stimuli on a computer screen, or auditory stimuli via headphones or speakers, and simultaneously (1ms
resolution) send trigger signals to an MP36R/MP36/MP35 System for data synchronization and collection
purposes.
For performing accurate (1 ms resolution) reaction time measurements, the STP35W includes a six-pushbutton
response box. For measuring physiological responses to stimuli, the STP35W includes an optically isolated
interface, permitting up to three synchronization signals (input) between the STP35W and the
MP36R/MP36/MP35 System.
The SuperLab software can be used to change the placement of visual stimuli on the screen, change the screen's
background color, choose from a variety of input and timing options, and provide feedback to subjects based on
either response or reaction time. Different trigger channels can be paired to different visual or auditory stimuli to
perform sophisticated evoked response averaging tests (e.g. P300).
 See BSL PRO Lesson H30 Stroop Effect for details of the classic psychology experiment and a sample of
how SuperLab works with the BSL System.
NOTE: Second PC required. The synchronization signal(s) coming from the STP35W can be directed to an
MP36R/MP36/MP35 System running on a PC or a Macintosh, but it's not possible to run the STP35W on the
same computer as the MP36R/MP36/MP35 System. The STP35W requires that the SuperLab software and a
Digital I/O card (PCI slot required) be placed on a second computer.
STP35 MP36R/MP36/MP35
TO SUPERLAB
For users who already have SuperLab and an MP3X unit, the STP35 Interface
Cable can be used to connect the two systems. The STP35 cable interfaces with
the I/O port of the rear of the MP36R/MP36/MP35 unit.
STP35A
MP36R/MP36/MP35 TO
PARALLEL
MP36R/MP36 or MP35 to E-Prime, Direct RT, MediaLab, Inquisit, and other
systems that connect via the parallel port.
BIOPAC Hardware | SUPERLAB for MP3X | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 9.10.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TSD122 SERIES STROBOSCOPE
The TSD122 Stroboscope connects directly to the UIM100C or STM100C for Visual Evoked Response
applications. This battery-operated device will provide 360,000 flashes between charges. The unit will go from
zero to a maximum of 12,000 flashes per minute. It has external TTL synchronization and Trigger facilities for
interfacing with the MP System and other equipment.
The TSD122 can also be used to trigger the MP System, via the External Trigger terminal block (on the back of
the UIM100C).
TSD122A Stroboscope 120 V/60Hz
To use the TSD122 Stroboscope with a BSL or MP36R unit, order as TSD122C (includes BSLCBL5); see BSL
PRO Lesson H22 Visual Evoked Potentials for setup guidelines.
TSD122C Stroboscope
120 V/60Hz
TSD122 SPECIFICATIONS
Display:
Battery:
Battery Life:
Flash duration:
Flash energy:
External TTL:
Weight:
Body Dimensions:
Reflector Housing:
Handle:
I/O Ports:
Cables:
Interface:
Digital LCD
Built-in Rechargeable
60 hours at 100 strobes/sec (360,000 strobes between charges)
30 µsec
180 mJoule
Sync/Trigger
1.1 kg
9.3 cm (wide) 9 cm (high) x 23 cm (long)
12.2 cm (dia)
10.8 cm (long)
TTL (Sync input and output)—3.5 mm phone jacks
CBL102 and CBL106 or BSLCBL5
UIM100C or MP36R
STM100C (triggered)
BIOPAC Hardware | TSD122 Series | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 9.3.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TEL100C REMOTE MONITORING SYSTEM
The TEL100C is a remote monitoring system designed for use with an existing MP System. In addition, the
TEL100C System can be used with existing BIOPAC amplifiers (e.g., ECG100C, RSP100C) and/or other
TEL100C Systems. Up to four TEL100C Systems can be connected to a single MP System, and a single
TEL100C System can be used with as many as 15 existing amplifiers or direct analog inputs.
Each TEL100C System consists of four major components (as shown above):
•
transmitter with 4 channel inputs (TEL100M-C)
•
receiver (TEL100D-C)
•
cable to connect transmitter to receiver (CBL117)
•
up to four “Simple Sensor” electrode/transducer assemblies (which must be purchased separately).
The TEL100C is intended for biophysical ambulatory measurements (ECG, EMG, joint angle, acceleration,
respiration, finger twitch, heel/toe strike, PPG, EDA/GSR, temperature, etc.). The system is not designed for highaccuracy, precision measurements (force, pressure, strain, etc.). Any slowly moving signal that must be measured
to high accuracy and precision should be recorded with the respective amplifier module (typically DA100C or
SKT100C).
TEL100D-C
The TEL100D-C is a four-channel receiver module that is compatible with all other MP150/100 modules. The
TEL100D-C includes filtering and channel select controls.
•
•
Select the bank (A, B, C and D) to assign channels to. Make sure no other 100C series amplifiers are
assigned to those same channels.
If certain channels in a particular bank are already being used (and can’t be moved), then turn the
telemetry channel off, via the “Enable ON/OFF” switch on the front panel of the TEL100D-C.
Up to four TEL100D-C units can be connected to a single MP150, allowing for up to 16 channels of transmitted
data originating from up to four separate TEL100M-C units. For every TEL100M-C, a TEL100D-C must be
available to receive its data signals.
TEL100M-C
Each TEL100M-C is a miniature four-channel remote amplifier/transmitter that connects directly to the
TEL100D-C via a lightweight coaxial transmission cable. The TEL100M-C does the work of four 100C series
amplifiers and includes filtering, offset and gain control for each of its four channels.
All BIOPAC SS series transducers and electrodes will function directly with the TEL100M-C. Excitation voltages
are available on each channel input to provide power for “Simple Sensor” transducer assemblies (such as RSP,
GSR, PPG and SKT).
The TEL100M-C requires one 9 V alkaline battery for operation. A low battery indicator light will flash when the
battery requires replacing. Expected battery life is approximately 12 hours of continuous operation.
BIOPAC Hardware | TEL100C | Page 1 - 6
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
The TEL100C module set is a modulation/demodulation system.
•
The modulation process occurs in the TEL100M-C.
•
The demodulation process occurs in the TEL100D-C.
The TEL100M-C amplifies and filters the four input channels. After amplification the channel signals are time
division multiplexed (TDM) into a single transmission channel and are sent through the CBL117 (coaxial cable)
to the TEL100D-C. The TDM process intrinsically samples the four input channels at a rate of 2000 Hz / per
channel. This sampling process occurs in the TEL100M-C module and is independent of the MP System.
Prior to the TDM process, the four input channels are low-pass filtered to 500 Hz. The TDM process always
samples at 2000 Hz for each channel and each channel’s maximum bandwidth is 500 Hz. Accordingly, the
sampling process does not affect the user or the rate at which the MP150 samples data. The TEL100M-C
transmits an analog signal.
The TEL100D-C demodulates the transmission from the TEL100M-C and incorporates user-selectable 35 Hz
LPN or 500 Hz LP filters for removing noise and/or 50/60 Hz interference from any of the four input channels.
Filters (35 Hz LPN or 500 Hz LP) can be independently assigned on or off for each channel.
•
Use of the 35 Hz LPN filter automatically engages the notch filter (50 Hz or 60 Hz).
•
Use of the 500 Hz LP filter disables the notch filter.
The TEL100D-C produces a ±10 volt range analog output for each channel, and then these analog outputs are
sampled by the MP150.
•
Analog outputs are also available via the front panel of the UIM100C to direct the outputs to an alternate
recording system in conjunction with the MP System.
The TEL100C module set has an upper frequency limit of 500 Hz for each channel. The TEL100C is not
recommended for physiological measurements requiring higher frequency measurements (e.g. certain evoked
response applications). However, a wide range of physiological activity can be monitored with the TEL100C,
including ECG, EOG, EEG, GSR, SKT, PPG, RSP and surface EMG.
•
Specialized signal processing of physiologic variables (like RMS filtered EMG,
or QRS detection) are performed on the computer via calculation channels.
Up to four TEL100C module sets can be connected to a single MP System, providing a maximum of 16
transmitted channels. The TEL100C module set behaves the same as four alternate 100 series modules.
The 2000 Hz sampling rate of the TEL100C module set is independent of the MP System sampling rate.
•
If a TEL100C channel is low-pass filtered at 35 Hz LPN, it would be appropriate for
the MP System to sample that channel at 100 Hz or greater.
The TEL100C module set can be used independently from the MP System and, instead, with a different data
acquisition system. The recommended configuration requires the IPS100C in addition to the TEL100C. Up to four
TEL100C units can be used with a single IPS100C. The TEL100C channel outputs are then accessed via the front
panel of the IPS100C using CBL102 3.5 mm phone plug to BNC male cables.
For studies that employ surface electrodes (e.g., ECG, EMG), gain settings from 500 to 5000 are typically
appropriate. Similar settings are also appropriate for measurements with the RSP and PPG Simple Sensors.
Moreover, non-electrode measurements (temperature, pulse, respiration and so forth) are typically performed with
the hipass switch on the TEL100M-C set to DC (or 0.05 Hz to remove baseline drift), and the filter switch on the
TEL100D-C in the ON position.
No special software is required to use the TEL100C module set. The TEL100C operates on the same
AcqKnowledge software platform as the MP150. The TEL100C module set behaves equivalently to any four 100
series modules. All the surface electrode measurements (ECG, EEG, EMG and EOG) terminate in an SS2 Simple
Sensor shielded electrode lead assembly. See the section on Simple Sensors for information about the termination
of other physiological variables.
BIOPAC Hardware | TEL100C | Page 2 - 6
Updated: 9.4.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
MP100
POWER
BUSY
TEL100D-C
ZERO
ADJ
1
BIOPAC
9
2
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
16
0
ABCD
1 5 9 13
2 6 10 14
3 7 11 15
4 8 12 16
GAIN
500
1000
2000
5000
ON
FILTER
OFF
Enable
Filter
Enable
Filter
SHIELD
VIN+
GND
Enable
Filter
VINSHIELD
Enable
Filter
ECG
100A
1
INPUT
CBL117 or CBL118
Baseline (offset)
adjustment
Filter
.DC
.05Hz
.5Hz
On Off
. DC
.05Hz
.5Hz
.DC
.05Hz
.5Hz
C
A
Zero
Zero
Zero
Zero
B
Smart Sensor
Electrodes and
Transducers
D
50K
50K
50K
20K
20K
20K
10K
10K
10K
5K
5K
5K
2K
2K
2K
1K
500
1K
500
1K
500
200
200
200
100
100
50
50
CH A
Gain
CH B
Gain
100
50
CH C
Gain
CH D
Gain
Variable gain settings
(50x to 50,000x - 10 positions)
TEL100M-C
TEL100C—MP System setup
CBL117
This 10-meter cable connects the TEL100D-C receiver to the TEL100M-C transmitter and is included
in the TEL100C remote monitoring module set. The lightweight coaxial cable minimizes hindrance
caused by multiple heavy cables. For increased operating distance, use CBL118.
CBL118
This 60-meter cable connects the TEL100D-C receiver to the TEL100M-C transmitter and is
designed as an extension option for the TEL100C remote monitoring module set. The lightweight
coaxial cable minimizes hindrance caused by multiple heavy cables.
BIOPAC Hardware | TEL100C | Page 3 - 6
Updated: 9.4.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
TEL100C CALIBRATION
To begin using the TEL100C system:
1. Plug the TEL100D-C into the side of the UIM100C
2. Select a bank to assign the channels to (A, B, C and D). Make sure no other 100C series amplifiers
are assigned to those same channels. If certain channels in a particular bank are already being used
(and can’t be moved), then turn the telemetry channel off, via the “Enable” switch on the front panel
of the TEL100D-C.
3. Plug the CBL117 into the TEL100M-C and the TEL100D-C.
4. When recording in AcqKnowledge, turn on the TEL100M-C, by flipping the power switch from right
to left. The LED on the TEL100M-C should blink once then stay off. If the LED continues to blink,
the 9 V battery needs to be replaced (use 9 Volt alkaline batteries).
5. If bank 1 is selected on the TEL100D-C, then TEL100 Channels A, B, C and D will be assigned to
MP150/100 channels 1, 5, 9 and 13 respectively. When using AcqKnowledge, select these channels
when viewing data assigned to bank 1. The following documentation assumes that bank 1 is the
selected bank.
6. To determine correct operation, rotate the zero balance for channel A on the TEL100M-C. Channel 1
in AcqKnowledge should indicate a moving baseline that changes as the zero is adjusted. Set the zero
balance for channels A, B, C and D, so that the AcqKnowledge screen trace is centered. Plug the
desired Simple Sensor into the TEL100M-C.
For EDA/GSR measurements, the following Gain settings correspond to µmhos per Volt. Similarly, for
temperature measurements, the Gain settings listed correspond to °F per Volt. Using the scaling or rescaling
features in AcqKnowledge, these settings can be used to calibrate the signal.
The equipment calibrations for TEL100C and EDA (GSR) are:
10 micro-mhos = 1 mV, so for a gain of 1000, this translates to 10 micro-mhos per 1 volt.
A gain of 5000 on TEL100M would put the translation as 2 micro-mhos for 1 volt output.
Gain
50
100
200
500
1,000
2,000
5,000
10,000
20,000
50,000
EDA/GSR (SS3A)
µmhos/V
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
.5
.2
SKT (SS6) ºF/V
100
50
25
10
5
2.5
1
0.5
0.25
0.1
As with the SKT100C amplifier, temperature data collected with the TEL100C is centered around 90° F assuming
the SKT100C is set to “DC.” Supposing data was acquired using a gain setting of 500, a reading of 0 Volts would
correspond to 90° F, whereas a signal of +2 Volts (read on the MP150) would correlate to a temperature of 110°
F. These values could then be used to rescale the incoming signal from raw voltages to degrees Fahrenheit.
Modules can be set for 50 Hz or 60 Hz notch options to match the wall-power line frequency of the destination
country. The proper setting reduces noise from interfering signals when the notch filter is engaged. Generally,
wall-power line frequency is 60 Hz in the United States and 50 Hz in most of Europe; if necessary contact
BIOPAC to determine the correct line frequency. To reset the line frequency setting, adjust the bank of switches
on the back of the amplifier module.
BIOPAC Hardware | TEL100C | Page 4 - 6
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
Line Fr equency switch bank is on the back of the amplifier
(The TEL100 has an 8-switch bank vs. 2-switch bank shown)
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
50 Hz =
All 8
switches
DOWN
60 Hz =
All 8
switches
UP
TEL100C SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Number of Channels:
4
Sampling Rate:
2000 Hz (per channel) [Transparent to user]
Frequency response
(independent bandwidth settings per channel)
Low Pass Filters:
35 Hz LPN, 500 Hz LP
High Pass Filters:
DC, 0.05 Hz and 0.5 Hz
Channel Gain Control:
x50, x100, x200, x500, x1000, x2000, x5000, x10000, x20000, x50000
Output Range:
±9 V (analog)
Offset Control:
Yes
Input Signal Level:
Max: ±50 mV
Input Impedance:
2 MΩ (differential)
CMRR (1 kΩ source imbalance):110 dB min (50/60 Hz); see Shield Drive Operation
CMII:
11 MΩ (DC), >1000 MΩ (50/60 Hz)
CMIV:
±7 V (referenced to amplifier ground)
±1500 VDC (referenced to mains ground)
Noise Voltage:
0.1µV rms (0.05-30 Hz)
Transducer Excitation:
±5 V (10 V pk) @ 20 ma (total max current from four channels)
Signal/Crosstalk Ratio:
(0.05-500 Hz) 65 dB min
Signal/Noise Ratio:
(0.05-30 Hz) 75 dB min, (0.05-500 Hz) 65dB min
Encoding:
TDM-DSB/LC
Signal transmission range:
≤ 60 meters via coaxial cable
TEL100M Power Source:
9 V alkaline battery (24 hrs nominal)
Dimensions
Size
Weight
TEL100D-C:
4 cm x 11 cm x 19 cm
400 g
TEL100M-C:
9 cm x 15 cm x 3.3 cm
308 g
Pin-outs TEL100M-C:
Female DSUB 9 connector
pin 1: Shield Drive
pin 2: Vin+
pin 3: Ground
pin 4: Vinpin 5: Shield Drive
pin 6: Vref+ (+5 V excitation at 5 mA nominal)
pin 7: no connection
pin 8: no connection
pin 9: Vref- (-5 V excitation at 5 mA nominal)
NOTE: TEL100C-RF is discontinued. Contact BIOPAC for info/options.
BIOPAC Hardware | TEL100C | Page 5 - 6
Updated: 9.4.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
SIMPLE SENSOR (SS) ELECTRODES AND TRANSDUCERS FOR THE TEL100C
Simple Sensor (SS) electrodes and transducers are explicitly designed to
connect to the TEL100M-C transmitter, and most come with a 1.2 meter
cable. SS assemblies include specific circuitry to adapt various
physiological variables to the TEL100M-C.
Any SS electrode or transducer can be plugged into any TEL100M-C
input. The “smart” configuration of each electrode and transducer
assembly communicates its specific signal type. Certain transducers (such
as SS26 and SS27 Accelerometers) will reduce the overall recording life of
the 9 V battery, but it is generally possible to record biopotentials and other
signals for up to 12 hours.
Simple Sensors take the place of BIOPAC’s traditional electrodes and transducers in that they are only compatible
with the TEL100M-C amplifier. All the surface electrode measurements (ECG, EEG, EGG, EMG and EOG)
terminate in an SS2 (Simple Sensor shielded electrode lead assembly).
The Simple Sensor connector varies from the transducer connector, but functionality is the same. The following
physiological variables terminate as shown—see the corresponding transducer section for information about each
Simple Sensor.
SS #
Description
Corresponding Transducer
SS1A
SS2
SS3A
SS4A
SS5B
SS6
SS7
SS10
SS11LA
SS17
SS18
SS20
SS21
SS22
SS23
SS24
SS25
SS26LB
SS27L
SS28A
SS29
Unshielded Touchproof Electrode Adapter (10 cm)
Shielded Electrode Lead Assembly (1 meter)
Electrodermal Response Transducer
Pulse Plethysmogram Transducer
Respiratory Effort Transducer
Fast Response Temperature Probe
Skin Surface Temperature Probe
Hand Switch
Airflow Transducer (medium)
Physiological Sounds Microphone
Skin Surface Temperature Probe
Twin-Axis Goniometer (110 mm) — requires 2 channels
Twin-Axis Goniometer (180 mm) — requires 2 channels
Single Axis Torsiometer (110 mm)
Single Axis Torsiometer (180 mm)
Finger Goniometer (35 mm)
Hand Dynamometer
Tri-Axial Accelerometer (5 G) — requires 3 channels
Tri-Axial Accelerometer (50 G) — requires 3 channels
Heel/Toe Strike Transducer
Multi-lead ECG Cable — requires 3 channels
see TSD203
see TSD200
see TSD201
see TSD202A
see TSD202B
see TSD116A
see TSD117
see TSD108
see TSD202D
see TSD130A
see TSD130B
see TSD130C
see TSD130D
see TSD130E
see TSD121C
see TSD109C
see TSD109F
see TSD111A
see TSD155C
SIMPLE SENSOR CALIBRATION
Refer to the corresponding transducer section.
BIOPAC Hardware | TEL100C | Page 6 - 6
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BIOHARNESS WITH ACQKNOWLEDGE
BioHarness Data Logger and Telemetry Physiology Monitoring System
BioHarness-5 Data Logger and Telemetry Physiology Monitoring System (five-system package)
 Go to www.biopac.com for a video of BioHarness in use
 Complete BioHarness Users Guide is online
BioHarness™ with AcqKnowledge® software is a state-of-the-art lightweight portable biological data logger and
telemetry system. It monitors, analyzes and records a variety of physiological parameters including ECG,
respiration, temperature, posture, and acceleration. The BioHarness operates in RF (Radio Frequency)
transmitting mode for live viewing of data or data logging mode. In the data logging mode, the BioHarness logs
the data for later download to the AcqKnowledge software using the USB docking and charging cradle that comes
with the system. BioHarness applications include physiology, psychology, psychophysiology, exercise
physiology, ergonomics, human factors, and more.
BioHarness-5
This five-system BioHarness solution is ideal for small group studies.
BioHarness Data Channels







ECG – Raw
Breathing
RR Interval
Heart Rate
Respiration Rate
Posture
Vector Magnitude

Peak Acceleration
Breathing Wave Amplitude
X axis acceleration min
X axis acceleration peak
Y axis acceleration min
Y axis acceleration peak
Z axis acceleration peak
Z axis acceleration min







Live data viewing features include a variety of selectable waveforms and trend data including:




ECG
Heart Rate
RR values
Respiration



Tri-axial accelermeter (X, Y & Z)
Activity level
Posture (attitude of device in degrees from vertical)
BioHarness™ is a trademark of Zephyr Technology Limited.
BIOPAC Hardware | BioHarness | Page 1 - 2
Updated:4.30.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Specifications
Highpass 0; Low pass limited to 10.5 Hz, and sampled at 18 Hz. The maximum and minimum
measured in each second are reported.
Temperature Stabilizes to a new reading, following a step change, in 900 ms; the reporting rate is 1 Hz.
Posture
Highpass 0. Based on the accelerometer with a 6.5 Hz low pass filter to limit the noise resulting
from movement and provide a stable reading.
Activity
Requires the magnitude of the AC components of each axis; uses a digital 0.1 Hz highpass filter
and a 10.5 Hz lowpass hardware filter. Sampled at 18 Hz and accumulated for 1 second
reporting.
Respiration
Detect breathing rates from 3 BPM to 70 BPM (0.05 Hz to 1.166 Hz)
ECG
In hardware, the signal is filtered with a highpass filter at 15 Hz and a low pass filter at 78 Hz. The
low end filter cut-off enables heart rate measurement under vigorous activity (high resistance to
motion artifact). The sample frequency is 250 Hz.
Smart Fabric Strap
Chest Strap: Adjustable, Velcro® fastening
Material: Elasticized webbing incorporating Zephyr Smart Fabric sensors
Width: 50 mm
Weight: 50 grams
Size: BioHarness ships with a small-to-medium strap
Additional straps are available:
RXBHSTRAP-S-M (small to medium size frames, 69-84 cm; 27-33”)
RXBHSTRAP-M-XL
(medium to extra-large size frames, 84-104 cm; 33-41”)
BioHarness Transmitter/Logger
BioHarness or BioHarness 5 (five bundled systems for small group studies)
Frequency: Bluetooth 2.4 to 2.835 GHz
Sample Rate: 250 Hz Max.
Memory Capacity: ~480 hours
Transmit Range: Up to 100 m, environment and antenna dependent
Weight: 18 grams
Size: 28 mm (diameter) x 7 mm
Battery Life
~ 12-28 hours transmitting
~ 35 hours logging
Charging is intelligent - the device cannot be overcharged
o Quick Charge (90%): 1 hour from fully discharged
o Full charge (100%): 3 hours from fully discharged
Operating System
Windows® 8/7, Vista or XP
Connectivity
USB (either built-in chip or USB Bluetooth dongle)
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Acceleration
BIOPAC Hardware | BioHarness | Page 2 - 2
Updated:4.30.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BIOHARNESS TEAM SYSTEMS
TEAMSYSTEM-1A – Team System Physiology Monitoring for 1 Subject
TEAMSYSTEM-4A – Team System Physiology Monitoring for 4 Subjects
TEAMSYSTEM-1A
TEAMSystem-1 is an RF telemetry physiology monitoring system for one person. The TEAM System can be
expanded to simultaneously monitor multiple people in real time, anywhere in a stadium, field or other wide-area
setting. Each subject wears a BioHarness system that telemeters heart rate, respiration rate, temperature, posture,
activity, and acceleration back to a central TEAM central recording station. A single TEAM recording station can
receive data from multiple subjects.
Key TEAM BioHarness™ sensors
– heart rate
– breathing rate (patented)
– activity
– posture
• Radio built in and memory for 24 days
• Works under extreme activity
• Fabric-based, dry contacts—no skin break down
• Comfortable over long periods, washable
• Unobtrusive, light and small
• No wires
• Logging or Radio
• Detect ventilatory (anaerobic) threshold
• Fitness and fatigue using well known methods
– Heart Rate reduction at end of activity
– Anaerobic threshold detection
• Biomechanical markers give context (at rest vs. active)
• Individually configurable thresholds and bio alarm algorithms for prioritization
TEAMSYSTEM-4A
TEAMSYSTEM-4A is an RF telemetry physiology monitoring system with the same functionality as
TEAMSYSTEM-1A but expanded for 4 people. Includes x 4 BioHarness units, 4-unit charger and any size
combination of 4 straps.
BIOPAC Hardware | TEAM Systems | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 10.7.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TEAMSYSTEM-1 and TEAMSYSTEM-4 Components
BioHarness Unit x 1 (Unit x 4 for TEAMSYSTEM-4A)
BioHarness Charger (holds 4 units in TEAMSYSTEM-4A)
Smart Fabric™ strap - specify size when ordering: Small fits 71-97 cm (28-38 inches) or Large fits 91-122 cm
(36-48 inches) (TEAMSYSTEM-4A – specify any combination of four straps)
USB Power
5 m USB ext cable
1 m USB A to miniB cable
Support Docs (Quick Guide, Install Guide, User Guide)
Team System CD
System Case (TEAMSYSTEM-4A)
Antenna with stand and case (TEAMSYSTEM-4A)
TEAM ECHO-L – Team BioHarness Device with Large Strap
TEAM BioHarness device with large strap for use with TEAM System station. Large strap holds BioHarness
device and fits 91-122 cm (36-48").
TEAM ECHO-S – Team BioHarness Device with Small Strap
TEAM BioHarness device with small strap for use with TEAM System station. Small strap holds BioHarness
device and fits 71-97 cm (28-38").
See also: BioHarness Data Logger and Telemetry System
Note: BioHarness requires a computer with integrated Bluetooth or an external USB Bluetooth dongle (not
included with system purchase).
BIOPAC Hardware | TEAM Systems | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 10.7.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
IN-LINE POWER SUPPLIES
AC150A Power Supply
AC137A Power Supply
All AC series in-line power supplies are CE marked for the EC Low Voltage Directive and EMC Directive, and
all have UL and TUV approval. The units have standard IEC power input plugs and operate over mains power
ratings of 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz. Each includes a USA or EURO power cord. (ACCORD US/EURO,
ACCORD-HUS Hospital Grade)
AC101A
±12 volt, +5 volt, 1 amp Connects the LDF100C to the AC mains wall outlet. One supply is
included with each LDF100C module.
AC137A
+6 volt, 1.5 amp
Powers the heating element for any of the TSD137 series pneumotachs.
AC150A
+12 volt, 4.17 amp
Connects the MP150 System to the AC mains wall outlet. One supply
is included with each MP150 Starter system.
AC300A
+12 volt, 1.25 amp
Connects the MP or GASSYSTEM2 to mains wall outlet. One supply
is included with MP36/35 system, MP100 or GASSYSTEM2.
See also: IPS100C Isolated Power Supply
BIOPAC Hardware | In-line Power Supplies | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 12.19.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BAT100A RECHARGEABLE BATTERY PACK
BAT100A with Recharger
The BAT100A is a high energy density and lightweight battery pack designed to operate MP150 or MP3X
Systems. A universal input voltage 3 amp battery charger is also included. The battery pack is lightweight and
comes with a supplied carrying case with integral shoulder strap. The carrying case holds battery pack, charger
and all associated cords.
The BAT100A chemistry is Lithium Iron Phosphate (LiFePO4). A key advantage over other lithium-ion batteries
is the superior thermal and chemical stability, which provides better safety characteristics than other lithium-ion
batteries with different cathode materials. Due to the significantly stronger bonds between oxygen atoms in the
phosphate, oxygen is not readily released, and as a result, lithium iron phosphate cells are virtually incombustible
in the event of mishandling during charge or discharge, and can handle high temperatures without decomposing.
Ships as USA or EURO version based on delivery address.
BAT100A replaces BAT100 effective June 2011.
Operation
1. Only charge the BAT100A (12 V @ 15 AH LiFePO4) using the included charger.
2. Discontinue use of the BAT100A when the performance of the MP System begins to deteriorate.
Charging the Battery Pack
1. When the BAT100A is being charged, the charger will indicate a RED charging LED.
2. When the BAT100A is fully charged, the charger will indicate a GREEN charging LED.
Storage
1. Store the Battery Pack in a fully charged condition.
2. Store the Battery Pack in a cool place (normal room temperature or lower).
BIOPAC Hardware | BAT100A | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BAT100A BATTERY PACK SPECIFICATIONS
Battery
Chemistry:
Output Capacity:
Working Output Voltage Range:
Output Connector:
Operating Time:
4
LiFePO (Lithium Iron Phosphate)
12 V @ 15 amp-hours
13.2 V – 12 V
DC Barrel Plug (5.5 mm OD, 2.1 mm ID – Center positive)
MP3X with 4 sensors: 26 hours nominal
MP150 with 4 modules: 16 hours nominal
Charge Time:
5 hours (nominal)
Recharge Cycles: (number of cycles to 80% of original capacity): 1500 (typical minimum)
Operating Temperature Range:
0° C to 45° C
Storage Temperature Range:
-20° C to 60° C
Weight:
2.45 kg
Dimensions: (includes carrying case)
14 cm (high) x 19 cm (wide) x 14 cm (deep)
Battery Charger (For BAT100A only)
Maximum Nominal Charge Voltage:
Input:
Output Connector:
Operating Temperature Range:
Storage Temperature Range:
Weight:
Dimensions:
14.4 V @ 3.0 amps (Charges at 3 amps to 14.4 V, then potentiostatic at
14.4 V until current is less than 0.5 amps)
120/240 VAC @ 50/60 Hz (USA or EURO power cord)
DC Barrel Socket (5.5 mm OD, 2.1 mm ID – Center positive)
0° C to 45° C
-20° C to 60° C
285 grams
3.8 cm (high) x 6.4 cm (wide) x 15 cm (long)
BIOPAC Hardware | BAT100A | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
CBL100 SERIES
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ANALOG CONNECTION CABLES
CBL100 series—selected cables
The CBL100 Series analog connection cables are used to connect the stand-alone equipment to the MP System.
Analog outputs (from chart recorders, force plates, pre-amplifiers, oscilloscopes, etc.) can be connected to the
UIM100C module or other MP System modules. Select the cable number with the plug corresponding to the
output jack of the equipment. Use one cable per recording channel.
CBL100
2 meter; 3.5 mm mono phone plug to 3.5 mm mono phone plug
CBL101
2 meter; 3.5 mm mono phone plug to male RCA
CBL102
2 meter; 3.5 mm mono phone plug to male BNC
CBL105
2 meter; 3.5 mm mono phone plug to 6.35 mm (¼”) mono phone plug
CBL106
10 cm; 2 mm pin plugs to female BNC
The CBL106 is a multi-purpose adapter that can be used to:
Connect BNC terminated equipment to the DA100C
Connect a BNC cable to the digital I/O lines on the UIM100C
Connect the STM100C to nerve conduction chambers (via the CBL101)
CBL107
10 meter, 3.5 mm mono plug to 3.5 mm mono phone plug
CBL108
60 meter, 3.5 mm mono plug to 3.5 mm mono phone plug
CBL110A
DB37 F/F Ribbon Cable. Use this 3-meter ribbon cable to interface a SuperLab
presentation system with the STP100C Isolated Digital Interface for an MP150 or
MP100 System. Pins 19 and 21 are GND; pin 20 is +5 V.
CBL110C
CBL117
DB25 M/F Ribbon Cable. Use this 3-meter ribbon cable to send digital I/O info to
the STP100C Isolated Digital Interface to interface visual presentation systems
that use a computer's parallel printer port (E-Prime, DirectRT, MediaLab,
Inquisit, etc.) with an MP150 or MP100 System. Pins 18 and 25 are GND.
This Y-adapter for the CBL110C parallel port cable allows users to interface the
output from a parallel port with two devices, the STP100C and another piece of
hardware. DB25 parallel male/dual female Y-splitter; 20 cm (8”).
10 meter RCA male plug to RCA male R/A plug for TEL100C
CBL118
60 meter RCA male plug to RCA male R/A plug for TEL100C
CBL121
This cable will connect Biodex System 4 or System 3 Revision 2 Dynamometers
to a BIOPAC MP150 System to report Torque, Velocity, Position, and Sync
values. One end of the 3 m cable terminates with a dSub15 male connector to
interface the Biodex device and the other end terminates with four 3.5 mm phone
inputs to connect to the MP150 via UIM100C or INISO.
CBL110C-Y
BIOPAC Hardware | CBL100 Series | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 6.6.2015
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
EXTERNAL DEVICE INTERFACES TO AN MP SYSTEM USING UIM100C
If a different interface is required, contact BIOPAC to discuss custom options. All brand or product names are the
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Custom cables are available from BIOPAC for connectors not listed.
Company
Device
Connector Type
BIOPAC
cable
AMTI
MSA-6: Force Plate Amp (Use AMTI cable 5405C)
MCA: Force Plate Amp (Use AMTI cable 5405C)
Axon
All Amplifiers
BNC female
CBL102
Buxco
MAX II
3.5 mm mini-phone jack
CBL100
Data Sciences
International
Physio Tel Receiver with ART Analog Adapter
BNC female
CBL102
Gould
6600 Series
BNC female
CBL102
Grass
Model 7 (J6)
3.5 mm mini-phone jack
CBL100
P55, P122, and P511 Series
BNC female
CBL102
HSE PLUGSYS
AH 69-0026 Dissolved Oxygen Meter
BNC female
CBL102
AH 60-2994-2999 Research Grade Isometric Transducers
AH 6-03000/3001 Research Grade Isotonic Transducers
4 mm double banana
jack
CBL102 with
CBL106
Kent
TRN(001-012) Amplifiers
BNC female
CBL102
Kissler
Force Plates
BNC female
CBL102
Millar
TCB600: Transducer Control Unit
¼" phone jack
CBL105
TC-510 (Specify Grass Cable interface #850-3028)
6-pin
TCI100 (to
DA100C)
Sonometrics
Sonomicrometer Systems with Optional Adapter
BNC female
CBL102
Transonic
T106, T206, T106U, T206U: Animal Research Flowmeters
T110: Lab Tubing Flowmeter
BLF21D/21: Laser Doppler Meters
BNC female
CBL102
Triton
CBI System
System 6
¼” phone jack
CBL105
Tucker Davis
All Digital BioAmp Systems
BNC female
CBL102
WPI
705: Electro 705 Electrometer
721: Cyto 721 Electrometer
767: Intra 767 Electrometer
773: Duo 773 Electrometer
DAM50: Bio-amplifier
DBA Series Digital Biological Amps
DVC-1000: Voltage Current Clamp
EVC-4000-(1-4): Voltage Clamp
FD223: Dual Electrometer
ISO2: Dissolved Oxygen Meter & Electrode
ISODAM: Low Noise Preamplifier
ISO-DAM8A-(1-8): Bio-amplifier System
NOMK2: ISO-NO Mark II Nitric Oxide Meter
TRN001, TRN002, TRN011, TRN012: Isometric Transducers
VF-4: 4-Channel Buffer Amplifier
BNC female
CBL102
DAM60, DAM70, DAM80: Bio-amplifiers
3.5 mm mini-phone jack
CBL100
System 3 Revision 2
System 4
3.5 mm mini-phone jack
CBL121
Harvard
Biodex
BNC female
BIOPAC Hardware | CBL100 Series | Page 2 - 2
CBL102
Updated: 6.6.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
CBL200 SERIES
LEAD CONNECTOR CONVERSION CABLES
See also: Guide to External Device Interfaces for connections to common devices
CBL200
CBL200 consists of a 2 mm female socket leading to a 1.5 mm female Touchproof socket. This 10
cm extension is required when converting an old-style 2mm pin electrode or transducer lead to a
1.5 mm Touchproof socket for connection to any of the 100C-series Biopotential or Transducer
amplifiers or STMISO series modules. One CBL200 is required for each old-style 2mm pin.
CBL201
CBL201 is a 2 mm male pin leading to a 1.5 mm male Touchproof pin and is 10 cm long. Use
CBL201 to:
 Connect a female socket 1.5 mm Touchproof electrode lead to the DA100C amplifier.
 Connect a ground electrode lead (e.g. LEAD110A) to the UIM100C module—required
when using the TSD150 active electrodes.
 Convert a Touchproof 1.5 mm female socket electrode or transducer lead to an old-style 2
mm pin, for connection to any of the 100B-series Biopotential or Transducer amplifier
modules.
One CBL201 is required for each Touchproof socket. For MP36/35/45 Systems CBL201 is used to
update older model SS1L Shielded Lead Adapters.
CBL202
CBL202 consists of a female mono 6.3 mm (¼”) phone socket leading to two 2 mm male pins.
This multi-purpose adapter is 10 cm long and can be used to:



Connect a 6.3 mm male mono phone cable to the digital I/O lines on the UIM100C.
Connect microphones or signal sources that terminate in a 6.3 mm male mono phone plug
to the DA100C.
Connect the STM100C to nerve conduction chambers (CBL105 required).
CBL203
CBL203 consists of a female mono 6.3 mm (¼”) phone socket leading to two female 1.5 mm
Touchproof sockets and is 10 cm long.
CBL203 is primarily designed to connect YSI 400 series biomedical temperature probes to the
SKT100C temperature amplifier, but it can also be used to connect certain male mono 6.3 mm
(¼”) phone plug terminated cables or transducers to 100C-series Biopotential or Transducer
amplifiers.
CBL204
CBL204 consists of a single female 1.5 mm Touchproof socket leading to two male 1.5 mm
Touchproof pins and is 25 cm long.
The CBL204 plugs into any 100C series Biopotential amplifier input or STMISO series stimulator
output and provides two sockets to connect to electrode leads terminating in a Touchproof “Y”
electrode lead adapter.
This Touchproof “Y” electrode lead adapter is required when multiple electrode sites are to be
connected to a single amplifier input or stimulator output.
Multiple CBL204s can be plugged together to reference three or more electrode leads to the same
input or output.
For MR applications see the CBL228 on the following page.
BIOPAC Hardware | CBL200 Series | Page 1 - 2
Updated: 4.27.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
CBL204MRI
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
This “Y” cable is functionally identical to
the CBL204, but designed for use in the
MRI environment when referencing two or
more electrodes to a single biopotential
amplifier input. Primarily used for NICO
(noninvasive cardiac output) measurements
in the MRI. Two Touchproof male inputs to
one Touchproof female input, cable length 5 cm.
MRI Use:
MR Conditional to 9T
Components: Carbon composition, tin plated and gold plated brass connectors
 For two or more amplifier inputs to one electrode, use JUMP100C-MRI; two Touchproof
female to one Touchproof male—MRI equivalent of JUMP100C.
CBL205
CBL205 is a Touchproof male to female
1.5 mm AC-coupled electrode lead adapter
and is 10 cm long. One end of the adapter
plugs into the ground on the biopotential
amplifier and the other end accepts the
electrode lead.
Use CBL205 when more than one ground is required while recording electrodermal activity (a.k.a.
galvanic skin response).
To record EDA with other biopotential signals (ECG, EEG, EOG, EGG, EMG, ERS), BIOPAC
recommends using CBL205 connected to one ground on any of the biopotential amplifiers. The
subject will be grounded through the Vin- of the EDA electrodes, but in some cases it is necessary
to have more than one ground; in such cases, use an AC-coupled lead adapter (CBL205) to prevent
galvanic ground loops.
For example, if—while recording a biopotential and EDA—the EDA electrode is removed during
a stage of the experiment, you will want to maintain ground for the biopotential. To always have a
ground and no ground loops: connect the Vin- lead of the EDA as ground and connect an ACcoupled ground to the biopotential amplifier GND.
Safety Note—If using any two EDA100C, EBI100C or NICO100C modules at the same time on
the same MP System, ground loops can be a problem due to non-isolation between module
excitation currents. A possible solution is to record with one module connected to a separate
IPS100C and HLT100C, and the remaining module to the MP System. Use OUTISO signal
isolators to connect the first module outputs (via HLT100C) to the UIM100C on the MP System
side.
CBL206
Lead junction TPF to 4X TPM. Reference four electrodes
from one. Connect via the MEC110C to the NICO100C and
EBI100C cardiac output amplifier modules.
CBL207
1 m, BNC (m) to 2 x 1.5 mm TP (m).
Use with:
 Touchproof (f) electrodes
 STM200 Unipolar Pulse Stimulator Module
 MECMRI-STIMISO cable/filter system to connect to
the STM200 in the MRI control room
BIOPAC Hardware | CBL200 Series | Page 2 - 2
Updated: 4.27.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MEC SERIES MODULE EXTENSION CABLES
MEC100C and MEC110C
These module extension cables are used to increase the distance between subject and recording system, allowing
increased subject movement and comfort. Each extension cable attaches to one amplifier; electrodes and
transducers plug into the extension cable’s molded plastic input plug. The 3-meter extension includes a clip for
attaching to a subject’s belt loop or clothing.
The MEC series extension cables contain no ferrous parts (less the removable clothing clip). The MEC100C is
designed for Transducer amplifiers. The MEC110C and MEC111C are designed for Biopotential amplifiers. Use
the MEC100C or MEC110C to increase the lead length to the amplifier.
The MEC111C is required for the protection of a system and Biopotential amplifiers when electrocautery or
defibrillation equipment is used while recording data.
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES
1. MEC series cables are not to be used on humans when they are undergoing electrosurgery or
defibrillation. In fact, no BIOPAC equipment should be connected to human subjects during the course of
defibrillation or electrosurgery.
2. When MEC series cables are used, be careful to preserve the isolation of MP system during
defibrillation. No external lab equipment should be connected directly to the UIM100C, IPS100C or any
included amplifier module. To preserve MP system isolation, all connections of this type should be made
using INISO or OUTISO with the HLT100C. To verify that the isolation of the recording system is intact,
use a multimeter to measure resistance from subject ground (on biopotential amplifier) to mains ground;
there should be no DC conductivity.
3. Do not connect the electrode leads attached to the MEC series cables directly to defibrillator paddles.
When using MEC cables, electrode leads should be connected to the subject directly and not via the
defibrillator paddles.
COMMON EXTENSIONS
MEC100C 100C-series Transducer amplifiers to 1.5 mm male Touchproof pins
MEC110C 100C-series Biopotential amplifiers to 1.5 mm male Touchproof pins
MEC111C 100C-series Biopotential amplifiers to 1.5 mm male Touchproof pins—Protected
LESS COMMON EXTENSIONS
MEC100
DA100C or 100B-series Biopotential or Transducer amplifiers to 2 mm socket inputs
MEC101
100B-Series Biopotential amplifiers to 2 mm socket inputs – Protected
MEC110
100B-series Biopotential or Transducer amplifiers to Touchproof inputs
MEC111
100B-series Biopotential amplifiers to Touchproof inputs—Protected
BIOPAC Hardware | MEC Series | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HMD1B HEAD-MOUNTED DISPLAY
HMD1B with 3 DOF Tracker
Optimize the VR experience with immersive 2D or 3D on dual HD OLED displays—known for outstanding
brightness, contrast, color and clarity—plus built-in virtual 5.1-channel surround sound.
The HMD1B does not include a head tracker; a head tracker will be required for worlds that demand motion.
Orientation Tracker (3 DOF) - TRACK2 recommended.
The HMD1B with tracker provides precision 3-DOF orientation tracking for head tracking—yaw, pitch, and roll.
USB connection, and connects directly to the VR Toolkit that is included in all VR Workstations.
HMD1B SPECIFICATIONS
3D Ready
Display
Aspect Ratio: 16:09
Display Device: OLED Panel x 2
Display Resolution: 1280 x 720
Field of View: 45 degree
Gradation: RGB 24-bit
Virtual Image Size: 750 inches at 65 feet distance (effectively 150" at 12 feet)
Video Features
Picture Mode: Standard; Cinema; Dynamic; Custom
Picture Settings: Clear Black; Picture; Brightness; Color temperature; Sharpness
Picture control for dark adaptation: Yes
Pure Image Realizer: reduction for Frame noise, Block noise, and Mosquito noise
SBM for Video: Yes
Audio Features
Linear PCM : 2/ 5.1
Preset Audio Mode : Standard; Cinema; Game; Pure AV; Off (2 ch)
Virtual Surround : Yes (5.1)
Headphones
Driver Unit: Open air dinamic
Frequency Response: 12-24,000 Hz
Impedance: 24 Ω
Maximum Input: 1,000 mW (IEC)
Sensitivity: 106 dB/mW
Convenience Features
Lens Span Adjustment: 5 steps
Adjust forehead and headband straps to customize for small to large heads
Forehead Supporter
Nose Supporter
Sheild for Outside Light
Auto Power Off (6 hours)
Prolonged Viewing Warning (3 hours)
Video Pass-through Function (when Glasses are off)
Wearing Sensor
Lock
BIOPAC Hardware | HMD1B-TRACK | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HMD2A HEAD-MOUNTED DISPLAY—HIGH RES
The HMD2A* offers virtual and augmented reality developers and
users a high-fidelity head-mounted display with unprecedented visual
clarity and acuity at an affordable price.
The HMD2A is built around a high-contrast Organic Light Emitting
Diode (OLED) microdisplay. The microdisplay provides 1280 x 1024
pixels per eye in a low-power, compact design. The patent-pending
eyepieces display the image across a 50° diagonal field-of-view with
<2% distortion, making the see-through compatible optics ideal for
professional augmented reality applications that require precision
alignment between real and virtual environments. The HMD2A works
equally well as a see-through or fully immersive display. A removable
cover can be quickly applied to allow users the flexibility to develop both virtual and augmented reality
applications using the same HMD. And the HMD2A supports standard motion tracking devices from InterSense,
Ascension, Polhemus, and others via a tracker platform mounted on the back of the HMD.
The simplicity and performance of this HMD is at the forefront of immersive display technology and
development. Unsurpassed visual fidelity is designed into a lightweight, ergonomically friendly device that is
both easy to use and comfortable to wear. HDMI cables from the HMD plug directly into the image source with
no additional video processing electronics. Stereo headphones, built-in microphone, and programmable buttons
compliment the high-resolution visuals to provide the rich, immersive experience required in the most demanding
training and simulation applications.
HMD2A SPECIFICATIONS
Optical
Microdisplay
Video
Audio
Controls
Power
Physical
Compliancy
Mfg Warranty
FOV
FOV
FOV
See-Thru Transmission
Pupil Size
Eye Relief
Geometric Distortion
Brightness (MAX)
Contrast
Image Defect Criteria
Spatial Resolution
Display Technology
Resolution
Color Depth
Video Input Format
Video Interface
Latency
Headphone Response
Headphone Impedance
Microphone
Mic Transducer Principle
Interpupillary Distance (IPD)
Power Supply
Size (envelope)
Mass
CE Compliance
RoHS Compliance
Included: one year
Vertical 32°
Horizontal 40°
Binocular (diagonal) 50°
44%
10, Non-Real mm
23 mm
-2% Maximum (Barrel)
23 fL
10000:1
available on request
1.88 arcmn/pxl
Organic Light-Emitting Diode (OLED)
SXGA 1280 x 1024
24-BIT (8 bits per R,G,B)
SXGA 1280 x 1024 @ 60 Hz
DVI over HDMI
< 0.002 ms
15-25,000 Hz
60 Ohms
Standard Integrated, Shell-mounted Microphone
Electret
Range: 53-73 (Independent left and right) mm
Input: 100-240 VAC, 0.3A 50-60 Hz. Output: +5 V DC, 2 A min
14.2 L x 9.0 W x 8.6 H max in
1050 g
CE Compliant
RoHS Compliant
additional 1-year warranty add-ons available up to 3 years max
*nVIS nVisor ST50
Specifications are subject to change without notice
BIOPAC Hardware | HMD2A | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 1.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HMD2 HEAD-MOUNTED DISPLAY—HIGH RES
HMD2 is a state-of-the-art head-mounted display (HMD) for advanced virtual
reality applications. It incorporates high-resolution color microdisplays with
custom engineered optics to deliver unsurpassed visual acuity in a wide field-ofview format.
HMD2 SPECIFICATIONS
Monocular FOV:
60°
Overlap :
100%
Brightness:
25 fL max (adjustable)
Arc Minute Per Pixel: < 2.2
Display Technology:
LCOS Reflective (CRL Opto)
Video Formats:
1280 x 1024 60 Hz (analog or DVI)
Color: 24
Bit
Stereo Dual channel support
Mechanical
IPD Adjustment:
55-73 mm
Eye Relief:
23 mm to 30 mm
Weight: ~
1 kg
Power Input:
AC 100 V - 240 V
Display Control Brightness
NOTE: The HMD2 was discontinued in January of 2015. The HMD2A is the current product offering.
BIOPAC Hardware | HMD2 | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 1.21.2015
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
TRACK2 ORIENTATION TRACKER (3 DOF)
This multi-purpose subminiature 3D orientation sensor is designed for use in real-time orientation tracking
applications. It includes three types of sensing elements (tri-axial MEMS gyros, tri-axial MEMS accelerometers,
and tri-axial magneto-resistive magnetometers) and comes equipped with an onboard processor and embedded
orientation algorithms allowing for direct integration into systems without interfacing a PC. For PC-based
integrations, the system comes with a set of libraries that allow users to modify algorithm and/or sensor
parameters on-the-fly to suit individual protocols.
TRACK2 interfaces via USB and connects directly to the VR Toolkit included in all VR Workstations; intro,
advanced, and ultimate Workstations include one TRACK2.
Also available pre-mounted to high-res head mounted display—see HMD1B-TRACK.
Use additional sensors to track limb movement.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output data: Quaternion, Euler angles, Raw data (angular rate, acceleration, magnetic field strength)
Internal update rate: 500 Hz
Start-up time: < 1 sec
Range (pitch, roll, yaw): full 3D
Angular Resolution: = 0.01 deg
Static Accuracy: yaw = 1 deg; pitch, roll = 0.2 deg
Repeatability Accuracy (yaw): < 0.5 deg
Gyro Range: ±1200 deg/sec
Accelerometer range: ±2 or 6 g
Magnetometer range: ±2 gauss
Operating temperature: -40° to +85° C
Storage temperature: -40° to +85° C
Electrical Supply voltage: 3.5 to 5.7 V
Power consumption: < 300 mW
Interface
Standard: TIA/EIA-485A (half-duplex)
Baud Rate: 1,000,000 bps
Byte Size: 8 bits
Stop Bites: 1 bits
Parity: No
Dimensions: 50.7 × 14.5 × 9.2 mm
BIOPAC Hardware | TRACK2 | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HDS100 HAPTIC DELIVERY SYSTEM
The HDS100 haptic delivery system provides tactile feedback during virtual reality experiments. The system
includes:
 audio amplifier that connects to a computer sound card
 interface cables (3): HDS100 to an existing sound card (3.5 mm stereo phone plug to dual RCA Y);
HDS100 to actuators (18 gauge, 7.3 m); and signal to HDS100 and speakers (stereo splitter, 13.5 mm)
 actuators & isolators that vibrate based on the sound from the sound card
Actuators are placed under chair legs or on a platform and deliver vibrations based on the VR environment (e.g.
movement of elevators).
The system is compatible with SuperLab, E-Prime, Vizard VR Toolkit, and other presentation systems that
interface the computer’s sound card.
HDS100 SPECIFICATIONS
Includes:




1 amplifier
Features remote control and and rear-mounted IR Input
Bass management, filter and gain control for limitless personalization
Drives up to four linear actuators with two channels 150 W each RMS (6 ohm)
Rack mountable with optional ears
Variable Low Pass Filter (20-600 Hz)
Three inputs (Left, Right, LFE)
Signal sense auto on/off
Ultraquiet variable speed fan
Size 2U (43 cm x 9 cm x 36 cm) or (48 cm x 9 cm x 36 cm with optional Rackmount Adapters)
2 linear actuators—These electromagnetic motors deliver low-frequency
motion to a wide range of furnishings.
2 motion isolators—The motion isolators reduce the amount of tactile
motion transmitted to the floor and surrounding environment, effectively
isolating the tactile sensation to the couch or chair.
Interface cables
o HDS100 to an existing sound card: 3.5 mm
stereo phone plug to dual RCA Y (CBL120)
o HDS100 to actuators: 18 gauge, 7.3 m
o signal to HDS100 and speakers: stereo
splitter, 13.5 mm
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Replacement actuators/isolators available as RXHDS.
MP Research System | VR HDS100 | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 7.13.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SDS100 SCENT DELIVERY SYSTEM
Self contained scent dispersal system—no compressor needed!
Compact, computer-controlled (USB), eight-cartridge scent* machine uses compressed air to project different
scents on cue for a predetermined time followed by a burst of unscented air to clear for the next scent.
System includes software to control the delivery and duration of scents from the SDS100 unit. Scents can be
triggered from a virtual reality environment. Dispersed scent covers approximately 3-6 meters in front of unit,
depending on how many fans are used.
*Scent cartridges not included; order as SCENT—over 100 scent options available.
SDS100 SPECIFICATIONS
Scent receptacles: 8
Scent dispersement*: 3 m - 6 m
Scent control: See
App Note 238 - Software options for controlling the SDS100 Scent Delivery System
Output: 1/4" NPT male output
Power:
Description Wall Mount AC Adapter (2-prong flat blade)
Input 100-240 V, 0.7 amps, 47-63 Hz
Output 12 V, 2.1 amps
Shipping Weight: 5.44 kg (12 lbs.)
Product Dimensions (LxWxH): 41.9 cm x 25.4 cm x 14 cm (16-1/2" x 10" x 5-1/2")
BIOPAC Hardware | SDS100 | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 12.6.2013
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
EYE TRACKING SYSTEMS
BIOPAC offers an array of monocular and binocular eye tracking systems that are easily integrated with stimulus
presentations, VR environments and other media.
Systems
Monocular Part Numbers
Binocular Part Numbers
Fixed System with HeadLock™ positioner
and 90 Hz, 220 Hz, or 400 Hz camera
EYEFIXMONOCLAMP
EYEFIXBINOCLAMP
Movable Head for HMD1
EYETRKHMD1B-M90
EYETRKHMD1B-B90
Movable Head for HMD2
EYETRAKHMD2MONO
EYETRAKHMD2BINO
Movable Head for 3 -party HMD
EYETRAKHMD3RDMO
EYETRAKHMD3RDBI
Frame Mounted Scene Camera
EYEFRAMESCENEMO
EYEFRAMESCENEBI
rd
The following Analog output and Interface cables are included with all Eye Tracking packages:
 Analog output (4 channels)—real-time analog voltage signals
o 4-Channel 12-Bit Analog Output Board with 48-Bits of Digital I/O
o AnalogOut software for use with ViewPoint PC-6
o 0.61 meter 100 Pin High Density Connector to 2 50 Pin IDC
o 50 Pin Universal Screw Terminal and screws
o TTL capabilities
 Interface cables to MP System: CBL100 x 4 and CBLEPM x 4
o Use the full power of the MP Research System and AcqKnowledge software.
o To record biopotential signals in the same record while maintaining subject isolation, add an
HLT100C and one INISO for each eye track channel
FIXED HEAD SYSTEMS (Monocular-EYEFIXMONOCLAMP, Binocular-EYEFIXBINOCLAMP)
These turnkey monocular or binocular eye tracking systems include the HeadLock™ positioner with 90 Hz, 220 Hz,
or 400 Hz camera(s). The fixed head system provides a real-time display of gaze point history, gaze period, fixation
duration, pupil size. The system interfaces with BIOPAC data acquisition and analysis systems to combine eye
tracking information with other physiological data and stimulus presentation markers.
Fixed Head Binocular System with Clamp (EYEFIXBINOCLAMP)
Includes:
 USB capture device
 Close Focus Camera (90 Hz, 220 Hz, or 400 Hz) and illuminator system (2 cameras for Binocular system)
 ViewPoint PC-60 software—record vertical position, horizontal position, pupil size, etc. (Binocular option
enabled for Binocular system)
BIOPAC Hardware | EYE TRACKING SYSTEMS | Page 1 - 5
Updated: 3.19.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
MOVABLE HEAD SYSTEMS (Monocular- EYETRKHMD1B-M90, Binocular- EYETRKHMD1B-B90)
These turnkey systems include everything you need for monocular or binocular HMD eye tracking—including the
Sony HMZ-1 head mounted display with eye tracking cameras and illuminator systems installed.
Monocular Movable Head System
Includes:
 Sony HMZ-1 (HMD1B)
 USB capture device
 ViewPoint PC-60 software—record vertical position, horizontal position, pupil size, etc.
 One eye camera and illuminator system (x 2 cameras and illuminator systems for Binocular system)
o 90 Hz USB 2.0 camera
o Eye camera(s) and illuminator system(s) include either a color 70º horizontal field of view scene
camera or a black and white 60º horizontal field of view scene camera
 Universal power supply with country-specific adapter and 10 m video and power cable
 Waist pack cable holder (not shown)
 Additional hardware specs as shown
MOVABLE HEAD - HMD2 (Monocular-EYETRAKHMD2MONO, Binocular-EYETRAKHMD2BINO)
This turnkey system provides everything required to add monocular/binocular HMD eye tracking to an nVis SX
HMD, including hardware, software, and professional mounting to the HMD at the factory. The system can be
added to a new nVis SX purchased from BIOPAC (HMD2) or to an existing nVis SX HMD; if the system is being
added to an existing nVis SX, the unit must be returned to BIOPAC for modification.
Part numbers:
MOVABLE HEAD - FOR 3RD PARTY HMD (Monocular-EYETRAKHMD3RDMO, BinocularEYETRAKHMD3RDBI)
This system includes everything you need to mount monocular HMD eye tracking to existing third-party HMD.
BIOPAC Hardware | EYE TRACKING SYSTEMS | Page 2 - 5
Updated: 3.19.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
SCENE CAMERA (Monocular-EYEFRAMESCENEMO, Binocular-EYEFRAMESCENEBI)
Monocular & Binocular Viewpoint PC-60 Scene Camera Versions with EyeFrame hardware.
Binocular Scene Camera System
Includes:
 USB capture device
 ViewPoint PC-60 software scene camera version—record vertical position, horizontal position, pupil size,
etc. (Binocular version enabled for Binocular system)
 Eye camera(s) and illuminator system(s) mounted to the EyeFrame hardware
o EyeFrame hardware includes eye camera and illuminator system and either a color 70º horizontal
field of view scene camera or a black and white 60º horizontal field of view scene camera
 Universal power supply with country specific adaptor and 10 M video and power cable.
 Waist pack cable holder (not shown)
 Additional hardware specs as shown
BIOPAC Hardware | EYE TRACKING SYSTEMS | Page 3 - 5
Updated: 3.19.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
EYE TRACKING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Real-time display Gaze point history, gaze trace, fixation duration, pupil size and ROIs, can be graphically
displayed over stimulus image. Visible to the user and / or the subject for fixed and HMD
options.
Real-time pen plots of X and Y position of gaze, velocity, ocular torsion, pupil width and pupil
aspect ratio.
Allowable head
movement
Fixed and HMD options: Small movements allowed. Subject's pupil and corneal reflection must
remain within the camera image.
Scene camera options: unlimited
Tracking Method Infrared video. Monocular or binocular options. Pupil tracking—Fixed and HMD options =
bright or dark pupil; scene camera options = dark pupil.
Visual range
Fixed options: Horizontal ±44° of visual arc, Vertical± 20° of visual arc
HMD options: tracking will depend on the field of view of the HMD.
Scene camera options, included with the system either: Color 70º horizontal field of view or
B&W 60º horizontal field of view.
Measurement
principle
The user can select between three methods: Pupil only, corneal reflection only, or both together
(both provides greater tolerance to head movements for the fixed and HMD options).
Accuracy*
Approximately 0.25° - 1.0° visual arc
Spatial
resolution*
Approximately 0.15° visual arc
Temporal
resolution
between 60 Hz and 30 Hz, user-selectable
Blink
suppression
Automatic blink detection and suppression
Pupil size
resolution
Measures pupil height and width to better than 0.03 mm instantaneous (no averaging).
Auto threshold
The program scans over the video image for the pupil and / or for the corneal reflection. Little
or no manual adjustment required.
luminance threshold can be adjusted
auto threshold feature provides good threshold levels automatically
Real-time
communication
Same computer: Software Developers Kit (SDK) supplies everything required for seamless
interface between ViewPoint and the program. This includes: DLL with shared memory, .h and
.lib files plus sample source code written in C Language.
Serial port: Sends eye data packets and asynchronous packets equivalent to information in
ASCII data files at rates of up to 56K.
Receive real time data from other programs and store it asynchronously into data files.
AnalogOut option: Selectable unipolar or bipolar voltage ranges: +/- 10, 5, 2.5. Selectable data
items: position of gaze (x,y), pupil (h,w), velocity (dx,dy), and raw pupil, glint or vector data.
TTL capabilities. 2 or 4 channel options.
TTL in/out option: Eight TTL input channels are interfaced to place marker codes into the
ViewPoint data file. Eight TTL output channels that indicate when the position of gaze is inside
ViewPoint region of interest areas ROI-0 to ROI-7.
Ethernet: full real-time synchronization across machines via the Ethernet.
BIOPAC Hardware | EYE TRACKING SYSTEMS | Page 4 - 5
Updated: 3.19.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Stimulus
Presentation
Pictures and movies can be displayed in full stimulus windows or in user specified ROIs.
Auditory cues can be integrated. Gaze contingent stimulus presentation via state logic.
Data recorded
Data is stored in ASCII files.
Eye data: X, Y position of gaze, pupil height and width, ocular torsion, delta time, total time,
and regions of interest (ROI).
Asynchronous records include: State transition markers, key presses, data from other programs.
Calibration
Fixed and HMD options: ViewPoint starts in a roughly calibrated state that is adequate for
determining screen quadrants or other relative movement measurement such as objective
preference-of-looking tasks.
Scene camera options: Calibration is performed relative to the pixels of the CCD array, not the
image content. This is analogous to calibrating relative to the CRT screen and not the image
displayed on it.
New subject setup time between 1-5 minutes. For accurate position of gaze, calibration is
required only once per subject—settings can be stored and reused each time a subject returns.
Easy Slip Correction feature and re-presentation of stray calibration points.
System
requirements:
OS: Windows 7/Vista or XP
Machine: Fixed and HMD options—Pentium compatible
Scene camera options—2.8 GHz Pentium or higher, or
Athlon XP 2800+ or higher
Fee-based consulting for integration can be provided.
These eye tracking systems use Arrington Research® technology and include cables required to interface to a
BIOPAC MP system—MP150 or MP100 data acquisition unit and AcqKnowledge software.
BIOPAC Hardware | EYE TRACKING SYSTEMS | Page 5 - 5
Updated: 3.19.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
CAMERA SYSTEMS - MULTI-SUBJECT VIDEO MONITORING
Multi-Subject Video Monitoring Systems are available with Four or Eight Cameras
Camera System 4 (CAMSYS4) and Camera System 8 (CAMSYS8) include everything needed to record 4-8 channels of video
data for integration with existing MP150 System and AcqKnowledge software.*
The Camera Systems record multiple subjects or camera angles and AcqKnowledge media functionality synchronizes the video to
any physiological data being recorded with the MP150 Research System. The cameras work well in low-light conditions, making
them very well-suited for long-term recordings, sleep studies, animal studies, and more.
View the video capture window and physiology in AcqKnowledge in real-time during recording—and scroll through the linked
data in either the AcqKnowledge graph file or video playback viewer for review and analysis. Scrolling through one file will
automatically advance the linked file to the same location.
During recording, the video capture window is capable of displaying all camera views at once in a stacked display. The included
multiplexer allows the user to toggle between cameras, or cycle through all views. This allows the researcher to focus on a
particular camera view during recording when necessary, and then easily revert back to the stacked camera view.
*Camera Systems work with AcqKnowledge Version 4.1 or above,
Windows Operating System only.
NOTE: A FireWire connection is required to use all CAMSYS Packages.
CAMSYS4
Four Camera System
CAMSYS8
Eight Camera System
CAMSYSUPG
System Upgrade
NEW CAMSYS Video
Monitoring Packages from
BIOPAC interface to the
MP150 Research System
with AcqKnowledge!
Upgrade a CAMSYS4
four camera system to
a CAMSYS8 eight
camera system.
Components
Cameras
Tripods
Gooseneck Adapter
Camera Power Splitter
General Power Splitter
8 Channel Multiplexer
A/D Converter
FireWire Cable Options
4
4
4
1 to 4 splitter
1 to 2 splitter
included
included
included
8
8
8
1 to 8 splitter
1 to 2 splitter
included
included
included
4
4
4
1 to 8 splitter
—
—
—
—
For a video demo/tutorial of Camera System setup and operation, click here.
BIOPAC Hardware | CAMERA SYSTEMS | Page 1 - 4
Updated: 10.21.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
VIDEO MONITORING APPLICATIONS
Exercise Physiology
Examine ventilation, oxygen uptake, carbon dioxide production, biopotentials, temp., and biomechanical signals
simultaneously. Record wirelessly with BioNomadix.
Psychophysiology
Record BP, ECG, EDA, EMG, EEG, EOG, RSP, etc. Interface to stimulus presentation programs and use automated
analysis routines to easily score and analyze data.
Remote Monitoring
BioNomadix modules provide high quality, full-bandwidth data for a variety of signals—ECG, EEG, EGG, EMG, EOG,
PPG, RSP, SKT, Accelerometry, Cardiac Output and Gyro.
Sleep Studies
Long term recordings with up to 16 channels of data. Record EEG, EOG, EMG, respiration, temp., sound, limb position
and more. Filter out EEG frequencies to score sleep stages.
Virtual Reality
Synchronize events from a virtual world with physiological data from an MP150 system. Use feedback loops for greater
control and automation—change the VR world in real time.
For tips on synchronizing video data, see Application Note 270
.
CAMERA SYSTEM UPGRADE - CAMSYSUPG
The CAMSYSUPG package comes with four additional cameras, tripod stands, gooseneck adapters, and required cables to
upgrade a CAMSYS4 package to the equivalent of a CAMSYS8 package.
CAMSYSUPG Package
CAMSYSUPG Upgrade from 4 to 8 Camera System Contains:
• 4 x Cameras (see additional camera specs below)
• 4 Tripod stands (1-2 meter range)
• 4 x 19" black gooseneck adapters for tripod stands
• Power Splitter (1 female to 8 male 5.5 mm x 2.1 mm)
BIOPAC Hardware | CAMERA SYSTEMS | Page 2 - 4
Updated: 10.21.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
ADDITIONAL CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS
1/4" Color CMOS Image Sensor
Cable Length: 60'
420 TV Lines, Horizontal
6 mm Lens
Signal: NTSC
Night Vision Min. Light: 0 Lux (IR On)
IR Irradiation Distance: up to 30'
Operation Temperature: -5° F ~ 120° F
Power: 12 V DC
Power Supply: 12 V 1500 mA 4 Port
ADDITIONAL MULTIPLEXER SPECIFICATIONS
Supported Resolution NTSC: 720 (H) x 480 (V)
8 channel video signal input, 1 Vp-p, 75 Ohms
Video Output
Audio Input 4 channel audio input (RCA)
Audio Output 1 channel audio output (RCA)
Power Consumption 5 W (400 mA)
Operation Temperature -10 to 60
Operational Humidity within 85% RH
Power Supply: DC 12 V
Dimension 210 mm (L) x 130 mm (W) x 40 mm (H)
BIOPAC Hardware | CAMERA SYSTEMS | Page 3 - 4
Updated: 10.21.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
1. Tripod Assembly (for each tripod)
A. Attach Gooseneck to Tripod
2. Cable Connections (for each camera)
A. Connect End #1 of 18 m Cable to Camera
3. Computer Connections
A. Connect Multiplexer to Computer
To Power Splitter
MULTIPLEXER (back panel)
GOOSENECK
ADAPTER
CAMERA
To Multiplexer (C)
Attach Gooseneck
Adapter to Top of
Tripod Stand
End #1
CBL216
End #2
Connect Video Out
cable (BNC to RCA)
from Multiplexer to
A/D Converter
18 METER CAMERA CABLE
B.
TRIPOD
B.
CBL217
Attach Camera to Gooseneck
CAMERA
Attach Camera to
screw on end of
Gooseneck adapter
Connect Camera and Multiplexer to Power Splitters
Connect to
AC150A
Power Supply
and Outlet
Connect to Power
Cable for Multiplexer
Connect Plugs
from Camera
Cable End #2 to
Power Splitter
Connect Power Splitters
End #2
C.
A/D CONVERTER
Choose appropriate
FireWire cable for
connection between
A/D converter and
your computer.
• 6 pin to 4 pin
cable requires
included AC
Adapter.
• 6 pin to 6 pin - no
AC adapter
needed.
• 6 pin to 9 pin - no
AC adapter needed
Connect End #2 of 18 m Cable to Multiplexer
MULTIPLEXER (back panel)
End #2
Connect cable from End #2 of each
camera cable to back of Multiplexer.
**Once Camera System connections are completed, select cameras from the Media Menu in AcqKnowledge. Next, synchronize the cameras with the
MP150 System using OUT103 LED light. For more information on synchronization, see Application Note 270 available on BIOPAC online Support page.
BIOPAC Hardware | CAMERA SYSTEMS | Page 4 - 4
Updated: 10.21.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
CAM-HFR-A HIGH FRAME RATE CAMERA
Tightly synchronize high frame rate video—up to 100 FPS—with physiological data recorded with a
BIOPAC MP150 Research System.
Included Components
• High Frame Rate Camera (CAM-HFR-A)
• Camera Lens, 6 mm (LENS-CAM-A)
• GigE Network Interface Card (ETHCARD3)
• CAT6 Ethernet Cable (CBLETH3)
• AC Power Supply, cord and Trigger Cable (AC300A and CBLHFR)
• Camera Tripod Kit with Mount (TRIPOD-KIT-CAM)
Requires Windows-based computer and AcqKnowledge 4.3.1 or above for Windows to support GigE
camera; does not require auxiliary synchronization methods.
Use the High Frame Rate Camera System to capture precise movement activity at 100 frames-per-second
(640 x 480 resolution) in conjunction with other recorded physiological variables.
With CAM-HFR-A and AcqKnowledge media tools, it’s possible to obtain synchronization within 1 video frame
(10 ms) between physiological data and video data, running at a rate of 100 frames per second, up to the
computer’s memory capacity. This very high performance video recording option incorporates automatic
synchronizing between the video data and the physiological data, so no external synchronization marker is
required. Furthermore, the high speed camera in CAM-HFR-A can be controlled from AcqKnowledge for
exposure times as short as 1 ms, running at 100 frames per second. This combination of high frame rate,
automatic synchronization, and precise control over camera exposure times results in the ability to precisely
characterize physical activity in relation to simultaneously recorded physiological data, such as EMG,
Acceleration, Goniometry, Respiration, and more.
Media functionality allows users to capture and playback video and synchronize it with physiological information
from an MP device. The key functionality is the strong link between the video and data cursor when physiological
data graphs and associated video are reviewed in post-acquisition mode; changing the selection in the graph
window will automatically jump the video to the time corresponding to the cursor position in the physiological
data graph. The reverse connection is also in place where scrolling through the video will move the data cursor to
the corresponding point in the physiological data graph.
Data streams from the video digitizer and the MP unit are automatically synchronized. In this manner—there is no
requirement that the user create a visible synchronization marker to align physiological data with video. The
combined CAM-HFR-A and AcqKnowledge System is very simple to use!
BIOPAC Hardware | CAM-HFR-A | Page 1 - 5
Updated: 9.4.2014
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
AcqKnowledge 4.3.1 and above automatically recognizes the HFR camera and simplifies setup for tight synchronization
The video capture field is a function of the lens placed on the high-speed camera. BIOPAC has included a high
quality Navitar lens, suitable for nearly all sports science and exercise physiology applications. The provided Cmount lens will permit a 1.8 meter high x 2.4 meter wide field of view at a camera distance of 2.5 meters.
To perform close-up videos of heads, hands or feet, simply pull the camera in towards the subject. To capture
movement of many subjects at once, just pull the camera away from the subjects. For exotic measurements, as
when videoing a distant subject or performing an extreme close-up, simply switch out the provided lens for the
appropriate C-mount lens.
The camera iris control can be adjusted to accommodate a range of ambient lighting conditions. Furthermore, the
camera exposure time can be controlled from the AcqKnowledge software to allow for the sharpest imaging
possible under fast subject movement conditions. When using short exposure times, video frames will hold very
crisp images to allow for precise identification of subject position as a function of simultaneously collected
physiological data.
System Requirements
Recommended
Minimum
Core i7 Quad Core or Xeon E3/E5 processor, 2.40 GHz
Core 2 Duo processor, 2.13 GHz
8 GB DDR2 memory, dedicated card for video capture
4 GB DDR2 memory
RAID0/RAID10 with enterprise grade “RAID Edition” hard disks,
or Non-RAID 10,000 RPM (such as VelociRaptor,) or 15,000
RPM, (such as Seagate Cheetah)
> 125 MB/s sequential write speed
SAS/SATA III, 6 GB/s, 7200 RPM
> 90 MB/s sequential write speed
•
Windows AcqKnowledge 4.3.1 or above is required for high frame rate camera support.
•
To insure stable 100 fps frame rate, use the provided GigE Network Interface Card.
BIOPAC Hardware | CAM-HFR-A | Page 2 - 5
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Specifications
Resolution horizontal/vertical:
Pixel Size horizontal/vertical:
Frame Rate/Resolution:
Mono/Color:
Interface:
Video Output Format:
Communications:
Synchronization & Triggering:
Optics:
Field of View:
Pixel Bit Depth:
Synchronization:
Exposure Control:
Housing Size (L x W x H) in mm:
Housing Temperature:
Lens Mount:
Digital Input:
Digital Output:
Power Requirements:
Power Consumption (typical):
Power Consumption PoE:
Weight (typical):
Conformity:
Sensor Vendor:
Sensor Name:
Sensor Technology:
Sensor Size (optical):
Sensor Type:
Sensor Size (mm):
Tripods:
658 pixels x 492 pixels
9.9 µm x 9.9 µm
25, 50 or 100 fps at 640 x 480 resolution
Color
Gigabit Ethernet
Mono 8, Bayer BG 8, Bayer BG 12, Bayer BG 12 Packed, YUV
4:2:2 Packed, YUV 4:2:2 (YUYV) Packed
GigE (system includes GigE ethernet card for Windows based
processor)
Camera is frame-rate controlled from MP150 System via
included triggering cable
Navitar 2/3" lens, 6 mm, 1.4 f-stop with manual focus, iris and
locking screws, C-mount
Nominally 1.8 meters high x 2.4 meters wide at 2.5 meters
distant from camera
12 bits
External trigger, free-run, Ethernet connection
Programmable via the camera API, external trigger signal
42 x 29 x 29
0° C – 50° C
C-mount, CS-mount
1
1
PoE or 12 VDC
3.3 W
3.6 W
90 g
CE, RoHS, GenICam, IP30, UL, FCC, PoE 802.3 af
Sony
ICX414
Progressive Scan CCD, global shutter
1/2 inch
CCD
6.52 mm x 4.89 mm
Standard tripod 54” and mini-tripod 6¼”
BIOPAC Hardware | CAM-HFR-A | Page 3 - 5
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Connecting Camera Hardware:
Before you begin:
Make sure the camera drivers and the provided ETHCARD3 Network Interface Card are installed.
1. Connect the CBLHFR 6-pin-connector to the camera input.
2. Connect the female end of the CBLHFR connector to the AC300A power supply adapter cable.
3. Plug the AC300A power supply cord into wall socket.
4. Connect the Ethernet cable between the camera’s Ethernet port and the ETHCARD3 network interface
card supplied with your system. Attach the 6 mm lens to camera (included as LENS-CAM-A).
Launch the pylon IP Configuration Tool from the Desktop shortcut to verify camera/network connection. If
successful, the camera’s network settings will appear in the IP configuration window as shown below. (Make
sure the IP configuration is set to DHCP.)
NOTE: If the camera’s network settings don’t appear in the pylon IP Tool Configuration window, click the
“Refresh” button and highlight the camera device from the list at the top of the Configuration Tool.
If the camera’s network settings still don’t appear, or appear in the pylon IP Configuration Tool window as
“unreachable”, reset the IP configuration to Static IP.
BIOPAC Hardware | CAM-HFR-A | Page 4 - 5
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
Set Up Camera Configuration in AcqKnowledge Software:
1. Launch AcqKnowledge and
select Media > Set Up. The
Basler camera should appear as
selected in the “Video” list.
2. Check the “Video” option (and
“Audio” if sound is to be
recorded).
3. Click the “Output” tab and type in
a media file name.
4. Click “Browse” and choose a
format (*.wmv or *.avi) and
directory for the new media file.
5. Click “Save”.
6. Click “OK” to bring up the Video
Capture Viewer. This is useful for
determining proper camera
positioning, lighting, etc…
7. To access the “Video” properties
(Exposure or Gain controls,) go
to Media > Set Up and click the
“Configure” button.
NOTE: The “Configure” button is
not active until the Media
> Set Up dialog is
dismissed with “OK” and
reopened.
8. Click the “HW Trigger” tab to:
•
Use the MP150 Stimulator
to trigger and synchronize
the camera recording with
AcqKnowledge.
•
Set the camera frame rate.
(25, 50, or 100 fps.)
For Support contact: support@biopac.com or visit the Support page at www.biopac.com
BIOPAC Hardware | CAM-HFR-A | Page 5 - 5
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
APPENDIX
SHIELD DRIVE OPERATION
ECG100C
EGG100C
EOG100C
MCE100C*
EEG100C
EMG100C
ERS100C
TEL100C
The shield drive for BIOPAC biopotential front-end differential amplifiers is developed as the arithmetic mean of
the voltages sensed on the positive and negative differential inputs with respect to Ground. Given that interfering
noise sources (usually 50 Hz / 60 Hz) nearly always appear as high level voltage signals of similar value on the
positive and negative differential inputs, creating a shield drive for the positive and negative input leads will act to
increase the amplifier’s Common Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR) via capacitance reduction of the differential
input to its respective shield. Because the shield drive is introduced identically to the differential inputs, additive
noise from the shield drive will have a tendency to cancel out due to the operation of the differential amplifier
front end.
Generally, it’s helpful to have an active shield drive for interfering noise reduction. However, in special cases, it
may be worthwhile to ground the cable shields connecting to the amplifier’s differential inputs or to dispense with
shielding altogether. Any BIOPAC biopotential front-end differential amplifier can be user-adapted to satisfy
these special cases; please contact BIOPAC Systems, Inc. for details.
* The MCE100C shield drive is independent for both (Vin+) and (Vin-) inputs.
BIOPAC Hardware | Shield Drive Operation | Page 1 - 1
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
APPENDIX
AMPLIFIER FREQUENCY RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
The following frequency response plots illustrate the frequency response selections available on the indicated
amplifier modules. LP is low pass, HP is high pass, and the N suffix indicates the notch setting. Modules (except
for the DA100C) can be set for 50 or 60 Hz notch options, depending on the destination country.
Setting
Modules
0.1 Hz LP
EGG100C
1 Hz LP
EGG100C, GSR100C, SKT100C
3Hz LP
PPG100C, RSP100C
10 Hz LP
DA100C, EBI100C, GSR100C, PPG100C, RSP100C, SKT100C
35 Hz LPN (with 50 Hz notch)
ECG100C, EEG100C, EOG100C, TEL100C
35 Hz LPN (with 60 Hz notch)
ECG100C, EEG100C, EOG100C, TEL100C
100 Hz LP
EBI100C, EEG100C, EOG100C
150 Hz LP
ECG100C
100 Hz HPN (with 50 Hz notch)
EMG100C, ERS100C, MCE100C
100 Hz HPN (with 60 Hz notch)
EMG100C, ERS100C, MCE100C
300 Hz LP
DA100C
500 Hz LP
EMG100C, TEL100C
3,000 Hz LP
ERS100C, MCE100C
5000 Hz LP
DA100C, EMG100C
10 kHz LP
ERS100C
30 kHz LP
MCE100C
See also: Sample Plots
BIOPAC Hardware | Frequency Response Characteristics | Page 1 - 6
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
100C SERIES
100C Series Amplifers - Sample Frequency Response Plots
0.1 Hz LP
EGG100C
1 Hz LP
EGG100C
GSR100C
SKT100C
3 Hz LP
PPG100C
RSP100C
BIOPAC Hardware | Frequency Response Characteristics | Page 2 - 6
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
100C Series Amplifers - Sample Frequency Response Plots
10 Hz LP
DA100C
EBI100C
GSR100C
PPG100C
RSP100C
SKT100C
35 Hz LPN
(with 50 Hz notch enabled)
ECG100C
EEG100C
EOG100C
TEL100C
35 Hz LPN
(with 60 Hz notch enabled)
ECG100C
EEG100C
EOG100C
TEL100C
BIOPAC Hardware | Frequency Response Characteristics | Page 3 - 6
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
100C Series Amplifers - Sample Frequency Response Plots
100 Hz LP
EBI100C
EEG100C
EOG100C
NICO100C
150 Hz LP
ECG100C
100 Hz HPN
(with 50 Hz notch enabled)
EMG100C
ERS100C
MCE100C
BIOPAC Hardware | Frequency Response Characteristics | Page 4 - 6
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
100C Series Amplifers - Sample Frequency Response Plots
100 Hz HPN
(with 60 Hz notch enabled)
MCE100C
EMG100C
ERS100C
MCE100C
300 Hz LP
DA100C
500 Hz LP
EMG100C
TEL100
3,000 Hz LP
ERS100C
MCE100
BIOPAC Hardware | Frequency Response Characteristics | Page 5 - 6
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
100C Series Amplifers - Sample Frequency Response Plots
5000 Hz LP
DA100C
EMG100C
10 kHz LP
ERS100C
30 kHz LP
MCE100C
BIOPAC Hardware | Frequency Response Characteristics | Page 6 - 6
Updated: 9.4.2014
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
APPENDIX
AMPLIFIER MODULE FILTER RESPONSE TIMES
The MP series amplifier modules incorporate a variety of filtering options. The low pass filtering options have an
effect on the signal response time, which is sometimes referred to as signal delay.
Signal delay is often plotted as the function “group delay” versus frequency. This type of plot shows the typical
delay the filter will have for a wide range of frequencies. The group delay plot is the derivative of the filter phase
plot with respect to frequency. If the filter is perfectly linear phase, the group delay plot will be a straight
horizontal line, because the derivative of a constant (linear) slope is a constant.
In practice it’s often difficult to utilize a group delay plot to get a quick and simple handle on essential filter signal
delay, unless one is experienced in reading such plots. Instead, it’s typically better to show the filter response to a
well-understood input signal, such as a step function.
The following plots illustrate the delay times for a variety of low pass filter settings.
10 Hz Low Pass Filter – 4 pole Besselworth
35 Hz Low Pass Notch Filter – 4 pole Besselworth – Notch at 60 Hz
MP Research System | Amplifier Module Response Times
| Page 1 - 2
Updated:11.15.2012
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
100 Hz Low Pass Filter – 4 pole Besselworth
500 Hz Low Pass Filter – 4 pole Besselworth
Note that signal delay is proportional to the cut-off frequency for any particular 4 pole low pass Besselworth
filter. The one minor exception is the 35 Hz LPN filter, because it consists of a 4 pole Besselworth filter and a 60
Hz Notch (band reject) filter. This additional filter adds a small additional delay.
Step Response Signal Delay (approximate)
Filter Type:
Delay at 50% (approximate):
10 Hz LP
30 ms
35 Hz LP
11 ms
100 Hz LP
3 ms
500 Hz LP
0.6 ms
MP Research System | Amplifier Module Response Times
| Page 2 - 2
Updated:11.15.2012
HARDWARE GUIDE
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
BioNomadix Transmitter-Receiver Modules - Sample Frequency Response Plots
Note BioNomadix frequency responses are identified either by -3 dB or -6 dB inflection points,
which are representative of 0.707 or 0.5 respectively of the mid band gain.
BN-ECG2
1 Hz HP
35 Hz LP
0.05 Hz HP
150 Hz LP
BN-EOG2
0.005 Hz HP
35 Hz LP
0.005 Hz HP
100 Hz LP
MP Research System | BioNomadix Sample Plots | Page 1 - 3
Updated: 7.11.2012
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
BioNomadix Transmitter-Receiver Modules - Sample Frequency Response Plots
BN-EMG2
10 Hz HP
500 Hz LP
BioNomadix EMG module Frequency Response (Maximum)
5 Hz HP
0
-5
500 Hz LP
Amplitude (db)
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35
-40
-45
0.0001
EMGA X-1 (STDDEV)
EMGA X-1 (P-P)
0.001
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
Frequency (Hz)
BN-EGG2
0.005 HP
1 Hz LP
MP Research System | BioNomadix Sample Plots | Page 2 - 3
Updated: 7.11.2012
info@biopac.com
support@biopac.com
www.biopac.com
HARDWARE GUIDE
BioNomadix Transmitter-Receiver Modules - Sample Frequency Response Plots
BN-EEG2
BioNomadix EEG module Frequency Response (Factory Settings)
0
0.5 HP
-5
35 Hz LP
Amplitude (db)
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35
-40
EEGA X-1 (stddev)
EEGA X-1 (P-P)
-45
0.0001
0.001
0.01
0.1
1
Frequency (Hz)
10
100
1000
BioNomadix EEG module Frequency Response (Maximum)
0.1 HP
0
-5
100 Hz LP
Amplitude (db, P-P)
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35
-40
EEGA X-1
EEGB Y -13
EEGA X-1 STDDEV
-45
0.0001
0.001
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
Frequency (Hz)
MP Research System | BioNomadix Sample Plots | Page 3 - 3
Updated: 7.11.2012
Download PDF
Similar pages